1. Operations Manuals
1.1. Utility
1.1.1. About ManEx
1.1.1.1. Software Support & Update Services
Enter Manex.exe/Utility/About ManEx 
 
The following screen will appear:
 
 
 
To view the Annual Software Technical Service Agreement depress the Software Support and Update Services button.
 
 
 
 
 
1.1.1.2. Purchase Agreement
Enter Manex.exe/Utility/About ManEx 
 
The following screen will appear:
 
 
 
To view the Software License Agreement Terms & Conditions depress the Purchase Agreement button.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1.1.2. License & Modules Information
Enter Manex.exe/Utility/License & Modules Information
 
The following screen will appear:
 
1.2. Sales Management
1.2.1. Sales Order Management
1.2.1.1. Sales Order Management
1.2.1.1.1. Prerequisites for SO Mgmt

Entering the Sales Order Module

There are a number of functions regarding Sales Order Entry that should be established at the initial installation of ManEx.  
 
The following Prerequisites are required for Entering a New Sales Order:
 
  • After activation, "Sales Order Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

  • The Numbering System for Sales Orders and Work Orders (manual or automatic entry)  - Manual entry will require that the user keep and maintain separate written logs of number usage.

  • Customer Information (must be completed before initiating a Sales Order).

  • The Customer Product Numbers (for assemblies) must be established in the Inventory Control Mgmt module, along with a BOM in the Integrated BOM & AVL module (must be completed before initiating a Sales Order). 
  • Sales Type & Price Itemization  must be setup.
  • If the Sales Order is being used to sell inventory from the stockroom,  then the inventory part numbers must be setup in the Inventory Control Mgmt module.  (User may also enter non-inventory items on a Sales Order with no prerequisite requirements).

Optional Prerequisites for Entering a New Sales Order:
 
 
 
1.2.1.1.2. Introduction for SO Mgmt

The Sales Order Module is used to record the details of the user’s Customer Purchase Order.  It is a translation of the customer’s order (or contract) to deliver goods into the user’s format and language.  This is done so that the user’s various departments can refer to a common format rather than have to adjust to a variety of customers’ formats. The Sales Order should reflect exactly what the customer ordered – the part numbers, the quantities, the delivery schedules, the price, the terms and conditions of the order, and any special charges.  Other important information to be included (besides the customer’s name) is the name of the contact at the customer, the purchase order number (the contract), whether or not the purchase order or contract has been agreed upon by acknowledgment of the Sales Order.

The user initiates the internal flow of operations by completing the Sales Order.  This order then is used to track the progress of the customer order, account for costs and revenues, determine the manufacturing performance to commitment, define the company backlog of sales, schedule workloads, and in general direct the activities and operations once the customer’s order is accepted.

The Sales Order module serves several functions relating to orders:

  1. to view and review an existing order.
  2. to edit an existing order.
  3. to add a new order.

To review and edit an order, the user FINDs the order to display it on the screen. There are a number of ways that ManEx provides for the user to aid in locating a specific order, which are discussed later. Once an order is found and displayed, the order may be EDITED to make desired changes to the order.

To create a new order, the user performs the ADD function.

Once in the Sales Order, the user may add or edit the products being delivered to the customer, including the quantity. The deliveries may consist of products, (assemblies made by the user), and/or parts (from the user’s inventory), and/or miscellaneous items (non-inventory items or services). The sales order program will determine pricing from the pricing module, if the part has had pricing entered. Otherwise, the user must add the pricing as the products are entered.  If the Pricing module doesn’t have the part entered, the user must also select the Sales Type.

The user must then establish a schedule for shipping the product. The schedule may be for a single shipment, or scheduled out over a period of time with the same or different quantities for each delivery. In ManEx, there is also the provision for automatic scheduling, which simplifies the scheduling if the user wishes to ship a fixed portion of an order each day, week or month.

The user may then verify that the Bill-to and Ship-to information is correct. It will be entered automatically in the Sales Order from the Customer Information module, using the default values. If more than one address exists for the customer, the user may change this information to match the individual order, if desired.

The user may also create work orders for the product FROM the sales order module. If the product is scheduled for multiple deliveries, the user may elect to make one order for all parts, or spread out the deliveries over multiple work orders.  We do not allow the Work Order to be released within the Sales Order module.  The Work Order module is a very valuable feature and should not be by passed.  The purpose of the WO Release is for various departments to fulfill their part of the task of releasing the WO on-line to avoid doing it manually.

 

1.2.1.1.3. Fields & Definitions for SO Mgmt
1.2.1.1.3.1. Sales Order Tab



Sales Order Tab field definitions

Depressing this button will display the complete history of all changes made to this order. It will list the Date/Time of Change, By User, SO Total at time of change, and List of Changes recorded.  The following changes are recorded when a sales order is saved, if a new sales order is created, or if an existing sales order is edited.  
For the header level - Customer PO#, Billing and Shipping Address changes, SO status changes, Approved and acknowledge status changed, Acknowledge document name changes, recognizes if notes have been changed (SO Note, SO Acknowledgement Footnote),
but will not record the differences between them.  This will be the users responsibility to record and track the modifications within the note fields.   
For the detail level - New item, removed item, quantity changes, status for the item changes.   
For the schedule level - New/removed schedule line, qty scheduled, date scheduled. 
For the price level - New price line, removed price line, price description, price, sales type.  
Sales Order This is the number assigned to the Sales Order.
Order Date

This is the date of the Sales Order.

Customer

This is the Name of the Customer.

SO Status

This is the status of the Sales Order, Open or Closed.

The main purpose of this button is to link a scanned copy of the signed acknowledgement from the customer to the SO for records, so you have proof linked right to the sales order that it was acknowledged by the customer.
Buyer

This is the name of the Customer’s purchasing agent.

Customer PO

This is the Customer’s Purchase Order Number.

SO Approved This field will only be displayed on this screen if the "SO Approval Required" box is check within the Sales Order Defaults & Sales Discount Type module.
Order Ack

A check in this box means the Customer’s Purchase Order has been accepted by the user.  Below the check mark is the date of acknowledgement and the initials of the user who acknowledged the Customer’s Purchase Order.   Note: Without this check mark, the order can’t go forward in the system.

Last Modified by This will display the date and initials of the last person that made changes to the Sales Order
Ln

The Sales Order Line Item Number.

Part Number

The number the user has assigned to the part or product.

Rev

The revision number pertaining to the part number.

Class

The classification to which the part number belongs.

Type

The type within the classification to which the part number belongs.

Description The description of the part number.
Ord Qty

The quantity of that part number ordered by the Customer.

Back Order

The un-shipped portion of the part number.

Shipped Qty

The amount of the order already shipped.

UOM

Unit of Measure.

Reserved Qty

The amount of the part which has been reserved for THIS Sales Order. This means that no other order can ship the amount reserved. If you enter a number in this field, the following selection screen will appear:

Select one location from the list.  If a part is reserved in SO, and also reserved to a project that's linked to the SO, the system should pick the parts that are reserved by the SO first, if not enough to ship, then take the parts that are reserved by the project.

Extended

If the Pricing Screen has been filled in, this will be the amount that the user will charge the customer for this line item.It is the sales quantity multiplied by the price for 1 unit.

Project Number Select a Project number from the pulldown if this record is to be associated to a project.  To remove the Project number, right click on the field.   If parts are allocated to a project and the project is selected in SO for the SO item, when the part is shipped, those allocated to that project parts will be available to be shipped.  After the project is selected in SO, the new created WO will link to that project.
Line Status

This is the status for the line item highlighted on Sales Order: (Standard; Priority-1; Priority-2; Admin Hold; Mfgr Hold; or Cancel) 

The system defaults the line item to Standard.  Standard is the ordinary Sales order line item status.  Priority is set up as a make ahead of all other orders, Priority-1;  being the most important and Priority-2;  the second most important.   Admin Hold is an order on hold due to customer credit, etc (this will NOT interfere with the kitting or production but WILL prevent shipping).  Mfg Hold will NOT interfere with the kitting or production but WILL prevent shipping.  

The user may put orders on Admin or Manufacturing Hold without affecting MRP  If user wants to prevent MRP from giving Release WO demands for line items with Admin or Mfgr Hold status they will need to check the MRP on hold checkbox.  

MRP On Hold

This option gives the users the ability to turn OFF the function of the Sales Order line item driving the demands for the MRP and just use Work Order for buying components.  If this box is checked on the SO, MRP will instruct you to cancel all open PO(s) for the components needed for this SO and to cancel any WO demands linked to this SO. 

There is an option in System Setup/Sales Order Defaults that will automatically check the box when adding a SO Line item.  When using the system in this mode if you create a WO Manually, the MRP will tell you to cancel the WO since there is no SO demand.  This can be solved one of two ways:

Use the MPS module(Forecast)  or Open/create Firm planned WO's so the MRP will not keep instructing you to cancel the order.

This is a perfect solution for customers who wants to build products based on forecast or promised to maintain certain amount of FGI in inventory.  They can use the MPS module to accomplish this and use the SO to ship products from FGI inventory.

SI  (Source Inspection)  This field has been added for future use.  It is not linked to any other modules at this time.   
FA  (First Article) This field has been added for future use.  It is not linked to any other modules at this time.
Fcst Item The Forecast checkbox is defaulted as True whether or not there actually is a forecast.  By doing this, we minimize the possibility of the MRP double ordering parts for the SO. If there is a forecast, then the SO will be subtracted from it.   If there is NOT a forecast, the SO will drive MRP as usual. Users can change to un-checked in the Sales order/Work order if desired.
SO Amount

The sum of the Extended column.

Primary Tax The Primary tax pertaining to the sale.  If foreign tax is checked in the Customer Information module. 
Secondary Tax The Secondary tax pertaining to the sale.  If foreign tax is checked in the Customer Information module.
Tax

The total tax pertaining to the sale.

Discount

The sales discount allowed to this customer.

SO Total

The total of the Sales Order.This is adding the Tax to and subtracting the Discount from the SO Amount.


For the line item highlighted:

 

Depressing this button will bring up the the following message:

 

This message is for a MAKE part only. This message will display the Longest Lead Time based on the following:  

Component Purchase Lead Time    1 week (5 days)

Product Kitting Lead Time              2 days

Product Production Lead Time       3 days

Total Sales Order Lead Time        10 days
 
Note:   The SO lead-time does NOT calculate the purchase lead-times of buy parts associated to sub assemblies. It will consider the kitting and production lead-times of the make part itself along with any buy components on the top level assembly in calculating the longest lead-time.  The system assumes that the sub-assembly is complete at the time your kitting it for the top assembly.

 

Depressing this button will bring up the following screen.

 

 

For the Work Order number highlighted, the WIP quantity, due date, status and the Work Center location will display.


 FGI Qty
This is the quantity currently on the floor ready to ship.


Depress this button to add a note for the line item highlighted, this note is for internal use only.  This note will be printed on the Sales Order Acknowledgement report but will NOT be printed on Packing List or Invoice.  This note will be displayed on screen when viewing the Packing List and/or Invoice.



Directive Buttons:

This button starts the process to add a product (assembly) to the order.

This button starts the process to add a part to the order.This represents inventory which the user has purchased for the purpose of re-sale.

This button starts the process to add a miscellaneous charge to the Sales Order.
  See Article #1138 for more detail
  See Article #1138 for more detail
This button will delete the line highlighted.
This button starts the process to create a Work Order from the Sales Order screen for the line item highlighted.

1.2.1.1.3.2. Schedule Tab

Schedule Tab field definitions

Customer

The name of the customer.

Ln

The Sales Order Line Item Number.

Part Number

The number the user has assigned to the part or product.

Rev

The revision number pertaining to the part number.

Class

The classification to which the part number belongs.

Type

The type within the classification to which the part number belongs.

Description

The description of the part number.

Delivery Schedule Section:

Due Date

The date the assembly is to be received by the customer.

Ship Date

The date the assembly is due to the shipping department.

Commit Date The date the product is due to the customer 
Shipped Qty

The amount already shipped.

Scheduled Qty

The amount to be completed by the indicated due date.

Total

The sum of the scheduled column and the sum of the shipped column.

Buttons:

 

To add a line to the schedule.

 

To delete the highlighted item.

Auto Scheduling Section:

1st Due Date

This is the 1st date due to the Customer.

Delivery Qty

The Delivery Qty screen allows the user to divide the shipment into multiple deliveries of equal parts. For example, if the order is for a total of 100 pieces, and the customer wishes delivery to be at the rate of 10 units each day, then the delivery quantity should be entered as 10.

The next box allows the user to select the delivery intervals. The options are by day (DY), week (WK) (7 calendar days) or month (MO) (30 calendar days) days. After selecting the delivery interval, pressing the SAVE button creates a line for each delivery date in the sequence requested.  

Note:  In using the term Weekly and Monthly, it doesn't matter what the holidays or what the weekends are (i.e. that they are not excluded from the total time of a week or month), but are considered when the final date is calculated

This is depressed if the user wants the system to set up the scheduling using the Delivery Schedule Default Days which are setup in the  Delivery Schedule Default Setup module.  

Transit Days

This is the number of days from the user’s dock to the Customer’s dock. This will default in from the Customer Information module.  If the Customer transit days are blank or zero in the Customer Information module then the system will take from the Delivery Schedule Default Setup module.

Order Qty

This is the total order for the line item.

Balance

This is the quantity unshipped as of this date.

1.2.1.1.3.3. Pricing Tab

 

Pricing Tab field definitions

Customer

The name of the Customer.

Ln

The Sales Order Line Item Number.

Part Number

The number the user has assigned to the part or product.

Rev

The revision number pertaining to the part number.

Class

The classification to which the part number belongs.

Type

The type within the classification to which the part number belongs.

Description

The description of the part number. 

Price Markup
This information defaults in from the Sales Price List Information module, the percentage markup for the line item.  This field is NOT editable within the Sales Order Mgmt module.
Customer Sales Discount
This information defaults in from the Customer Information module, the sales discount allowed the customer.This field is NOT editable within the Sales Order Mgmt module.


Commissions   Note:   For this information to be displayed on the SO user MUST also have Rights to the Sales Rep Information within the Security module.

NOTE:
The Sales Commission information was added to the system to allow our users to create their own customer commission reports based on the information that is stored within the tables. I would suggest that you consider using Crystal Reports to design the desired Commission report that would best fit your company, using the information stored within the ManEx tables.
 

Sales Rep A list of Sales Representatives Names that get a commission from this product.  The Sales Rep(s) MUST be setup in the Sales Rep Information module.
Amount Each The amount of commission from this product
Depress this button to add a Representative
Highlight a Sales Representative on the list and depress this button to remove their name from the list
Total amount of commission for this product


Description

The description of the line item.

Quantity

The quantity ordered.

Price

The price per unit of this line item.

Extended

This is quantity multiplied by the price.

Totals

This is the sum of the Extended column.

Sales Type

This is the Sales Type as defined in Article #143 .  This information is critical if accounting is installed, because the sales type references the General Ledger account number for the sale.  

 

The 1st account number is the sales number, the 2nd is for the applicable Cost of Goods Sold account number.

Tax

If this box is checked, the sale is subject to tax.  This will default in from the Customer Information module if the Taxable box is checked.   NOTE: If the Taxable box is NOT checked in Customer Information but there is tax setup in the shipping info for the customer you can check this tax box for a specific Sales Order line item.

Lot

If a price is to be assessed as a lot charge rather than as a cost per unit charge, then the user may check (by clicking) the Lot box at the right of the screen. This will take the unit cost as a lot charge for the item without extending the units by the price. This may be used if a flat fee is charged for a number of parts.

 

Depressing this button will allow user to enter additional charges for the product above. These charges may carry a different unit price, and may be of any description.  As the information is completed, the total cost for the line item is carried to the bottom of the box, to be validated with the customer’s purchase order.  A Non-inventory line added on this screen will be invoiced on the first shipment made for this sales order.

 

Depressing this button will delete the highlighted line.

 Total The grand total of the complete sales order

1.2.1.1.3.4. WO List Tab

WO List Tab field definitions

Customer

The name of the Customer.

Ln

The Sales Order Line Item Number.

Part Number

The number the user has assigned to the part or product.

Rev

The revision number pertaining to the part number.

Class

The classification to which the part number belongs.

Type

The type within the classification to which the part number belongs.

Description

The description of the part number.

WO Number

This is the number assigned to the Work Order for the assembly of the product.

W/O Due Date

This is the date that the Work Order is due to be completed.

Build Quantity

This is the quantity to build by the date indicated.

Back Order

This is the un-shipped quantity.

Work Center

For the Work Order highlighted, this is the current work center location.

Quantity

This is the quantity of the Work Order currently in the Work Center.

1.2.1.1.3.5. Billing Tab

Billing Tab field definitions

Customer

The name of the Customer.

Bill To

The Billing address of the Customer.

Credit Status

The Credit Status the Customer has with the user.

Credit Limit

This is the limit the user has for the Customer.

Accounts Receivable

The balance the Customer has in the user’s Accounts Receivable Aging.

Open Orders

This is the sum of all other Open Sales Orders.

Credit Available W/O Ord

This is the net credit available after subtracting A/R balance and the sum of the other open Sales Orders from the Credit Available.

This Order Balance

This is the total amount of this Sales Order.

Credit Available W/Ord

This is the credit available to the customer after considering this Sales Order.  Note:  If the user has selected to hold any shipment over credit limit at the time of the packing list creation, only a supervisor password can release the shipment.The hold at shipment selection is found in the Accounting Setup for Accounts Receivable.(Please refer to the Implementation – Accounting manual.)

Credit Note

This section contains any notes regarding the Customer’s credit.  This field is for internal use only and will NOT be displayed when printing Packing List or Invoice.

1.2.1.1.3.6. Shipping Tab

Shipping Tab field definitions

Customer

This is the name of the customer.

Ship To

This is the Customer’s Ship To address.

Attention

The name of the Customer’s Contact to whom the shipment will be directed.

   Depress this button to Change the Ship To Address
Terms This is the Payment Terms
FOB

This is the point where title passes 

Ship Via

The is the name of the carrier.

Cust Account No

This is the Customer’s account number with the carrier.This would be used where the customer paid the carrier directly for the shipment.

Delivery Time

The is the time by which the shipment should be at the Customer’s address.

1.2.1.1.3.7. Notes Tab

Note Tab field definitions

Customer This is the name of the customer
Sales Order Note Add special notes that pertain to this sales order only.  This note is for internal use only and is not intended to print on Packing List or Invoice.
Sales Order Acknowledgement Footnote Add special notes that you want to print on the sales order acknowlegement.  This note will only print on the Sales Order Acknowledgement report, but will NOT be printed on the Packing List or Invoice.

1.2.1.1.4. How To ..... for SO Mgmt
1.2.1.1.4.1. Find A Sales Order

 

Depress Sales Mgmt/Sales Order Management/Sales Order Management.

 

The following screen will appear:

Depress the Find action button. The following selection screen will be displayed.  To find an existing order select one of the following:  Sales Order NumberCustomer NameCustomer P.O.Work Order Number, or by Product Number.

The user may exit the selection screen without a selection by selecting the X button.

 

When the user elects to find an order by the Sales Order Number, a screen appears listing sales orders in numerical order, along with the Customer Name and purchase order. The user may elect to show only open orders, or all orders. The user selects the sales order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.   

When the user elects to find an order by the Customer Name, a screen appears listing customers in alphabetical order. The user selects the customer by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.  

 

Then a list of all of the selected customer’s orders are shown in numerical order, along with the customer’s name and Purchase Order number. The user may elect to show only open orders, or all orders. The user selects the sales order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.   

When the user elects to find an order by the Customer Purchase Order Number, a screen appears listing open Purchase Orders in numerical order, along with the Sales Order. The user may elect to show only open orders, or all orders. The user selects the Purchase Order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.

 

When the user elects to find an order by the Work Order Number, a screen appears listing Work Orders in numerical order, along with the Sales Order and Customer Purchase Order. The user may elect to show only open orders, or all orders. The user selects the Work Order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.

 

When the user elects to find an order by the Product Number, a screen appears listing part numbers in numerical order, along with the revision, Class, Type and Description.The user selects the Product by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected product.

 

Then a list of all of the Sales Orders for the selected product are shown in numerical order, along with the Customer Name and Customer Purchase Order number. The user may elect to show only open orders, or all orders. The user selects the Sales Order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.

 

Once you have made your choice, the information will be displayed as follows:

Note: When an RMA is created, both the pending receipt of the items from the customer and the subsequent shipment of replacement product to the customer is entered. Reference is made to the original Sales Order and Invoice only to allow the credit memo (when created) to have a place to apply the credit. Otherwise, there is no interface between the Sales Order and the RMA modules. If you were unable to find the Sales Order, try to locate it under the RMA menu item. See RMA Management Module Article #1610 for further assistance.

1.2.1.1.4.2. Edit A Sales Order

Find a Sales Order, it may be edited by selecting the Edit Action button, then entry of the password. All fields available for editing will be enabled for modification.

Sales Order tab -  The user may add a new product, part or miscellaneous item. The user may delete an entire line item. The user may change the quantity ordered, add or change the amount reserved or change the line status. To remove a project number from the project field,by right clicking on the field.   (Note:  If a SO for example has three line items and user deletes only line item 01 user will NOT be able to re-use this line item when adding a new line item to this SO.  The system will use the next line item which would be line item number 04 in this example).  

Schedule tab - For the Line Item selected, the user may add or delete a scheduled delivery, change the 1st Due Date, or the Transit Days.

Pricing tab  - For the Line Item selected, the user may edit the Price, Sales Type, Tax, Lot Charge, Commissions info, Add or Delete a line.    

The Price Markup field is NOT editable within the Sales Order screen. This information defaults in from the Sales Price List Information module.

The Customer Sales Discount field is NOT editable within the Sales Order screen. This information defaults in from the Customer Information module.



WO List  -
  This screen is view only.
 

Billing tab  -  The user may change the Customer address and/or add a Credit Note.

Shipping tab - The user may edit or Add a New Ship To address, select a different Attention, FOB, Ship Via, and/or select a different Delivery Time from the pull down.  Note:  The user is able to edit or change the Cust Account No to match any special Ship Via pertaining to the specific order within the SO Shipping screen without the changes affecting the Customer Information module or any other pre-existing orders.
 

Notes tab - The user may add or change the Sales Order Note and/or the Sales Order Acknowledgement Footnote

At the conclusion of the modification process, the user may either depress the Save  action button to save the changes or depress the Abandon changes action button to cancel changes, located at the top of the screen.
 
The following message will be displayed to the user if a WO is linked to the SO:




NOTE:  The link is for reference only between the two modules and they are still individual records so when any changes are made to either the SO or the WO the change will not update or be carried forward to the other.
 
 
1.2.1.1.4.3. Add A Sales Order

Adding a sales order is accomplished by first selecting the customer, then a product and quantity. Then the user visits additional tab/screens to add more information about the order. The first of these is the Schedule Screen, where the user defines the delivery requirements for the product, then the Pricing Screen. The user should visit the Billing Screen and the Shipping screen to ensure that the defaults established for the customer are appropriate to the order being entered. If the user is visiting this screen to view an existing sales order, they may tab to the WO List screen and view current work orders in process. 

Depress the Add action button.  Enter your password. And the Sales Order Screen will appear. The current calendar date will default in the Order Date field.  This may be changed if desired.
 
 
If the user is using auto-numbering for sales orders, the Sales Order field will be completed by ManEx when the order is saved.
 
The next field to enter is the CUSTOMER. The user may begin entering the name, and ManEx will immediately begin tracking the key-entry to bring up the customer with as few keystrokes as necessary to identify the customer. Or, you may  press on the down arrow adjacent to the field and ManEx will display all of the customers from which to choose for the order.

The SO Status is defaulted to the OPEN status during entry of a new sales order.

Next, the user selects the buyer for the customer. Pressing on the down arrow adjacent to the field will display a list of contacts entered for the customer entered.  The user may select a contact or leave it blank.  If no contact has been entered for the customer, you will receive the following message. 

Depress OK and file will be left blank.

 

Next, a customer Purchase Order number is entered. This is a free-form field, and up to twenty of any normal characters(any combination of alphabet or numbers) may be entered.

If the user has a purchase order from the customer, or a confirmation of the order from the customer, then the ORDER ACK box can be checked. If this box is NOT checked, the user will NOT be able to create a packing list for the order when it comes time to ship.  If this box IS checked, then the date and initials of the user accepting responsibility for the order are recorded.

The next step is to use the Directive Buttons to add information into the sales order.

  

The "Add Product" button adds products or assemblies to the order. Pressing this button produces a list of products that have been established for the customer selected for the sales order. The user selects the product number being ordered by entering it in the red box, or scrolling down the list and double-clicking on the assembly. 
 

Note:  If the user enters specific customers in the Customer List within the Sales Price List Information module, then that product will only be available for that customer when creating a Sales Order.  


 

After selecting a part number, ManEx requests the quantity to be ordered. 

The user enters the Ord Qty (The quantity being ordered by the customer for the part number and the system automatically displays the Back Order, which is the quantity still due to be shipped for the order).

Once this quantity is entered, ManEx populates the first open line in the sales order with the data from inventory tables.  

 

You may view additional information about the part by sliding the scroll bar at the bottom of the grid  to to the right.

The "Add Part" button is to add a part from inventory to the sales order. This is material that is sold out of the stockroom, rather than material assembled to order.  It may include any part carried in ManEx inventory, with a source as “Buy”. Pressing this button brings up the following dialogue box:

The user is prompted to search for a part to enter either by the Part Number or by the Part Class.

 

Clicking on Part Number brings up the query screen for a part number.

In this screen, the Part Number, the Part Revision, the Class, the Type and the Description are all displayed. In this screen, the user may enter the part number directly, in the red box, or scroll down the part numbers until the correct part is found. The red box will cause the list to scroll to the closest match to the data entered. For each additional character entered, the cursor will move to a matching entry until the final part number is found.

 

If the user elects to search for a part by the Part Class, then the following screen appears:

Clicking on Part Class brings up the query screen for a Part Class. In this screen, the Part Class is displayed, and the user may enter the part class directly, in the red box, or scroll down the part classes shown until the correct class is found. The red box will cause the list to scroll to the closest match to the data entered. For each additional character entered, the cursor will move to a matching entry until the final part class is found.

 
 

After finding the correct class, the user is presented with the following screen which includes parts that belong to the selected class type.  
After selecting the part number to be added to the Sales Order, the next open line on the sales order is populated with the part information. The user must then move to the Order Quantity on the screen and enter the quantity ordered.
 
Once this quantity is entered, ManEx populates the line in the sales order with the data from inventory tables.     

If a part is reserved in SO, and also reserved to a project that's linked to the SO, the system should pick the parts that are reserved by the SO first, if not enough to ship, then take the parts that are reserved by the project.

If parts are allocated to a project and the project is selected in SO for the SO item, when the part is shipped, those allocated to that project parts will be available to be shipped. After the project is selected in SO, the new created WO will link to that project.

Once the order quantity is entered, the following selection screen will appear:

This screen allows the user to select the desired manufacturer.

Displayed will be the Warehouse, Part Mfgr, Mfgr Part Number, Warehouse Location and the Quantity Available.

Highlight and double click on the desired Part Manufacturer.

 

The "Add Miscellaneous" button is to add any miscellaneous items to the sales order. This may be prototype items, engineering charges, or any item that is not manufactured nor is it in inventory. Pressing this button adds a line to the Sales Order and moves the cursor to the description field. The user enters the description, quantity and may then move to the pricing screen to complete the data.

The user is reminded that the scroll bars at the right side and bottom of the information box allow the information to be scrolled sideways and up or down to see additional information. 

The "Delete Line"  button is to delete a line already entered from the Sales Order. The user selects the line to be deleted from the Sales Order tab, and presses the button.

Pressing this button brings up the following dialogue box:

The user confirms the deletion and the deletion is complete. 

 

   Highlight the Assembly line item first before you depress the button.

Important Note: This action is taken AFTER the Scheduling tab is completely filled in for all add Products (assemblies).  So, first go to the Schedule tab (instructions below). Schedule the product and then return to this tab.  

The "Issue Work Order" button is to create work orders for each manufactured product items on the sales order.  Highlight all lines where there are products to be assembled. 

If user has the "SO Approval Required" box check in Sales Order Defaults & Sales Discount Type module checked, then user will be required to check the "SO Approved" box before being able to Issue a Work Order.  If the "SO Approved" box is NOT checked user will receive the message located to the right. 



If line item is on Admin Hold or Mfgr Hold user will receive one of the following messages and will be unable to Auto create a WO until the status has been changed for this specific line item.  User will be able to manually add a Work Order for this product in the Work Order Management module.

If there is only one delivery scheduled for the sales order, and the work order setup is established as automatic numbering, then the following screen appears:
 

Keep in mind though that even if you have the SO linked to a WO does not mean that the quantities will always be the same.  The link is for reference only between the two modules and they are still individual records so when any changes are made to either the SO or the WO the change will not update or be carried forward to the other.  A message is displayed to the users that they will have to make the same changes to the WO.  

 

If the user has established more than one delivery date for the sales order, then pressing this button brings up the following:

 
 

Depress the Save action button to finish creating the Work Order(s). 

After completing all of the Sales Order data, the Sales Order must be saved. Then pressing the WO List tab will display all of the work orders created for the current sales order.

Schedule Tab

There are two modes available for completing a scheduled delivery for a product: Automatic and Manual. In the Automatic mode, ManEx will take a beginning date and a quantity to be delivered each period (Days, Weeks or Months) and schedule out the delivery using the Delivery Schedule Default Days which are setup in the Delivery Schedule Default Setup module.
 
 
Clicking on the Schedule screen tab brings up the following:

Sales Order Line number:  Select the line number by depressing the LN down arrow.  The following selection will appear:

The first line is populated with the data from the part number entered on the previous screen.

The following activities are available:

Automatic Scheduling
Pressing this button enables the scheduling box and places the default lead time date in the Due Date box. (The user may establish a default number of days in the Delivery Schedule Default Setup module).   The user can then use that date, or enter the first (beginning delivery) date the customer expects to receive the order. The Delivery Qty screen allows the user to divide the shipment into multiple deliveries of equal parts. For example, if the order is for a total of 100 pieces, and the customer wishes delivery to be at the rate of 10 units each day, then the delivery quantity should be entered as 10. The next box allows the user to select the delivery intervals. The options are by day (DY), week (WK) (7 days) or month (MO) (30 days).

Note:
In using the term Weekly and Monthly, it doesn't matter what the holidays or what the weekends are (i.e. that they are not excluded from the total time of a week or month), but are considered when the final date is calculated.
 
After selecting the delivery interval, pressing the SAVE button creates a line for each delivery date in the sequence requested, as illustrated:
 
In this Delivery Schedule screen, the user may further edit, delete or add lines. 
 
 

 Manual Scheduling

Pressing the Add Line button enables the delivery schedule box and places the cursor in the Due Date box. The user can then enter the first (beginning delivery) date the customer expects to receive the order. Next, the Ship Date (the date the order is to leave the user’s dock) will be entered by ManEx based on the transit days entered. This date can then be modified by the user if a different date is desired. Then the scheduled quantity is entered. The Shipped quantity will be completed by ManEx when the line has material shipped against it. Additional lines may be added or deleted by pressing the appropriate button. The total number of units scheduled will be displayed at the bottom of the box, so the user can verify all units have been scheduled.

 

After you’ve scheduled all assemblies, you may go back into the Sales Order tab and issue the Work Orders for those assemblies. Please refer to the instructions above regarding the Issue Work Order button. 

Pricing Tab         

Clicking on the Pricing screen brings up the following screen:

Depress the down arrow next to the LN field. The following list will appear: 

Select the desired line number. 

Then the unit price for the product can be entered. Once entered, the extended price field is completed.
 
The Price Markup field is NOT editable.  This information defaults in from the Sales Price List Information module. 
 
The Customer Sales Discount field in NOT editable.  This information defaults in from the Customer Information module. 
 
Depress the "Add Rep" button to add a Sales Rep.  The following screen will appear listing all the Sales Rep's setup in the  Sales Rep Information module.
 
Highlight the Sales Rep or Reps, then depress the OK button and they will appear in the commissions box as displayed below.
 
 


Enter in the commission amount for that specific Sales Rep.

If accounting is installed,the user selects the Sales Type.
The user can select the Sales Type from the drop down list:

 

The first column of account numbers are for the posting of the sale. The 2nd column of account numbers are for the posting of the Cost of Goods Sold entry. Once the Invoice is printed the account entry will become available.

If the user has completed the Pricing Screen for the product, then the pricing will be automatically entered. See Article #766 for more detail.

The user may select if the unit is taxable by clicking on the appropriate box on the right side of the screen. 

For Sales Order Items with no Tax, leave the Tax box unchecked. No further action is required.

To Manually add US Tax (if not set up in Customer Information), enter line item and then in Pricing Screen click on Add Line and enter description of Sales Tax and Tax Amount manually.  A Sales Type for the appropriate Tax G/L number should be setup in Accounting so that it can be selected when entering the Sales Tax manually.  The full amount of the Tax will be Invoiced upon shipment of the first item so using manual sales tax entries may not be useful for shipments with multiple shipments against the same line item. 
 
Checking the Tax box in Sales Order Pricing will not calculate or add US Tax for a line item unless the Shipping Address for the particular Customer selected in the Sales Order Header has been set up. Setup the Shipping Address Tax in the Customer Information Module.

Adding a US Sales Tax or a US Shipping Charge Tax in Customer Information requires that those items added be entered in System Setup under Sales Tax Authority Table.

If a particular Customer Ship To Address has more than one US Tax (such as a Sales, Use, Excise, etc. tax), then the taxes may be entered in System Setup individually and added individually to the appropriate Customer Ship To addresses.

If there are more than one US Tax setup for a Customer Ship To Address, Manex will add up the tax rates and apply the combined percentage to the pre-tax line item total. 
 

User CANNOT manually add Foreign tax to Sales Orders or Invoices.  The Foreign tax box must be checked for the Shipping Address for the particular Customer selected in the Sales Order Header. 

 

If the Foreign tax box is checked for the Shipping Address for the particular Customer selected in the Sales Order Header.  Pricing will be listed as follows on the Sales Order Acknowledgement, Invoice, RMA, and Credit Memo:  First the Product Sub-tot AMT, the Sales Discount (if applicable), the Freight AMT (if applicable), a SUB-TOTAL,  the GST TAX (Primary tax) (Note: the Primary tax will always be displayed even if it is zero, if a Secondary Tax is present), then a second Sub-Total,  PST TAX (secondary tax), and last the TOTAL.  If no PST tax (secondary Tax), Sales Discount, or Freight is involved, then no lines would print for these items.    See the  Foreign Tax Examples.xls  attachment to see how the Primary and Secondary taxes are calculated.

 

The Primary tax and Secondary tax is divided into the Sales tax and Shipping tax on the Sales Tax reports. 

 

For Example: 

Primary Tax (GST):  144*10% (sales tax) + 0 (no freight tax is calculated) =$14.40

Secondary Tax (PST):  144*8% (sales tax) + 12*8% (Freight tax)  =  $12.48

 

Divided into sales tax and freight tax:

Sales Tax: 144*10% (sales tax)  +  144*8% (sales tax)  =  $25.92

Freight Tax  0 (from primary tax)  +  12*8% (from secondary tax)  =  $0.96

If the user wants to use a Lot Charge instead of unit pricing, click on the Lot box. This will take the unit cost as a lot charge for the item without extending the units by the price. This may be used if a flat fee is charged for a number of parts. 

Clicking on the Add Line button may enter additional charges for the product. These charges may carry a different unit price, and may be of any description.  A Non-inventory line added on this screen will be invoiced on the first shipment made for this sales order.

Work Order List Tab

Clicking on the Work Order List tab brings up the following:

Depress the down arrow next to the LN field. The following will display:

Select the line item containing an assembly for which Work Orders have been created.

This screen is for information only, providing the user with status of work orders created for the current sales order.  The user has the option of creating multiple work orders for a sales order line item. To see the Work Orders for the next line item, depress the LN down arrow and select the desired line item.

Billing Tab          

Clicking on the Billing screen tab brings up the following:

In this screen, a Bill-to address will be completed with the default address established in the Customer Information Module. The Bill-to address also may be selected from any other addresses entered in the Customer Information Module.  The first prompt is to enter the Bill-to address. The user may accept the default address, or select from any address established in the Customer Information Module. All address information in the set up will be displayed when the down-arrow is pressed at the right side of the field:

After selecting the appropriate bill-to address, the information fields on the screen are populated with the correct data.

Shipping Tab       

Clicking on the Shipping screen tab brings up the following:

As in the Billing screen, the user may select from established ship-to addresses by pressing on the down-arrow key at the right of the first field:

Once the ship-to address is established, the address fields are populated from the Customer file. In addition to the address, the Terms, FOB, Ship Via, Customer Account and Delivery Time are also populated from the Customer Information Module, if they were completed there. If not, or if the user wishes to change them, the user may select the appropriate response by clicking on the down-arrow next to the field, and viewing choices set up in the Sales Setup module ( in System Setup).
 
Note:  The user is able to edit or change the Cust Account No to match any special Ship Via pertaining to the specific order within the SO Shipping screen without the changes affecting the Customer Information module or any other pre-existing orders.

Notes Tab

The last screen, the NOTES screen, provisions are made to establish Sales Order Notes and/or Sales Order Acknowledgment Footnotes.  These notes are available on their respective screens.

Note that when any note is entered on this screen, the screen tab NOTES turns red to indicate there is data in the notes.

Once all Tabs have been complete Depress the Save action button to save changes or the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes. 

1.2.1.1.4.4. Cancel a Sales Order

To cancel a Sales Order

  1. Find the order using the Find procedures Article #838.
  2. Depress the Edit action button at the top of the screen.
  3. Enter your password.
  4. Highlight the 1st line item.
  5. Scroll over to the Line Status field.
  6. Depress the down arrow.
  7. Highlight the Cancel selection, as illustrated below:

Once you have cancelled all line items on PO the following message will appear: 

Depress Ok and the Sales Order status will be changed to "Cancel" 

Depress the Save action button, to save changes. Press the Red "X" to abandon changes.

Depress the Exit action button to exit the current screen and returns the user to the previous screen.

1.2.1.1.4.5. Delete a Sales order

A sales order may be deleted using the Delete Unwanted Sales Order in the System Utility Module.  This utility will allow users to delete any Sales Order record within the system as long as there are no shipments or reserved qty against it.  In addition to deleting the Sales order, the utility will also check to see if there were any linked Work Orders to that Sales Order, if any were found it will display a warning and then also generate a XLS spreadsheet for the users to review and re-establish links to new Sales Orders if desired.  

1.2.1.1.5. Reports - SO Mgmt
To obtain the Sales Order Reports, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen. 



The following screen will appear:

Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

Highlight the desired report and then depress the Option tab if applicable. 

Sales Order Acknowledgement report

For the Sales Order Acknowledgement report, select the numbering choice at the bottom of the screen by clicking on the desired radial.  Depress the OK button.

 

The following report will print: - This report displays the Sales order acknowledgment for selected sales order.

Sales Order Acknowledgement & Delivery Schedule report

For the Sales Order Acknowledgement & Delivery Schedule report, select the numbering choice at the bottom of the screen by clicking on the desired radial.  Check the Show Commit Date box if you would like the Commit date displayed on report.  Depress the OK button.

 

The following report will print: - This report displays the Sales order acknowledgment with delivery schedule for selected sales order.

 

Sales Order Picklist report

For the Sales Order Picklist report. Depress the OK button.  The following report will print:  This report will display the Sales order picklist for selected sales order

Sales Order Backlog Detail report

For the Sales Order Backlog Detail report, you can select to sort  By Product or By Month on the bottom of the screen.

 

Depress the Options tab. Choose Customer by highlighting then depressing the > button.  If you want all of the Customers, depress the >> button.  If you want to Supress zero backlog quantity check the box.  If you want the commit date displayed on the report check the box.

Once selection is made, depress the OK button. 

 

The following report will print:

Sales Order Backlog Summary report

For the Sales Order Backlog Detail report. Depress the Options tab. Choose Customer by highlighting then depressing the > button.  If you want all of the Customers, depress the >> button. 

Once selection is made, depress the OK button. 

 

The following report will print:

Sales Order Backlog Without Scheduled Shipment report

For the Sales Order Backlog Without Scheduled Shipment report 

Depress the Options tab. Choose Customer by highlighting then depressing the > button.  If you want all of the Customers, depress the >> button. 

Once selection is made, depress the OK button. 

 

The following report will print:

Sales Order Booking Detail report

For the Sales Order Booking Detail report, you can select to sort  By Product or By Month on the bottom of the screen.

 

Depress the Options tab. You’ll be prompted for the date range. To clear the default selection, check the Clear Selection box. Choose Customer by highlighting then depressing the > button.  If you want all of the Customers, depress the >> button. 

Once selection is made, depress the OK button.
 
Note:  The system does not have a date associated with a Sales Order line number, only with the Sales Order (header) for this report.  We suggest you view the Sales Order Change History associated with the Sales Order to see the changes per line item.

 

The following report will print:

Daily Shipment Report With Invoice Amount

For the Daily Shipment Report With Invoice Amount, you can select By Customer, By Packing List, or By Sales Order on the bottom of the screen.
 
Note:  If 'By Packing List" is selected and the total records of packing list is more than 32,767, user will have to enter the packing list number instead of selecting from the mover list.  The mover list will not be displayed, because there is an item limitation set on the mover list and once this limitation has been met there are too many items to display, so then the user will need to enter the packing list number they want to view.   

 

 

Depress the Options tab. You’ll be prompted for the date range. To clear the default selection, check the Clear Selection box. Choose Customer by highlighting then depressing the > button.  If you want all of the Customers, depress the >> button. 

Once selection is made, depress the OK button.

 
 

The following report will print:

Daily Shipment History Report by Part Number

Depress the Options tab. You’ll be prompted for the date range. To clear the default selection, check the Clear Selection box. Choose Customer by highlighting then depressing the > button.  If you want all of the Customers, depress the >> button. 

Once selection is made, depress the OK button.

 
 

The following report will print:

Pro-Forma Invoice report

For the Pro-Forma Invoice report, Depress the Options tab.  You will be able to add a footnote, as displayed:

In foreign trade transactions, a pro forma (or proforma) invoice is a document that states a commitment from the seller to sell goods to the buyer at specified prices and terms. It is used to declare the value of the trade. It is not a true invoice, because it is not used to record accounts receivable for the seller and accounts payable for the buyer.

Type in the footnote desired and then depress the OK button.

 

The following report will print:

SOs without Customer Acknowledgement/PO report 

Depress the Options tab. You will be prompted for the date range. To clear the default selection, check the Clear Selection box.

Choose to display open sales orders only or all sales orders by depress the radial. 

Choose Customer by highlighting then depressing the > button.  If you want all of the Customers, depress the >> button. 

Once selection is made, depress the OK button.

  
 

The following report will print: - This report will display a list of SOs that still need a Customer Acknowledgement/PO

 

Backlog Revenue and Margin Detail Report  

Depress the Options tab. 

Select Type: Revenue or Margin by depressing the appropriate radial.
 
Select Based On:  Due Date, Ship Date, or Commit Date by depressing the appropriate radial.
 
Select Customer by highlighting then depressing the > button.  If you want all of the Customers, depress the >> button
 
Enter the number of days you want the system to use to calculate the "past due" and "future" revenue margins.  The default is 720 days.
 
Once selection is made, depress the OK button. 
 
This report is based on the SO scheduled qty entered and the SO prices to calculate the Revenue or Margin.  The type "Revenue" is unit cost*qty.  The type "Margin" is difference between standard price and unit cost*qty. 
 

The following report will print:

 
 
 

Backlog Revenue and Margin Summary Report 

For the Backlog Revenue and Margin Summary Report, you can select to Group By Territory; By Customer; By Customer, PO; By Sales Rep; or By Sales Type from the following selection screen.  

 

Depress the Options tab. 

Select Type: Revenue or Margin by depressing the appropriate radial.
 
Select Based On:  Due Date, Ship Date, or Commit Date by depressing the appropriate radial.
 
Select Customer by highlighting then depressing the > button.  If you want all of the Customers, depress the >> button. 

Enter the number of days you want the system to use to calculate the "past due" and "future" revenue margins.  The default is 720 days.   (The number of days past due to be included is so that you can filter out any old orders that are still open, but for some reason hasn’t shipped, and may not ship due to some unresolved issues.  The past due column, is for how far back data is to be considered).  For example: Your current date is 5/12/08 and you have a SO with a due date of 3/21/2008, it is within the 60 day window of past due consideration, and within the 720 day late shipments as well.  But if you had a backlog order that was still due from 12/15/2007, it would not show on a 60 day past due report, but would show on a 720 day past due report.   

Once selection is made, depress the OK button.

This report is based on the SO scheduled qty entered and the SO prices to calculate the Revenue or Margin.  System uses 720 days to calculate the past due;  current month to next 6 months; and future.  The type "Revenue" is unit cost*qty.  The type "Margin" is difference between standard price and unit cost*qty.  
 

The following report will print:
 
 
 
Remaining Shipment Report
 
Depress the option tab.
Enter the Date to display Shipments Due Up To:
 
Basically, this report will get all MRP action records for SO demand that the date is up to whatever user set up on report "Option" page (default is 60 days from now).  The program will get sales oder information (due date, price...) as well, then join this two set of data by sales order number and due date.  That's how the proposed work orders linked to sales orders, even the user doesn't create the work orders for the sales orders.  Because this report lists what order actions required in order to make the shipment, it will get those proposed WO records with negative balance, and get MRP action records for those components.  If the part numbers have positive balance or regular WOs that will eventaully fill the demand, those records will be filtered out 
 
The following will print: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1.2.1.1.6. FAQs for SO Mgmt
Facts and Questions for the Sales Order Managment Module
1.2.1.1.7. ManEx Minutes (SO)
1.2.1.2. Customer Sales Order Status
1.2.1.2.1. Prerequisites for Customer SO Status

Prerequisites for Viewing:

Security

After activation, "Customer Order Status" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

Customer

The Customer must have been set up in the Customer Information module.

Sales Orders

The Sales Order must have been entered via Sales Order Management module.

Packing List

The shipment must have been entered via Packing List Management module.

Contacts

If used, the contacts used at the customer.

1.2.1.2.2. Introduction for Customer SO Status

This screen allows program managers to quickly gather information on any open order for a selected customer.  It pulls data from inventory and production and provides visiblity of component shortages, notes from the production floor, current status of each job in production, and shipping history including packing list numbers and tracking numbers.  This screen is automatically updated as production and inventory personnel record transactions are entered in the system.

1.2.1.2.3. Fields & Definitions for Customer SO Status
1.2.1.2.3.1. Customer List Tab

Customer Customer Name
City City where customer is located 
Customer No System Assigned Customer Number  

1.2.1.2.3.2. Customer Order Status Tab

Part Number  Product Number and Revision
Order Date Date Order was Placed 
Purchase Order Customer Purchase Order Number
Sales Order  System Sales Order Number 
Order Qty   Order Quantity
Shpd Qty   Quantity Shipped
Back Order   Quantity on Back Order

Deliver Schedule

  Special Notes for the Work Order Listed
  Shortages for the Work Order Listed
Due Date Due Date listed on the Work Order Listed
Work Order Work Order Number 
Released An X indicates that the Work Order has been Released
Quantity Total Quantity Work Order Listed is for

Work In Process

  Special Notes for the Work Center highlighted on the Work Order Listed 
Work Center Work Centers for the Work Order Listed
Quantity Quantity in that Work Center 

1.2.1.2.4. How To ..... for Customer SO Status
1.2.1.2.4.1. Find Customer Sales Order Status

To enter the module, select Sales Management / Sales Order Management / Customer Sales Order Status, as illustrated.

 

Selecting the Customer Sales Order Status will bring up the following screen:

Select the Customer and then the Customer Order Status Information Tab. This will bring up details regarding the Customer Orders indicating part numbers, order date, purchase order number, sales order number, order quantity, shipped quantity, and back order.  The user may sort by Part Number, Order Date, Purchase Order or Sales Order by depressing the desired button. If there are any of the note buttons lit in red, the user may view the notes by depressing on the desired Note button.

 See screen below:

 

Selecting the Ship History button, will bring up the following screen: 

The ship history screen displays: Packing List number, Ship date, Part number, Revision number, Quantity shipped, Shipped Via, and the Waybill number.

Delivery Schedule Section

For the Sales Order highlighted, the Delivery Schedule section will display in the left hand corner of the screen.

If there are any notes regarding the Work Order, the button will be lit in red.  Depressing on the Shortage button will reveal an shortages associated with this Work Order. 

For the Work Order highlighted, the Work Center identification, Part Number, Revision Number, /Unit, Short Quantity, Number of Units and Part Source will display.

Highlighting a particular Work Order will display Work In Process status for that Work Order. The Work Center and Quantity will display. Depress the WO-WC Note to view notes regarding the Work Center highlighted. 

1.2.1.2.5. ManEx Minutes (SO Status)
1.2.1.3. Open Sales Order List
1.2.1.3.1. Prerequisites for Open SO List

Prerequisites for Viewing:

Security

After activation, "Sales Order Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

Customer

The Customer must have been set up in the Customer Information module.

Sales Orders
The Sales Order must have been entered via Sales Order Management module. 

1.2.1.3.2. Introduction for Open SO List

In this module, the user may view the Open Sales Order List

1.2.1.3.3. Fields & Definitions for Open SO List

Age Number of Days from Order Date 
SO Number System Sales Order Number 
Customer Customer Name
PO Number Customer PO Number
Ord Date Date Order Placed
Itms Item Number on Sales Order
Ack Date Date Acknowledged

1.2.1.3.4. How To ..... for Open SO List
1.2.1.3.4.1. View the Open Sales Order List

Enter Sales Mgt / Sales Order Management / Open Sales Order List, as illustrated: 

 

The following screen will appear:

The screen will display all of the open sales orders for all Customers.  This screen may be sorted by:  Age, SO Number, Customer, PO Number, or Order Date by pressing on the desired button. 

1.2.1.3.5. Reports - Open Sales Order List
To obtain the reports, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen.  



The following screen will appear:

Select Printer, Page Range, and number of copies.  Depress Print and report will be sent to printer. 

1.2.1.4. Customer Follow-up
1.2.1.4.1. Prerequisites for Customer Follow-up

After activation, "Customer Information" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.



1.2.1.4.2. Introduction for Customer Follow-up

In this module, the user may enter Customer Follow Up Notes.

1.2.1.4.3. Fields & Definitions for Customer Follow-up
1.2.1.4.3.1. Summary Tab

Customer Follow Up Summary Tab

Date The date of the followup 
Name The user's name
Customer The Customer's name
Description The Description of the followup

1.2.1.4.3.2. Detail Tab

Customer Follow Up Detail tab

Customer The Customer's name the followup pertains to
Complete The date and intitials of the user that checked the complete box
Follow-up Date The followup date
Name The Name of the contact 
Description The description of the followup
Note Any notes pertaining to the followup

1.2.1.4.4. How To ..... for Customer Follow-up
1.2.1.4.4.1. Find a Customer Follow-up

Find a Customer Follow Up

Enter Sales Mgt / Sales Order Management / Customer Follow Up:

 

The following screen will appear:

 

Depressing the Find button will bring up a further selection , as illustrated:

Note the 1st two selections are for Follow Ups which are not yet complete. The last two selections are for Follow Ups which have been closed.

 
 

To find by Name, the following list of User’s Names will appear:

Type the user name into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 

To find by Customer, the following list of Customer Names will appear:

Type the customer name into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 

To find a closed Follow Up, if the user selects by Name Closed, the list of user’s names will appear. To find by Customer Name, the list of Customers will appear. Type the user name or customer name into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

Once found, the Follow Up Summary screen will populate with all follow-ups for that user or customer. 

Highlight your selection and depress the detail tab to view the detail.

1.2.1.4.4.2. Add a Customer Follow-up

Add a New Customer Follow Up

 Enter Sales Mgt/Sales Order Management/Customer Follow-Up  

The following screen will appear:

 

Depress the Detail tab, the Add button and Delete button become available.

Depress the Add button. Type in your password. Select the Customer from the drop down list: 

Type the Description into the Description field, then type in the Follow Up note.

Depress the Save button, to save the changes, depress the Abandon changes button if you do not want to save changes. The complete screen will display as shown below:

1.2.1.4.4.3. Complete a Customer Follow-up

 

Find the Customer Follow Up using the Find procedures. The following screen will appear:

In the Summary tab, highlight the Follow Up of interest, then depress the Detail Tab.

Depress the Edit button. Type in your password. Place a check in the Complete box by clicking on the box.

Depress the Save button, to save changes, depress the Abandon changes button if you do not wish to save changes. 

1.2.1.4.5. Customer Follow-up ManEx Minutes
1.2.1.5. Customer Rolodex
1.2.1.5.1. Prerequisites for Customer Roledex

After activation, "Customer Information" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

1.2.1.5.2. Introduction for Customer Rolodex

In this module, the user may look up Customer Contacts, and phone numbers.

1.2.1.5.3. Fields & Definitions for Customer Rolodex

Company Company Name
Contact Company Contact Name
Title Contact Title
Phone Contact Phone Number or Company Phone Number
E-Mail Contacts e-mail address or Company e-mail address
Fax Contacts Fax number or Companys Fax number

1.2.1.5.4. How To .... for Customer Rolodex
1.2.1.5.4.1. Find a Customer

Select Sales Mgt / Sales Order Management/ Customer Rolodex, as illustrated:

 

The following screen will appear:


Customer’s Rolodex, will appear containing the Company Name and the Contact at the company, the title of the contact and the contact’s telephone number. Highlight the Company and the E-mail address and Fax number will appear in the bottom of the screen.

1.2.1.6. Upload New Sales Orders
1.2.1.6.1. Prerequisites for New SO Upload
  1. User MUST have "Add" rights for the "Sales Order" and  "Sales Order Upload" within the System Security .  Users with "Supervisor Rights" automatically have access.
  2. User has to complete the required fields in the SO Template.xlt in the xlfiles directory to create SO upload XL file.  
  3. If user wants the system to automatically acknowledge all the SOs uploaded the "Auto Acknowledge SO when importing from XL" box must be checked in the Sales Order Setup module. If this is not checked in the Sales Order Setup module then all the SOs will be uploaded as "NEW" and users will be required to acknowledge them within the Sales Order  module.
1.2.1.6.2. Introduction for New SO Upload
This module gives our users the capability to take electronic files,  copy and paste that information into the ManEx SO Upload template format.  Users will have the flexibility to load a large SO into the system all at once, or upload multiple sales orders for different customers at once, etc.   This upload is also designed for the users to sell a big number of buy parts to their customers and to bring these parts in later as IPS parts using Inventory upload module.  During the upload process the system will find any problems with the template, the user will be prompted and exception XL files will be created within the SOExceptionXL directory for the users to review and disposition.
1.2.1.6.3. Fields and Definitions for New SO Upload
1.2.1.6.3.1. SO Upload Template

Sales Order No Required field If Auto SO numbering is setup: Even though user has the SO's set to auto, you can NOT upload a SO without something in this column.  Something has to be entered in this column so the system can distinguish one so line item from another SO line item on a different SO.  If there is no data in this column the program will think the rest of the spreadsheet is also blank. SO Upload will group per change in Sonum field (it will then use the Sonum field as a reference to change) when uploaded user will receive a message that the SO number entered in XL spreadsheet will be overwritten by a system generated number ... and give you the option to continue the upload or abort.  If manual SO numbering is setup:  SO Upload will group per change in Sonum field (it will then use the Sonum field as a reference to change) when uploaded system will use SO numbers entered  in XL spreadsheet.   
Customer Number Required field.  Must be an Existing Customer number in Customer Information.
Attention Optional:  Must be setup in Customer Information
Customer PO Optional: 
Buyer Optional:  Must be setup in Purchase Setup.
Part Number  Required field:  If the Sales Type is Inventory, the part or product number must exist in the Inventory Control Module.
Revision  Optional:   If the Sales Type is Inventory, the revision must exist in the Inventory Control Module for that part or product.
SO Line No Required field:  
Mfgr Code  Required field:  Manufacturer must exist in ManEx and match the ICM AVL for the part that is being uploaded. If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.
Mfgr Part No  Required field: 
Warehouse  Required field:  (if Invt Part) Warehouse must exist in ManEx and match the ICM AVL for the part that is being uploaded.  If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the SOExceptionXL directory on the server.
Location  Required field:  Must exist in the Inventory Control Module.
Unit Price Required field:  this upload will only allow you to enter one price line for the same item on the sales order. If additional price line has to be entered, the users will have to use Manex.  
Taxable  Optional:     
Sales Type Required field:   Must be setup in Sales Type & Price Itemization Setup
Qty/Date  Required field:  Qty
Due Date Required field:  this upload will allow entering different due dates for the same item on the sales order (have to fill up all the information in all the fields, which are common and enter different or the same quantities and due dates for each  new due date line),

1.2.1.6.4. How To ....... for New SO Upload
1.2.1.6.4.1. Add - Upload a New SO
Enter Sales Mgt/Sales Order Management/Upload New Sales Orders

NOTE: If user wants the system to auto approve and/or auto acknowledge when uploading Sales Order from the XL file, the auto approve and auto acknowledgement boxes must be checked in the Sales Order Setup module.

 

Locate XL File to Upload

This message will appear.  This message is for user to verify the number of recorrds being loaded from the import sheet.  User may depress "YES" to continue the upload or "NO" to abort the upload.

 
 

If system does not find any problems with the template the user will be prompted the following message that the SO Upload was complete



If the system finds any problems with template the user will be prompted the following message and exception XL file will be created in the SO Exception XL directory on the server.

Depress OK and user will receive the message (shown below) that the "SO Upload was not complete" and system will abort.

If any of the information is missing from the required fields in the first row of the XL file, user will receive the following message. 
 

Depress OK and user will receive the message (shown below) that the "SO Upload was not complete" and system will abort.

Note:  Even though user has the SO's set to auto, you can NOT upload a SO without something in this column and all other required fields..  Something has to be entered in this column along with all other required fields so the system can distinguish one so line item from another SO line item on a different SO.  If there is no data in this column or the other required fields the program will think the rest of the spreadsheet is also blank. SO Upload will group per change in Sonum field (it will then use the Sonum field as a reference to change).   If manual SO numbering is setup:  SO Upload will group per change in Sonum field (it will then use the Sonum field as a reference to change) when uploaded system will use SO numbers entered  in XL spreadsheet.   
The user will be prompted the following message that the SO Upload was not complete and system will abort.  

 

 

 

1.2.2. RMA Management
1.2.2.1. RMA Management
1.2.2.1.1. Prerequisites for RMA Mgmt

Prerequisites for Entering a New Return Materials Authorization:

Security

After activation, "RMA Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.  

Customer

The Customer database must be established for customers in the Customer Information module.

Sales Order

A Sales Order must exist covering the materials returned.

An Additional Prerequisite for Entering a Stand-Alone Return Materials Authorization:

The product numbers displayed in the "Find Product Number" list are either only for "Standard Price", or the customers that are added into the customer list in the Sales Price List module.

 

1.2.2.1.2. Introduction for RMA Mgmt

The Return Material Authorization (RMA) Module allows the user to create two different types of RMA's  a Standard RMA and a Stand-Alone RMA.

 

A Standard RMA is created when there is material being returned for rework/repair that was originally built and shipped by you.

A Stand-Alone RMA is created when the material being returned for rework/repair was not originally built and shipped by you. 

 

A Return Material Authorization (RMA) notifies receiving to expect a return.  The authorization also allows for reworking/replacing the order so that the user doesn’t have to go to another screen to create a Sales Order.

 

There are three options on pricing.

 

1.      The user may enter zero for both the return and the re-work.  For further detail on how this affects the GL accounts see  Article #3397

2.      The user may enter full price for both the return and re-work.  For further detail on how this affects the GL accounts see Article #3396
3.      The user may enter zero on the return and a dollar amount for the re-work.
 
 

Once the RMA has been acknowledged, user will then create the RMA Receiver

 
To review how an RMA impacts MRP see Article #2507.
 
 

.

1.2.2.1.3. Fields & Definitions for RMA Mgmt
1.2.2.1.3.1. RMA Tab

The first screen is Return Material Authorization.  On this screen you can see the amount being returned against the Sales Order and Invoice. If there is to be a re-work, this information will also display.

RMA Tab Field Definitions

RMA Number The unique Return Material Authorization number.
RMA Date The date the Return Material Authorization was created.
Customer The name of the Customer for which the Return Material Authorization was created.
Original SO No The number of the original Sales Order covering the materials being returned.
RMA Status The status of the Return Material Authorization, open, closed, etc.
Buyer The name of the purchaser at the customer.
Customer P/O The customer’s original purchase order number.
Invoice Number The user’s invoice number for the original Sales Order.
Packing List The user’s packing list number for the original Sales Order.
RMA Ack If this box is checked, the user has acknowledged the return.
(Date) The date the Return Material Authorization was acknowledged.
(Initials) The initials of the user who acknowledged the Return Material Authorization.
Ln The line number of the Return Material Authorization or the line number of the order to be re-worked/replaced and returned to the customer.
Part Number The user’s internal number for the part or assembly.
Rev The revision number pertaining to the Part Number.
Class The user’s classification covering the Part Number.
Type The type within the classification covering the Part Number.
Description The user’s description covering the Part Number.
RMA Qty If the number is negative, it’s the amount of the original order which the customer is returning.If the number is positive, it’s the amount of the order which the user will be re-working/replacing for the customer.
Back Order The amount of product still owed to the customer (it’s negative, if on a return line).
Received Quantity The amount of the product received back from the Customer (it’s negative).Please refer to RMA Receiving procedures, below.
UOM The unit of measure pertaining to the product.
Extended The price per unit (in the Pricing tab) multiplied by the units in the RMA Quantity column.The line for material to be returned will be negative.
Line Status

The status of the line item.  Once the item has been returned and received, the status (for the negartive qty) will display as closed.  For the re-work line item,(which would be the positive qty)  it’s one of the following:

Once the re-work item (which would be the positive qty) is shipped, the status will display as closed.

Warranty This box will be defaulted to Yes.  This field is for reference only, it does not affect any other modules. 
FGI Quantity The inventory on hand for the product per the Inventory Control Quantity Info tab.
RMA Amount The net dollar amount of the extended column per the pricing tab.If it’s a return, without any replacements, the amount will be negative.If it’s a return and replacement for the same amount, the display will net to zero.If it’s a return for zero pricing but the user is charging a dollar amount for the re-work, the amount of the rework will display.
RMA Tax If either the return or the replacement line has the tax box checked in the Pricing screen, the amount of the tax will display here.
Discount  Discount Amount
RMA Total This is the total of the RMA Amount and the RMA Tax.

Directive Buttons

Depressing this button will display RMA Changes History.  It will display if a new RMA order is created, if an existing RMA order is edited;  For the header level -Customer PO#, Billing and Shipping status changes, Approved and acknowledge status changed.  Acknowledge document name changes, recognizes if note and foot note were changed (no changes itself are recorded).   For the Detail level - New item, removed item, quantity changes, status for the item changes.  For the schedule level - New/removed schedule line, qty scheduled, date scheduled.  For the price level - New price line, removed price line, price description, price and sales type. 
  This button starts the process to add a product (assembly) to the RMA.
  This button starts the process to add a part to the RMA.
  This button starts the process to add miscellaneous items to the RMA.  This button will NOT be available when creating a Stand-Alone RMA.
  This button will delete the line highlighted.

 

1.2.2.1.3.2. Schedule Tab

The schedule tab will display the due date and ship date for the re-work line item. 
 

Schedule Tab Field Definitions:

The first line is populated with the data from the part number entered on the previous screen.

Due Date The date the re-work/replacement is due at the Customer’s dock.
Ship Date The date the user must ship the re-work/replacement to the Customer.
Scheduled Quantity The quantity of the re-work/replacement to be shipped.
Shipped Quantity The re-work/replacement quantity already shipped.
1st Due date The date of the first re-work/replacement shipment.
Delivery Quantity The re-work/replacement quantity to be shipped on the 1st Due Date.
(Interval) The shipment interval – Days, Week, etc.
Transit Days The number of days from the user’s dock to the Customer.
RMA Quantity The total amount to be re-worked/replaced.
Balance The remainder amount to be re-worked/replaced.
Line Item Footnote The note pertaining to this particular line. 

1.2.2.1.3.3. Pricing Tab
 The pricing tab contains information as to the price to be credited, if any, and the price to be charged for the re-work, if any.  Each line will display the Sales Type.
 
There are three options on pricing.
 
1.      The user may enter zero for both the return and the re-work.  For further detail on how this affects the GL accounts see  Article #3397
2.      The user may enter full price for both the return and re-work.  For further detail on how this affects the GL accounts see Article #3396 .
3.      The user may enter zero on the return and a dollar amount for the re-work.

Pricing Tab Field Definitions:

Credit example:

The first line is populated with the data from the part number entered on the previous screen.

Description

The user’s description covering the Part Number.

Quantity The amount of the order which the customer will be returning. This is displayed as a negative
Price

The amount of credit which the user will be providing to the customer.

Extended

Quantity multiplied by Price.This amount should be negative.

Sales Type The type of credit. This choice depicts the accounting of the Credit Memo entry as set up in Sales Setup.
Tax

If this is checked, it means that the item returned was subject to sales tax and a pro-rata portion will be credited.

Lot

If a price is to be credited as a lot charge rather than as a cost per unit credit, then the Lot box at the right of the screen is checked. This will take the unit cost as a lot charge for the item without extending the units by the price. This may be used if a flat fee is charged for a number of parts  .Note: The credit must be equal to or less than the original Sales Order price.

Depressing this button will allow user to enter additional credits for the product above. These charges may carry a different unit price, and may be of any description.  As the information is completed, the total credit for the line item is carried to the bottom of the box.  A Non-inventory line added on this screen will be credited on the first shipment made for this RMA order.
Depressing this button will delete the highlighted line
Totals The total of all of the extensions

Pricing Tab Field Definitions:

Re-work example:

The first line is populated with the data from the part number entered on the previous screen.

Description

The user’s description covering the Part Number.

Quantity

The amount of the order which the user will be re-working/replacing for the customer.

Price

The amount the user is charging the customer, per unit for the re-work/replacement.  Note:This amount must be equal to or less than the original Sales Order price.

Extended

Quantity multiplied by Price.

Sales Type

The type of re-work.This choice depicts the accounting of the entry as set up in Sales Setup.

Tax

If this is checked, it means that the sale is subject to sales tax.

Lot

If a price is to be assessed as a lot charge rather than as a cost per unit charge, then the Lot box at the right of the screen is checked. This will take the unit cost as a lot charge for the item without extending the units by the price. This may be used if a flat fee is charged for a number of parts.  Note:The charge must be equal to or less than the original Sales order price.

Depressing this button will allow user to enter additional charges for the product above. These charges may carry a different unit price, and may be of any description.  As the information is completed, the total cost for the line item is carried to the bottom of the box.  A Non-inventory line added on this screen will be charged on the first shipment made for this RMA order
Depressing this button will delete the highlighted line
Totals

The total of all of the extensions.

1.2.2.1.3.4. Billing Tab

Billing Tab Field Definitions:

Customer

The name of the Customer.

Bill To

The bill to address of the Customer.

Credit Note

Any note regarding the Customer’s credit.

Credit Status

The status of the Customer’s credit with the user.

Credit Limit

The top $ amount of credit the user allows the customer.

Accounts Receivable

The current balance the customer owes the user.

Open Orders

The sum of all open sales orders for this customer.

Credit Available

The net of Credit Limit, less Accounts Receivable and less Open Orders.

This Order Amount

The amount of the current re-work/replacement order.

Credit Available With Order

The net of “Credit Available” above less “This Order Amount” above.

1.2.2.1.3.5. Shipping Tab

Shipping Tab Field Definitions

Customer

The name of the Customer.

Ship To Address

The Customer’s delivery address.

FOB The point where title changes from the user to the Customer.
Ship Via

The name of the shipper.

Customer Account Number

The Customer’s account number WITH the shipper.

Delivery Time

The time the delivery is to be picked up at the user’s dockby the shipper.

1.2.2.1.3.6. Notes Tab

Notes Tab Field Definitions:

RMA Note The notes entered within the RMA Note field are for internal use only and will NOT be displayed on the RMA Report.  

RMA Acknowledgement Footnote:

The notes entered within the RMA Acknowledgement Footnotes will appear on the RMA Report, which will be sent to the Customer for the Customer to see.

1.2.2.1.4. How To ..... for RMA Mgmt
1.2.2.1.4.1. Find A RMA

Enter Sales Mgt/RMA Management/RMA Management Module  

The following screen will appear:

To find a Return Material Authorization, depress the Open/Find button. The following selection will appear 

 

Find by RMA Order Number

If you select to find by RMA Order Number, the following RMA Order List screen will appear:

Select between Open and All by clicking the appropriate box. Type the RMA Order number in the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 

Find by Customer Name

If you select to find by Customer Name, the following list of customers will appear:

Type the Customer Name into the red box or highlight your selection and double click. All of the RMA’s for that customer will appear, as illustrated below:

 

Select between Open and All by clicking the appropriate box. Type the RMA number into the red box or highlight and double click on the selection.

 

Find by Customer Purchase Order Number

If you select to find by Customer P.O., the following screen will appear:

Select between Open and All by clicking the appropriate box. Type the Customer PO number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 
 

Find by Product Number

If you select to find by Product Number, the following screen will appear:

Type the Part Number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click. A list of RMA's pertaining to that part number will appear, as illustrated below:

 

Select between Open and All by clicking the appropriate box. Type the RMA number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 

Find by Original Sales Order Number

If you select to find by Original Sales Order Number, the following screen will appear:

Select between Open and All by clicking the appropriate box. Type the Original Sales Order Number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 

Once your Find selection has been made, the RMA information will populate the screen as illustrated below:

1.2.2.1.4.2. Add a Standard RMA

Enter Sales Mgt/RMA Management/RMA Management Module  

The following screen will appear:

Depress the Add button. You will be prompted for your password. The following screen will appear:

Choose to create a Standard RMA or Stand-alone RMA.

 

 
 If you select to create a Standard RMA the following find screen will appear:  

 

 

Find Invoice Number by Invoice Number

To find an Invoice by Invoice Number, depress the Invoice Number selection. A list of invoices will appear.

Type the invoice number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 

Find Invoice Number by Customer

To find the Invoice Number by the Customer name, depress the Customer button. The following screen will appear:

Type the Customer name into the red box or highlight your selection and double click. A list of all of the invoices for that customer will appear:

 
 

Type the Invoice Number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 

Find Invoice Number by Packing List Number

To find the Invoice Number by Packing List Number, depress the Packing List button. A selection of Packing Lists will appear:

Type the Packing List number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 

Find Invoice Number by Original Sales Order

To find the Invoice Number by the Original Sales Order, depress the Original Sales Order button.The following screen will appear:

Type the original Sales Order into the red box or highlight your selection and double click. A list of invoices pertaining to the selected Sales Order will appear:

 
 

Type the invoice number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 
 

Find Invoice Number by Serial Number

To find the Invoice Number by the Serial Number, depress the Serial Number button.The following screen will appear:

Type a serial number into the red box. A list of invoices pertaining to the selected serial number will appear:

 
 

Type the invoice number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 
 

Once you’ve made your selection, the original information will populate the screen, as displayed below: 

Click on the RMA Ack box, to acknowledge the RMA. The date and your initials will appear.

Depress one of the three buttons at the bottom of the screen, Add Product, Add Part, or Add Miscellaneous. 

Add Product, Add Part, or Add Miscellaneous

If you depress the Add Product button, a list of all of the products included in the original Sales Order will appear, as displayed:

Type the Product Number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

If you selected Add Part or Add Miscellaneous, the same type of selection procedure will take place. Note that you can’t add a part or add miscellaneous unless the original order contained such.

 

 

Type the RMA quantity in a negative amount into the column. The quantity entered must be equal to or less than the original Sales Order.

If there are multiple manufacturers or locations for the part in the Inventory Control Quantity Info tab, the following selection list will appear:

Highlight the warehouse location and double click.

 

The completed screen will appear as follows:

Schedule Tab

Depress the schedule tab.The following screen will appear:



There are two modes available for completing a scheduled delivery for a product: Automatic and Manual. In the Automatic mode, ManEx will take a beginning date and a quantity to be delivered each period (Days, Weeks or Months) and schedule out the delivery using the Delivery Schedule Default Days which are setup in the Delivery Schedule Default Setup module. 


The following activities are available:

Sales Order Line number: Select the line number using the down arrow. Be sure that you’ve selected the line number which pertains to the re-work/replacement.

 
 
 

Automatic Scheduling. Pressing this button enables the scheduling box and places the scheduled date in the 1st Due Date box. The user may establish a default number of days from the current date setup in the Delivery Schedule Default Setup module. The user can then use that date, or enter the first (beginning delivery) date the customer expects to receive the order. The Delivery Qty screen allows the user to divide the shipment into multiple deliveries of equal parts. For example, if the order is for a total of 100 pieces, and the customer wishes delivery to be at the rate of 10 units each day, then the delivery quantity should be entered as 10. The next box allows the user to select the delivery intervals. The options are by day (DY), week (WK) or month (MO).

After selecting the delivery interval, pressing the SAVE button creates a line for each delivery date in the sequence requested.
 
In this screen, the user may further edit, delete or add lines.
 
Manual Scheduling. Pressing the Add Line button enables the delivery schedule box and places the cursor in the Due Date box. The user can then enter the first (beginning delivery) date the customer expects to receive the replacement. Next, the Ship Date (the date the order is to leave the user’s dock) will be entered by ManEx based on the transit days entered.  This date can then be modified by the user if a different date is desired. Then the scheduled quantity is entered.  The Shipped quantity will be completed by ManEx when the line has material shipped against it.  Additional lines may be added or deleted by pressing the appropriate button. The total number of units scheduled will be displayed at the bottom of the box, so the user can verify all units have been scheduled
 

A Line Item Footnote may be entered for comments on the delivery schedule for reference.


Depress the Pricing Tab. The following screen will appear:
 
 

There are three options on pricing.
 
1.      The user may enter zero for both the return and the re-work.  For further detail on how this affects the GL accounts see  Article #3397
2.      The user may enter full price for both the return and re-work.  For further detail on how this affects the GL accounts see Article #3396 .
3.      The user may enter zero on the return and a dollar amount for the re-work.

Enter the Price per unit in the Price column. Note that the price entered must be equal to or less than the original Sales Order price. The Extension column will update automatically, and will display as a negative.  Any extra line item charges will default in from the original invoice. But, the system will not allow you to add more extra charges to the Retun line item that did not exist on the original invoice.  Any additional charges that the users wants to add to the line item being shipped back out (positive line items) as needed for rework, etc... will be allowed.

Go to the Sales Type column, depress the Enter key. A list of Sales Types will appear: 

Select the Sales Type you wish to use for the Credit Memo.

 

The completed screen will appear as follows:

If you are NOT going to re-work or replace the order, depress the Save button and Exit the module.  If you are going to re-work or replace the order, refer to Add a Re-Work/Replacement procedures below: 

Add a Rework/Replacement

RMA Tab

While the RMA order is still open, depress the RMA tab. Depress one of the following buttons:  Add Product, Add Part or Add Miscellaneous.

If you depress the Add Product button, the following screen will appear:

Type in the Part Number or highlight your selection and double click. The Product will populate the screen.

If you selected Add Part or Add Miscellaneous, the same type of selection procedure will take place. Note that you can’t add a part or add miscellaneous unless the original order contained such.

 

 

Type the RMA quantitybeing re-worked or replaced in a positve amount into the column. The quantity entered must be equal to or less than the original Sales Order.

The part manufacturer screen will display if there is more than one manufacturer or location assigned to the product in the Inventory Control Quantity Info screen.

Highlight the appropriate line and double click.

 

 

If you want to accelerate the re-work or replacement with a higher priority than standard, go to the Line Status column and depress the Enter key. The following selection will appear: 

Select the appropriate priority for the re-work/replacement.

 

The completed screen will appear as follows:

Schedule Tab

Depress the schedule tab.The following screen will appear:

There are two modes available for completing a scheduled delivery for a product: Automatic and Manual. In the Automatic mode, ManEx will take a beginning date and a quantity to be delivered each period (Days, Weeks or Months) and schedule out the delivery using the Delivery Schedule Default Days which are setup in the Delivery Schedule Default Setup module.  
 

The following activities are available:

Sales Order Line number:  Select the line number using the down arrow. Be sure that you’ve selected the line number which pertains to the re-work/replacement.

Automatic Scheduling. Pressing this button enables the scheduling box and places the scheduled date in the 1st Due Date box. The user may establish a default number of days from the current date setup in the Delivery Schedule Default Setup module. The user can then use that date, or enter the first (beginning delivery) date the customer expects to receive the order. The Delivery Qty screen allows the user to divide the shipment into multiple deliveries of equal parts. For example, if the order is for a total of 100 pieces, and the customer wishes delivery to be at the rate of 10 units each day, then the delivery quantity should be entered as 10. The next box allows the user to select the delivery intervals. The options are by day (DY), week (WK) or month (MO).

After selecting the delivery interval, pressing the SAVE button creates a line for each delivery date in the sequence requested.
 

In this screen, the user may further edit, delete or add lines. 
 
Manual Scheduling. Pressing the Add Line button enables the delivery schedule box and places the cursor in the Due Date box. The user can then enter the first (beginning delivery) date the customer expects to receive the replacement. Next, the Ship Date (the date the order is to leave the user’s dock) will be entered by ManEx based on the transit days entered. This date can then be modified by the user if a different date is desired. Then the scheduled quantity is entered.The Shipped quantity will be completed by ManEx when the line has material shipped against it.Additional lines may be added or deleted by pressing the appropriate button. The total number of units scheduled will be displayed at the bottom of the box, so the user can verify all units have been scheduled.
 

A Line Item Footnote may be entered for comments on the delivery schedule for reference.

The completed screen will appear as follows:

Pricing Tab

Depress the Pricing tab. The following screen will display:

Then the unit price for the product can be entered. Note that the unit price for the re-work/replacement must be equal to or less than the original Sales Order price. Once entered, the extended price field is completed.  Any additional charges that the users want to add to the line item being shipped back out (postive line items) for rework cost, etc.  will be allowed.

Place the cursor in the Sales Type column and depress the Enter key.The following selection will appear: 

Select the appropriate sales type.

The user may select if the unit is taxable by clicking on the Tax box on the right side of the screen.

For Sales Order Items with no Tax, leave the Tax box unchecked. No further action is required.

 

To Manually add Tax (if not set up in Customer Information), enter line item and then in Pricing Screen click on Add Line and enter description of Sales Tax and Tax Amount manually.  A Sales Type for the appropriate Tax G/L number should be setup in Accounting so that it can be selected when entering the Sales Tax manually.  The full amount of the Tax will be Invoiced upon shipment of the first item so using manual sales tax entries may not be useful for shipments with multiple shipments against the same line item.

Checking the Tax box in Sales Order Pricing will not calculate or add US Tax for a line item unless the Shipping Address for the particular Customer selected in the Sales Order Header has been set up.  Shipping Address Tax Setup is done in the Tax and Shipping Mode screen in the Customer Information module.

Adding a US Sales Tax or a US Shipping Charge Tax in Customer Information requires that those items added be entered in System Setup under Sales Tax Authority Table.

If a particular Customer Ship To Address has more than one US Tax (such as a Sales, Use, Excise, etc. tax), then the taxes may be entered in System Setup individually and added individually to the appropriate Customer Ship To addresses.

If there is more than one US Tax setup for a Customer Ship To Address, Manex will add up the tax rates and apply the combined percentage to the pre-tax line item total. 
 

User CANNOT manually add Foreign tax to Sales Orders or Invoices.  The Foreign tax box must be checked for the Shipping Address for the particular Customer selected in the Sales Order Header. 

 

If the Foreign tax box is checked for the Shipping Address for the particular Customer selected in the Sales Order Header.  Pricing will be listed as follows on the Sales Order Acknowledgement, Invoice, RMA, and Credit Memo:  First the Product Sub-tot AMT, the Sales Discount (if applicable), the Freight AMT (if applicable), a SUB-TOTAL,  the GST TAX (Primary tax) (Note: the Primary tax will always be displayed even if it is zero, if a Secondary Tax is present), then a second Sub-Total,  PST TAX (secondary tax), and last the TOTAL.  If no PST tax (secondary Tax), Sales Discount, or Freight is involved, then no lines would print for these items.    See the  Foreign Tax Examples.xls  attachment to see how the Primary and Secondary taxes are calculated.

 

The Primary tax and Secondary tax is divided into the Sales tax and Shipping tax on the Sales Tax reports. 

 

For Example: 

Primary Tax (GST):  144*10% (sales tax) + 0 (no freight tax is calculated) =$14.40

Secondary Tax (PST):  144*8% (sales tax) + 12*8% (Freight tax)  =  $12.48

 

Divided into sales tax and freight tax:

Sales Tax: 144*10% (sales tax)  +  144*8% (sales tax)  =  $25.92

Freight Tax  0 (from primary tax)  +  12*8% (from secondary tax)  =  $0.96

If the user has completed the Pricing Screen for the product, then the pricing will be automatically entered.

Clicking on the "Add Line" button allows the user to enter additional charges for the product. These charges may carry a different unit price, and may be of any description.

As the information is completed, the total cost for the line item is carried to the bottom of the box, to be validated with the customer’s purchase order.

If a price is to be assessed as a lot charge rather than as a cost per unit charge, then the user may check (by clicking) the Lot box at the right of the screen. This will take the unit cost as a lot charge for the item without extending the units by the price. This may be used if a flat fee is charged for a number of parts.

A Non-inventory line added on this screen will be invoiced on the first shipment made for this sales order.

The completed screen will appear as follows:

Billing Tab

Clicking on the Billing screen tab brings up the following:

In this screen, a Bill-to address will be completed with the default address established in the Customer setup. The Bill-to address also may be selected from any other addresses entered in the Customer setup.The first prompt is to enter the Bill-to address. The user may accept the default address, or select from any address established in the Customer Module. All address information in the set up will be displayed when the down-arrow is pressed at the right side of the field:

After selecting the appropriate bill-to address, the information fields on the screen are populated with the correct data. 

Shipping Tab

Clicking on the Shipping screen tab brings up the following:

As in the Billing screen, the user may select from established ship-to addresses by pressing on the down-arrow at the right of the first field:

Once the ship-to address is established, the address fields are populated from the Customer file.  In addition to the address, the FOB, Ship Via, Customer Account and Delivery Time are also populated from the Customer File, if they were completed there.   If not, or the user wishes to change them, the user may select the appropriate response by clicking on the down-arrow next to the field, and viewing choices set up in the System Setup module.  NOTE:  The Cust Account No is NOT editable within the RMA module.

Notes Tab

In the last screen, the NOTES screen, provisions are made to establish RMA Notes, and RMA Acknowledgement notes. These notes are available in their respective sections.

The RMA Acknowledgement Footnote will appear on the Acknowledgement printout.

Note that when any note is entered on this screen, the screen tab NOTES turns red to indicate there is data in the notes.

Depress the Save button.

Note that the RMA Total in the RMA tab will update for the net difference between the material to be returned and the material to be re-worked/replaced, as illustrated below:

1.2.2.1.4.3. Add a Stand-Alone RMA

Enter Sales Mgt/RMA Management/RMA Management Module  

The following screen will appear:

Depress the Add button. You will be prompted for your password. The following screen will appear:

Choose to create a Standard RMA or Stand-alone RMA.

 

 

 If you select to create a Stand-alone RMA the following Screen will appear:

Type the Customer name into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 

Once you’ve made your selection, the original information will populate the screen, as displayed below: 

Click on the RMA Ack box, to acknowledge the RMA. The date and your initials will appear.

Depress one of the two buttons at the bottom of the screen, Add Product, or Add Part.  

Add Product, or Add Part.

If you depress the Add Product button, a list of all of the products will appear, as displayed:

The product numbers displayed are either only for "Standard Price", or the customers that are added into the customer list in the Sales Price List module.

Type the Product Number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

If you selected Add Part,  the same type of selection procedure will take place.

 

Type the RMA quantity in a negative amount into the column.

If there are multiple manufacturers or locations for the part in the Inventory Control Quantity Info tab, the following selection list will appear:

Highlight the warehouse location and double click.

 

The completed screen will appear as follows:

Depress the Pricing Tab. The following screen will appear: 


There are three options on pricing.
 
1.      The user may enter zero for both the return and the re-work.  For further detail on how this affects the GL accounts see  Article #3397
2.      The user may enter full price for both the return and re-work.  For further detail on how this affects the GL accounts see Article #3396 .
3.      The user may enter zero on the return and a dollar amount for the re-work.

Enter the Price per unit in the Price column.  The Extension column will update automatically, and will display as a negative. 

Go to the Sales Type column, depress the Enter key. A list of Sales Types will appear: 

Select the Sales Type you wish to use for the Credit Memo.

 

The completed screen will appear as follows:

 

If you are NOT going to re-work or replace the order, depress the Save button and Exit the module.  If you are going to re-work or replace the order, refer to Add a Re-Work/Replacement procedures below: 

Add a Rework/Replacement

RMA Tab

While the RMA order is still open, depress the RMA tab. Depress one of the following buttons:  Add Product, or Add Part. 

If you depress the Add Product button, the following screen will appear:

Type in the Part Number or highlight your selection and double click. The Product will populate the screen.

If you selected Add Part, the same type of selection procedure will take place. 

 

Type the RMA quantity being re-worked or replaced in a positve amount into the column.

The part manufacturer screen will display if there is more than one manufacturer or location assigned to the product in the Inventory Control Quantity Info screen.

Highlight the appropriate line and double click.

 

If you want to accelerate the re-work or replacement with a higher priority than standard, go to the Line Status column and depress the Enter key. The following selection will appear: 

Select the appropriate priority for the re-work/replacement.

 

The completed screen will appear as follows:

Schedule Tab

Depress the schedule tab.The following screen will appear:

 

There are two modes available for completing a scheduled delivery for a product: Automatic and Manual. In the Automatic mode, ManEx will take a beginning date and a quantity to be delivered each period (Days, Weeks or Months) and schedule out the delivery. 

The following activities are available:

Sales Order Line number:  Select the line number using the down arrow. Be sure that you’ve selected the line number which pertains to the re-work/replacement.
 

Automatic Scheduling. Pressing this button enables the scheduling box and places the scheduled date in the 1st Due Date box. The user may establish a default number of days from the current date in the System Setup. The user can then use that date, or enter the first (beginning delivery) date the customer expects to receive the order. The Delivery Qty screen allows the user to divide the shipment into multiple deliveries of equal parts. For example, if the order is for a total of 100 pieces, and the customer wishes delivery to be at the rate of 10 units each day, then the delivery quantity should be entered as 10. The next box allows the user to select the delivery intervals. The options are by day (DY), week (WK) or month (MO).

After selecting the delivery interval, pressing the SAVE button creates a line for each delivery date in the sequence requested.
 

In this screen, the user may further edit, delete or add lines. 
 
Manual Scheduling. Pressing the Add Line button enables the delivery schedule box and places the cursor in the Due Date box. The user can then enter the first (beginning delivery) date the customer expects to receive the replacement.Next, the Ship Date (the date the order is to leave the user’s dock) will be entered by ManEx based on the transit days entered. This date can then be modified by the user if a different date is desired. Then the scheduled quantity is entered.The Shipped quantity will be completed by ManEx when the line has material shipped against it. Additional lines may be added or deleted by pressing the appropriate button. The total number of units scheduled will be displayed at the bottom of the box, so the user can verify all units have been scheduled.
 

A Line Item Footnote may be entered for comments on the delivery schedule for reference.

The completed screen will appear as follows:

Pricing Tab

Depress the Pricing tab. The following screen will display:
 

Then the unit price for the product can be entered.  Once entered, the extended price field is completed.

Place the cursor in the Sales Type column and depress the Enter key.  The following selection will appear: 

Select the appropriate sales type.

The user may select if the unit is taxable by clicking on the Tax box on the right side of the screen.

For Sales Order Items with no Tax, leave the Tax box unchecked. No further action is required.

 

To Manually add Tax (if not set up in Customer Information), enter line item and then in Pricing Screen click on Add Line and enter description of Sales Tax and Tax Amount manually.  A Sales Type for the appropriate Tax G/L number should be setup in Accounting so that it can be selected when entering the Sales Tax manually.  The full amount of the Tax will be Invoiced upon shipment of the first item so using manual sales tax entries may not be useful for shipments with multiple shipments against the same line item.

Checking the Tax box in Sales Order Pricing will not calculate or add Tax for a line item unless the Shipping Address for the particular Customer selected in the Sales Order Header has been set up.  Shipping Address Tax Setup is done in the Tax and Shipping Mode screen under the Ship To tab in the  Customer Information  Module.

Adding a Sales Tax or a Shipping Charge Tax in Customer Information requires that those items added be entered in System Setup under Sales Tax Authority Table.

If a particular Customer Ship To Address has more than one Tax (such as a Sales, Use, Excise, etc. tax), then the taxes may be entered in System Setup individually and added individually to the appropriate Customer Ship To addresses.

If there is more than one Tax setup for a Customer Ship To Address, Manex will add up the tax rates and apply the combined percentage to the pre-tax line item total. 

If the user has completed the Pricing Screen for the product, then the pricing will be automatically entered.

Clicking on the Add Line button allows the user to enter additional charges for the product. These charges may carry a different unit price, and may be of any description.

As the information is completed, the total cost for the line item is carried to the bottom of the box, to be validated with the customer’s purchase order.

If a price is to be assessed as a lot charge rather than as a cost per unit charge, then the user may check (by clicking) the Lot box at the right of the screen. This will take the unit cost as a lot charge for the item without extending the units by the price. This may be used if a flat fee is charged for a number of parts.

A Non-inventory line added on this screen will be invoiced on the first shipment made for this sales order.

The completed screen will appear as follows:

Billing Tab

Clicking on the Billing screen tab brings up the following:

In this screen, a Bill-to address will be completed with the default address established in the Customer setup. The Bill-to address also may be selected from any other addresses entered in the Customer setup.The first prompt is to enter the Bill-to address. The user may accept the default address, or select from any address established in the Customer Module. All address information in the set up will be displayed when the down-arrow is pressed at the right side of the field:

After selecting the appropriate bill-to address, the information fields on the screen are populated with the correct data. 

Shipping Tab

Clicking on the Shipping screen tab brings up the following:

As in the Billing screen, the user may select from established ship-to addresses by pressing on the down-arrow at the right of the first field:

Once the ship-to address is established, the address fields are populated from the Customer file. In addition to the address, the FOB, Ship Via, Customer Account and Delivery Time are also populated from the Customer File, if they were completed there. If not, or the user wishes to change them, the user may select the appropriate response by clicking on the down-arrow next to the field, and viewing choices set up in the System Setup module.

Notes Tab

In the last screen, the NOTES screen, provisions are made to establish RMA Notes, and RMA Acknowledgement notes. These notes are available in their respective sections.

The RMA Acknowledgement Footnote will appear on the Acknowledgement printout.

Note that when any note is entered on this screen, the screen tab NOTES turns red to indicate there is data in the notes.

Depress the Save button.

Note that the RMA Total in the RMA tab will update for the net difference between the material to be returned and the material to be re-worked/replaced, as illustrated below:
 

 

1.2.2.1.4.4. Edit/Delete a RMA

Enter Sales Mgt/RMA Management/RMA Management Module  

The following screen will appear:

Depress the Open/Find Record, to find the record you want to Edit. For further assistance on finding an RMA see Article #822.

Depress the Edit button.You will be prompted for your password. The fields which can be edited will appear in darkened black.

RMA tab

You may edit the following fields:

RMA Date, Buyer Name, Customer PO #, uncheck or check the RMA Acknowledgement box or change the line status.

To change the line status, scroll to the right, highlight the Status box and depress the Enter key. The following selection will appear:

Select the desired status.

By depressing on the Add Product, Add Part or Add Miscellaneous directive button, you may add such only if the original Sales Order contained it.

To delete a line, highlight and depress the Delete Line button. The following message will appear:

To delete the line, depress the Yes button.

Schedule Tab

In the schedule tab, you may change the schedule, add a line or delete a line, change the 1st Due Date, change the Transit Days or add a Line Item footnote.

Pricing Tab

In the pricing tab, you may change the Unit Price, (it must be equal to the original Sales Order price or less), change the Sales Type by highlighting that field and selecting from the list displayed, check or uncheck the Tax box, check or uncheck the Lot box, or add a new price Item Line.

To delete a Price Item line, highlight that line and depress the Delete Line button.

Billing Tab

In the Billing tab, you may change the selection of the Customer’s Billing address.

Shipping Tab

In the Shipping Tab, you may change the Customer’s Ship To address and Attention selection, change the FOB terms, the Ship Via selection and/or the Delivery time.  Note:  The Cust Account No is NOT editable in the RMA module.

Notes Tab

In the Notes tab, you may add a RMA note or a RMA Acknowledgement Note.

Be sure to depress the Save button after any edit changes or deletions.  If you don’t want to save your changes, depress the Abandon changes button.

1.2.2.1.5. Reports for RMA Mgmt
1.2.2.1.5.1. Return Material Authorization Reports

To obtain the RMA reports, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen. 



The following screen will appear:

Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

Highlight the desired report and then depress the Option tab if applicable. 
 
Depress the OK button.
 

RMA Acknowledgment

The following report wil be printed:   The RMA Note is the note added under the RMA Acknowledgement Footnote, and the RMA Footnote is the note added in the Standard Footnote Setup.  The RMA Note that is entered within the RMA Notes is for internal use only and will NOT be displayed on report.

RMA Acknowledgment & Delivery Schedule

The following report will be printed:

 

1.2.2.1.6. FAQ's for RMA Mgmt
Facts and Questions for the  RMA Mgmt Module
1.2.2.2. Open Return Material Authorization List

Enter Sales Mgt/RMA Management/Open RMA List Module, to see a listing of open RMA’s:
 
Note:  After activation, "RMA Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access. 
 

The default is for the Open RMAs. To see all of them, choose the ALL radial at the top of the screen.  The user may sort on the following fields by depressing the title bar:  Age, RMA Number, Customer, PO Number or RMA Date.

 

To obtain a printout, depress the Reports button.  The report will go directly to the default printer.

1.2.2.3. Return Material Authorization Accounting

Overview regarding Return Material Authorization Accounting

 

No Journal Entry is created in the RMA module, however the system is collecting the JE components from this module as follows:

 

Assume that the original sale was for 10 units @ 100.00 each, with a standard cost of 80.00 each and freight charged the customer of 15.00.

 

At the time the user selects the original Invoice number in the Return Material Authorization module, the system “remembers” the original accounting entry that was created at the time the original Invoice was printed, which was:

 

Debit          Accounts Receivable – Trade    1,015.00

Debit          Cost of Goods Sold                    800.00

Credit         Sales                                       1,000.00

Credit         Finished Goods Inventory              800.00

Credit         Freight Income                               15.00 

 

When the user enters the “return quantity” (the one entered as a negative quantity), the system will remember that the original cost of sales was 80.00 per unit.

 

The user then enters the pricing on the item to be returned on the Pricing page of the RMA module. 

 

The pricing entered can be any amount up to the amount of the original pricing of 100.00 per unit.  And so the journal entry component for the debit to the sales account is 2X 100.00 = 200.00, in this example.

 

The user selects the sales and cost of goods general ledger accounts to be used per the Sales Type column:

 

And so, the sales account number selected will be debited for 200.00 once the journal entry is created, upon the actual receipt of the returned item.  And the related Cost of Goods sold account will be credited for the 160.00.

 

If the return is to be reworked and then returned back to the customer, the user creates a second line item on the RMA using a positive quantity which is in actuality creating the RMA Sales Order and an eventual invoice upon shipment.


The journal entry and the applicable Credit Memo for the return is created in the Return Material Authorization Receiving module.  (The value is calculated against the total value of the RMA minus any credit memos created against the invoice, whether manually or via RMA).  On this screen, the user indicates the amount of freight to be credited, such as a pro rata 2/10 of 15.00, or 3.00, for example:

 

After the user types in the quantity received on the Detail page and depresses the Save button, several things happen all at once:

 

1.       The Journal Entry is created as follows and forwards to the Release & Post to GL module:

 

 

Debit          Sales      200.00

Debit          WIP        160.00

Debit          Freight       3.00

Credit         Accounts Receivable     203.00

Credit         COGS                            160.00

 

  1. The Credit Memo is created for an amount of 203.00 total.  If the original invoice is still open, the amount of the credit memo will net against the original invoice leaving an open balance of 812.00, 1015.00 minus 203.00.  If the invoice is paid than a credit balance will appear on the A/P Aging for the unapplied amount up to 203.00.
  2. The e mail trigger is activated announcing that a Credit Memo has been created.
  3. The ReWork Work Order is created.
  4. The returned material is placed into WIP.

 

Once the Rework Work order is released, the user may opt to go into the Kitting module and add line shortages which will be included in the Material Variance once the Kit is closed.  
 
 
From this point forward, the accounting is the same as for a regular order.
 
 
   
1.2.3. Sales Price List Information
1.2.3.1. Prerequisites for Sales Price List Information
Security

After activation, "Price Information" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

A Product The PRICING must refer to a Product, which must be entered into the Inventory Item Master
Sales Price Types

The Sales Type & Price Itemization  must define the types of pricing to be included in the price break screens.

A Customer

The Customer to be added to the pricing module must be entered in the Customer Information module. 

1.2.3.2. Introduction for Sales Price List Information

The PRICING Module is used to establish the default pricing for a product. This pricing will be used as the default pricing for sales orders created for the product. Separate pricing may be established for multiple customers for the same product, and there may up to seven price breaks for each customer.

1.2.3.3. Fields & Definitions for Sales Price List Information
1.2.3.3.1. Part Number Tab

Part Number Information Tab field definitions

Class

The Part Class of the Product, Taken from the item master based on the product chosen (not Editable).

Type

The Part Type of the Product, Taken from the item master based on the product chosen (not Editable).

Part Number

The Part Number of the Product(not Editable). 

Rev The Revision of the Product (not Editable). 
Description The Part Description of the Product, Taken from the item master (not Editable)
Sales Type The selection of the type of sale to which the Product pertains.  This selection will also point the invoicing to the desired sales and cost of sales general ledger account for those users with accounting installed.
Customer List The list of customers assigned for the chosen product. Note:  If the user enters specific customers in the Customer List, then this product will only be available for that customer when creating a Sales Order.     
"Standard Price" will be defaulted into the Customer List if the part has never had a customer added.  Once a price is setup for a customer the "Standard Price" can be removed. 
Price Markup This is the mark up percentage to be used for the customer displayed.
Warranty This field displays the number of days for the warranty for the customer displayed.

 

 

1.2.3.3.2. Price Breaks Tab

 Prices Breaks tab field definitions

Customer The customer the pricing is assigned to.  
From The beginning range of the price break being viewed.     
To The ending range of the price break being viewed. 
Amort Qty

The quantity of products to be delivered over which charge is amortized. 

Amort Amt

The dollar amount of the charge to be amortized.  

Shipped Qty

The amount of product shipped for date, used to calculate when the amortization charge is no longer applied to the price of the product.

Sales Price Breakdown The nature of the charges for the product, taken from a selection established in the system setup under Sales.      
Amount

The dollar amount being charged for the sales item displayed.

Amortization Charge

The unit price being added for amortization (until depleted).

Total Unit Price

The combined dollar amount of the pricing charges. 

                                                             

1.2.3.3.3. Part Information Note Tab

1.2.3.4. How To ..... for Sales Price List Information
1.2.3.4.1. Find a Sales Price List

Enter Sales Mgt/Sales Price List Information Module   

The Part Number Information screen is presented.

Pressing the Find Button displays the following sequences:

First, a dialogue box appears asking how the user wishes to find or search for an existing pricing: by entering the PRODUCT Number, or by entering PART CLASS.  Note that the part number must have been set up in the item master. 

 

 

If the user elects to find a PRICING by the Product Number, a screen appears listing Products in numerical order, along with the Rev, Class, Type and Description. The user may elect to show only Active products, or Inactive products, or all products by checking one or both action boxes. The user may also select Make parts, Buy Parts or Both. The user selects the Product by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected product.

Then the PRICING Product screen is populated with the appropriate data.

 

If the user elects to find a PRICING by the Part Class, a screen appears listing all of the part classes in alphabetical order. The user selects the Class by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected Class.

Then the user finds a Product Number, the same as above, except that only the products associated with the selected class are shown.

Then the PRICING Product screen is populated with the appropriate data. 

 

 

1.2.3.4.2. Edit/Add Sales Price List Information

Enter Sales Mgt/Sales Price List Information  

The following screen will appear:

In this screen, the user may elect to add additional customer pricing for a product by using the Edit function.  Note:  Only the customers listed here will be available for this Product within the Sales Order module.  

Depress the Find Action button to find a Product.  See Article #1652 for further information on how to find a record.

After a Product has been found or entered, it may be edited by selecting the Edit Action button. Once the password is entered, the ADD, Delete and Reorder buttons are activated.

Pressing the ADD button then activates the Customer Field for the user to enter a customer name, or pressing on the down arrow brings up a list of customers from which to choose.

Clicking on a customer adds that customer to the product pricing information.

Clicking on Reorder reveals buttons by each customer and the order may be changed by dragging the buttons to the desired order. When sorting is completed, pressing the Done button completes the action.

Clicking on Delete allows the removal of a customer from the product information.

Add Sales Type

Depressing the down arrow next to the field will display a list of sales types:

Select the desired Sales Type.

Add Price Markup Percentage

If applicable, enter the markup percentage in the box.

Add Warranty Information

If applicable, enter the number of days for the warranty.

The completed Part Number Information tab will look like this:

Depress the Save Action button to save changes or the Abandon changes Action button to abandon changes.

ADD PRICING

After completing the PART NUMBER INFORMATION tab, the user may (clicks on) to the PRICES BREAKS SCREEN.

Then the Price Break screen for a specific customer is presented to the user, based on the customer selected in the first screen:

And the Add Action button becomes active. If the user is creating the first pricing screen, then the Edit Action button is not yet available.

The user may create up to seven different pricing levels for each customer. To add the first pricing screen, the Add Action button must be pressed and the password entered.

The “Price 1” screen is activated, allowing the user to enter pricing for the customer shown.

The first prompt is for the beginning number of items to be priced, defaulting to one (1). The next field is for the upper number to be included in the price structure, e.g., 100 (pricing is for 1 to 100 items).You can input pricing up to 999,999, but you are limited to seven price breaks.

Then the user is prompted for the amortization quantity and amount. This is the amount of charges to be amortized over a fixed quantity of parts, and to be included in the price of the parts until the amortization is exhausted. When both these values are entered, the cost is automatically calculated.

The cursor then moves to the first Sales Price Breakdown section where the user may define the pricing used for individual units. The definition of the pricing is established in the System Setup, and may be selected with the “pulldown arrow” and clicking on a definition, or typing the definition.  After selecting a definition, the pricing associated with the definition is entered. (e.g., the definition might be “Total Material Cost” and $350 per unit. Or, perhaps a definition simply called “Standard Price” is used.)

On the next line, another pricing definition may be included, e.g. “Priority Charge”, with an additional charge of $50 per unit.

Manex will continue to total up the unit pricing and show it on the screen.

The completed screen looks like this:

When the user has completed the information for the 1st price break, the screen is either saved or canceled.  The following message will appear asking if the user wants to add another price break.

If there is another price category to be added, depress the Yes button.

The user may then add an additional price break, which will default to a beginning quantity equal to the top of the first price break quantity plus one. The fields used in the first price break will be carried over to the second price. Changing the definition in any price break screen changes all the others for that product.

Pricing for a different customer for the SAME product may be established by selecting the customer in the first screen, then adding a new price break for that customer.

After completing this PRICING customer information screen, the user may tab (clicks on) to the Part Information Note screen.

The Part Information screen for the product is presented to the user, and may be edited. Information placed in this screen is common to all customers, (it is based on information about the product), and the Tab Label turns RED.

Press the Save Action button Save new or edited data.

Press the Abandon changes Action button to Cancel any new or edited information without saving the information in the database.

Press the Exit Action button to exit the current screen and returns the user to the previous screen.

1.2.3.5. Reports - Sales Price List

To obtain the Sales Price List reports, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen. 

The following screen will appear:

Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

Highlight the desired report and then depress the Option tab if applicable. 

 

Sales Product Number Report

Highlight the Sales Product Number Report and the following option screen will appear:  Select the view report by Part Number or By Customer.  

Depress the Option tab.  Select the Part Number(s) to appear on the report by highlighting the part number and depressing the > button.  To select all part numbers depress the >> button.

Depress the OK button.

 

The following report wil be printed:

Price Information Report

Highlight the Price Information Report and the following option screen will appear:  Select the view report by Part Number or By Customer.  

Depress the Option tab.  Select the Part Number(s) to appear on the report by highlighting the part number and depressing the > button.  To select all part numbers depress the >> button.

Depress the OK button.

 

The following report wil be printed:

1.2.4. Order Configurator (OPTIONAL Module)
1.2.4.1. Prerequisites for Order Configurator

ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase. This module is designed to aid the user in the formation of Sales Orders. To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com\contactus.aspx


After activation, the "Order Configuartion" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access. 


 Customer
The Customer database must be established for customers in the Sales Order Mgt module. 
 Setup
The Order Configuration Setup must be completed as detailed in the Order Configuration Setup.
 Sales Price
Sales price list information must be set up in the Sales Price List Information module  for the customer selected.
Class & Type
Class & Type must have been entered within the System Setup, Inventory Part Class module.
Inventory Parts
All of the Part number must have been entered within the  Inventory Control Managment module.
 
 
1.2.4.2. Introduction for Order Configurator
This module is designed to aid the user in the formation of Sales Orders.  First the user sets up the prospective customer in the Prospect tab of the Order Configuration module. This can be automatically forwarded to the Customer Information module. Then the user sets up the Order Configurator in the Order Configuration Setup module.  Then the user enters the Price List Information module and selects the components of the configuration, and enters pricing for the Price breaks, for that new prospective customer.  Once this is accomplished, the user enters the Order Configuration module and selects the class, type, description and part number.  If it’s a new part number, the information will forward automatically to the Inventory Control module as a Make Part.  The user may also elect to set up a Bill of Materials automatically, once the configuration is complete. 
1.2.4.3. Fields & Definitions for Order Configurator
1.2.4.3.1. Order Configuration & Price Break Tab

Order Configurator & Price Break tab Field Definitions

Customer

The name of the customer for which the Order Configuration was created.

Config Date

The date on which the Order Configuration was created.

If lit in red, depressing this button will display a note about the Order Configuration
Class

This is the product classification.

Type

This is the product type within the classification.

Description

This is the description for theproduct.

Part Number

This is the Order Configuration number assigned to the part.

Rev

This is the revision number pertaining to the Part Number.

The user depresses this button to create a Bill of Materials for the Order Configuration.

Price Break section:

Qty

This is the quantity for the price break. 

Standard price

This is the calculated Standard price from the Features and Options screen pertaining to the quantity per entered.  This field is not editable. 

Sales Price

This is the calculated Sales Price pulled from the Feature & Option screen pertaining to the quantity per entered.  It will also calculate in the price information from the Other Charge section. Every time you change or enter a new Option or Other Charge $ the Sales Price will recalculate. The user does have the option to re-enter/over-write this amount if needed.

Add price Break (Button)

This is the button used to add a new Price Break.

Delete Price Break (Button)

This is the button used to delete a Price Break.

Other Charge section:

Description

This is the description of the Other Charge.

Sales Price

This is the Sales Price pertaining to the Other Charge.

Add (Button)

This is the button used to Add a new Other Charge.

Delete (Button)

This is the button used to Delete an Other Charge.

Other Charge Total

This is the total of Other Charges.

 

1.2.4.3.2. Features & Options Tab

Features & Options Tab Field Defintions

 

Features Section

 Req  A check in this box denotes that the feature is required
 Excl A check in this box denotes that this feature is not an option/excluded
 Description

This is a description of the feature.

Options Section

Req

A check in this box denotes that the option is required.

Part Number

This is the Part Number per the Inventory Master. 

Rev

This is the number of the revision pertaining to the Part Number.

Part Class

This is the classification of the Part Number listed on this line.

Part Type

This is the type within the classification pertaining to the Part Number listed on this line.

Qty Per

The is the quantity number needed for the Part Number listed on this line.

Extended Quantity

This is the Price Break quantity highlighted in the Order Configurator & Price Break tab multiplied by the Quantity Per.
Standard Cost This is the Standard Cost for the Part Number listed on this line item.  This is defaulted in from the Inventory Control module.  This field is read only.
Standard Price This is the Standard Price for the Part Number listed on this line item. This is defaulted in from the price entered in the Sales Price List Information module for the price break quantity highlighted in the Order Configurator & Price Break tab multiplied by the extended qty.  This field is read only.
Sale Price

This is the Sales Price for the Part Number listed on this line item.  This field is editable.

Option Total

The total of the Standard Price and Sale Price columns.

 

 

                       

 

1.2.4.3.3. Prospect Tab

Prospect Tab Field Definitions

Prospect screen is where you have the ability to set up a prospective Customer into the system.  Then when needed Transfer the Customer information directly into the Customer Information module.

Prospect This is the name of the new prospective customer
Phone This is the phone number of the prospective customer
Fax

The is the fax number of the new prospective customer.

This button is used to transfer the prospect information into the Customer Information module.Note:If you set up the customer in this way, you will still have to go into the Customer Information module to set up FOB, Ship Via, Ship Charge, Account Number, Transit Days, Delivery Time, Sales Tax, Shipping Charge Tax, Territory, Sales Discount Type, Reseller Number, Terms, Credit Status, Credit Limit, Shipping Instructions and Profile.

Bill To

This is the prospective customer’s billing address.

Ship To

This is the prospective customer’s ship to address.

Depressing this button will allow the user to add a new customer contact.

Depressing this button will allow the user to delete a customer contact. 

Last Name

This is the last name of the customer contact.

First Name

The first name of the customer contact.

Title

This is the title of the customer contact, such as Buyer, etc.

Phone

This is the phone number of the customer contact.

E-mail This is the E-mail address of the customer contact.
Fax This is the fax number of the customer contact.

 

 

 

1.2.4.4. How To ..... for Order Configurator
1.2.4.4.1. Adding a New Prospect Customer

 

Enter Sales Mgt/Order Configurator/Configuration  

The following screen will appear:

Depress the Prospect Tab. Depress the Add button.  Enter your password. 

Type in the Prospect name, Phone number and Fax number.  Type in the Bill To and Ship to addresses.

Depress the Add button in the middle of the screen to enter the customer contact.

Depress the Save Action button.

Depress the Transfer to Customer button to forward the Prospect information into the customer tables.  The following message will appear:

Note:If you set up the customer in this way, you will still have to go into the Customer Information module to set up FOB, Ship Via, Ship Charge, Account Number, Transit Days, Delivery Time, Sales Tax, Shipping Charge Tax, Territory, Sales Discount Type, Reseller Number, Terms, Credit Status, Credit Limit, Shipping Instructions and Profile.

 

 

1.2.4.4.2. Add/Edit Order Configuration Setup

Enter Sales Mgt/Order Configurator/Configuration Setup Module.

This section is used to setup configuration by Type, then by features, then by Part Numbers.These defaults will be used in the Order Configuration Module.

 

The following screen will be displayed:

Depress the Add Record icon.

The system is going to require you to enter in the Class, Type, Description and Customer.

At this point the user has the option to leave the Routing field blank or the user can enter a part number of an existing assembly in inventory, by depressing the Edit button, select the desired assembly from the find screen.  The system will then automatically copy the routing from the selected assembly when the “Create BOM” button has been activated within the Order Configuration module (see below section).

Save the record and the completed screen will appears as follows:

 

To edit, highlight the desired Product Type. Depress the Edit Action button. The system will allow you to edit the Class, and Type.  Depres the Save Action button to save changes or depress the Abandon changes Action button to abandon changes. 

To delete an item, highlight that item. Depress the Delete Action button.

 

The second screen is the Product Feature Setup. This is where you will setup the Product Features List Descriptions.

Depress the Add Record icon. Then enter in the desired Description.

Depress the Save Record Action button and the completed screen will appear as follows:

To Edit, highlight the item, depress the Edit Action button, type in the desired changes and depress the Save Record Action button.

To Delete, highlight the item, depress the Delete Record Action button.

 

The third screen is the Order Configuration Setup. This is where you select what inventory part numbers will be assigned to each Product Type.

Depress the down arrow at the right of the Class, Type, Description field. All of the Product Types will then become available for selection.

Select the desired Product Type. Then depress the Edit Record icon.

The Add & Delete Feature and Add & Delete Option buttons will then become available.

Depress the ‘Add Feature’ button. The available Product Features will be displayed.

You may select more than one Feature at a time to add. Highlight the items, while holding the Control key down. Depress the OK button.

The features you selected will populate the Feature side of the screen.

 

The “Excl” column has been added to this screen.  Meaning if the highlighted feature has Excl marked it can have only one option selected within right section. Selecting a second option would uncheck the first checked option.

Highlight the Feature for which you want to add options.

Depress the Add Option button.  The following selection screen will appear:

Go through the process and add as many desired Inventory Part numbers to the Options section.

 

Then mark which options are to be defaulted as Req.

Scroll to the right of the Options sections and enter in the desired Qty Per. This will be the default Qty Per the user will see when they depress the ‘Edit Config” button within the Sales Order module (the user will be able to edit if needed).  This amount will also default the Qty Per within the Order Configuration screen.

The completed screen should appear as follows:

1.2.4.4.3. Finding an Order Configuration

Enter Sales Mgt/Order Configurator/Configuration    

The following screen will appear:

Depressing the Find button will bring up a selection screen, as follows:

If the user selects Find by Config Part Number, an Order Configuration list will display:

Type the Part Number into the red box or highlight and double click to select.

 

If the user selects Find by Customer, a list of customers with Order Configurations will display:

Type the Customer Name into the red box or highlight the selection and double click.

 

A list of Order Configurations pertaining to that customer will display: 

Type the Part Number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 

If the user finds by Product Type, a list of products with Order Configurations will display: 

Type the Part Number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 
 

 

1.2.4.4.4. Adding a New Order Configuration

 

Enter Sales Mgt/Order Configurator/Configuration  

The following screen will appear:

Go into the Sales Price List Information module. Using the Find Record Action button, find a Part Number. Depress the Edit Action button.  You will be prompt for your password.  Depress the Add Button located under the Customer List Section and add the prospective customer to this part number.  Depress the Save record Action button.

Note:  If the product only has standard price without any other customer in the list, then the system will use the standard price to calculate price later in SO or in Order configuration modules.

Add the applicable Price Breaks.

Return to the Configurator module. Within the Order Configuration & Price Break tab, depress the Add Record Action button.

You will be prompted for your password.

A Product Type list as set up in Order Configuration Setup, will appear:

Highlight the Product Type you desire and double click.

The following information will populate the screen based on what was entered within the Order Configuration Setup module.

Type in the Part Number. Type in the Revision number and depress the Enter key.

If you want to record a note regarding this Order Configuration, depress the Config Note button.The following screen will appear:

Depress the Edit Action button. Type in the note.  Depress the Save Action button.  Depress the Exit Action button.  The Config Note button will light up in red.

In the Price Break section, type in the Break Quantities. (The standard cost will default in from the Sales Price List Information module).  The total Sale Price will default in from the Features & Options screen.   To add another Price Break, depress the Add Price Break button.

To add an Other Charge, depress the Add button at the bottom of the Other Charge section.  Type in the Description of the Other Charge.  Type in the Sales Price of the Other Charge.

The completed tab will appear as follows:

Highlight the Price Break quantity you are interested in. Depress the Features & Options tab. The following screen will appear:
 

Highlight the feature in which you are interested. The part numbers and information assigned to that feature within the Order Configuration Setup  will populate the screen.

Type in the quantity per for each item. The extended quantity will automatically update.

The Standard Price information will forward from the Sales Price List Information module for that particular part number.

Then type in the Sales Price for each item. 

Repeat the above steps in the Order Configuration & Price Break tab and in the Features & Options tab until the Sales Price has been added to all of the Price Breaks.

Depress the Order Configuration & Price Break tab, notice that the Standard Price updated in this tab. 

Depress the Save Action button.

Note that the act of saving the Order Configuration has also created a new make Part number in the Inventory Control Master. Enter that module and complete the addition of the new part number.  Please refer to the Inventory Control Management manual to assist you in this task.  It is especially important that the standard cost and warehouse information be entered into the Inventory Master.

The Create BOM button has now become available.

Depress the Create BOM button, the following message will then appear. 

The system has now setup a new Bill of Materials for this Part number.

1.2.4.4.5. Adding Configurations To Sales Orders

The user would open a sales order, and select the button called “Add Config” to add a configurable product. Then they can select from an already established “configuration type” as created in the Configuration Setup. Once the configuration is completed, the components of the configuration then become line items on the sales order. The configured assembly will show as a miscellaneous line item. The pricing should be either:

  1. The configuration line is manually priced by the user as required.
  2. The component lines would carry the pricing from the Sales Pricing Module.

Once the Sales Order is saved, it will stand as a normal sales order, and any further changes would be made in the normal edit mode without further involvement with the configuration module. This would include the ability to delete the original Configuration Type, if desired, just leaving the selected components.

Enter the Sales Order Management Module

The following screen will be displayed:

Depress the Add Record Icon, enter your password.

Begin processing the order as you would a normal Sales Order record. Select the Customer Name, Buyer, etc. . .

Depress the ‘Add Config’ button located at the bottom of the screen. The following selection screen will appear.

Note: that only Product Types associated with the selected Customer (or Standard Price) record within the Order Configuration Setup module will be pulled forward into this selection screen.

Make your desired selection by double-clicking on the record. The following information will be pulled forward into the Sales Order module.

Enter in the Order Qty.

Enter in the Schedule information.

Enter in the Pricing information.

Return to the Sales order Main Screen.  Depress the ‘Edit Config’ button located at the bottom of the screen.

The associated Configuration information will be displayed.

Within this screen you will be able to make needed changes to the Qty Per and Req column if needed.  The Extended Qty column will be calculated based on the Order Qty entered on the Sales Order.

Once saved, the only editing possible is to the individual lines on the Sales Order, the same as on a regular Sales order.

Depress the Save changes Action button and Exit the above screen.  The system will then proceed to display the selection screen for each Part number. 

Select the desired AVL Location you wish inventory to be pulled from upon shipping.  If no inventory is available a demand will be displayed in MRP.  Note; each part number will be displayed in the Blue header bar.

The Schedule information for each item will be the same as the added Config Line item.

Each line item will pull the pricing information forward from the Sales Price List Information module.

Note:  While a user can include more than one configuration, it is not advised for ease of use during packing and shipping.

Save the record.  The Sales Order Acknowledgement report will display as follows:

1.2.4.4.6. Creating a Packing List for Configuration Sales Order

Using the Packing list to ship the configuration requires the shipping clerk to ship each item equally.

If any of the items in the configuration are serialized, the user will have to enter the serial numbers for the line item(s) accordingly. So user will need to prepare for this by devising a system of capturing serial numbers before they are boxed up with the configuration. There can’t be a collection of serialization of the configuration part.

Enter the Packing List Management module

Depress the Add Record Action button.  The following find selections will appear:

Depress the Add by Sales Order. Highlight the Sales Order Number or enter Sales Order Number in the Red box  The Customer information will populate the Packing List main screen.

Enter the Detail tab.  Depress the ‘Add sales order item(s)’ button. The following screen will be displayed.

Select configuration items desired. You can either enter in each ship qty individually, or use the ‘Ship Set’ button.

If you depress the "Ship Set" button, the following message will display.

Select Yes, then enter in the desired Ship Set qty.

The system will automatically calculate each Ship Qty based on the Qty per entered within the Sales Order module.

If the ship quantity exceeds the backorder or available qty, the quantity would be reduced to that available. This ‘Ship Set’ button is only for purposes of populating the Qty field in the Detail sheet. The user still has the ability to edit or modify the Qty column before saving.

Save the Packing List record. The Packing List form will appears as follows:

1.2.4.4.7. Invoicing for a Configuration Sales Order

Enter the Invoice Management module

Use one of the Record Find Features and Open the desired Invoice Number.

The Invoice information will populate the screen.

Enter the Detail Tab. The item information will appear as usual.  You have the option to edit any Pricing information if needed before posting the record.

The printed Invoice form will appear as follows:

1.2.5. Customer Quotations (OPTIONAL Module)
1.2.5.1. Quotation & Estimating
1.2.5.1.1. Prerequisties
 

ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase.   This module allows the user to create a new assembly number for a proposed or current customer, and identify each of the parts used in the assembly.  To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com\contactus.aspx

 
 After activation, "Sales Quotation & Estimating" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

Customer
The Customer database must be established for current and prospective customers in the Customer Information module.
Number System Setup If "AUTO" numbering is selected in the Number System screen for Inventory parts, the system will automatically assign the next part number in sequence (with no revision).  If "MANUAL" numbering is selected in the Number System screen for Inventory parts,  user will need to manually assign a part number and revision to the item added in the material 2 screen. ManEx suggests using the manual numbering if user would like to assign a revision to the internal part numbers
Class & Type The Inventory Class and Type must be setup in the Inventory Part Class Setup module.
Part Number in Item Master The part number must exist for the components for existing inventory in the Inventory Control module.
Supplier

The current or prospective Supplier must be setup in the Supplier Information module. 

Sales Types & Sales Price Itemization The Sales Type & Sales Price Itemization must be setup in Sales Type & Price Itemization module. 
Supplier Line Card Info

The Supplier Line Card Information must be setup in the Supplier Line Card Information module. 

Part Manufacturer Setup

The Part Manufacturer must be setup in the Part Manufuacturer Setup module.

Tools The Tools descriptions must be setup in the Tools Setup module.
Customer Quote

The Customer Quote defaults must be setup in the Quote Defaults module. 

Quote Setup

The approvals required must be set up in the Quote Setup module. 

1.2.5.1.2. Introduction
The Customer Quotation Module is used to estimate the cost of new assemblies so that the user may respond to RFQs they receive from their customers.  The module allows the user to create a new assembly number for a proposed or current customer, and identify each of the parts used in the assembly.  Existing BOM’s may be copied and then edited or a quote already created may be copied and edited or the user may just start from scratch.   Parts which already exist in the user’s database (already entered in the Inventory Control module) may be entered by part number.  The user has the option to auto or manual number new inventory parts created in the Material 2 screen.  (If "AUTO" numbering is selected in the Number System screen for Inventory parts, the system will automatically assign the next part number in sequence (with no revision).  If "MANUAL" numbering is selected in the Number System screen for Inventory parts,  user will need to manually assign a part number and revision to the item added in the material 2 screen.  ManEx suggests using the manual numbering if user would like to assign a revision to the internal part numbers. 

The user has the option of using the standard cost, the weighted average cost, or a manually entered cost for existing parts.  New parts (not already in inventory) may be added to the quote.  The user may elect up to seven quantity pricings. The user defines the markups to be used for each of four categories:  Material, Labor, Non-recurring expenditure and Miscellaneous.  The user completes the information for the materials and labor required, non-recurring expenditure charges and miscellaneous charges.  When the user has completed all of the data, a roll-up of all of the costs is calculated for each quantity pricing. Then, the program will compile the requirements and reports are generated to mail, fax or email to proposed suppliers for quotation.  Upon receipt of the supplier’s response, the user may then identify which suppliers (and prices) are to be used for the final customer quotation and can update the quote for this information.

 

Once the quotation has become a real product, the user, with the appropriate approval, may transfer Standard Cost, Labor and Serial Number information into the appropriate Inventory record.

 

The Component Quote Management module may also be used as a stand alone RFQ for a request for quote from the user to their supplier.

1.2.5.1.3. Fields & Definitions
1.2.5.1.3.1. Summary Tab

The summary tab contains all of the summary information pertaining to the quote. For each product number, quantity, cost, markup, charge to customer and order amount are displayed in summary fashion.


Summary tab field definitions

Quote Number The number the system has assigned to the quotation (if auto numbeirng is setup).  (If manual numbering is setup user must assign the number).  This number can not be changed after the quote has been created.
Customer Name The name of the customer for which this quote was prepared.
Customer RFQ The number the customer assigned to the request for quote.
Due Date The date by which the quote is due to the customer.
Quoted Date

The date the quote was actually sent to the customer.

  Depress this button to enter any notes that pertain specifically to this quote. This button will be displayed in RED when notes exist pertaining to this quote.
  Depress this button to enter any footnotes that pertain specifically to this quote.  This button will be displayed in RED when footnotes exist pertaining to this quote.
  Depressing this button will give the users the ability to scan any related documents directly into the ManEx system and attached the document directly to the quote in the Customer Quotation module.  For further detail see Article #2396.  This button will be displayed in RED when Related documents are attached.   
Item

The line number.

Product Number

The unique number assigned to the product.

Rev

The revision number assigned to the product.

Class The classification of the product.
Type The type within the classification pertaining to this product
Description

The description of the product.

Source The source of the product, either Make or Phantom.   MAKE is for an item made in-house (assemblies and sub-assemblies) and PHANTOM is for a number used to define a collection of items that does not exist as a separate assembly built on a Work Order (ship kits, upgrade packages, spares kits, etc.).

STATUS

This is for the status of the highlighed line item. 

To change Quote Status, while in the Summary tab, depress the Edit button.

Type in the password. The following selection will appear:

Depress "Edit Selected Product".

Type in your password.

 

Highlight the Status section and select the appropriate new status from the drop down list.

Depress the Save button.

 

Sales Type This is for the type of sale which pertains to the product, as setup in the Sales Type & Price Itemization module.  

Depress this button to add or edit notes pertaining to this specific product, the notes added will be carried over into the Inventory Control module, when the quote is transfered and the Product number is created on the Inventory Control module.  If an existing product number is entered and there are existing notes for this specific product within the Inventory Control Module, they will be defaulted in.  This button will be displayed in RED when notes exist for the product.  Depress this button to view any notes pertaining to this product.
Depress this button to add or edit footnotes pertaining to this specific product. This button will be displayed in RED when footnotes exist for the product.  Depress this button to view any notes pertaining to this product 
Depress this button to load a Product Related Document. For further detail see Article #2396. If this button is displayed in RED there is a Product Related Document attached. 
Depress this button to refresh pricing, due date, Last PO Dates, standard cost and customer part numbers.  This way if the customer part number is added or the standard cost is changed mid quote, they can update the quote with that info.   The system will calculate the longest leadtime from selected mfgr and selected supplier to update product leadtime.


 

 If these boxes are checked, it denotes that the information has been forwarded from the required summary tabs.

 

 

This button will cause the module to update the summary of the product costs, and update the Date/Time field. The Cost Each, Markup, Charge Each and Order Amount will automatically update.

  This is the date and time (24 hour clock) of the creation of the Product Cost Summary.  This field is only updated when user clicks the "Calculate Product Cost Summary" button.  

For the Item Number highlighted:

 Quantity

This column displays the quantity pertaining to the Product Cost Summary.

 L/T This column displays the lead time pertaining to the Product Cost Summary. 
 Cost Each

This column displays the cost each for the quantity listed on the left.

 Markup

This column displays the markup in dollars and cents for the quantity listed.

 Charge Each This is the total of the cost each plus the markup
 Order Amount

This is the total of the quantity multiplied by the charge each.

 Sales Representative

For the product highlighted, the Sales Representative selected and the applicable commission expressed either in percentage or dollar amounts per the radials.

  Depress this button to load a Customer Document.  For further detail see Article #2823 If this button is displayed in RED there is Customer documents attached.

1.2.5.1.3.2. Material Summary Tab

The material summary tab displays the quantity, cost each, markup and charge forwarding from both Material 1 tab and Material 2 tabs and displays the quantity pricings. This information will be forwarded into the summary tab.

Material Summary tab field definitions

 Item The line number.
 Product Number

The unique number assigned to the product.

 Rev

The revision number assigned to the product.

 Class The classification of the product.
 Type

The type within the classification pertaining to this product.

 Description

The description of the product.

  The Markup and Charge Each will automatically update for items included in the Inventory Master for the Material 1 tab and any manually added costs in the Material 2 tab once this button is depressed.  

For both the Material 1 and 2 sections:

 Quantity

This column displays the quantity pertaining to the Product Cost Summary.

 Cost Each

This column displays the cost each for the quantity listed on the left.

 Markup

This column display the markup in dollars and cents for the quantity listed.

 Charge Each

This is the total of the cost each plus the markup.

Apply to Price Break Type in Price List

 This field denotes the type of price break.  This list forwards from the Sales Type and Price Itemization module.   

Complete A check in this box denotes that this screen has been completed and is available to forward into the Summary tab.
Total Number of Components This field calculates the total number of components being used for each product.

Price/Quantity Break to apply

This would be used to either select the price break you expect the customer to buy or the price break that you would like to build. This field works together with the Apply Pricing Criteria field.

 Pricing Criteria - This field is to allow the users to select which calculation they wish for the system to do.   

Apply Pricing Criteria Depress this button once you have made your selection and the system will calculate based on the selection made.

1.2.5.1.3.3. Material 1 Tab

The material 1 tab displays the details of components which are currently identified in the Inventory Control Item Master . For each line item, the quantity, source, class, type, description, internal part number, revision number, customer part number, customer revision number, unit of measure, scrap %, whether or not the minimum order is to be applied, and Last PO Date is displayed. Additionally, the costing method is displayed together with the approved manufacturer and the manufacturers part number. It also displays the supplier for that component and the request for quote number as assigned in the Component Quote Management module. The need quantity, price each, lead time, quoted quantity, order multiple, minimum order the price source are also displayed. This information forwards into the Material summary tab.  The purple highlighed item indicates that the item is inactive.

 

Material 1 tab field definitions

Item

The line number.

Product Number The unique number assigned to the product
(Rev) The revision number assigned to the product
Class

The classification of the product.

Type The type within the classification pertaining to this product
Description

The description of the product.

Internal Part Number This is the number the user has assigned to the component.
Rev

This is the revision number pertaining to the internal part number.

Customer Part No

This is the number which the customer has assigned to the component.

Rev

This is the revision number which pertains to the Customer Part number.

UOM

The unit of measure which is used for this component.

Scrap %

This amount is added to the exact quantity used on an assembly to provide an overage to cover losses during running due to predictable machine and human losses.  If the part number already has scrap entered in ICM, the system will use this default.  If no scrap has been entered within Inventory, the system will then use the scrap that has been entered within the Quote screen.

Apply Min Ord

This is smallest number of the item that can be ordered from the vendor in one PO.For instance, Surface Mount components on a reel usually have a minimum order of 1000 items or more.

Last PO Date Displays the date of the last PO placed for this component.  This field will only populate if the "Refresh Quote" button is depressed which is located on the Summary Tab.
  The radials, Matl Cost, Wt Avg and Manual pertain to the type of cost pertaining to the component.The field denotes the dollar amount. Material Cost is per the Inventory Master. Weighted Average is the weighted average of the last five Purchase Orders processed for that part number. (Please refer to the Inventory Control Management manual.) Manual cost is per the user.

This button is used to add an item to the list of components needed for the assembly.

This button is used to delete an item from the list of components needed for the assembly.

  This field displays the mark up percentage which the user will be charging their customer.

This button will be displayed in RED when notes exist pertaining to the list of parts. Depressing this button will allow the user to view these notes. 

This button will be displayed in RED when notes exist pertaining to the highlighted part. Depressing this button will allow the user to view these notes. 

This button will be displayed in RED when reference designators for the highlighted part exist.  Depressing this button will allow the user to view these reference designators. 

AVL stands for (Approved Vendor List).This button is used to add an approved manufacturer.

This button is used to delete an approved manufacturer.

This button is used to add a supplier.

This button is used to delete a supplier.
                                  

For the Line Item highlighted:

AVL & Mfgr Part No section

When you add a part to the material 1 screen from inventory, if the customer on the quote is linked to that internal part number the AVL’s will be pulled from the consigned side,  if that customer is NOT linked to that internal part number then the AVL’s will be pulled from the internal side. System WILL allow users to enter NEW mfgr's part numbers, but NOT new mfgr's.  The mfgr's from inventory will be the  ONLY ones listed on the pull down to select from.     

X - A check in this box is NOT for the approval of AVL's on BOM.  This box is used when transfering quote to inventory and/or BOM.  There is an option located on the "Transfer Tab" to select to transfer "ALL AVL's" or "Only the selected AVL's".   If the user chooses to transfer "Only theSelected AVL's",  this box MUST be checked on the NEW mfgr part numbers added, then upon transfer the new mfgr part numbers will be transfered to inventory along with the existing mfgr and mfgr part numbers.  If this box is NOT checked for the new mfgr part numbers added, when the quote is transfered and the option  to add "Only theSelected AVL's" is marked, the new Mfgr part numbers will NOT be transfered to inventory and/or BOM.    When a quote is transfered All AVL's transfered will be checked as Approved on the new BOM 
 
NOTE:
 When adding a new quote by "ADD Existing Product from Inventory to this Quote"  only the AVL's marked as approved on the existing BOM will be transfered to quote

If more than one manufacturer is displayed, highlight the manufacturer desired before selecting the Supplier name.  The mfgr and mfgr part number selected will be highlighted in yellow. 

Mfgr
  - This is the name of the manufacturer assigned to the component.
 
Mfgr Part Number - This is the number which the manufacturer has assigned to the component.
 

Supplier & RFQ section

X - A check in this box denotes that the supplier has been selected.  The selected supplier will be highlighted in Yellow.

Supplier Name - The name of the supplier.

RFQ - This is the Request for Quotation number as assigned in the Component Quote Management portion of Customer Quotations. 
 
 
 

Qty & Price Info 
 
 

Need Qty The amount required for the quantity represented.
Price Ea The dollar amount which the Supplier charges the user.
L/T (Day) The lead time will use inventory leadtime to calculate and will be displayed in the number of days between placement of the order and receipt. 
Quoted Qty The number of units quoted by the supplier.
Min Ord

The supplier requirement for the minimum quantity per order.

Order Multiple This field defines the even multiples of the Unit of Measure in which an item must be purchased.For example, 16AWG Wire might be only available in even hundreds of feet on a spool.
Price Source

The source of the pricing such as Manual, a Request for Quote, etc.

Corrected PN This field is for reference only.  This information is NOT forwarded to any other fields within the system. 
Alt PN This field is for reference only.  This information is NOT forwarded to any other fields within the system. 
AI Mfgr This field is for reference only.  This information is NOT forwarded to any other fields within the system. 
VQOH This field is for reference only.  This information is NOT forwarded to any other fields within the system. 
Comments This field is for reference only.  This information is NOT forwarded to any other fields within the system. 

1.2.5.1.3.4. Material 2 Tab

The material 2 tab displays the details of components which are NOT identified in the Inventory Control Item Master.  For each line item, the quantity, source, class, type, description, customer part number, customer revision number, unit of measure, and scrap % is displayed.  Additionally displayed is the approved manufacturer and the manufacturer’s part number.  It also displays the supplier for that component and the request for quote number as assigned in the Component Quote Management module. The need quantity, price each, lead time, quoted quantity, order multiple, minimum order and the price source are also displayed. This information forwards into the Material Summary tab.   NOTE:  When the parts from Material 2 screen are transferred from quote to BOM, inventory item master part numbers are created for each item.  The system does NOT search the inventory item tables for an existing part number and will create new item master part numbers, even if the manufacturers and part numbers are the same.  

 
 
NOTE:  If "AUTO" numbering is selected in the Number System screen for Inventory parts, the system will assign the next part number in sequence (with no revision).  If "MANUAL" numbering is selected in the Number System screen for Inventory parts,  the Material 2 screen will display three additional fields shown below in Red box:  ManEx suggests using the manual numbering if user would like to assign a revision to the internal part numbers.    
 

Material 2 tab field definitions

Item

The line number.

Product Number The unique number assigned to the product
(Rev)

The revision number assigned to the product.

Class

The classification of the product.

Type The type within the classification pertaining to this product
Description

The description of the product.

Customer Part No

This is the number which the customer has assigned to the component.

Rev

This is the revision number which pertains to the Customer Part number.

UOM

The unit of measure which is used for this component.

Scrap %

This amount is added to the exact quantity used on an assembly to provide an overage to cover losses during running due to predictable machine and human losses.

Apply Min Order

This is smallest number of the item that can be ordered from the vendor in one PO.For instance, Surface Mount components on a reel usually have a minimum order of 1000 items or more.  This field will only be enabled if the Number System is set to "Manual" for Inventory Parts. 

Internal Part Number Manually assign an internal part number to the item.  This field will only be enabled if the Number System is set to "Manual" for Invventory Parts.
Rev Manually assign a revision to the item.  This field will only be enabled if the Number System is set to "Manual" for Invventory Parts

This button is used to add an item to the list of components needed for the assembly.

 

This button is used to delete an item from the list of components needed for the assembly.

  This field displays the mark up percentage which the user will be charging their customer.

This button will be displayed in RED when Part List Notes exist. Depressing this button will allow the user to view these notes.

This button will be displayed in RED when notes exist pertaining to the highlighted part. Depressing this button will allow the user to view these notes. 

This button will be displayed in RED when reference designators exist pertaining to the highlighted part.  Depressing this button will allow the user to view the reference designators. 

AVL stands for (Approved Vendor List).This button is used to add an approved manufacturer.

This button is used to delete an approved manufacturer.

This button is used to add a supplier.

This button is used to delete a supplier.

For the Line Item highlighted:

AVL & Mfgr Part No section

X -A check in this box  is NOT for the approval of AVL's.  When transfering quote there is an option located on the "Transfer Tab" to select to transfer "ALL AVL's" or "Only the selected AVL's".    If user chooses to transfer "Only the Selected AVL's", this box MUST be checked, if this is one of the selected AVL's you want transfered to inventory and/or BOM.  If user chooses to transfer All AVL's then this box does NOT need to be checked.   When a quote is transfered All AVL's transfered will be checked as Approved.

Mfgr  - This is the name of the manufacturer assigned to the component.

Mfgr Part Number - This is the number which the manufacturer has assigned to the component 

 

Supplier & RFQ section

X – a check in this box denotes that the supplier has been selected.

Supplier Name – The name of the supplier.

RFQ – This is the Request for Quotation number as assigned in the Component Quote Management portion of Customer Quotations. 

 

Qty & Price Info
 
 

Need Qty The amount required for the quantity represented.
Price Ea The dollar amount which the Supplier charges the user.
L/T The lead time will use part class/type setup default leadtime to calculate and is displayed in the number of days between placement of the order and receipt.
Quoted Qty The number of units quoted by the supplier.
Min Ord

The supplier’s requirement for the minimum quantity per order.

Order Multiple This field defines the even multiples of the Unit of Measure in which an item must be purchased.For example, 16AWG Wire might be only available in even hundreds of feet on a spool.
Price Source

The source of the pricing such as Manual, a Request for Quote, etc.

Corrected PN This field is for reference only.  This information is NOT forwarded to any other fields within the system. 
Alt PN This field is for reference only.  This information is NOT forwarded to any other fields within the system
AI Mfgr This field is for reference only.  This information is NOT forwarded to any other fields within the system. 
VQOH This field is for reference only.  This information is NOT forwarded to any other fields within the system
Comments This field is for reference only.  This information is NOT forwarded to any other fields within the system

                             

 

1.2.5.1.3.5. Labor Tab

The labor tab displays the labor costs for each, markup amount and charge for each for each quantity break.Also displayed is the quantity pricing.This information forwards into the Summary tab.

 

Labor tab field definitions

 Item

The line number. 

 Product Number

The unique number assigned to the product.

 (Rev)

The revision number assigned to the product.

 Class The classification of the product.
 Type

The type within the classification pertaining to this product.

 Description

The description of the product.

 Quantity Break

This column displays the quantity pertaining to the Product Cost Summary.

 Cost Each

This column displays the labor cost each for the quantity listed on the left.

 Use Pct

Check this column if the percentage is to be used.

 Markup

This column displays the markup in dollars and cents for the quantity listed.

 Charge Each

This is the total of the cost each plus the markup.

Apply to Price Break Type In Price List

Field denotes the type of price break type. The list forwards from the Sales Type & Price Itemization Module.

 

Complete

A check in this box denotes that this screen has been completed and is available to forward into the Summary tab.

1.2.5.1.3.6. Other/Misc. Tab

The Other/Miscellaneous tab displays the description and amount of the other charges. The charge amount is divided by each quantity level and will be included in the cost summary. This information forwards into the Summary tab.

 

Other/Misc Tab Definitions

 Item

The line number.

 Product Number

The unique number assigned to the product.

 (Rev) The revision number assigned to the product.
 Class

The classification of the product.

 Type

The type within the classification pertaining to this product.

 Description

The description of the product.

Other Charge Description

This is the description to be applied to the other charge amount. The user selects for the table provided in System Setup Quote Defaults.

 

 Amount

The charge amount is divided by each quantity level and will be included in the cost summary.

Apply to Price Break Type In Price List

Field denotes the type of price break type. The list forwards from the System Setup Sales Type & Price Itemization Module

 

    

Complete

A check in this box denotes that this screen has been completed and is available to forward into the Summary tab.

                                       

          

 

1.2.5.1.3.7. NRE Tab

The NRE – non-recurring expenditure tab is to identify and cost tools/fixtures which the user intends to pass on to the customer. This screen displays the NRE description, cost, markup amount, charge amount and the applicable work center. This information forwards into the Summary screen.

  

NRE tab field definitions

Item

The line number.

Product Number

The unique number assigned to the product.

(Rev)

The revision number assigned to the product.

Class

The classification of the product.

Type

The type within the classification pertaining to this product.

Description

The description of the product.

Tool/Fixture Description

This is the description of the NRE charge as set up in Production Setup, Tools setup.Please refer to the Implementation – Production manual.

Cost

This column displays the NRE cost.

Use Pct

Check this column if the percentage is to be used.

Markup Amt

This column displays the markup in dollars and cents.This column will update only if the column is left blank.

Charge Amt

This is the total of the cost plus the markup.

Work Center

This is the name of the Work Center where the NRE item will be used.

Depressing this button will allow the user to add additional NRE charges.

Depressing this button will allow the user to highlight and delete an NRE charge.

Total Charge Amount

This field displays the sum of all of the items listed in the Charge Amount column.

Complete

A check in this box denotes that this screen has been completed and is available to forward into the Summary tab.

1.2.5.1.3.8. Customer Tab

The customer tab contains billing information, the default settings for new records and the contact list.  The mark up percentages forward into the respective other tabs for material summary, NRE, and labor. The option to enforce minimum order quantities forwards into the Material 1 tab.


Customer tab field definitions

Quote To This is defaulted in from the Bill To default address setup in the Customer Information module.  The user may change the address by depressing the down arrow next to the Quote To box, and making another selection.

Default Settings for New Records

 Material Markup  The markup percentage which will forward to the Material Summary tab.
 Material Scrap The percentage of the component for scrap.(If there is a scrap percentage in the customer setup section, that scrap will be applied to all of the items in the Material 2 tab.  The Material 1 tab will first look at the inventory master and if the scrap is NOT zero, place the item master scrap in the quote line item.  If it is zero in the item master, the scrap value in the customer setup section of the quote will be used.)
Tools/Fixture Markup

The markup percentage which will forward to the NRE tab.

Labor Markup

The markup percentage which will forward to the Labor tab.

Refresh Markup & Scrap When any of the Markup fields are changed, depress this button and the new percentages will be applied to all existing parts for all Products within that quote.
Enforce Min Ord on Existing Parts

Minimum Order is the smallest number of the item that can be ordered from the supplier in one PO.For instance, Surface Mount components on a reel usually have a minimum order of 1000 items or more.Checking this box will enforce the minimums.  This forwards to the Material 1 tab.

Contacts

The name and phone information for the contacts setup for this specific customer in the Contacts Information module. 

                                           

1.2.5.1.3.9. Transfer Tab

The transfer tab is used once the request for quote information has been uploaded from the Component Quote Management module. First the user must enter the required approvals as set up in Quote Setup.   A user must have been assigned to a department in Security Setup.  Then for each department listed, an approval must take place. Once the necessary approvals have been obtained, the user may transfer information regarding the standard cost, labor cost, AVL's, and whether a serial number is required into the Inventory Control Item Master, the Bill of Materials or the Work Order Traveler Setup.



NoteUsers MUST have special rights within the Security module to perform a Quote transfer. Users with “supervisor’s rights” will automatically have access.  If users do not have the "Quote Transfer" box checked within the Security module they will receive the following warning:
 
 
 
  
 
 

Item The line number.
Product Number The unique number assigned to the product.
(Rev) The revision number assigned to the product.
Class The classification of the product.
Type The type within the classification pertaining to this product.
Description The description of the product.
Source The source of the product, either Make or Phantom. MAKE is for an item made in-house (assemblies and sub-assemblies) and PHANTOM is for a number used to define a collection of items that does not exist as a separate assembly built on a Work Order (ship kits, upgrade packages, spares kits, etc.).

         

This is for the status of this line item.  If the Quotation has been transferred, the Status will display as transferred.

 
This is for the type of sale which pertains to the product, as setup in System setup Sales Type & Price Itemization  

Once this button is depressed, the system will prompt for the appropriate departmental password.

Init

The initials of the approver.

Date

The date of approval.

This button is used AFTER marking whether to update standard costs for materials and labor.Note that one of the quantities as stated in the summary tab must be entered in the box. The user must also pre-select whether or not serial numbers are to be used.

Calculate Material Cost for Item Master

If this option is checked, the cost for the materials will forward to the Inventory Master. Note that one of the quantities as stated in the summary tab must be entered in the Use Qty Level box.

Calculate Labor Cost for Item Master

If this option is checked, the cost for the labor will forward to the Inventory Master. Note that one of the quantities as stated in the summary tab must be entered in the Use Qty Level box.

S/N Required

This box is checked if serial numbers are required for the product.

All AVL's Transfer all the AVL's listed on the quote to inventory.  When adding AVL's on Material 2 page, because it is a new part, the system will add all or selected, based on what is checked, on material 1 page, it will transfer all existing AVL's plus add any new AVL's  based on what is check. 
Only Selected AVL's Transfer just the selected AVL's listed on the quote to inventory.  When adding AVL's on Material 2 page, because it is a new part, the system will add all or selected, based on what is checked, on material 1 page, it will transfer all existing AVL's plus add any new AVL's  based on what is check.

 

1.2.5.1.4. How To .....
1.2.5.1.4.1. Find a Customer Quotation

 

Enter Sales Mgt/Customer Quotations/Quotation & Estimating   

The following screen will be displayed: Within this screen, an estimate is created select the Add action button to create a new record or the Find action button for viewing and editing an existing quote.

 

Find an Estimate

Depressing the Find action button displays the following sequences:

The user may find by Customer, by Product Number or by Quote Number.

The user may select the appropriate Status Filter radial button, to filter by: QIP (Quotation in Process), Pending Quotation, Won, Lost, Cancelled, or All.

 

If the user selects Find by Customer Name, depressing the down arrow produces a list of Customer names from which to choose, as displayed:

 

If the customer has more than one quote, the user will be presented with the following screen:

Select the appropriate quote number and double click.

 

If the user selects Find by Product Number the following screen appears:

Type the Product Number in the red box:

 

The user is then presented with another selection screen.

This screen displays the Quote Number, Product and Revision and the Customer name.

Double click on the record you want to select.The information for that quote will populate the screen
 

If the user selects Find by Quotation Number the following screen appears:

Once the number is typed in, the information regarding to that quote populates the screen.

 

Once you have made your choice, the information regarding that quote populates the screen.
 
1.2.5.1.4.2. Create a Quote

Enter Sales Mgt/Customer Quotations/Quotation & Estimating

The following screen will appear:
 


Depress the
Add button, and enter password 

The following Customer List will appear:

Highlight the desired customer and double click.   

The Customer name will transfer onto the screen.

 

Enter in the Customer RFQ Number, Due Date, and Quoted Date.  

 

Enter the Customer Tab

    

Select the desired Quote To address, (if different from the default) by depressing the down arrow next to the Quote To box.  Enter the Default Settings for New Records. Check the box to Enforce Minimum Order on Existing Parts.  Depress the Save button.  The completed screen will appear: 
 
 

Depress the Add button, enter password and the "Quotation Add Type" selection screen will appear:

Quote functions allow users to:   Add New Quote; Define New Product for this Quote;  Add Existing Product from Inventory to this Quote; or Add Product from another Quote to this Quote. 

 

The selection to Add a New Quote will allow the user to start the new quote from scratch.

The selection to Define New Product for this Quote will allow the user to add a product from scratch to the Quote.(Detailed below)

The selection to Add Existing Product from Inventory to this Quote will bring up the following BOM Find screen:

Select the BOM status, Active, Inactive or All, then select the BOM by Product Number; Part Class, Customer, or All by clicking on the appropriate radial.

 If you know the product number type it into the red box.
 

To select by Part Class, click on that radial and type the Part Class into the red box.  Depress the OK button. The following screen will appear:

Type in the Product Number and revision number if applicable

 

To select by Customer, depress the radial for Customer.  Place the cursor in the red box. Type in the 1st letter of the customer. The following list will appear:

 

To select by All, click on the All radial. The following list will appear:

If you know the product number type it into the red box. The following screen will appear:

 

The following screen will appear. Once you have made your selection using one of the procedures above.

Type in any changes to the Product Number and or revision. Note: You must make the new product unique!  Depress the OK button.

 

 

The Summary screen will display the product, as follows:


The components for that Product will appear in the Material 1 window, as illustrated below:  Note:  If you Add existing product from Inventory to quote, quote having same customer as existing product, only the approved AVL’s in existing product will copy over.  If you Add existing product from Inventory to quote, quote having different customer than the customer linked to the existing product or the existing product not linked to a customer, then the system will pull AVL’s from consigned data if that customer is linked to that part.  If customer is not linked to the part then the AVL’s will be pulled from the Internal data. 

  

Edit the Material 1 screen as desired. The user may add new components, delete existing components and/or change quantities. Finish off the other screens, as detailed in Article #911

If you want to copy from another quotation, select the Add Product From Another Quote To This Quote: 

 

A Quotation Find screen will appear.

The user may find by Customer, by Product Number or by Quote Number.

The user may select the appropriate Status Filter radial button, to filter by Quotation in Process, Pending Quotation, Won Quotation, Lost Quotation, Cancelled Quotation or All. 

 

 

If the user selects Find by Customer Name, depressing the down arrow produces a list of Customer names from which to choose, as displayed in the screen above.If the customer has more than one quote, the user will be presented with the following screen. Select the appropriate quote number and double click:

 

 

Find by Product Number prompts the user to enter the appropriate number.

 

Once the Product number is typed in, the user is presented with another selection screen.

This screen displays the Quote Number, Product and Revision and the Customer name.

Double click on the record you want to select.The information for that quote will populate the screen. 

 

Find by Quotation Number prompts the user to enter the EXACT Quotation Number.

Once the number is typed in, the information regarding that quote populates the screen.  

 

Once the previous quote is selected and the product number is amended to make it unique, the user may edit any of the applicable screens as detailed below. 

The Customer Quotation Summary tab allows the addition of a sales representative, as illustrated.  

 To add the Sales Representative, depress the Add button near the Assigned Sales Rep section. The following list of representatives will appear:  

Depress the Ctrl key and click on the representative(s) of choice.

Depress the OK button.

Click on the appropriate Commission radial, either Amount or Percentage.Enter the number in the Commission column opposite the Sales Rep. 

If you selected Define New Product for this Quote. 

Enter the Product Number, Revision Number, if applicable.  Select Class, Type, Source, Sales Type, and Material Type from the drop down lists. 

       

Enter the description: 
 
 
 
Add Lead Time & Quantity

The user may elect up to seven quantity pricings.

Depress the   button.  

The following two screens will appear.  Fill in the Lead Time Days and the quantity and depress the enter key.  Thelead times are being imported into the system/quote by Days.

 

 

When all of the quantities have been entered, depress the Save button.

 

The Quantities and Lead Times will appear in the Quantity Table.
 


 
 
 
 
1.2.5.1.4.3. Add Materials To Quote & Transfer to Inventory
There are two tabs in which to add components to the assembly. The Material 1 tab is for those inventory items which currently exist in the user’s Inventory Master. The second tab is for items which are not identified in the user’s Inventory Master. The user may use a combination of the two. For both tabs, the Mark Up Percentage will automatically bring up the default percentage from the customer tab, but it may be edited by the user.

Material 1 Tab

These are the components for the new assembly when the item is included in the Inventory Master.   

Depress the Material 1 tab;  The following screen will appear:




Depress the Edit button, enter password.   

The following Quotation Edit Type selection will appear.

Select Edit Selected Product.  

 

The following screen will appear:
 

Depress the  button, t
he following message will appear:

Depress the OK button.  Enter the Item number, Quantity each, select the Part Source, and enter the internal part number.  If the Part List has more than one available, a selection screen will appear.  Double Click to Select the part you want to consider.  The following columns will fill in automatically: Class, Type, Description, Revision number, Scrap %,(If applicable), AVL's, and customer PN (if part source is CONSIGNED).   User may enter the customer part number and applicable revision number if part number exists in Inventory records.  Check the Apply Minimum Order, and select a Work Center, if desired. 

Select the Costing radial to use – Matl Cost, Wt Average or Manual.  Material Cost is per the Inventory Master.  Weighted Average is the weighted average of the last five Purchase Orders processed for that part number. Manual cost is per the user.
 
 
Select AVL 

Highlight the Part Added, the Manufacturer and the Manufacturer’s Part Numbers are displayed per the Inventory Item Master.
 
When you add a part to the material 1 screen from inventory, if the customer on the quote is linked to that internal part number the AVL’s will be pulled from the consigned side,  if that customer is NOT linked to that internal part number then the AVL’s will be pulled from the internal side.  System WILL allow users to enter NEW mfgr's part numbers, but NOT new mfgr's.  The mfgr's from inventory will be the  ONLY ones listed on the pull down to select from.     

X - A check in this box is NOT for the approval of AVL's on BOM.  This box is used when transfering quote to inventory and/or BOM.  There is an option located on the "Transfer Tab" to select to transfer "ALL AVL's" or "Only the selected AVL's".   If the user chooses to transfer "Only the Selected AVL's",  this box MUST be checked on the NEW mfgr part numbers added, then upon transfer the new mfgr part numbers will be transfered to inventory along with the existing mfgr and mfgr part numbers.  If this box is NOT checked for the new mfgr part numbers added, when the quote is transfered and the option  to add "Only the Selected AVL's" is marked, the new Mfgr part numbers will NOT be transfered to inventory and/or BOM.    When a quote is transfered All AVL's transfered will be checked as Approved on the new BOM  

NOTE:
  When adding a new quote by "ADD Existing Product from Inventory to this Quote"  only the AVL's marked as approved on the existing BOM will be tranfered to quote. 
 
If more than one manufacturer is displayed, highlight the manufacturer desired before selecting the Supplier name.  The mfgr and mfgr part number selected will be highlighted in yellow.
 

The Supplier for that Inventory Class will appear if added in Supplier Line Card Information.  The Supplier Request for Quote number will display to the right of the Supplier, once a quote has been requested in Component Quote Management.  Once the supplier has been checked it will be highlighted in yellow.  

Quantity and Price Information



There are two ways to fill in this information:

1.  The Quantity and Price information sections are forwarded by depressing the Update Quote button in the Component Quote Management module. To view after the Update, highlight the selected Supplier and the quote information will appear.

2.  If you selected Manual costing radial, you may enter the price each in the Quantity & Price Information section in this screen.
 
Continue to Add parts, indicate AVL & Manufacturer’s Part Number, Supplier Name and Quantity & Price information until all components (in Inventory Master) are included.
Depress the Save button. 

The completed screen will appear as below:

 

To add a Part List Note, or a Part Note.

  1. Depress the Edit button.
  2. Enter password.
  3. Select Edit Selected Product.
  4. Depress the Part List Note or Part Note button. A Note window will appear.
  5. Depress the Edit button.
  6. Type in the note.
  7. Depress the Save button.
  8. Exit.
  9. Depress the Save button.
To view the Inventory on Hand, highlight the Part number of interest, depress the Inventory Qty button and the following screen will appear:

To Enter Reference Designators, depress the Edit button, depress the Ref Designator button and the following screen will appear: 


Material 2 Tab

These are the components for the new assembly when the item is NOT included in the Inventory Master.  NOTE:  When the parts from Material 2 screen are transferred from quote to BOM, inventory item master part numbers are created for each item.  The system does NOT search the inventory item tables for an existing part number and will create new item master part numbers, even if the manufacturers and part numbers are the same.   

The user has the option to auto or manual number new inventory parts created in the Material 2 screen. (If "AUTO" numbering is selected in the Number System screen for Inventory parts, the system will automatically assign the next part number in sequence (with no revision). If "MANUAL" numbering is selected in the Number System screen for Inventory parts, user will need to manually assign a part number and revision to the item added in the material 2 screen. ManEx suggests using the manual numbering if user would like to assign a revision to the internal part numbers.


Depress the Material 2 tab.  Depress the Edit button, enter password. 
 

The following Quotation Edit Type selection will appear:

Select Edit Selected Product. 

 
The following screen appears:


Depress the    button.     

The following message will appear:

 

Depress the OK button.  Enter 
the Item number, Quantity each, select the Source, Class, Type, and Work Center from the pull downs.  Enter the Description, Customer PN and Rev (if applicable), select Unit of Measure from pull down, and enter scrap % if applicable. 

If "MANUAL" numbering is selected in the Number System screen for Inventory parts,  the Material 2 screen will display three additional fields shown below in Red box:




Select AVL

Highlight the Part Added. Depress the Add AVL button.

Select the manufacturer from the drop down list, all the part mfgr's from system setup will be available to select.  Enter in the Manufacturer’s Part Number.

X - A check in this box  is NOT for the approval of AVL's.  When transfering quote there is an option located on the "Transfer Tab" to select to transfer "ALL AVL's" or "Only the selected AVL's".    If user chooses to transfer "Only the Selected AVL's", this box MUST be checked, if this is one of the selected AVL's you want transfered to inventory and/or BOM.  If user chooses to transfer All AVL's then this box does NOT need to be checked.   When a quote is transfered All AVL's transfered will be checked as Approved.
 
At least one AVL MUST be entered or the quote will NOT transfer to BOM. 



If more than one manufacturer is displayed, highlight the manufacturer desired before selecting the Supplier name.  The mfgr and mfgr part number selected will be highlighted in yellow.
 

The Supplier for that Inventory Class will appear if added in the Supplier Line Card Information.  The Supplier Request for Quote number will display to the right of the Supplier, once a quote has been requested in Component Quote Management.  Once the supplier has been checked it will be highlighted in yellow.

 

 Quantity and Price Information

 

There are two ways to fill in this information:

1.  The Quantity and price information sections are forwarded by depressing the Update Quote button in the Component Quote Management module.  To view, highlight the selected Supplier and the quote information will appear. 

2. You may enter the price each in the Quantity & Price Information section in this screen. The price source will display as manual. 

Continue to Add parts,AVL & Manufacturer’s Part Number, Supplier Name and Quantity & Price information until all components (not included in Inventory Master) are included.

Depress the Save button. The completed screen will appear as follows:


To add a Part List Note or a Part Note.

  1. Depress the Edit button.
  2. Type in your password.
  3. Select Edit Selected Product.
  4. Depress the Part List Note or the Part Note button. A Note window will appear.
  5. Depress the Edit button.
  6. Type in the note.
  7. Depress the Save button.
  8. Exit.
  9. Depress the Save button.

To Enter Reference Designators, depress the Edit button, depress the Ref Designator button and the following screen will appear: 

Labor Tab

Depress on the Labor tab and the following screen will appear:

Depress the Edit Button, enter password.

The following Quotation Edit Type selection will appear:

Select Edit Selected Product.

 

 

Enter the Cost Each of labor, then check the "Use Pct" box if the percentage is be used, do this for each quantity break.

  • The Markup Amount and Charge Each will update automatically, on the initial data entry.

Thereafter, changing the “Cost Each” will NOT change to the markup amount. This is so that users may manually change the mark up to whatever they want, without having the default percentage override it.  If the user wants to have the percentage create a new markup, go to the customer screen and depress the "Refresh Markup & Scrap" button and the new percentages will be applied to all existing parts for all Products within that quote.

Press the down arrow for" Apply to Price Break Type" in Price List. Select the type pertaining to Labor.

 

Check the Complete box. 

Depress the Save button. 

 

 The completed screen will look like this.

 

 

Other/Misc. Tab

Depress the Other/Misc. Tab and the following screen will appear:


Depress the Edit button, enter password.

The following Quotation Edit Type selection will appear:

Select Edit Selected Product.

 

Depress the Add button.  The following message will appear:

5.  Depress the OK button.

 6. Depress the down arrow in the Other Charge Description section. A listing of Other Charge Descriptions will appear. Select the pertinent one.

7. Type in the amount pertaining to that charge.

 

 8. Depress the down arrow for "Apply to Price Break in Type List".  Select one pertaining to the other or miscellaneous charge.  

9. Check the Complete box.

10. Depress the Save button.

 

 The completed screen will look like this:


Note:  That any amounts entered here are amortized over the quantity quoted.  


NRE Tab

Depress the NRE tab and the following screen will appear:



Depress the Edit button, enter password.
 

The following Quotation Edit Type selection will appear:

Select Edit Selected Product.

 

The following message will appear:

Depress the OK button.
Depress the Add button.

Select the preferred Tool/Fixture description from the drop down list.

 

Enter in the Cost, then check the "Use Pct" box if the percentage is be used. The Markup Amount and Charge Amount will update automatically.

Select the Work Center pertaining to the non-recurring expense from the drop down menu.

 

Check the Complete box.
Depress the Save button.
 

The completed screen will look like this:



Note: 
That any amounts entered here represent a one time cost.(The quantity of units to be made, have no bearing on this number.)
 
To setup information in the Customer tab see Article #622 .
 
Before entering the Transfer tab, user will want to complete the Material Summary tab and Summary Tab.
 

Material Summary Tab

If you are NOT going to update costs from the Component Quote module and have entered all of the pertinent costs manually, depress the Material Summary tab. Depress the Calculate & Display Material Costs button.  The Markup and Charge Each will automatically update for items included in the Inventory Master for the Material 1 tab and any manually added costs in the Material 2 tab.  The total number of components is calculated from the qty each column in Material 1 and Material 2.



 
 
Depress the Edit button, and enter password, the following Quotation Edit Type selection will appear:

Select  "Edit Selected Product"  if you would like to:  
 
 

 

This gives the user the option to Apply a Price Break Type to the Price List to the existing quote

This gives the user to option to Apply a Price/Quantity Break to the existing quote

This gives the user the option to Apply a Pricing Criteria to the existing quote

Once all the selections have been made depress this button to apply them and prices will be updated

 

 

 

Check the Complete box.
Depress the Save button.
 

 Summary Tab

If you are NOT going to use the Component Quote Management  module and have entered all of the material costs manually, return to the Summary Tab. 

To add a Quote Note or a Quote Footnote.
Depress the Edit button.
The following Quotation Edit Type selection will appear:
Select Edit Quote Header. 
 

Depress the Quote Note or the Quote Footnote button.
Depress the Edit button in the Note screen.
Type in your note.
Depress the Save button.
Exit.

Check to be sure that Material, Labor, Other and NRE boxes are checked. 

 

If you want to add a product note:
Highlight the product.
Depress the Edit button.

The following Quotation Edit Type selection will appear:

Select Edit Selected Product.

 

 

Depress the Product Note button or the Product Footnote button.
Depress the Edit button.
Type in the note.
Depress the Save button.
Depress the Exit button.
Depress the Save button.

Depress the Calculate Product Cost Summary button.The Cost Each, Markup, Charge Each and Order Amount will automatically update. 

 

The completed screen will appear as follows:

  

Add another product number, if desired.

To ADD a new product, depress the Add button.

The Quotation Add Type Selection will appear:

Select Define New Product for this Quote.
 

Follow the "Define New Product for this Quote" procedures, but skipping over the Customer Tab procedures.

 

Transfer tab

If the user did NOT use the Component Quote Management module, once the customer has accepted the quotation and the user now wants to add the new product to the Inventory Master and create a new Bill of Materials for the new product, the user may accomplish this by depressing the transfer tab. Note:  Once the Transfer process is completed, no further changes are allowed to the Quote and that the status of the quote will change to Transferred.


NOTE:  For this tab, a serial of approvals must be entered.  In this example, approvals are required by a user assigned to the departments listed. Depress the Approval button. Have a user from engineering (for example) type in his/her password.  Continue down the list until every department has the initials and date displayed.  Once all the approvals have been entered the Transfer button will become available. The approvals will need to be re-entered after every Edit.
 
 
Depress the Edit button, and enter password to select any of the following options:

To select "Calculate Material Cost for Item Master, check that box and indicate the Quantity Level which is to be selected.
To select "Calculate
 Labor Cost for Item Master, check that box and indicate the quantity level.
To mark this product as serialized, check the "S/N Required" box.  
 
If either "Calculate Material Cost for Item Master" or "Calculate Labor Cost for Item Master" and the quantity level field is left blank the following prompt will be displayed.  Depress the OK button and the transfer will abort, allowing user to enter the Qty level.  

Select the radial to either transfer "All AVLs" or "Only Selected AVLs" to BOM and item master.
 
When adding AVL's on Material 2 page, because it is a new part, the system will add all or selected, based on what is checked, on material 1 page, it will transfer all existing AVL's plus add any new AVL's  based on what is check.  For more detail see Select AVL section above.
 
 
ALL AVL's transfered will be check as approved on the BOM. 
 

Depress the Save button.  Note:  Once the Edit button has been depressed the Approvals will clear and need to be re-entered again.

Depress the Transfer button, enter password.  
 
The Status of the Quote will be updated to Transfered, as displayed below: 

 
  
 
 
The system will run several validations at this point these are a few:   
 
If there are No AVL's listed for a part in the Material 2 screen, or no AVL's selected as approved on each item the following prompt will be displayed.  Depress the OK button and the transfer will abort, allowing user to correct the missing AVL
 
 

If there are duplicate item numbers within the Material 1 and Material 2 tab the following prompt will be displayed.  Depress the OK button and the transfer will abort, allowing user to correct the duplicate item numbers

 

If there are inactive items selected to be used in the transfer the following prompt will be displayed.  Depress the OK button to continue the transfer. 
 
Once all the validations have been ran the BOM will be created with a Status of "Active:
 
1.2.5.1.4.4. Quotation and Estimating Completion

To finalize the Customer’s quote, return to the Quotation and Estimating module.  
 

Find the Customer Quote using the procedures above.  You will note that the information from the Component Quote Management module has forwarded into the Quotation and Estimating module, as illustrated below:

 

 


 

 If you are NOT going to update costs from the Component Quote module and have entered all of the pertinent costs manually, depress the Material Summary tab. Depress the Calculate & Display Material Costs button.  The Markup and Charge Each will automatically update for items included in the Inventory Master for the Material 1 tab and any manually added costs in the Material 2 tab.  The total number of components is calculated from the qty each column in Material 1 and Material 2.

 

 

Depress the Edit button if you would like to: 
 
This gives the user the option to Apply a Price Break Type to the Price List to the existing quote
This gives the user to option to Apply a Price/Quantity Break to the existing quote
This gives the user the option to Apply a Pricing Criteria to the existing quote
Once all the selections have been made depress this button to apply them and prices will be updated.

Depress the Summary tab. 


Depress the Product Cost Summary button.  The screen will update as displayed:

 

 


Now the user may print out the Customer Quotation and related reports. 

 

Transfer tab

Once the customer has accepted the quotation and the user now wants to add the new product to the Inventory Master and create a new Bill of Materials for the new product, the user may accomplish this by depressing the transfer tab.  Note that once the Transfer process is completed, no further changes are allowed to the Quote and that the status of the quote will change to Transferred.

 


NOTE:  For this tab, a serial of approvals must be entered.  In this  example, approvals are required by a user assigned to the departments listed.  Depress the Approval button.  Have a user from engineering (for example) type in his/her password.  Continue down the list until every department has the initials and date displayed.

 

Depress the Edit button.  Type in the password. 

 The Transfer button and the check boxes will be available:

If you want Standard cost calculated for the Item Master, check that box and indicate the Quantity Level which is to be selected.

 

If you want the Labor cost calculated and transferred to the Item Master, check that box and indicate the quantity level.

 

If you want to mark that for this product, a serial number is required, check the box.

 

 Check the radial to transfer All AVLs or Only Selected AVLs  

  

Depress the Transfer button, enter password and Quote status will change to Transfer, when the transfer is complete.

Note:  If new part numbers are created within the Inventory Control module via the quote transfer all the defaults will be carried forward for the new part from the Part Class/Type Setup screen.  
 
1.2.5.1.4.5. Attach a Related Document

Find an existing Quote Record, or Add a new Quote record.

Depress the   button, and enter password.

The following screen will appear:

Depress the Add record icon, enter in a Document Number, REV, Doc Description, Doc Date, Doc Note; 

  

To load a document double click in the PDF File field and the following screen will appear:

Depress the Load Document button and the following screen will appear:  The PDF screen will allow you to load almost any type of document; (Word, Excel, pdf, Images, etc .... )

Locate the document and double click on it and the document will populate screen.

Depress the Save record icon to save or depress the Abandon changes icon to abandon changes.  The following screen will appear:

Depress the Save record icon to save or depress the Abandon changes icon to abandon changes. 

 

Once documents are saved the "Quote Related Documentation" button will display in Red. 

 

1.2.5.1.5. Customer Quotation Reports
If the user has not used the Component Quote Management module to update the costs, the user may print out the reports, as desired.

To obtain the Quotation reports, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen. 



The following screen will appear:


Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

Highlight the desired report and then depress the Option tab if applicable. 

 

 Extended Material Cost & Lead Times

Choose to view by Customer Part No. or Manufacturer Part No.

Highlight the product of preference and depress the > button.If you want all products depress the >> button.

Depress the OK button.

 
 

The following is printed:

 

Lead Time Analysis

Choose to view by Customer Part No. or Manufacturer Part No.

 

Depress the OK button.

 
 

The following is printed.


Unselected Part Number List
report

Highlight the Unselected Part Number List report. Depress the OK button.

The following is printed 

Unquoted Part Number List report

Highlight the Unquoted Part Number List report. Depress the OK button.

The following is printed:


Min OrderQuantity VS OrderRequirements Analysis report

Highlight the Min Order Quantity VS Order Requirements Analysis report.

Depress the OK button.

The following isl printed.

 

Sales Quotation report

Highlight the product of preference and depress the > button.If you want all products depress the >> button.

Depress the OK button.

 

The following is printed.


Detailed Sales Quotation report

Highlight the product of preference and depress the > button.If you want all products depress the >> button.

Depress the OK button.

 

The following is printed

 

Unquoted Part Supplier List report

Highlight the Unquoted Part Supplier List report.

Depress the OK button.

The following will print:



Component Quote Detail Analysis by Qty report

 

Highlighting the Component Quote Detail Analysis by Qty report will bring up a selection of reports to print.

 

Highlight the report of your choice and depress the option tab.

 

Highlight the product of preference and depress the > button.  If you want all products depress the >> button. 

 

Depress the OK button.

 

The following is printed

1.2.5.1.6. FAQs
Facts and Questions for the Customer Quote Module
1.2.5.1.7. ManEx Minutes (QOT)
1.2.5.2. Component Quote Management
1.2.5.2.1. Prerequisites

ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase.   This module is the user’s Request for Quote vehicle. The user may use this module in conjunction with the Quotation & Estimating module (which processes the Customer’s or prospect’s request for quote).Or, the user may use as a stand alone RFQ module.   To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com\contactus.aspx 

After activation, "Sales Quotation & Estimating" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

ManEx RFQ Import Template
This is the spreadsheet that will be created and exported to the Suppliers for them to enter the pricing, lead time, etc. information on and return to you so you may import the information to a QOT.  NOTE:  This spreadsheet CANNOT be changed (except to fill in Supplier information).  If the format of this spreadsheet has been modified in any way  the information will not transfer in to the QOT properly. 

 

 

1.2.5.2.2. Introduction

This module is the user’s Request for Quote vehicle.The user may use this module in conjunction with the Quotation & Estimating module (which processes the Customer’s or prospect’s request for quote).Or, the user may use as a stand alone RFQ module. This module is used to compile the requirements.Then, reports are generated to mail, fax or e-mail to proposed suppliers for quotation.Upon receipt of the supplier’s response, the user may then identify which suppliers (and prices) are to be used for the final Customer quotation.

1.2.5.2.3. Fields & Definitions
Component Quote Management field definitions
 

Quote Status

To change Quote Status, depress the Edit button, type in your password, highlight the Status section and select the appropriate new status from the drop down list. Depress the Save button.

 

This allows the user to Export Supplier Request for Quotation.
This allows the user to Import Supplier Quotes.

RFQ Number

This is the system assigned number for the request for quote.

Supplier

This is the name of the supplier to which the RFQ was sent.

Contact

This is the name of the contact at the supplier.

Due Date

This is the date the user expects to receive the quote from the supplier.

Date Issued

This is the date the RFQ was issued.

Depressing this button will display any notes written about this RFQ. 

Itm

This is the Item line number.

Mfgr

This is the name of the manufacturer.

Mfgr Part No

This is the number which the manufacturer has assigned to the part.

Class

This is the classification of the part.

Type This is the type within the classification for the part number
Description

This is the description of the part number.

Status

This is the status of the part number, such as Open, To Quote or Cancelled.

RFQ Source

This is the source of the RFQ, such as New (part does not exist in the Inventory Control Item Master) or Inventory (part does exist in the Inventory Control Item Master) or the Quotation and Estimating Management module Quotation Number (see procedures above).

Parent Part

This is the Part Number of the assembly as entered in the Quotation and Estimating Management module.

Part Number

This is the number internally assigned by the user for the part number.

Rev

This is the revision number which is applicable to the number internally assigned by the user.

Customer Part No

This is the number assigned by the customer to the part number.

Rev

This is the revision number assigned to the customer part number.

Customer Name

This is the name of the customer.

Once the quotation has been received back from the Supplier and the information completed, this button is used to forward such quoted information back into the specific quotation number as entered in the Quotation and Estimating Management module(please see procedures above).

This button is depressed to display any notes regarding quantity or pricing.

 UoM  Unit of Measure

For the Item Number highlighted:

UOM This is the unit of measure for the part number.
Need Qty

This is the quantity needed for the assembly.

Quote Qty

This is the quantity quoted.

Price Each

This is the pricing for one unit of the part for the quantity listed at the left.

L/T

This is the number of days between the date the part is ordered and the date the part is received.

Min Ord

The supplier’s requirement for the minimum quantity per order.

Order Multiple

This field defines the even multiples of the Unit of Measure in which an item must be purchased.For example, 16AWG Wire might be only available in even hundreds of feet on a spool.

1.2.5.2.4. How To .....
1.2.5.2.4.1. Find an RFQ
Enter the Sales Mgt/Customer Quotations/Component Quote Management.

The following screen will appear.

Actions

Initially there are only three buttons available, Find, Add or Exit

Find a Request for Quote

Depress the Find button. The following screen will appear:

Select the Status Filter by selecting the appropriate Radial button.

Select the “Find by“ by selecting the appropriate Radial button.

 
 

If you select by Supplier Name, depress the down arrow and a list of suppliers will appear:

 

Select the desired Supplier. A list of all of the quotes for that Supplier will appear. Select the desired Request for Quote number.

Double Click on the record you wish to select. 

 

If you want to find by the Request for Quote number, select that Radial button and type in the EXACT Request for Quote number.

The Request for Quote will populate the screen, as displayed below:

 

 

1.2.5.2.4.2. Add A Request For Quote from Quote

To ADD a new estimate, depress the Add button. You’ll be prompted for your password. The following screen will appear.  Select the desired supplier.  Type in the Contact, Date Issued and the Due Date.

Depress the Add Parts button. The following selection will appear:

 
 

 Selecting Add From Quote will bring the quote constructed in the Quotation and Estimating Module onto the screen.

Depress the Add From Quote button.

Then following screen will appear:

 

 

Enter in the Quote number or highlight and Double Click to Select the Quote Number and Customer Name. Select either All Products on Quote or Select Product from Quote.
 

If there are no AVL's listing the selected Supplier on the quote the user will receive the following message: 

 


The quotation will populate the screen.

 

Notes

To add a RFQ note, depress the Edit button. Type in the password. Depress the RFQ note button. Depress the Edit button. Type in the note. Depress the Save button. Exit.

Depress the Save button.

To add a Quantity/Price Note for an item on the Part List, highlight that item, then depress the Quantity/Price Note button. Depress the Edit button. Type in the note. Depress the Save button. Exit.

Depress the Save button

Depress the "Export Supplier Request for Quotation" button. Receive the following message.

 

Depress "Yes" if you would like the customer name displayed in the resulting file, depress "No" if you do not want the customer name displayed in the resulting file.

Receive the following message listing the file created

Depress OK.  View Excel spreadsheet created.  NOTE:  This spreadsheet CANNOT be changed (except to fill in Supplier information).  If the format of this spreadsheet has been modified in any way  the information will not transfer in to the QOT properly. 

This file may be e-mailed, faxed, etc to supplier. 

Supplier will then fill in Quote Qty, Min/Qty, Multi/Qty, Price and Lead Time.

 

Once the response has been received from the Supplier, the user may Import the Supplier Quotes. 

Find the user’s Request for Quote (See Article #627).

Depress the Edit button, and enter password. Dpress the  "Import Supplier Quotes" button and receive the following message

Depress Yes and locate Excel File to import from following screen

Double Click on file and Suppliers Information is transfered to RFQ

Depress the Save button.

 

1.2.5.2.4.3. Add a Request for Quote from Inventory

Add From Inventory

To ADD a new estimate, depress the Add button. You’ll be prompted for your password. The following screen will appear.  Select the desired supplier.  Type in the Contact, Date Issued and the Due Date.

Depress the Add Parts button. The following selection will appear:

 
 

Depress the Add From Inventory button.  This is to get a quote for a component or components that are in the item master, but no Customer Quote was entered in the Quotation and Estimating module. The user may use this feature as a stand alone RFQ. 

Type in the Item number and the Manufacturer’s Part Number. Hint: Use the X-Reference Find to easily look up the manufacturer’s part number. This can be found within Inventory Control Management Module. 

Once the Manufacturer’s Part Number is typed in, the following items will fill in automatically from the Inventory Master: Manufacturer’s Name, Class, Type, Description, Request for Quote Source, Parent Part Number, Part Number, Part Number Revision Number, Customer Part Number, Customer Part Number Revision Number and Customer Name. 

The part must be setup on the Supplier's Line Card.  If not you will receive this warning. 

If the Part List has more than one available, a screen will appear advising you that there is more than one Manufacturer’s Part Number in the System.

 

Depress the Yes button.

A list of Inventory records will appear. Double Click to Select the part you want to consider. 

When finished adding components, depress the Save record button.

Notes

To add a RFQ note, depress the Edit button. Type in the password. Depress the RFQ note button. Depress the Edit button. Type in the note. Depress the Save button. Exit.

Depress the Save button.

To add a Quantity/Price Note for an item on the Part List, highlight that item, then depress the Quantity/Price Note button. Depress the Edit button. Type in the note. Depress the Save button. Exit.

Depress the Save button

Depress the "Export Supplier Request for Quotation" button.

1.2.5.2.4.4. Add a Request for Quote for New Part

 Add a New Part

To ADD a new estimate, depress the Add button. You’ll be prompted for your password. The following screen will appear.  Select the desired supplier.  Type in the Contact, Date Issued and the Due Date.

Depress the Add Parts button. The following selection will appear:

 
 

Depress the New Part button from the Request for Quote Add mode Selection. This is to get a quote for a component or components that are not included in the Item Master, and there was no Customer Quote prepared in the Quotation and Estimating module. The user may use this feature as a stand alone RFQ. 

The following screen will appear:

 

Type in the Item number. Select the Manufacturer from the drop down list.

 

Type in the Manufacturer’s Part Number. Select Class and Type from the respective drop down menus. Type in the Description.

If you type in a manufacturer’s part number which does indeed exist in the Inventory Master, the following message will appear.

Depressing the Yes button will bring up the following:

 

You can choose to Use Internal Number or Cancel. If you select the Internal Number, the Manufacturer, Class, Type, Description, etc. will fill in from the Inventory Master.  If you depress Cancel the main screen will appear and you may manually enter in the Class, Type, and Description.

Select the Status from the pull down.

The RFQ Source will indicate New.

Notes

To add a RFQ note, depress the Edit button. Type in the password. Depress the RFQ note button. Depress the Edit button. Type in the note. Depress the Save button. Exit.

Depress the Save button.

To add a Quantity/Price Note for an item on the Part List, highlight that item, then depress the Quantity/Price Note button. Depress the Edit button. Type in the note. Depress the Save button. Exit.

Depress the Save button

Depress the "Export Supplier Request for Quotation" button.

 

1.2.5.2.4.5. Update Quotes

 
Depress the Update Quotes button to have the information forward from the Request for Quote back to the Quotation and Estimating module. 
Information will be forward if:
 
1)   if the information has not been sent to the quote and no component pricing/lead time information has been entered directly into the quote.
2)   if the information has already been sent once from that RFQ, or if information has been entered manually in the quote module then a prompt will appear asking the user if you would like to replace the existing data: 
      a)   if the user selects "No" then only new information is updated in the Quote
       b)   if the user selects "Yes"  
            1)   If no RFQ parts have a null or 0 lead time, then the Quote is updated with the latest RFQ information
            2)   If the RFQ has a part with a null or 0 lead time then it states "some lead times in the RFQ are 0, do you want to replace the Quote lead times with these lead times?"  
      a)   If the user selects "Yes" then the Quote is updated with all the latest information from the RFQ regardless of what was entered previous
      b)   If the user selects "No" then only those lead times greater than 0 will be updated. 
3)  if the part number already has scrap entered in Inventory Control Mgmt, the system will use that as default.  If no scrap has been entered within Inventory, the system will then use the scrap that has been entered within the Quote Customer screen.

Type in your password. A further selection screen will appear:

Depress Update All Quotes. The Quantity / Price Information in the Quotation and Estimating module will update.

 


If you select Update Selected Quote, a list of quotes will appear:

Double click on the desired Quote number.

 

If you select Update Selected Product, a list of products will appear:

Double click on the desired product.

 
 

If you select Update Selected Manufacturer part, the following screen will appear:

Double click to select the desired manufacturer.

 

Once you have updated the quote the item status will change from "Open" to "To Quote"

You can now go back into the Quotation and Estimating module to view and print out the updated quote information. Be sure to highlight the correct Supplier Name to view the quantity and price information.

 

1.2.5.2.5. RFQ Reports

Request for Quotation Report

To print the Supplier Request for Quotation report, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen. 



The following screen will appear:


 

Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

Highlight the desired report and then depress the Option tab if applicable. 

The following screen will appear:  The user has sort options available, as illustrated below:


Click on the desired sort radial – either by Manufacturer, Manufacturer Part Number and quantity or Manufacturer part number, then quantity. Depress the OK button. The following report is available:

 

1.2.5.2.6. FAQs
Facts and Questions for the Customer Quote Module
1.2.5.2.7. ManEx Minutes (RFQ)
1.2.6. Customer Information (CI)
1.2.6.1. Customer Information
1.2.6.1.1. Prerequisites for Customer Information
 

After activation, "Customer Information" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

Accounting Rights
User MUST have full A/R Aging rights  in Accounting Security or MUST be an Accounting Supervisor to approve the Terms, Credit Status and/or Credit Limit fields.
Customer ID Numbering

This selection must be defined for either automatic or manual Customer numbers in Number System setup. 

Territory

The Territory selection for the customer must be setup in Sales Territory  setup.

SIC Codes

If used, the SIC selections for the customer must be setup in SIC Codes  setup.

Terms Th Terms selection for the customer must be setup in Payment Terms  setup.
FOB conditions The FOB terms for sales must be setup in the FOB setup screen. 
Ship Via methods The method by which orders are to be shipped must be setup in Ship Via  setup.
Shipping Charges If used, a classification of shipping charges must be setup in Ship Charge setup.
Sales Tax Categories

The sales tax categories for each customer must be setup in Sales Tax Authority Table  setup.

Contacts If used, the contacts used at the customer must be setup in Contacts Information.

 

 

1.2.6.1.2. Introduction for Customer Information

The Customer Management Module is used to enter the details about customers. This information is used to prepare invoices and packing lists, as well as establish defaults to be used when new orders are created for a customer. A customer may have more than one bill-to address, if there are different divisions for the customer with different accounting departments. Sometimes customers may wish to have material drop-shipped to a third party and bill them. One customer bill-to address will be identified as the default address to be used in the creation of new orders. One customer ship-to address will be identified as the default address in new orders. Also, terms and conditions identified in these screens will be used as defaults for shipping, invoicing and accounting. The user has the opportunity to modify the default information at the time a new order is created.

 

1.2.6.1.3. Fields & Definitions for Customer Information
1.2.6.1.3.1. Customer Information Tab

Field & Definitons

Cust No The customer number assigned to the customer. If automatic, will be completed when the data is saved. If manual, must be entered.
Customer Prefix This information may be used when uploading a BOM through the BOM Import module, if Inventory part numbers are to be created manually and user chooses to add the prefix when creating new part numbers. 
Customer Name

The Customer Name.

Acct Date The date the account was established (defaults to current date).
Account Status
The account status (Active, Inactive, or Quote).   If the customer account status is "Quote"  the customer will only be available in the Quote Module Customer List.  It will be listed as Inactive in all other modules.  If a user changes the Account status from Active to Inactive the program will check if there are any active BOM's and ask if the user wants to inactivate those BOM's at the same time or not.  If the user will answer "YES" all BOM associated with the customer will be Inactive.  When the user tries to activate an Inactive BOM, which is associated with an Inactive customer, the program will ask the user if they want to activate the customer at the same time, if not the system will abort BOM activation.
Territory The Territory for the account (These are established in the Sales Territory  setup).
Phone The phone number of the customer.
Fax The Fax Number of the Customer.
Reseller No The user may include the customer’s resale number for tax purposes.
Terms The standard terms established for the customer. Terms must first be established in the Payment Terms  setup.  Note:  that this field may be edited only by a user with full Accounting rights.
Credit Status

The Credit status of the customer. Select OK - Credit is good;  On Hold - a temperary hold and customer may return to OK status.   or Reject - a visual status for users to know that the customer is rejected and will NOT have an opportunity for credit status change.   Note:  that this field may be edited only by a user with full Accounting rights. 

Credit Limit
The credit limit established for the customer.  The credit limit check takes place within the packing list.  The program gets the total Accounts Receivable (AR Aging) + Not Posted Invoice (invoice not printed out of the Admin/Invoice module) + Open SO Amounts and compares it to the Credit Limit established for the customer.
This is based on having the "Include Open Orders for Credit Approvals for Shipping" option checked, (within the Print PL/Invoice setup module) (if you do NOT want to include open Sales Orders you would want to uncheck this option) and the "Enforce Credit Limit at Shipment" option checked, (within the Sales-A/R setup module)(uncheck this option if you do NOT want to Enforce the Credit Limit at Shipment).   You also have the ability,  to authorize a user to approve the credit limit exceed message or NOT (within the Security module, Packing List option screen).   Make sure that these options are marked properly to get the results you are expecting.  
NOTE:  that this field may be edited ONLY by a user with FULL Accounting rights. 
Account Taxable  Check box if user wants this Customers Account Taxable at all times.
SIC Code

The SIC code for the Customer. If used, must first be established in the SIC Codes  setup.

Sales Discount Type

The sales discount available to this customer as established in Sales Order Defaults & Sales Discount Type  setup.     

Contacts

When this screen is viewed for an existing customer, contacts entered in the Contact Information module will show for this customer. The field is not editable from this module. 

First Name The first name of the contact.
Title The title held by the contact.

1.2.6.1.3.2. Bill-To Tab

Field & Defintions

Customer Name

The name of the customer.

Billing Addresses A list of Bill-To addresses created for the customer, from which to choose for editing data.  There is no limitation to the number of addresses added to this field.
This button allows the user to define multiple Bill-To locations for the customer.
This button allows the user to modify existing Bill-To information about a customer. If more than one Bill-To address exists for a customer, the address highlighted is the one that will be opened for editing.
This button allows the user to delete an existing Bill-To address for a customer only if this address is NOT linked to a Sales Order.  If this address is or has been linked to a Sales order you will receive the following message:

  

This button is automatically checked for the first entry. After that, the user may wish to enter other Bill-To locations, and identify one of those as the default Billing address. The Billing address with the default checked is the one that will automatically be placed in new orders. However, the user still has the opportunity to change the Billing address in the order by selecting another address.

Bill To The name of the organization to which invoicing is to be sent. (It may be a different division, or a drop-ship situation.)
Address The Customer Bill-To Address (may use two lines).
City The City for the Customer Bill-To Address.
State The State for the Customer Bill-To Address. 
Zip Code The Zip Code for the Customer BillTto Address. 
Country The Customer Country.
Invoice Footnote – will open a screen for a Footnote that will appear on all of the invoices for that customer.
Phone The phone number at the Customer’s Bill-To Address.
Fax The fax number at the Customer’s Bill-To Address.
Attention The Contact Name at the Bill-To address (if established in the Contact module).
E-mail The E-mail address at the Bill-To Customers
This button allows the user to save the modified Bill-To information.
This button will cancel any modifications made to the screen after the edit button has been pressed.

1.2.6.1.3.3. Ship-To Tab

Ship To Address Information Fields & Defintions

Customer Name

The name of the customer.

Shipping Addresses A list of Ship-To addresses created for the customer, from which to choose for editing data.  There is no limitation to the number of addresses added to this field.
  This button allows the user to define multiple Ship-To locations for the customer.
  This button allows the user to modify existing Ship-To information about a customer. If more than one Ship-To address exists for a customer, the address highlighted is the one that will be opened for editing.
 
This button allows the user to delete an existing Ship-To address for a customer only if this address is NOT linked to a Sales Order.  If this address is or has been linked to a Sales order you will receive the following message:
 
 

This button is automatically checked for the first entry. After that, the user may wish to enter other Ship-To locations, and identify one of those as the default Shipping address. The Shipping address with the default checked is the one that will automatically be placed in new orders. However, the user still has the opportunity to change the Shipping address in the order by selecting another address.

Ship To The name of the organization to which product will be sent. (It may be a different division, or a drop-ship situation.)
Address The Customer Ship-To Address (may use two lines).
City The City for the Customer Ship-To Address.
State The State for the Customer Ship-To Address. 
Zip Code The Zip Code for the Customer Ship-To Address. 
Country The Customer Country.
  Packing List Footnote – will open a screen for a Footnote that will appear on all of the packing lists for that customer.
Phone The phone number at the Customer’s Ship-To Address.
Fax The fax number at the Customer’s Ship-To Address.
Attention The Contact Name at the Ship-To address (if established in the Contacts Information module).
E-mail The E-mail address at the Ship-To Customers.  This field will allow 40 characters to be entered.
  This button allows the user to save the modified Ship-to information.
  This button will cancel any modifications made to the screen after the edit button has been pressed.

Ship To Tax & Shipping Mode Fields & Definitons

Customer Name The name of the customer.
Ship to The chosen Ship-To name for which the data applies.
FOB The FOB Terms established for the customer. Must be established in the FOB  setup prior to use.
Shipvia The Ship Via definition established for the customer, as entered in Ship Via setup.
Shipcharge The shipping charge classification used for charging the customer, as entered in Ship Charge  setup.
Transit Days The number of days from user’s dock to customer’s dock, based on ship-via method.  
Account Number The freight account number if the customer wishes the freight to be shipped against their own account.
Delivery Time The customer - preferred delivery time to their dock.
Use Foreign Tax Check this box to use Foreign Tax for this specific ship to address. Once checked for a specific address it should not be switched back to US Tax.  (If customer has two addresses, one that uses US tax and one that uses Foreign tax then user should setup one address without the Foreign tax box checked and one address with the Foreign tax box checked).  

US Tax

Sales Tax
The sales tax to be charged on taxable items shipped to this address. 
Shipping Charge Tax The sales tax to be charged on freight costs for shipping to this address.
This button allows the user to select a tax authority based on the ship-to locations for the customer. The tax authority codes must be established in the Sales Tax Authority Table setup prior to using.
This button allows the user to select an existing tax authority for the customer for deletion

Foreign Tax
 
Primary Tax
This tax will be calculated first, when the "Use Foreign Tax" box is checked.
Primary Tax Includes
Option to Apply Tax on the Product, Freight or both.   ManEx recommends that once these boxes are setup they should NOT be changed.   

Note:   The tax rate will not be affected in the Credit Memo if user changes the tax setup in customer module, but the primary and secondary tax checkboxes will be affected, just like the shipping address if user changes that in the customer module.   
Secondary Tax This tax will be calculated after Primary tax when the "Use Foreign Tax" box is checked.
Secondary Tax  Includes Option to Apply Tax on the Product, Freight, both or Primary.  ManEx recommends that once these boxes are setup they should NOT be changed.   

Note:   The tax rate will not be affected in the Credit Memo if user changes the tax setup in customer module, but the primary and secondary tax checkboxes will be affected, just like the shipping address if user changes that in the customer module.   
This button allows the user to select a tax authority based on the ship-to locations for the customer. The tax authority codes must be established in the Sales Tax Authority Table setup prior to using. 
This button allows the user to select an existing tax authority for the customer for deletion.




Ship To Shipping Instructions Fields & Definitions

Customer Name

The name of the customer. 

Ship To The chosen Ship-To name for which the data applies.
Shipping Or Packing Instruction This screen is a memo field that may be used to record directions, notes, cautions, etc. for shipping to this specific Customer Shipping Address. The information entered in this screen will be displayed in the Packing List module for this ship to address only.

1.2.6.1.3.4. Profile Tab

Fields & Definitions

Customer Name  The customer name.
   This screen is a memo field that may be used to record customer company information

1.2.6.1.3.5. Lookup Tab

Fields & Definitions

Active Select if you want to view only Active Customers
Inactive Select if you want to view only Inactive Customers
Customer No The customer number assigned to the customer. If automatic, will be completed when the data is saved. If manual, must be entered.
Customer Name The name of the customer.
Ship To The chosen Ship To name for which the data applies.

1.2.6.1.4. How To .... for Customer Information
1.2.6.1.4.1. Find Existing Customer Information
There are two ways to Find Existing Customer Information:

1.     By using the Find button located in the tool bar at the top of the screen.  The following screen will appear:  Double click on the selected customer name to view the customer ifnormation.  If you want to view customers with Inactive status or Quote status you must select the Inactive radio.  







2.    Depress the Lookup tab.  This screen allows the user to locate a customer alphabetically.  Double click on the customer name and view that customer information without having to use the FIND button. This screen will list all of the customers entered with their name beginning with the letters included in the tab selected.  If you would like to view customers with Inactive status or Quote status you must select the Inactive radio. NOTE:  If a customer's name begins with a number it will not be displayed in the Lookup. 
 
 
 
1.2.6.1.4.2. Add a Customer

 Enter Sales Mgt/Customer Information/Customer Information  

The following screen will appear:

Depress the Add button. User must enter password.

The customer number assigned to the customer. If automatic, will be completed when the data is saved. If manual, must be entered.

Enter the Customer Name. 

The date the account was established (defaults to current date). 

Enter the account status (Active, Inactive, or Quote). 

Choose the Territory for the account from the pull down (Territories are established in System setup/Sales Territory).

Enter the phone number of the Customer. 

Enter the Fax Number of the Customer.

The user may include the customer’s resale number for tax purposes.

Enter the standard terms established for the customer from the pull down. Terms must first be established in the System setup/Payment Terms setup.  Note that this field may be entered or edited only by a user with full Accounting rights.

Choose the Credit status of the customer from the pull down.  May be OK, On Hold or Reject. Note that this field may be entered or edited only by a user with full Accounting rights . 

Enter the credit limit established for the customer.  The credit limit check takes place within the packing list. (Credit Limit Restrictions). Note that this field may be edited only by a user with full Accounting rights. 

Check the box if this account is taxable.

Enter the SIC code for the Customer. If used, must first be established in the System setup/SIC Codes setup. 

Enter the Sales Discount available to this customer as established in System setup/Sales Discount Type setup.

When this screen is viewed for an existing customer, contacts entered in the Customer Contact Module will show for this customer. The field is not editable from this module. 
 

After completing the Customer information screen, the user may click on the  Bill To tab.

 

In this screen, the user defines the customer information for invoicing purposes.

The Customer Bill-To Directive buttons will now be active: 

  This button allows the user to define multiple Bill-To locations for the customer. 
 

This button allows the user to modify existing Bill-To information about a customer. If more than one Bill-To address exists for a customer, the address highlighted is the one that will be opened for editing.

 

This button allows the user to delete an existing Bill-To record for a customer. 

 

This button allows the user to save the modified Bill-To information.  

 

This button will cancel any modifications made to the screen after the edit button has been pressed.

 
This button is automatically checked for the first entry.  After that, the user may wish to enter other Bill-To locations, and identify one of those as the default Billing address. The Billing address with the default checked is the one that will automatically be placed in new orders. However, the user still has the opportunity to change the Billing address in the order by selecting another address.

Depress the Add directive button, located at the bottom of the screen and the following screen will appear:
 

Enter the name of the organization to which invoicing is to be sent. (It may be a different division, or a drop-ship situation.)

Enter the Customer Bill-To Address (may use two lines).

Enter the City, State and Zip Code for the Customer Bill-To Address.

Enter the Customer Country.

Enter the phone number at the Customer’s Bill-To Address.

Enter the fax number at the Customer’s Bill-To Address. 

The Contact Name at the Bill-To Address (if established in the Contact module).

Enter the e-mail address for the Bill-To Customer.
 

 

Depressing this button will open a screen for a Invoice Footnote to be added that will appear on all of the Invoices for that customer.

After completing the Bill-To information, depress the Save button at the bottom of the screen.

 

The user then may click on the Ship To tab.




In this screen, the user defines the customer information for shipping purposes. T
he Ship-To screen has additional tabs for more detailed information. The first screen is the Ship-To Address Information. The screen and fields are identical to the Bill-To screen, except that the information will be used for packing lists.

Pressing the ADD button located at the bottom of the screen will automatically fill the information from the Bill-To screen, if it has been completed. All data may be edited and saved, or new data may be added to the database.
 
 

  Depressing this button will open a screen for a Packing List Footnote to be added that will appear on all of the Packing Lists for that customer.  

Depress the Tax and Shipping Mode tab. Within this screen you will enter the Tax and Shipping detail information: 

The name of the customer being edited will default in Customer Name field from the Address Information screen.

The chosen ship to name for which the data applies will default in the Ship To field from the Address Information screen.

Choose the FOB Terms from the pull down established for the customer. Must be established in the System setup/FOB setup  prior to use.

Choose the Ship Via from the pull down definition established for the customer, as entered in System setup/Ship Via setup.

Choose the shipping charge from the pull down classification used for charging the customer, as entered in System setup/Ship Charge setup.

Enter the number of Transit Days from user’s dock to customer’s dock, based on ship-via method.   If the Customer transit days are blank or zero that then the system will take from the Delivery Schedule default.

Enter the freight account number if the customer wishes the freight to be shipped against their own account.

Enter the customer preferred delivery time to their dock.

Check the "Use Foreign Tax" button to calculate foreign tax, if foreign tax applies to this Ship To address.  This will allow users to use multiple taxes, based on the Province.  See the Foreign Tax Overview below.  Once this box has been checked for a specific address it should not be unchecked.  If customer also uses US Tax user should setup another ship to address for US Tax.  This box should not be checked and uncheck per shipment.

Enter the Primary and/or Secondary tax information to be charged on taxable items shipped to this address, by depressing the "Add Tax" button and selecting a tax rate from the Pull Downs.  Information being displayed in the pull downs is from the information entered in System Setup/Sales Tax Authority Table setup.  The User can modify how the tax should be calculated by checking or unchecking the box on the right of the screen.   

If not using foreign tax,  enter the sales tax to be charged on taxable items shipped to this address.  See the US Sales Tax Overview below.

Enter the shipping charge tax to be charged on freight costs for shipping to this address.

Adding a Sales Tax or a Shipping Charge Tax in Customer Information requires that those items added be entered in System Setup/Sales Tax Authority Table setup.

The Delete Tax button allows the user to select an existing tax authority for the customer for deletion.
 

Sales Tax Overview

Sales Orders/Customer Information

US Sales Tax Overview

For Sales Order Items with no Tax, leave the Tax box unchecked. No further action is required.

To Manually add US Tax (if not set up in Customer Information), enter line item and then in Pricing Screen click on Add Line and enter description of Sales Tax and Tax Amount manually. A Sales Type for the appropriate Tax G/L number should be setup in Accounting so that it can be selected when entering the Sales Tax manually.  The full amount of the Tax will be Invoiced upon shipment of the first item so using manual sales tax entries may not be useful for shipments with multiple shipments against the same line item.

Checking the Tax box in Sales Order Pricing will not calculate or add US Tax for a line item unless the Shipping Address for the particular Customer selected in the Sales Order Header has been set up. Shipping Address Tax Setup is done in the Tax and Shipping Mode screen under the Ship To tab under Customer Information Management.

If a particular Customer Ship To Address has more than one US Tax (such as a Sales, Use, Excise, etc. tax), then the taxes may be entered in System Setup individually and added individually to the appropriate Customer Ship To addresses.

If there are more than one US Tax setups for a Customer Ship To Address, Manex will add up all the tax rates and apply the combined percentage to the pre-tax line item total.
 
Foreign Tax Overview
 
User CANNOT manually add Foreign tax to Sales Orders or Invoices.  The Foreign tax box must be checked for the Shipping Address for the particular Customer selected in the Sales Order Header. 
 
If the Foreign tax box is checked for the Shipping Address for the particular Customer selected in the Sales Order Header.  Pricing will be listed as follows on the Sales Order Acknowledgement, Invoice, RMA, and Credit Memo:  First the Product Sub-tot AMT, the Sales Discount (if applicable), the Freight AMT (if applicable), a SUB-TOTAL,  the GST TAX (Primary tax) (Note: the Primary tax will always be displayed even if it is zero, if a Secondary Tax is present), then a second Sub-Total,  PST TAX (secondary tax), and last the TOTAL.  If no PST tax (secondary Tax), Sales Discount, or Freight is involved, then no lines would print for these items.    See the  Foreign Tax Examples.xls  attachment to see how the Primary and Secondary taxes are calculated.
 
The Primary tax and Secondary tax is divided into the Sales tax and Shipping tax on the Sales Tax reports. 
 
For Example: 
Primary Tax (GST):  144*10% (sales tax) + 0 (no freight tax is calculated) =$14.40
Secondary Tax (PST):  144*8% (sales tax) + 12*8% (Freight tax)  =  $12.48
 
Divided into sales tax and freight tax:
Sales Tax: 144*10% (sales tax)  +  144*8% (sales tax)  =  $25.92
Freight Tax  0 (from primary tax)  +  12*8% (from secondary tax)  =  $0.96

Depress the Shipping Instruction tab
This screen is a memo field that may be used to record directions, notes, cautions, etc. for shipping to this Customer Address.
 

After completing the Ship To screens, go back to the Ship To tab or screen and select either the Save or the Cancel button located at the bottom of the screen. 




Then  the user may click on the Profile Tab
In this screen, the user defines the Customer Profile notes for internal purposes. This screen is a memo field that may be used to record customer company information.

Once the record is complete user must depress the Save changes icon to save changes or the Abandon changes icon if you do not want to save change.

1.2.6.1.4.3. Edit Customer Information

 Enter Sales Mgt/Customer Information/Customer Information  

The following screen will appear:

Depress the Find action button. 

A Customer List will appear.  You may view Active or Inactive Customers.  Highlight and double click on the Customer or Type the Customers Name in the red box and depress the enter key.  

The Customers Information will appear on the screen:

Depress the Edit action button.  Enter password.

All fields available for editing will be enabled for modification.  Keep in mind that any changes within these screens will update all Open Sales Orders, Packing Lists, Invoices, RMA's, etc. upon save.  Note: Terms, Credit Status and Credit Limit may only be edited by Accounting.  All fields with the exception of the Customer No and Acct date become editable.

If a user changes the Account status from Active to Inactive the program will check if there are any active BOM's and ask if the user wants to inactivate those BOM's at the same time or not.  If the user will answer "YES" all BOM associated with the customer will be Inactive.  When the user tries to Activate an Inactive BOM, which is associated with an inactive customer, the program will ask the user if they want to activate the customer at the same time, if not the system will abort BOM activation.
 
If a user changes the Terms,  this will NOT affect existing Sales Orders, Packing Lists and/or Invoices. When creating a Packing List/Invoice  from an existing Sales Order the old Terms will default in and user will need to manually change them.  The new terms will ONLY affect any NEW Sales Orders that are created within the Sales Order Management module after the change has been made.
 
 
The Contacts field is not editable from this module.  The Contacts must be edited in the Customer Contact section 
 
To Add a new Bill To address,  Edit an existing Bill To address, or Delete an existing Bill To address, user must depress the Add, Edit, or Delete button located at the bottom of the screen along with the Edit action button: 
 
 
Once changes have been completed user must first depress the  "Save" or "Cancel"  button at the bottom of the screen.  
 
To Add, Edit or Delete, the Ship To Address info, the Tax & Shipping Mode info, or the Shipping Instructions, user must depress the Add, Edit, or Delete button located at the bottom of the screen along with the Edit action button: 
 
 
Once changes have been completed user must first depress the  "Save" or "Cancel"  button at the bottom of the screen.   
At the conclusion of the modifications process, the user must Save changes, or Abandon changes using the action buttons.  If you depress the Save changes button all records will be updated with new information.
 
Note:    User will only be allowed to delete an existing Bill-To or Ship-To address for a customer if this address is NOT linked to a Sales Order.  If this address is or has been linked to a Sales order you will receive the following message:
 

 Depress the Exit action button to return to the previous screen.

1.2.6.2. Contact Information
1.2.6.2.1. Prerequisites for Contacts Information

After activation, "Customer Information & Customer Contact Information" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

A Customer Name  
 
The Contact must refer to a Customer, which has been set up in the Customer module.
A picture File A picture of the contact may optionally be included as a memory jogger, but the picture must already be available to pickup in a picture format.

1.2.6.2.2. Introduction for Contacts Information

The Contact Module is used to record the details of customer contacts. Contacts may be of any nature, but must be associated with a customer. Manex provides the user with the ability to maintain both professional and personal details about a contact, including provision for personal tastes and affiliations. Contacts must be entered in this module if they are to be included in the customer Ship-To and Bill-To data fields at a later time. A contact who has moved to another customer may have a new customer assigned to them without having to re-enter their personal data.

1.2.6.2.3. Fields & Definitions for Contacts Information
1.2.6.2.3.1. Business Tab

Fields & Defintions

Last Name The last name of the contact being added or edited.
First The first name of the contact being added or edited.
MI The middle initial of the contact
Status The status of the Customer Contact, either Active or Inactive.
Nickname The nickname of the contact.
Company The company to which the contact belongs.
Title The title of the contact at the customer.
Department The department at the customer in which the contact works.
Phone The phone number and/or extension for the contact at the company (may be different than the company main number).
Cellular The Cellular phone number for the contact.
Fax The FAX number for the contact at the company (may be different than the company main number).
Pager The Pager number for the contact.
Internet or E-mail Address The E-Mail address of the contact.

 

1.2.6.2.3.2. Personal Tab

Fields & Definitions

This button allows the user to load a photo for a customer contact. The photo file should be in the MANEX directory, and should be BMP or TIF format.

Birthday

The Customer Contact Birth Date.

Spouse's Name The Customer Contact’s Spouse Name.
Spouse's Birthday The Contact’s Spouse’s Birthday.
Anniversary The Contact’s Anniversary.
Home Phone

The Contact’s Home Phone.

Address The Contact’s Home Address  (two lines available).
City

The Contact’s Home City.

State, Zip

The Contact’s Home State and Zip code.

Country

The Contact’s home country.

This set of buttons allow the user to record specific information that they may wish to retain about the customer contact. It is divided into several categories to narrow the search for information later. Pressing any of these buttons brings up a memo window that may be added to, edited or canceled at will. 

1.2.6.2.3.3. Lookup Tab

Fields & Defintions

Last Name The last name of the contact.
First Name The first name of the contact.
Company The company to which the contact belongs.
Title The title of the contact at the customer.
Work Phone The phone number and/or extension of the contact at the company (may be different than the company main number).

1.2.6.2.4. How To .... for Contact Information
1.2.6.2.4.1. Find a Customer Contact

Depress the Lookup tab.  This screen allows the user to locate a customer contact alphabetically.  Double click on the customer contact name will bring the associated data into all screens without having to use the FIND action button. This screen will list all of the customer contacts entered beginning with the Last Name, First Name, Company, Title and Contact Phone number (not the company phone number). 

1.2.6.2.4.2. Add a Customer Contact

Enter Sales Mgt/Customer Information/Contact Information  

The following screen will appear:

Depress the Add action button. The user will be prompted for an authorized password.

Type in the last name of the contact being added. 

Type in the first name of the contact being added. 

Type in the middle initial of the contact.

Select the status of the Customer Contact, either Active or Inactive.

Type in the nickname of the contact.

Select the company to which the contact belongs by depressing on the down arrow located on the right hand side of this field and highlighting the selection.

Type in the title of the contact at the customer.

Type in the phone number and/or extension of the contact at the company (may be different than the company main number).

Type in the FAX number of the contact at the company (may be different than the company main number.

Type in the E-Mail address of the contact.

Type in the department at the customer in which the contact works.

Type in a Cellular phone number for the contact.

Type in a Pager number for the contact.

After completing the Business information, the user may click on the Personal tab.  In this screen, the user may enter personal information relating to the contact.

 

The Customer Contact Directive buttons will now be active.

 

This button allows the user to load a photo for a customer contact. The photo file should be in the MANEX directory, and should be BMP or TIF format. Select the desired image. It will appear in the window.

 

This set of buttons allow the user to record specific information that they may wish to retain about the customer contact. It is divided into several categories to narrow the search for information later. Pressing any of these buttons brings up a memo window that may be added to, edited or canceled at will.

Type in the Customer Contact Birth Date.

Type in the Customer Contact’s Spouse Name.

Type in the Contact’s Spouse’s Birthday.

Type in the Contact’s Anniversary.

Type in the Contact’s Home Phone.

Type in the Contact’s Home Address(two lines available).

Type in the Contact’s Home City.

Type in the Contact’s Home State and Zip code.

Type in the Contact’s home country.

Depress the Save action button to save changes, or depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes.

1.2.6.2.4.3. Edit a Customer Contact
 Enter Sales Mgt/Customer Information/Contacts Information  

The following screen will appear:

Depress the Find action button. The following selection screen will be displayed.  To find an existing Customer Contact select one of the following:  Last Name, First Name, or Customer.

The user may exit the selection screen without a selection by selecting the X button.

 

 

When the user elects to find Customer Contact Information by Last Name, a screen appears listing contacts in alphabetical order by last name along with their first name and the Customer Name. The user may elect to show only Active customers, or Inactive contacts. The user selects the contact by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected contact. 

 

When the user elects to find Customer Contact Information by First Name, a screen appears listing contacts in alphabetical order by first name along with their last name and the Customer Name. The user may elect to show only Active customers, or Inactive contacts. The user selects the contact by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected contact. 

 

When the user elects to find Customer Contact Information by Customer, a screen appears listing Customer Names in alphabetical order.  The user selects the customer by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected customer. 

 
Then a list of all of the selected customer contacts are shown in alphabetical order by last name, along with their first name and Customer. The user may elect to show only Active contacts, or Inactive contacts. The user selects the contact by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected contact.   

Once you have made your choice, the information will be displayed as follows:

Depress the Edit action button.  Enter password.

All fields available for editing will be enabled for modification. 

At the conclusion of the modifications process, the user must Save changes, or Abandon changes using the action buttons. 

 Depress the Exit action button to return to the previous screen.

1.2.6.3. Reports - Customer Contact
To obtain the Customer Information reports, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen. 



The following screen will appear:

Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

Highlight the desired report and then depress the Option tab if applicable. 

Customer Information Report

For the Customer Information report, select Active, Inactive or All by clicking on the desired radial.  Depress the OK button.

 

The following report will print:

Customer Contact Information Report

For the Customer Contact Information report, choose Customer by highlighting then depressing the > button.  If you want all of the Customers, depress the >> button. 

Once selection is made, depress the OK button. 

 
  

The following report will print:

Customer Contact Anniversary Report

For the Customer Contact Information report, choose Customer by highlighting then depressing the > button.  If you want all of the Customers, depress the >> button.  Enter From and To dates. 

Once selection is made, depress the OK button. 

  

The following report will print:

 

1.2.6.4. FAQs - Customer Information
FAQ's for the Customer Information Module
1.2.7. Sales Representitive Information (SR)
1.2.7.1. Prerequisites for Sales Rep Information

After activation, "Sales Rep Information" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
 

Sales Rep Types
This MUST be setup in the Sales Rep Types module
A Picture File

A picture of the Sales Representative may optionally be included as a memory jogger, but the picture must already be available to pickup in a picture format. 

1.2.7.2. Introduction for Sales Rep Information
The Sales Representatives Module is used to record the details of sales representatives. Manex provides the user with the ability to maintain both professional and personal details about a sales representative, including provision for personal tastes and affiliations.  
 
NOTE:  The Sales Commission information was added to the system to allow our users to create their own customer commission reports based on the information that is stored within the tables. I would suggest that you consider using Crystal Reports to design the desired Commission report that would best fit your company, using the information stored within the ManEx tables.
1.2.7.3. Fields & Definitions for Contacts Information
1.2.7.3.1. Business Tab

Fields & Defintions

Last Name The last name of the Sales Rep being added or edited.
First The first name of the Sales Rep being added or edited.
MI The middle initial of the Sales Rep.
Status The status of the Sales Rep, either Active or inactive.
Nickname The nickname of the Sales Rep.
Sales Rep Type The Sales Rep Type (This MUST be setup in the Sales Rep Types module)
Rep ID  Sales Rep ID
Title The Sales Rep's title. 
Department The department in which the Sales Rep works.
Phone The phone number and/or extension for the Sales Rep.  (may be different than the company main number).
Cellular The Cellular phone number for the Sales Rep.
Fax The FAX number for the Sales Rep.  (may be different than the company main number).
Pager The Pager number for the Sales Rep.
Internet or E-mail Address The E-Mail address of the Sales Rep.

 

1.2.7.3.2. Personal Tab

Fields & Definitions

 

This button allows the user to load a photo of the Sales Rep. The photo file should be in the MANEX directory, and should be BMP or TIF format.

Birthday

The Sales Rep's Birth Date.

Spouse's Name The Sales Rep's Spouse Name.
Spouse's Birthday The Sales Rep's Spouse’s Birthday.
Anniversary The Slaes Rep's Anniversary.
Home Phone

The Sales Rep's Home Phone.

Address The Sales Rep's Home Address  (two lines available).
City

The Sales Rep's Home City.

State, Zip

The Sales Rep's Home State and Zip code.

Country

The Sales Rep's home country.

 

This set of buttons allow the user to record specific information that they may wish to retain about the Sales Rep. It is divided into several categories to narrow the search for information later. Pressing any of these buttons brings up a memo window that may be added to, edited or canceled at will. 

1.2.7.3.3. Lookup Tab

Fields & Defintions

Last Name The last name of the Sales Rep.
First Name The first name of the Sales Rep.
Sales Rep Type The Sales Rep type..
Title The title of the Sales Rep..
Work Phone The phone number and/or extension of the Sales Rep. (may be different than the company main number).

1.2.7.4. How To .... for Contacts Information
1.2.7.4.1. Find a Sales Rep

Depress the Lookup tab.  This screen allows the user to locate a Sales Rep alphabetically.  Double click on the Sales Rep name will bring the associated data into all screens without having to use the FIND action button. This screen will list all of the Sales Rep's entered, beginning with the Last Name, First Name, Sales Rep Type, Title and Work Phone number (not the company phone number). 

1.2.7.4.2. Add a Sales Rep

Enter Sales Mgt/Sales Rep Information  

The following screen will appear:

Depress the Add action button. The user will be prompted for an authorized password.

Enter the last name of the Sales Rep being added. 

Enter the first name of the Sales Rep being added. 

Enter the middle initial of the Sales Rep.

Select the status of the Sales Rep, either Active or Inactive.

Enter the nickname of the Sales Rep.

Select the Sales Rep Type by depressing on the down arrow located on the right hand side of this field and highlighting the selection.

Enter the title of the Sales Rep.

Enter the phone number and/or extension of the Sales Rep. (may be different than the company main number).

Enter the FAX number of the Sales Rep. (may be different than the company main number.

Enter the E-Mail address of the Sales Rep.

Enter the department of the Sales Rep.

Enter the Cellular phone number for the Sales Rep.

Enter the Pager number for the Sales Rep.

After completing the Business information, the user may click on the Personal tab.  In this screen, the user may enter personal information relating to the Sales Rep.

 

The Customer Contact Directive buttons will now be active.

 

This button allows the user to load a photo of the Sales Rep. The photo file should be in the MANEX directory, and should be BMP or TIF format. Select the desired image. It will appear in the window.

 

This set of buttons allow the user to record specific information that they may wish to retain about the Sales Rep.. It is divided into several categories to narrow the search for information later. Pressing any of these buttons brings up a memo window that may be added to, edited or canceled at will.

Enter the Sales Rep's Birth Date.

Enter the Sales Rep's Spouse Name.

Enter the Sales Rep's Spouse’s Birthday.

Enter the Sales Rep’s Anniversary.

Enter the Sales Rep’s Home Phone.

Enter the Sales Rep’s Home Address(two lines available).

Enter the Sales Rep’s Home City.

Enter the Sales Rep’s Home State and Zip code.

Enter the Sales Rep’s home country.

Depress the Save action button to save changes, or depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes.

1.2.7.4.3. Edit a Sales Rep
 Enter Sales Mgt/Sales Rep Information  

The following screen will appear:

Depress the Find action button. The following selection screen will be displayed.  To find an existing Sales Rep select one of the following:  Sales Rep Name, or Sales Rep Type.

The user may exit the selection screen without a selection by selecting the X button.

 

 

When the user elects to find Sales Rep by Name, a screen appears listing Sales Reps in alphabetical order by last name along with their first name. The user may elect to show only Active customers, or Inactive contacts. The user selects the contact by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected name. 

 

When the user elects to find Sales Rep by Type, a screen appears listing the Sales Rep Types in alphabetical order.  The user selects the type by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected type. 

 
Then a list of all of the Sales Reps associated with that type are shown in alphabetical order by last name, along with their first name.  The user may elect to show only Active contacts, or Inactive contacts. The user selects the Sales Rep by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected name.   

Once you have made your choice, the information will be displayed as follows:

Depress the Edit action button.  Enter password.

All fields available for editing will be enabled for modification. 

At the conclusion of the modifications process, the user must Save changes, or Abandon changes using the action buttons. 

 Depress the Exit action button to return to the previous screen.

1.2.7.5. Reports - Sales Representitive Information
To print the Sales Rep Information report, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen. 



The following screen will appear:

Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

Highlight the desired report and then depress the Option tab if applicable. 


Sales Rep Information Report

For the Sales Rep  Information report, select Active, Inactive or All by clicking on the desired radial.  Depress the OK button.

 

The following report will print:

 

 

1.3. Inventory Management
1.3.1. Packing List Management (PL)
1.3.1.1. Packing List Management
1.3.1.1.1. Prerequisites for Packing List Mgmt
Prerequisites for Entering a New Packing List: 

After activation, "Packing Slip" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
 

A Sales Order

The packing normally refers to a Sales Order, which includes the part numbers and description of the material being shipped.  Also, the Sales Order must have been approved for shipment by placing a check in the Order Acknowledgment box.  There is also provision for a stand-alone packing list (manual invoice).

Packing List Numbering

The Number System Setup must be defined for either automatic or manual packing list numbers.

Serial Numbers

If the order involves serial numbers, such numbers must have been set up in Work Order Serial Number Control.    

 

1.3.1.1.2. Introduction for Packing List Mgmt

The Packing List Module is used to record the details of shipments to customers.

The Packing List is created when the user has completed assembly, or pulled parts for an order and the order is scheduled to ship. There is also provision for a stand-alone (manual invoice) packing list.

Note:  In order to initiate the packing list, the Sales Order MUST have the Order Acknowledgment box checked, indicating that it is OK to ship the product to the customer.  For further Detail See Article #1150.

1.3.1.1.3. Fields & Definitions for Packing List Mgmt
1.3.1.1.3.1. Packing List Tab

 

 

Packing List tab field definitions

Customer   The name of the Customer
Ship To

The address where the shipment was delivered

Attention

The Customer’s contact

Ship Via

How the shipment was transported

Freight

Whether or not freight will be charged to the Customer

FOB

The point at which title passes

Terms

The payment terms the user has for the Customer

Frt Amt

The amount of freight the user charged the customer

Waybill

The number of the waybill as assigned by the carrier

P/L Number

The number of the Packing List

Packing List Date

The date of the packing list

Sales Order

The number of the Sales Order

Purchase Order

This is the Customer’s Purchase Order number

Customer Acct # This is the Customers Acct #

Sales Order Acknowledgement

If this box is checked, the Sales Order has been acknowledged.(If this box is NOT checked, go back into the Sales order module and acknowledge the order)

Credit

The customer’s credit status with the user

Entered by The initials of the user who entered the Packing List

1.3.1.1.3.2. Detail Tab

Detail tab field definitions

Customer

The name of the Customer.

P/L Number

The number assigned to the packing list.

Ln

The Sales Order Line item number.

Part Number

The number the user has assigned to the product.

Rev

The revision number applicable to the Part Number.

Class

The classification to which the Part Number belongs.

Type The type within the classification
Qty

The number of units shipped with this Packing List.  See Article #1240 for more detail on why the system will not allow user to enter in a fraction of a number, and an alternative.

Back Order

The number of units still not shipped.

Description

The description of the product.

UOM

The unit of measure for the product.

Shipped Rev

If the Packing List is revised, the revision number will appear in this field.

Serial Number Entry This is the list of Serial Numbers shipped on this Packing List .For a discussion on how to enter serial numbers, see section below on Serial Number Entry.

Buttons

If there is a Sales Order associated with the shipment, depressing this button will display the Sales Order line items for the user to select for this shipment.

Depressing this button will allow the user to add a manual item to the Packing List.

Highlighting a line item and depressing this button will delete the line.

This button is depressed to enter Sets of Serial numbers to ship 

 

For the line item highlighted, this field is for any applicable notes.

1.3.1.1.3.3. Ship Instruction Tab

 

Shipping Instructions Tab Detail

This tab is used for special instructions regarding the shipment.  This information defaults in from the Customer Info module.

1.3.1.1.3.4. History Tab

 

History tab field definitions

Sales Order Shipping History

This section displays the Ship Date, Ship Via, Way Bill number, Line Number, Class, Part No. Rev., Description and Ship Quantity for this packing list.It also displays the Ship History of the Part by displaying the Packing List number and the Ship Quantity.

Packing List Adjustment Log

This section displays any packing list adjustments for this packing list and details the Date, Class, Description, Part Number, Rev., and Shipped Qty.

1.3.1.1.3.5. Notes Tab

Notes tab field definitions

Sales Order Note

This section will display any note pertaining to the Sales Order.

Packing List Footnote

This section is for any packing list footnotes which will appear when the Packing List is printed.

1.3.1.1.4. How To ..... for Packing List Mgmt
1.3.1.1.4.1. Find an Existing Packing List
Enter Inventory Mgt/Packing List Management/Packing List Management

The following screen will appear.  When the screen first opens, the user is limited to only four of the seven action buttons shown: Find an existing Packing List, Add a new Packing List record,  Print a packing list or report, and Exit.

Pressing the Find Button displays the following sequences: 

 

If the user elects to find a packing list by the Packing List Number, a screen appears listing Packing lists in numerical order, along with the Customer Name, Sales Order Number, and Ship Date. The user selects the packing list by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.

The Packing List screen is populated with the appropriate data.

 

If the user elects to find a packing list by the Customer, a screen appears listing Customers. The user selects the customer by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected Customer.

 

Then a list of all of the selected Customer orders are shown in numerical order, along with the Customer Name, Sales Order Number, and Ship Date. The user selects the packing list by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.

The Packing List screen is populated with the appropriate data.

 

If the user elects to find a packing list by the Sales Order Number, a screen appears listing open orders in numerical order, by Sales Order, Customer Name, and Customer PO Number. The user selects the Sales Order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.

The Packing List screen is populated with the appropriate data.

 

If the user elects to find a packing list by Posted or Unposted, a screen appears listing Packing Lists in numerical order, along with the Customer Name, Sales Order Number, and Ship Date. The user selects the packing list by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.

The Packing List screen is populated with the appropriate data.

 

If the user elects to find a Packing List by Product Number, a screen appears listing  Part Number, Rev, Class, Type and Description.  Type the Part Number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 

Then a list of all the Packing List Numbers, for that product will appear, along with the Customer,  Sales Order and Ship Date.  Type the Packing List number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

The Packing List screen is populated with the appropriate data.

 
 

1.3.1.1.4.2. Add a New Packing List
Enter Inventory Mgt/Packing List Management/Packing List Management

The following screen will appear.  When the screen first opens, the user is limited to only four of the seven action buttons shown: Find an existing Packing List, Add a new Packing List record,  Print a packing list or report, and Exit.

Pressing the Add Button displays the following sequences: 

 

If the user elects to add by Sales Order, a screen appears listing Open Sales Orders in numerical order, along with the Customer Name, Customer PO, and if applicable the  RMA number. The user selects the Sales Order number by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.

 

 

If the user elects to add by Sales Order/Customer, a screen appears listing Customers.  The user selects the customer by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected Customer.

Decide between Active or Inactive customer by checking the appropriate box. Type in the Customer name or highlight the customer and double click to select.

 

Then a list of all of the selected Customer Sales orders are shown in numerical order, along with the Customer Name, Customer PO, and RMA number (If applicable). The user selects the Sales Order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.

 

If the user elects to add by Stand Alone, a screen appears listing Customers.  The user selects the customer by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected Customer.

Decide between Active or Inactive customer by checking the appropriate box. Type in the Customer name or highlight the customer and double click to select.

See procedures below to Add a Stand Alone Packing List (Manual Invoice).

 

Once the Sales Order selection has been made, the Packing List screen is popluated with the appropriate data based on the default shipping destination established for the customer selected:

If Manual is selected for Packing List numbers in Number System Setup user will need to enter P/L No.

If the customer has multiple ship-to addresses established, then pressing on the down-arrow button to the right of the field will display alternate shipping destinations. Selecting an alternate shipping destination will cause the default values shown on the screen to change and match those of the selected destination.

Move cursor to the Frt Amt (Freight Amount) field. The user may then enter the amount of the freight charges for the shipment. (These may also be entered during the invoicing, if the freight amounts are not yet known).

The user may also enter the Waybill number. This is the tracking number used by the freight carrier to identify and track (and bill) the shipment. The Ship Via, Freight and FOB fields are populated with the default information from the customer ship-to files, but the user may select alternate actions by pressing on the down-arrow on the right side of the field. (The choices shown at this point must have been established in the System Setup/Sales)

After completing the Packing List information screen, the user clicks on the Detail Tab

In this screen, the user defines the material to be shipped.

The user may choose from one of the directive buttons to proceed:

If the user has selected the Add Sales Order Item(s) option, and user receives the following message, it may be due to the status of the line item on the SO.  If the line item Status on the Sales order is "Admin Hold"  or "Mfgr Hold"   you will receive the following message when creating the PL.




If the user has selected the Add Sales Order Item(s) option, (data can automatically be completed in this screen) the following screen will appear:

Highlight the appropriate Sales Order line item.  Depress the OK button and the sales order line item(s) will populate the detail screen.

The user will note that each item defined on the sales order is added to the packing list, and the Quantity is at zero. If the sales order has many lines and only a few are NOT being shipped, then the user can add them all, and delete the lines that do not apply. The user then completes the quantity column with the amount of product shipped for this packing list.
 
The following message will appear if the part requires a certificate and the "Done" box has NOT be checked.  The packing list will NOT be allowed to be saved until checking off the certificate required "Done" box.  
 
 
 
The following message will appear if the user is attempting to ship product out of FGI that was not originally transfered into FGI from a Work order that was associated to that Sales order.  This is just a warning that you will be releaving stock that was transfered into FGI from a Work order that was associated to a different Sales order, and is asking the user if they are sure that is what they want to do?  It does not hurt anything to answer yes, the only thing that might happen later down the road is the product that you had transfered  into FGI from a different sales order has already been shipped against this Sales order or packing list. 
 

Depress the Yes button. 

 If the user attempts to ship a product with no or not enough available inventory, ManEx advises the user and prompts to cancel the transaction.

TIP Users may modify the appearance of the columns on the spread sheet by click and holding on the column header description, and slide the description to the right or left, then releasing the mouse button. The width of the columns may also be modified by click and holding on the right edge of the column header and sliding the border right or left.

As the user completes a quantity shipped, ManEx produces an inventory allocation table displaying the available and reserved inventory on hand for the product being shipped if there is more than one location. If the Sales Order allocated product for this order, the quantity will be shown in the Reserved Qty column.

Enter Ship Qty.

If the product and the work order were identified as requiring serial numbers and there are no products available in inventory with the appropriate serial numbers, the following message will display:

Depress the OK button.  The transaction will be cancelled.

If the product and the work order were identified as requiring serial numbers and there is product available in inventory the following screen will display:

Use the > or >> button to move the Serial Number into the Ship Prepared Serial Number column. Depress the OK button. The serial numbers will display in the Serial Number Entry window. The serial numbers will print on the packing list.

 
 
If user receives the following message when trying to ship out parts:
 
 
The user may return to the SO, depress the Edit button and double click on the Order Qty  field.  The available MFGRs will be listed and the users can make the needed changes.
 
 
Return to the Packing List module and the record can then be processed.  

If the user selects Add manual item, the user will be prompted for the sales type:

Depress the down arrow for Sales Type and the following list will appear:

Highlight and click on the Sales Type of Interest and the following screen will appear:

The Revenue GL number and the Cost GL number will update. Note:  When creating Stand Alone Invoices users should not select the same GL account number that is entered in the Actsetup for the Account Receivables.  IF you do, then the resulting transaction will debit and credit both the sane GL account number.   Depress the OK button.

The user will be prompted for Quantity, Back Order amount, Description and Units of Measure.

The user may enter notes of any length for a line item by highlighting the appropriate line item and then selecting the Item Note.

If the user wishes to establish shipping instructions, then pressing on the screen tab Ship Inst will bring up the following screen.


Tabbing on the History tab will bring up the following:

This will give you the Shipping Historyof the Part highlighted in the Detail screen.

In addition to special notes to the shipping department, tabbing to the Notes screen, there are two additional areas for notes: the Sales Order Notes, and the Packing List Footnotes. The Sales Order Notes will be maintained in the ManEx system for review by other users, and the Packing List Footnotes will be added to the packing list when printed. 

When the user has completed all of the information needed for the packing list, the information must be saved.

Note: The Packing List MUST be printed for the shipping information to advance to Invoice Administration.

If the user has set the system setup to Manual Invoice numbering, then ManEx will prompt for the invoice number to be used for the packing list.

If automatic numbering is used in the setup, then ManEx will supply the invoice number, and close the screen.

Hold for Credit Limit

If the user has elected Enforce Credit Limit at Shipment feature in Accounts Receivable Defaults in Accounting Setup, the following message will appear if a non-supervisor attempts to ship:
 
 

The program gets the total Accounts Receivable (AR Aging) + Not Posted Invoice (invoice not printed out of the Admin/Invoice module) + Open SO Amounts.  Compares it to the Credit Limit setup in the Customer Information module.

This is based on having the "Include Open Orders for Credit Approvals for Shipping" option checked, (within the Print PL/Invoice setup module) (if you do not want to include open Sales Orders you would want to uncheck this option) and the "Enforce Credit Limit at Shipment" option checked, (within the Sales-A/R setup module)(uncheck this option if you do not want to Enforce the Credit Limit at Shipment). 

Make sure that these options are marked properly to get the results you are expecting.

Depress the OK button,  and enter a supervisor password or a password for a user with rights within the Security module, that has the ability to approve the credit limit exceed message. The following warning will appear:

To continue, select "Yes" to abandon select "No".

Add a Stand Alone Packing List  

Add by Stand Alone procedure is the ONLY way that a manual invoice can be created. 

If the user elects to add by Stand Alone, a screen appears listing Customers.  The user selects the customer by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected Customer.

Decide between Active or Inactive customer by checking the appropriate box. Type in the Customer name or highlight the customer and double click to select.

Once the customer is selected, you will be prompted for your password.

The following screen will appear:

 

 

Go to the Detail Tab, and select Add manual item, the user will be prompted for the Credit G/L Number:

Depress the down arrow, select to Find By either Account Type or Account Numbers

If you select by Account Type, the GL Type box will be enabled.  Depress the down arrow next to the GL Type box and a list of accounts will appear. Select the desired GL Type.

Once the GL Type is selected the Account number box will be enabled.  Depress the down arrow next to the Account Numbers box, and only the G/L accounts within that range will appear.  Select the desired GL account number.

If you select by Account Numbers, the Account Numbers box will be enabled. Depress the down arrow next to the Account Numbers box, and the list of ALL of the G/L Account numbers will appear. Select the desired G/L account number.

The user will be prompted for Quantity, Back Order amount, Description and Units of Measure.

Finish the process as detailed above.

Note: The user may edit a Packing List up until the time that the Invoice is printed.After that, no edits are allowed.

1.3.1.1.4.3. Edit an Existing Packing List

Find
 a Packing List (Posted or Not-Posted).  Depress the Edit Action button.
 
Note:  Once a packing list is created user cannot remove it completely.  You can remove all line items except for one.  One item must remain on the packing list to save it.  If there is only one line item on the packing list user can reverse the shipped qty on the line item to 0, so it won't affect inventory counts and shipped qty against the Sales Order schedule(s).   Any packing list is editable until the invoice is posted.  Once the invoice has been posted the packing list is not longer editable. 


 
All fields available for editing will be enabled for modification.
 

Packing List tab The Ship to address, Attention, Ship Via, Freight, FOB, Terms, Freight Amount, Way Bill number and the Packing List date may be edited. 
Detail tab The user may add another sales order item, add a manual item, edit the qty on an existing item.
Ship Instructions The user may add/edit instructions
Notes tab

The user may add/edit notes.

At the conclusion of the modification process, the user may either press the Save button to save the changes or press the Cancel button to cancel changes.

The user may re-print the Packing List.

1.3.1.1.4.4. E-mail Packing List(s)
 To e-mail Packing List report(s), depress the Reports button. 

Note:
  You MUST have the e-mail setup within the Trigger.exe setup and working before the Packing List e-mail will work.   

The reports screen will appear:

Select the output XL File, TXT File, or PDF by clicking on the radial.

Check the Email box located int he left hand corner of the Reports Tab.  

Highlight the report you want to Email.

Depress the option tab.

 
 

Complete the Option tab with the information required:  Note:  User has the option to check the Email box on the Options screen also.

 

Depress OK.  The following screen will appear.  Select or Enter File Name. 

 

Depress Save, the following Check Email Addresses screen will appear.  Within this screen you can enter an e-mail address or add any special notes needed:

Depress OK and documents will be sent to e-mail addresses assigned. 

The following is what the receiver will receive:

 

1.3.1.1.5. Reports - Packing List Mgmt
To obtain the Packing List reports, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen. 



The following screen will appear:


 

Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

Highlight the desired report and then depress the Option tab if applicable. 

PACKING LIST REPORT

Some of the radial options/info is defaulted from the Print Packing List/Invoice Setup

Click on the radial to choose to use either Preprinted Form, or Laser Form.

Type in number of copies to be printed.

Click on the radial to choose using internal part numbers or customer part numbers. 
 
Click on the radial to choose to show list of Un-printed Packing List, Single Packing List, or Reprint Last Batch.

If you want the report to show records with a zero Invoice Amount, check the box.   

Click on the radial to choose sort by, either Packing List, Sales Order, Customer, or Ship Via. 
 
If you want an additional Bar Code page printed along with the packing list that will contain Bar Code information for specific fields you would check the "Include Bar Code Addendum" box.

To select one Packing List, highlight the Packing List, depress the > button. If you want all Packing Lists, depress the >> button.

Depress the OK button.
 
(RMA) will appear next to the SO No.  If printed from an RMA.
 
If printing a Packing List report with SN's the leading zero's will be removed from report.

Mfgr and MPN will be listed on the Packing Slip report for Buy parts only. 
 
'C of C Required' will be displayed on the Packing List Report, only if the "Certificate Required" box is checked in Packing List.
 
 

The following is printed

SHIPPING REPORT

Highlighting the Shipping report brings up a further selection:

Highlight the desired selection, either by Sales Order, Customer, Packing List. 

Depress the Options tab will bring up the following screen:

 
 

You’ll be prompted for the date range. To clear the default selection, check the Clear Selection box. Enter the Sales Order Number.

Once selection is made, depress the OK button.

 

The following is printed:

SHIPPING HISTORY REPORT

Depress the OK button and the following will print:

SERIAL NUMBER SHIP HISTORY

Highlighting the Serial Number Ship History report brings up a further selection:

Highlight the desired selection, either by Packing List Number, Sales Order,  or Part Number.  

Depress the Options tab will bring up the following screen:

 

You’ll be prompted for the date range. To clear the default selection, check the Clear Selection box. 

To select one Part Number, highlight the part number and depress the > button. If you want all Part Numbers, depress the >> button.

 Once selection is made, depress the OK button.
 
The leading zero's for SN's will be removed from report.
 

The following will print:

SHIPPING LABEL 
 

Highlighting the Shipping Label brings up a further selection:

Highlight the desired print selection.   

Depress the Options tab will bring up the following screen:

User will be prompt the enter a Packing List Number, Number of Labels to be printed, and Item Number on Packing List. 

Once selection is made, depress the OK button.
 
Note:  ManEx uses the standard labels used in the UPS printers.
 

.

 

 

The following is printed:

 
SHIPPING LABEL  (AIAG)
 

Highlighting the Shipping Lable (AIAG) brings up a further selection:

Highlight the desired printer selection.   

Depress the Options tab will bring up the following screen:

User will be prompt the enter a Packing List Number, Number of Labels to be printed, and Item Number on Packing List. 

Once selection is made, depress the OK button.
 
 
 

.

 

 

The following is printed:
 
 
 
ProForma Invoice
 

User will be prompt the enter a Packing List Number.  

Once selection is made, depress the OK button.
 
The report form will look just like ProForma Invoice form that resides within the Sales Order module, except the one within the Packing List module will display the Actual Ship Qty that was entered for that highlighed packing list.  Printing this report does NOT update any accounting information.  It will also NOT flag the packing list record as printed/posted.
 
 
The following will print:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1.3.1.2. Sales Order Shipping Schedule

After activation, "Sales Order Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.



Enter Inventory Mgt/Packing List Management/Sales Order Shipping Schedule Module
 
.
 

 

The following screen will appear:

 

 

  

This is the listing of all open and unshipped Sales Orders.  The user may sort by Ship Date, Sales Order Number, Customer or Part Number by depressing the appropriate button.

 

Sales Order Shipping Requirements List Field Definitions

 

Ship Date

The due date of the Sales Order.

Sales Order Number  

The number assigned to the Sales Order.

Customer     

The name of the customer.

Part Number

The number assigned to the part.

Rev    

The number of the revision assigned to the part.      

Part Mfgr

The manufacturer name assigned to the part.  (This is only displayed if the "MAKE" item originates from a RMA order, or the item is a "BUY" or "MAKE_BUY") 
See Note below.

Mfgr Part Number

The  manufacturer part number assigned to the part.  (This is only displayed if the "MAKE" item originates from a RMA order, or the item is a "BUY" or "MAKE_BUY") See Note below.

Scheduled Quantity 

The quantity to be shipped for the Sales Order.

FGI Quantity       

The quantity currently in finished goods inventory.

 

 

NOTE:    In the SO Module, when a user enters the SO item, if the item is for a "BUY" or "MAKE_BUY" part the system will ask the user to select the part mfgr at this time because the system needs to know (and save) where the SO item is being created from.  For a "MAKE" the system does NOT need to know or save this information until the user creates the Packing List.  In the RMA module, the system needs to know which part mfgr the RMA item is going to be returned to, so the system saves the part mfgr for all RMA items.  This is why the Part Mfgr and Part Mfgr Part Number is only displayed if the "MAKE" item originates from a RMA order, or the SO item is a "BUY" or "MAKE_BUY".                    

                           

                                      

              

                   
1.3.2. Return Material Authorization (RMA) Receiver
1.3.2.1. Prerequisites for RMA Receiver

After activation, "RMA Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.


RMA Order Number

To add an RMA Receiver, there must be an open RMA Order established in the RMA Management module which has been acknowledged by the user. 

1.3.2.2. Introduction for RMA Receiver

The Return Material Authorization module notifies receiving to expect a return from a customer.

Once the material is received back from the Customer, this module is used to record the receipt, create the Re-Work Work Order, adds the product into the work order, and the applicable Credit Memo. Once the RMA is received, a Credit Memo automatically forwards to the Accounting Accounts Receivable Credit Memo module, if a dollar amount was entered for the return.

When the re-work/replacement is ready to re-ship, a Packing List and Invoice can be created.

Note:  When an RMA is created, both the pending receipt of the items from the customer and the subsequent shipment of replacement product to the customer are entered.  Reference is made to the original Sales Order and Invoice only to allow the Credit Memo (when created) to have a place to apply the credit.  Utilizing this approach, the user is free to set different schedules for receiving and/or shipping the material without affecting the original Sales Order.  It also allows the user to place different prices or costs on the line items.  For example, it may be that full credit is issued on the RMA receipt, but extra charges apply on the reshipment because of non-warranty issues.  Or the user may wish to have a “no-credit, no-charge” RMA policy where items are received and reshipped with no General Ledger affects.  Or, the receipts may be at no credit, but the return shipment includes only the rework charges.  Because of the variety of possibilities, trying to incorporate any of these actions into the original Sales order would make it really difficult to maintain data about the costs associated with the order.  This also permits the user to develop reports for on-time shipments, and shipping/scheduling quality. 
 
To review how an RMA impacts MRP see Article #2507.
 
 
NOTE:  If you do not follow this procedure to bring material back into your plant, your rework work orders do not have the value of the original product placed in WIP, and therefore when completing your rework work orders, there will be a huge variance created because there were no items placed in WIP (except for a few replacement parts),  yet the product is moved from WIP to FGI at standard cost.  When you use the RMA module these accounts balance out, with the variance being only those items added to the work order.
1.3.2.3. Fields and Definitions for RMA Receiver
1.3.2.3.1. RMA Receiver Tab

RMA Receiver Tab Field Definitions

Customer

This is the name of the Customer who returned the material.

RMA Receiving Number

This is the unique number assigned to the RMA Receiver.

Ship From

This is the Customer’s address from which the material was returned.

RMA Receiving Date

This is the date the user’s Receiving Department received the returned material.

RMA Order Number

This is the RMA Order Number assigned in the RMA Management module.See above.

Purchase Order

The was the customer’s original purchase order number for the original Sales Order.

Attention

This is the contact name at the Customer.

Ship Via

This is the original carrier for the original Sales Order.

Freight Amount

This is the freight originally charged the customer on the original Sales Order.

RMA Order Acknowledgement

This box is checked in the RMA Management module, as explained above.

Freight

This is the freight arrangement per the original Sales Order.

Waybill

This is the Waybill number pertaining to the original Sales Order.

Credit

This is the Customer’s Credit Status with the user.

FOB

This is the original FOB terms pertaining to the original Sales Order.

Entered By

These are the user’s initials authorizing the material return in the RMA Management module. 

1.3.2.3.2. Detail Tab

RMA Receiver Detail Tab Field Definitions

Customer

This is the name of the Customer who returned the material

RMA Receiving Number

This is the unique number assigned to the RMA Receiver.

 Ln

The line number of the Return Material Authorization or the line member of the order to be re-worked/replaced and returned to the customer.

Part Number

The user’s internal number for the part or assembly.

Rev

The revision number pertaining to the Part Number.

Class

The user’s classification covering the Part Number.

Type

The type within the classification covering the Part Number.

Qty

It’s the amount of the original order which the customer is returning. See Article #1240 for more detail on why the system will not allow user to enter in a fraction of a number, and an alternative.

Back Order

The amount of product still expected to be returned by the customer.

Description

The user’s description covering the Part Number.

UOM

The unit of measure pertaining to the product.

This button allows the user to add items from the RMA Management module.

This button allows the user to delete the highlighted line.

Packing List Ship Date

 The date the Original Packing list was created.

Warranty Expiration

The date the warranty originally extended to the customer expires.

Serial Number Entry

The serial numbers pertaining to the items returned.

The note pertaining to the Part Number as entered in the Inventory Master.

1.3.2.3.3. Notes Tab

RMA Receiver Notes Tab Field Definitions

RMA Note

This is the internal note used by the user regarding the Return Material Authorization as entered in the RMA Management module.

RMA Receiver Note

This is a note that will be displayed on the RMA Packing List.

Credit Memo Reason

This is the note created when the Credit Memo was created.

1.3.2.3.4. WO List Tab

RMA Receiver Work Order List Tab

If the RMA Management module called for a re-work or replacement in addition to authorization of the return of material, the system will have created a Work Order.  Information regarding any such Work Order will appear in this tab.

RMA Receivng Work Order List Tab Field Definitions

Ln

The line number of the Return Material Authorization or the line member of the order to be re-worked/replaced and returned to the customer.

Part Number

The user’s internal number for the part or assembly.

Rev

The revision number pertaining to the Part Number.

Class

The user’s classification covering the Part Number.

Type

The type within the classification covering the Part Number.

Description

The user’s description covering the Part Number.

Work Order Number

The unique number assigned to the Work Order for Re-Work or Replacement

Work Order Due Date

The date the Work Order is scheduled to be completed.

Build Quantity

The number of units to be re-worked or replaced.

Back Order

The number of units still to be shipped.

Work Center

The name of the Work Center where the Work Order is currently.

Quantity

The quantity of the Work Order currently at the Work Center

1.3.2.3.5. Overview Regarding Return Material Authorization Accounting

No Journal Entry is created in the RMA module, however the system was collecting the JE components from that module as follows:

Assume that the original sale was for 10 units @ $100.00 each, with a standard cost of $80.00 each and freight charged the customer of $15.00.

At the time the user selects the original Invoice number in the Return Material Authorization module, the system “remembers” the original accounting entry that was created at the time the original Invoice was printed, which was:

Debit Accounts Receivable – Trade  $1,015.00

Debit Cost of Goods Sold  $800.00

Credit Sales  $1,000.00

Credit Finished Goods Inventory  $800.00

Credit Freight Income  $15.00

When the user enters the “return quantity” (the one entered as a negative quantity), the system will remember that the original cost of sales was $80.00 per unit.

The user then enters the pricing on the item to be returned on the Pricing page of the RMA module.

The pricing entered can be any amount up to the amount of the original pricing of $100.00 per unit. And so the journal entry component for the debit to the sales account is 2X $100.00 = $200.00, in this example.

The user selects the sales and cost of goods general ledger accounts to be used per the Sales Type column:

And so, the sales account number selected will be debited for $200.00 once the journal entry is created, upon the actual receipt of the returned item.And the related Cost of Goods sold account will be credited for the $160.00.

If the return is to be reworked and then returned back to the customer, the user creates a second line item on the RMA using a positive quantity which is in actuality creating the RMA Sales Order and an eventual invoice upon shipment.

The journal entry and the applicable Credit Memo for the returnis created in this Return Material Authorization Receiving module.On this screen, the user indicates the amount of freight to be credited, such as a pro rata 2/10 of $15.00, or $3.00, for example:


After the user types in the quantity received on the Detail page and depresses the Save button, several things happen all at once:

The Journal Entry is created as follows and forwards to the Release to General Ledger module:

Debit Sales  $200.00

Debit WIP  $160.00

Debit Freight  $3.00

Credit Accounts Receivable $203.00

Credit COGS  $160.00

  1. The Credit Memo is created for an amount of $203.00 total.  If the original invoice is still open, the amount of the credit memo will net against the original invoice leaving an open balance of $812.00, $1,015.00 minus $203.00.   If the invoice is paid than a credit balance will appear on the A/P Aging for the unapplied amount up to $203.00.
  2. The e-mail trigger is activated announcing that a Credit Memo has been created.
  3. The ReWork Work Order is created.
  4. The returned material is placed into WIP.

Once the Rework Work order is released, the user may opt to go into kitting and add line shortages which will be included in the Material Variance once the Kit is closed.Please refer to the Kitting and Shortage Management manual.

From this point forward, the accounting is the same as for a regular order.

1.3.2.4. How To .... for RMA Receiver
1.3.2.4.1. Find a Return Material Authorization Receiver

Enter Inventory Mgt/RMA Receiver Module  

The following screen will appear:

To find an RMA receiver, depress the Find action button.  The following selection screen will appear:

 

Find RMA Receiver by RMA Receiving Number

If you choose to find an RMA Receiver by the RMA Receiving Number, depress that selection and the following screen will appear:

Type the RMA Receiving Number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 

Find RMA Receiver by Customer

If you select to find the RMA Receiver by Customer, a list of customers will appear:

Type the Customer Name into the red box or highlight and double click.

 

A list of RMA receivers for that customer will appear:

Type the RMA Receiving Number into the red box or highlight the selection and double click.

 

Find RMA Receiver by RMA Order Number

If you decide to find the RMA Receiver by the RMA Order Number, a list of RMA Orders will appear:

Type the RMA Order number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click

 

A list of RMA receivers will appear:

Type the RMA Receiving number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

 

Once the Find operation has been completed, the found RMA Receiver will populate the screen. 

1.3.2.4.2. Add an Return Material Authorization Receiver

Enter Inventory Mgt/RMA Receiver Module  

The following screen will appear:

To add a new RMA Receiver, depress the Add record action button. The following selection list will appear: 

Type the RMA Order Number into the red box or highlight your choice and double click.  Information from the RMA Management module will appear once you enter your password, as shown below:

RMA Receiving Tab

Depress the down arrow to select the appropriate ship from address.

Edit the RMA Receiving Date, if desired.

Depress the down arrow to select the appropriate customer contact, Ship Via, Freight, or FOB.

Enter the amount of freight, if desired.

Enter the number of the Waybill, if desired. 

 All other fields will be defaulted in.

Depress the RMA Receiver Detail Tab.   The following screen will appear:

Depress the Add RMA order item(s) button.  A list of products, etc. pertaining to the RMA selected will appear:

Highlight the selection and then depress the OK button. The cursor will go to the Quantity field. Type in the quantity being received.

If the warehouse selected in RMA module is not found (deleted or in cycle count/physical inventory), the user will receive the following message and will not be able to continue until this issue has been resolved.  



The following Work Order screen will appear:
 
NOTE:  Work Orders originated from an RMA Receiver will have "ReworkFirm" Job Status and users will NOT be allowed to change the Job Status. Since the material issued to the RMA is likely to be a defective assembly, or requires re-inspection, the work order must be completed by either transferring the material to FGI or to scrap to close the work order.  Therefore, an RMA work order cannot be cancelled. 
 
Also, users will NOT be allowed to edit or change the Bld qty because when product is brought into the system with an RMA Receiver it is then automatically issued as itself to the kit at that time.   
 
 

You may change the Work Order due date.     NOTE:  The Work Order due dates from the RMA Receiver are generated automatically based on the date the RMA was created. This date may need to be reviewed and adjusted to match the RMA scheduled ship date. MRP will not instruct you to reschedule a rework firm work order, so it is important to make sure all dates match.

Depress the Save  record action button.  

If the returned material contained serial numbers, the following screen will appear displaying the available qty:

Enter the Received Qty and depress the OK button, and the following screen will appear:

Type the Serial Number to be received into the Receiver Serial No box (if it doesn't exist in the system, System will prompt user if they wish to add serial # and the SN will be created). Or, select the Serial Number(s) being returned by highlighting and depressing the > button. For multiple serial numbers, hold the CTRL key down while highlighting.  If you want to include all Serial Numbers, depress the >> button.

Depress the OK button.  The Serial Number Entry box will update.

Rework Work Order Serial Numbers

When a Rework Work order is established for a serialized product, the user may select existing serial numbers that are in inventory (finished goods) that are to be reworked. Rework Work Orders will not accept new serial numbers.  When a serial number is placed in the Rework Work Order, the serial number must exist in finished goods, and the number of serial numbers transferred to the Work Order must equal the quantity of assemblies for the Work Order.  The part number for the serial number that is moved into the Rework Work Order does not need to be the same part number and revision as the Work Order.  Thus, if a user wants to upgrade part number 123 rev A to part number 123 rev B, they can transfer the parts to the Work Order and identify the serial number transferred.  Parts may also be changed to a new part number:  Example:part number 123 rev A can be placed in a Rework Work Order for part number 234 rev C.  The only condition is that the quantity and number of serial numbers must match.

You may enter an item Note, if desired.

The completed screen will look like this:


 

Depressing the Note tab will bring up the following screen:

The credit memo reason will display as referencing the RMA number.  You may add to the Credit Memo Reason, if you wish.

You may add an RMA note or an RMA Receiver Note, if desired.

When RMA is complete.  Depress the Save record action button to save changes, or depress the Abandon changes button.

If you depress the Save record action button, the following message will appear:

To continue the save, depress the Yes button. 

Selecting the WO list tab will bring up the following:
 

You may not change anything on this screen.

Note: The user can not kit a Rework Work Order. The user may only pull the shortage. Please refer to the Kitting, Allocating &  Shortage Management article.

Note:  If the RMA line number for the negative (returning) item is placed on administrative hold, then receiving will not be able to receive in the parts until it is cleared. 

Credit Memo

The Credit Memo is not created until the returned material is actually RECEIVED in the RMA Receiving module. There is no financial involvement UNTIL the parts are received back. Regarding the matter of advising accounting that a Credit Memo has been created, the system will send an e-mail to the appointed recipient when the RMA is received if a trigger is setup to do so. 
 
 
 
 
1.3.2.5. Reports - RMA Receiver
To print the RMA Receiver report, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen. 



The following screen will appear:

Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

Highlight the desired report and then depress the Option tab if applicable. 


RMA Receiver

For the RMA Receiver report, Select the RMA Receiver you want to print by highlighting it and then depressing the > button. Once the receiver is selected, depress the OK button.
 
If there are SN's listed on the report the leading zero's will not be displayed.
 

The following report is printed:

1.3.3. Purchase Order Receiving & DMR
1.3.3.1. Purchase Order Dock Receiving
1.3.3.1.1. Prerequisties for PO Dock Receiver
Prerequisites Required for Entering a New RECEIVER

After activation, "Purchase Order & Dock Receiving" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

Open Purchase Order

There must be an open purchase order for the receipt and the PO status MUST be "Approved".  If the PO is in "Edit" mode the PO Dock will not find receipt.

 

1.3.3.1.2. Introduction - PO Dock Receiver

In System setup/Purchasing Setup it gives the user the option to use PO Dock Receiving.  If this box is checked, the purchases are received at the dock requiring the user to complete a PO Dock Receiving record, listing the supplier’s packing list number and the quantities per that packing list.  An inspection report is printed.  The purchases are inspected and counted.  (If this box is left unchecked the user can skip the PO Dock Receiving step and go directly to the PO Receiving and Inspection record.)

 

 

 

1.3.3.1.3. Fields & Definitions for PO Dock Receiving

Fields & Definitions

Supplier Name  The Name of the supplier.
PO Number  The Purchase Order Number.
Supplier PL No  The Supplier’s Packing List number.
Receiver No  The user’s receiver number.
Item  The item number per the Purchase Order.
Part Number  The number the user has assigned to the part.
Rev The revision number related to the Part Number.
Balance Qty The un-received quantity portion of the item.
Recv Qty The quantity received per PO Dock Receiving.  See Article #1240 for more detail on why the system will not allow user to enter in a fraction of a number, and an alternative.  Note: Users must have special access in order to receive overages,  There is a checkbox to allow overages within Security/User Rights for PO Receiving. 

Note: The overage is applied to the entire PO order qty - it does not go down to the schedule level.  Example:  If you have an order qty of 100 and an allowed overage of 5% the system will allow you to receive in a total overage of 105.  But if you have only scheduled a qty of 25 and go to recieve in qty of 30 the system will allow you to do so, because it has not met the order overage yet. 

Part Class The classification to which the part number belongs.
Part Type The type within the class to which the part number belongs.
Description The description of the Part Number.
Insp  Displays whether Inspection is required as set up in the Inventory Control Management module.
Cert Displays whether Certificates are required per the Inventory Control Managment module.
Part Mfgr The name of the manufacturer for listed part.
MPN (Mfgr Part No)  The manufacturers part number for listed part.

1.3.3.1.4. How To ..... for PO Dock Receiver
1.3.3.1.4.1. Find Dock Receiver

Enter Inventory Mgt/Purchase Order Receiving & DMR/Purchase Order Dock Receiving Module

.

 

IF DOCK RECEIVING is DISABLED in Purchase Setup  user will receive the following message:




IF DOCK RECEIVING is ENABLED in Purchase Setup  t
he following screen will appear:

 

1.  Press the Find record action button will display the following sequences:

The user is prompted to search by Receiver Number, Purchase Order Number, or Supplier.

 

 2a. If you select by Receiving Number the following screen will appear.

Type in the receiver number in the red box, or highlight the receiver number and double click to select.

 

2b. If you select by Purchase Order Number the following screen will appear.

Type in the PO number in the red box, or highlight the PO number and double click to select.

 

2c. If you select by Supplier, the following screen will appear listing all the suppliers with open orders placed. The list is in alphanumeric order by supplier.

Type in the supplier in the red box, or highlight the supplier and double click to select.

2d. Once the supplier is selected, a listing of all open purchase orders for that supplier is presented, as displayed:

Type the Receiver Number into the red box or highlight the receiver number of interest and double click.

 

3. The completed Dock Receiving screen will look like this:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1.3.3.1.4.2. Add a Dock Receiver

Enter Inventory Mgt/Purchase Order Receiving & DMR/Purchase Order Dock Receiving Module

.

 

IF DOCK RECEIVING is DISABLED in Purchase Setup  user will receive the following message:




IF DOCK RECEIVING is ENABLED in Purchase Setup  t
he following screen will appear:

 

1.  To add a new receiving record, depress the Add action button. You will be prompted for your password. Then a selection screen will appear:

 

2a.  If you select Purchase Order Number, the following screen will appear:

Type the PO number into the red box or highlight the PO Number of choice and double click.The PO information will populate the screen.

 

2b.  If you select by Supplier name, the following screen will appear:

Type the Supplier Name into the red box or highlight the supplier and double click.

 

2c.  The following list of purchase orders for the supplier selected will appear:

Type the PO Number into the red box or highlight the PO Number and double click.

 

3. The purchase order selected will populate the Dock Receiving screen, as displayed:

 

Type the Supplier’s Packing List Number into the red box.  Fill in the Received Qty column.  (The qty entered in this field will have to either be accepted or rejected when completing the PO Receiver, user will not be allowed to create a PO receiver for only a Partial of this qty).  
 
Depress the Save changes action button.
 
User will receive the following warning if the qty received is larger than the PO balance.

Users must have special access in order to receive overages,  there is a checkbox to allow overages within Security/User Rights for PO Receiving.    If user does NOT have these rights, they will not be able to continue.

Note: The overage is applied to the entire PO order qty - it does not go down to the schedule level.  Example:  If you have an order qty of 100 and an allowed overage of 5% the system will allow you to receive in a total overage of 105.  But if you have only scheduled a qty of 25 and go to recieve in qty of 30 the system will allow you to do so, because it has not met the order overage yet.   Note:  A negative qty will appear in the balance column on the PO when an overage has been received.

User will receive the following warning if  one or more of the items on the receipt is before the PO due date and the early tolerance time allowed in the  Purchase Setup screen. 

Note:
   This warning will only display the item # of the first item found that the receipt is before the PO due date.  It will not display other item #'s' that have early deliveries on the same PO Dock receiver.  Depress OK to continue.  

Note:
Users must have special access in order to receive early shipments. There is a checkbox to allow eary shipments within Security/User Rights for PO Receiving.  If user does NOT have these rights, they will NOT be able to continue.

Users that have the special access to receive early shipments or users with Supervisor rights will receive this reminder message if the receipt is before the PO due date and the early tolerance time allowed the  Purchase Setup screen.

 

4. The completed Dock Receiving screen will look like this:

 
1.3.3.1.4.3. Editing a Dock Receiver

The user may edit the Dock Receiving record as long as a related PO Receiving has NOT been done.

  1. Find  Dock Receiver.
  2. Depress the Edit action button.
  3. You’ll be prompted for your password.
  4. User may edit the supplier's Packing List Number or the quantity received. The system does allow you to receive more then the PO quantity/Overage.   Note: Users must have special access in order to receive overages,  there is a checkbox to allow overages within Security/User Rights for PO Receiving. 
  5. Depress the Save changes action button.

If you try to receive more than the PO quantity, you’ll receive the following warning message:  

If you enter YES and depress the Save action button (and if you have exceeded the overage percentage from the Purchase Setup and\or PO line item) you will receive the following warning message. 

Note: The overage is applied to the entire PO order qty - it does not go down to the schedule level.  Example:  If you have an order qty of 100 and an allowed overage of 5% the system will allow you to receive in a total overage of 105.  But if you have only scheduled a qty of 25 and go to recieve in qty of 30 the system will allow you to do so, because it has not met the order overage yet. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1.3.3.1.5. Reports - PO Dock Receiving
To obtain the PO Dock Receiving reports, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen.  

 

The report screen will appear:

Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

Highlight the desired report and then depress the Option tab if applicable. 

 

If you select the Purchase Order Receipt Inspection Work Sheet report, or Purchase Order Receipt Inspection Work Sheet with Requester report highlight that report. Depress the Options tab. This screen appears:

 

Highlight the Purchase Order and depress the > button.If you want all of the Purchase Orders listed, depress the >> button.Depress the OK button.

 

The following is printed:

If you select the Open PO Dock Receiving Report, the following additional window will display at the bottom of the screen:

 

Select detail either by PO Number or by Received Date.Depress the OK button.

 

The following is printed:
 
 

 

1.3.3.1.6. FAQs for PO Dock Receiver
Facts & Questions for the PO Receiving & DMR Module
1.3.3.2. Purchase & Receiving Management
1.3.3.2.1. Prerequisties for Purchase & Receiving Mgmt
After activation, "Purchase Order & Dock Receiving" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.  
 
Dock Received Purchase Order
There must be a dock receiver for the purchase order. (If required in Purchase Setup).
Return/Shortage Reasons  Return/Shortage reasons must have been entered in System Setup - Return/Shortage Reasons Setup.
1.3.3.2.2. Introduction for Purchase & Receiving Mgmt

Receiving is the next step after creating and submitting a Purchase Order.  

 

In System setup/Purchase Setup it gives the user the option to use PO Dock Receiving.  If this box is checked, the purchases are received at the dock requiring the user to complete a   PO Dock Receiving record, listing the supplier’s packing list number and the quantities per that packing list.  An inspection report is printed.  The purchases are inspected and counted.  (If this box is left unchecked the user can skip the PO Dock Receiving step and go directly to the Purchase Order Receiving & Inspection record.

 

The user then is required to complete a PO Receiving & Inspection record. This module has a provision for rejected purchases.

 

For rejected materials, ManEx provides for a PO DMR (Discrepant Materials Receipt) module. The Discrepant Material Receiver is used to receive material which  does not meet the specifications for the purchased part or purchase order.  This module allows for review by the Materials Review Board.  Then, if not acceptable, the material may be returned to the supplier.  The user may reject in the Purchase & Receiving Management module OR may return an item From Inventory.  If an item is returned From Inventory, and the PO has been reconciled, a Debit Memo forwards into Accounting along with the appropriate journal entry. 

 

Once the data entry is completed, the purchase receivers are forwarded to the Accounting module for PO Receipt Reconciliation.  (The attached Print Screens below <<PO_Recv_Resulting_Trans.docx>> displays the resulting transactions that affect the Un-reconciled Receipt accounts after accepting items into stock through PO Receiving). 

Within the PO Receiving module there is a "Shortage List and Issue" button.  This will allow users to issue parts from receiving directly to the Kit Shortages.   This screen will display all shortages for that part and AVL.  There is an Approved Check box for reference to the Work Order Shortage List. This will be checked if the AVL that you are receiving is an approved AVL for that shortage.  This will give the users the needed information on screen to make the decision to use or not use a non-approved AVL to fulfill a shortage.    
1.3.3.2.3. Fields & Definitions for Purchase & Receiving Mgmt

 

Supplier Name The supplier or vendor with whom the order was placed.
P O Number The Purchase Order number of the order.
CO Number The Change Order revision status of the order placed.
Supplier PL No The number of the supplier’s Packing List.
Receiver No The Purchase Order Dock Receiving number.
Date Received The date the Purchase Order Receiving was completed.
Buyer The initials of the buyer for the order.
Item The Purchase Order Item Number.
Part Number The number the user has assigned to the part.
Rev The revision number assigned to the part.
Purch UOM The Purchased unit of measure. (May be different than stocking unit of measure).
Package The package type assigned to part in Inventory Control module. 
Balance The un-received quantity.
Received Qty The quantity received in Purchase Order Dock Receiving.  See Article #1240 for more detail on why the system will not allow user to enter in a fraction of a number, and an alternative.  Note: Users must have special access in order to receive overages,  There is a checkbox to allow overages within Security/User Rights for PO Receiving.    Note: The overage is applied to the entire PO order qty - it does not go down to the schedule level.  Example:  If you have an order qty of 100 and an allowed overage of 5% the system will allow you to receive in a total overage of 105.  But if you have only scheduled a qty of 25 and go to recieve in qty of 30 the system will allow you to do so, because it has not met the order overage yet. 
Accept Qty The quantity accepted within Purchase Order Receiving.
Reject Qty The quantity rejected.
Reject Reason The rejection reason Pull down list, (which is created within the System Setup Return/Shortage Reasons), is to allow the users to be able to select the Reject Reason code rather then writing notes and to be more consistent.  
Part Mfgr The manufacturer for the part.
MPN The manufacturer part number.
Description The description pertaining to the part number.

For the Highlighted Line Item:

Due Date  The date the item was due to the user’s dock.
Balance The un-received balance of the order.
Accept Qty The quantity accepted in Purchase Order Receiving.
Reject Qty The quantity rejected which will be placed in the Material Review Board warehouse.
Distribute To This is classification of the distribution of the item when received, either to regular Inventory Receiving or  to Allocate to a specific Work Order or Project.
Requestor On MRO and Services Purchase Orders, the name of the requestor is indicated.
N/A For future use.
WO Number The number of the Work Order for which the item was purchased.
Warehouse The name of the warehouse where the accepted quantity will be placed.
Location The specific location within the warehouse.
Note Schedule notes pertaining to that specific item and scheduled date.
Material Type  The material type listed is at the AVL level
Inspection Required This will be visible ONLY when selected in the Inventory module.  Check box when complete.  If box is NOT checked user will NOT be able to save record.
Certificate Required This will be visible ONLY when selected in the Inventory and/or PO module.  Check box when complete.  If box is NOT checked user will NOT be able to save.  
First Article Required This will be visible ONLY when selected in the Inventory module.  Check box when complete.  If box is NOT checked user will NOT be able to save record.
Enter any special notes pertaining to the 1st article.
Lot Code Lot Code number assigned to part.
Exp. Date Expiration date of Lot Code.
Reference User assigned number or code for reference
Lot Qty Qty of parts lot includes.
Reject Qty Qty of parts rejected out of lot.
Serial Number Serial numbers assigned to parts.
Reject Check box if that serial number is being rejected.
Insp Exception Note This information is displayed as reference information for processing the Receipts through the system.
Insp Excep Doc. This information is displayed as reference information for processing the Receipts through the system.

Directive Buttons:

 

The Item Inspection Note screen will be editable in the Add/Edit mode within the PO Receiving module (not editable when in view mode).  This button will turn Red when information has been entered.  The information added in the PO Receiving module will also be viewable in the Purchase Order module. 

  If this button is displayed in Red related documents have been attached to this item in the ICM module and may be viewed by depressing the "View Inventory Item Related Documentation" button.  For further detail see Article #2396 
Depress this button to view Item Master Notes for that specific part.  If there are Item Master Notes the button will be Red.  
Depress this button to view PO Item notes entered in the Purchase Order.  If there are PO Item notes the button will be Red.
Depress this button to view PO notes entered in the Purchase Order.  If there are PO notes the button will be Red
 

Depressing this button will bring up the following screen. If shortages exist for the current line item the button will be Red For further detail see Article #105 .

The system shows all the shortages for the part that is received, if:

  1. the WO is not closed or cancelled 
  2. the WO balance is more than 0
  3. the kit line "Ignore Kit" flag is not on
  4. the Kit status is "Released"

It is up to the user to decide which receipt has to be applied to which shortage.

Work Order Shortage List field definitions:

Work Order Due Date The date the Work Order was due to be completed and ready to ship.
Work Order Number The number of the Work Order.
Customer The name of the customer listed on the Work Order.
Product Number The Product number listed on the Work Order.
Revision The revision listed on the Work Order.
Shortage Quantity The amount of the Work Order shortage.

Qty Issued

The quantity issued to the Work Order shortage. System does not allow you to issue quantities greater than the shortage quantity.  For more detail see Article #2479.

Balance

The balance of the shortage after issuing parts to WO.

Approved 

This will be checked if the AVL that you are receiving is an approved AVL for that shortage.  This will give the users the needed information on screen to make the decision to use or not use a non-approved AVL to fulfill a shortage. 

Incoming Receipts field definitions:

PO REC Due Date The date the Purchase Order Receiving was completed. 
Available Qty The quantity accepted within Purchase Order Receiving. 
Warehouse The name of the warehouse where the accepted quantity will be placed.
Location The specific location within the warehouse. 
Part Mfgr The manufacturer for the part.
MPN The manufacturer part number.
Allocated To If the parts have been allocated to a WO or project when PO was created.
Requestor On MRO and Services Purchase Orders, the name of the requestor is indicated.
Lot Code Lot Code number assigned to part.
Exp Date Expiration date of Lot Code. 
Reference User assigned number or code for reference

Highlight WO Shortage and drag Incoming Receipt here to issue field defintions:

Work Order The number of the Work Order.
PO Rec Due Date The date the Purchase Order Receiving was completed.
Warehouse The name of the warehouse where the accepted quantity will be placed.
Location The specific location within the warehouse.
Part Mfgr The manufacturer for the part.
MPN The manufacturer part number.
Qty Issued The quantity issued to Work Order Shortage
Lot Code Lot Code number assigned to part.
Exp Date Expiration date of Lot Code.
Reference User assigned number or code for reference
 

1.3.3.2.4. How To ..... for Purchase & Receiving Mgmt
1.3.3.2.4.1. Find a Purchase Order in Receiving Inspection

Depress the Inventory Mgt/Purchase Order Receiving & DMR/Purchase & Receiving Management module  

The following screen will appear:

 

1. Pressing the Find action button at the top of the main screen displays the following sequences:

This allows the user to search by Purchase Order Number, Supplier, or Receiver Number.

 

2a. If the user selects to find by Purchase Order Number, a screen is presented listing all orders placed.

Type the PO number into the red box or highlight the PO Number of choice and double click.The PO information will populate the screen.

 
 2b. If the user selects to find by Supplier, a screen is presented listing all of the suppliers with all orders placed.

Type the supplier into the red box or highlight the supplier of choice and double click.The PO information will populate the screen.

 

2c. If the user selects to find by Receiver Number, a screen is presented listing all of the receiver numbers with all orders placed.

Type the receiver number into the red box or highlight the receiver number of choice and double click.The PO information will populate the screen.

 

3. The found information will populate the screen, as follows:

1.3.3.2.4.2. Add a PO Receiving Inspection Record

If system is setup for Dock Receiving follow a.  If system is setup for Inventory receiving ONLY follow b. 

    1. Print out the  Purchase Order Receipt Inspection Worksheet.
    2. You will go directly to step 3. 
    3. Inspect the shipment received. 
    4. Add a record.
    5. The user will be prompted for the password. 
    6. Find  a Purchase Order 
    7. If Supplier Packing List Number is not already entered, enter it now.
    8. Select the part to receive.
    9. Enter the quantity accepted and/or rejected and reject reasons.  (When using the PO Dock, user has to either accept the entire Dock qty or reject the balance.  User can not accept only a partial PO Dock qty).   Note: Users must have special access in order to receive overages, receive early shipments,and/or receive banned MPNs.  There is a checkbox to allow user to receive overages, receive early shipments, and/or receive banned MPSs, within Security/User Rights for PO Receiving.   

       

      User will receive the following warning if the number of parts received is higher than the qty ordered.

      The overage is applied to the entire PO order qty - it does NOT go down to the schedule level.  Example:  If you have an order qty of 100 and an allowed overage of 5% the system will allow you to receive in a total overage of 105.  But if you have only scheduled a qty of 25 and go to receive in qty of 30 the system will allow you to do so, because it has not met the order overage yet.  Note:  A negative qty will appear in the balance column on the PO when an overage has been received.

      Note:  User must have special access in order to receive overages.   There is a checkbox to allow overages within Security/User Rights for PO Receiving.  
      If user does NOT have these rights, they will NOT be able to continue.

      User will receive the following warning if the receipt is before the PO due date and the early tolerance time allowed in the  Purchase Setup screen

      Note: Users must have special access in order to receive early shipments. There is a checkbox to allow early shipments within Security/User Rights for PO Receiving If user does not have these rights, they will NOT be able to continue.

       

       

    10. If the “Allow auto creating location at receiving” box is checked in Inventory Control, AVL level & Warehouse Setup, this will allow the user to add or edit the location at time of receipt. User may also select an existing warehouse at receiving instead of having to create one before receiving.   For further information on the "Allow auto creating location at receiving" see Inventory Control & Warehouse setup.  If the Inspection Required, Certificate Required, and/or the First Article Required is setup in the Inventory Control Management module,   these boxes will be displayed in Red and the "DONE" boxes must be checked to continue the receiving process.  

       

    11. In the system setup - Purchase Setup user can choose to allow receiver to change AVL at the receipt.   The pull down will display all the Mfgr and Mfgr PN's listed in the AVL screen in the ICM module.

    12. Enter Serial Number and/or Lot Information if required.

    13. Issue parts directly to Work Order Shortages.

    14. Save the record.

    NOTE:  If there is a Item Master Note, Purchase Order Item Note, or a Purchase Order Note, it will be RED. To view the note, depress the button of interest. When finished viewing Depress the OK button at the bottom of the screen.  The user will have the ability to edit the Item Master Notes if they have “Edit” rights to the Inventory Module, which can be setup in the Security Module. 
    1.3.3.2.4.2.1. Entering Serial Number and/or Lot Information

    Introduction

    The users can receive components that require Lot Code Only, Serial Number Only, or both Serial Number and Lot Code, following the instructions listed below.  A part that requires a Lot Coded is setup in the Inventory Part Class set-up module.  A part that requires Serial numbers is set-up in Inventory Control Module.

    1. Fill in accepted item quanitity as instructed in the Add a PO Receiving Inspection Record.
    2. Depress the Add button next to the Lot Code section.
    3. Type in the Lot Code. The expiration date, reference date and quantity will automatically update, (if the part class/type setup is set to auto update expiration date and reference for the lot code).   In order for a Lot Code to be unique, the system looks at four fields for comparison.  They are Lot Code, Reference, and PO Number.  So while a batch may have the same Lot Code as another batch, if it arrives in a different PO, the it will be classified as a different lot.  The expiration date is optional and is not required when creating a new lot.

    4. Serial numbers will have to be assigned only if a part has the serial number box checked in the inventory module.
      1. Select either single or range.
      2. Enter the serial number in the red box and depress enter.
      3. The serial numbers will automatically update. (Serial numbers may or may not have lot codes).

         

      1.3.3.2.4.2.2. Issue Directly to Work Order Shortages

      Highlight the line item of interest on the PO Receiving and Inspection screen.

      Depress the Work Order Shortage List and Issue button.

      Highlight the work order shortage at top of screen. 

      Drag Available Qty located in the middle of your screen under Incoming Receipt.

      Drop it in the quantity issued at the bottom of your screen as displayed below.  System will allow users to pick to each of the individual shortages within the same Work Order and/or different Work Orders.
       

      The Approved box will be checked if the AVL that you are receiving is an approved AVL for that shortage. This will give the users the needed information on screen to make the decision to use or not use a non-approved AVL to fulfill a shortage.

      System will not allow user to issue quantities greater than the shortage quantity.  See Article #2479 for further detail.

      The following messge will be displayed if user issues a quantity greater than the shortage quantity. 



      NOTE:  If a user has the Work Order Checklist feature active and tries to use the PO Receiving shortage and issues feature within the PO Receiving, it will not recognize the shortages until the kit has been flagged as "Kit Complete".  It is designed this way because the user will not know if the parts are short until the kit is completed. 

      You may have parts in the inventory and have not pulled them to the kit yet.  If you allow seeing the shortage (which may not be a shortage because parts are not pulled yet) from the PO receiving, the receiver may be trained to automatically issue to the shortages first, but it may not be a shortage because parts have not been pulled from inventory, so how would they know if it is a real shortage or just not pulled from inventory yet.

       

      1.3.3.2.4.3. Rejecting Quantity in PO Receiving & Inspection
      1. Highlight the PO item number located in the middle section of the PO Receiving and Inspection screen.
      2. Type in the accepted quantity (if any).
      3. Place the cursor in the next box (rej qty) and type in the rejected quantity.
      4. Select a reject reason from the pull down in the top section of the screen.
      5. If lot coded type in the accepted qty and rejected qty in the lot code screen.
      6. If serial numbers are required check the serial numbers that have been rejected.
      7. Continue this process until all items are either accepted or rejected.

      8. Depress the Save button.   
      9. If all items on the Purchase Order have been received it will be marked "CLOSED". 
      1.3.3.2.4.3.1. Rejecting Items if Accounting has Processed the Invoice
      1. If the Purchase Order has been processed through accounting:
        1. Transfer the discrepant material into the MRB (materials review board) warehouse via Inventory Handling.
        2. Enter the PO DMR module (discrepant material return).
        3. Add from Inventory. (This is called an INVENTORY DMR).
      2. If the user has already pulled the kit associated with the part to be returned to the supplier.
        1.  Enter the Kitting module.
        2. Find the work order.
        3. Depress the Utility tab and depress the De Kit button.  This process will return the part into the inventory warehouse. (Please refer to the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt module).
      1.3.3.2.4.3.2. Rejecting Items if Accounting hasn't Processed the Invoice

      Introduction

      After the user has accepted all of the items on a Closed Purchase Order and then subsequently it’s discovered that the material received is discrepant, do the following if Accounting hasn’t already processed the Supplier’s Invoice for payment:

       

      1. Enter the Purchase and Receiving Managment Module.
      2. Find the closed PO, using the Find a Purchase Order.
      3. Depress the Edit button.
      4. Type in your password.
      5. Highlight the discrepant Part Number Line Item in the top section of the screen.
      6. In the middle section of the screen, enter the revised accepted quantity, and the rejected quantity.
      7. Go back up to the top section of the screen and select a reject reason.
      8. If there is Lot Code Tracking involved, also adjust the Lot accepted quantity and rejected quantity, and check the serial numbers that have been rejected.
      9. Depress the Save button.

      1.3.3.2.5. Reports - Purchase & Receiving Mgmt
      To obtain the PO Receiving reports, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen. 

      The following screen will appear:

       

      Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

      Highlight the desired report and then depress the Option tab if applicable. 

       

       

      MATERIAL RECEIPT LABELS

      For the PO Receiving Material Receipt Labels, you can choose between the Avery label #5163 (laser Sheet 4x2) or the Zebra Printer.
       
      Select PO Status - Open or Closed.  Select to pick PO # from List or Enter Single PO #.  Select the PO from the pull down. Depress the GO button. 
       

      The information will automatically fill in.  Enter the quantity of labels needed for each item.
       
      Note:  The Mfgr and Mfgr PN info is being pulled from the PO Module and not the Receiving Module.

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The following is printed (This example is Printing to the Laser Printer (Sheet):  Label size 4" x 2")
       
       
       

      MATERIAL RECEIPT TRAVELER REPORT

      For the Material Receipt Traveler report, highlight that report.

      Go  to the Options screen, select the PO Items Type from the pull down screen. 

      Depress the OK button. 

       

      The following is printed.

      MATERIAL RECEIPT HISTORY FOR ONE PART REPORT 

      For the Material Receipt History for One Part report, highlight that report.

      Go to the Options screen.  Enter the part number.  Enter the desired date range.  To clear the selection, check the Clear Selection box and re-enter the desired date range.
       
      Check the box to Suppress leading "0" when printing serial numbers.

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The following is printed:

      MATERIAL RECEIPT HISTORY REPORT FOR ALL PARTS

      For the Material Receipt History Report for ALL Parts, highlight that report and make the appropriate selection at the bottom of the screen, By Part Number, By Warehouse or By Supplier.

      Go to the Options tab.  Enter the desired date range.  To clear the selection, check the Clear Selection box and re-enter the desired date range.
       
      Check the box to Suppress leading "0" when printing serial numbers.

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The following is printed:

      PURCHASE ORDER RECEIPT INSPECTION WORKSHEET or

      PURCHASE ORDER RECEIPT INSPECTION WORKSHEET with REQUESTER

      For the Purchase Order Receipt Inspection Work Sheet, or Purchase Order Receipt Inspection Work Sheet with Requester, highlight that report.

      Go to the Options tab. Highlight the Purchase Order and depress the > button.  If you want all of the Purchase Orders listed, depress the >> button.

      Depress the OK button.

       

       

      The following is printed:

      Material Receipt History Report for PO

      For the Material Receipt History Report for PO, highlight that report.

      Go to the option tab. Choose Single PO or PO received in given Date Range by selecting the radial.  Enter date range.
       
      Check the box to Suppress leading "0" when printing serial numbers.
       
      The Project/Work Order Allocation information will be displayed on the report. NOTE: The report has to pull the allocation information from the Purchase Order Item Schedule, if the item schedule allocation is modified after receipts have already been made against this item, the report will also change to display what is currently assigned for allocation, not what they were received into the system as.

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The following will print:

      1.3.3.2.6. FAQs - Purchase & Receiving Mgmt
      Facts and Questions for the PO Receiving & DMR Module
      1.3.3.2.7. ManEx Minutes (PO Receivng)
      1.3.3.3. Purchase Bar Code Receiving
      1.3.3.3.1. Prerequisites for Bar Code Receiving

      After activation, "PO Bar Code Receiving" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
      System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
       
      Dock Received Purchase Order There must be a dock receiver for the purchase order. (If required in Purchase Setup).
      Return/Shortage Reasons  Return/Shortage reasons must have been entered in System Setup - Return/Shortage Reasons Setup.
      BarCode Printer Zebra Model #LP2844 and ZEBRA labels part number 10000281 (or equivalent) for the 4 x 6 label.  For further detail see Article #142
      1.3.3.3.2. Introduction for Bar Code Receiving
      This module is designed to streamline the receiving process by giving the user the capability to scan the bar code in PO Receiving and print out the labels upon receipt.  This module can be used with a Bar Code Scanner or manually.  This will enhance the process of receiving product by saving time with the simple procedure of scanning by bar code and the option to print out labels upon receipts. 
       
      The objective of the bar code receiving is to minimize the time spent on receiving a PO.  Having a number of additional items on the screen is NOT practical from a space standpoint nor from a user standpoint.  If the receiving clerk is required to modify the Warehouse location, AVL, etc. they will need to use the manual PO Receiver module.
       
       
         
      1.3.3.3.3. Fields and Definitions for Bar Code Receiving

      Bar Code Command

      When you first open the Bar code screen your cursor will be located in the “Bar Command” text box. You can use a scanner or just type the same value as you see on the print-out to navigate this screen.   For example when you first started you can just type “add” into the “Bar Code Command” space to activate the “Add” button. 

      Supplier PL No  The Supplier PL No scanned or entered
      Receiver No  The Receiver No scanned or entered
      Date Received  The Current Date and Time will default in when Bar Code is scanned or info is entered manually
        Depress this button to clear Values (if scanned incorrect Bar Code or entered incorrect information) 
      Depress this button to Print the Label after Transaction has been saved.
      Print Labels Upon PO Receipts in BC If this box is checked the Label will be printed upon PO Receipt
      PO Number  The PO Number (scanned or entered manually)
      CO #  The Chance Order Number listed on the PO 
      Buyer  The Buyer listed on the PO  
      Item #  The item number on the PO for the part number scanned or entered manually 
      Part Number  The Part Number scanned or entered manually
      Revision  The Revision of the Part Number scanned or entered manually
      Material Type  The Material Type assigned to the Part Number scanned or entered manually
      Manufacturer Part Number  The Mfgr PN  listed on the PO
      Part Manufacturer   The Mfgr listed on the PO
      Accept Quantity  Enter the Accept Quantity 
      Reject Quantity  Enter the Reject Quantity
      Reject Reason  The reject reason field is linked to the appropriate setup tables if you print just partial information and press enter the information should get completed, but if the information is completely wrong then the system will prompt for the correct info. 
      Inspection/Certifcate/1st Article  The 1st article disposition field is linked to the appropriate setup tables if you print just partial information and press enter the information should get completed, but if the information is completely wrong then the system will prompt for the correct info.  
      Lot Code Entry Area 

      Enter Lot Code number assigned to parts, expiration date, qty, etc. 

      Serial Numbers Entry Area  Enter Serial numbers assigned to parts.
        If this button is displayed in Red related documents have been attached to this item in the ICM module and may be viewed by depressing the "View Inventory Item Related Documentation" button.  For further detail see Article #2396  

      1.3.3.3.4. How To ..... for Bar Code Receiving
      1.3.3.3.4.1. Accept/Reject Quantity
      Enter Inventory Mgt/Purchase Order Receiving & DMR/Purchase Bar Code Receiving Module    

      The following screen will appear:

      When you first open the Bar code screen your cursor will be located in the “Bar Command” text box.  Use print button to print a bar code for all the commands you can use in this screen.

       

      You can use a scanner or just type the same value as you see on the print-out to navigate this screen.  For example when you first started you can just type “add” into the “Bar Code Command” space to activate the “Add” button.  When in the “Add” mode cursor will be positioned in the “Supplier PL No” field you can enter or scan a supplier packing list number or if you would like to advance to the let say “PO Number” field you can type\scan “PO” and the cursor will advance to the PO # field.   If you have a barcode which has “PO1530” where “1530” is an actual PO#  the cursor will advance to the “PO Number” field and place value of “1530” into it.   You can do the same with any of the other fields, which have a command listed in the print out.
       
      Depress the "Print Label for Saved Transaction" or check the box "Print Labels upon PO Receipts" .  ManEx has designed the labels to be printed on a Zebra Label #10000281 (or equivalent) for a 4 X 6 label.     
       
       
       
       
      1.3.3.4. PO DMR
      1.3.3.4.1. Prerequistes for PO DMR
      Prerequisites for PO Inspection/Acceptance Received with Rejected Quantities:
       
      After activation, "Purchase Order Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
       

      Purchase Order received with Rejected Quantities

      There must have been a rejection in the Purchase & Receiving Management module.


      Prerequisites for Rejects from Inventory:

      MRB (materials review board) Warehouse

      A MRB (materials review board) Warehouse must be set up in Warehouse Setup.

      Inventory transferred to MRB (materials review board) whse 

      Within Inventory Handling the discrepant quantity must have been transferred to MRB (materials review board) warehouse.

       

       

       

      1.3.3.4.2. Introduction for PO DMR

      Discrepant Material Return is used to return material which is different than what was ordered, received late, over shipment, damaged, etc.

       

      There are two ways to return discrepant materials.

       

      1.                    The discrepancy is discovered in PO Inspection/Acceptance Receiving and rejected there.

      2.                    The discrepancy is discovered after the Inventory has been placed into stock.  This module allows for review by the Materials Review Board.  Then, if not acceptable, the material may be returned to the supplier.  Once the DMR (discrepant material return) is created, information regarding the return is forwarded into Accounting where a Debit Memo and the accompanying accounting journal entry is created.

       

      Once the Discrepant Material is added, the user may print out a DMR (discrepant material return) Packing List.

       

      In Defect Code Entry we allow users to move product into FGI, when a part is transferred to FGI, the program will compare the total cost of components with the "material cost" of the assembly, then create the configuration variance. In addition to that, the system will create additional 4 records for "Labor", "Overhead", "Other Costs" and "User Defined" costs.

       

      1.3.3.4.3. Fields & Definitions for PO DMR
      1.3.3.4.3.1. Return Items Tab

      Fields & Definitions

      Supplier The name of the supplier
      PO Number The number of the Purchase Order.
      CO The Change Order pertaining to the Purchase Order
      Receiver # The number of the Purchase Order Receiver
      Packing List # The number the supplier assigned to the Packing list
      Item The number of the line item per the Purchase Order.
      Part Number The user assigned number for the part being returned
      Rev The revision of the part number, if applicable.
      Class The classification of the part number returned.
      Type The type within the classification.
      Description The description of the part number
      Manufacturer The name of the part manufacturer
      Mfgr part Number The number assigned to the part by the manufacturer
      DMR # The number assigned to the DMR.
      DMR Date This is the date the DMR was created.
      RMA # The number the Supplier provided for the Return Material Authorization.
      RMA Date The date of the Supplier’s Return Material Authorization
      Return Quantity The number of units returned to the supplier. See Article #1240 for more detail on why the system will not allow user to enter in a fraction of a number, and an alternative.
      DMR Confirm By The name of the user who authorized the DMR.
      DMR Created so far Previous DMR's Created

      Return Items tab field definitions

       Warehouse

      Part Number Original Warehouse

       Location

      Part Number Original Location

       Accpt Qty

      Qty after returns processed

       PO Rejected

      PO number that qty was rejected against

       Return Qty

      The quantity of material returned

       Balance

      The quantity balance

       Due Date

      The date to expect the replacements

       Distribute to

      A special person or department to deliver the parts to

       Requestor

      A person or department requesting the DMR

      Lot Code The lot code as assigned in PO Receiving module.
      Accpt Lot Qty The total quantity of the lot
      PO Rejected

      PO number that qty was rejected against

      Returned Qty

      The quantity of material returned 

      Exp Date The expiration date assigned to the lot
      Reference The reference number assigned to the lot 

      Lot Code  The lot code as assigned in PO Receiving module.
      Quantity The balance left after all returns.
      Reference The reference number assigned to the lot 
      Exp Date The expiration date assigned to the lot

      Serial Number  The serial numbers being returned
      Return The quantity of material being returned 

       
      1.3.3.4.3.2. Packing List Tab

      Field & Definitions

       Supplier The name of the supplier
       DMR Packing List The Packing List number the user has assigned to the material return.
       Ship to The address where the return will be shipped.
       Remit To The address for the receipt of the Debit Memo, if applicable.
       Attention The supplier representative to whom the Purchase Order was sent.
       Ship Via The name of the carrier for the returned material.
       Ship Charge The mode of the charge of the shipping for the return
       FOB The point where title of the returned goods passes.
       Terms The payment terms offered by the supplier
       Waybill The carrier’s waybill number pertaining to the material return.

      1.3.3.4.3.3. View DMR Tab

       DMR #  The number assigned to the DMR.
       RMA #  The number the Supplier provided for the Return Material Authorization.
       RMA Date  The date of the Supplier’s Return Material Authorization
       DMR Packing List  This is the alphanumeric packing list identifier
       DMR Date  This is the date the DMR was created.
       Return Quantity  The number of units returned to the supplier.
       DMR Confirm By  The name of the user who authorized the DMR.
       PO Number  The number of the Purchase Order.
       CO  The Change Order pertaining to the Purchase Order
       Receiver #  The number of the Purchase Order Receiver
       Packing List #  The number the supplier assigned to the Packing list
       Item  The number of the line item per the Purchase Order.
       Class  The classification of the part number returned.
       Type  The type within the classification.
       Part Number  The user assigned number for the part being returned
       Rev  The revision of the part number, if applicable.
       Manufacturer  The name of the part manufacturer
       Mfgr part Number  The number assigned to the part by the manufacturer
       Description  The description of the part number
       Supplier  The name of the supplier
       Ship to  The address where the return will be shipped.
       Remit To   The address for the receipt of the Debit Memo, if applicable.
       Attention  The name of the supplier’s contact.
       Ship Via  The method of shipment for the return
       Ship Charge   The mode of the charge of the shipping for the return
       FOB  The point at which legal title passes.
       Terms  The payment terms offered by the supplier
       Waybill  The number of the shipper’s document

       

      1.3.3.4.4. How To ..... for PO DMR
      1.3.3.4.4.1. Adding a DMR from Inventory

      This procedure is used after accounting has Reconciled the Purchase Order.  If accounting has not yet reconciled the purchase order, see  Rejecting Items if Accounting hasn't Processed the Invoice.

      Note that the discrepant material must be transfer into the MRB (materials review board) warehouse via Inventory Handling before you can proceed.

      To enter the PO DMR (discrepant material return) module, select Inventory Mgt / Purchase Order Receiving & DMR (discrepant material return) / PO DMR (discrepant material return).  

      1. Depress the Add button.
      2. Type in your password.
      3. The following screen will appear;

                                                                                                                                    
      4. Select the From Inventory radial.
      5. Type in the Part Number and depress the OK button.  The following screen will appear (If there is more than one Purchase Order involved it will list them all)     


                                                                                                                
      6. Highlight the Purchase Order of choice.

      7. Depress the OK button. Information regarding that part number for the Purchase Order selected will display:

      8. Type in the returned quantity in the Return From section.
      9.  In the DMR List section, type in the RMA number.
      10. Type your name in the Confirm By column.
      11. Depress the Packing List Tab.
      12. Typing in your Packing List number for the return.  Type in the associated waybill number.  

       

      If accounting has not yet transferred the reconciled invoice into AP Aging, the following message will appear:
       


      Depress the Save button.  The following screen will appear:
       

       
       
      Once the DMR (discrepant material return) has been added and saved, a Debit Memo will be created.  If Debit memo numbering is manual, the user will be prompted for the number.  Additionally, the corresponding entry will be created and the balance in the Accounts Payable Aging will adjust as soon as the Debit Memo is printed.
       
      If the invoice happens to be in a Saved Check batch the following warning will be displayed:
       
       

       

      1.3.3.4.4.2. Add a DMR from a PO Inspection/Acceptance Receiving Rejection
      To enter the PO DMR (discrepant material return) module, select Inventory Mgt / Purchase Order Receiving & DMR (discrepant material return) / PO DMR (discrepant material return).  
      1. Depress the Add button.
      2. Type in your password.The following screen will appear:

      3. Select the From PO Receiving radial.
        1. If you then mark the radial Purchase Order #, you will need to type in the number of the PO on which material was rejected.
        2. If you mark the radial Supplier, you must then type in the name of the Supplier and then depress the OK button.
        3. A list of Purchase Orders pertaining to that supplier will appear.

           
      4. Type the PO number of interest in the red box or highlight and double click.
      5. Depress the OK button.  (Note there are four additional screens if lot code and serial numbers are involved).

      6. Type in the DMR number (if set-up for manual numbering) you are assigning to this return.
      7. Type in the RMA number as provided by the supplier.
      8. Type your name in the Confirm By space.
      9. Highlight the line item containing the rejected quantity. (If returning a part that involves a Lot Code, type in the returned quantity in the Lot Code section and it will automatically update the Return From section. Check the serial numbers being returned).
      10. Depress the Packing List tab.
      11. Enter the Packing List number you wish to assign to the return. (Note that this number is NOT tied to regular shipping Packing Lists.This is a manually numbered field that is only for reference on the DMR’s.Any alpha-numeric code can be used here.DMR packing list numbers cannot be found in the regular shipping module – Packing List Management.It is suggested that the user manually log these codes or type in some kind of significant code, such as the date followed by the PO#).
      12. Type in the Waybill number.
      13. Depress the Save button. The View DMR screen will appear: 

         

         

      1.3.3.4.4.3. Find an Existing Discrepant Material Record (DMR)

      To enter the PO DMR (discrepant material return) module, select Inventory Mgt / Purchase Order Receiving & DMR (discrepant material return) / PO DMR (discrepant material return).

       
      1. Depress the Find button. The following screen will appear: 

      2. Select the appropriate radial – either DMR Number or Receiver Number.

      3. Type the appropriate DMR or Receiver number into the Red box.

      4. Depress the OK button.

       

      The following screen will appear:

       

      1.3.3.4.5. Reports - PO DMR

      To print out the DMR (discrepant material return) Packing List, depress the Print button. The following screen will appear:

      Highlight the DMR (discrepant material return) Packing List Form. Depress the Options tab.

       
      The following screen will appear:

      Select the Output, either Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.  Select the number of copies by toggling on the arrows.  If you don’t want to print the DMR displayed, click on the Select DMR from the list radial then highlight the DMR (discrepant material return) # you want printed and depress the > button.  If you want all of them, depress the >> button.

       

       

      The following will print:

      1.3.3.4.6. FAQs - PO DMR
      Facts and Questions for the PO Receiving and DMR Module
      1.3.4. Kitting, Allocating & Shortage Management
      1.3.4.1. Kitting & Shortage Management
      1.3.4.1.1. Prerequisties for Kitting & Shortage
      Prerequisites Required for Entering a New KITTING & SHORTAGE

      After activation, "Kitting & Shortage Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
      System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
       

      Work Order A work order must exist.
      Bill of Material The assembly must have a bill of materials, with kitted components
      AVL The Manufacturer Names must exist when using the AVL in the BOM.
      Reason Codes These codes must be established in the Return/Shortage Reasons  setup module.
      Accounting Defaults Inventory and Variance General Ledger accounts must be set up in the G/L Accounting Setup.

      Optional Prerequisites for Entering a New KITTING & SHORTAGE

      Work Order Traveler When adding line shortages, must have Work Order Traveler established if parts are to be issued to work center

       

       

      1.3.4.1.2. Introduction for Kitting & Shortage
      This screen provides a method for gathering data related to a specific Work Order.  Users are able to simulate a kit pull to better determine component availability and identify potential delays.  They also record unexpected component shortages allowing purchasing to order more and inventory to replace the components as needed.
       
      See Article #3273 on "How ManEx can help you Streamline your Kitting Process". 
      1.3.4.1.3. Fields & Definitions for Kitting & Shortage
      1.3.4.1.3.1. Main Tab

       

      Main Screen Field Definitions

      Work Order The work order selected for kitting activities
      Product # The Part number assigned to the assembly in the work order
      (Rev) The Part Number Revision for the assembly
      Customer The customer for the work order
      Build Qty The quantity of assemblies to be made for the work order
      Class The classification of the assembly
      Type The type of assembly
      Description Consists of the Inventory Control Item Master Description
      Last Changed Date and Time of Last Change to this Work Order/Kit
      By Initials of person who made last change to this Work Order/Kit
      Kit Status

      KITSTATUS ( character field) may be empty, or one of the following:  Kit Closed, Kit Process, Rework. If the KIT MANAGEMENT screen has been opened, and any material issued to the kit, the condition of this field will be changed from empty to Kit Process. This field is NOT dependant on the KIT field, but by the logic described in Article #2679 , and cannot be changed unless the kit is released.

      Reason
      When user pulls kit, edit, update..... all these details are saved in a table called "Kadetail".  All these records will have a "short reason" which is hard-coded in the program.  Here are some examples:

      Procedures                                    Reasons
      Edit kit(edit qty or delete):                KIT MODULE/REV
      New Kit Pull                                    KIT MODULE/Issu
      Auto Kit                                          KIT MODULE
      Kit Update                                       KIT UPDATE or KIT MODULE/Upd(if user has overissue)
      Delete part                                      DEL
      Add misc shortage                           ADD
      Edit misc shortage                           EDT
       
      If it's a line shortage, then user can select the reasons that's set up in System Setup So, when user highlights an item, the user will be able to view all different reasons for this item.
      Kit in Process Date and Time status of Kit was changed to "Kit in Process"
      By Initials of person who changed kit status to "Kit in Process"
      Check when Kit Completed Date and Time when Kit Complete box was checked
      By Initials of person who checked the Kit Complete box

      Component Section - NOTE:  Items will appear on screen only if the "Used in Kit" on the BOM is "Y".  For further detail see Article #34.

      This is the “Ignore Shortage” box: If you want to remove the component from the shortage reports and MRP, check the box at the left of the part number.  Note:  the box for checking KITTED shortages only works with those items that are kitted based on the BOM for the assembly. Checking the boxes means that the part on the BOM will NOT be considered for MRP purposes, and not show up on shortage lists. This is the only way you can get a part on the BOM off of the shortage list. Line shortages, however, can be edited to make them larger or completed.  The user will not be able to create a line shortage, then try to check the “ignore shortage” box, this box is disabled for added line shortages.  
      This symbol before a part number is to inform the user that this part is originating from a Phantom BOM.  
      When shortages have been saved for the work order, they will be added to the Kit Status section of the main information tab. The item will be preceded with the rho (? ) symbol to differentiate it from a kit shortage.
      Part Number The part number of a component belonging to the Bill of Materials for the assembly
      Rev The part number revision of the component
      Ref Designator The Reference Designator as assigned in the BOM Module
      Required Qty The number of parts required of the component in the work center shown. (A component may be used in more than one work center.) This qty may include Setup Scrap if the "Setup Stcrp" box is check on the BOM Header Information and/or Run Scrap if selected to include scrap in the Kit Default Setup .
      Picked Qty The number of parts already picked from stores for the work order
      Shortage The quantity of parts short for the work order will be displayed as a positive number, the quantity of parts issued as an overage will be displayed with a negative number.
      Part Source The source code for the part, BUY, MAKE, Phantom or Consigned
      Work Center The work center in which the part is needed and to which it is to be kitted
      Rej Qty If parts have been rejected during the kitting process, the quantity of parts rejected

      DIRECTIVE BUTTONS

      The following buttons are displayed on the Kitting Main screen

        Kit Note will bring up any notes entered concerning the kitting or shortages
        BOM Note will show any notations entered at the Bill of Material level
        W/O Note will display any notes entered about the work order
        Item Mstr Note will display any notes entered in the Inventory Control Item Master about the part highlighted
        On Order button will display information about any open orders that may exist for the part highlighted, as shown below

      The user may sort by Date, Supplier, PO Number or Manufacturer by depressing any of those buttons.  

        The Inventory button will display on hand and location information for the part highlighted, as shown below

           
       
       
       
      1.3.4.1.3.1.1. Kit Status Logic

      Status of Kit:  Released is a term that means the work order has moved from the initial input condition, where it is possible to check on details of the work order and to utilize a check list to indicate certain functions (established in the setup) have been completed (e.g., necessary documents have been received, shortages have been resolved, tooling is available, etc.). An unreleased work order cannot be kitted, nor moved on the shop floor.

      KIT (a logic field) means that the work order has been released for production to work on it. This includes kitting and SFT. It means that in the WO screen, the user has clicked on the “Work Order Released” checkbox. Or, this box is automatically checked when all of the items on a work order check list have been completed. It does not mean that the work order or the kit have been started. Until this box is checked, no kitting nor SFT activities can begin.

      OPENCLOS ( character field) is the status, or condition of the work order. This condition is required to initiate a work order. These conditions must be one of the following:  Archived, Cancel, Closed, Firm Plann, Rework, ReworkFirm, Standard.  Every work order  must have one of these conditions.
      1.3.4.1.3.2. Issue Tab

      Issue Screen Fields

      KIT STATUS SECTION

      Part Number

      The part number of a component belonging to the Bill of Materials for theAssembly.

      Rev The part number revision of the component
      Shortage

      The quantity of parts short for the work order.

      INVENTORY STATUS SECTION

      Part Mfg The name of the manufacturer for the highlighted part
      Warehouse The name of the warehouse
      Location The location within the warehouse listed, such as Row 2, Bin 34
      Available Qty The quantity available for this part for this work order
      WO Alloc The quantity allocated to other Work Orders.
      Pjct Alloc

      The quantity allocated to other projects.

      PICKED STATUS SECTION

      An "A" will be displayed in this column if the Manufacturer is approved
      Part Mfgr The name of the manufacturer for the highlighted part.
      Mfgr Part Number The manufacturer number for the part highlighted
      Pick Qty The qty required for this WO.   See Article #1240 for more detail on why the system will not allow user to enter in a fraction of a number, and an alternative.
      Over issued Qty The qty over issued to this WO.  See Article #1240 for more detail on why the system will not allow user to enter in a fraction of a number, and an alternative.
      Lot Code The manufacturers lot code for the part highlighted
      Total Picked Qty

      The quantity of the highlighted part already picked. Below that is the part number of the completed assembly.

      Total Overissued Qty Any quantity issued over what the Bill of Materials depict. Below that is the revision number of the completed assembly.
        When depressing this button a bar code label will be printed
       

      The "Next" button should be used with the top "part number (type or scan)" field. When user types (or scans) the part number the user wants to issue, the cursor on the left list will move to the right part number record, then user can issue it. After the user is done, click the "Next" button, the system will save the issued record, and the cursor will move to top "part number" field again for user to enter whatever part number the user wants to issue next.  It doesn't mean the "next one" record in sequence.

        When the user is finished pulling the parts to the kit, they would depress this button and it will bring them back to the Main screen

        LOT CODE INFORMATION

       Mfgr Part Number  The manufacturer number for the part highlighted
       Lot Code  The manufacturers lot code for the part highlighted
       Lot Qty alloc to this PRJ  The quantity allocated to this specific project.
       Int. Lot Code  The users internal lot code for the part highlighted.
       Exp Date  The assigned date of expiration for the lot.
       Avail Lot Quantity  The quantity available for that lot which is available to assign to the work order.
       Lot Qty alloc to this WO  The quantity allocated to this specific work order.

      ADDITIONAL PART INFORMATION

       Part Class  The classification of the highlighted part. Below that is the part description
       Part Type  The type of part
       Part Source  The source for the part: Buy, Phantom, etc.
       Work Center  The work center where the part will be needed for the assembly

       

      1.3.4.1.3.3. Utility Tab

      The Utility Tab has four functions:

       

      1.  Close Kit - This section is used to close the kit from further transactions. Once closed, no further parts may be issued to or from the work order.



      Once the Close Kit button has been depress the following screen will appear, this screen will list all over-issues for disposition, it defaults all items to have the over-issue qty returned to stock.  If the users wants to return all to stock they just have to click the OK button.  If they want to assign all the over-issue to the Work Order (kit) they can do so by depressing the "Issue All to Kit" button.  

      The act of closing the kit sets up the material variance entry for the Accounting module if more parts or less parts than called for by the Bill of Materials were actually used. Note:  Only an accounting password can close the kit.

      The manufacturing variance is based on what should have been kitted according to the BOM for the work order. Under issues, overissues and alternate parts are considered as variances.

      If a part is allocated to a Work Order or a Project (linked to the work order), when the KIT over-issues to WO-WIP location.  Once the WO is closed, and user chooses to return stock, the WO allocation will be cleared, but the Project allocations will be retained and carry back to stock as still allocated to that project. 

      What are the actions that would cause a work order to appear on the “Kits to Close” report?

      The action that causes a work order to appear on the Kits to Close report is when the Work order is closed. (In the Shop floor tracking module, the units are transferred to the Finished Goods work center). There is no longer a balance due on the order but the work order has not yet had the kit closed. There are two aspects of closing a work order activity – 1, closing the work order; and 2, closing the kit. The work order closes when all of the scheduled parts are either in finished goods or scrap. This happens automatically when the last transfer is made in the shop floor tracking module. The kit closing is a manual function. It is separate, because even though the work order may be closed, somebody may not have completed kitting all the parts to the work order, nor moved all of the over-issue out of the work order. These actions are prompted for when the kit is closed. The user may close the kit without addressing the open issues, but if that happens, each will become a variance within accounting. Unfilled shortages will become a positive variance and overissued parts will become a negative variance.

      (Important Note: For those instances where the user didn’t issue the parts to the work order initially, but completed the work order in shop floor tracking and then closed the kit, there will be a very large positive variance created because the system will assume that the cost of the components = zero.) Therefore, do not close a kit if it was never pulled.

      2.  Re-open kit - If the user wishes, he/she may re-open the kit once it has been closed. Note: Only an accounting password can re-open the kit.

       

      3.  De-KitThe act of de-kitting will return all of the previously picked parts to inventory.  If a part is allocated to a Work Order or a Project (linked to the work order), once the part is issued to the WO (not over-issue) the allocation will be removed,  only the allocation for over-issue parts can be kept. Once the WO is closed, and user chooses to return stock, the WO allocation will be cleared, but the Project allocations will be retained and carry back to stock as still allocated to that project.  The appropriate accounting entry will also be generated to return all parts to Raw materials inventory from Work in Process. The system will not allow you to de-kit with product in finished goods.

       

      4.  Update Kit - The Update Kit button will update the work order with any BOM changes.

      Depress the Update Kit button. Type in your password.

      You will receive a confirmation message.

       

      If the changes to the BOM reflect inventory parts that require dispositioning the following screen will appear:

      Highlight the item. The system will default in the issued qty into the Issue WO field. If you wish to issue the parts directly to the cost of the Work Order then you can leave the qty in Issue WO. Depressing the OK button will then issue and cost those parts to the kit.

      If you wish to return those part back to inventory you will change the Issue WO qty to 0 and then you will see the Return to Stock qty adjust. That amount in the Return to Stock will be the amount that will be returned back to stock as available inventory.

      If there is an Over Issue Quantity found during the update kit, user will receive a message to remind the user that there was an Over-issue qty found, and to make any needed changes to those quantities to "Return to Stock".  (If you wish to return those part back to inventory you will change the Over Issue qty to 0 (bottom screen)  and then you will see the Return to Stock qty adjust (top screen)). That amount in the Return to Stock will be the amount that will be returned back to stock as available inventory.

      If not the over-issued qty will remain as an overissue - and upon completion of the update kit the parts will be issued to the WO (costed to the kit) and accounted for as a Mfgr Variance upon closing.   

      If a part is allocated to a Work Order or a Project (linked to the work order), when the KIT over-issues to WO-WIP location.  Once the WO is closed, and user chooses to return stock, the WO allocation will be cleared, but the Project allocations will be retained and carry back to stock as still allocated to that project.  

      Depress the OK button and you will receive a confirmation message.

      For any new parts added to the BOM, they will appear as shortages. You need to make sure to pull them to the kit.

      If any of the quantities per within the BOM were increased, you’ll have to also pull additional amounts, which will now show as shortages to the Work Order:

      In the example below, part number 105-0002726 was just added to the BOM and must now be pulled. Additionally, part number 101-0001633 had the quantity per on the BOM increased and now the shortage must be pulled.

      1.3.4.1.4. How To ..... for Kitting & Shortage
      1.3.4.1.4.1. Finding a Work Order Record

      Enter Inventory Mgt/Kitting, Allocating & Shortage Management/Kitting & Shortage Management.  

       

      The following screen will appear:

       

      Depress the Find action button the following screen will appear.

      The user is prompted to search by Work Order Number, Product Number, Customer Name or Sales Order Number.

       

      If you select by Work Order Number the following screen will appear.

      Type the work order number in the red box, or highlight the work order number and double click to select.

       

      If you select by Product Number the following screen will appear.

      Type the part number in the red box, or highlight the part number and double click to select.

      After selecting the product number, a screen is displayed listing work orders for the selected product.

       

      Type the work order number in the red box, or highlight the work order number and double click to select.

       

       

      If you select by Customer Name the following screen will appear.

      Type the customer name in the red box, or highlight the customer name and double click to select.

      After selecting the customer name, a screen is displayed listing work orders for the selected customer

       

      Type the work order number in the red box, or highlight the work order number and double click to select.

       

      If you select by Sales Order Number the following screen will appear.

       

      Type the sales order number in the red box, or highlight the sales order number and double click to select.

       

       After selecting the sales order number, a screen is displayed listing work orders for the selected sales order

       

      Type the work order number in the red box, or highlight the work order number and double click to select.

       

      After finding the Work Order, the Main KITTING screen appears, populated with any current information about the work order, as displayed.

       

       

      1.3.4.1.4.2. Issue Parts to Kit

      After Finding a kit and if it has NOT been previously pulled, the following procedure is performed

      Press the Edit action button. This selection will appear:

      Select between Manual Kit and Auto Kit.  The user may abort
      the process by clicking on the X button to exit without pulling the kit.
       
      When Selecting either "Manual Kit" or "Auto Kit" and this message appears the WO has a status of Mfgr Hold and the kitting procedure cannot continue until this WO status has been changed.


      MANUAL KIT

      Selecting Manual Kit and typing in the password will bring up this selection screen:

      Depress the "YES" button and user will be presented with this screen: (Note: the Kit Status has been updated to "Kit in Process")  
       
      NOTE:  If user selects "Yes" to continue and is using the WO Release CheckList the "Kit Released" box will be checked at this time.
       

       

      If you would like to see if there is part availability for the highlighted part number before going to the next step depress the "Inventory" button. 

      Depress the Edit action button again and the following selection will appear:

      Depress the Issue Parts button to continue or X to cancel.  If you depress the Issue Parts button and type in the password the Issue Tab screen is displayed:    

       

       

      This screen is divided into four operational sections.

      The left side of the screen will show the kit status, or parts to be kitted, and the current shortage for each part  
      On the upper right side of the screen, ManEx will display either all the AVL's or only the approved AVL's depending on how the Kit Default setup is setup.  

      If the "Show all Manufacturers" is selected in the Kit Default screen the kitting module will display ALL AVL's and then indicate the approved ones with an "A" on the screen and will allow user to pick from the non-approved AVL's as well as the approved AVL's. 
       
      If the "Show only Approved Manufacturers" is selected in the Kit Default screen the kitting module will ONLY display the approved AVL's and so users will only be able to pull parts from the Approved AVL's. 
       
      An "A" will appear in the left column for the approved AVL's.  Then the Mfgr, WH and Location will be displayed along with the current inventory status of the part highlighted on the left side of the screen, plus whether or not there has been any quantity allocated to this Work Order or project. 
       
      User also has the option to Allow use of non-nettable warehouse locations by checking or unchecking the box located in the Kit Default  Setup screen.  
       
      In the center of the right side of the screen,  the Picked Status section, ManEx will display the part manufacturer/mfg. part number, kit qty, over issued qty, and lot code for the work order.  

      In the lower right side of the screen, Mfgr part number, Lot code information, Part Class, Type, source, Work Center, and Description, about the inventory part highlighted in the upper right side of the screen, along with the Product number and Revision.  





      The user first selects a part from the kit status section.

      Place the cursor on a part manufucturer in the inventory status screen and drag it to the Picked Status section in the center of the right side of the screen. To drag, place the cursor on the line indicating an available quantity. Do not remove your finger from the mouse. While you are in the process of dragging, you will see an outline of a hand holding a document. Pull the cursor down to the Pick quantity section. To drop, remove your finger from the mouse. Those manufacturers approved for the bill of material will have the manufacturer preceded with an A.

      When inventory from the Inventory Status section is dragged to the Picked Status section, the quantity required for the work order is subtracted from the original quantity in inventory.  If there is insufficient quantity in inventory, an additional lot may be dragged to the picked status section. If the quantity of parts needed is less than the quantity in inventory, only the quantity needed will be transferred.

      While still in the Pick Status, the user may modify the quantities being picked. Increasing the quantity that is required for the kit (if there is more available in inventory) will place the extra parts in the overissued qty column. The shortage column will display the over-issues as negative shortages. By reducing the quantity, the remainder of the parts will be returned to inventory.  If not returned to Inventory, unused parts in the overissued inventory will continue to be considered as available for use by MRP actions. Other kits may be kitted using these parts.

      To change the amount Picked, place the cursor on the amount picked. A white box will display. Type the revised amount picked in the white box and depress the Enter key.

       

      REAL TIME KITTING FEATURE

      When you first enter the ISSUE screen and if you just continue through and Drag & Drop items as described above all of the transactions will be saved to the system upon depressing the Save Record Icon. But as soon as you depress the Next button the system will begin to save the records immediately and the Save and Cancel icons will became inactive. This has been added so our users can begin real-time kitting and since intended for a wireless network connection we need to save individual pulled records instead of the entire kit pull save. Below is a description of how this feature is intended to operate:

      1. User has a Pull Cart with a wireless laptop along with a wireless label printer.
      2. The barcode scanner will be hooked to the laptop.
      3. User takes the Kit Pick Worksheets with the items needed to be pulled.
      4. Goes down the isles and scans the part being pulled and enters in the pick qty.
      5. Then depresses the Next button. That record will be saved immediately.
      6. Prints the 4 x 3 label by depressing the Print a Label button. (if you need 3 labels, then depress the Print a Label button 3 times).
      7. Continue going through pulling parts for that kit as you go through the isles.
      8. Then when user is finished pulling parts for that kit they can depress the Done button.

      This will then bring them back to the Main Kitting screen.

        This field will allow you to type or scan in the Part number you are wishing to pick parts for.

      ENTER SERIAL NUMBERS

      If the Part Number highlighted in the left column, is a serialized part, highlight the Available Quantity.  Drag and drop into the Pick Quantity space (as described above). The quantity will appear as 0 in pick quantity. Click on pick quantity and manually fill in quantity. The following screen will appear:

       


      All serial numbers for this part number will appear in the left hand column. Highlight the serial numbers you want used for this work order click on the > arrows. They will
      appear in the right hand column. If you overissued you must highlight the serial numbers for the overissued quantity click on the > arrows and they will appear in the bottom right hand screen. Once the serial numbers that are to be used for this work order appear in the right hand column depress the OK button.

      Depress the ‘DONE’ Button or ‘Save’ button.

      The completed Main tab screen appears as below:

       
       
       
      NOTE:  MRP is designed to calculate from the Kit Shortage and not from the Lead times once the parts have been pulled to the kit and the kit status is changed to "Kit in Process".   Once the parts have been pulled to the kit, the systems is assuming that the shortages are needed by the WO due date, rather than the Prooduction lead time, so MRP then calculates using the due date of the WO as the date the materials must be on hand, MRP no longer takes the production lead time into consideration.
       

      AUTO KIT

      If you select Auto Kit, user must enter in a password, and the parts will be pulled automatically to the kit. Parts will ONLY be pulled from Stock, Allocation, or Lot Coded Parts and Approved AVL's.  Note:  Auto Kit will NOT pull parts from WO-WIP locations.  

      If there are serialized parts assigned to the work order you will receive the following message and will NOT be allowed to Auto kit. The system will allow you to auto kit the non-serialized parts within that kit. But if there are any serialized parts you will have to pull those items manually.

       

      If the Bill of Material does not have any components that are kitted, then no kitting will be done.

      Kitting Preference Hierarchy

      When Kitting

      Manex picks from Approved AVL's then in numeric sequence. (1 before 2, 2 before 3, etc.) "99" is the default preference number, if no preferences are entered, then other un-controllable factors affect which is picked first.

      If the user wants to have a specific warehouse picked first, then they are to enter a preference number such as "1" in the preference field  within the Quantity Info screen within  Inventory Control Mgmt  . 
       
      COMPLETING KIT

       

       

       

      When kit is completed, all shortage filled, etc. check the kit complete box, and the date, time, and users initials will defaulted in. This box must be checked when usiing the Unreleased Work Order List  and the Work Center Checklist

       

       

      1.3.4.1.4.3. Add a Line Item Shortage

      Pressing the Add Button (after finding a work order) displays the following selection choices:
       
       




       
       

      Shortages other than those resulting from an incomplete kit are considered Line Shortages. Line shortages may be a result of poor yield on a part, and additional parts are required, or because one or more additional parts are needed for the work order beyond those described in the bill of materials. Line shortages may be created because of alternate parts, special engineering evaluations, or for any reason that the user decides to enter in the system setup.

      For Miscellaneous Shortages, (this selection may be used to issue non-inventory items to kit)  the user may type in the Part Number, Revision and Description and then select Source, Class, Type, Department and Reason from the respective Drop Down lists. The user may type in the Quantity and Quantity/Unit.

      If you select Add Line Shortages, you will be prompted for your password and then the following screen will appear:  (NOTE:  If line shortages are added and issued to rework WOs, the kit status will update to  “REWORK”).   True "Phantoms" cannot be added as a line item shortage to a kit.
       

      NOTE:  The Line item shortages are considered as in the WIP account all the way through until the Kit is closed within the Kitting module. Upon Closing the kit within the Kitting module the Line Item Shortages are then costed out and credited out of WIP account and debited in the Mfgr Variance account. So the “Inventory WIP Valuation Report” by Work Order by Standard Cost  does not deduct those line item shortages as the product is moved into FGI.   See Article #1777 for further detail.

       



      The bottom of the Main information tab is opened up to display an area to enter the part information necessary to describe the shortages.
      The part information for the shortage is entered. The part must be a part defined in the Inventory Control Item Master. Select Part Source, Part Class, Part Type, Part Number from the respective drop down lists. Type in the Quantity and the Quantity per Unit. Note:  Shortages recorded by Ref Designator are case sensitive.   
       
      If the part is already on the Bill of Material, the work center may be selected. Otherwise, it is left blank.

      There must be a reason for the shortage entered in the Reason field. These reasons are established in the Return/Shortage Reason in System Setup. The user chooses the appropriate reason from the drop down list. The reason will appear in the Reason box.

       

      When shortages have been saved for the work order, they will be added to the Kit Status section of the main information tab. The item will be preceded with the rho (? ) symbol to differentiate it from a kit shortage, as displayed:



      “Ignore Shortage” box: If you want to remove the component from the shortage reports and MRP, check the box at the left of the part number. Note that the box for checking KITTED shortages only works with those items that are kitted based on the BOM for the assembly. Checking the boxes means that the part on the BOM will NOT be considered for MRP purposes, and NOT show up on shortage lists. This is the only way you can get a part on the BOM, off of the shortage list. Line shortages, however, can be edited to make them larger or completed. The user should NOT create a line shortage, then try to check the “ignore shortage” box.  A line shortage is either short or not.   If it is not short for this particular work order, then check the box to take it off of the shortage list.

      Add a Miscellaneous Shortage

      If you select Add a Miscellaneous Shortage you will be prompted for your password, and then the following screen will appear:

      Type in the Part Number, Revision and Description. Select Source, Class, Type, Department, Reason from the respective Drop Down lists. Type in the Quantity and Quantity/Unit. Continue in this fashion until all entries are made. Depress the Save button.

       

      Issue or Edit a Line Item Shortage

      Pressing the Edit Button (after finding a work order) displays the following selection choices:

       

      If user selects "Edit line Shortages", you will be prompted for your password and then you will have the opportunity to change Quantity, Quantity/Unit or Work Center Selection for an existing line item shortage.  

      This field is intended for the user to enter in the qty needed for the shortage and the system will make the needed adjustments based off from that qty.
      For Example:  if the user originally added a line item shortage for a qty of 5, and picked a total of 7 to the kit. (Production has no way of knowing how many were pulled to the kit originally, so a week later they come back to the stockroom, and request 4 more).  The stockroom will then edit the line item shortage at this time the qty will display a -2.00, stockroom will issue 4 more by entering a qty of 4, the system will make the adjustments based off from that qty, so the Required qty will then become 11. 
       
      NOTE:  You can only reduce the shortage qty if there are no issues against it.  If the complete shortage qty has been issued, and user depress the Edit line Shortage button and the qty field is "0" and user enters a qty in the qty field the system will interpret this as an additional qty.  To change a qty that has already been issued user would need to un-issue the complete qty and then go back and change the shortage qty.  System will not allow user to enter a negative qty.

      Depress the Save button when changes are completed.

      If user selects " Issue Parts" enters their password, they may follow the steps outlined in Article #904

       

      Add a Line Shortage to a Rework Work Order

      Overview of a Rework Order

      When a rework order is created via the RMA Receiver module (Please refer to the Return Material Authorization Management manual), there is no demand created for any parts on the BOM for the product of the work order. But, demand will be created for any line shortages established for the work order. There should be a line shortage created for the assembly being reworked, so the product can be issued to the work order.

      When the work order has the kit closed, the manufacturing variance is created that is the difference between the standard cost of the parts issued to the work order and the standard cost of the sum of all of the BOM components.

      If there is no BOM for the product, but if the assembly has a standard cost assigned to it, the following will happen:

      There will be a favorable variance to the wip (the difference between the standard cost of the product and the standard cost of the sum of the materials on the BOM) Assembly Standard cost – zero BOM cost.

      The kit close will have an unfavorable variance created for accounting which will be the sum of the standard cost of the components issued to the work order. The kit close will offset the line shortages pulled.

      To add a line shortage to a rework work order, follow the same procedures as finding the work order, as detailed above.

      Depress the Add button to add a new line shortage. Type in your password. Then follow the procedures to add and pull a line shortage as detailed above. Upon completion, you will see a message at the top right hand side of the screen that inventory files are being updated. Then the part information in the lower part of the screen will turn blank.

      Exit the kitting module and then proceed to the shop floor tracking module to complete the rework order.

      The Delete button is used to remove line shortages before the part has been pulled for that line item. Find the Work Order containing the line shortage, using the find procedures. After selecting the delete button, the user is asked for an authorized password. Then the user selects the item to be deleted. Highlight the line item containing a rho symbol (? ) at the far left of the part number.

       





      The following message will appear: 

      Depress the OK button. 

      The item will disappear.
       

       

       

       

      1.3.4.1.4.4. Update Kit
      The Update Kit button will update the work order with any BOM changes.   Note:  This button MUST be depressed after an ECO approval for any part changes to be reflected if the Work Order due date proceeds the effectivity date of the ECO.

      Depress the Update Kit button. Type in your password.

      You will receive a confirmation message.

       

      If the changes to the BOM reflect inventory parts that require dispositioning the following screen will appear: 

       
      Note:  If parts are being displayed for dispositioning even though NO changes to quantities were made it may be due to the fact that the work centers were changed and upon completion of the update kit the parts will be issued to the WO (costed to the kit) and accounted for as a Mfgr Variance upon closing.    

      Highlight the item. The system will default in the issued qty into the Issue WO field (bottom screen).   If you wish to issue the parts directly to the cost of the Work Order then you can leave the qty in Issue WO.  Depressing the OK button will then issue and cost those parts to the kit. If you wish to return those part back to inventory you will change the Issue WO qty to 0 (bottom screen)  and then you will see the Return to Stock qty adjust (top screen). That amount in the Return to Stock will be the amount that will be returned back to stock as available inventory.

      If there is an Over Issue Quantity found during the update kit, user will receive the following message to remind the user that there was an Over-issue qty found, and to make any needed changes to those quantities to "Return to Stock".  (If you wish to return those part back to inventory you will change the Over Issue qty to 0 (bottom screen)  and then you will see the Return to Stock qty adjust (top screen)). That amount in the Return to Stock will be the amount that will be returned back to stock as available inventory.
       
      If not the over-issued qty will remain as an overissue - and upon completion of the update kit the parts will be issued to the WO (costed to the kit) and accounted for as a Mfgr Variance upon closing.   

       
      If the over-issued quantity or quantity in WO-WIP has been allocated to other work orders/projects,  then the user will receive the following message and the kit will not update until the allocatiions have been cleared.
       

      For any new parts added to the BOM, they will appear as shortages, and user will need to make sure to pull them to the kit.

      If any of the quantities per within the BOM were increased, you will have to also pull additional amounts, which will now show as shortages to the Work Order. 

      If user changes a Work Center on a BOM and depress the Update kit button, the system will treat this part as a new item, and will appear as shortages and user will need to make sure and pull them to the kit.

      In the example below, part number 105-0002726 was just added to the BOM and must now be pulled. Additionally, part number 101-0001633 had the quantity per on the BOM increased and now the shortage must be pulled.

       

      1.3.4.1.4.5. De-Kit

      The act of de-kitting will return all of the previously picked parts to inventory.  If a part is allocated to a Work Order or a Project (linked to the work order), once the part is issued to the WO (not over-issue) the allocation will be removed,  only the allocation for over-issue parts can be kept.  The system will NOT allow you to de-kit with product in finished goods.

      Note:  If the "Remove location with this warehouse from the Inventory when qty on hand gets to "0" box is checked in the Warehouse Setup , and the work order is de-kitted, the warehouse will be reactivated and parts will be returned to that same warehouse.    


      When De-Kitting parts issued from an In-Store warehouse, the parts will NOT be returned to the In-Store warehouse.  The parts will be returned to Stock and the In-Store PO will still need to be created. 





      If the over-issued quantity or quantity in WO-WIP has been allocated to other work orders/projects,  then the user will receive the following message and the kit will not Dekit until the allocatiions have been cleared.

       
      If the kit is NOT in process yet or has been de-kitted already, the following message will appear on screen and will cancel the de-kit.
       

       

      .
      1.3.4.1.4.6. Return Over-Issue

      There are two methods of returning an over issue:

      Method 1:

      For the situation where the user has created a line shortage, before the Work Order has been completed (reached the Finished Goods Inventory Work Center in Production), the user has the option of returning the unused components which were over-issued to the Work Order back into Inventory.

      Using the Finding a Kitting & Shortage procedure, find the Work Order with the over-issue (remembering to select ALL). You will note that the shortage column contains a negative amount, as shown in the screen below:



      1. Depress the Edit action button. The following selection will appear:
      2. Select the Issue Parts option.
      3. Enter password.
       

      1. Highlight the Part Number with the negative shortage.
      2. Move the cursor into the Pick Quantity field.
      3. Type in the corrected amount of picked quantity that was actually used in the assembly.
      4. Depress the Enter key. The actual over-issue will display.  As shown in screen displayed.

       

      Depress the Save action button. The difference between the original over-issue and the actual overissue will be returned to inventory. The inventory records will update and the appropriate accounting entry removing the part from WIP will also be made.  (If the parts in WO-WIP have been allocated to another work order/project user will not be able to return the over-issue qty using this method).

      Method 2:

      This method covers the situation where the user has a reel of 750 parts and he/she doesn't want to count out 500 for the Work Order. All of the 750 is issued by clicking on the quantity in the lower right hand screen of the Issue tab and changing the amount to 750. (Please refer to procedures above regarding the Issue tab.) Then the system will over-issue 250 parts to the Work Order.

      Once the assembly has been completed and reaches the Work Center for Finished Goods Inventory, these un-used over-issued parts can now be issued to the next Work Order, or returned to stock, as follows:

      Using the Finding a Kitting & Shortage procedure, find the Work Order with the over-issue (remembering to select ALL). 

      1. Open the Utility tab.
      2. Depress the Close Kit button, the following screen will appear.

        

      3.  If then you want the un-used overissue returned to stock, depress the OK button.  Notice that the over issue has disappeared from the Main tab, as shown in the screen below: (If the user does not want the un-used over-issues returned to Raw Materials Inventory, he/she edits the Quantity Transfer Amount at the bottom right hand side of the screen. The user may transfer 0 quantity or any amount up to the amount of the over-issue). 



      Once the above steps are completed, the "Qty Transfer" parts are returned to their warehouse location, WIP is relieved, the Quantity on Hand in Raw Materials Inventory is increased in the Inventory Item Master and the appropriate accounting entries are generated. 
       
      Lot Coded Parts - If parts have been issued from different Lot Codes with over-issued qty, those over-issued parts are moved to "WO-WIP" location, and the system saves what lots they come from, when the Kit is closed, the system locates all the WO-WIP locations and lot information, and returns it back to the original lot, if the lot is deleted (due to the lot qty is 0), is will re-create it. 
       
      Allocated Parts - If a part in WO-WIP is allocated to other work orders/projects, and user chooses to return back to stock, the program will unallocate from the work orders WO-WIP, return to the original location and then re-allocate to the original locatiion,  if user chooses to issue to work order the program will remove the allocation and  cost it to the work order.  

      1.3.4.1.4.7. Close Kit
      This section is used to close the kit from further transactions. Once closed, no further parts may be issued to or from the work order.  
       
      NOTE:  User MUST have full rights to the Kitting & Shortage Management module within Security to be able to close a kit.
       

      NOTE:  It is very important to close out all kits. Kits need to be closed manually so the user can choose whether the over-issues are to be returned to stock, or charged to the work order. If kits are not closed users are likely to have a huge manufacturing variance, or very inaccurate inventory records, and MRP will think that the over-issues are available to meet demand, when they might not actually be available
       
       



      Once the Close Kit button has been depress the following screen will appear, this screen will list all over-issues for disposition, if the parts still have other locations available, the code only lets the user return back to those locations.  The system will list all the available locations for the same manufacturere but not "WIP", "WO-WIP" and "MRB" locations for user to return.  It will only "un-delete" a location if NO other locations are available.  It defaults all items to have the over-issue qty returned to stock to the default warehouse.  If the user choose to return all inventory to stock they just have to click the "OK" button.   If they choose to assign all the over-issued qty to the Work Order (kit) they can do so by depressing the "Issue All to Kit" button, and the pick qty will increase to include the overissued qty.  So, if the users decide to re-open the kit, they have the option to return the material back to inventory if they choose.


      NOTE:  If the user REDUCES the Build Qty on a Work Order that will change the WO status to "CLOSED",  upon closing the kit the system will take the original quantity pulled to the kit and automatically cost the different to the kit without giving any option to the user.  If the user does NOT wish to have the extra parts automatically costed to the kit upon closing they will need to change the WO status from "CLOSED" to "STANDARD",  return to the Kitting module and "UPDATE"  the kit,  then  return to the WO module and edit/save the record without making any changes – the Status will automatically update to Closed
      .   See attached word document <<PS_961_090427.docx>>  for an example.  
       
       
      The act of closing the kit sets up the material variance entry for the accounting module if more parts or less parts than called for by the Kit for the Bill of Materials and actually used.
       
      The manufacturing variance is based on what should have been kitted according to the BOM extension for kitting for the work order. Under issues, overissues and alternate parts are considered as variances.

      The BOM may contain components which may have a scrap percentage associated with them.  When the standard cost is calculated for such a BOM, and if the extended quantity calculated for scrap percentage for a component is fractional, the fraction of a cost is used in the determination of the standard cost.  (For example,if a component had a scrap percentage of 3%, and the BOM calls for 50 components per assembly, the cost is determined based on 51.5 components.  However, when kitting the assembly, it isn't possible to issue 51.5 components, so it is rounded to 52 components.  Then when the assembly is removed from WIP, and the kit is closed, the WIP is credited for the value of the assembly, which includes the price based on 51.5 components.  That leaves the cost of 1/2 of the affected component left in WIP.  The rounding variance tracks down these differences and also removes the remaining cost of 1/2 component.  

      The Line item shortages are considered as in the WIP account all the way through until the Kit is closed within the Kitting module. Upon Closing the kit within the Kitting module the Line Item Shortages are then costed out and credited out of WIP account and debited in the Mfgr Variance account. So the “Inventory WIP Valuation Report” by Work Order by Standard Cost  does not deduct those line item shortages as the product is moved into FGI.   For further detail see Article #3053 .

      1.       If no G/L account number has been established for the rounding variance user will receive the following message and a G/L account number will need to be established for the rounding variance in  Inventory Setup  before user can continue.


       
       
       
      The Kit Closing Procedure will separate out the manufacturing variance, rounding variance, and the changes to WIP values.   

      If a part is allocated to a Work Order or a Project (linked to the work order), when the KIT over-issues to WO-WIP location.  Once the WO is closed, and user chooses to return stock, the WO allocation will be cleared, but the Project allocations will be retained and carry back to stock as still allocated to that project. 

      If Lot Coded parts have been over-issued to the kit those over-issued parts are moved to "WO-WIP" location and the system will save what lots they were pulled from.  When the Kit is closed, the kit finds all the" WO-WIP" locations and lot information, and returns the parts back to the original lot.  If the lot is deleted (due to the lot qty is 0), the system will re-create that lot.
       
      When closing a kit see Article #1777 for further detail on how Line Item Shortages are handled.
       
      Upon attempting to close a kit, some users may report this type of message that was presented to them.   This more than likely indicates that parts that have been used on the kit are currently in an active Cycle Count or Physical Inventory. Make sure that Cycle Count or Physical Inventory have been posted to Inventory and then attempt to close the kit again.
       
       
       
       

      What are the actions that would cause a work order to appear on the “Kits to Close” report?

      The action that causes a work order to appear on the Kits to Close report is when the Work order is closed. (In the Shop floor tracking module, the units are transferred to the Finished Goods work center). There is no longer a balance due on the order but the work order has not yet had the kit closed.

      There are two aspects of closing a work order activity – 1, closing the work order; and 2, closing the kit.

      The work order closes when all of the scheduled parts are either in finished goods or scrap. This happens automatically when the last transfer is made in the shop floor tracking module.

      The kit closing is a manual function. It is separate, because even though the work order may be closed, somebody may not have completed kitting all the parts to the work order, nor moved all of the over-issue out of the work order. These actions are prompted for when the kit is closed. The user may close the kit without addressing the open issues, but if that happens, each will become a variance within accounting. Unfilled shortages will become a positive variance and overissued parts will become a negative variance. 

      It is good practice to have someone in accounting and/or inventory review the Kit to Close report and clear them out. 
       
      1.3.4.1.4.8. Re-Open Kit
      Re-open kit - If the user wishes, he/she may re-open the kit once it has been closed.   Note: User MUST have full rights to the Kitting and Shortage Mgmt module within  Production Security along with full right the the ALL Release to GL and ALL Posting to GL modules within Acct Security
       
       
       
      If a closed kit contains parts with multiple Lot Code pick records against it and then later is re-opened the Kit Pick Lot Qty should still match the inventory Lot Qty when re-opened.  If a closed kit contains overissued qty's the user can select to return the overissued qty to stock.
       
      When re-opening of a Rework Kit it should only pull forward items from the original kit for Rework, not all the items from the BOM.    

       

      1.3.4.1.5. Reports - Kitting & Shortage
      To obtain the Kit reports, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen. 



      The following screen will appear:
       
      Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

      Highlight the desired report and then depress the Option tab if applicable. 

       
       

      Kit Material Availability W/AVL Detail report

      Select the appropriate radio on the right hand side of the screen: Customer, Product, Work Order or Simulation.  Select the Customer from the drop down list. Select the Work Order from the drop down list.   Check the Ignore Scrap check box to exclude Scrap % and/or Setup Scrap  from the report. If these boxes are unchecked the report will include the Scrap % and Setup Scrap quantitys if they exist within inventory (regardless of the BOM setup).

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The following report will be displayed: 
       
       

      For simulation, select the Product Number from the drop down list. Select the quantity to simulate. Enter OK and the following report will print.



      Kit Pick List Work Sheet report

      Select the appropriate radio on the right hand side of the screen: Customer, Product, or Work Order. Select the Work Center and depress the > button.  If you want all work centers, depress the >> button. Select the Work Order by highlighting and depress the > button. If you want all of the Work Orders, depress the >> button.  Check the Ignore Scrap check box to exclude Scrap % and/or Setup Scrap  from the report. If these boxes are unchecked the report will include the Scrap % and Setup Scrap quantitys if they exist within inventory (regardless of the BOM setup).  Check or uncheck the radio's  "Suppress Locations with 0 qty" and/or "Suppress Not Used in Kit Items" for the report to display these items or not.  These radios can be setup to default in checked or unchecked within the Inventory Part Class and Type Setup

      This report displays the requirements (from the original BOM) for the selected work order.  This report will NOT display any added Line Item Shortages.  The added line item shortages can be viewed on the Work Order Shortage report.  

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The following report will be displayed:



      Part Labels or Part Labels with Ref Designators

      Highlighting the Part Labels or Part Labels with Ref Designators brings up a selection of printers to be used. Highlight the printer and depress the option tab.

       

      The following screen will appear:

      Select the appropriate radio on the right hand side of the screen: Customer, Product, or Work Order. Select the Customer from the drop down list. Select the Work Order from the drop down list. Depress go and the items that require labels for that work order number will appear in the bottom section of the screen.

      Type in the qty of labels required and depress OK.

       

      The labels printed will appear like this:

       

      Box Labels

      Highlighting the Box Labels brings up a selection of printers to be used. Highlight the printer and depress the option tab.

       

      The following screen will appear:

      Select the appropriate radio on the right hand side of the screen: Customer, Product, or Work Order. Select the Customer from the drop down list. Select the Work Order from the drop down list. Depress go and the items that require labels for that work order number will appear in the bottom section of the screen.

      Depress go and the items that require labels for that work order number will appear in the bottom section of the screen

      Type in the qty of labels required and depress OK.

       
       

       The labels printed will appear like this  

      Kit Traveler by WC report

      Select the appropriate radio on the right hand side of the screen: Customer, Product, or Work Order. Select the Customer from the drop down list. Select the Work Order from the drop down list. Depress the OK button.

       

      The following report will be displayed:

       



      Over Issued Material report

      Select Inventory type: Internal or Consign.

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The following report will be displayed:

      Work Order Kit & Shortage Issued Material History

      Select the appropriate radio on the right hand side of the screen: Customer, Product, or Work Order. Select the Customer from the drop down list. Work Order from the drop down list. Depress the OK button.
       
      This report will also give you Lot Code and Serial Number History for parts used on Work Orders. 
       
      The leading zero's for serial numbers will be removed from report.
       

      The following report will be displayed:

      Customer Consigned Shortage Summary report

      Highlighting Customer Consigned Shortage Summary report brings up a detail screen:

      Highlight By Work Order or By Part No. Depress the option tab.

       

      The following screen will appear:

      Select the Customers by highlighting and depress the > button. If you want all customers depress the >> button.

      Depress the OK button. 

       

       

       

       

      The following report will be displayed:

      Purchased Part Shortage Summary report -

      NOTEThe kit has to be in process in order for the parts to show as a shortage on the Report

      Highlighting Purchased Part Shortage Summary report brings up a detail screen:

      Highlight By Part No. or By Work Order Due Date
       
      Depress the OK button. 
       
      NOTEThis report will ONLY display the actual scheduled qty’s on the PO NOT the ordered qty on the PO.  It will also, ONLY display the next due PO info. it will not display all the Open POs.  (View the PO Detail Report to get the detail PO info)

       

       

      The following report will be displayed:

      Work Order Shortage report or Work Order Detail Shortage report
       
      NOTEThe kit has to be in process in order for the parts to show as a shortage on the Report

      Select the appropriate radio on the right hand side of the screen: Customer, Product, or Work Order. Select the Customer from the drop down list. Select the Work Order from the drop down list.

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The following report will be displayed:

      Buildable report or Buildable Report with Top Three Shortages

      Select the Customers by highlighting and depress the > button. If you want customers depress the >> button.

      Depress the OK button.

      NOTE:  Buildable column will display KNS (Kit not started), or KIP (Kit in Process) until the Kit Complete checkbox is checked in the Kitting module.  At this time the Work Order will be listed on the Buildable reports, and the buildable qty will properly display the correct qty based on any shortages.   The Work Order Released box MUST be checked for this report to work properly.

      The Buildable reports are intended  to be used during the Scheduling meeting for Production scheduling only.  

       

      The following report will be displayed:

      Kits to be Closed

      For the Kits to close selection, mark the radial for the desired Sort by: Last Complete Date; Work Order; Product Number; Customer:

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The Estimated Manufacturing Variance being displayed on this report is  calculated by taking the sum of the components (including all overissues (including line shortages)) issued to the work order at their standard cost at the time of the kit close and comparing it to the costed BOM at the time of the kit closing.    Note:  The user will still have the option to disposition the shortages and overages at the time the kit is closed.  
       
       

      The Kitted BOM Cost calculations is based off the WO Due date and compares that to the EFF/OB dates on the BOM.  So users need to be very careful with the WO Due Dates and make sure that they stay current along with the EFF/OB dates on the BOM.   


      The following report will be displayed:

      Purchase Part Shortages by Work Order report
       
      NOTEThe kit has to be in process in order for the parts to show as a shortage on the Report

      Select the appropriate radio on the right hand side of the screen: Customer, Product, or Work Order. Select the Customer from the drop down list. Select the Work Order from the drop down list.

      Depress the OK button.
       
      This report will display all the Open POs (displayed in Yellow box below) for the parts with shortages per Work Order, displays all shortages including Consigned and Make parts along with the Purchase parts and On-Hand Quantity.  The "Not Available" qty displays what the on-hand qty will be once all open PO's are received, and Kit Shortages fulfilled.   
       

      The following report will be displayed:   The "Shortage"   will be the total from Kit Shortages, etc;  the "OH Balance"   will be Available Inventory, and the "Not Available"  displays what the Balance or on-hand qty will be once the Purchase Order has been received, and Kit Shortages fulfilled.  (Multiple of 200 minus shortage of 100 and OH balance of 25 equals a balance of 125).  The report is assuming a head of time that the users will order the minimum/multiple buy qty's setup in the MRP info setup on that part.        
       

      As Built Kit History form

      Select the appropriate radio on the right hand side of the screen: Customer, Product, or Work Order. Select the Customer from the drop down list. Select the Work Order from the drop down list.

      Depress the OK button.

       

       

      The following report will be displayed:

      1.3.4.1.6. FAQs - Kitting & Shortage
      Facts and Questions for the Kitting & Shortage Module
      1.3.4.2. WO Kitting Schedule
      Enter the Inventory Mgmt/Kitting, Allocating & Shortage Management/WO Kitting Schedule
       
      Note:  After activation, "Kitting & Shortage Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
       

      The WO Kitting Schedule
      displays the Required Date, the Work Order Number, the Assembly Part Number and Revision, Assembly Description, the Quantity to be kitted, the number of components in each kit, and the number of days late. 
       

      Selectr the appropriate radial to display "ALL"  open un-kitted WO's, "BOM's only", or "Released WO" records only. The user may sort by Required Date, Work Order Number, Part Number or Kit Quantity by depressing the appropriate button.

      WO Kitting Schedule field definitions

      Required Date This date is based on the Due Date, along with the Kitting and Production Lead Times setup in Inventory Control  Management Module
      Work Order Number

      The number assigned to the Work Order (job).

      Part Number The number assigned to the completed assembly.
      Rev

      The number of the revision assigned to the completed assembly.

      Description The description of the completed assembly
      Kit Quantity The quantity to be kitted
      Days Late

      The number of scheduled workdays between the due date and today’s date.

      NO of BOM item This is the number of items on a BOM for a particular WO.  The count is based off of the top level assembly only and DOES include Obsolete and Active parts.     Note:  This does include Phantom and Phantom/Make components but does not include the parts on the Phantom BOM's.   

      1.3.4.3. WO Shortage Summary List

       

      Enter Inventory Mgmt/Kitting, Allocating & Shortage Management/Work Order Shortage Summary List 
       
      Note:   After activation, "Kitting & Shortage Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access. 

      This screen provides complete visibility of component shortages by Work Order, Work Center, and Part Number.  Users can also check the current status of on hand inventory and open orders for a selected part.

       

      The following screen will appear:

       

      The Work Order Shortage Tab

      The first screen displayed is the Work Order Shortage Tab. This tab displays open Work Orders which have at least some components pulled and these pulled components are in Work In Process. The user may sort by Work Order Number, Part Number or Due Date by depressing the appropriate button.

      Work Order Shortage field definitions

       Work Order Number  The number assigned to the Work Order (job).
       Part Number  The number assigned to the completed assembly.
       Rev  The number/letter of the revision assigned to the completed assembly.
       Description  The description of the completed assembly.
       Due Date  The Date the Work Order is to be completed.
      Work Order Quantity  The quantity of the product to be assembled for that Work Order.
      Completed Quantity  The quantity of that product already assembled.
      WIP Quantity  The quantity of that product where at least some of the components are in Work In Process.

      To view the shortage, highlight one of the Work Orders and depress the Shortage button (at the bottom of the screen). The following additional information will display:  

      Shortage Button field definitions

       Misc An “M” in the field means that a miscellaneous shortage was added to the Kit.
       WC ID The Work Center 4 digit identification
       Part Number Component Part Number
       Rev Component Revision, if applicable
       Unit The Unit of Measure
       Short Qty The Quantity Short 
       # Unit The number of units that the short quantity represents
       Part Source Buy, Make, etc.

      Work Center Shortage Tab

      Selecting the Work Center Shortage tab will bring up the following screen:

       



      Pressing on the Work Center field down arrow will display the component shortage by Work Center.

      Press on the down arrow in the Work Center box. The following list of Work Centers will display:

      Select the appropriate Work Center. Once that is selected, the user may sort by Work Order Number or Part Number by depressing on the appropriate button.

       

      Work Center Shortage field definitions

       M If this column is marked with the letter “M”, this represents a Miscellaneous Shortage
       Work Order Number The number assigned to the Work Order (job).
       Part Number The number assigned to the component part.
       Rev The number of the revision assigned to the part.
       Class The classification for that part
       Type The type of part.
       Description The description of the part.
       Short The number of units still needed for the Work Order

        Highlight the part number of interest. Depress the Open PO button

      The following list becomes available.

      The user may sort by PO Date, Supplier name, PO Number or name of manufacturer by depressing the appropriate button.

       

      Highlight the Part Number of interest. Depress the Inventory Status button

      Information regarding the highlighted part number will display, showing current Warehouse, Location, quantity On Hand, quantity Allocated, quantity Available, Manufacturer name and Manufacturer Part Number.  

      Part Number Shortage Tab

      Selecting the Part Number Shortage tab will bring up the following screen:



      This is a list of component part numbers where shortages exist.

      Part Number Shortage field definitions

      Top of Screen

      Part Number The number assigned to the component part.
      Rev The number of the revision assigned to the part
      Class The classification for that part
      Type The type of part.
      Description The description of the part.

      Bottom of Screen (for the part number highlighted)

       Work Order Number  The number assigned to the Work Order (job)
       Work Center  The name of the Work Center where the shortage exists.
       /Unit  The unit of measure for the part number highlighted.
       Short Qty  The number of units still needed for the Work Order.
       # Unit  The /Unit multiplied by the Short Qty.

         Highlight the part number of interest. Depress the Open PO button

      The following list becomes available.

      The user may sort by PO Date, Supplier name, PO Number or name of manufacturer by depressing the appropriate button.

       

      Highlight the Part Number of interest. Depress the Inventory Status button

      Information regarding the highlighted part number will display, showing current Warehouse, Location, quantity On Hand, quantity Allocated, quantity Available, Manufacturer name and Manufacturer Part Number.  

      Work Order Shortage Summary List Reports 

      Open the tab for which you want the report. Depress the Reports button. Send the report to the appropriate printer. A printed copy of the screen you’ve selected will be available.

      1.3.4.4. Inventory Allocation
      1.3.4.4.1. Prerequisites for Inventory Allocation
      Prerequisites Required for Entering a New Work Order Allocation:

      After activation, "Kitting & Shortage Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

      A Work Order must exist and  be released.

      The Item to be allocated must be on the products BOM.


      The quantity to allocate must be available in stock (not already allocated).


      The manufacturer allocated must be approved on the product BOM.


      1.3.4.4.2. Introduction for Inventory Allocation

      Inventory Allocation is used to allocate (reserve) quantities of existing items in stock or future Purchase Order deliveries to a Work Order or Project. This allocation prevents issuing the quantity reserved to any other use except the Work Order or Project specified. The allocation of existing inventory may be removed by un-allocation. Purchase Order Line Item allocations may be removed prior to receipt of the parts by editing the Purchase Order. After receipt of parts allocated by Purchase Order, the allocation may only be removed after the parts are in stock.

      The Inventory Allocation module is designed to Add or Change an allocation of a particular part for a specific work order or Project. In essence, this feature will “reserve” the quantity specified for a particular Work Order or Project.

      The user may find an existing allocation or add a new one. Also, the user may delete an existing allocation, thus freeing the quantity up for other Work Orders or Projects.

      User cannot allocate from WO-WIP locations.  If we were to allow you to allocate parts from WO-WIP to a different work order, you would be unable to close the original work order.  If you want to allocate parts that are in WO-WIP, you will need to return the parts to the store room, then allocate. 

      1.3.4.4.3. Fields & Definitions for Inventory Allocation
      1.3.4.4.3.1. Allocation Tab

       

      Customer Name This is the Name of the Customer. 
      Project Description The description for the project.

       Project  Project name or number.
       Work Order This is the number assigned to the Work Order for the assembly of the product.
       Sales Order

      This is the number assigned to the Sales Order.

       Part Number

      The number the user has assigned to the part or product.

       Rev The revision number pertaining to the part number
       Allocated Qty allocated to the WO or project listed.
       Class The classification to which the part number belongs.
       Type The type within the classification to which the part number belongs.
      Description  The description of the part number.

      Inventory Locations  -  User has the ability to sort by Mfgr, Warehouse, Serial #, or Lot Code.  Click on the blue header and the header color will change to Red and sort by that column.

      Mfgr The manufacturer for the part.
      Mfgr Part No

      The commercial part number.

      Warehouse

      The warehouse to which the purchase will be assigned when received.

      Location

      The location in the warehouse to which the purchase will be assigned when received.

      Alloc Qty Qty allocated to the WO or project listed.
      Serial #  Serial numbers allocated to the project or WO listed.
      Lot Code  Lot code allocated to the project or WO listed.
      Reference  Lot code reference name or number.
      Exp Date  Expiration date for the Lot Code.
      PO Number The Purchase Order number of the order.

      1.3.4.4.3.2. Allocation Maintenance

       

      Fields & Definitions 

      Header Fields and Defintions

      Project No The project number the parts are being allocated to                                                                                                                                      
      Customer The Customer the parts are being allocated to
      Project Description The project description the parts are being allocated to
       
       

      Part Number
      The number the user has assigned to the part or product.
      Rev
      The revision number pertaining to the part number
      Source
      Make or Buy part 
      Class
      The classification to which the part number belongs.
      Type
      The type within the classification to which the part number belongs.
      Description
      The description of the part number.
      Qty Req
      Qty needed for WO or Project

      Depress this button to allocate a part to the project listed in the header
      Depress this button to de-allocate a part from this project
      This button will only be visable under the Project Allocation.  When the screen is displayed and no parts have been allocated yet, the "Allocate All" button will be displayed.  Upon depressing this button all records will be automatically allocated to the project.  Then the button will change to "DeAllocate All" and if depressed all records would then be de-allocated from the project. 


       



      Mfgr
      The manufacturer for the part. 
      MPN
      The commercial part number.
      Warehouse
      The warehouse to which the purchase will be assigned when received.
      Location
      The location in the warehouse to which the purchase will be assigned when received. 
      Avail Qty
      Available quantity in inventory
      Avail Qty Now
      Available quantity in inventory after allocation
      Alloc Qty
      Qty allocated to the WO or project listed.  See Article #1240 for more detail on why the system will not allow user to enter in a fraction of a number, and an alternative.
      Serial #
      Serial numbers allocated to the project or WO listed.
      Lot Code
      Lot code allocated to the project or WO listed.
      Exp Date
      Expiration date for the Lot Code. 
      Reference
      Lot code reference name or number.
      PO #
      The Purchase Order number of the order.


       
      1.3.4.4.4. How To ..... for Inventory Allocation
      1.3.4.4.4.1. Find an Inventory Allocation

      To access this module, select Inventory Mgmt/Kitting, Allocating & Shortage Management/Inventory Allocation

       

       

      The main screen will appear:

      Find an Inventory Allocation

      Depress the Find button . The following selection will be presented:

      If you now the specific part number or range of numbers you are interested in, enter it into the Part number Range fields.

      You also have the option to find allocations based on Projects, Work orders, Sales Order or Customer Name
       

      For the selections entered into the find criteria screen, the allocations will display in the bottom of the screen for the highlight part number.
       

      1.3.4.4.4.2. Add a New Inventory Allocation

      Enter Inventory Mgmt/Kitting, Allocating & Shortage Management/Inventory Allocation Module   

      The following screen will appear:

      Depress the Allocation Maintenance tab

      Depress the Add record action button and type in your password will bring up the following selection.

      Depress the “Work Order Allocation” button.

       

      The following prompt will appear.

      If you select “YES” then all available inventory will be allocated automatically to the selected work order. Edit any quantities allocated by selecting the Part Number (highlighted) in the upper screen table and changing the Alloc Qty for the desired manufacturer in the lower part of the screen.  Save after all allocation editing has been completed.

      If you select “NO” then the system will list out all part used within the Work order (per BOM) and require the users to go through and manually allocate inventory to each desired part.  

       

      The following Work Order selection screen will then become available. Select the desired work order by Typing in the Work Order Number or highlight the Work Order and double click.

       

      Particulars regarding that Work Order will populate the screen as displayed below:

      1. Highlight the desired part number you want to allocate. Inventory AVL information for that particular part will populate the lower portion of the screen.
      2. Type in the amount you want to allocate in the Alloc Qty column.
      3. Depress the Save record action button. The screen will update as follows:  



      Note that the Avail Qty column has updated to reflect the amount allocated. 
      The Inventory Master has also automatically updated, and will now display the amount allocated (“reserved”).
       
       
      1.3.4.4.4.3. Change the Allocation Quantity

      To Change the allocation qty, thus freeing up the amount allocated to a Work Order or Project, first go to the Allocation Maintenance screen.

      Depress the Edit Record button.

      The following find record options will be displayed

       

      If you had selected to find per Work Order or Project the following screen will appear which lists all open WO numbers or project numbers with allocations.

      Type the WO or project number in the red box or double click on the number and the screen below will appear with the allocation information listed. 

       

      The following screen will appear, and the user will be allowed to modify the Alloc Qty. 

      Highlight the desired part number and modify the Alloc Qty. 

      Depress the Save record action button.  The program will unallocate all original qty and allocate the new quantity again.  This will create two records in the Inventory Transaction report

      1.3.4.4.4.4. Un-Allocate an Allocation

      To Un-allocate an allocation, thus freeing up the amount allocated to a Work Order or Project, first go to the Allocation Maintenance screen.

      Depress the Edit Record button.

      The following find record options will be displayed

       

      If you had selected to find per Work Order or Project the following screen will appear which lists all open WO numbers or project numbers with allocations.

      Type the WO or project number in the red box or double click on the number and the screen below will appear with the allocation information listed. 

       

      Depress the Delete button. 

      Enter your password and the following prompt will appear which is defaulted to "No"

      “No” will allow you to select which ones to un-allocate individually

      Yes” will un-allocate all items on screen automatically

       

      Highlight the desired part number and then Check mark which items you wish to un-allocate.

      Depress the Save record action button and any marked item should now be unallocated and be considered available inventory.
       

      If you had selected to find by Part Number the following screen will appear which lists all Part Numbers with allocations.

      Type the Part number in the red box or double click on the number and the screen below will appear with the allocation information listed. 

       

      Depress the Delete button.

      Enter your password and the following prompt will appear

      YES” will un-allocate all items on screen automatically

      “No” will allow you to select which ones to un-allocate individually

       

      Highlight the desired part number and then Check mark which items you wish to un-allocate.

       

      Depress the Save record action button and any marked item should now be unallocated and be considered available inventory.

       

      The Inventory Control Item Master will update automatically. Note: For reports on Allocated Inventory, please refer to the ICM reports

       

      1.3.5. Inventory Control Management (ICM)
      1.3.5.1. Inventory Control Management (ICM)
      1.3.5.1.1. Prerequisties for ICM Mgmt

      After activation, "Inventory Control" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

      Before entering products and parts in the Item Master, the following product, part and system classifications and item parameters must be setup in ManEx using the System Setup Material Module.  Note:  that although data entry is possible with only the Prerequisites below, using the Data Entry Defaults explained in the next section is strongly advised to save time and maintain consistency.

      Product and Part Class

      All items must be assigned a Class code (Finished Goods, Subassembly, Resistor, Capacitor, Raw PCB, etc.) in order for ManEx to number, connect, sort and organize the items. Class codes are User-defined but chosen carefully.

      Product and Part Type

      Each Class is further grouped into Types (Surface Mount, Thru-Hole, Precision, Programmed, etc.) to standardize description fields and allow use of default values. This speeds up data entry and eliminates redundant data and duplicate records.

      Units of Measure

      Several standard Units of Measure (U/M) are already setup in ManEx.Additional purchase or stocking U/M’s must be added in System Setup.  Also, if the Purchase and Stocking U/M are different (eg. Wire purchased in FT, issued in IN.), a Conversion Formula must be entered in System Setup Unit of Measure & Conversion.

      Numbering System

      The User must select Automatic or Manually Numbering in System Setup Number System Module. For Auto-numbering, the Beginning Number must be entered. A customer-selected prefix can be entered in System Setup Number System to be added to each Manual or Auto-Numbered part no.

      Warehouse Assignments

      A System Setup (Warehouse Setup)  to assign names and General Ledger Numbers (for ManEx Accounting) to the hard-coded MAIN1, WIP, WO-WIP and MRB Warehouses is required. Additional FGI and/or In-Store Warehouses can be added if assignment as stocking locations during Item Master data entry is desired. 

      Optional Data Entry Default fields are not required for Item Master entries, but are highly recommended to ensure consistency and save time during data entry.They are shown below.

      Data Entry Defaults

      Item Master Data Entry Defaults are selections that remain the same for most of the items for a particular Class and Type. These Defaults are entered in System Setup Inventory Part Class and will be automatically filled in by ManEx once the Item Class and Type have been selected during data entry of a new Item.  Defaults can be over-ridden during data entry.

      For instance, if the User wished to make the Default entry for Item Package to be REEL for all Items with the Class RES-SMT and the Type 0402, the User should select REEL in the Package field of the System Setup when entering Type “0402" as shown in the example.

       



      The same procedure would be used to set up Defaults for all of the fields for each Item Master Class and Type as shown.  The information entered in each of the Default fields will be automatically entered in the corresponding field during data entry of a new Item after selecting the Class and Type.

      Defaults should be setup to apply in most cases. If the default in a particular field is not appropriate for a new Item being entered, the User may make another choice on a one-time basis or if the default has changed. Use System Setup Inventory Part Class to change the default.  If too many over-rides are necessary for a particular Type, it may be too general. Consider splitting it into two Types, each with its own set of Defaults. Changed defaults only affect future data entry, not items already entered.  Each existing item must be reassigned to a new Type before the old Type can be deleted from setup.

      1.3.5.1.2. Introduction for ICM Mgmt

      Information entered and maintained in the Inventory Control Management Module is used in nearly ALL of the ManEx Modules.  Product, assembly and part information that is necessary to plan, purchase, receive, inspect, stock, issue, kit and cost all items can be found and should be maintained in this location.   In particular this information includes:

      • Item Master Part and Product Descriptions, Classifications and Revisions
      • Purchasing Parameters, Buyer Assignments, Lead Times and Units of Measure
      • Inspection, Certification and Specification Data and Notes
      • Warehouse Assignments, Inventory and Stocking Locations and Quantities on Hand
      • Material Requirements Planning Variables, Re-order Policy and Re-stocking Method
      • Internal and Customer Approved Vendor List with Manufacturer Part Numbers
      • Our system operates on a "Standard Cost Basis" (for further information see Article #3386 ) and Purchase Price Weighted Averages for Parts and Assemblies
      • ABC Classification for Cycle Counts, Buyer Assignment and Inventory Stratification
      • Supplier Name and Supplier Part Number
      • Manufacturing Specifications with either a .bmp or a .pdf file
      1.3.5.1.3. Fields & Definitions for ICM Mgmt
      1.3.5.1.3.1. Summary Tab
      The Summary Tab (screen) displays the results of an Inventory Find operation and is the starting point for further sorts, searches and selections based on Part Number, Part Class or a word or string of characters in the Description field. To view detailed information on a particular item, highlight the item and click on the appropriate Tab. An example Summary screen for all Internal Inventory is shown below

      Note:  To display changes made in other windows or by other Users while this window is open, you must repeat the Inventory Find and refresh the screen data.



      If a particular item does not appear on the Summary Screen, it may have been excluded by an Inventory Find that was too specific. Click on the Find a record and broaden the search criteria to display more records. Clicking OK with “Internal Inventory” and both “All Records” boxes checked will display ALL Internal items. Display all Consigned or In-Store records for a selected Customer or Supplier the same way.

      Sorting, Searching and Selecting in the Inventory Summary Screen

      • To sort the contents of the Summary screen by Part Number, Part Class or Description, click the button at the top of the column.
      • It will turn red and the list will automatically sort in ascending alphanumeric sequence per the selection.
      • To search for an item by Part Class, click Class and enter the first few characters of the Part Class in the Search by Part Class field.
      • The list will scroll down to the first incidence of each character in the sequence entered. If a character is not found in the position typed, the list will scroll to the bottom.
      • To Search for an item by Description starting with the 1st character on the left, click Description and begin entering the first characters in the field. The list will scroll down to the first incidence of each character in the sequence entered. If a character is not found in the position typed, the list will scroll to the bottom.
      • To Search for an item by a word or character string anywhere in the Description, click on Description, click on the Left button next to the Search by Description window (changes to “Random”).
      • Enter the search word or characters in the window. Hit return and the first match in the list will be highlighted. Click on the window and hit return to highlight the next match in the summary list.  After the last match or if a match is not found, the last item in the summary list will be highlighted.
      • To visually search the summary list, use the scroll bar or arrows to the right of the list. The Source (Buy, Make, Consigned or In-Store) and total On Hand quantity is displayed in the last two columns.

      For further Details on any item in the summary list, highlight the item by a search or mouse click and select the appropriate Tab to display the desired detail information.

      To display changes made in other windows or by other Users while this window is open, you must repeat the Inventory Find and refresh the screen data.
       
       

       

        This button will take the user to a screen, where they can make a selection by what ever criteria needed by choosing (internal part number, mfgr part number, customer part number, supplier part number, or description) to search.  

       

      The following screen will appear: 

       

      The user can enter partial string and search is not case sensitive.  After system finds parts in response to the search (inactive parts will be highlighted in Purple),  the user can make a selection by checking on one of the check boxes located at the left.  If system was unable to find the exact match, a message will appear up in the right hand corner (in red) to let the user know that the part did not exist in the item master but the following are similar parts found. 

      The user can choose to Select Without Exit; Select & Exit; or Exit Without Selection. 

       

      1.3.5.1.3.2. Item Master Tab
      The following fields may be viewed in the Item Master screen. This screen is the starting point when the Add a New Inventory Record Action button is clicked or an existing record is highlighted within the summary screen.   Clicking the Edit action button allows editing of existing Fields that are not grayed out.  The ICM module will display "Internal" in the screen Header/Title bar, if internal inventory is open, and display the Customer name in the Screen Header/Title Bar if you have consigned inventory open.  This will allow users that have multiple inventory screens open at the same time to seen at first glance which screen contains what type of inventory data.  


       
      See Article #4765 for further detail on how to Use the X-Reference Find

       

      Item Master Tab Field Definitions

      Part Source
      This field is hard coded in the system. Select BUY for purchased parts and assemblies, MAKE for an item made in-house (assemblies and sub-assemblies) and PHANTOM which is a list of parts that is common to several subassemblies. 
       
      A good example of where a Phantom can be used is a video card with different memory options.  On all the variations of the memory card, there are a lot of parts which are common, including the circuit board.  If we assume the only thing unique to each assembly is the amount or type of memory component and a couple of resistors, then the parts common to all the assemblies can be listed as a PHANTOM assembly.  The PHANTOM part number is then listed as a component under each of the top-level assemblies.  The BOM of the Phantom is exploded in the kitting module as if they were part of the BOM (hence the word Phantom) and pulled with the top level assembly.  It becomes easy to maintain these BOMs since one change in the Phantom will ripple through all the video card variations. 
      Phantom/Make If the Part Source is a MAKE and this box is checked, the system will treat the part as a Phantom when the sub-assembly components are called up during the Kitting process BUT as a Make part for a stand alone assembly when the part is NOT a sub-assembly.

       

      You can assign the status of "Make/Phantom" to a sub assembly.   In this condition, it will cause the components to be added to a kit for the top assembly as if it was a Phantom BOM. On the other hand, you can also create work orders and demands for the sub assembly itself.  The difference between this Make/Phantom and a straight Phantom is that you cannot build the straight Phantom.

       

      Phantoms We suggest that the user utilizes this feature, especially if the subgroup of parts are going to be used in more than one top assembly.   If the subgroup has a modification to its BOM, the user does not have to go to each top level and change all of them.  By simply changing the BOM in the Phantom assembly  (or Make/Phantom), the kitting for all top assemblies including this subassembly will be changed to the new configuration.   If you did not use the Phantom, and copied the parts into numerous top assemblies, you will have to make a change to every one of them if the subgroup of parts was modified.
      Make/Buy

      Make/Buy is setup to allow users to have a part in the system that they wished to BUY but also keep documentation within the system (BOM).  If the Part Source is a MAKE and this box is checked, the assembly MUST be purchased from an outside sourceIf a Part is marked as Make/Buy within Inventory the MRP will only give PO Actions and that product will NOT be available for selection within the Work Order Management module, (due to MRP calculating incorrect demand and showing incorrect message with safety stock).  If the part souce on a product is originally setup as a MAKE the user WILL be allowed to edit the record and change the part souce to Make/Buy.  For further details see Article #3289 .

      Part Class

      This is a general part, product or item classification that must be selected from the drop-down box.  If an appropriate choice is not available when entering a new item, you may add a new part class in Inventory Part Class, (examples of Part Classes are BATTERY, DIODE, FUSE, FILTER, IC-SMT, CAP-SMT, RES-TH, etc.)

      Part Type
      Type is a sub-classification of Part Class. If an appropriate choice is not available when entering a new item, you may add a new part type in Inventory Part Class (examples of Part Types for the Class IC-SMT would be 0603-5%, 0805-10%, 0805-5%, 1206-5%, 1210-5%, etc.)
       
      NOTE:  A user does have the option of leaving the Part Type blank, however if this option is selected the prefix for the part number will be omitted.  There is no reason to enforce part type if a user doesn’t want to have that kind of detailed classification.  If the user decides to leave the Part Type blank they will receive a message and at  this point they have the option to continue or go back and pick a Part Type.
      Description

      There are 45 characters available to put descriptive data about the item being entered that is not already in Part Class and Part Type. For instance, in the previous figure the Part Class and Type already show that it is a RESN-SMT 2512 so this information need not be repeated in the Description.  We suggest when entering the description, that you be consistent with your capitalization and punctuation.  Some of the screens and reports can be sorted by description so the more consistent you are the easier it will be to use the system in the future.

      Material Type

      This field is an Item fields which is repeat at the top of all Tabs to display the selected Item.  

      If the Inventory Material Type is set to "Auto" (within the Material Type Setup), everytime the user modifies the AVL material type, the program will update the Inventory Material Type automatically. 

      >> If any of the AVL material type for the item is 'Unk' - the item level type will be 'Unk'
      >> If any the material type is the same for all of the AVL's of the same item, the material type for the item will be the same as material type of the AVL's without a suffix.  For example:  if AVL types is anyof the 'LF-P/N', 'LF-Date', 'LF-Mark', the material type for the item will be 'LF'.  If AVL's material type is 'ROHS-P/N', 'ROHS-Date', 'ROHS-Mark', the item's material type will be 'ROHS'
      >> If any of the material type of the AVL's for the same item are different and none of them is 'Unk' then the type of the item will be 'LF'

      Any changes to the AVL material type that drives the item material type to a lower level will display a warning.

      If the control is set to "Manual", then the user will be able to modify the Inventory Material Type from the Material Type pulldown.  Keep in mind that the program will NOT validate if the material type in Inventory and AVL levels are in sync.
       

      The AVL Material Type is carried forward for the consign part when the consign part is first added to the system or when new AVL was added to the internal part and the user elects to add this AVL to the existing consign parts.  If the user later changes the Material Type on the internal part, the change is NOT carried over to the consigned part. 
       
      Changed This field will display the date of the last change to the material type.  
      Initials This field will display the initials of the user that made the last change to the material type.
      Serialize

      This box will be available only if the option to use Serial Number Tracking in Shop Floor Tracking Defaults is set up.

      The system allows this box to be check for a MAKE or BUY part. If this box is checked for a BUY part, all components are being tracked by a serial number that was assigned to the part at time of receipt. If this box is checked for a MAKE part, the FG assemblies will be tracked by the serial number through complete process. Note:  Once a serial number for a MAKE part is created, we don't allow user to turn off the serialized checkbox anymore, even if there is no qty on hand and all accounting records are cleared.  This is so no history of Shop Floor tracking, shipping, RMA’s, etc. . . . for the Make Parts are lost. 

      If a user changes a non-serialized part to a Serialize part the system will check.  * If the part has allocated qty, (user has to un-allocate parts before the system will allow user to check the "Serialize" box).  *If  the part has any OPEN kit (kit in process), (user has to de-kit or close kit before system will allow user to check the "Serialize"  box)  *If the parts is a BUY part and has un-reconciled PO (user has to reconcile all receipts before system will allow user to check the "Serialize" box).

      After all these criterias are passed, if the part has quantity on hand, the user has to enter the serial numbers to match the quantity on hand.
       
      Note: Users have to have special access in order to modify this checkbox, this access is assigned through Security/User Rights. 
      Status All items must be Active in order to buy, receive, issue, invoice or ship. Use Inactive Status to remove items from use that have already had transactions against the Part Number.  Use Delete button to delete Items with no transactions.  Changing status from Active to Inactive (for a Make Inventory part) will NOT change BOM status. User will have to change BOM status seperately.  Changing from Inactive to Active status can be used to release items from Engineering.  Note:   If WIP (Work-in-Process) exists for a part the system will not allow the part status to be changed.  This will prevent any possiblity's of qty on hand being returned to an inactive part if the users would happen to dekit.   
      Part Number

      Item/Part number is a unique identifier for every Item Master record entered in the database.  Part numbers can be setup to be manual numbered, or auto assigned to all items except MAKE assemblies, or all items including MAKE assemblies (within the Number System setup module). The standard part number is a 3-digit dash seven digit format where the three-digit prefix is used to define the part class, part type setup in the Inventory Part Class setup module to work with auto or manual numbered parts and assemblies. A manually assigned part number can be 25 characters.  Alphanumeric part numbers are permitted.  The revision field is 4 characters, also alphanumeric. ManEx uses separate assembly and revision fields making it easier to group all revisions of the same assembly and verify that the correct version is selected for production

       ABC
      Stock/BOM UOM
       

      This is the Unit Of Measure (Foot, Inch, Each, Gallon, Quart, etc.) that is used to specify how much of the Item displayed or being entered is issued from Stock or is used in a Bill of Material for an assembly.   ManEx tracks stocking units of measure within inventory, kitting, MRP, etc.   

      Purchase UOM
      This is the Unit Of Measure (Foot, Inch, Each, Gallon, Quart, etc.) that is used to specify how the Item displayed or being entered is purchased from a supplier.

      NOTE:  When creating a PO for an item with different purchasing and stocking UoMs, be sure to enter the MRP suggestion into the Stocking qty field rather than the purchasing qty field.  The system will automatically convert the stocking unit into the purchasing unit for the purchase order qty.

      For example if  the buyer is creating a PO for an item that is used by inches but sold by the foot, the user would enter the 24 inches into the stocking qty field and the PO would automatically convert it to 2 feet in the purchasing qty field.  So the supplier deals in feet, but ManEx deals in inches.  The conversion between the two are established in the Unit of Measure & Conversion  module. 

      Once the items have been accepted into inventory it is then converted over to Stock UOM and from that point forward everything within the system is using the Stock UOM.
       
      ManEx DOES NOT recommend changing either of the UOM's if the part has a qty on hand.  See Article #3414 for further detail.
      Package

      This field defines how the components are to be packaged (ie. Reel, Tray, 6-Pak, Ream, Individually, etc.) when it is delivered.  This defaults to what is setup in the Inventory Part Class setup.  User can edit this field to fit the component package as it is purchased for your organization. This will default to the PO Screen.  The buyer has the right to override the package definition in the item master or on the PO screen.  (ie. Reel, Tray, 6-Pak, Ream, Individually, etc.)

      Last Changed This captures the date,and time from the password of the individual making the changes to this screen and/or changes to the fields displayed on this screen from outside modules. Anytime an edit/save occurs this field is updated.   Note:  This field will NOT be adjusted from outside modules that change the costs, such as the Purchase Order module or the Cost Adjustment module those Last Changed dates will be displayed in the Last Changed fileds displayed next to the costs. 
      By

      This captures the initials from the password of the individual making the changes to this screen and/or changes to the fields displayed on this screen from outside modules.  Anytime an edit/save occurs this field is updated.   Note:  This field will NOT be adjusted from outside modules that change the costs, such as the Purchase Order module or the Cost Adjustment module

      Buyer

      This field is automatically filled in from the information entered in the Inventory Part Class setup module.  This field is used in the MRP lookup as a sort field to allow a buyer to find the parts they are exclusively responsible to purchase.  If a buyer leaves or is replaced, there is a global replacement of one buyer to another located in the System Utilities.exe/Change Parameters for the Part/Class

      Mgmt Lock

      This option is for Inventory parts that need to be protected, even from those users that have edit capabilities. Only Supervisors or users with Lock/Unlock rights within the Security/User rights can modify this checkbox.  If locked, all users can access the screen, but only supervisors or those with Lock/Unlock rights will have the capability to bypass the lock and make changes, while the Inventory part is still in lock mode. The reason we do NOT force the user to unlock the Inventory part before making any changes, is to protect it from anyone else making changes while the 'authorized" user is making their changes.

      Lock Date This displays the date and time the Approved user implemented the Mgmt lock.
      By

      This is the users initials that implemented the Mgmt lock.

      Configuration Charge

      This is NOT a part of the standard cost total.It is a specific cost used with the MANEX Order Configurator module and represents any additional cost over and above the standard cost total.

      Run Scrap %

      This amount is added to the exact quantity used on an assembly to provide an overage to cover losses during running due to predictable machine and human losses.

      Setup Scrap Qty

      Setup losses may be added to the BOM requirement and Run Scrap for an item.For instance, an auto-insertion machine may use extra parts for alignment checks.

        Depressing this button will give the users the ability to scan any related documents directly into the ManEx system and attached the document directly to the item in the ICM Module.  For further detail see Article #2396.  If this button is displayed in Red there is Related documents attached. 
      Inspection / Quality Spec

      Checking the box will cause the item to require inspection to whatever Quality Spec. shows in the Quality Spec box. The Quality Spec appearing in the box is entered in System Setup Inventory Part Class Setup. Any Part Type in a particular Part Class can have Inspection Required turned on or off.

      Certs Required/ Cert Type

      Checking this box will allow selection of Cert Type. Cert Type choices are Receive, Ship or Both.  A typical Cert would be UL or CSA Certification on wire. Check the box and then depress the down arrow for the types to display.  Select the desired type:  Receive - Requires user to check the "Certificate Required" box has been Done at Receiving.  Ship - Requires user to check the "Certificate Required" box on Packing List/SHipping.  Both - Requires user to check the "Certificate Required" box at both Receiving and Packing List/Shipping.  

      First Article Checking this box will alert the users that the item requires a first article check at receiving inspection
      NC NR

      Checking this box, means that once the part is ordered it can not be returned or the order can not be cancelled.

      MRC

      The Material Risk Codes listed in the pull down are entered in the System Setup Material Risk Code Setup. This is to inform the users which items are Low Risk or High Risk (can not be cancelled or returned).

      EAU The quantity displayed in this box is the estimated Annual quantity.  This is calculated from information entered into the ABC Types screen. 
      Last EAU Calculated The date shown in this box is the date the EAU was last calculated in the ABC Types screen.
      PPM (Parts per million)

      This is a data entry field and is not involved in any calculations or used anywhere within the system at this point.It is planned to be used in the future to calculate the component level of PPM and then update the assembly PPM within the routing module.

      Length

      Specific length allowed for part.

      Width

      Specific width allowed for part.

      Depth Specific depth allowed for part
      Weight

      Specific weight allowed for part.

      Material Cost  For BUY Parts:  This is the purchase price of the BUY part.  For MAKE Parts:  The sum of the STANDARD COSTS of BUY parts in the assembly.  Whether or not setup scrap is included is a system setup option.
      Labor Cost For BUY Parts:  If the user wishes to include any preparation labor costs associated with a BUY part, like crimping, tinning testing. etc., those costs may be included here.  For MAKE Parts:  The user may include the labor associated with building the assembly.
      Overhead Cost

      For BUY Parts:  Any additional costs associated with the labor, such as heating, lighting, etc., that the user may wish to include in the cost of the inventory value.  For MAKE Parts:  Any additional costs associated with the labor, such as vacations, sick leave, meeting times, etc., that the user may wish to include in the inventory value.

      Other Cost For BUY or MAKE Parts:  This is up to the user  to decide if there are any other costs that should be absorbed in the inventory value. 
      User Defined For BUY or MAKE Parts:  This is a field where a user may define the field name and include any optional costs.
      Standard Cost

      The STANDARD COST of an item is a calculated value determined by the sum of individual costs.  These individual costs may be in any combination of the Material, Labor, Overhead, Other and User Defined costs.   Each of the individual costs should have their own account number in the Inventory Setup , and those accounts will accrue the costs when material is added to inventory.  User MUST have optional rights within the Security module to "Allow Updating Inventory Std Cost and Standard Cost Rollups".

      If ManEx Accounting is neither installed nor active, then there is no value other than reference in including values in these fields.

      Important Notice:  It is very important to have standard costs (as determined above) in place for any part entering inventory.  ManEx allows users to enter a standard material cost at the time of purchase, if one is not already entered.  Without accurate cost data, the inventory value could be next to useless, and major variances would show in Purchase Price, Configuration and Manufacturing Variances.  If the material cost if the assembly does not equal the computed sum of the standard costs of the components based on the system setup, a configuration variance will be accrued.

      Target Price This field is currently only a data entry field and will be reflected in the Purchase Order module for "BUY" or "MAKE/BUY" parts.  This field is not editable for "MAKE" or "PHANTOM" parts.  NOTE:  To assign prices to products ("MAKE" parts), ManEx suggests using the Sales Price List Information module.  This module allows users to enter prices by product and by customer so different customers can have different prices.  This price will default into the sales order, but is still editable within the Sales Order module. 
      Weighted Cost - Last 5
      If the Part Source is a BUY,  the weighted cost is calculated by dividing the extended total cost from 5 purchase order by the total qty from 5 Purchase Orders.  The Purchase Orders used is with the latest version date (example if the original PO date is 1/3/06, but it was revised/edited on 12/5/06 it will use the 12/5/06 date, no matter what was edited on the PO).  (if a user accidently selected the wrong PO to edit and had depressed the edit button, they could depress the abandon changes button to avoid the PO version date from being updated).   
         
       
      Last Changed This captures the date of the last change to the cost within this module and/or the outside modules such as the Purchase Order module and/or the Cost Adjustment module.  

      If the Part Source is a BUY, the purchase history will list information of 10 latest POs.  The PO's will only be displayed on this list if the status is "OPEN" or "CLOSED".  If the PO status is "EDIT" or "CANCEL" it will NOT be displayed on the the list.  The system will select POs by original date.    Note that the User may sort by depressing the Date, Supplier, PO Number, Manufacturer or Price button.  For further detail see Article #3203

      1.3.5.1.3.3. Quantity Info Tab

      This screen is used to enter, edit and display Warehouse, Location, Manufacturer, and Safety Stock information for an inventory item.   Also, after an item has been entered, complete inventory stock, allocation and usage information by Manufacturer is displayed or available at the click of a button.   All current inventory information about any selected part can be displayed here.

      Header Information fields

      Part Number, Part Class, Part Type, Description and Material Type are Item fields which repeat at the top of all Tabs to display the selected Item. 

        Clicking on this button will display all Active assemblies and sub-assemblies with this item appearing in their BOM.

      Where Part Used field Definitions

      Part Number Is the number assigned to the assembly for which the internal Part Number is a component
      Rev Is the revision number of the assembly
      Description Is the description of the assembly
      Quantity Pertains to the amount of the component used for 1 unit of the completed assembly
      Bom Stat Is status of the Bom (Active, Inactive,etc.)
      Status Is status of the assembly (Active, Inactive, etc.)
      Eff Dt Pertain to any effective dates regarding the assembly
      Obs Dt Pertain to any obsolete dates regarding the assembly
      Item Number Is the item number on the Bom

       

      Clicking on this button will display Inventory Allocations and Shortages for this item by Work Order number, as displayed:



      Part Shortage and Allocation Field definitions

      WoNo Is the number assigned to the Work Order for which the component part is short
      Project No Is the number assigned to a work order for a special project
      Wk Ctr Is the name of the Work Center where the Part Number is short
      PartMfgr Is the name of the manufacturer of this part.
      Wh Is the name of the warehouse where this Part Number is stored
      Location Displays if the shortage is a kit shortage, line item shortage or an allocation
      Qty Alloc Displays the quantity allocated to a specific Work Order or Project
      Qty Short Shows the number of units short for the Work Order

      The User may sort on Work Order Number, Project No, Work Center, Part Manufacturer or Warehouse by depressing the appropriate button.

        Clicking on this button will display all Open, Approved Purchase Orders for this item, as displayed:  (The quantity being displayed is the qty scheduled not the qty on order)



      On Order Field definitions

      Date Represents the calendar date of the Purchase Order
      Supplier Is the name of the Supplier to which the Purchase Order was sent
      PO Number Is the internal number assigned to that Purchase Order
      Mfgr Is the name of the Manufacturer specified in the Purchase Order
      Price Is the amount of money to be paid for one unit in the Purchase Order line item
      Quantity Is the amount of unit(s) scheduled on the PO, not the qty on order

      The User may sort on Date, Supplier, PO Number, Manufacturer or Price by depressing on the appropriate button.

      This field is read only.  The button will be displayed in Red when there are serial numbers present.  Clicking on this button will display all serial numbers assigned to this item, as display: (only if this item is serialized). This information comes from the PO Receiving module or Inventory Handling (Receiving) module and is not editable.

       
       
      Serial Number Field definitions
       
      Sequence # Is the order in which the serial numbers were assigned
      Serial Number Is the number assigned to that part
      WH Qty Is the quantity available in the warehouse being used
      Warehouse Is the name of the warehouse the parts are being stored in
      Location Displays where the parts can be found
      Manufacturer Is the name of the mfg. specified
      Manufacturers Part Number Is the mfg. part number being used

      If the part is lot coded the additional fields will appear on the View Serial Number screen

       

      Lot Code Is the number of the lot
      Exp Date

      Displays the date the parts can no longer be used.  This field is for reference only.  Manex doesn't act on that date to expire the part.  But it is part of the unique combination users can have LOT code A, exp date 01/10/2005 and LOT code A, exp date 01/01/2010 and the system will consider it as a completely different LOT.  

      Reference Is a name/number to identify the Lot.
      PO Number Is the internal number assigned when order is placed.
        This field is read only and is not editable.  The button will be displayed in Red and will be only displayed if the item is Lot Coded.  Clicking on this button will display all the Lot Code Detail assigned to this item, as display below.   All Lot Codes received by Purchase Order (in the PO Receiving module) will have a PO Number displayed against which they were received.  If received using the  Inventory Handling (Receiving) module the PO Number will be empty.  

      Lot Detail Field Definitions

      Lot/Date Code Is the number of the Lot/Date Code
      Expiration Dt

      Displays the date the parts can no longer be used.  This field is for reference only.  Manex doesn't act on that date to expire the part.  But it is part of the unique combination users can have LOT code A, exp date 01/10/2005 and LOT code A, exp date 01/01/2010 and the system will consider it as a completely different LOT.  

      Qty on Hand Displays the qty available in Inventory
      Qty Alloc Displays the quantity allocated to a specific Work Order or Project
      Reference Is a name/number identify the Lot
      PO Number Is the internal number assigned when order is placed

      AVL Information 

      This section will define all the AVL, and Safety Stock information assigned to the inventory part.  The user may Add, Delete, or Edit the AVL information here.  

      When adding new MPN's to the item master, if you do not want the BOM's automatically updated be sure that the "Disable Automatic BOM AVL update" is Enabled.  See article #1477  for more information.  
       
      Note:  When deleting an MPN - keep in mind that the MPN will be deleted from the screen but NOT from the tables. The MPN's that have been deleted are retained in the tables for history tracking purposes.   
          
       

      AVL Field Definitions

      Manufacturers Part Number

      Displays the Mfg. Part Number for an existing highlighted Mfg. Also, Used to enter Mfg. Part Number during data entry.  If no manufacturers Part Number is entered into the Inventory Master during data entry, GENR (Generic) will be automatically entered by the system as the Manufacturer and the Manufacturers Part Number will be left blank. If a Buy item is fabricated by a customer, then the Customers name must be added to the list of Manufacturers and the Customers Part Number entered in the Manufacturers Part Number field. 

      Manufacturer

      Any Manufacturer entered in Part Manufacturer Setup can be selected in this field. If no specific Manufacturer is required, GENR. (Generic) may be used to show that any Manufacturer is usable.  Also displays Manufacturer for an existing inventory record choosen.

      Pref This is a number indicating the preference for use in Work Order Kitting for each Manufacturer shown. The number 1 indicates 1st ranking, 2 is 2nd ranking, etc. User will only be allowed to enter postive numbers (1 through 99).   If no preference code is entered the preference automatically is assigned 99. All items will be at the bottom of the preference list unless the user assigns another number to it.  For further detail on how the preference code is used in MRP see Article #3032 .
      Safety Stock

      Enter in a qty that you want kept on hand for this specific AVL.  User may have safety stock for more than one AVL for a given part number.  (Safety stock is calculated in MRP at the AVL level NOT the part number level).  This qty is in addition to the MRP demands.  ManEx will ensure that there is always the safety stock qty on hand regardless of the MRP demands.  Please see Article #2331 for more detail.  (This field is calculated off of the Stock UOM). 

      AVL Material Type

      Select from the pull down, Unk, LF-P/N, LF-Date, LF-Mark, RoHS-P/N, RoHS-Date, RoHS-Mark. See Article 2267 for definitions. These choices have been defaulted in.  Customers may establish the logic by which the material type for the parts are established by the material types at the AVL level in Material Type Setup

      The AVL Material Type is carried forward for the consign part when the consign part is first added to the system or when new AVL was added to the internal part and the user elects to add this AVL to the existing consign parts.  If the user later changes the Material Type on the internal part, the change is NOT carried over to the consigned part.

      If the Inventory Material Type is set to "Auto" (within the Material Type Setup), everytime the user modifies the AVL material type, the program will update the Inventory Material Type automatically, if the control is set to "Manual", then the user will be able to modify the Inventory Material Type from the Material Type pulldown.  Keep in mind that the program will NOT validate if the material type in Inventory and AVL levels are in sync. 
      AVL Material Value This field is a text modifier for a given material type.  For example, if the material type was "LF-Date", the text in the field could be a date code.  This value could be different for various AVL with the same Material Code.  This field is optional and does not have to be populated. 

      This field is to add the AVL(s) to a consigned part.  

      Allow Auto Creating Location at Receiving (Selected AVL)
      Note: Users have to have special access in order to modify this checkbox, this access is assigned through Security/User Rights. 

      If the box is checked (for the highlighted AVL) it will allow the user to create a location when entering the Purchase Order or at PO Receiving. Note:  The "Allow Auto Creating Location at Receiving" box must be checked also in Warehouse Setup.
       
      If the user has the "Remove location with this warehouse from the Inventory when qty on hand gets to zero Box" box checked within the Warehouse Setup Setup module this box MUST be checked also.
      There are situations where the Users customers will allow them to use up non-conforming inventory, but cannot replace the same AVLs. So, at the AVL level, we added two logic fields that would signify that the AVL is NOT to be purchased and/or kitted.   In such a circumstance, it is NOT appropriate to delete the parts, but neither can they be purchased for future requirements.  Likewise, they may want to avoid kitting  so you would check these boxes to "Disallow this part from Purchase and/or Kitting".  For special circumstances,  the user can override the block from kitting if their customer permits it.  For further information on how to use these fields effectively refer to Article #2329 For information on how these fields affect MRP refer to Article #3211 .  (See the non-nettable function for the warehouse level described below).  
      AVL Qty on Hand Total qty on hand for each individual mfg.
      Total Qty on Hand

      Total qty on hand for all mfg.'s combined

      Total Allocated Qty Total qty allocated to a specific work order or project
      Total Available Qty

      Total qty available minus the allocated qty

      Add

      Allows data entry to add Manufacturer record. Enter Manufacturer part number and a drop down list will appear to choose the Manufacturer. Click on the save button and the information entered will be displayed in the screen.

      Delete

      Deletes the highlighted manufacturer part number record. A ????? screen will appear. Click the NO button to restore the deleted record if this button is clicked in error. Deletion of manufacturer part number records is not allowed if a Warehouse quantity other than zero (0) is shown for that record. Before manufacturer records are deleted, please realize that SOME of the history regarding the manufacturer may also be deleted.

      Save Appears after clicking the Add button. Clicking on this button saves the record
      Cancel

      Appears after clicking the Add button. Click to abort saving a new record or changes to existing records.

      Warehouse Information

      This section will define all the Warehouse information assigned to the inventory part.  The user may add or edit the Warehouse information here also.   

       

      Warehouse Field Definitions

      One of these radials must be checked.   Internal (User owned) or In-Store (supplier owned).  This selection is available only for "BUY" parts.  This selection will not be displayed for "MAKE" or "PHANTOM" parts.

      Last Count

      Displays the date of the last physical Inventory or Cycle Count for the highlighted item in the Warehouse/Location/Manufacturer display window.

      Warehouse

      Used to display the stocking Warehouse for an existing item or to select a Warehouse during entry of a new Location or Manufacturers Part Number. Only Warehouses entered in Warehouse Setup may be selected in this field.

      Location

      Allows entry of any Location code desired. It could be an area assigned for Finished Goods, High Value items, Programmed parts or a Row, Aisle and Shelf Code. Also displays Location for an existing highlighted Warehouse record.  This field is flagged "Read Only" for MRB whse (meaning you can not create a location for an MRB whse).

      Netable (box)

      If this is checked, any On Hand inventory of the item in the Warehouse location being added or highlighted (if already added) will be used to fill Material Requirements Planning stipulations when processing the MRP.  If you want to exclude this part from MRP and Kitting Issue screens, uncheck this box.  You Cannot have a netable part that is excluded by MRP.  The only warehouse that is non-netable is the MRB warehouse. Any parts in that warehouse are deemed questionable until the parts are validated and returned to a normal warehouse.  So they will not be considered by MRP. 

      Validated (box)

      This is for reference only and does not affect any other modules in Manex. This is simply to help users keep track of changes and for the users to check that the part being added has been verified as appropriate. 

        or  

      If Enabled ManEx will add the new AVL to all existing BOMs and check them as approved.  If Disabled ManEx will add the new AVL to all existing BOMs but will NOT mark them as approved. Then they will not drive any demands or be available for pulling to that kit.  Then you will have to manually go into each individual BOM and Check mark the ones that you do intend to use that new AVL on.  See article #1477  for more information.

      On Hand

      Shows the total quantity of the Manufacturer Part Number indicated which is currently in the Warehouse and Location shown.

      Allocated

      Quantity of the item that has been allocated to a Work Order in the Inventory Mgt./ Kitting, Allocating and Shortage Management/ Work Order Allocation screen.

      Available

      (Calculated field) Equals the quantity On Hand minus the Allocated quantity.

      Add

      Allows data entry to add a Warehouse, and Location. A drop down list appears to select a warehouse.  Enter in a location if you choose.  Click on the save button and the information entered will appear in the screen.

      Delete

      Deletes the highlighted Warehouse record.  A reminder screen will appear.  Click the NO button to restore the Deleted record if this button is clicked in error. Deletion of Warehouse records is not allowed if a Warehouse quantity other than zero (0) is shown for that record.Before warehouse records are deleted, please realize that SOME of the history regarding the warehouse may also be deleted.

      Save

      Appears after depressing the Add button.  Depressing this button saves the record.

      Cancel

      Appears after depressing the Add button.   Depress to abort saving a new record or changes to existing records.

      1.3.5.1.3.4. MRP Tab (Material Requirements Planning Info Tab)

      This Tab displays the screen in which Material Requirements Planning parameters are entered, edited or viewed. Default choices for each of these fields may be selected in System Setup Inventory Part Class Setup.

      Header Information fields

      Part Number, Part Class, Part Type, Description, and Material type are Item fields which repeat at the top of all Tabs to display the selected Item.
       
      Note:  All lead times are calculated with the Production Calendar.

      Order Policy field

      This field is used to select the method used by the Material Requirements Planning module to combine requirements for this item in creating Planned Purchase Orders (PO’s).   For instance if the choice is “Lot for Lot”, for a BUY part, the Material Requirements Planning module will plan one PO for the total requirements on a daily basis.  If the choice is "Lot for Lot" for a MAKE part MRP will calculate off of each Sales Order individually .  If the choice were “Weekly”, for a BUY part, the Material Requirements Planning module would combine all the requirements each week and plan one PO on the first requirement day for the entire week’s needs, etc. Note: If order policy is left blank "Lot For Lot" will be used upon default for MRP calculations.

      Min Order Qty field

      This is smallest number of the item that can be ordered from the supplier in one PO. For instance, Surface Mount components on a reel usually have a minimum order of 1000 items or more.  (This field is calculated off of the Stock UOM).

      Order Multiple field This field defines the even multiples of the Unit of Measure in which an item must be purchased. For example, 16AWG Wire might be only available in even hundreds of feet on a spool in which case the Material Requirements Planning module would plan a PO for the next higher even hundred above the requirement.  (This field is calculated off of the Stock UOM).
      Purchase Lead Time field This field will be displayed for a Buy part or a Make with Make/Buy Flag part.  Purchase of all items other than In-Store items requires that the PO be placed a minimum number of days before the actual requirement. This Lead Time requirement is what tells the Material Requirements Planning module how many days before a requirement to plan a PO.  Changing the leadtime of a Buy part will NOT change the due date in MRP, only the date to take action.  For more detail see diagram shown below.
      Kitting Lead Time field

      This field will be displayed for a Regular Make part or a Make with Make/Phantom Flag part.  This Lead Time requirement is what tells the Material Requirements Planning module how many days to allow for kitting. Changing the kitting leadtime of a Make or Make/Phantom part will change the due date in MRP.  A TRUE phantom does NOT require any lead times and should be left blank.  BUT . . . if for some reason you need to add a lead time for a TRUE phantom ManEx does have the capability. For more detail see diagram shown below.

      Production Lead Time field 
      This field will be displayed for a Regular Make part, a Make with Make/Phantom Flag part or a Straight Phantom part.  This Lead Time requirement is what tells the Material Requirements Planning module how many days to allow for production. Changing the production leadtime of a Make or Make/Phantom part will change the due date in MRP.  A TRUE phantom does NOT require any lead times and should be left blank.  BUT . . . if for some reason you need to add a lead time for a TRUE phantom ManEx does have the capability. For more detail see diagram shown below.
       
      NOTE:  Once the parts have been pulled to the kit and the kit status is changed to "Kit in Process" MRP is designed to calculate from the Kit Shortage and production lead time NOT from the production offset lead times.  Once the parts have been pulled to the kit, the system is assuming that the shortages are needed by the WO due date, rather than the Production offset lead time, so MRP then calculates using the production lead time and due date of the WO as the date the materials must be on hand, MRP no longer takes the production offset lead time into consideration.
      Pull In Days field

      When PO due date is more than this number of days too late for a Material Requirements Planning module requirement, a PO Due Date change Action Notice will be generated.   It allows the user to have the flexability for SO and WO due dates to be different without MRP actions being generated.    For more information on how the Pull-in days work within MRP see Article #2557.     Note:  These parameters may be thought of as filters for MRP Order Actions when the requirement dates for the parts changes In the case of the customer pulling forward their required date, it is a greater imperative that the work orders (thus the assembly) be pulled in to match the earlier due date.  So the assemblies should probably have a minimum number of days to be sensitive to earlier demandsSee attached Document <<pullin-pushout discussion.docx>>.

      Push Out Days field

      When PO due date is more than this number of days too early for a Material Requirements Planning module requirement, a PO Due Date change Action Notice will be generated.  Example: if there is a PO that is due to be delivered Dec 15, but now it is not needed until Dec 26 and the Push out is 30 days, then there WOULD NOT be a message issued within MRP to reschedule the PO delivery, because it is within 30 days, but if the Push out was 5 days then an action  message WOULD BE issue to reschedule the delivery because the new date was outside of the push-out days.      It allows the user to have the flexability for SO and WO due dates to be different without MRP actions being generated.  For more information on how the Push-out days work within MRP see Article #2557.     Note: These parameters may be thought of as filters for MRP Order Actions when the requirement dates for the parts changes.    The Push Out value (in days) is the number of days that the required date, base on MRP, may be pushed out (required later than the original date) but will not result in a change order to move the required delivery for the item involved.  See attached Document <<pullin-pushout discussion.docx>>. 

      Re-Order Point field

      To use the Re-Order Point and Re-Order Qty rather than Material Requirements Planning for reordering this item, enter the quantity at or below which the item should be replenished. Print the "Inventory Material Reorder List" report to show items which have dropped below re-order point minimums.  NOTE:  The Re-Order Point/Qty fields have NO AFFECT on MRP at all.  MRP will NOT consider these fields for any calculations (these fields have no connection with MRP).  These fields are intended to control stock on overhead items.   (This field is calculated off of the Stock UOM).

      Re-Order Quantity field To use the Re-Order Point and Re-Order Qty rather than Material Requirements Planning for reordering this item, enter the quantity of the re-order here. Print the "Inventory Material Reorder List" report to show items which have dropped below re-order point minimums.  NOTE:  The Re-Order Point/Qty fields have NO AFFECT on MRP at all.  MRP will NOT consider these fields for any calculations (these fields have no connection with MRP).  These fields are intended to control stock on overhead items.    (This field is calculated off of the Stock UOM).  

       

      1.3.5.1.3.5. Notes Tab

      Notes are usable for text information relevant to this item that is of interest to Engineering, Purchasing, Stores or Planning. A typical note is shown below. These item notes are viewable from the Material Requirements Planning,  Bill of Material and Purchasing screens. 

       

       

      1.3.5.1.3.6. Customer Tab

      This screen allows users to connect the customer part number and revision with the internal part number and revision.  Entry of a Customer Part Number creates a Consigned Inventory Record that does several very important functions:

      • Serves as the place for selection of each Approved Manufacturers (Customer’s Approved Vendor List) from the list of all Manufacturer Part Numbers for that particular generic part
      • Provides a way to cross reference Customer Part Numbers to Internal Part Numbers
      • Allows generation of Bills of Material with Customer Part Numbers
      • Sets up a Consigned Inventory Warehouse(s) to allow receipt, issue and tracking of this Customer part  

      Header information fields: Displays the Part Number, Class, Type, Description and Material Type selected in the Summary Tab.

      Customer field In View Mode, this screen shows the Customer selected from the Customer window.In Edit Mode, use this field to enter Customer Name
      Customer Part Number

      For viewing or entry of Customer Part Number for the internal Part Number displayed in the Header.

      Display/ select window

      Shows all Customers and Customer Part Numbers for this internal part and their status, (active, in-active, etc).

      Add Add a new Customer and customer part number
      Delete Delete an existing Customer and customer part number
      Save Save new Customer Part Number
      Cancel Cancel a Customer Part Number

      Add Default Warehouse Select to add only the default warehouse to customer side when adding a Customer Part Number
      Copy Warehouse Location from Internal Part Select to Copy Warehouse Location(s) from Internal Part to customer side when adding a Customer Part Number
      Do not add any Warehouse/Location Select if user does not want to add any Warehouse/Location(s) from the interanl side to the customer side when adding a Customer Part Number


      ManEx does not allow user to link same customer with multiple customer part numbers to the same internal part number. Our structure is based tightly on the internal part number. We link to customer part numbers when needed for showing customer part numbers or for MRP AVL limitations. If we allowed more than one customer part number for the same customer, we would not be able to process mrp AVL selection, nor reports that currently show customer part numbers.
      1.3.5.1.3.7. Supplier Tab

      This screen is for referencing the supplier(s) of this part and the Supplier’s Part Number.

      Header information fields: Displays the Part Number, Class, Type, Description, and Material Type selected in the Summary Tab.

      Mfg field Displays the mfg. selected in the quantity info. Tab
      Manufacturer’s Part Number

      Displays the manufactuer’s part number selected in the quantity info. tab.

      Supplier field

      In View Mode, this screen shows the Supplier selected from the Supplier window. In Edit Mode, use this field to enter Supplier Name.

      Supplier Part Number

      For viewing or entry of Supplier Part Number for the internal Part Number displayed in the Header.

      Default

      Check this box if you would like this supplier to show automatically when purchasing this part number.

      Display Select Window

      Shows all Suppliers and Supplier Part Numbers for this internal part and whether it is chosen as a defalut.

       Add Add a new supplier and supplier part number
       Delete Delete an existing supplier and supplier part number

      Note:  The system allows you to have multiple suppliers per AVL and one default supplier per AVL.  But each AVL can have a different default supplier and different suppliers.

      1.3.5.1.3.8. Mfg. Part Spec Tab

      This screen is used to view or enter a link to a drawing, photograph,image or .pdf file to be used as an on-line reference for engineering, purchasing, quoting or any other item master usage. It can be an assembly drawing, purchased part specification, spec. control drawing, photograph or any other image or .pdf file linkable to Manex. The image or .pdf file is not stored in Manex. The file in which the image or .pdf file is stored is linked to this screen in Manex and can be maintained without access to Manex.

       

      Header Information: Displays the Part Number, Rev, Class, Type and Description selected in the Summary screen. Displayed on the 2nd line is the manufacturer information:Mfg. Name, Manufacturer’s Part Number, Marking, Package, Body and Pitch.

      Load Picture or PDF document (Buttons): Used to link the Image Space below to a file on the local hard drive or any other location on the network connected to the Manex Server. To Load a Picture, while in the add or edit mode, the LOAD PICTURE button becomes active. Pressing this button prompts the User to enter the location of a picture file created for this particular inventory part.

      Files (pdf.; word; jpeg;, etc.) should be stored in a permanent directory on the server (all users need network security access). The user will define the directory and file for each product in this module, but the information will be available elsewhere throughout the manufacturing module.

      After defining the location for the document, the document is available for viewing, as displayed



      Scroll bars
      : The bars at the bottom and side of the picture allow viewing of the parts of the image that are outside the window’s display. This allows detail viewing of large drawings.

      As soon as you enter the module, Acrobat will load.The user may load a PDF file to the Mfgr Part Spec tab. This allows users access to whole textbooks from within MANEX.PDF files can be drawings, images, CAD files (as printed to a plotter), and multiple pages of mixed text and graphics.Users may also print these PDF files from MANEX.

      PDF and Image files:

      PDF and Image files used in the MANEX system should be placed in the server, where all users have access to them. These files are used in the Product Data Management, Inventory, Customer and Supplier Contact programs. We suggest that the users create an additional directory, called "Images" under the MANEX System directory on the server. So then under the Main MANEX system directory, there would be the \apps, \dbfs, \images and \reports subdirectory.

      If the user is going to make extensive use of the image capability, they may wish to further provide subdirectories under the Image. These might be called "inventory", "PDM", "photos" etc. These files could, in turn, have further subdirectories. For example, under \manex\images\inventory there might be one for each class of part. Or one for make parts and one for buy parts. Under the PDM group could breakdowns by customer.

      Such organization will make it much easier to find files when it is time to update them. MANEX can accommodate file path-names up to 100 characters long.

      While viewing a PDF document, the user may scan and zoom throughout the document. Items may be copied from it, and the document can be printed from the MANEX program, as long as there is a default printer assigned to the workstation.

       

      1.3.5.1.4. How To ..... for ICM Mgmt
      1.3.5.1.4.1. Find an Inventory Control Record

      Entering the Inventory Control Management Module.  Depress Inventory Mgt/Inventory Control Managment/Inventory Control Management. 

       

       

       

      The main screen will appear.

       

      Inventory Find Prerequistes

      In order to Find items with certain characteristics or parameters using the Inventory Find Screen, the items must have been entered in the Item Master with those characteristics. Listed below are the pre-requisites for doing 3 different kinds of Inventory Finds:

      • Internal items must be in the system to be found.Searches for parts between a Starting number and Ending Part Number must include the prefix and any dashes or special characters.
      • A part cannot be found in an “In-Store part find” unless it has been set up with an In-Store warehouse and supplier in the Item Master Quantity Info. screen.
      • A Consigned record cannot be found for an item until the Customer has been entered and the item has been given a Customer Part No. in the Item Master Customer Reference screen.

      When the user does an Inventory Find, in order to speed up the process the user may eliminate the quantity display.

      Depress the Find button. The following screen will display:

       

      Note that the default is for the Summary screen to NOT display the quantity.

       

      If the user wants to have the quantity display on the Summary screen, highlight the desired part number and right click your mouse. The quantity will display for the one part number:

       

      If the user wants the entire summary screen to display all of the quantities, then select the Display Summary Quantity radio.

      Inventory Find Search Field Definitions

      • Internal Inventory – Products, Parts and Assemblies purchased, received, stocked, issued and shipped using standard in-house internal item numbers.These numbers are required and serve as the basis for creation of Consigned and In-Store parts. Just clicking on OK with the default selections shown in the preceding Find Screen will bring up all internal inventory parts in the Item Master Summary screen.
      • Consigned Inventory – these records are created every time a Customer Part Number is entered in the Item Master Customer Reference screen. These records are used to enter Customer requirements (Approved Vendor List) and preferences (choices within the Approved Vendor List) for Manufacturers for a given Part Number.It is also where Customer-owned item inventory levels and locations can be seen.
      • In-Store Inventory – any internal item can be setup with an In-Store Inventory for a Supplier under contract to supply that item. In-Store items are setup in the Internal Inventory Item Master Quantity Info screen and can be viewed individually in that screen or as a group by supplier in the Summary Screen as the result of an Inventory Find by In-Store Inventory.
      • Starting Part Number and an Ending Part Number
        • Enter all prefixes, dashes, spaces and alpha charactersto show the entire number.
        • Enter first and last Part Number of a series for those and all items numbered between.
        • Enter a desired single item in the 1st box and hit return to select only that record.
      • Assigned Buyer will bring up all items assigned to that particular Inventory Buyer.The Buyer assignment is made in Part Class and Type System Setup Defaults or in the Item Master.
      • Part Class and/or Part Type will bring up only those items that match all entries made.Both Part Class and Part Type must be specified to bring up any items.
      • Do not display Summary Quantity radio will by-pass the quantity calculation.
      • Display Summary Quantity radio will open up another selection "Total On Hand Quantities"
        • Total On Hand Quantities will bring up only items with matching inventory quantities.The user may choose from Total Quantity on Hand, Quantity on Hand > 0, or Quantity on Hand = 0.
      • Record Status allows selection of All, Active Only or Inactive Only item records.

      Tips on Using the Inventory Find Screen

      • Selection of at least one parameter will reduce the time to retrieve the information.
      • In-Store Inventory searches require that a Supplier Contract be entered in order to select a Supplier.
      • Consigned Inventory searches show Customer-specific information (such as Approved Vendor List information) as well as Consigned Inventory On-Hand Quantities.
      • If no information is selected in a Find operation, try using broader or fewer selection criteria.

      Combination Searches

      Combinations of search parameters may be made for further filtering of the Inventory Item Master files to see item(s) of interest. For instance, selecting the items on the example screen will find all ACTIVE, In-Store Inventory for "Anixter" with the Class “CABLE”.In-Store Inventory Searches are Supplier specific whereas Consigned Inventory searches require entry of a Customer in order to initiate the search.

       

      Inventory Find Example

      The screen shown below is to illustrate Inventory Find results from selecting Internal Inventory, a Part Class of CAP-SMT, a type of 0805, Total On Hand Quantities of Qty on Hand = 0, and Record Status of Active Records Only

       

       



      The first tab (Summary Tab) is used to display the results of an Inventory Find. The remaining Tabs will then display detail information for any item selected (highlighted) in the Summary screen. If no items have yet been entered in the system or copying an existing part is not needed, it is not necessary to populate the Summary screen by doing an Inventory Find. 

      If user has the internal inventory screen open as well as the customers inventory screen open, the customer name will be displayed at the top of the page.  So when switching between the two screens user will easily be able to determine which screen they are in.

       

      1.3.5.1.4.2. Find an Inventory Control Record Using the X-Reference Find
       

       

        This button will take the user to a screen, where they can make a selection by what ever criteria needed by choosing (internal part number, mfgr part number, customer part number, supplier part number, or description) to search.  

       

      The following screen will appear: 

       

      The user can enter partial string and search is not case sensitive.  After system finds parts in response to the search (inactive parts will be highlighted in Purple),  the user can make a selection by checking on one of the check boxes located at the left.  If system was unable to find the exact match, a message will appear up in the right hand corner (in red) to let the user know that the part did not exist in the item master but the following are similar parts found. 

      The user can choose to Select Without Exit; Select & Exit; or Exit Without Selection. 

      To Select user must check the box to the left of the Part Number.  If user Selects a Part Number (Internal or Customer Part Number) then depresses the Select and Exit button, the part will be displayed in the Summary Tab as shown below. 

        

       

      1.3.5.1.4.3. Add an Inventory Control Record

      Following a logical sequence when adding items into the Inventory Master not only eliminates lost time due to continual back-tracking, but ensures that decisions will be made in a sequence which will support the data entry process.

      The sequence shown below is for adding products, parts, assemblies, subassemblies or Phantoms to the Item Master after completion of System Setup.

      1. Search whether item already exists.  Use Find an Inventory Control Part to search the existing database along with the archived database, to verify that the items to be added do not already exist. 
      2. Verify Available Class and Type.  Use Find an Inventory Control Part by Class and Type to verify that the item to be added will fit into the existing Class and Types . Refer to System Setup, Inventory Part Class if a new Part Class or Type and the corresponding Data Entry Defaults must be added.
      3. Is Customer available?  If the items to be entered will have a Customer-Specific Approved Vendor List (Approved Vendor List), then verify that the Customer is in the database using Customer Information.  Add the Customer Information if it is not there.  
      4. Does Manufacturer exist?  Use Part Manufacturer Setup to view existing Manufacturers. Enter new Manufacturers for Buy Items as required and enter the Source for Fabricated items being purchased as outside purchased assemblies. Please refer to procedures below.
      5. Add a part/product, etcDepress the Item Master screen tab. Use the Add button to enter the stand-alone product number or the top level assembly number for a Bill of Material (BOM) MAKE item that must be added.  If the product is purchased complete and has no BOM, enter it as a BUY item.  Enter your Password.
      6. Enter information.  Enter all basic item information in the Item Master Screen.

       

      Part Source: This field is hard coded in the system. Select BUY for purchased parts and assemblies, MAKE for an item made in-house (assemblies and sub-assemblies) and PHANTOM for a number used to define a collection of items that does not exist as a separate assembly built on a Work Order (ship kits, upgrade packages, spares kits, etc.).

       

      • Phantom/Make: If the Part Source above is a MAKE and this box is checked, the system will treat the part as a Phantom when the sub-assembly components are called up during the Kitting process BUT as a Make part for a stand alone assembly when the part is NOT a sub-assembly.

      • Make/Buy: Make/Buy is setup to allow users to have a part in the system that they wished to BUY but also keep documentation within the system (BOM).  If the Part Source is a MAKE and this box is checked, the assembly could also be purchased from an outside sourceIf a Part is marked as Make/Buy within Inventory the MRP will only give PO Actions and that product will not be available for selection within the Work Order management module.  If the part souce on a product is originally setup as a MAKE the user will be allowed to edit the record and change the part souce to Make/Buy.  For further details see Article #3289 .

      Part Class: This is a general part, product or item classification that must be selected from the drop-down box. If an appropriate choice is not available when entering a new item, see System Setup/Inventory Part Class to add a part class (examples of Part Classes are BATTERY, DIODE, FUSE, FILTER, IC-SMT, CAP-SMT, RES-TH, etc.)

       

      Part Type: Type is a sub-classification of Part Class. If an appropriate choice is not available when entering a new item, see System Setup/Inventory Part Class to add a Part Type (examples of Part Types for the Class CAP-SMT would be 0402, 0603, 0805,1206, 1210, etc.)
       
      To re-sort the order the part types are being displayed in the pulldown See Article #214
       
      A user does have the option of leaving the Part Type blank, however if this option is selected the prefix for the part number will be omitted.  There is no reason to enforce part type if a user doesn’t want to have that kind of detailed classification.  If the user decides to leave the Part Type blank they will receive the following message:
       
       
      At this point they have the option to continue or go back and pick a Part Type.
       

      Description: There are 45 characters available to put descriptive data about the item being entered that is not already in Part Class and Part Type. For instance, in the previous figure the Part Class and Type already show that it is a CAP-SMT. 0603 so this information need not be repeated in the Description.  We suggest when entering the description, that you be consistent with your capitalization and punctuation.  Some of the screens and reports can be sorted by description so the more consistent you are the easier it will be to use the system in the future.

        If the Inventory Material Type is set to "Auto" (within the Material Type Setup), everytime the user modifies the AVL material type, the program will update the Inventory Material Type automatically, if the control is set to "Manual", then the user will be able to modify the Inventory Material Type from the Material Type pulldown.  Keep in mind that the program will NOT validate if the material type in Inventory and AVL levels are in sync.    

      The AVL Material Type is carried forward for the consign part when the consign part is first added to the system or when new AVL was added to the internal part and the user elects to add this AVL to the existing consign parts.  If the user later changes the Material Type on the internal part, the change is NOT carried over to the consigned.  

      Serialized: Check this box if the parts need to be tracked with serial numbers. This box will allow you to mark either Make or Buy parts as Serialized. 

      Note
      :Users MUST have special access with the Security module for the Inventory Control module to modify the serialized checkbox.
       
      When the serialized checkbox is checked for an existing BUY part and there is open kit records in the system the following message will appear:   
       
      When serialized checkbox is checked for an existing MAKE or BUY part and there are open work orders or inventory against it the following message will appear:
      If user checks the Serialized box and receives the following message, this means that the "Do not use serial number tracking" checkbox is checked within SFT Setup.

       

      Depress Yes and the following screen appears

      If user doesn' t know the available work orders which have FGI qty, he/she can double click the work order number field (red box).

       

      A list with work order numbers and FGI qty for that part number will appear (as shown below).  The user then can select one for entering serial numbers.

       

      The users can enter the serial numbers by clicking "single" or "range" option. 

      Once all the serial numbers have been entered for all work orders the completed screen will look like this.

      Depress the Save button.

       

      The following message will appear reminding the user that they will need to assign serial numbers to the balance of the work orders in order to transfer to FGI.

       

      Status: All items must be Active in order to buy, receive, issue, Invoice, or ship. Use Inactive Status to remove items from use that have already had transactions against the Part Number. Use the Delete button to delete Items with no transactions for further detail see Article #3143.  Changing from Inactive to Active status can be used to release items from Engineering.  The system will not allow you to change the status from Active to Inactive if there is WIP for that item.  This will prevent the possibility of qty on hand being returned to an inactive part upon dekitting.  

       

      Part Number: The item/Part Number is a unique identifier for every Item Master record entered into the database. Part Numbers can be auto-assigned to all items or all items except Make assemblies or all items including Make Assemblies. Use of a 3-digit prefix for each different Part Type may be setup in System Setup Number System to work with auto or manual numbered parts and assemblies..

      ABC: This field allows further grouping of items (parts, products or assemblies) into classes according to: 1) the percent of the total inventory their current stock value represents.2) the percent of total inventory their forecasted value will represent.3) a manual classification based upon chosen factors.  If an appropriate choice is not available when entering a new item, see System Setup ABC Types to add a new Type.

       

      Stock/BOM UOM: This is the Unit Of Measure (Foot, Inch, Each, Gallon, Quart, etc.) that is used to specify how much of Item displayed or being entered is issued from Stock or is used in a Bill of Material for an assembly. Note that in ManEx, the Unit of Measure Each is treated as being an integer unit. That is, you can only have one or multiples of an Each, but not a fraction of an each. You can have fractions of inches, feet, pounds, ounces and any other Unit of Measure. Although you can use fractions in the Bill of Material, the User can't kit fractions of each parts. ManEx will round up to the nearest whole number. The proper way to approach the situation where the kit amount is expressed in fractions, is to use any Unit of Measure other than Each. If an appropriate choice is not available when entering a new item, see System Setup/Unit of Measure & Conversion to set up a new Unit of Measure. 
       

      ManEx
      DOES NOT recommend users to change the Unit of Measure while there is qty on hand within the system.  See Article #3414 for further detail. 
       

      Purchase UOM: This is the Unit Of Measure (Foot, Inch, Each, Gallon, Quart, etc.) that is used to specify how the Item displayed or being entered is purchased from a vendor.  If an appropriate choice is not available when entering a new item, see System Setup/Unit of Measure & Conversion to set up a new Unit of Measure. 
       
       
       


      ManEx
      DOES NOT recommend users to change the Unit of Measure while there is qty on hand within the system.   See Article #3414 for further detail.
       

      Package: Specifies the way in which the Item is packaged when it comes from a vendor (ie. Reel, Tray, 6-Pak, Ream, Individually, etc.)   If an appropriate choice is not available when entering a new item, see System Setup/Part Package to set up additional part packaging.   

      Buyer: All items with the same Buyer's initials in this field will be grouped together for display or printout of the Material Requirements Planning Action List when filtered or displayed by Buyer. If an appropriate choice is not available when entering a new item, see System Setup/Inventory Buyer Setup to set up additional buyers.   

      Last Change 

      This automatically defaults in the date and time of the last change made to this part number in the item master. Once the change has been saved. 

      By

      This automatically defaults in the initials of the user that made the last change to this part in the item master. Once the change has been saved.

      Configuration Charge 

      This is NOT a part of the standard cost total, as discussed below.It is a specific cost used with the ManEx Order Configurator module and represents any additional cost over and above the standard cost total.

      Run Scrap % 

      This amount is added to the exact quantity used on an assembly to provide an overage to cover losses during running due to predictable machine and human losses. 

      Setup Scrap Qty  Setup losses may be added to the BOM requirement and Run Scrap for an item.For instance, an auto-insertion machine may use extra parts for alignment checks. 

      Mgmt Lock:   Only Supervisors or users with Lock/Unlock rights within the Security/User rights can modify this checkbox. If locked, all users can access the screen, but only supervisors or those with Lock/Unlock rights will have the capability to bypass the lock and make changes, while the Inventory Part is still in lock mode. The reason we do NOT force the user to unlock the Inventory Part before making any changes, is to protect it from anyone else making changes while the 'authorized" user is making their changes.

      Lock Date: This automatically defaults in the date and time the lock was implemented to this part number in the item master.

      By: This automatically defaults in the initials of the user that implemented the lock to this part number in the item master.

       

        Depressing this button will give the users the ability to scan any related documents directly into the ManEx system and attached the document directly to the item in the ICM Module.  For further detail see Article #2396.  If this button is displayed in Red there is Related documents attached. 
      Inspection Required/ Quality Spec 

      Checking the box will cause the item to require inspection to whatever Quality Spec. shows in the Quality Spec box. The Quality Spec appearing in the box is entered in System Setup in the Inventory Part Class & Type Setup.Any Part Type in a particular Part Class can have Inspection Required turned on or off. 

      Certs Required/ Cert Type:  Checking this box will allow selection of Cert Type.  Cert Type choices are Receive, Ship or Both.  A typical Cert would be UL or CSA Certification on wire. Check the box and then depress the down arrow for the types to display.  Select the desired type:  Receive - Requires user to check the "Certificate Required" box has been Done at Receiving.  Ship - Requires user to check the "Certificate Required" box on Packing List/SHipping.  Both - Requires user to check the "Certificate Required" box at both Receiving and Packing List/Shipping.   

      MRC 

      This is to inform the users which items are Low Risk, High Risk, etc.This will need to be defined in System Setup Material Risk Code Setup.

      EAU/Last EAU Calc 

      These fields display the Estimated Annual Usage, if applicable and the last date that the EAU was calculated. 

      PPM 

      This field is a data entry field and is not currently involved in any calculations or used anywhere else within the system at this point. It is planned to be used in the future to calculate the component level of PPM and then update the assembly PPM within the routing module. 

      The dimensions such as Length, Width, Depth and Weight are entered in this section  

      Within Security there is the option to allow users to have access (all or partial) to the Inventory Control Management module.  Then within those Inventory Security settings there is a provision for optional additional privileges, including the ability to make changes to the Standard Costs.  Only a user with these rights will be allowed to change any of the costs listed below.  Also, none of the cost listed below will be editable if there is inventory or WIP on hand.  

      Material Cost  
      For BUY Parts:  This is the purchase price of the BUY part.  For MAKE Parts:  The sum of the STANDARD COSTS of BUY parts in the assembly.  Whether or not setup scrap is included is a system setup option 
      Labor Cost

      For BUY Parts:  If the user wishes to include any preparation labor costs associated with a BUY part, like crimping, tinning testing. etc., those costs may be included here.  For MAKE Parts:  The user may include the labor associated with building the assembly.

      Overhead Cost For BUY Parts:  Any additional costs associated with the labor, such as heating, lighting, etc., that the user may wish to include in the cost of the inventory value.  For MAKE Parts:  Any additional costs associated with the labor, such as vacations, sick leave, meeting times, etc., that the user may wish to include in the inventory value.
      Other Cost For BUY or MAKE Parts:  This is up to the user  to decide if there are any other costs that should be absorbed in the inventory value. 
      User Defined Cost  For BUY or MAKE Parts:  This is a field where a user may define the field name and include any optional costs.
      Standard Cost 

      The STANDARD COST of an item is a calculated value determined by the sum of individual costs.  These individual costs may be in any combination of the Material, Labor, Overhead, Other and User Defined costs.   Each of the individual costs should have their own account number in the Inventory setup, and those accounts will accrue the costs when material is added to inventory.

      If ManEx Accounting is neither installed nor active, then there is no value other than reference in including values in these fields.

      Important Notice:  It is very important to have standard costs (as determined above) in place for any part entering inventory.  ManEx allows users to enter a standard material cost at the time of purchase, if one is not already entered.  Without accurate cost data, the iventory value could be next to useless, and major variances would show in Purchase Price, Configuration and Manufacturing Variances.
      Target Price 

      This field is currently only a data entry field and will be reflected in the Purchase Order module for "BUY" or "MAKE/BUY" parts.  This field is not editable for "MAKE" or "PHANTOM" parts.  NOTE:  To assign prices to products ("MAKE" parts), ManEx suggests using the Sales Price List Information module.  This module allows users to enter prices by product and by customer so different customers can have different prices.  This price will default into the sales order, but is still editable within the Sales Order module. 

      Weighted Cost 

      If the Part Source is a BUY, the last five purchases expressed as a weighted average will appear here.

      The completed Item Master screen will appear:

      Click on the Quantity Info tab and the following screen will appear. This screen is split. You must enter in the manufacturer information and click save. Then the system will allow you to add the warehouse and location information.

      If the Inventory Material Type is set to "Auto" (within the Material Type Setup), everytime the user modifies the AVL material type, the program will update the Inventory Material Type automatically, if the control is set to "Manual", then the user will be able to modify the Inventory Material Type from the Material Type pulldown.  Keep in mind that the program will NOT validate if the material type in Inventory and AVL levels are in sync. 

      The AVL Material Type is carried forward for the consign part when the consign part is first added to the system or when new AVL was added to the internal part and the user elects to add this AVL to the existing consign parts.  If the user later changes the Material Type on the internal part, the change is NOT carried over to the consigned.

       

      Enter Manufacturers Part Number: Type in the manufacturers part number.

      Enter Manufacturer: Choose a mfgr from the pull down.  If no Manufacturer is specified use GENR (Generic). If no information is entered in the Quantity Info screen, GENR will be added by the system automatically when saving the item.

      System will not allow users to have duplicate AVL/MPN combinations.  If user has same mfgr and mfgr PN but different material types, we suggest that the user create a new AVL with a dash (or any other symbol) and use that designation to transfer to the UNK material type parts or create a different location for the same part, but have it be non-nettable, making it ineligible as a source for MRP.

       

      Enter Pref: Type in the Preference. (Whether this is a preferred manufacturer and if so the ranking or preference).  If no preference code is added, 99 will be assigned automatically.  All items will be at the bottom of the preference list unless the user assigns another number to it. See Article 943 for more information. The Pref Code is carried forward for the consign part when the consign part is first added to the system or when new AVL was added to the internal part and the user elects to add this AVL to the existing consign parts. If the user later changes the preference code on the internal part, the change is not carried over to the consigned part. 
       
      Enter Safety StockEnter in a qty that you want kept on hand for this specific AVL.  (User may have safety stock for more than one AVL in a given part number).  This qty is in addition to the MRP demands. (NoteSafety stock is calculated at the AVL level not part # level).     ManEx will ensure that there is always the safety stock qty on hand regardless of the MRP demands.  Please see Article  #2331  for more detail.  

      If this option is check marked then the users will be able to automatically create any new Location for this part within the PO Receiving module.  Note:  Users MUST have special access within the Inventory Control Security setup module to modify this checkbox.  There is also a similar check box within System Setup, Warehouse Setup, this will also have to be marked for the warehouse in order for this option to be applied.  

      Depress the save button located at the bottom of the screen. You now have the option of entering an AVL Material Type (as described below) for the existing mfg., enter in another manufacturer part number or creating a warehouse for the existing manufacturer. 

      AVL Material Type: Choose from the pull down, Unk, LF-P/N, LF-Date, LF-Mark, RoHS-P/N, RoHS-Date, RoHS-Mark. See Article 2267 for definitions. These choices have been defaulted in.  Customers may establish the logic by which the material type for the parts are established by the material types at the AVL level in System setup/Material Type Setup

      The AVL Material Type is carried forward for the consign part when the consign part is first added to the system or when new AVL was added to the internal part and the user elects to add this AVL to the existing consign parts.  If the user later changes the Material Type on the internal part, the change is NOT carried over to the consigned part. 
       
      If the Inventory Material Type is set to "Auto" (within the Material Type Setup), everytime the user modifies the AVL material type, the program will update the Inventory Material Type automatically, if the control is set to "Manual", then the user will be able to modify the Inventory Material Type from the Material Type pulldown.  Keep in mind that the program will NOT validate if the material type in Inventory and AVL levels are in sync.
       

      AVL Material Value This is a text field for a given material type.  For example:  if the material type was "LF-Date" user could enter the date code in this field.  The Value could be different of various AVL's with the same material code.  This fields is a reference only field and is optional.

        If the users add new AVL's to the Internal part number, they can add it to a Consigned part number by depressing this button.  A screen will appear and within that screen they can select which AVL they want to add to a Customer consigned part number.   

       

      There are situations where the Users customers will allow them to use up non-conforming inventory, but cannot replace the same AVLs. So, at the AVL level, we added two logic fields that would signify that the AVL is NOT to be purchased and/or kitted.   In such a circumstance, it is NOT appropriate to delete the parts, but neither can they be purchased for future requirements.  Likewise, they may want to avoid kitting  so you would check these boxes to "Disallow this part from Purchase and/or Kitting".  For special circumstances,  the user can override the block from kitting if their customer permits it.  For further information on how to use these fields effectively refer to Article #2329 For information on how these fields affect MRP refer to Article #3211 .  (See the non-nettable function for the warehouse level described below).  

      When the "Disallow Purchase" is checked ON - ManEx will check if any Safety Stock (SS) is entered, if so the following prompt will be displayed and will un-check the checkbox upon depressing the OK button.



      When the "Disallow Purchase" is checked OFF - ManEx will check and if "Disallow Kit" is ON the following prompt will be displayed and will revert the change to leave "Disallow Purchase" ON and leave "Disallow Kit" ON.



      When the "Disallow Kit" is checked ON - ManEx will check if any SS is entered,  if so the following prompt will be displayed and will un-check the checkbox upon dpressing the OK button.  If SS is zero, no message will be displayed and ManEx will auto check "Disallow Purchase"



      When the "Disallow Kit" is checked OFF - ManEx will check and if "Disallow Purchase" is still checked ON the following message will be displayed giving the user the option to uncheck the "Disallow Purchase" but is not required. 





      To create a warehouse, depress the Add button (located under the right hand section of the screen)

      Choose Internal (For In-Store refer to In-Plant Store Manual)  

      Enter Warehouse: Select the Warehouse from the pulldown. In ManEx, the default warehouse is Main 1. If the User has accounting, this would equate to the Raw Materials Inventory. Many Users want to separate their Raw Materials and Finished Goods Inventories. So, if this is a Make part, the User may want to select the finished goods inventory warehouse. Some Users also set up separate warehouses and general ledger account numbers for In-Stores and Consigned.  If no warehouse is selected upon saving the record the system will deafult in the default warehouse setup in System Setup Warehouse Setup

       

      Enter Location The location entered is where the parts will be stocked and/or located within the warehouse.   System will NOT allow users to add same locations with leading spaces.  This field is flagged as “Read Only” for an MRB whse item. (Meaning you can not create new locations for MRB whse). Due to the fact that the MRB location is usually generated from a PO rejection – and if so, it needs to retain that link back to the original PO information and that is populated into the location field and is not editable.   If you move into MRB via Inventory Handling then no location information is populated, but you are still unable to edit it.
      Netable box 

      Remove the check mark from Netable only if the item entered is NOT to be considered as Supply when running Material Requirements Planning.  If the MRB whse is being added the Netable field is disabled and unchecked. 

      Validated box 

      This is for reference only and does not affect any other modules in Manex. This is simply for the users to check that the part being added has been verified as appropriate. 

      Depress the Save button at the bottom of the screen.

      The completed Quantity Info screen looks like this:

      Material Requirements Planning Information:  Depress the MRP tab and the following screen will appear. Enter the Material Requirements Planning information for the item.

      Order Policy: This field is used to select the method used by the Material Requirements Planning module to combine requirements for this item in creating Planned Purchase Orders (POs). For instance if the choice is (Lot for Lot), the Material Requirements Planning module will plan one PO for the total requirements on a daily basis. If the choice were (Weekly), the Material Requirements Planning module would combine all the requirements each week and plan one PO on the first requirement day for the entire weeks needs.

       

      Min Order Qty

      This is the smallest number of the item that can be ordered from the vendor in one PO. For instance, Surface Mount components on a reel usually have a minimum order of 1000 items or more. 

      Order Multiple  

      This field defines the even multiples of the Unit of Measure in which an item must be purchased. For example, 16AWG Wire might be only available in even hundreds of feet on a spool in which case the Material Requirements Planning module would plan a PO for the next higher even hundred above the requirement. 

      Purchase Lead Time: Purchase of all items other than In-Store items requires that the PO be placed a minimum number of days before the actual requirement. This Lead Time requirement is what tells the Material Requirements Planning module how many days before a requirement to plan a PO.  Changing the leadtime of a Buy part will NOT change the due date in MRP, only the date to take action. 

       

      Kitting Lead Time:  This field will be displayed only if it is a Make or Phantom part.  This Lead Time requirement is what tells the Material Requirements Planning module how many days to allow for kitting. Changing the kitting leadtime of a Make or Phantom part will change the due date in MRP.  A TRUE phantom does NOT require any lead times and should be left blank.  BUT . . . if for some reason you need to add a lead time for a TRUE phantom ManEx does have the capability.

      Production Lead Time:  This field will be displayed only if it is a Make or Phantom part.  This Lead Time requirement is what tells the Material Requirements Planning module how many days to allow for production. Changing the production leadtime of a Make or Phantom part will change the due date in MRP.  A TRUE phantom does NOT require any lead times and should be left blank.  BUT . . . if for some reason you need to add a lead time for a TRUE phantom ManEx does have the capability.

       

      Pull In Days

      When PO due date is more than this number of days too late for an Material Requirements Planning module requirement, a PO Due Date change Action Notice will be generated.   Note: These parameters may be thought of as filters for MRP Order Actions when the requirement dates for the parts changes.    See attached Document <<pullin-pushout discussion.docx>>.

      Push Out Days When PO due date is more than this number of days too early for an Material Requirements Planning module requirement, a PO Due Date change Action Notice will be generated.  Note: These parameters may be thought of as filters for MRP Order Actions when the requirement dates for the parts changes.    See attached Document <<pullin-pushout discussion.docx>>.
      Re-Order Qty

      This is the number of the item to order at time of order. 

      Re-Order Point

      To use a Min/Max system rather than Material Requirements Planning for reordering this item, enter the quantity at or below which the item should be replenished. Print the Inventory Material Reorder List report to show items which have dropped below re-order point minimums. 

      The completed MRP screen would appear as follows:

      Notes Tab

      Depress the Notes tab. Add Notes by clicking the Edit Action Button and typing in manually. Use Utility/ Copy or Ctrl+C and Utility/ Paste Ctrl+V to copy and paste from the existing Item Notes to new Item Notes. 

      Depress the Customer tab.  Depress the Edit button and the following screen will appear:

       

      Depress the Add button (under to the Customer Field) to select a Customer.  A customer list will appear.  Select the customer desired. For every Customer that requires an Approved Vendor List, selection of these items Manufacturer Part Numbers list (in the Quantity Info Screen), a Customer Part Number must be entered in the Customer Screen.  Enter a Customer Part Number and Save.  When you create a Customer Part number (Consigned) within the system, user has the option to Add Default Warehouse, Copy Warehouse Location from Internal Part, or Do not add any Warehouse Location upon creation.   Note:  System does not allow you to enter more than one part number per customer to the same internal part, (for more detail see Article #2389).

       

      Depress the Supplier tab, depress the Edit button and then the Add button (under the Supplier Field) to select a Supplier, enter a Supplier Part Number and Save.

       

       

      The completed Supplier screen would appear as follows:

      Manufacturer Part Specifications

      Depress the Mfgr Part Spec tab. Add the Marking and Package, Body and Pitch, if desired. Add Manufacturer Part Spec drawings, images or .pdf file by clicking on Load Document and linking to the desired image or pdf file. The completed screen will appear: 




      Once all information for new record has been entered, depress the
      Save button to save the record, or the Abandon record button to abandon record.
       
       
       
      1.3.5.1.4.4. Copy or Edit an Inventory Record

      Copy a Part Number

      To copy an existing part, Find the part you want to copy, using Find an Inventory Control Record. Highlight that part number and then depress the Item Master tab. Depress the Copy icon at the top of the screen. The following message will appear.

      The following message will appear. Depress the "Yes"  button. Enter your password. 

       

      The following selection menu will appear:

      Selecting Copy & Autonumber will create a copy, and open the  Item Master Screen.  The fields which may be edited are highlighted.

       

       

      Selecting Copy & Edit Number/Revision will bring up a reminder message:

      Depress the Ok button.

      The Item Master Screen will open.  All of the fields which can be edited, including the part number and the revision number, will be available for editing.

       

      Selecting Copy & Increment Revision, will cause the system to assign the same part number and the revision number will automatically increment by 1.  In the Item Master all the fields which may be edited are highlighted, as illustrated below:

      Edit an Inventory Item

      Find an Inventory Control Record   Note:  How to remove or inactive an Inventory record see Article #924 Status defintion.

      Depress the appropriate tab which needs to be modified. Depress the Edit button. Enter your Password. The items displayed in Black may be edited:

      ITEM MASTER TAB

      Item Master tab
      The following fields are all editable:  Part Class, Part Type, Description, Material Type, Serialize box, Status (for status defintions see Article #924), ABC code, Stock / BOM UOM, Purchase UOM, Package, Buyer,  Mgmt Lock, Configuration Charge, Run Scrap %, Setup Scrap Qty, Costs (see NOTE below), Inspection box, Certs Required box, First Article box, NC NR, box, MRC, PPM, Length, Depth, Width, & Weight.
       
      ManEx DOES NOT recommend users to change the Unit of Measure while there is qty on hand within the system.   For further detail see Article #3414.

      If the part souce on a product is originally setup as a MAKE the user WILL be allowed to edit the record and change the part souce to Make/Buy and/or Phantom/Make.  For further details see Article #3289 .

       After all these criterias are passed, if the part has quantity on hand, the user has to enter the serial numbers to match the quantity on hand.

      Note re Editing Standard Cost: You will need a Supervisors Password to change the Standard Cost. The best procedure is to use the Standard Cost Adjustment module.  The Standard Cost Adjustment module will update the Inventory records AND will create the appropriate accounting entry. If you edit the cost in this screen, a manual accounting entry will be required.

      Changing a non-serialized part to a serialized part

      BUY - If a user changes a non-serialized BUY part to a Serialize part the system will check. *If the part has allocated qty, (user has to un-allocate parts before the system will allow user to check the "Serialize" box). *If  the part has any OPEN kit (kit in process), (user has to de-kit or close kit before system will allow user to check the "Serialize" box).   *If the part has un-reconciled PO (user has to reconcile all receipts before system will allow user to check the "Serialize" box).

      MAKE - If a user changes a non-serialized MAKE part to a Serialize part and the part has quantity in FGI the following message will appear:
       
      NOTE:  User is NOT allowed to change a Make/BUY part from a non-serialized part to a serialized part if there is qty on hand.

      Depress the Yes button and the following screen will appear, which is the Serial number entry screen: The WH Qty is displayed in upper right hand corner.  This is the number of serial numbers that need to be assigned.  

      If user does not know the available work orders which have FGI quantity, they can double click the work order number field (displayed in Red), and a list with work order numbers and FGI qty for that part number will pop up and the user can select one for entering serial numbers.

      When user returns to the SN Entry screen they can leave the SN option at "Range".  The system will default in the full Qty on Hand amount for the Serial Numbers, but if the user manually edits the ending serial number before entering the system appears to work okay, then when the user adds the remaining serial number for the last work order the system will default the correct amount of remaining serial number to be assigned. 

       
      Changing a Lot Coded Part to a Non-Lot Coded Part or Vis-Versa  - ManEx does NOT recommend users changing parts from Lot Coded to Non Lot Coded or vis-versa unless it is absolutely necessary. 
       
      If a user is changing a Non Lot Coded part to a Lot Coded part they will receive the following message informing the user that "Dummy" lot codes will be setup for existing oh hand quantities and asking the user if they would like to continue. 
       
       
      If a user is changing a Lot Coded part to a Non Lot Coded part they will receive the following message informing them that any existing Lot Code information for this part will be deleted from the system if these changes are saved and asking the user if they would like to continue.
       
       
       
      If a user is changing a Lot Coded part to a Non Lot Coded part or vis-versa and the part is also serialized and if there is qty on hand, user will receive the following message and will be unable to save the change.  
       
       
       
       
       
       

      QUANTITY INFO TAB

      Material Type

      Select from the pull down, Unk, LF-P/N, LF-Date, LF-Mark, RoHS-P/N, RoHS-Date, RoHS-Mark. See Article 2267 for definitions. These choices have been defaulted in.  Customers may establish the logic by which the material type for the parts are established by the material types at the AVL level in System setup/Material Type Setup

      The AVL Material Type is carried forward for the consign part when the consign part is first added to the system or when new AVL was added to the internal part and the user elects to add this AVL to the existing consign parts.  If the user later changes the Material Type on the internal part, the change is NOT carried over to the consigned.
       
      If the inventory material type update is set to "Auto" (within the Material Type Setup), everytime the user modifies a part or AVL, the program will update the inventory material type automatically, if the control is set to "Manual" then user will be able to modify inventory material type on "Quantity Info" page via a Material Type pulldown, the program will not validate if the material type in inventory and AVL levels are in sync. 
      AVL Info

      User can edit the Pref Code, Safety Stock, AVL Material Type, Enter AVL Material Value info, check the Allow Auto Creating Location at Receiving (selected AVL) and/or Disallow this part from Purchasing and/or Kitting (if applicable).   Depress the ADD button to enter a new mfgr and mfgr PN.  Highlight an existing mfgr and mfgr PN in the box and depress the DELETE button to delete an existing mfgr and mfgr PN (if there is no qty on hand). Note:  When deleting an MPN - keep in mind that the MPN will be deleted from the screen but NOT from the tables. The MPN's that have been deleted are retained in the tables for history tracking purposes.   

      NOTE:  If the user changes the preference code or material type these changes are NOT carried forward to the existing consigned parts.

      System will not allow users to have duplicate AVL/MPN combinations.  If user has same mfgr and mfgr PN but different material types, we suggest that the user create a new AVL with a dash (or any other symbol) and use that designation to transfer to the UNK material type parts or create a different location for the same part, but have it be non-nettable, making it ineligible as a source for MRP.

      Warehouse Info User can edit a location to an existing Warehouse, check or uncheck the Netable and Validated boxes.  Depress the ADD button to add a new Warehouse.  Highlight an existing warehouse in the box depress the DELETE button to delete an existing warehouse (if there are no qty on hand).  Caution on deleting warehouses:  Please remember if you delete a warehouse for a given part number, that you are ALSO deleting some of the history for that part at that location.  If you think that such history will be required in the future, then DO NOT delete the warehouse. NOTE:  When removing/changing WH/Location system will prompt the user if any POs are open, which are using the modified location. This prompt will allow the user to abort or continue with the change. 
      If the user adds new AVL's to the Internal part number, they may click on this button and it will bring up the following screen.     

      Check the radial for the Warehouse to be added.Choose the mfg. from the pull down you want added to the consigned AVL. Highlight the Customer(s) Consigned Part number you want to update.  

      Depress on "Add Selected AVL to the Highlighted Parts"

      The following warning will appear.
       
       

      If "yes" is depressed you will receive the following screen: 

      If "No" is depressed the action will be deleted.
       
      Depress "OK" and the transaction is completed
        

       

      MRP INFO TAB

      MRP Info Tab    Order Policy, Min Order Qty, Order Multiple,  Purchase Lead Time, Pull In Days,Push Out Days, Re-Order Qty, Re-Order Point

      CUSTOMER TAB

       Customer Tab Add or Delete a Customer and Customer PN.  

      SUPPLIER TAB

      Supplier Tab  Add or Delete a Supplier and Supplier PN.

      MFGR PART SPEC

      Mfgr Part Spec Load/change picture or .pdf file. 

       Depress the Save Action button at the completion of each edit.

      1.3.5.1.4.5. Delete an Inventory Control Record
      Find an Inventory Record
       
       
      Depress the Delete button and the following message will appear for a BUY part:
       
       
      Depress the Delete button and the following message will appear for a MAKE part:   NOTE:  Any ECO's created against this part will NOT be available for selection. 
       
       
       
      The System will allow the users to delete an Inventory Part from the system if: 

      there is no Quantity on Hand
      it is not used on a BOM
      there is no shortages or allocations
      there is no open Purchase Orders and if the receipt has been reconciled and posted to the General Ledger 
       
      Note:  When deleting an MPN - keep in mind that the MPN will be deleted from the screen but NOT from the tables. The MPN's that have been deleted are retained in the tables for history tracking purposes.   




      If BUY or MAKE part has qty on hand the following message will appear and user will NOT be allowed to delete the inventory part:
      If BUY Part is associated with consigned part(s) the following message will appear and user will NOT be allowed to delete inventory part:
      If BUY part is used on a BOM the following message will appear and user will NOT be allowed to delete the ivnentory part:
      If BUY part has shortages or allocations the following message will appear an XL spreadsheet will be created with detailed information and user will NOT be allowed to delete the inventory part:
      If BUY part has open PO(s)  the following message will appear and user will NOT be allowed to delete the inventory part:
      If BUY part has NOT been reconciled the following message will appear and user will NOT be allowed to delete the inventory part:
      If BUY part has NOT been Posted to GL the following message will appear and user will NOT be allowed to delete the inventory part:
      If MAKE part has NOT been Posted to GL the following message will appear and user will NOT be allowed to delete the inventory part:
       
       
       
      If you do not want to loose the History, the other option you have is to change the Status of the Part from Active to Inactive rather than deleting the ICM part.  To see further detail on change the status of a part see Article #931 .
       
       
       
       
       
      1.3.5.1.4.6. Attach a Related Document

      Find an existing Inventory item Record, or Add a new Inventory item record.

      Depress the   button, and enter password.

      The following screen will appear:

      Depress the Add record icon, enter in a Document Number, REV, Doc Description, Doc Date, Doc Note; 

        

      To load a document double click in the PDF File field and the following screen will appear:

      Depress the Load Document button and the following screen will appear:  The PDF screen will allow you to load almost any type of document; (Word, Excel, pdf, Images, etc .... )  It will NOT let you load a document with symbols in the file name.  Example "Int ' l".  (Symbol in Red).  If you are receiving a system error when attempting to load a document check the file name to make sure there are no symbols within that file name. 

      Locate the document and double click on it and the document will populate screen.

      Depress the Save record icon to save or depress the Abandon changes icon to abandon changes.  The following screen will appear:

      Depress the Save record icon to save or depress the Abandon changes icon to abandon changes.  

      Once documents are saved the "Related Documentation" button will display in Red.  This Document will be available to view in the PO Module and PO Receiving Module also.

       

      1.3.5.1.5. Reports - ICM Mgmt
      1.3.5.1.5.1. Inventory Control Reports
      To obtain the Inventory reports, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen. 


      The following screen will appear:

      Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

      Highlight the desired report and then depress the Option tab if applicable. 




       
       

      Inventory Material Re-order List Report  - The Material Re-order Report lists all inventory on hand that has less quantities available than the minimum stocking level prescribed for that part.

      Select the Inventory Type, either Internal, In Store, Internal & In Store or Consign by clicking on the appropriate radio button. Depress the OK button.

      This report uses the "Re-order Point" to decide if the part need to be re-ordered, not the "Re-order Qty" . 
       
       

      The Following is printed:   This report displays all inventory on hand that has less quantities available than the minimum stocking level prescribed for that part.

      Inventory On Hand Report - This report lists material on hand in inventory locations, including WIP.  There are several ways to select the information so that the report is specific to chosen areas.  The report shows the amount of inventory in each location, including identification of the manufacturer and allocated inventory.

      To select class, highlight the Class and depress the > button.  If you want all classes, depress the >> button.

      To select warehouse, highlight the warehouse and depress the > button.  To select all warehouses, depress the >> button.

      Enter Part Number range, if desired.  If left blank it will check all records. 

      Select to sort by, either Part Number or Warehouse by clicking on the appropriate radio button.

      If you want to suppress records with a zero, check the box.

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The following is printed:  This report displays the amount of inventory on hand in each location, including WIP, and identification of the manufacturer, Lot Code information, and allocated inventory.  There are several ways to select the information so that the report is specific to chosen areas. 



      Transaction Detail Log
      Report
        - This Report lists all inventory movement transactions for the selected criteria for the report. 

      Highlighting the Transaction Detail Log report brings up a further selection:

      Highlight the desired selection, either All, Receipt, Issue or Trans/Exp.

      Depress the Options tab will bring up the following screen:

       

      To select class, highlight the Class and depress the > button.  If you want all classes, depress the >> button.

      To select warehouse, highlight the warehouse and depress the > button. To select all warehouses, depress the >> button.

      Enter Part Number range, if desired.  If left blank it will check all records. 
       
      To clear the part range, check the Clear Range Entries box.

      Enter the desired date range From and To.   To clear the date, check the Clear Selection box.

      If you want the reason to appear on the report, check the With Reason? box.
       
      If you want the Serial numbers to appear on the report, check the box.  (Note:  Leading Zero's will not be displayed on report).

      Select the Inventory Type, either Internal, Internal & In Store, In Store or Consign by clicking on the appropriate radio button.

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The following is printed: This report displays all inventory movement transactions for the selected criteria for the report.  Issued qty's are displayed as negative, and Received qty's are displayed as postive. 
       
       

      Note: The reference field as entered in the Inventory Handling module will display on the Transaction Detail report.

      Part Transaction Log With Balance Report - Lists all transactions for a specific part from date selected.

      Select the Inventory Type, either Internal, Internal & In Store, In Store or Consign by clicking on the appropriate radio button.

      Enter the Internal Part Number/Revision.

      Enter the From Date, (the To Date is todays), Part Number/Revision.

      If you want the reason to appear on the report, check the  With Reason? box.
       
      If you want the Serial numbers to appear on the report, check the box.  (Note:  Leading Zero's will not be displayed on report).

      Depress the OK button.

      Note:  The beginning balance is a calculation based on transactions. It is not associated with the GL, nor has any effect on it.    If the beginning balance is being displayed as anthing other than "0" it may be caused by the UOM being changed with qty on hand.  See Article #3414 for further detail.
       

      The following is printed: This report displays all transactions for a specific part from date selected.   Issued qty's are displayed as negative, and Received qty's are displayed as postive. 
       
      To read this report you need to start from the bottom and work your way up.
      We use the current qty OH, then get all the receiving, issue, transfer... records, and go backwards to create the transaction with balance report. For example, I have a new part like this: 

      Starts with a 0.00 balance:
      01/05/09      receiving  230
      01/08/09      issue        15
      01/15/09      receiving   75

      The Qty OH now is 290, the report gets all the receiving, issue, transfer records and sorts the data by date from latest to oldest to get the beginning balance.

      Qty OH:     290
      +75   balance:                215 (by -75 from the 290)
      -15   balance                  230 (by adding 15)
      +230 beginning balance:    0 (by -230 to get the balance)
       




      Inventory Valuation Report - This Report lists all inventory by part class and summerizes the inventory value of the parts selected.

      To select class, highlight the Class and depress the > button.  If you want all classes, depress the >> button.

      To select warehouse, highlight the warehouse and depress the > button.  To select all warehouses, depress the >> button.

      Enter Part Number range, if desired.  If left blank it will check all records. 

      To clear the part range, check the Clear Range Entries box.

      Select the type of Cost you want to appear on the report: Standard, Purchase or User Define by depressing the appropriate radio button.
       
      Select status of parts:  All or Active Only by depressing the appropriate radio button.
       
      Depress the OK button.
       
      NOTE:  The Last Paid information is calculated from the Last Change date not necessarily the PO Date that is displayed in the Purchase History box. If a user happens to edit an older PO (that does not match the Purchase Order History screen) and saves the changes the Last Paid will be updated based on the last change order recorded and the PO History screen will still remain as is.  (Example: If a PO was originally created in 2002 , but edited and saved today, it would then be included into the Last Paid record from the date it was modified). 
       

      The following is printed: This report displays all inventory by part class and summerizes the inventory value of the parts selected.
       
       

      Inventory and WIP Valuation Report 

      Check the box if you want to suppress 0 quantity on hand.

      Check the box if you want to round quantities to Integer.

      Select the part class by highlighting the one you wish and depressing the > button.  If you want all classes, depress the >> button.

      Enter Part Number range, if desired.  If left blank it will check all records. 

      To clear the part range, check the Clear Range Entries box.

      Select the type of Cost you want to appear on the report: Standard, Purchase or User Define by depressing the appropriate radio button.
       
      Select status of parts:  All or Active Only by depressing the appropriate radio button.

      Depress the OK button.
       

      The following is printed:

      See Article #1777  "How WIP Qty and WIP Value is Calculated".  
      See Article #913    "How Manex tracks and values the dollars in WIP".  
      See Article #3068  "Why the Accounting Values do not always match the Inventory reports".

      Inventory WIP Valuation Report by Work Order

      Check the box if you want to round quantities to Integer.

      Select the Part Class by highlighting the one you wish and depressing the > button.  If you want all classes, depress the >> button.

      Select the Work Order by highlighting the one you wish and depressing the > button.  If you want all classes, depress the >> button.

      Enter Part Number range, if desired.  If left blank it will check all records. 

      To clear the part range, check the Clear Range Entries box.

      Select the type of Cost you want to appear on the report: Standard, Purchase or User Define by depressing the appropriate radio button.


      Depress the OK button.
       

      The following is printed:  Every new WO will start on the new page.
       
       
      Inventory List With No Assigned BOM Report - All material on hand with no parent assembly associated with it. 
         

      This report displays all material on hand with no parent assembly associated with it.

      Select the Part Type to Display:  All, Internal, or Consigned Only by depressing the appropriate radio button.

       
      The following is Printed:  Note:  The first letter of the Status is displayed to the left of the "Part Number" column (A for Active and I for In-active).  
       
       

      Unused Inventory List Report - All inventory for which no transactions have occured since a selected date.

      Select Inventory Type: Internal, In-Store, Internal & In-Store, or consign by depressing the appropriate radio button .

      Select the part class by highlighting the one you wish and depressing the > button.  If you want all classes, depress the >> button.

      To select warehouse, highlight the warehouse and depress the > button. To select all warehouses, depress the >> button.

      Enter Part Number range, if desired.  If left blank it will check all records. 

      To clear the part range, check the Clear Range Entries box.

      Enter the desired date.

      To Clear selection, check the Clear Selection box.

      If you want to suppress records with a zero, check the box.

      Depress the OK button.   Note:  The search for the un-used parts will be based on the MFGR/ MPN level.

       

      The following is printed:  This report displays all inventory for which no transactions have occured since the selected date based on the MFGR/MPN level.   

       

      Part Cross Reference Report 

      Highlighting the Part Cross Reference report brings up a further selection:  

      Select the type of Cross Reference desired. 

      This will display the
      relation between Mfgr part number and Internal part number.

       

      Choose Sort By selection, either Manufacturer Part Number or Manufacturer by clicking on the radial.

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The following is printed:  This will display the relation between Mfgr part number and Internal part number.

      Part List by Manufacturer and Manufacturer Part Number Report - Lists by manufacturers, all part numbers by manufacturers part number, user type, class, description and part number, along with quantity in stores.

      Highlight the manufacturer of preference and depress the > button.  If you want all manufacturers depress the >> button.

       

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The following is printed:  This report displays all part numbers by manufacturers part number, user type, class, description and part number, along with quantity in stores.

       

      Physical Inventory Work Sheets Report - Work sheets to be used to take physical inventory.

      Select Inventory Type: Internal, In-Store, Internal & In-Store, or consign by depressing the appropriate radio button .

      Select the part type:  Make, Buy or Both by depressing the appropriate radio button.
       
      Select either With Book Quantity or Without Book Quantity by depressing the appropriate radio button.
       
      Select to sort by:  Warehouse/Location or Part Number by depressing the appropriate radio button.
       
      Enter Part Number range, if desired.  If left blank it will check all records.   
       
      To clear the part range, check the Clear Range Entries box.

      Depress the OK button. 

       

      The following is printed:  This is the Worksheets to be used to take physical inventory.
       
       
      List of Duplicate Descriptions - This report displays all part numbers with duplicate descriptions


      In Store Items Without Contract Report -   This report displays all part numbers from Invt mfgr Instore without contract 
       
       

      In Store Issued Items Without Contract Report - This report displays a list of items issued from in-stores without contract  
       

      Customer Reference Report - This report lists by customers, all customers part number along with quantity in stores
       

      Part Class and Type List - This report is a listing of Part Classes & Types
       

      Print Inventory Labels 

      The Print Inventory labels report requires that the Barcode Font be installed.

      Highlighting the Print Inventory Labels brings up a selection of printers to be used:
       
      Laser Printer (sheet):  Avery Label # 5163, 4" x 2", 2 accross, 5 down, printed portrait
      Portable Printer (roll):  Redline Solutions, Zebra QL DT Labels 4x3 PN 81475
      Portable Printer (roll):  Zebra Printer (roll):  Label size 2" x 3"  (for Zebra printers Part #10000286 (or equivalent) 
       

      Select Inventory Type: Internal, In-Store, Internal & In-Store, or consign by depressing the appropriate radio button .

      Enter number of Labels to Print (1-99).

      Enter Part Number range.  (This field is required).   
       
      To clear the part range, check the Clear Range Entries box.
       
      Enter the Warehouse and location, if desired. 
       
      Depress the OK button. 

       
       

      The following is printed.

       

      Allocated Report for Closed and Cancelled WO - This report displays a listing of Part Classes & Types
       

       

       

      Allocated Report by Part Number Report - This report displays a listing of Allocated Part Numbers
       

       

       

      Allocated Report by Work Order Report - This report displays a listing of Allocated Part Numbers by Work Order
       

       

      Material Type Change Report - Listing of the parts that have their material type changed since given date.

      Enter the From Date, (the To Date is todays).

      To clear date check the clear box.

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The following is printed: - Listing of the parts that have their material type changed since given date.
       

      Material Type Change Log Detail Report - Listing of the parts that have their old and current material types changed since given date.  

      Enter the From Date, (the To Date is todays).

      To clear date check the clear box.

      Enter in a Part Range, if desired.  If left blank it will check all records.
       
      To clear the part range, check the Clear Range Entries box.

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The following is printed:  This report displays the history of the Inventory Material Type Changes. 

      Inventory and AVL Material Type Validation - This report goes through the inventory part numbers to check and lists if the Inventory and AVL material types are not in sycn.  It does not update the inventory material types.

      Depress the OK button.  User will receive the following popup to warn them that the report could take a while to run.  So at this point you have the option of continuing or aborting the procedure.

      Depress Yes and the following report will appear:   This report compares inventory material type with AVL calculated material type and lists those part numbers which have different material types in inventory and AVL levels.

       

       

       

      1.3.5.1.6. FAQs - ICM Mgmt
      Facts and Questions for the Inventory Control Module
      1.3.5.1.7. ManEx Minutes (ICM)
      1.3.5.2. Inventory Handling
      1.3.5.2.1. Prerequisites for Inventory Handling

      After activation, "Inventory Handling" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
      System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
       

      Inventory Master Each part to be received, issued or transferred must be set up in  Inventory Control Mgmt .
      GL Defaults The Inventory Handling GL Defaults must be setup. 
      Reason Codes The Inventory Handling Reason Codes must be setup. 
      MRB Warehouse

      A MRB (Material Review Board) Warehouse must be setup in Warehouse Setup

      1.3.5.2.2. Introduction for Inventory Handling

      The Inventory Handling module is for receiving without a purchase order, issuing without a packing list, transferring inventory items from one warehouse location to another and to transfer discrepant materials into the MRB (Material Review Board) Warehouse.

       

      Receiving is particularly useful in setting up the initial inventory when first launching ManEx. 

       

      Issuing is useful to expense Inventory Items.

       

      This module can also be used to adjust the Inventory Master to the actual count after taking a physical inventory, if the user does NOT have the ManEx Physical Inventory module.

      If the user has in-store items, which they want to return to Vendor without any impact on accounting or PO (like obsolete parts), within the Issue page users will see a check box "Return In-store 2 Vendor".  This field will only be visible if the In-Store warehouse is selected, and if check-marked no purchase order will be created and there will also be no impact on the GL values.

      Buy Part Serialization Feature:  The users will be able to properly assign Serial numbers to Buy parts through the Receiving screen.  Within the other remaining Inventory Handling screens (Issue, Transfer, & MRB) Serial number selection boxes will appear.

      When receiving a part with no Warehouse or location setup within the Inventory Control AVL, and that specific part/warehouse has been marked as "Allow Auto Creation", users will be able to set warehouse and location directly from the Inventory Handling Receipt.
       
      These transactions are recorded and tracked in the "Transaction Detail Log Report" and "Part Transaction Log with Balance Report" located in the Inventory Control Mgmt module.

       

      1.3.5.2.3. Fields & Definitions for Inventory Handling
      1.3.5.2.3.1. Receiving Tab

      The main screen

      Receiving tab field definitions

      Part Source The source of the part, Buy, Make, Consigned or Phantom
      Part Number The internally assigned number of the part.
      (Rev) The revision number assigned to the part.
       

      Depressing this button will reveal any notes about the part that have been entered in the item master.

      Received Qty The quantity received. See Article #1240 for more detail on why the system will not allow user to enter in a fraction of a number, and an alternative.
      UOM

      The Unit of Measure for the part.

      Receiving Account Description

      The description (and its related General Ledger account) pertaining to the receipt.

      Manufacturer The name of the manufacturer of the part.
      Manufacturer’s Part Number

      The number the Manufacturer has assigned to the part.

      Warehouse The name of the Warehouse.
      Location

      The location within the warehouse where the part received will be placed.

      This button will ONLY be displayed if the "Allow Auto Creating Location at Receiving" box is checked in the Mfgr/AVL  Quantity Info tab within the ICM module.
      Part Class

      The classification to which the part number belongs.

      Part Type The type within the classification to which the part number belongs.
      Description

      The description of the part number.

      Reason

      The reason for the receipt.

      Reference

      The reference for the receipt.

      1.3.5.2.3.2. Issue Tab



      Issue tab field definitions

       Part Source

      The source of the part, Buy, Make, Consigned or Phantom.

       Part Number

      The internally assigned number of the part.

       (Rev) The revision number assigned to the part.
       

      If this button is shown in RED, depressing this button will reveal any notes about the part that have been entered in the item master.

       Issued Qty

      The quantity issued. See Article #1240 for more detail on why the system will not allow user to enter in a fraction of a number, and an alternative.

       UOM The Unit of Measure for the part.
       Issue Account Description

      The description (and its related General Ledger account) pertaining to the issue.

       Issued To The name of the project, etc.
       Manufacturer

      The name of the manufacturer of the part.

      Manufacturer’s Part Number The number the Manufacturer has assigned to the part.
       Warehouse

      The name of the Warehouse.

       Location The location within the warehouse where the part issued will be pulled from.
       Qty Available

      The on hand quantity.

       Part Number

      The internal number assigned to the part.

       Quantity

      The quantity issued.

       Part Class

      The classification to which the part number belongs.

       Part Type

      The type within the classification to which the part number belongs.

       Description

      The description of the part number.

       Reference

      The user defined reference for this issue.

       

      1.3.5.2.3.3. Transfer Tab

      Transfer tab field definitions

      Part Source

      The source of the part, Buy, Make, Consigned or Phantom.

      Part Number

      The internally assigned number of the part.

      (Rev) The revision number assigned to the part.

      If this button is displayed in RED depressing this button will reveal any notes about the part that have been entered in the item master.

      Part Class The classification to which the part number belongs.
      Part Type The type within the classification to which the part number belongs.
      Description The description of the part number.
      Manufacturer The name of the manufacturer of the part.
      Manufacturer’s Part Number

      The number the Manufacturer has assigned to the part.

      From Warehouse

      The name of the Warehouse.

      From Location The location within the warehouse where the part transferred will be pulled from.
       In-Store Supplier

      The name of the In-Store supplier.

       To Warehouse

      The name of the Warehouse.

       To Location The location within the warehouse where the part transferred will be placed.
       Qty Available

      The on hand quantity.

       Quantity to Transfer

      The quantity transferred.  See Article #1240 for more detail on why the system will not allow user to enter in a fraction of a number, and an alternative.

       UOM

      The Unit of Measure for the part.

       Reason

      The reason for the Transfer.

       Reference

      The reference for the Transfer.

       

       

      1.3.5.2.3.4. MRB Tab

      MRB (Material Review Board) tab field definitions

       Part Source

      The source of the part, Buy, Make, Consigned or Phantom.

       Part Number

      The internally assigned number of the part.

       (Rev)

      The revision number assigned to the part.

       Part Class

      The classification to which the part number belongs.

       Part Type

      The type within the classification to which the part number belongs.

       Description

      The description of the part number.

       Manufacturer

      The name of the manufacturer of the part.

      Manufacturer’s Part Number

      The number the Manufacturer has assigned to the part.

       Part Number The internal number assigned to the part.
       Quantity The quantity transferred.
       From Warehouse

      The name of the Warehouse.

       From Location

      The location within the warehouse where the part transferred will be pulled from.

       To Warehouse

      The name of the Warehouse.

       To Location

      The location within the warehouse where the part transferred will be placed.

       Qty Available The on hand quantity.
       Quantity to Transfer

      The quantity transferred. See Article #1240 for more detail on why the system will not allow user to enter in a fraction of a number, and an alternative.

       UOM

      The Unit of Measure for the part.

       Reason The reason for the Transfer.
       Reference

      The reference pertaining to the Transfer.

       

      1.3.5.2.4. How To ..... for Inventory Handling
      1.3.5.2.4.1. Receiving Tab

      Depress Inventory Mgmt/Inventory Control Management/Inventory Handling 

       

      The main screen will appear

      Inventory Handling is used for receipt of non-purchase order receipts.

      To add inventory, depress the Receiving tab.

      1. Depress the Add button.
      2. Type in your password.
      3. Select the Part Source from the pull down menu (BUY, MAKE, CONSG, or PHANTOM).
      4. Type in the Part Number, if Part Source is "CONSG" you will need to enter Customer Name from pull down, then you will have a choice to enter in customer PN or Internal PN.
      5. Part type, class, and description will default in.
      6. Type in the Received quantity.
      7. Select the Receiving Account Description from the pull down menu.
      8. Select the Manufacturer & manufacturer part number from the pull down list.
      9. The warehouse will default in. If the default is not the warehouse you want you may choose from the pull down list.
      10. Select the reason for the receipt from the pull down list.
      11. Type in the Reference.
      12. Depress the Save button.

      This message is a general message user gets when the program can not find any warehouse/location for this part number. This message will appear if the part is locked in cycle count or physical inventory.  User must reconcile and post the physical inventory for this part and then you will be able to process the records within Inventory Handling.  
       

      The completed screen will look like this for a Buy, Make or Phantom part.



      The completed screen will look like this for a Consigned part.

      The completed screen will look like this for a Serialized part.  Note:  Users are allowed to receive in once issued out SN(s) back into stock, if  the SN is for the same part number, and was issued out through inventory handling, then the system will re-link it to its old history.  If the SN has been shipped out of the system via a packing list, the following message will be displayed



      and the user will be required to receive it back in through the RMA Process.   
       

      The completed screen will look like this for a Lot Coded part.


       
      If the "Allow Auto Creating Location at Receiving" box has been selected for a specific AVL in the ICM module the "New Location" button will appear on the Receiving screen as shown below.  
       
       
      Depress the New Location button and the following screen will appear, giving the user the option to create a new Warehouse/Location for this part: 
       
       
      Depress "Yes" and the following screen will appear, listing the Warehouse(s) that have the "Allow to Auto Create Location at Receiving" box selected in the Warehouse Setup module.  
       
       
      If user selects InStore a Supplier selection will appear in the screen:
       
       
      When all the information has been entered the New Warehouse/Location will appear in the Quantity Info screen with the ICM module.

      1.3.5.2.4.2. Issue Tab

      Issuing or Expensing Inventory Items with no Work Order

      The following types of items would be covered in the Issue screen:

      1.  Issuing to Cost of Goods Sold (Usually Non-taxable)

      Such as: Tems with no Bills of Material; Prototypes and Pilot Products for Resale; Items not classified as “Used in Kit”

      2. Expensing for In-House Consumption (Usually Taxable)

      Such as: Items consumed in the production process but not shipped as a part of product for resale; Items used for calibration or testing of the production process; Items used for samples or prototypes which are not resold.

      3.  Return In-store 2 Vendor

      If the user has in-store items, which they want to return to the Vendor without any impact on accounting or PO (like obsolete parts) there is a check box available within the issue page  "Return In-store 2 Vendor". (This field will only be visible if the In-store warehouse is selected).  If check-marked no purchase order will be created and there will also be no impact on the Gl values. 
      NOTE:   Any Return to Vendor will NOT be counted as inventory used in the EAU calculation.

      To access this screen, depress the Issue tab and the following screen will appear:


      To issue inventory items follow these steps.
      1. Depress the Add button.
      2. Type in your password.
      3. Select the Part Source from the pull down menu. (BUY, MAKE, CONSG, or PHANTOM).
      4. Type in the Part Number, if Part Source is "CONSG" you will need to enter Customer Name from pull down, then you will have a choice to enter in customer PN or Internal PN.
      5. Part type, class, and description will default in.
      6. Type in the Issued quantity.
      7. Select the Issue Account Description from the pull down menu.
      8. Type in Issued To.
      9. Select the Manufacturer & manufacturer part number from the pull down list.
      10. The warehouse will default in. If the default is not the warehouse you want you may choose from the pull down list.
      11. Type in the Reference.
      12. Depress the Save button.

      This message is a general message user gets when the program can not find any warehouse/location for this part number. This message will appear if the part is locked in cycle count or physical inventory.  User must reconcile and post the physical inventory for this part and then you will be able to process the records within Inventory Handling.  

       

      The completed screen will look like this.
       
       
       
       
      If issuing parts with Serial Numbers once user has entered the Part number info, etc. 
       
       
      Users have the option of selecting the Serial Numbers to be issued two different ways:
       
      1.  By highlighting and using the arrows         or
       
      2.  Depressing the Enter Serial Numbers button and the following screen will appear:
       
       
       
      Select the proper radial "Single Entry" or "Range" and enter in the From and To SN's:
       
       
      Depress the Save button and the SN's will transfer over into the Inventory Handling issue screen.  The number of Serial numbers selected will be displayed, as shown below:
       
       
      Depress the Save button to save changes, or the Abandon changes button the abandon changes.
       
      1.3.5.2.4.3. Transfer Tab
       
      Depress the Transfer tab and the following Transfer screen will appear:
       

      To transfer inventory from one warehouse to another follow these steps.

      1. Depress the Add button.
      2. Type in your password.
      3. Select the Part Source from the pull down menu. (BUY, MAKE, CONSG, or PHANTOM).
      4. Type in the Part Number, if Part Source is "CONSG" you will need to enter Customer Name from pull down, then you will have a choice to enter in customer PN or Internal PN.
      5. Part type, class, and description will default in.
      6. Select the Manufacturer & manufacturer part number from the pull down list.
      7. Select the ‘From’warehouse from the pull down list.
      8. Then select the ‘To’ warehouse from the pull down list.
      9. Type in quantity to transfer.
      10. Select the reason from the pull down list.
      11. Type in the reference.
      12. Depress the Save button. 

       

      Note For this feature to work properly, the Inventory Part Number must have two warehouse locations assigned to it in the Inventory master.  The From Location must have an inventory balance.   If user attempts to transfer parts that do not have two warehouse locations, or from regular inventory location to MRB  (Note:  System will NOT allow users to transfer parts out of MRB location to regular inventory if parts were transfered into the MRB warehouse through PO Receiving).  You will receive the following message.  This screen is used to move parts from a regular warehouse to another regular warehouse.  Or to move parts that are already located in MRB back into regular stock.  To move parts from stock to MRB you will need to use the Inventory Handling MRB screen

       

      This message is a general message user gets when the program can not find any warehouse/location for this part number. This message will appear if the part is locked in cycle count or physical inventory.  User must reconcile and post the physical inventory for this part and then you will be able to process the records within Inventory Handling.  

       

      The completed screen will look like this.


       
      If transfering qty from an In-Store warehouse to an Internal warehouse an accounting transaction will be created in Inventory Transfer upon saving the transfer.  Then user will then need to create the In-Store PO within the PO module. 

       

      1.3.5.2.4.4. MRB Tab
      MRB (Material Review Board) Warehouse Overview

      The MRB (Material Review Board) Warehouse is where the board members determine whether to return discrepant material to the Supplier.

      Depress the MRB tab.  The following screen will appear.

      To Transfer Inventory Items from Inventory to MRB follow these steps.

      1. Depress the Add button.
      2. Type in your password.
      3. Select the Part Source from the pull down menu. (BUY, MAKE, CONSG, or PHANTOM).
      4. Type in the Part Number, if Part Source is "CONSG" you will need to enter Customer Name from pull down, then you will have a choice to enter in customer PN or Internal PN.
      5. Part type, class, and description will default in.
      6. Select the manufacturer & manufacturer part number from the pull down list.
      7. Select the From Warehouse from the pull down list:
      8. The To Warehouse automatically defaults to MRB (Material Review Board).
      9. Type in the Quantity to Transfer.
      10. Select the Reason for transfer from the pull down list:
      11. Type in the Reference.
      12. Depress the Save button.

       

      This message is a general message user gets when the program can not find any warehouse/location for this part number. This message will appear if the part is locked in cycle count or physical inventory.  User must reconcile and post the physical inventory for this part and then you will be able to process the records within Inventory Handling.  

       

      The completed screen will appear as follows:



      Once the preceding steps have been completed, the user may Add to PO DMR (Discrepant Material Return) module, 
      or you may transfer it back into Inventory using the Transfer tab .

      Once the DMR (discrepant material return) has been added and saved, a Debit Memo will be created in the Accounting System.  Additionally, the corresponding entry will be created and the balance in the Accounts Payable Aging will adjust.   

       

      1.3.5.2.5. Reports - Inventory Handling

      To obtain the Inventory Handling module transactions, enter the Inventory Control Management Module.

       

       

      The main screen will appear. 




      Select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen. 


      The following screen will appear.
       

      Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

      Highlight the Transaction Detail Log report or the Part Transaction Log With Balance report   

       
       

      The following option screen will appear at the bottom of the screen, Select the type of Detail Report desired by highlighting it:  All, Receipt, Issue, or Trans/Exp.


      Depress the Options tab.  
       
       
      The following option screen will appear:

      Highlight the Part Class you desire and depress the > button.  If you want All, depress the >> button.

      Highlight the Warehouse you want and depress the > button.  If you want All, depress the >> button.

      If you want a specific part number or range of part numbers, enter the first number and the last number in the Part Number Range fields.
       
      Depress the Clear Range Entries to clear the Part Number Range fields.

      Enter the date selection From and To.  To clear selection check the Clear Selection box.
       
      Check the With Reason box if you want the reason displayed on the report.

      Check the Show Serial Number box if you want the serial numbers displayed onthe report.

      Select the Inventory Type by depressing the appropriate radio button: Internal, Internal & In Store, In Store or Consign.

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The one of the following reports will print depending on the report selected:   Notice that the Issued qty's will be displayed as a negative and the Received qty's will be displayed as a postive. 
       
       
       
      1.3.5.2.6. FAQs - Inventory Handling
      Facts and Definitions for the Inventory Handling Module
      1.3.5.3. IPS Upload
      1.3.5.3.1. Prerequisites for the IPS Upload
      1. User must have the In-Store optional module.
      2. After activation, "IPS Upload" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access. 
      3. User has to complete the required fields in the IPSimport.xlt located in the xlfiles directory to import to a In-Store PO.   
      4. The part must exist in the Inventory Control Mgmt module and must have the Supplier and In-Store warehouse setup within the Inventory Control Mgmt module.  
      1.3.5.3.2. Introduction for the IPS Upload
      This upload is designed to add quantities to the existing part number and MPN into the in-Store location.  If the MPN has "auto location" checked the upload will allow the user to auto add a location that does not exist.  The quantity will update if the contract does not exist and will be created for the price entered in the "price" column.  If the price is omitted the system will use the material price for the part as entered in the inventory module and Inventory receiving transactions will be populated, but there will be no affect on accounting upon receipt/import.

       
       
      1.3.5.3.3. Fields & Defintions for the IPS Upload
      1.3.5.3.3.1. In-Store XL Spreadsheet
       
       
      SupName
      (Required) Existing In-Store Supplier Name for In-Store Warehouse
      Contr_no
      (Required) Contract Number (If contract already exists the contract number entered must match existing)  
      qty_oh
      (Required) Quantity On-Hand
      part_no
      (Required) Existing Internal Part Number with exsiting In-Store Warehouse Setup
      revision
      (Required) Existing Revision (if applicable)
      partmfgr
      (Required) Existing Part Manufacturer with existing In-Store Warehouse Setup
      mfgr_pt_no
      (Required) Existing Manufacturer Part Number with existing In-Store Warehouse Setup
      Warehouse
      (Required) Existing In-Store Warehouse
      location
      (Required) Existing In-Store Warehouse Location
      price
      (Option) Contract Price (If price is omitted it will use material price for the part as entered in the inventory module).
      LotCode
      (Required if Lot Coded Part)  Lot Code
      ExpDate
      (Required if Lot Code Part) Expiration Date
      Reference
      (Required if Lot Coded Part) Reference
      SerialNoM
      (Required if Part is Serialized)  If the part is serialized the users can enter all serial numbers into the “SerialNoM” column of the spreadsheet separated by one of the following; coma, semicolon, space, tab.  If the user wants to enter range of the serial numbers they have to separate starting and beginning of the range with the dash surrounded by spaces like “ – “. The reason for that is that serial number itself might have “-“ as a part of the serial numbers. For example serial numbers entered as
      “C123 - C125” will translate as C123, C124, C125    

      but serial number entered as “C123-C125” will translate as “C123-C125” (notice no space surrounded the “-“). The following example will show other combinations that could be treated as ranges in the upload;

      Z1000002 - Z100005 (Z1000002, Z1000003. Z1000004, Z1000005)
      FU12 – 15  (FU12, FU13, FU14, FU15)
      98 – 103 (98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103)
      z150-0009 - z150-0013 (z150-0009, z150-0010, z15-0011, z15-0012, z15-0013)

      Here is an example of the entered serial numbers that will not translate into the range;

      H890129292 K87827327 (H890129292, K87827327)
      V5678888X - V32787382S (V5678888X, V32787382S)
      540 - c670 (540, c670)

       
       
       
      1.3.5.3.4. How To ..... for the IPS Upload
      1.3.5.3.4.1. Add - Upload to IPS
      Enter Inventory Mgt/Inventory Control Management/IPS Upload
      User will get a prompt to find the file which they want to upload and then the system will import the data and proceed with validation and saving.
       

      Locate XL File to Upload

       
      The following Warning will appear This message is for user to verify the number of records being loaded from the import sheet.  User may depress "YES" to continue the upload or "NO" to abort the upload.

       
        
      If you depress No to Abort Upload the user will be prompted the following message that the Inventory Upload was not complete
      If you depress Yes to Continue the user will be prompted the following message that the Inventory Upload complete.
       
       

      If the system finds any problems with template the user will be prompted the following message and exception XL file will be created in the Inv Exception XL Sub Directory on the server.

      Depress OK and user will receive the message (shown above) that the "Inventory Upload was not complete" and system will abort.
       

      During the upload if user has a contract already setup the following message will appear.  If user selects "Yes"  Upload will continue, if user selects "No" Upload will abort.  

      During the upload if the pricing on the xl spreadsheet is different than the existing contract prices the following message will appear, giving you the option to overwrite the existing price.  If price is omitted from xl spreadsheet system will use the material price from the Inventory Control screen.  If user has contract pricing already setup for example: Up to qty of  5 = $1.00, Up to qty of  100 = $0.94, Up to qty of 101 = $0.95. When the in-store PO is created it will find the correct price break.   Also if there are multiple records for the same part, which will end up on the same PO, (like multiple serial numbers or lot codes), the qty will be combined in determining the correct price break.
      During the upload if the contract number listed on the xl spreadsheet is different than the existing contract number, user will receive the following message and system will abort. 
       
      Once the upload is complete the "Transaction Detail Log" report is updated for In-Store location, as displayed below:
       
       
      Since these items are being received into a In-Store location there will be no affect on accounting upon receipt/import.
       
       
       
       
       
       
       
       
       
       
       
      1.3.5.4. Lookup Manufacturer Part Number from XL List
      1.3.5.4.1. Prerequisites for Lookup Mfgr PN from XL List

      Excel file must Exist

      After activation, "Inventory Control" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
      System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

      1.3.5.4.2. Introduction for Lookup Mfgr PN from XL List

      Use this function to find existing Manufacturer part numbers in the Invntory Control module.

      1.3.5.4.3. Fields & Definitions for Lookup Mfgr PN from XL List

      Fields & Definitions

        Depress this button to find the Excel spreadsheet you created listing the Mfgr Part Numbers and Mfgr you are searching for 
      Manufacturer Part Number Mfgr Part Number listed on the Excel spreadsheet
      Manufacturer Mfgr listed on the Excel spreadsheet
      Internal Part Number Internal Part Number attached to the Mfgr part number or Mfgr found in system
      Revision Revision (if applicable) attached to Internal Part Number
      Description Description of part attached to the Internal Part Number

       

       

      1.3.5.4.4. How To ...... for Lookup Mfgr PN from XL List
      1.3.5.4.4.1. Create Excel File for Lookup

      Excel file must have single column of MPN, and data must be in a range named MFGRLIST

       

       

      1.3.5.4.4.2. How to Lookup Mfgr Part Number from XL List

      Enter Inventory Mgt/Inventory Control Management/Lookup Manufacturer Part Number from XL List Module

       

       

      The following screen will appear:

       

       

      Depress the "Browse for Excel File" to locate the file name created

       

       

      Double Click on the File name and the following results appear.  Two XL files are created, one XL file lists the Mfgr Part Numbers found in system, (which is the ones that appear on screen)and the other XL file lists the Mfgr Part Numbers not found.

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

      1.3.5.5. Inventory Cycle Count
      1.3.5.5.1. Prerequisites for Inventory Cycle Count
      Prerequisites Required for Using CYCLE COUNT:

      After activation, "Inventory Cycle Count" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
      System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
        

      Part Number Part numbers must exist in the Item Master .
      ABC Codes

      The ABC codes must be assigned to each part (within the Item Master) to be counted. 

      Optional Prerequisites for Modifying ABC Codes:

      ABC Setup

      The ABC codes must be established for percentages of value in the ABC Types setup module.

      Inventory Issues

      There must be a history of inventory issues to establish Estimated Annual Usages.

       

      1.3.5.5.2. Introduction for Inventory Cycle Count
      The CYCLE COUNT Module is provided for the user to establish a daily routine for counting INTERNAL inventory.   Note:  Only user owned inventory will be considered – NOT “consigned” (Customer owned), and/or WO-WIP or WIP locations.  If the user needs to count “consigned”, or a smaller range of internal parts outside the ABC Code setup, ManEx suggests to use the Physical Inventory module.   Records that have been allocated will display in red within the Inventory Cycle count module.  If the users attempt to edit the record that is allocated lower than the allocated qty it will display a message.  In-Store inventory will be considered unless the "Ignore In'Store" box is checked within the ABC Types Setup module, if this box is checked then In-Store warehouses will NOT be considered in the Cycle Count.

      The ABC codes need to be specifically setup for Make parts, if Make parts are to be included in the cycle count. If an ABC code is setup for a buy part and that ABC code is assigned to a Make part the make part will NOT be included in the cycle count and vica vera. 

      The three steps to completing Cycle counting activities in ManEx are:
       
      1)   Create a New List - User generate a list of inventory items to count by clicking the "Run Cycle Count Setup" button (Add button). 
      2)   Count and Record Results -  Then the stores keepers physically count the items listed and enter the quantity counted for each item into the cycle count screen.
      3)   Reconcile Differences - At the conclusion of the data entry, the data is reconciled with the inventory records. If the count is different than the record, then the user is prompted whether to accept the difference or to recount and re-enter. Count adjustments are logged to the GL adjustment account, if accounting is used.

       

      A report is available summarizing and itemizing the results of the cycle count activities. If the user has established cycle count tolerances in the  ABC Types setup, then a report will delineate the number of times that the cycle count exceeded the permissible tolerance.

       

      The frequency of counting for each part is defined in the ABC Type  setup, and based on the ABC Type assigned to each part.

       

      There is provision to automatically assign ABC Types after the user has been operating the ManEx system for some time. The user has the option to base the assigned ABC Type on either the current dollar value of the inventory, or the Estimated Annual Usage dollar amount of inventory.  If the user chooses to reassign ABC Types automatically, the ABC Type setup must have established the amount (by percentage) of inventory value to be attributed to each ABC Type.

       

      There is also a provision for establishing the EAU (estimated annual usage) for each inventory item. The EAU  is based on inventory issues in the last 30 days, weighted by another factor to account for historical issues. In order to create the EAU, there must have a minimum of 30 days activity in issues from stores.
       
       
      Cycle Counting is the practice of counting a small subset of inventory on a given day.  It can be an effective and efficient method for maintaining current on-hand inventory counts.  It allows for greater flexibility, greater accuracy, and less interruption to production than an annual physical inventory
       

      The first step in establishing a cycle counting program, is to determine component groups and group count frequency.  Groups are typically designated by their ABC code with A parts counted more often than B parts and B parts counted more often than C parts, and so forth.  Some common parameters, in this industry, for determining the correct ABC code are: Value, Lead Time, Usage, EAU Value, and Hybrid.

      Value
       
      -
      This method groups components according to their on-hand value.  The components with the highest on-hand value are counted more frequently than those with a smaller on-hand value.  This method is ideal from an accounting perspective as it typically results in a much smaller variance in inventory value, but may not be ideal from a supply chain management perspective since even inexpensive components can cause expensive production delays and missed shipments.  This is relatively easy to calculate and can be assigned manually if needed.
       
      Lead Time -  This method groups components according to their lead time.  Components with long lead times will receive more frequent counts and thus have higher inventory accuracy.  While this makes sense from a supply chain management perspective, it can lead to high inventory value variances since expensive components don't always have long lead times.  This is relatively easy to calculate and can be assigned manually if needed.

      Usage
      - This method groups components by their annual usage (EAU) regardless of their value or lead time.  The argument for this method is that the more frequently accessed components have a greater likelihood for inventory variances and should therefore be counted more often.  This method tries to reduce the impact of human error in inventory transactions.  However, it may not minimize variance in inventory value, or prevent long lead parts from stopping production if those parts are not used as often.  This may be a little more difficult to calculate manually, but can be done if needed.

      EAU Value
      - This method groups components by the value of the annual usage (EAU).  This method attempts to rectify the inventory value variance issue with the Usage method, by including component costs.  It is likely to have a lower inventory value variance, but may not fully adjust for inexpensive or low usage parts with long lead times.  This may be a little more difficult to calculate manually, but can be done if needed.

      Hybrid
      - This method combines any or all of the methods listed above.  This method assigns components with high on-hand value, high usage, and/or long lead times to group A.  This ensures that parts with the greatest potential for causing production delays or inventory value variances are counted most often.  While this can be done manually, it is better to allow the ERP system to assign and adjust the ABC code according to current conditions.

      The second step is to determine how often each ABC code should be counted.  Higher count frequencies lead to more accurate inventory records, but also increased handling costs.  Management needs to find a balance between cost and benefit.  One common frequency is to count A parts every 30 days, B parts every 120 days, and C parts every 180 days.


      The third step is to determine the best time of day for cycle counting activities.  Ideally this will occur either before production begins, or at a time when production and inventory movement will be at the lowest level of the day.  This can be early in the morning before production starts or during the standard lunch break.

      The fourth step is to determine who should be responsible for performing cycle counting activities.  Because cycle counting reduces the daily time required, the focus can shift from speed to accuracy and process improvement.  A shift that requires knowledgeable and experienced employees to conduct the cycle counting activities.  This is typically limited to employees in inventory.

      The final step is to start counting and discovering the sources of each significant discrepancy.  As part of the counting process, it is imperative to identify why discrepancies exist and work to eliminate the sources.  Initially, it is far more important to identify and eliminate sources of discrepancy than to get through the full cycle each period.  Not only will eliminating sources of count discrepancies reduce costs and production delays, but it will speed the cycle counting process as well.

      A well designed and executed cycle counting program should achieve an accuracy of 97% or more.
      1.3.5.5.3. Fields & Definitions for Inventory Cycle Count
      1.3.5.5.3.1. Main Screen

      Main Screen field definitions

      Warehouse 

      The name of the warehouse for the part highlighted.If the warehouse button is depressed, the grid will sort by warehouse.

      Source

      The source of the part number, Make or Buy. If the source button is depressed, the grid will sort by source.

      Class The classification of the part.If the Class button is depressed, the grid will sort by class.
      Type

      The type within the classification of the part number.

      Description

      The description of the part number.

      UoM

      The unit of measure of the part number.

      This will allow user to select only the un-reconciled parts or all parts.   Selecting "All" will display parts that are un-reconciled and reconciled but not yet posted.  
      Location

      The warehouse location for the part to be counted.

      Part Mfgr

      The Manufacturer for the part to be counted.

      MPN (Manufacturer’s Part Number) 

      If the source is a buy, the number that the manufacturer has assigned to the part.

      Part Number

      The Internal Part Number for the item to be counted.Depressing the Part Number button will sort the grid by part number.

      Rev

      The Part Number Revision for the item. An item may exist under multiple revisions.

      Count The physical count quantity of the item observed during cycle counting
      Init

      The initials of the individual who performed the cycle count.

      Date

      The date that the inventory was counted. The date will default to the current date, but may be over-written.

      Allocated

      If an inventory part number has allocated inventory, the line will show in red and the Allocated box will have a check mark.This field is a reference field which indicates to the user that there is allocated inventory against this item and the system will not allow you to adjust the qty below the allocated amount.

      Lot Code

      If the part type has been designated as requiring lot tracking, then the lot tracking reference number appears.

      Reference Lot Code tracking reference number.  
      Exp Date  Expiration date of Lot Code 
      PO # Customer PO number
      Serial Number  If the part has been designated as requiring serial numbers, then the serial numbers appear in this screen.

        Depress this button to record the adjustments in the count into the Inventory Master and to create the applicable accounting entry.  The "Allow Updating Inventory" option button (for Physical Inventory) within the Security module MUST be checked in order to Post Inventory Adjustments.

       

      1.3.5.5.3.2. ABC Types

      ABC codes are used as an aid to manage inventory tracking. Traditionally, ABC codes are established to divide the inventory by value, and to guide in the cycle counting of inventory.

      First the value of all inventory in stores is added up and listed by part in order of the highest extended value first. Then, the top percentage value (e.g. 80 % of the parts value) would be classified as “A” items, and will probably consist of about 10-15% of the inventory part numbers. The next 15% of the value items would be classified as “B” items, and will be in the neighborhood of 20-40% of the part numbers. The last 5% of the value will be classified as “C” items, and represent at least 50% of the part numbers.

      The user then sets up an inventory counting program called “Cycle Counting”, which assists in counting all inventory over a period of time. The “A” items might be counted completely within each month. Therefore, a list of all of the “A” items (the highest dollar value) is generated, and randomly divided into 20 days, and each day 1/20th of the list counted and checked. The “B” items might be checked every quarter, and the “C” items checked once a year. This is one way to verify the accuracy of stockroom transactions, and to take measures necessary to keep the counts accurate.

      In ManEx, the ABC codes have a slightly different meaning. In addition to identifying the most or least expensive part numbers, a Dock to Stock period may be included in each ABC code. Dock to Stock is the number of days a part is expected to take to be delivered to the stock room after the part is received on the user’s dock. This duration may include the amount of time it takes to organize the shipment, count the parts, log the receipt into the inventory system, perform incoming inspection, and physically move the parts to stores. Intuitively, the higher dollar parts may have longer dock to stock times because of increased inspection. And the lesser valued parts may not require inspection.

      Also, for each ABC code, ManEx provides a cycle count tolerance, which, if exceeded, will result in reporting unfavorable inventory control results during cycle counting. These tolerances may be expressed in an absolute dollar value, or a percentage of the inventory being counted.   For further information on the cycle count tolerances and what the purpose of setting them up in ManEx is see the attachment <<Cycle Count Tolerance.docx>>

      And, the ABC code identifies a part source for inventory parts. Because ManEx allows up to 36 ABC codes, it also provides for identifying if a part is a make or buy part. 

      The ABC codes need to be specifically setup for Make parts. If Make parts are to be included in the cycle count. If an ABC code is setup for a buy part and that ABC code is assigned to a Make part the make part will NOT be included in the cycle count and vica vera.  

      Note:  If an internal part number does NOT have an ABC code assigned, that part will NEVER be selected for cycle counting.  Therefore, all internal parts which the user wished to be cycle counted, MUST have a code in the ABC field in the Inventory Control Item Master. 

       

      1.3.5.5.4. How To ..... for Inventory Cycle Count
      1.3.5.5.4.1. Generate Cycle Count List
      The following screen will appear:   When the screen first opens, the user is limited to only five of the seven action buttons shown: Add button (Run a cycle count setup), Edit button (Enter cycle count results), Copy button (Reconcile cycle count data), Print reports, and Exit.  This is the first screen to be used in the module. In this screen, a CYCLE COUNT is created (ADD) for viewing, printing and editing.
       
       
      Depress the "Run Cycle Count" button (Add button)
       
       
       
      Records for cycle count will be pulled forward.    Note:  The user may not ADD a cycle count on a non-working calendar day. However, open cycle count records may be counted, entered and reconciled.  Records that have allocations made within the system will be pulled forward for count, these records will be highlighted in RED.   Parts in WO-WIP and/or WIP locations will NOT be pulled forward for count.
       
      User may select to Display only the "Unreconciled" parts or "All" parts. Selecting "All" will display parts that are un-reconciled and reconciled but not yet posted.  
       

      Note:  The cycle count module will allow multi-user access to enter and/or reconcile.  The users must exit and re-enter to screen to refresh if an action was done on another work station.  Only one user may Post.

       

      1.3.5.5.4.2. Entering Cycle Count Data

      Enter Inventory Mgt/Inventory Control Management/Inventory Cycle Count Module

       

      The following screen will appear displaying the records pulled forward for cycle count. Note:  The user may not ADD a cycle count on a non-working calendar day. However, open cycle count records may be counted, entered and reconciled.  Records that have allocations made within the system will be pulled forward for count, these records will be highlighted in RED. Parts in WO-WIP and/or WIP locations will NOT be pulled forward for count.

       
       
      Depress the Edit Record action button (Enter Cycle Count Results).  User will be prompt for password. 
       
       
       
      The user then enters the recorded counts in the COUNT column.  The counter’s initials and the date counted will update automatically. If the users attempt to edit the record that is allocated lower than the allocated qty it will display a message.  If you need to apply the count into the system you must first unallocate some of the inventory via the Inventory Allocation module to free up the amount you are attempting to adjust then return to the count and it will then allow you to post to inventory.

      Depress the Save changes action button to save changes, or depress the Abandon changes button to abandon changes. 

      Note:  The cycle count module will allow multi-user access to enter and/or reconcile.  The users must exit and re-enter to screen to refresh if an action was done on another work station.  Only one user may Post.

       

      1.3.5.5.4.3. Reconciling Cycle Counts and Post Inventory Adjustments

      Enter Inventory Mgt/Inventory Control Management/Inventory Cycle Count Module   

      The following screen will appear:

      Depressing the Copy action button (Reconcile Count Records) 



      Enter password.

      Then system checks the counted quantities entered into the Cycle Count screen and verifies that the count matches the inventory records.  If the count matches the inventory record the item drops from the list.

      If it does not match the inventory record, the following screen appears and the user is asked whether to accept the entered count as the new count, by depressing the "YES" button and entering a reason for the change (cycle count, missing parts, etc) or to wait until the user has had the opportunity to recheck the number and reconcile it at a later time by depress the "Next Item" button..

      Items not reconciled will remain on the list until reconciled.

      Note: 
      The user should not post the Inventory Adjustments until all of the reconciliation is completed.
       
      To record the adjustments in the count into the Inventory Master and to create the applicable accounting entry, depress the "Post Inventory Adjustments" button. You will be prompted for your password.   The "Allow Updating Inventory" option button (for Physical Inventory) within the Security module MUST be checked in order to Post Inventory Adjustments.  If user does NOT have these special rights they will receive the following message.






      Note
      , if the inventory item has changed in quantity (due to kitting or an issue via Inventory Handling between the beginning of the cycle count and the reconciliation), the system will alert the user and will print out a report detailing the part number and the discrepancy.  The user must change the data entry for the count, and then re-reconcile.

      Once the system has made the transfer, the following message will appear:

      Depress the OK button and all Inventory Adjustments are completed.

      1.3.5.5.5. Reports - Inventory Cycle Count

      Enter Inventory Mgt/Inventory Control Management/Inventory Cycle Count Module   

      The following screen will appear:

      To obtain the Inventory Cycle Count reports, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen. 



      The following screen will appear:
       
       

      Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

      Highlight the desired report and then depress the Option tab if applicable. 

      Cycle Count Worksheet Report

       

      Select between printing the Manufacturer and Manufacturer’s Part Number or Description by clicking on the applicable radial.

      Depress the OK button.

       
       

      The following report is available:

      The items are counted and recorded on the sheet, and then data is entered into the xERP System.

      Cycle Count Summary Report

      Select the date range of interest and the warehouse and part classes to be included.

      Highlight the Warehouse of interest and depress the > button.If you want all warehouses, depress the >> button.

      Highlight the Part Class of interest and depress the > button.If you want all of the classes, depress the >> button.

      Depress the OK button

       

      The following report will be displayed.

      Cycle Count Detail Report - Sorted by Division

      Select the date range of interest and the warehouse and part classes to be included.

      Highlight the Warehouse of interest and depress the > button.If you want all warehouses, depress the >> button.

      Highlight the Part Class of interest and depress the > button.If you want all of the classes, depress the >> button.

      Depress the OK button

       

      The following report will be displayed.

      Cycle Count Detail Report - Sorted by Class

      Select the date range of interest and the warehouse and part classes to be included.

      Highlight the Warehouse of interest and depress the > button.If you want all warehouses, depress the >> button.

      Highlight the Part Class of interest and depress the > button.If you want all of the classes, depress the >> button.

      Depress the OK button.

       

      The following report will be displayed.

      1.3.5.5.6. FAQ - Inventory Cycle Count
      1.3.5.5.6.1. How can I clear out a Cycle Count that was started in error?

      For Example, a user has begun the Cycle Count process by pulling items fwd into the module for counting by accident, but for what ever reason, you do not wish to continue on with the reconciliation process of the count.  But now those parts are locked in a count and will not be editable throughout the system (Kitting, PO Receiving, Inventory Handling, etc. . . )  If the part is locked in a count you will see messages similar to the below throughout the system.

      If you wish to Purge the Cycle Count out of the system you can run the below procedure and any record that has not had a count entered into the Cycle Count module will be cleared.


      SQL Manex Only

      Within SQL Manager run the following:

      exec sp_ClearAllCC



      VFP Instructions Only

      Please be sure to follow the procedure below to install this program.  It is highly recommended that you follow this procedure on your TEST system first before applying it against your Live ManEx System.

      1.)                 Create a Backup of your Live ManEx System

      2.)                 Extract << purgecc9.exe>> into the ManEx Root Directory

      3.)                 Run the Executable

      4.)                 Verify the Results

      5.)                 Remove << purgecc9.exe>> from the ManEx Root Directory

      Once satisfied with the results in your test system, you may proceed with your Live ManEx System.  Please let me know if you have any questions.

       

      1.3.5.5.6.2. Why are some ABC type parts no longer being included in the Cycle Count?
      QWhy are some ABC type parts no longer being included in the Cycle Count?
       
      A.   Check your calendar date to be sure it is extended out far enough for the program to find the date in the calendar.
       
      For ExampleIf the System Admin Calendar setup ends 12/31/2008, and the Cycle count day for "B" type is 180 days, and the cycle count is ran on 10/25/2008 the date would be 1/25/2009, the program will not find 1/25/2009 in calendar, so the "B" type parts are not included in the cycle count.  Once the System Admin Calendar is reset to end 12/31/2009 and the Cycle Count is re-ran then the "B" items are included in the Cycle Count. 

       
       
      1.3.5.6. Physical Inventory

      1.3.5.6.1. Prerequisties for Physical Inventory
      Before entering transactions, the following must be setup in Manex.

      After activation, "Physical Inventory" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
      System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
       

       

      Warehouse Setup Each warehouse must be setup in Warehouse Setup .
      Inventory Part Classes  Each Part Class must be set up in Inventory Part Class setup.
      Inventory Handling  Inventory Handling G/L Defaults must be setup in the Inventory Handling GL Defaults setup and Reason Codes must be set up in the Inventory Handling Reason Codes  setup. 
      Inventory Defaults  The accounting defaults for Inventory must be set up in Accounting Setup .
      Inventory Master Each part to be counted must be set up in the Inventory Control Management module. 
      Inventory Setup     The Inventory Adjustment Account default must be setup in Accounting Setup .

       

                        

      1.3.5.6.2. Introduction for Physical Inventory

       

      The Physical Inventory module is to manage the physical inventory count.  The user has the choice of using count tags or a count worksheet. The inventory is physically counted and then input into the system. More than one user may input into the system at a time.  Note:  The users must exit and re-enter the screen to refresh if an action was done on another work station.  Only one user may post.   IMPORTANT NOTE:  DO NOT MOVE ANY MATERIAL WHILE THE COUNT IS TAKING PLACE.  Once the count is input into the system, the system provides for a reconciliation between the Inventory Master and the physical count.  If the count is different than the record, the user is prompted whether to accept the difference or to recount and re-enter. If the count equals the Inventory Master, there is no adjustment required and the number counted will drop off of the reconciliation list.  Once the reconciliation is completed, the user may print out a reconciliation report.  Then, after reviewing, the user may update the quantity on hand in the Inventory Master.  Note:  This takes a high level password or special rights as assigned in Security.  Once this is done, the accounting journal entries will update automatically, if the MANEX accounting module is used.

      1.3.5.6.3. Fields & Definitions for Physical Inventory
      1.3.5.6.3.1. The Setup Tab

      Setup tab field definitions

      Inventory Type

      The type of Inventory, either Internal, Consigned or Instores.

      Customer

      If the Inventory Type is Consigned, the Customer name will display in this field.

       
      Supplier

      If the Inventory Type is Instore, the Supplier name will display in this field 

       

      Date/Time Started

      The date and time (24 hour clock) when the Inventory was originally started. 

      Status

      The status of the physical inventory, either In Process, Completed or Cancelled. 

      Inventory Type

      The radial selected will display either Internal, Consigned or Instores only. 

      Part Number Range The range or internal part numbers selected for counting.

      Warehouses

      Available

      The name of any available warehouses selected for counting.

      Selected

      The name of the warehouses that were actually selected for counting.

      Part Classes

      Available

      The part classifications which were available for counting.

      Selected

      The part classifications that were actually selected for counting.

       

      Depressing this button will start a new Physical Inventory.

       

      1.3.5.6.3.2. The Count Tab

      Depressing on the Count Tab brings up the following screen:

       

      Count Screen Fields

      Inventory Type

      The type of Inventory, either Internal, Consigned or Instores.

      Supplier/Customer

      If the Inventory Type is Instore, the Supplier name will display in this field.If the Inventory Type is Consigned, the Customer name will display in this field.

      Date/Time Started

      The date and time (24 hour clock) when the Inventory was originally started.

      Status

      The status of the physical inventory, either In Process, Completed or Cancelled.

      For the part number highlighted:

      Warehouse

      The warehouse location for the part to be counted.

      Location

      The warehouse location for the part to be counted.

      Part Source

      The Make/Buy/Consigned/In Store type for the part to be counted.

      UOM The Unit of Measure to be counted.  Same as stocking unit.
      Class

      The classification of the part.

      Type

      The type within the classification to which the part belongs.

      Description

      The description of the part.

      Manufacturer’s Part No

      The number used by the manufacturer to identify the part.

      Tag No. If you have already printed Physical Inventory Tags, the Tag Number will appear in the Tag Number column. (Unless you numbered them manually, as described above.)I  f you have not printed tags, the Tag Number column will be blank.
      Part Mfgr The Manufacturer for the part to be counted.
      Part Number

      The Internal Part Number that has been assigned to the item to be counted.

      Lot Reference

      If the part type has been designated as requiring lot tracking, then the lot tracking reference number appears.

      Rev

      The part number revision for the item.  An item may exist under multiple revisions.

      Count The physical count quantity of the item observed during Physical Inventorying.
      Init

      The initials of the individual who performed the Physical Inventory.

      Date

      The date that the inventory was counted.The date will default to the current date, but may be over-written.

        This button is used to post the Inventory Adjustments.This is used after the inventory has been reconciled and the Physical Inventory Detail Report has been printed and reviewed.  This button will update the Inventory Master for the quantity on hand.  Note:   this action requires a supervisor’s password or specific "Post Inventory Adjustments" authorization in the Security module. 

      1.3.5.6.4. How To ..... for Physical Inventory
      1.3.5.6.4.1. Setup a Physical Inventory

      Enter Inventory Mgt/Inventory Control Management/Physical Inventory Module  

      The following screen will appear:

      Depress the Add record action button. Type in your password. The following warning will appear:

      Depress Ok and the following options screen will appear:

      Selecting “Yes” will allow the user to manually number the inventory tags, item by item.

      Selecting “No” causes the system to automatically number the tags.

      Please refer to the Tags and Work Sheets instructions.

      The following screen will appear:

      Select the Inventory type by clicking on the appropriate radial.  Select from Internal, Consigned or In StoresInventory. Internal inventory represents user-owned inventory.  Consigned inventory is owned by the user’s Customer.  In Stores inventory is owned by the Supplier.

      In-Store purchasing overview:  In-Store is the situation where the Supplier has placed raw materials in the user’s warehouse.  The raw materials still are owned by the Supplier.  When the user is ready to use the Supplier’s raw materials, he/she issues an In-Store Purchase Order.  For In-Store POs, the user may select by Supplier or by Part Number.  Then the user may find records according to the selection.  Once found, the user may create a PO for the In-Store Consumption.  In-Store Purchasing also includes receiving.

      If you select the Inventory Type to be Consigned, a list of customers will appear:

      Select the Customer.

      If you select In stores Inventory, a list of Suppliers will appear:

      Select the supplier.

      Select the warehouses to be counted by highlighting a warehouse and depressing the > button.  If you want to count all warehouses, depress the >> button.

      To select part number range, enter the starting part number and the ending part number.

      To select the part classes, highlight the class desired and depress the > button.  For all of the part classes, depress the >> button.

      A view of the screen would be as follows:

      Depress the button to Start New Physical Inventory. A message will appear on the screen:

      Depress the OK button.  Information is transfered to the Count Tab.

      Important Caution:  The user must finish the Physical Inventory completely before the system is enhanced.

      1.3.5.6.4.2. Finding a Physical Inventory

      Enter Inventory Mgt/Inventory Control Management/Physical Inventory Module  

      The following screen will appear:

      Depress the Find action button. The following screen will appear:

      Decide upon the Inventory Type that you want to find.  Select from Internal Only, Consigned Only or Instores Only by clicking on the appropriate radial.

      Then choose the appropriate filter, either In Process, Completed, Cancelled or All by clicking on the appropriate radial.  Depress the Display List button once the selections are made.  The information at the bottom of the screen will display Date/Time Started, Inventory Type and Status.

      If you select Consigned, you’ll be prompted for the Customer name.  If you select Instores, you will be prompted for the Supplier name.

      Once you’ve found the Inventory you’re seeking, the information will populate the Count tab screen, as follows:

      1.3.5.6.4.3. Record a Physical Count

      Find an In-Process Physical Inventory.  The following information will appear in the Count tab screen.

      Depress the Edit action button.  Type in your password.

      To sort by warehouse, depress the Warehouse button.  To sort by Class, depress the Class button.  To sort by part source, depress the Part Source button.  You will also be able to sort by tag number or part number by depressing on the heading.

      Enter the final count from the tag or the worksheet.  The system will capture the initials from your password.  The system will enter the date.
       
      All warehouses and location will be listed for the internal part pulled forward for a count, with the exception of quantities that are in WO-WIP, these quantities are not included in the Physical Inventory.  At this time user may move parts from one warehouse/location to another if needed by entering the count that resides in that location/warehouse.   User are not allowed to add new items to the PI inventory listing, due to the fact that the count could phycially already be in process. If we allow you to keep adding and deleteing records from the count it might cause issues for what is already in process.
       
      Also, ManEx does not allow user to edit a lot code for inventory items once they have been accepted into the system. ManEx does not allow you to change the Lot Code information anywhere within the system once received. Once in the system we have to maintain that lot code with those records through out the system, to have good Lot Control.
       
      Depress the Save action button.

      The screen would appear as follows:

      1.3.5.6.4.4. Reconcile the Physical Count

      When the recording is complete, depress the  Reconcile button (as highlighted below).  Enter your password. This will reconcile the inventory.

      If the inventory count does not match the system on hand quantity, the following screen will appear:

      If you want to update the records for the counted quantity, depress the Yes button.  Type in the reason in the Reason box.

      If you want to skip over the record, depress the Next Item button.  Note, however, that you can’t update the quantity on hand until all of the inventory items are reconciled.

      Once all of the counts are reconciled, the detail will disappear from the screen.

      1.3.5.6.4.5. Update the Inventory Master for Inventory on Hand

      Once you’ve reconciled the inventory and printed and reviewed the Physical Inventory Detail Report, you may update the Inventory Master for the Inventory on hand.

      Depress the Count tab.  Depress the Post Inventory Adjustments button.  Note:  this action requires a supervisor’s password or specific "Post Inventory Adjustments" authorization in the Security  module.

      All of the reconciled count numbers will update the quantity on hand in the Inventory Master.  The status will change to Posted.  The following message will appear:

      Additionally, the requisite GL Transaction for any variances will forward into the accounting module.

      Note that GL Transactions will not be created in the following circumstances:  Consigned stock or In Store additions.

      1.3.5.6.5. Reports - Physical Inventory
      To obtain the Inventory reports, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen. 



      The following screen will appear:

      Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

      Highlight the desired report and then depress the Option tab if applicable. 
       
       

      NOTE: Users MUST have special rights within the Security module to "Enable Printing On-Hand Quantities on the PI Reports"  

       
       
       
       

      TAGS:

      If you selected Manual Inventory Tags from this screen:

       

      Depress the Count tab.  The following screen will appear:

       


      Depress the Edit button. Type in your password.  Manually type in the Tag No. for each item. The system will automatically re-order the tags in numerical order.

      Physical Inventory Tags

      When you have finished, depress the Print button. The following screen will appear:

       

      Select Physical Inventory Tags.  Depress the Options tab.  The following screen will appear:

      Choose between All Locations and Only Locations with Quantities > 0.Choose the sort options, either Warehouse + Location + Part Number + Rev + Lot Code or Part No + Rev + Lot Code.

      Depress the OK button. An Inventory Tag will be printed for each mfgr per item.

      The tags will print 3 each on 8 ½ X 11 paper.  If the Inventory type is consigned, the Customer’s part number will print.

      If you did not select manual inventory tag numbering:

      A box will appear on the screen to Enter Starting Tag No:  

       

       The Printed tags will appear as follows:

        

       

      Below we have attached blank Inventory Tags   <<blank IT.doc>>  and   <<blank IT.pdf>>   that may be used if for some reason NO tags were printed for parts that may have inventory but are NOT being displayed in the Physical Inventory listing, etc. NOTE: These are only intended to be used if user happens to find product that was not on the physical Inventory list for some reason.

       

      Reprint Physical Inventory Tags 

      Select the Reprint Physical Inventory Tags, depress the Options tab and the following screen will appear:

      Enter Tag Number Range to Print.

      Depress the OK button

      The tags will print 3 each on 8 ½ X 11 paper.  If the Inventory type is consigned, the Customer’s part number will print.

       

       

      Physical Inventory Worksheet

      Select the Physical Inventory Worksheet, and depress the Options tab.  Note that this report requires Legal size paper.  Selecting this report will bring up the following screen:

      Click on the appropriate radial selection criteria. Choose one of the following: All Records, Internal (excluding In stores), In Stores or Consigned. If the Inventory type is consigned, the Customer’s part number will print. 

      Click on the appropriate radial for Locations selection. Choose between All Locations or only Locations with Quantities greater than zero.

      Click on the desired radial to select whether to print On Hand quantity. Select between Not printing or printing the on hand quantities.   

      Click on the appropriate radial for Sort Options.Choose between (Warehouse, Location, Part Number, Revision number and Lot Code), (Part Number, Revision Number and Lot Code) or by (Tag Number).

       

       

      The report will appear as follows:

      Physical Inventory Detail Report  

      Select Physical Inventory Detail Report, depress the Option tab, and the following screen will appear: 

      Click on the appropriate radial selection criteria. Choose one of the following: All Records, Internal (excluding In stores), In Stores or Consigned. If the Inventory type is consigned, the Customer’s part number will print. 

      Click on the appropriate radial for Locations selection. Choose between All Locations or only Locations with Quantities greater than zero.

      Click on the appropriate radial for Sort Options.Choose between (Warehouse, Location, Part Number, Revision number and Lot Code), (Part Number, Revision Number and Lot Code) or by (Tag Number).

      Depress the OK button

      Note that this report is designed to be printed after the count has taken place and been reconciled.

       

       

       The report will appear as follows:

       

      PI Detail w/Part Mfgr Report

      Select the PI Detail w/Part Mfgr Report, and depress the Options tab.  Note that this report requires Legal size paper.  Selecting this report will bring up the following screen:

      Click on the appropriate radial selection criteria. Choose one of the following: All Records, Internal (excluding In stores), In Stores or Consigned. If the Inventory type is consigned, the Customer’s part number will print. 

      Click on the appropriate radial for Locations selection. Choose between All Locations or only Locations with Quantities greater than zero.

      Click on the appropriate radial for Sort Options.Choose between (Warehouse, Location, Part Number, Revision number and Lot Code), (Part Number, Revision Number and Lot Code) or by (Tag Number).

      Depress the OK button

      Note that this report is designed to be printed after the count has taken place and been reconciled.

       

      The report will appear as follows:

       

      1.3.5.7. Standard Cost Adjustment
      1.3.5.7.1. Prerequisites

      After activation, "Standard Cost Rollups" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.    

      Note: Users MUST have special access for the "Roll Costs" button to be activated.  This access is assigned through Security/User Rights. 

       

      Part Number

      The Part numbers for at least one of the following must have been entered in the Inventory Control module: Customer, Manufacturer or Supplier.

      1.3.5.7.2. Introduction
      This module allows the user to change the Standard Cost, labor cost, overhead cost, other costs, and user defined costs.  This screen also allows a roll up of standard costs into the appropriate Bill of Materials.  The user has the ability to start a new cost roll up.  The roll ups go to another screen where the user can select or modify the rollup. 

      (This module will consider Make/Buy inventory part numbers as BUY parts and will be rolled into the Buy portion of the Std Cost Adjustment module.   

      Phantom parts are not rolled up and calculated costs assigned.  The components will remain rolled up to the next higher assembly.  The system will reset all the Phantom parts to 0.00 before saving it to the inventory.  The standard cost adjustment module will just use their cost to calculate Top assembly costs.  When the last rollup is reached, the system will reset all phantom standard costs to zero (since they should not have a cost), and also make sure that any phantoms at the lower level has the "Use calculated cost" checked so that it gets updated in order to roll into the next level up.  Because users may have numerous phantom (not make/phantom) assemblies in the system, the module will automatically check the "Use calculated cost" for every phantom assembly at each cost roll level.    

      Once satisfied, the user can roll the costs into the inventory tables and the General Ledger journal entries will be created.  The user also has the ability to level make parts.  All Make parts will be leveled.  After the leveling has been completed, the user has the ability to roll up Make parts.  All Make parts will be rolled up.  If the same part appears more than once (used at different levels of BOM's throughout the system), the BOM will be leveled and considered at the lowest level that exists within the system. 

      The user then go to the Modifications tab where he/she can evaluate the changes, accepting or modifying them. Once the user is satisfied, the Roll Costs button can be used.  All inventory tables will be updated and records will be created for the General Ledger Journal entry.  Note:  A high level Accounting password is required to generate the Roll up.
       
      When standard cost adjustments are created against an inventory part number that contain both regular stock and In-store stock the module will only show the delta for the regular stock on hand.  The Std Cost Adjustment module will filter out the in-store warehouse qty's when updating the costs within the Cost Adjustment Release to GL screen.  
      1.3.5.7.3. Fields & Definitions
      1.3.5.7.3.1. Selection Tab

      Enter the percentage to use if the part material cost is different from the Weighted Average Price Value by Greater than or Equal to or if the assembly material cost is different from the Sum of the parts standard value by Greater than or Equal to     Or   Difference between Calculated and Current Greater or Equal to $ 
      Example:  if there is a $2000.00 assembly in stock, and users apply the 1% criteria, a $19.00 difference won't be brought into the matrix to be checked.  On the other users enter 0%, then every single part will be included.  A Minimum dollar value has been added to the Standard Cost Adjustment screen that will be used to determine whether or not an item is included in the matrix.  If left blank then the percentage rules.  If value entered then it becomes the criteria for inclusion in the matrix.     

      Check box if you "Do not want items listed with 0 inventory and no purchase history for the current year", then the standard cost will remain unchanged

      Check this box if you want to  "Allow user to enter in the Weighted Average Variable".  Once this has been checked the users can then enter in the number of the most recent Purchase Orders they wish to have included in the Weighted Average Calculation. This give the user the option to eliminate the Quick Turn buys that may throw the calculations off.  

      User also has the option to select the part number range , class, or type, on which part(s) to process.  This will complete the adjustment process faster and user will be able to maintain more accurate records and also allow the users the ability to narrow the resulting filter of the Buy parts.  NOTE:  The Part Number range selection is available for only BUY parts. ManEx does not offer it for MAKE parts, because the system needs to roll ALL sub assemblies up to determine the top level costs. However, in the modifications tab, it is possible to sort by part number or class, to make it easier for the user to find specific items of interest.
       
      To roll up the Buy Parts, depress the Roll up BUY Parts button.  To roll up Make Parts, depress the Roll up MAKE Parts button.  To Level Make Parts depress the Level MAKE Parts button.
       
      1.3.5.7.3.2. Modification Tab

      Modifications tab field definitions

       
      Check All - Use calc cost for all records  If this box is checked - the system only checks the record if the calcualted cost > 0.  If this box is checked at one level, this option will carry forward as checked when users move to the next levels.
      Check All - Use calc cost for calc cost not zero if this box is checked - the system will check all records to use calculated cost no matter it's zero or not.  If this box is checked at one level, this option will carry forward as checked when users move to the next levels.

      Part Number

      The number the user has assigned to the part within the  ICM  module. 

      Rev

      The revision number assigned to the Part Number within the  ICM  module.

      Class

      The classification to which the part belongs. 

      Type

      The type within the classification to which the part number belongs.

      Description

      The description assigned to the Part Number within the  ICM  module.

      Quantity

      The quantity is the number of units currently owned. This excludes all un-purchased In-Stores Inventory. ( for explanation on In-Store Inventory See Purchasing Manual)  See Article #1240 for more detail on why the system will not allow user to enter in a fraction of a number, and an alternative.

      Material Cost

      This cost is defaulted in from the cost currently assigned to the part number through ICM or PO .

      ·Important Note - If accounting is installed: For all buy parts, the standard cost field must have data entered.  If this data is missing (or wrong), the Raw Materials Inventory and the Work In Process (WIP) will be incorrect for the accounting records.  All make parts which are not labor only (the customer brings you the kit and all you do is apply the labor), must have data entered in the standard cost field.  Additionally, the data entered in the standard cost field for the make part must equal the sum of the Bill of Materials components.(Please refer to Bill of Materials Reports – Bill of Material With Standard Cost.)   If the data is missing or wrong on a Make Part, the Work In Process, Cost of Goods Sold and Finished Goods Inventory will be wrong for the accounting records.  If the sum of the Bill of Materials components does not equal the standard cost per the Item Master, a configuration variance will generate.

      New Material Cost

      This represents the revised or up-dated Standard Cost.  This column is colored so users can easily differentiate between the old cost and new cost.

      Use Calc

      If this box is checked, the calculations determined in the Selection tab were applied to the cost.  This box will be automatically checked for phantom (not Make/Phantom) assemblies in the system at each cost roll up.

      Calculated Cost

      This column is the result of the calculations determined in the Selection tab as applied to the original Standard Cost.

      Use Manual

      If this box is checked, the new Standard Cost was manually typed in and was not determined by any thing in the Selection tab.

      Manual Cost

      This column is the result of the new standard cost being entered manually and the Use Manual box being checked.

      By moving the arrows (at the bottom of the screen) to the right the following fields are also available

      Labor 

      The labor cost currently assigned to the part number.

      New Labor

      This represents the revised or up-dated Labor cost.  This column is colored so users can easily differentiate between the old cost and new cost.

      Overhead  The overhead cost currently assigned to the part number. 
      New Overhead  This represents the revised or up-dated Overhead cost. This column is colored so users can easily differentiate between the old cost and new cost.
      Other Costs  The other costs currently assigned to the part number. 
      New Other Costs  This represents the revised or up-dated other costs. This column is colored so users can easily differentiate between the old cost and new cost.
      User Defined The user definded costs currently assigned to the part number. 
      New User Defined This represents the revised or up-dated user defined costs. This column is colored so users can easily differentiate between the old cost and new cost.
       Delta

      The column is the net change between the original Standard Cost and the New Standard Cost multiplied by the Quantity.

      If this button is depressed the costs will roll up to all of the Inventory Tables plus the records required for accounting will be created for posting to the General Ledger. 

      Note
      : Users have to have special access in order for this button to be enabled.  This access is assigned through Security/User Rights. 
      Date Run

      This is the date of the run.

      This button is used to recalculate the total change (Delta) column.

      Total

      This is the total of the column “Delta” (change).

      1.3.5.7.4. How To ....
      1.3.5.7.4.1. Find a Standard Cost Adjustment

      Enter Inventory Mgmt/Inventory Control Management/Standard Cost Adjustment Module  

      The following screen will appear:

      To find a Previously created Standard Cost Adjustment where the roll costs has not yet been performed, depress the Find action button.  The following selection screen will appear:

      If you select to find by Buy Parts, the following screen will appear:

       

      1.3.5.7.4.2. Start New Roll Cost

      Enter Inventory Mgt/Inventory Control Management/Standard Cost Adjustment Module   

      The following screen will appear:

      Depress the Add action button (Start New Cost Roll) and the folloiwng items will become enabled:

      Type in the percentage to use if the part material cost is different from the Weighted Average Price Value by Greater than or Equal to or if the assembly material cost is different from the Sum of the parts standard value by Greater than or Equal to   Or   Difference between Calculated and Current Greater or Equal to $ 

      Example:  if there is a $2000.00 assembly in stock, and users apply the 1% criteria, a $19.00 difference won't be brought into the matrix to be checked.  On the other users enter 0%, then every single part will be included.  A Minimum dollar value has been added to the Standard Cost Adjustment screen that will be used to determine whether or not an item is included in the matrix.  If left blank then the percentage rules.  If value entered then it becomes the criteria for inclusion in the matrix.   

      Check box if you "Do not want items listed with 0 inventory and no purchase history for the current year", then the standard cost will remain unchanged

      Check this box if you want to  "Allow user to enter in the Weighted Average Variable" or you can type in the number of  PO(s) to include in the calculated weighted cost.

      User also has the option to select the part number range , class, or type, on which part(s) to process.  This will complete the adjustment process faster and user will be able to maintain more accurate records and also allow the users the ability to narrow the resulting filter of the Buy parts.  NOTE:   The Part Number range selection is offered only for BUY parts. ManEx does not offer it for MAKE parts, because the system needs to roll ALL sub assemblies up to determine the top level costs. However, in the modifications tab, it is possible to sort by part number or class, to make it easier for the user to find specific items of interest. 

      NOTE:  Due to the fact that inventory records flagged as MAKE/BUY can not have Work Orders generated for them.  The Standard Cost Adjustment module will consider MAKE/BUY inventory part numbers as BUY parts and will be rolled into the Buy portion of the Std Cost Adjustment module.

      To roll up the Buy Parts, depress the Roll up BUY Parts button.  Upon rolling the records the system will now consider all of the Costs, and not just the material cost.

      After the calculation is complete, the following message will appear:

      Depress the OK button.  Depressing on the Modifications tab reveals the following:

      Depress the Edit button.  To effect a change, click on either the Use Calc column or the Use Manual column.

      If you choose Use Manual column, you must also enter a new manual, labor, overhead, other, or user defined cost: 

      Note that the Delta column updates automatically.  This is the difference between the old Standard Cost and the New Standard Cost multiplied by the Quantity.  (Note:  The quantity may include setup scrap and/or run scrap if the box to exclude scrap from Cost Rollup is not checked in the  Kit Default Setup screen).

      To Re-calculate the total change (Delta), depress Recalculate Total button.The Total will update, as illustrated:

      Depress the Save record action button.

      To Post the changes to the Standard Cost and generate the General Ledger entries, depress the Roll Costs button.  The system will update the "Last Change" field (within the ICM screen) for part numbers that actually had pricing information changed within the Std Cost Adjustment. 

      Enter your password.   Note:  This requires a high level accounting password.

      The following message will appear once the update has been completed.

      Depress the OK Button.

       

      1.3.5.7.4.3. Level and Roll Up Make Parts

      The Level Make Parts button causes the system to find all Indented Bills of Materials.  Then the system “tags” the lowest indenture.    Users will NOT be able to add or edit any BOM during this process.  If a user is already in the process of modifying a BOM and this process is started the user will NOT be allowed to save the changes until the leveling process is complete.

       

      Enter Inventory Mgt/Inventory Control Management/Standard Cost Adjustment Module   

      The following screen will appear:

      Depress the Add Record (Start New Cost Roll) action button, enter password, then depress the Level MAKE Parts button. The following message will appear once the update has been completed.



      Depress the OK Button. The following screen will appear:  
       
       
      The Level of Levels information automatically updated to the next level that needs to be Rolled up.
       
      Then depress the Roll up Make Part button. The following message will appear:


      Depress "Yes" to continue.  If a rollup already exists the following option screen will appear:

      Depress "Yes" to continue. The following message will appear:

      Enter into the Modification screen, only the Level 1 of 2 Levels assemblies will be displayed (sub-assemblies, etc).  Depress the Edit Record action button and select the Use Calculated or Use manual to make any changes.   If Use Manual is selected then you have to enter in the Manual Cost.

      Save the changes and depress the “Roll Costs” button. The following message will appear:

      Depress the OK Button, then return to the Selection screen. 
       
       
       The Level of Levels information automatically updated to the next level that needs to be Rolled up.
       
      Depress the Add Record (Start New Cost Roll) action button, enter password, then depress the Roll up MAKE Parts button to roll up Level 2 of 2 Levels.  Continue this process to level all indents starting with the lowest to the highest.
       
      Once the highest level has been reached the Modufications screen will be poplulated with all the Finished Goods Inevntory parts. 
       
       
       
      a)  For the PHANTOM parts the standard cost calculated is based on their components (SUM of component's qty * component standard cost).  Once the standard cost is calculated for the PHANTOM part, the cost roll up will treat the PHANTOM part as a single entity on the top assembly BOM and proceed as it was a BUY part with the std cost already entered.

      b)
        If one of the component parts on the top level is a MAKE (not MAKE_BUY) and HAVE components assigned to it, the cost roll up will NOT include the std cost of the parts itself, it will only include the std cost of its subcomponents.


      c)
       
      If one of the component parts on the top level is a MAKE (not MAKE_BUY) and does NOT HAVE parts assigned to it the cost roll up will include the std cost of the part itself.

      d)  If one of the component parts on the top level is a MAKE and MAKE_BUY the cost roll up will included the std price for the part itself and will NOT include the std costs for the subcomponents.  For an example see the Word attachment <<The Std Cost of the MAKE_BUY_081211.docx>>).

      e)  If one of the component parts on the top level is a MAKE and a Phantom/Make the cost roll up will NOT include the std price for this part because the cost roll up will include the cost of this parts components.

      Note:  The calculated cost will only include the costs for ACTIVE parts and subassemblies as of the date of the roll up and will NOT include any parts that may have been identified as inactive either in the item master or in the obsolete date of the part on the BOM.


      The values displayed should be in sync with the
      BOM with Std Cost Report  values.  
      The following may be why the Standard Cost Roll is different from the Cost BOM Reports.
       
      a)    On the costed BOM Report for a Make/Buy assembly we display the value of the BOM in the costed report, but that total is NOT used in subsequent rollups to higher levels only the standard cost is.  

      b)   
      In Kit Default Setup , user can exclude scrap and setup scrap in Kitting, MRP, and Cost Rollup, this will overwrite what user check in the BOMTherefore, if user checks "Setup Scrap" checkbox in BOM, but checks to exclude in cost roll, the costroll will not calculate setup scrap cost, but BOM will always calculate setup scrap cost if the Setup Scrap checkbox in check in BOM. 
      1.3.5.7.5. Std Cost Adjustment Reports
      To obtain the Standard Cost Adjustment report, select the Print button from the ManEx action buttons at the top of the screen. 



       

      The following screen will appear:

      Select the appropriate radio for the output format you desire: Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

      Highlight the desired report and then depress the OK button. 



      Standard Cost Rollup Report will print:

       
       
      Note:  The calculated cost will only include the costs for ACTIVE parts and subassemblies as of the date of the roll up and will NOT include any parts that may have been identified as inactive either in the item master or in the obsolete date of the part on the BOM.  
       
       
      ManEx strives to make the Std Cost Rollup values be in sync with the "BOM with Std Cost" "Top Assembly Costed BOM" report and the  "Indented Costed BOM" report. The following may be why the Standard Cost Roll is different from the Cost BOM Reports.

      a)    On the costed BOM Report for a Make/Buy assembly we display the value of the BOM in the costed report, but that total is NOT used in subsequent rollups to higher levels only the standard cost is.  

      b)    In Kit Default Setup , user can exclude scrap and setup scrap in Kitting, MRP, and Cost Rollup, this will overwrite what user check in the BOMTherefore, if user checks "Setup Scrap" checkbox in BOM, but checks to exclude in cost roll, the costroll will not calculate setup scrap cost, but BOM will always calculate setup scrap cost if the Setup Scrap checkbox in check in BOM.

      1.3.5.7.6. FAQs - Standard Cost Adjustment
      Facts and Questions for the Standard Cost Adjustment Module
      1.3.5.7.7. ManEx Minutes-Std Cost Adjustment
      1.3.5.8. Part Manufacturer Setup

      Enter Inventory Mgt/Inventory Control Management/Part Manufacturer Setup Module
       
      Note:   After activation, "Part Manufacturer Setup" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
       
      Each Item Master Quantity Info Screen with a Buy Source refers to a Manufacturer to be selected from a pull-down list of Approved Manufacturers and a Manufacturer’s part number to be entered.  Note:  If no manufacturer is selected, it will default to GENR, for generic.

       

       

      The following screen will appear:

      Depress the Add Record action button, to add a New record. Depress the Edit action button to edit an existing record.  Enter the password.

      Enter the Manufacturer’s Code in the box shown. (A code of up to 8 characters must be entered)  The system will not allow the Mfgr Code to contain any spaces. 

      Enter in the full Part Manufacturer Name. 

      Depress the Save record action button to save changes, depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes.

      1.4. Material Planning
      1.4.1. Purchase Order Management
      1.4.1.1. Purchase Order Management
      1.4.1.1.1. Prerequisties - PO Mgmt

      After activation, "Purchase Order Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

      Supplier
       The Supplier must be setup in the Supplier Information module.
      Part number in Item Master  The part number must exist for a product or part in the ICM module.
      AVL  The Manufacturer Names must have been set up in Part Manufacturer Setup module.
      Buyer Codes  The Buyer codes must be established in the Inventory Buyer Setup module.
      Purchasing Approvals  A list of employees and their approval authorizations must exist in Purchase Setup module.

      Optional Prerequisites for Entering a New PURCHASING

      MRO Defaults MRO Receiving GL Numbers must have been setup in Purchase Setup module.
      Contacts Contacts can be used for identifying seller.  The contacts must be setup in Supplier Contact Information module
      Tax Authority If purchasing taxable items, must be established in the Sales Tax Authority Table and in Customer Information module.
      Units of Measure If purchase units are different than stocking units. The UOM conversion must be setup in the UOM Conversion Setup modue.
      Supplier Contract For In-Store POs, the contract with the Supplier must be set up in the Supplier Contract Management module.
      Insp Excep Doc Must be setup in the Inspection Exception Setup.

      1.4.1.1.2. Introduction for PO Mgmt

      The PURCHASING Module is the place where all procurement is done. This module allows the user to add purchase orders to the system, and to add items to each purchase order. Edit functions are available both at the purchase order level and at the item level.
       

      The process begins by selecting a Regular PO or an In-Store PO, then selecting a supplier for the order. The supplier is selected from a list of suppliers established in the Supplier Information module.

      After selecting a supplier, the user may enter orders for various types of material.  Inventory material is ordered to be placed in on hand inventory and used in the making of product. The user may also select MRO parts, parts which are not kept in inventory, but are expensed as they are purchased and distributed to the requester when they are received. (MRO parts may be defined in the item master and kept in inventory, if desired.) There is also a selection for Services.

      The user may add a new part by selecting the part class and type, then choosing from a part matching that criteria, or go directly to the part number edit box and enter the part number without visiting the class and type box.

      The buyer may have entered a specific manufacturer of the item, providing that the manufacturer and the part number have been entered in the inventory item master. If there is only one manufacturer, that manufacturer will be the default manufacturer entered in the purchase order.

      If the user is adding an inventory item to the order, the system will add in the details from the item master once the part number is established.

      Purchased items may have the delivery schedule established for one or more deliveries. The delivery date entered in the purchase order is meant to be the date the material lands on the user’s dock.

      The user may enter either the stocking quantities based on the stocking unit of measure or the purchasing quantities, based on the purchase unit of measure. If the units of measure are different, the user must have defined the relationship between the different units in the Unit of Measure Conversion. Entering one quantity will automatically calculate and enter the other quantity.

      The user enters the unit price and whether or not the item is taxable. If it is taxable, the tax percentage will be supplied based on the data entered in the Tax &Shipping Mode tab. The system will display the extended amount of the item on the order based on the quantity and price.   Note: If the Tax Information has not been filled in, the Purchase Order will NOT calculate any sales tax. Therefore, it is important that the user set this up properly.

      The user may define the quantity that may be received over the amount of the order by entering an overage percentage.  This will allow incoming receiving to accept quantities up to the amount of overage specified for the order.

      The user may enter specific notes about the item on the purchase order, to be printed on the order. They may also view and edit any item master notes that may exist for the part, and may also view the procurement history for the part.

      Once entered, all orders require an approval. The approval authority established in the Purchase Order Authorization tab is used to determine whether or not an individual may approve an order. It is possible to allow two approvals to orders, and to set different approval limits for each of them.

      Orders will be identified as temporary orders until approved, after which they will have a permanent number assigned.

      Change orders to purchase orders must also be approved in the same manner. Once an order is changed, it cannot be printed or acted upon until it is approved again.

      Details about the remittance, delivery point, billing etc. will be completed with Supplier default information, and may be reviewed for the order if necessary.

      In-Store purchasing overview: In-Store is the situation where the Supplier has placed raw materials in the user’s warehouse. The Supplier still owns the raw materials. When the user is ready to use the Supplier’s raw materials, he/she issues an In-Store Purchase Order. For In-Store POs, the user may select by Supplier or by Part Number. Then the user may find records according to the selection. Once found, the user may create a PO for the In-Store Consumption. In-Store Purchasing also includes receiving.

      1.4.1.1.3. Fields & Definitions - PO Mgmt

       

      Sup Name The supplier or vendor with whom the order was placed.
      Sup Status The status of the Supplier, whether Approved, Inactive, etc.
      PO  Number
      The Purchase Order number of the order.  If PO Numbering is set to Auto (in Number System Setup ) the system automatically places a "T" in the PO number to flag it as a temporary number.  Then upon approval the system auto finds and replaces that "T" with a "0".    Note:  If PO Numbering is set to manual, users enters a PO number manually using a "T", then changes the numbering to Auto, if this PO is edited and approved the "T" will be changed to "0".  The system has no way of knowing that the PO was manual numbered before the change.
      CO

      The Change Order revision status of the order. This field can be automatically increased upon approval or controlled by the user and is only changed if the user manually assigns a Change Order number. (This is setup in the Purchase Order Setup module). Change Order History is tracked under the View Changes History screen automatically.  NOTE:  If auto assign the next change order will be referenced in the change history but the PO change order will not increase until PO has been approved. If not auto assigned the change order will be referenced to what ever change order user enters. 

      Po Date The date the purchase order was created.
      Freight Included If this box is checked, the vendor has agreed to pay the freight.  "Freight Included" will be added to the print out of the PO form and will be displayed in PO Reconciliation module for reference.  If this box is not checked "Freight Not Included" will be displayed on PO Reconciliation module.
      Conf Name The contact at the supplier who confirmed the purchase order.
      Buyer The initials of the buyer for the order.
      PO Status The status of the purchase order. Indicates if the order is new, being edited, is open, closed or cancelled.
      PO Priority The status of the purchase order.Indicate if the order is standard, priority, or hot.
      Approval When the purchase order is approved, the "T" in the Purchase Order number will be replaced with a "0" and the initials of the person who approved the order will be displayed.  (Note:  The PO must be approved before being able to create a PO Dock receiver).
      Final Approval When two approvals are required, and both are granted, the initials of the second person approving the purchase order will be displayed in this field.
      UDF (User Define Field) has been added for future use and is not functional at this time.
      Supplier Ack Load supplier acknowledgement documents received from supplier.

      Purchase Order Items

      Item The purchase order item number of an item being purchased.
      Part Number The part number of the item being purchased.
      Rev The revision of the part number being purchased.
      Description The Description of the part number.
      Order Qty The quantity of parts being ordered.   See Article #1240 for more detail on why the system will not allow user to enter in a fraction of a number, and an alternative.
      Balance The un-received balance of the item.
      Price The agreed upon price for the items being ordered.
      Extension The extension of the price and quantity.
      Tax Indicates whether or not the item is taxable.
       

      This will allow user to cancel an individual item on a PO.  Since the system does not allow you to delete a line item that has had any kind of transaction, we needed a way for users to cancel individual line items without having to cancel the entire order within the system.  If any parts have been accepted, it cannot be cancelled. Once a part has any receipts the user cannot delete the line, so if they reject the total received qty they can cancel the line to prevent it from affecting the PO, or PO history for the other line items.  If they do not want to reject the entire qty then their only option is to reduce the balance qty to the accepted qty.  Cancelled line items will be excluded from the Purchase Order reports within the module.

      Total Purchases The total amount of all items on the purchase order (excluding taxes).
      Total Tax The total tax amount of all items on the purchase order.

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       






      Detail Definitions

      Item # The purchase order item number of an item being viewed.
      Item Type The type of inventory being purchased (Inventory, MRO, or Services)  Inventory is for a part that exists in the ICM module.  MRO stands for Management Required Options.  Generally this is used for supplies, purchases.  Services items are for those instances where the assembly is outsourced.

      Part Number

      The internal part number of the item being purchased.

      Rev

      The revision of the part number.

      Package

      The packaging method used to package the parts.

      Material Type The material type (per AVL level) will be displayed in Red once user selects the mfgr and mfrg PN.  
      Firm Plan

      If this box is checked, the MRP module will NOT try to override the purchasing decision.  For example: If the need is for 100 parts per month for the next six months.  But the user makes a decision to block order 600 parts and marks the PO as Firm Planned.   Without any Firm Plan command, the MRP module would instruct the user to cancel the PO for 600 quantity and re-issue for 6 separate purchases of 100 each.  But since the PO is marked as Firm Planned  this tells MRP that the purchasing decision was intentional and NOT to override.  So MRP will work around this PO

      First Article

      If this box is checked, this part requires a first article inspection and the users will be required to check off the First Article Done box within PO receiving  (This information is usually defaulted from the ICM module, but can be edited within the PO module also).

      Allow Partial Schedule

      This will default in from the Purchase Order Setup module, but user can change it any time while in the PO module.   If un-checked user will receive the popup warning them that they have not scheduled all the order qty and ask if they want to finish scheduling the order qty,  upon saving a PO with only a partial schedule.  If the box is checked the system will not ask any questions when saving a po with only partial schedule.   (Note:  MRP will NOT acknowledge qty's that are not scheduled).

      Serialized

      If this box is checked, the user will be required to enter serial numbers at time of Purchase Order Receipt and Inspection.  (This information is defaulted from the ICM module).

      Part Class

      The Part Class of the part number.

      Part Type

      The Part Type of the part number.

      Description

      The Description of the part type.

      Overage

      The percentage of parts allowed to be received over the ordered quantity.

      Manufacturer

      The manufacturer for the part.

      Manufacturer Part Number

      The commercial part number.

      Supplier Part No.

      If the Mfgr AVL has a Supplier and Supplier PN associated within the ICM module, the Supplier PN will be displayed in this field as additional reference.

      Purchase Lead Time

      The time between the Supplier receipt of the PO and receipt at the users dock.

      Insp Exception

      Checking this box will allow the receiver to receive the parts for this Purchase Order Only without inspection. Upon checking this box the Insp Exception Note Field and the Insp Excep Doc will become available for use and then user must then select an Insp Exception Type from the pull down screen.  User MUST have special rights within the Security module or supervisor rights to edit this field.

      The Insp Exception box MUST be checked for this field to become available.  This information will then be displayed within the PO Receiving as reference information to the users that are processing the Receipts through the system.

      The Insp Exception box MUST be checked for this field to become available.  This will allow users to attached documents. This information will then be displayed within the PO Receiving as reference information to the users that are processing the Receipts through the system.

      Min/Multi Order

      The Min/Multi order quantities are defaulted in from the Inventory Control module (MRP Info tab) to display the minimum quantity that must be ordered for this part and the increments this part must be purchased in. (If this information is edited within the Purchase Order Module, it will be updated to the ICM module upon saving). For Example: if the Min order qty is 500 and the order multi is 100 and the order is for 515, then the order will need to be rounded up to 600. 

      Purchase Order Qty

      The quantity of parts being ordered based on the purchasing units of measure.

      UOM

      The Purchased unit of measure. (May be different than stocking unit of measure).

      Price/UOM

      The agreed upon unit price for the items being ordered.

      Extended Amt

      The extension of the price and quantity.

      Standard Cost/Stock UOM

      This field displays the Standard MATERIAL Cost. (This is defaulted in from the ICM module, if no standard material cost is found in the ICM module the user will be allowed to enter in a standard material cost at the time of purchase).   For a BUY part, this is the value against which PPV should be calculated, and the value the user should expect to pay for the part.

      Stock/Order Qty

      The quantity of parts ordered based on the stocking unit of measure.

      Stock UOM

      The stocking unit of measure.

      Stock Price/UOM

      The stocking price. 

      Taxable

      Indicates whether or not the item is taxable.

      Target Price

      The target price is a reference for the buyers to use. (This information is defaulted from the ICM module).

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

      D

      T  

       
      Directive Buttons

      The following buttons are displayed on the Purchase Order screen.

      After a purchase order is created or edited, it must be approved before it can be printed and issued to a supplier. Certain employees may be granted authority to approve purchases up to a certain total dollar value. Those authorized personnel may approve purchase orders under that amount. If only one signature is required, the order will be finalized and released. If it is a new order, and automatic PO numbering is enabled, Manex will assign the next available number to the order. The action is taken by clicking on the Approval button and responding with an authorized password.

      If two signatures are required in order to release a purchase order, then a second person with approval authority for the amount of the order must approve the order, by clicking on the Final Approval button and responding with an authorized password.
       

        If this button is displayed in Red related documents have been attached to this item in the ICM module and may be viewed by depressing the "View Inventory Item Related Documentation" button.  For further detail see Article #2396. 
        Depressing this button will display the note for that part per the Item Master (It will be shown in red as displayed)  This button will only be editable if that user has "Edit" rights for the Inventory Control Module.
        Depressing the button will bring up a screen where the user can enter a special note pertaining to the particular line item. Depress the Edit button. Type in the note. Depress the Save button. Exit.
       

      Depressing the button will bring up a screen where the user can enter special notes pertaining to the entire PO. Depress the Edit button. Type in the note. Depress the Save button. Exit.

        If this button is displayed in Red, user will be able to view the inspection notes that have been recorded within the PO Receiving module.  These notes will also be displayed in all of the PO Detail reports (except detail by due date report).  
       

      Depressing the button will bring up a screen where the user can enter additional PO foot notes pertaining to the entire PO. (This will not replace the standard foot notes defaulted from the system set-up.) Depress the Edit button. Type in the note. Depress the Save button. Exit.

        Depressing this button will open up address information regarding the supplier.
       
      Depressing this button will bring up a screen listing note templates from System Setup and you may select the desired template(s) you would like added at the Item level.  Any Note Templates added will be listed as an attachment to the normal PO and this button will be displayed in RED.  By design this button is ONLY editable in the view mode (See Article #3432 for further detail).   If user trys to use this button in the add or edit mode the system will display one of the following warnings.

       
       
       
      Depressing this button will bring up a screen listing note templates from System Setup and you may select the desired template(s) you would like added at the PO level.  Any Note Templates added will be listed as an attachment to the normal PO and this button will be displayed in REDBy design this button is ONLY editable in the view mode (See Article #3432 for further detail).  If user trys to use this button in the add or edit mode the system will display one of the following warnings.
       
       
        
        Depressing this button will display the complete history of all changes made to this order, if an approval is required for the change, with the exception of checking or unchecking the Freight Included box.  It will list the CO # (if applicable), Date/Time of Change, By User, PO Total at time of change, and List of Changes recorded.  NOTE:  The system will record the fact that notes have been changed (PO Note, POItem Note, PO Foot Notes)(only if an approval is required which is setup in the Purchase Setup module), but will NOT record the differences between them.  This will be the users responsibility to record and track the modifications within the note fields.  
      Load supplier acknowledgement documents received from supplier.  See Article #5137 for further information on How to Load a Document.

       

      Confirm/Remit Screen Field Definitions

      Supplier The supplier or vendor with whom the order was placed.
      PO Number The Purchase Order number of the order. New purchase orders that have not been approved will display a temporary number until approved.
      Fax, eMail, Mail How to communicate with the supplier.

      CONFIRM TO

      Confirm To The name of the supplier.

      Address, City, State, Postal Code, Country

      The address of the supplier to which the order is sent.
      Phone, Fax How to communicate with the supplier.
      E-Mail Email address enter within the Supplier Setup module.

      REMIT TO

      Remit To The name of the supplier or their agent.
      Address, City, State, Postal Code, Country The address of the supplier to which the payment is sent.
       Phone, Fax How to communicate with the supplier accounting department.
       E-Mail Email address enter within the Supplier Setup module.

      When the user has displayed a purchase order with items on the Purchase Order screen, pressing on the Receiving button will display information about where the supplier is to ship the material on the purchase order, and the terms and conditions of the order.



      Receiving Screen Field Definitions

      Supplier The supplier or vendor with whom the order was placed.
      PO Number The Purchase Order number of the order. New purchase orders that have not been approved will display a temporary number until approved.
      Receiving Location The company and address to which the order is to be shipped.
      Terms The terms of the purchase order.
      FOB The FOB point for the order.
      Ship via The preferred shipping carrier for the order.
      Ship Charge How the freight costs are to be paid.
      Account Number If needed, the freight company account number for the carrier to charge.
      Ship Chg Amt The shipping charge cost for the order.  This is referenced on Purchase Order Forms Only.  These amounts wIll not be carried over to the PO Reconcilliation.
      Taxable Indicates if the freight charges are taxable.  This is referenced on Purchase Order Forms Only.  These amounts wIll not be carried over to the PO Reconcilliation.
      Tax % The tax rate for the shipping charges.  This is referenced on Purchase Order Forms Only.  These amounts wIll not be carried over to the PO Reconcilliation.
      Delivery Time The preferred delivery time for receipts.
      Attention The name of the person to whom the shipment is directed.

      DIRECTIVE BUTTONS

      When the user has displayed a purchase order with items on the Purchase Order screen, pressing on the Send Invoice To button will display the billing information for the supplier. This button is displayed on the Purchase Order Receiving Information screen.




      Send Invoice To Screen Field Definitions

      Supplier The supplier or vendor with whom the order was placed.
      PO Number The Purchase Order number of the order. New purchase orders that have not been approved will display a temporary number until approved.
      Remittance Location The users company and address to which the order is to be billed.

      Depressing the Purchase History button will display the purchase history for that line item. The user may sort by Date, Supplier, PO Number, Mfgr. or Price by depressing the appropriate button. Note: If an order has status “EDITING” it will not be displayed on the history list. Once the order is approved and the status is changed to "Open" or "Closed" the order will then be displayed on the purchase history list.



      When the user has displayed a purchase order with items on the Purchase Order screen, and has highlighted one of the line items, checking the Expand box will display the schedule information about the item being purchased.


      When the user has finished viewing the schedule information about the item, the user may check the Shrink box and the scheduleinformation will shrink down.


       
       

      Schedule Field Definitions

      Schd Date The date the material is due to land on the users dock.  This is the date MRP uses.
      Req Date This is the internally required or desired date.  It is not used for the supplier or MRP.
      Commit Date The commit date is a reference field for the buyer.
      Qty Schd The quantity scheduled for the due date. 
      Balance

      This will display the balance left to receive from the Qty scheduled.

      Warehouse The User can choose the Warehouse from the pulldown or leave it blank.  The Y next to the Warehouse location indicates that, that Warehouse is set-up in the AVL.  The N next to the Warehouse location indicates that, that Warehouse is not set-up in the AVL.  If the warehouse field is left blank then the warehouse can then be assigned at PO Receiving Management.  Once the record has been saved within the PO Receiving this information will then be updated within the Inventory Control Management under the Qty info screen.
      Location The Location field will update automatically from the Inventory Control Management module. The user can edit this field in the scheduling detail.  This will not change the location in the Inventory Control Management module under the quantity info screen.
      Distribute To This is classification of the distribution of the item when received, either to regular Inventory Receiving or to Allocate to Special Work Order or Project
      N/A

      This Field is for future use, it is non-applicable at this time.

      GL Number The General Ledger number where the purchase order will post.
      Schd Notes Depressing on the       button will bring up a screen where the user can enter in specific notes that pertain to that one schedule, item, and date. Type in the note. Depress the Save button. Exit

      When Creating a new PO or Editing an existing PO this button will be enable. Depressing this button will allow the user to add additional scheduled deliveries.

      When Creating a new PO or Editing a existing PO this button will be enabled. Highlight a scheduled delivery then depressing this button will delete that delivery from this screen

      Total Scheduled

      This field will display the total qty scheduled for the highlighted item.

      Balance Scheduled This field will display the Balance left to receive from the qty scheduled for the highlighted item.
      Un-scheduled Qty

      This field will display the qty un-scheduled for the highlighted item.

       
       
       
       
       
      1.4.1.1.4. How To ..... for PO Mgmt
      1.4.1.1.4.1. Find a Purchase Order

      Depress Material Planning/Purchase Order Management/Purchase Order Management.  The main screen will appear.

       


      1.  Depress the Find Record icon.The following screen will be displayed.

      2.  On the left hand side of the screen, choose what you’re looking for – either Open PO, All, Closed/Cancelled PO or For Approval, by clicking on the appropriate radial.

       

      3.  Once you’ve made your “search for” choice, determine the search method by choosing between PO Number, Inventory Part Number, MRO Part Number, Supplier, Inventory Manufacturer Part Number, MRO Manufacturer Part Number, All, Inventory Description, or MRO Description.

      4a.  For example, a selection on the left for an Open PO, and a selection of ALL on the right will produce the following screen, listing all open purchase orders.

      Double click on the Open PO displayed to make your selection.

       
       4b.  A selection on the left for All and a selection of All on the right will produce a list of all purchase orders, open, closed, etc.  
       4c.  A selection on the left of For Approval and a selection on the right for All will produce the following selection. (Pending, Editing, New, etc.)

       

       

      4d. If you are searching for a specific PO, select All on the left and PO No. on the right.Then type in the purchase order number and hit enter.The PO record will pull onto screen.  

       4e. If you are interested in a specific supplier with open POs, mark the left hand side Open PO and the right as Supplier.Type in the Supplier Name.

      A list of all of the Open POs for that Supplier will appear, as shown.

       

       4f. If you are interested in a specific part number on Open POs, select Open PO on the left and Inventory Part No. on the right.Type in the Part Number.

      Any open POs containing this part number will appear, as shown.

       

      The rest of the right hand selections are essentially the same as for those illustrated above.

      5. After finding the Purchase Order, the Purchase Order screen appears, populated with any parts on order.

       

       

      1.4.1.1.4.2. Add A Purchase Order

      Enter Manex.exe
      Material Planning/Purchase Order Management/Purchase Order Management 
       

      The following screen will appear:





      Depress the Add Record Button (in the Purchase Order Tab screen) displays the following sequences:

      The user will be prompted for the password. The first step is to Select Regular PO or In-Store PO 

       
      If Regular PO is selected then another Selection box will appear. The user must define the supplier for the purchase order.

      The user is asked if they wish to locate the supplier by the name or supplier ID code.

       

      If the user selects to find a supplier by the name, a screen is presented listing all of the suppliers in alphanumeric order  
       If the user selects to find a supplier by the ID code, a screen is presented listing all of the supplier ID codes in alphanumeric order  

      The user may enter the number or name in the red edit box above the Supplier or Supplier ID label, or scroll down to select a supplier. Double clicking on a supplier or pressing the ENTER key on a highlighted supplier selects the supplier and displays the Purchase Order screen with the supplier included.

      Once a supplier is identified, the remaining information fields become active.  The user can CANCEL the action if needed.

      The user then may fill in the Confirm Name, Buyer and add items to the purchase order. 

      Entering Item Detail Information

      The user must first select the Item Type to be entered as a line item. Item types include Inventory Parts (parts to be delivered to on hand inventory), MRO (expensed items) or Services .

       

      1.4.1.1.4.2.1. Inventory Part

      Selecting Inventory Parts as the item type, the user may jump directly to the part number box (click on it) and enter a part number. Or, the user may step through the Part Classes and Part Types to narrow the focus and then select a part from the desired part type.  Once a part number from Inventory has been entered, ManEx completes the boxes associated with the item master.

      If more than one manufacturer exists for the part, the user may click on the down-arrow next to the manufacturer edit box and select the appropriate manufacturer for the order.  The Material type will be displayed in the pulldown next to the Mfg. and Mfgr. PN.  

       If more than one supplier part number exists for the part, the user may click on the down-arrow next to the supplier part no. edit box and select the appropriate supplier part no. for the order.

      The system will look for the preferred supplier part number and if found will show it as a display. At this time the user can leave the part number as is or select a different one if available.  After a user will save the PO, the supplier part number will be saved and next time you will see the selected suppler part number when viewing the same PO.

      No history will be saved because this field is for the information only.

       

      Firm Plan

      If this box is checked, the MRP module will not try to override the purchasing decision.  For Example: The user makes a decision to block order 600 parts, but the need is only for 100 parts per month for the next six months.  Without the Firm Plan command, the MRP module would tell the user to cancel the PO for 600 quantity and re-issue for 6 separate purchases of 100 each.   With the Firm Plan command, this tells MRP that the purchasing decision was intentional.  (Please refer to the Material Requirements Planning article).

      First Article This box will be checked if set-up in the Inventory Control Management Module.  You may uncheck it or check it if user has been instructed that it may be changed for this item only.  This information will be carried forward to the PO Receiving screen for reference.
      Serialized This box will be checked if set-up in the Inventory Control Management Module and will not be editable within the Purchase Order Management.  This indicates to the user that this BUY part has been marked as Serialized and any product coming in or out of the system will require serial number tracking. 

      The user may edit or add a percentage amount of extra material that will be allowed to be shipped against the order. By entering a percentage in the OVERAGE field, receiving will be allowed to receive extra parts up to the limit imposed in this field.

      The user may also edit or add in purchasing lead time and min/mult order quantities through the Purchase Order Management module.Once the record has been saved this information will then be updated within the Inventory Control Management under the MRP Info screen.

      The user may check the box for Inspection Exception and select from the Inspection Exception Pulldown (which is established in the  Inspection Exception Setup module). The user will then also be allowed to enter any Inspection Exception Notes and/or Load Insp Excep doc that pertain to that PO line item. This information will then be displayed within the PO Receiving as reference information to the users that are processing the Receipts through the system.

      The user is then prompted for the purchase order quantity of parts to be ordered. The user may enter either the Purchase Quantity or the Stocking Quantity, and ManEx will complete the other field based on the purchase/stocking unit of measure and conversion field.
       
      NOTE:  When creating a PO for an item with different purchasing and stocking UoMs, be sure to enter the MRP suggestion into the Stocking qty field rather than the purchasing qty field.  The system will automatically convert the stocking unit into the purchasing unit for the purchase order qty.
       
      For example if  the buyer is creating a PO for an item that is used by inches but sold by the foot, the user would enter qty of 24 into the stocking qty field and the PO would automatically convert it to 2 feet in the purchasing qty field.  So the supplier deals in feet, but ManEx deals in inches.  The conversion between the two are established in the Unit of Measure & Conversion  module. 

      Then the unit price is entered (Price Each). The extended amount is shown, calculated by extending the quantity by price.  (If the inventory part that you are creating a line item for currently has a standard cost of 0.00 within inventory control the system will prompt the user if you wish to take that Purchase Order Price entered and use it as the standard cost for that item within inventory control).  This can not be controlled by the Security level due to the fact that it is better practice to have a $$ assigned to the ICM record before the Purchase Order Receipt is accepted into the system.  Otherwise you will have stock that is not valued properly, accounting records that will not be correct, etc. . . .  So this is why ManEx allows any Purchase Order user to populate the STD cost field for that record with the purchase $ that you are loading.  BUT . . Once a Std Cost is associated with the ICM record - the users within Purchase Order Management should no longer be able to change that value through the PO module.

      The user may then indicate that the items are taxable by clicking on the Taxable check box.

      The Stock/BOM field will update automatically based upon the conversion table defined in setup.   The completed screen should appear as follows:

       

      Before saving the order you will need to check the expand box and enter the Schedule detail information
       
      There are situations when the users will either not enter a schedule or enter a partial schedule at time of creating PO.  If the scheduled qty does not match the order qty or the "Allow Partial Schedule" box is unchecked, upon depressing the Save button the following message will be displayed.  This gives the user the option to stop the save process and return to the item and schedule or continue on and save without scheduling.  Some users may not know an exact date for scheduling at the time of the PO creation and just create the PO to get the part on order.  Then upon the supplier response add the scheduled dates to the PO at a later time.  This is why we do not enforce the scheduling at the time of the PO creation. 
       
       
      If the "Allow Partial Schedule" box is checked upon saving the PO without a schedule or a partial schedule this message will not be displayed.
       
      Entering Schedule Detail Information
       
      The item will schedule automatically by adding the lead time to todays date and schedule the entire order amount.  (Note:  MRP will NOT acknowledge qty's that are not scheduled).
       

      At this time the user has the option to change the Schd date/Req date/commit date information and also the Qty Schd.
       
      Note:   If user is not following MRP suggestions when creating POs they need to keep in mind inspection time when entering a schedule for a PO. 

      If the user wants to modify the automatic scheduled date, they can either manually adjust the Date information by highlighting the field and typing in the new date, or place the cursor in the Due Date field.Type in a ?.  A calendar will appear.

      Depress the desired delivery date.To advance into the next month, depress the > button.

       

      Schedule Field Definitions

      Schd Date The date the material is due to land on the users dock.  This is the date MRP uses.
      Req Date This is the internally required or desired date.  It is not used for the supplier or MRP.
      Commit Date The commit date is a reference field for the buyer.
      Qty Schd The quantity scheduled for the due date. 
      Warehouse The User can choose the Warehouse from the pulldown or leave it blank.  The Y next to the Warehouse location indicates that, that Warehouse is set-up in the AVL.  The N next to the Warehouse location indicates that, that Warehouse is not set-up in the AVL.  If the warehouse field is left blank then the warehouse can then be assigned at PO Receiving Management.  Once the record has been saved within the PO Receiving this information will then be updated within the Inventory Control Management under the Qty info screen.
      Location The Location field will update automatically from the Inventory Control Management module. The user can edit this field in the scheduling detail.  This will not change the location in the Inventory Control Management module under the quantity info screen.
      Distribute To This is classification of the distribution of the item when received, either to regular Inventory Receiving or to Allocate to Special Work Order or Project
      GL Number The General Ledger number where the purchase order will post.
      Schd Notes Depressing on the       button will bring up a screen where the user can enter in specific notes that pertain to that one schedule, item, and date. Type in the note. Depress the Save button. Exit

      Pressing the Save button at the top of the screen saves the order and item(s) entered, and assigns a temporary number to the order.  After adding items to the purchase order and saving them, the Purchase Order will display all items added to the order.

      The user may use the scroll bars at the right and bottom of the items listed to scroll over additional information.

      The user may modify the column widths in the current view by placing the cursor on the right border of the column in the column header, and pressing the left mouse button. Moving the border while holding the mouse button then releasing at the new location resizes the columns.
       
       
      1.4.1.1.4.2.1.1. Allocate to Special Work Order or Project

      Introduction

      Inventory Allocation is used to allocate (reserve) quantities of existing items in stock or future Purchase Order deliveries to a Work Order or Project Number.This allocation prevents issuing the quantity reserved to any other use except the Work Order or Project Number specified. Purchase Order Line Item allocations may be removed prior to receipt of the parts by editing the Purchase Order.After receipt of parts allocated by Purchase Order, the allocation may only be removed after the parts are in stock, by using the Inventory Allocation module.

      ALLOCATION OF PURCHASE ORDER DELIVERIES

      Allocating a PO Line Item is used to make sure that the item will be reserved for a particular Work Order or Project Number  when it is received.PO line item allocation is generally used when allocating to a Work Order or Project Number for which the items are not available in stock.Line Shortages of items not on the BOM, which are not in stock, are an example of typical PO Line Item Allocations.To allocate Purchase Order Line Item Deliveries to a Work Order or Project Number:

      • A Work Order or Project Number must be open for the product.  
      • The Item to be allocated must be entered in the Inventory Control Item Master.
      • The quantity allocated must equal the quantity ordered. ie. The total quantity ordered on a line item may be allocated to multiple Work Orders or Project Numbers through the schedule screen.

      PROCEDURES

      To Allocate a PO Line Item to a Work Order or Project Number:

      1. Allocate to a new or existing PO.
      2. Select the desired PO in Article #153. 
      3. Highlight the line item you want to allocate.
      4. (If it is an existing PO) Depress the Edit action button.
      5. Expand the Schedule Screen, tab or click on the "Distribute to"  field.
      6. Select WO Alloc or Prj Alloc, enter the Work Order number or Project number to allocate to in the WO # field or Project # field.
      7. Follow normal PO Mgmt procedures to save and approve.

        NOTE:The user may wish to allocate a line item to multiple Work Orders and/or Project Numbers.  In the schedule for an item, the user can create as many schedule lines as required.  Each schedule line can have a different allocation.  If the user had a requirement for 5 Work Orders and/or Project Numbers of 100 parts for each Work Order and/or  Project Number, the user would add a line to the PO for 500 parts, then in the schedule, the user can add a line for each Work Order and/or ProjectNumber to which the parts are allocated. The schedule dates can be the same or different. The supplier will see only the total quantity required by the schedule date and is not bothered with the individual allocations.

      To Un-allocate a PO Line Item that has not yet been Dock Received:

      1. Select the desired PO in  Article #153.
      2. Highlight the line item you want to un-allocate.
      3. Depress the Edit action button.
      4. Expand the Schedule Screen, tab or click on the "Distribute to" field.
      5. Select Inv Recv.
      6. Follow normal PO Mgmt procedures to save and approve.

      To Un-allocate a PO Line Item that has already been Dock Received:

      1. Receive into inventory using Purchase & Receiving Mgmt procedures.
      2. Use the Inventory Allocation procedure to un-allocate.
        1.4.1.1.4.2.2. MRO Items

        MRO stands for Maintenance, Repair and Operations.  Generally this is used for supplies, etc. purchases.

        After selecting the Item Type to be "MRO"

        If the MRO item is included in inventory 
              a.  The user may jump directly to the part number box (click on it) and enter a part number. Or, the user may step through the Part Classes and Part Types to narrow 
        the focus and then select a part from the desired part type.
         
              b.   Fill in the quantity and unit price. 

        If the MRO item is NOT included in inventory
              a.   The user may enter in the Suppliers part number manually (or leave blank) and then jump to the description field and enter the description.

        The finished screen should look like the screen displayed:

           
        1. Check the Expand box in the Schedule screen.
        2. Enter schedule dates and quantity scheduled.
        3. Type in the title or name of the person requesting the item in the “Distribute To” field.
        4. Enter a General Ledger account number in the GL Number field.

        The completed Schedule screen will appear as follows:

        1. At the conclusion of entry for the item, the user may depress the Save record action button or the Abandon record action button.
        2. Approve record. 
         
         
         
        1.4.1.1.4.2.3. Service Items

        Service items are for those instances where the assembly is outsourced.

        After selecting the Item Type to be "Service"

        1. The user may enter the supplier Part number manually (or leave blank) and then go to the description field and enter the description.
        2. Fill in the quantity and unit price. 

           

        The finished screen should look like the screen displayed:

           
        1. Check the Expand box in the Schedule screen.
        2. Enter schedule dates and quantity scheduled.
        3. Type in the title or name of the person requesting the item in the “Distribute To” field.
        4. Enter a General Ledger account number in the GL Number field.

        The completed Schedule screen will appear as follows:

        1. At the conclusion of entry for the item, the user may depress the Save record action button or the Abandon changes action button. 
        2. Approve record. Please note upon approval the service item is marked as received and balance updated to 0. 

         

         

         

        1.4.1.1.4.3. Edit, Cancel, or Close a Purchase Order

        Find the Purchase Order that you would like to edit.

        Pressing the Edit record action button in the Purchase Order screen will allow the user to modify all the following information: 

        • The Confirmation Name, Buyer, PO Priority, Supplier Ack., check or uncheck Freight Included box.
        • The Status field will only be enabled in the edit mode for users with approval rights. User MUST have approval rights to Modify the PO Status.
        • Order quantity and unit price, min/multi qty, purchase lead time, overage amount, Firm Plan or First Article.
        • Add or Deletion of a Line Item
          • By depressing the Add button allows the user to add additional items to the PO.
          • By depressing the Delete button you can delete an existing line Item from the PO.
            • Highlight the line item that you wish to delete, then depress the Delete button .
            • The user will be asked to validate the deletion before proceeding.
            • If you select OK the item will be deleted from the order.
        • Information about the terms, FOB, Ship Via, Ship Charge, and Account number, Ship Charge Amount, whether taxable, the tax % 
        • Schd Date, Requested Date, Commit Date, Quantity Scheduled, Warehouse, Location, Distribute To and Schd Notes.
        • Modify or add any information in the Item Master Notes, PO Item Notes, PO Notes, and PO Foot Notes.  (Depending on how the user has Purchase Setup module marked depends on whether user can edit the notes without going into edit mode on the PO record.  If the "Require approvals for Date changes and Notes" is marked as "Yes" then it will force the users to first put the PO in edit mode before they will be allowed to edit any notes and the note changes will be recorded in the "View Changes History" screen.  But if it is marked "No" then the notes become editable without the actual record in Edit mode and the note changes will NOT be recorded in the "View Changes History" screen).  

        Depress the Save record action button after you have finished with editing the record. The user will then need to approve the order.  If user has the "Auto Assign new Change Order # Upon Approval" box checked within the Purchase Setup module, the reminder will NOT be issued and CO#  field becomes NOT editable.  When the user approves the change the Change Order number will be automatically increased.   If user has the "Auto Assign New Change Order # Upon Approval" box unchecked within the Purchase Setup module when user makes changes the CO# will stay the same, the system will prompt the reminder, and user may manually assign a change order number if applicable.

             

         
         
        There are situations when an item may not have a schedule or may have a partial schedule.  If the "Allow Partial Schedule" box is checked within the Purchase Setup module, the system will NOT ask any questions when saving a po with only partial schedule.   (Note:  MRP will NOT acknowledge qty's that are not scheduled).   If the "Allow Partial Schedule" box is unchecked within the Purchase Setup module, user will receive the following popup warning when  editing and saving that line item or any other line item on that same purchase order:  
         
         

        NOTE
        : If the "Auto Assign new Change Order # Upon Approval" box is checked, and PO is new and the user goes into the "Edit" mode prior to approval, no changes will be made to the CO# on screen or in the "View Changes History" screen.  If PO has been approved and the user goes into the "Edit" mode the next CO#  will be referenced in the "View Changes History" screen but will NOT increase on screen until PO has been approved.  If the user goes to the "Edit" mode more than once before approving the change the CO#  will only increase once in the "View Changes History" screen.  

        NOTE:  If users enter a PO number manually using a "T", then changes the numbering to Auto, and later edits and approves this PO the "T" will be changed to "0".  The system has no way of knowing that the PO was manual numbered before the change. 

        If multiple users are editing the same PO and the PO has not been approved yet, so it still has a temp # and the 1st users approves the PO, while the 2nd user is still making their changes,  when the 2nd user goes to exit and save their changes they will receive the following message:

         

        Manex tracks all revisions of a Purchase Order and each receipt against each revision of the order.  The system will NOT allow any changes to a Purchase Order which has parts in Dock Receiving that have not yet been processed in the Purchase Order Receiving & Inspection module.

        Cancel a Purchase Order

        Find the Purchase Order you want to cancel.  Press the Edit record action button in the Purchase Order screen this will allow the user to change the PO status from Open to Cancel. Note: User MUST have approval rights to Modify the PO Status.
         
        Each line item will need to be deleted using the instructions above.  Once all line items have been deleted from the PO. The status on the PO will show cancel.

        Closing out a Purchase Order

        At times, the user may wish to close out a PO to suppliers who have either shipped short or overages of ordered components.  For example, say a user has a Purchase Order for 100 components.  100 units are received with 5 rejections.  (See the DMR procedures). This would show the Purchase Order showing a quantity of 5 for a balance.  What if the user informs the supplier that they do not want the last 5 pieces.

         

        In the above set of circumstances, the user will be allowed to change the ORIGINAL order quantity by removing the rejected quantity via the DMR procedure.   When the Received quantity PLUS the DMR quantity is LESS than the order quantity, the user will be allowed to decrease the order quantity by that many.  Original Order 100; Received quantity 100; Rejected quantity 5.  Returned to supplier via DMR 5.  At this point, the user may reduce the quantity ordered, AND the accompanying amount scheduled to 95.  This action will close out the Purchase Order.

         

        The user must depress the Edit button.  Change the Purchase Order Quantity, then change the Quantity Scheduled so that the total of the schedule dates exactly equals the new quantity.  Depress the Save button.  Approve the PO and the PO status will change to close.

         

        1.4.1.1.4.4. E-mail Purchase Order(s)
        To e-mail a Purchase Order report(s), depress the Reports button.
         
        Note:  You MUST have the e-mail setup within the Trigger.exe setup and working before the PO e-mail will work.   
         
        The reports screen will appear:

        Select the output XL File, TXT File, or PDF by clicking on the radial.

        Check the Email box located int he left hand corner of the Reports Tab.  

        Highlight the report you want to Email.

        Depress the option tab.

         
         

        Complete the Option tab with the information required:  Note:  User has the option to check the Email box on the Options screen also.

         

        Depress OK.  The following screen will appear.  Select or Enter File Name. 

         

        Depress Save, the following Check Email Addresses screen will appear.  Within this screen you can enter an e-mail address or add any special notes needed:

        Depress OK and documents will be sent to e-mail addresses assigned. 

        The following is what the receiver will receive:

         

        1.4.1.1.4.5. Approve a Purchase Order


        Material Planning/Purchase Order Management/Purchase Order Management 
         

        The following screen will appear:

         
         
        Depress the Find record button and follow the Find a PO  procedures to find a PO for Approval.

        Approve PO

        Pressing the Approval button in the Purchase Order module will ask for the user’s password. The user must enter a password that has been authorized (within the Purchase Setup module) to approve the dollar amount of the order.
         
        Entry of an un-authorized password will receive the following message:
         
         

         

        Entry of an authorized password and approval will  inactivate the 1st approval button and place the initials of the person approving the order next to the approval button , (If in the Purchase Setup , the company has selected to allow one approval of purchase orders).  Then upon approval the temporary Purchase Order number will be replaced with a permanent PO number (replacing the "T" with a "0"). 
         
        If in the Purchase Setup , the company has selected requiring two approvals, then the process must be repeated for the second approval, and the temporary Purchase Order number will be replaced with a permanent PO number (replacing the "T" with a "0") once both approval are granted.

         

        Note:  That if the Purchase Order is an Service or In-store order, once the PO has received it’s final approval the temporary Purchase Order number will be replaced with a permanent PO number (replacing the "T" with a "0") and the PO Status marked as closed.
         
        If the user has elected to use manual purchase order number,the screen will prompt the user for an order number to be applied to the purchase order.   Note:  If users enter a PO number manually using a "T", then changes the numbering to Auto, and later edits and approves this PO the "T" will be changed to "0".  The system has no way of knowing that the PO was manual numbered before the change.  
         
         
         
         
        1.4.1.1.4.5.1. Inventory Part

        Selecting Inventory Parts as the item type, the user may jump directly to the part number box (click on it) and enter a part number. Or, the user may step through the Part Classes and Part Types to narrow the focus and then select a part from the desired part type.  Once a part number from Inventory has been entered, Manex completes the boxes associated with the item master.

        If more than one manufacturer exists for the part, the user may click on the down-arrow next to the manufacturer edit box and select the appropriate manufacturer for the order.  The Material type will be displayed in the pulldown next to the Mfg. and Mfgr. PN.  

         If more than one supplier part number exists for the part, the user may click on the down-arrow next to the supplier part no. edit box and select the appropriate supplier part no. for the order.

        The system will look for the preferred supplier part number and if found will show it as a display. At this time the user can leave the part number as is or select a different one if available. After a user will save the PO, the supplier part number will be saved and next time you will see the selected suppler part number when viewing the same PO.

        No history will be saved because this field is for the information only.

         

        Firm Plan

        If this box is checked, the MRP module will not try to override the purchasing decision.  Lets take a test case. The user makes a decision to block order 600 parts, but the need is only for 100 parts per month for the next six months. Without any Firm Plan command, the MRP module would instruct the user to cancel the PO for 600 quantity and re-issue for 6 separate purchases of 100 each.  Firm Plan tells MRP that the purchasing decision was intentional and no action is required.  (For further detail see Article #1080 ).

        First Article This box will be checked if set-up in the Inventory Control Management Module. You may uncheck it or check it if user has been instructed that it may be changed for this item only.  This information will be carried forward to the PO Receiving screen for reference.
        Serialized This box will be checked if set-up in the Inventory Control Management Module and will not be editable within the Purchase Order Management .  This indicates to the user that this BUY part has been marked as Serialized and any product coming in or out of the system will require serial number tracking. 

        The user may edit or add a percentage amount of extra material that will be allowed to be shipped against the order. By entering a percentage in the OVERAGE field, receiving will be allowed to receive extra parts up to the limit imposed in this field.

        The user may also edit or add in purchasing lead time and min/mult order quantities through the Purchase Order Management module.Once the record has been saved this information will then be updated within the Inventory Control Management under the MRP Info screen.

        The user may check the box for Inspection Exception and select from the Inspection Exception Pulldown (which is established in the  Inspection Exception Setup module).The user will then also be allowed to enter any Inspection Exception Notes and/or Load Insp Excep doc that pertain to that PO line item.This information will then be displayed within the PO Receiving as reference information to the users that are processing the Receipts through the system.

        The user is then prompted for the purchase order quantity of parts to be ordered. The user may enter either the Purchase Quantity or the Stocking quantity, and Manex will complete the other field based on the purchase/stocking unit of measure and conversion field.

        Then the unit price is entered (Price Each). The extended amount is shown, calculated by extending the quantity by price.  (If the inventory part that you are creating a line item for currently has a standard cost of 0.00 within inventory control the system will prompt the user if you wish to take that Purchase Order Price entered and use it as the standard cost for that item within inventory control).  This can not be controlled by the Security level due to the fact that it is better practice to have a $$ assigned to the ICM record before the Purchase Order Receipt is accepted into the system.  Otherwise you will have stock that is not valued properly, accounting records that will not be correct, etc. . . .  So this is why ManEx allows any Purchase Order user to populate the STD cost field for that record with the purchase $ that you are loading.  BUT . . Once a Std Cost is associated with the ICM record - the users within Purchase Order Management should no longer be able to change that value through the PO module.

        The user may then indicate that the items are taxable by clicking on the Taxable check box.

        The Stock/BOM field will update automatically based upon the conversion table defined in setup.   The completed screen should appear as follows:

         

        Before saving the order you will need to check the expand box and enter the Schedule detail information.

        Entering Schedule Detail Information
         
        The item will schedule automatically by adding the lead time to todays date and schedule the entire order amount.


        At this time the user has the option to change the Schd date/Req date/commit date information and also the Qty Schd.
         
        Note:   If user is not following MRP suggestions when creating POs they need to keep in mind inspection time when entering a schedule for a PO. 

        If the user wants to modify the automatic scheduled date, they can either manually adjust the Date information by highlighting the field and typing in the new date, or place the cursor in the Due Date field.Type in a ?.  A calendar will appear.

        Depress the desired delivery date.To advance into the next month, depress the > button.

         

        Schedule Field Definitions

        Schd Date The date the material is due to land on the users dock
        Req Date This is the internally required or desired date.It is not used for the supplier
        Commit Date The commit date is a reference field for the buyer
        Qty Schd The quantity scheduled for the due date
        Warehouse The User can choose the Warehouse from the pulldown or leave it blank.  The Y next to the Warehouse location indicates that, that Warehouse is set-up in the AVL.  The N next to the Warehouse location indicates that, that Warehouse is not set-up in the AVL.  If the warehouse field is left blank then the warehouse can then be assigned at PO Receiving Management.  Once the record has been saved within the PO Receiving this information will then be updated within the Inventory Control Management under the Qty info screen.
        Location The Location field will update automatically from the Inventory Control Management module. The user can edit this field in the scheduling detail. This will not change the location in the Inventory Control Management module under the quantity info screen.
        Distribute To This is classification of the distribution of the item when received, either to regular Inventory Receiving or to Allocate to Special Work Order or Project
        GL Number The General Ledger number where the purchase order will post
        Schd Notes Depressing on the       button will bring up a screen where the user can enter in specific notes that pertain to that one schedule, item, and date. Type in the note. Depress the Save button. Exit

        Pressing the Save button at the top of the screen saves the order and item(s) entered, and assigns a temporary number to the order.  After adding items to the purchase order and saving them, the Purchase Order will display all items added to the order.

        The user may use the scroll bars at the right and bottom of the items listed to scroll over additional information.

        The user may modify the column widths in the current view by placing the cursor on the right border of the column in the column header, and pressing the left mouse button. Moving the border while holding the mouse button then releasing at the new location resizes the columns.

        1.4.1.1.4.5.1.1. Allocate to Special Work Order or Project

        Introduction

        Inventory Allocation is used to allocate (reserve) quantities of existing items in stock or future Purchase Order deliveries to a Work Order or Project Number.This allocation prevents issuing the quantity reserved to any other use except the Work Order or Project Number specified. Purchase Order Line Item allocations may be removed prior to receipt of the parts by editing the Purchase Order.After receipt of parts allocated by Purchase Order, the allocation may only be removed after the parts are in stock, by using the Inventory Allocation module.

        ALLOCATION OF PURCHASE ORDER DELIVERIES

        Allocating a PO Line Item is used to make sure that the item will be reserved for a particular Work Order or Project Number  when it is received.PO line item allocation is generally used when allocating to a Work Order or Project Number for which the items are not available in stock.Line Shortages of items not on the BOM, which are not in stock, are an example of typical PO Line Item Allocations.To allocate Purchase Order Line Item Deliveries to a Work Order or Project Number:

        • A Work Order or Project Number must be open for the product.  
        • The Item to be allocated must be entered in the Inventory Control Item Master.
        • The quantity allocated must equal the quantity ordered. ie. The total quantity ordered on a line item may be allocated to multiple Work Orders or Project Numbers through the schedule screen.

        PROCEDURES

        To Allocate a PO Line Item to a Work Order or Project Number:

        1. Allocate to a new or existing PO.
        2. Select the desired PO in Article #153. 
        3. Highlight the line item you want to allocate.
        4. (If it is an existing PO) Depress the Edit action button.
        5. Expand the Schedule Screen, tab or click on the "Distribute to"  field.
        6. Select WO Alloc or Prj Alloc, enter the Work Order number or Project number to allocate to in the WO # field or Project # field.
        7. Follow normal PO Mgmt procedures to save and approve.

          NOTE:The user may wish to allocate a line item to multiple Work Orders and/or Project Numbers.  In the schedule for an item, the user can create as many schedule lines as required.  Each schedule line can have a different allocation.  If the user had a requirement for 5 Work Orders and/or Project Numbers of 100 parts for each Work Order and/or  Project Number, the user would add a line to the PO for 500 parts, then in the schedule, the user can add a line for each Work Order and/or ProjectNumber to which the parts are allocated. The schedule dates can be the same or different. The supplier will see only the total quantity required by the schedule date and is not bothered with the individual allocations.

        To Un-allocate a PO Line Item that has not yet been Dock Received:

        1. Select the desired PO in  Article #153.
        2. Highlight the line item you want to un-allocate.
        3. Depress the Edit action button.
        4. Expand the Schedule Screen, tab or click on the "Distribute to" field.
        5. Select Inv Recv.
        6. Follow normal PO Mgmt procedures to save and approve.

        To Un-allocate a PO Line Item that has already been Dock Received:

        1. Receive into inventory using Purchase & Receiving Mgmt procedures.
        2. Use the Inventory Allocation procedure to un-allocate.
          1.4.1.1.4.5.2. MRO Items

          MRO stands for Management Required Options.  Generally this is used for supplies, etc. purchases.

          After selecting the Item Type to be "MRO"

          1. If the MRO item is included in inventory
            1. The user may jump directly to the part number box (click on it) and enter a part number. Or, the user may step through the Part Classes and Part Types to narrow the focus and then select a part from the desired part type.
            2. Fill in the quantity and unit price. 
          2. If the part is not in inventoryThe user may enter in the Suppliers part number manually (or leave blank) and then jump to the description field and enter the description.

          The finished screen should look like the screen displayed:

             
          1. Check the Expand box in the Schedule screen.
          2. Enter schedule dates and quantity scheduled.
          3. Type in the title or name of the person requesting the item in the “Distribute To” field.
          4. Enter a General Ledger account number in the GL Number field.

          The completed Schedule screen will appear as follows:

          1. At the conclusion of entry for the item, the user may depress the Save record action button or the Abandon record action button.
          2. To complete see Add a PO .
          1.4.1.1.4.5.3. Service Items

          Services items are for those instances where the assembly is outsourced.

          After selecting the Item Type to be "Service"

          1. The user may enter the supplier Part number manually (or leave blank) and then go to the description field and enter the description.
          2. Fill in the quantity and unit price. 

          The finished screen should look like the screen displayed:

             
          1. Check the Expand box in the Schedule screen.
          2. Enter schedule dates and quantity scheduled.
          3. Type in the title or name of the person requesting the item in the “Distribute To” field.
          4. Enter a General Ledger account number in the GL Number field.

          The completed Schedule screen will appear as follows:

          1. At the conclusion of entry for the item, the user may depress the Save record action button or the Abandon changes action button. 
          2. Approve record.

           

           

           

          1.4.1.1.4.6. Load Supplier Acknowledgement
           
          How to attach or load a Supplier Acknowledge document to a PO.  Note:  User is only allowed to load one document per Purchase order. 
           
           
           
          Depress the "Supplier Acknowledge" button and the following screen will appear:
           
            
           
           

          To load images or documents, depress the "Load Document" button, up in the right hand corner of the screen.  A browser screen will appear similar to the one below:

           
           
          Find and highlight the desired Image file, as illustrated.

          Once the file name appears, depress the Ok button.
           
          Note:  that the user can also load other document types by changing the File of Type to ALL

          The file will appear in the screen as displayed
          :
           
           
           
           
          Depress the Save action button to save the changes or depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes. Exit will bring the user back to the Purchase Order Management module.  If user selected to Save the Supplier Acknowledge button will be displayed in Red as shown below.
           
           
           
           
          1.4.1.1.4.7. Copy "View Change History" Notes
          Find the Purchase Order you want to Copy the "View Changes History" notes on.
           
           
          Depress the "View Changes History" button, When in the “Change PO history” screen, click on the vertical scroll (on your keyboard), you will see the cursor appeared on the top inside the window with the text.   
           
           
          Depress the "CTRL" button + the vertical scroll buttons to highlight the information you wish to copy;
           
           
          Depress the "CTRL + C" to copy, then paste to a document, e-mail, etc....
           
           
           
          1.4.1.1.5. Reports - PO Mgmt

          1. To access the reports, depress the Print  button at the top of the screen.  The report screen will appear.

          2.  Select the output you desire by selecting one of the output radial selections at the top left of the screen, Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.
           
          3.  Highlight the report desired and click on the option tab.   
           

          PURCHASE ORDER FORM report
           
           
          If you want all line items & scheduled quantities to print, check that box.

          Select the number of copies you want by toggling the up and down arrows.

          Select one of the following options:  Unprinted PO, Open PO, Close/Cancel PO, New Orders, Reprint Last Batch, Single PO #, In Store Orders by clicking on the radial. 
          NOTE:  Depending on which one of these options you select will depend on what will be displayed on the report.   For Example:  If User selects Open/Active the report will have "APPROVED" at the top of the report (as displayed below) and prints out the Purchase Order form AFTER some receiving has occurred against that PO, then ONLY the un-received still open amounts will print on this form.  Any line items COMPLETELY RECEIVED or CANCELED will NOT display on the PO form.  If User selects Close/Cancel PO  the report will have "CLOSED" at the top of the report and will display the original scheduled balance.   

          Highlight the PO of interest and depress the > button.  To select all POs, depress the >> button. 

          Check the "Show All MPNs for the Parts on the PO" box if you want all MPNs listed on the report.
           
          Check the "Show Item Master Note" box if you would like the Item master notes to be displayed on the report.
           
          Check the "Print BOM Addendum for all "MAKE" parts on the Selected PO"  When the users add a Make/Buy part to a Suppliers PO, and checks this option the system will then print a "BOM Indented with AVL" report as an addendum to the PO form.  Each BOM will be printed as a separate report and will reference PO and item on the PO.  If the AVL on the approve vendor list for any of the items on the BOM happens to be checked as "disallow to buy" this AVL will not be included within the addendum to the PO.     
           
          Depress the OK button
           
          When this report is printed is will display the Approval status of the order, it will  also display the Supplier Part Number if entered in the ICM module. 
          • If purchase order status is "NEW" report will print "NOT APPROVED"
          • If purchase order status is "OPEN" and has been approved, report will display "APPROVED"
          • If purchase order status is "EDITING" meaning order was once approved but now in edit status, the report will display "EDITING PENDING APPROVAL"
          The following report will be displayed:
           


          PURCHASE ORDER FORM with REQUIRED DATE report

          This report is exactly the same as the Purchase Order Form report above, except that this report will also show the Required Date information.

          If you want all line items & scheduled quantities to print, check that box.

          Select the number of copies you want by toggling the up and down arrows.

          Select one of the following options:Unprinted PO, Open PO, Close/Cancel PO, New Orders, Reprint Last Batch, In Store Orders by clicking on the radial.

          Highlight the PO of interest and depress the > button.To select all POs, depress the >> button.
           
          Check the "Show Allocation Information" if you want this information printed on the PO
           
          Check the "Show All MPNs for the Parts on the PO" box if you want all MPNs listed on the Report.
           
          Check the "Show Item Master Note" box if you would like the Item master notes to be displayed on the report.
           
          Depress the OK button.
           
          This report will display the Supplier Part Number if entered in the ICM module.
           

          The following report will be displayed:

           

          OPEN PURCHASE ORDER DETAIL report

          At the bottom of the screen, highlight the Detail Report, By Supplier, By Part Number, By Part Number with Where Used or By Due Dates.

          Note: If you select ANY of the Detail selects other than “By Supplier” then you can click directly on the OK button and ALL open PO's will be displayed.
           
          The “Open Purchase Order Detail” report shows only items that still have balance. So if you have an open PO with three items and only one of those items have a balance the report will only show the one item with the balance.
           
          Note:  When exporting to Excel there will be an additional column displaying the Unique ID #.
           
           If user selects “By Supplier”, the Options screen becomes enabled.

          Enter the desired Date Range to filter the search more. 

          Highlight the Supplier of interest and depress the > button.  To select all Suppliers, depress the >> button.

          Depress the OK button.

           

          The following report will be displayed: 

          OPEN PURCHASE ORDER SUMMARY report

          Enter in the desired Date Range.

          Depress the OK button.
           
          The “Summary” report shows all open orders based on the status of the PO.   If the open PO has no items with balance left the "Open Purchase Order Detail" report will not show this PO at all, but the "Open Purchase Order Summary "report will.

           

          The following report will be displayed


          CLOSED PURCHASE ORDER DETAIL BY SUPPLIER
          report

          Enter in the desired Date Range.

          Highlight the Supplier and select by using the > button.For All Suppliers, depress the >> button.

          Depress the OK button.
           
          Note:  When exporting to Excel there will be an additional column displaying the Unique ID #.
           

          The following report will be displayed
           

           


          CLOSED PURCHASE ORDER SUMMARY report

          Enter in the desired Date Range.

          Depress the OK button.

           

          The following report will be displayed

           



          POs WITHOUT SUPPLIER ACKNOWLEDGEMENT report

          Select one of the Group By options: Supplier, PO Date, First Schedule Date by clicking on the radial.

          Depress the OK button.

           

          The following report will be displayed

           


          PURCHASE COSTS against a PROJECT/WORK ORDER report

          Select Project # or Work Order # by clicking on the radial.

          Select for: Customer, Open, Single, or All by clicking on the radial

          If select by customer, then choose the customer from the pull down menu.

          Highlight the Project and select by using the > button. For All Suppliers, depress the >> button.

          Depress the OK button. 

           

          The following report will be displayed

           

           

          1.4.1.1.6. FAQs - PO Mgmt
          Facts and Questions for the Purchase Order Module
          1.4.1.1.7. ManEx Minutes (PO)
          1.4.1.2. Open Purchase Order Status
          1.4.1.2.1. Open Purchase Order Status
          Material Planning/Purchase Order Management/Open Purchase Order Status 


          This screen allows users to closely monitor and manage parts currently on order.  Users are able to see all parts currently past due, all parts due by a specific date (useful for planning for upcoming jobs), and parts allocated to a specific job or work order.  This provides greater control over critical components and can reduce or prevent instances of unexpected production delays due to missing components. 
           
          Note:   After activation, "Purchase Order Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.  
           

          OPEN PURCHASE ORDER LIST tab

          The Open Purchase Order List screen will show all Open Purchase Orders  


          If it is desired to view records per only One Buyer, then select that radial

          Select the appropriate buyer

           

          The Open Purchase Order List will display that buyer only.

          Highlight the Purchase Order to be viewed.The detail will appear at the bottom of the screen, as illustrated:

          Open P O List Field Definitions

          Purchase Order Number The number of the Purchase Order
          Date The date of the purchase Order
          Supplier The name of the Supplier
          ChgOrd The number of the Change Order
          Buyer The name of the Buyer
          Aprvd Initial The initials of the approver
          Item The line item number
          Part Number The user’s number for the part purchased
          Class The classification pertaining to the Part Number
          Type The type within the classification
          Description The description of the part
          Ord Qty The quantity ordered.
          Balance The un-received balance

          The user may sort by Purchase Order Number, Date or Supplier by depressing on the applicable button.

          To obtain a report for this screen, depress the Print button.

          LATE PARTS Tab

          The Late Parts Quick View screen will show all Purchase Order that are late compared to the schedule dates.

           

          Late Parts tab Field Definitions

           Due Date The date the materials should have been received by the user
           Supplier The name of the Supplier
           P O Number The Purchase Order Number
           Part Number The number the user has assigned to the part ordered
           Late The number of days between the Due Date and today’s date
           Buyer The name of the buyer
           PO Order Qty The quantity ordered
           PO Balance The un-received balance
           Late Qty The quantity late

          The user may sort by Due Date, Supplier, P O Number, Part Number, Late, or Buyer by depressing the appropriate button.

          EXPEDITE LIST Tab

          The screen will show you the Purchase Orders which will be coming due by the Date entered Within the "Part Due By"  field.  The balance displayed will be the un-received quantity, NOT the quantity per schedule.  To view the scheduled qty double click on the line item of interest and a popup will appear displaying the PO screen. 

          Expedite List Field Definitions

          Parts Due by This date defaults to 7 days from today’s date.  The user may change this date to suit his/her needs.
          Req Date This is the date the order was due to the user.
          Supplier This is the name of the Supplier.
          P O Number This is the number of the Purchase Order.
          Part Number This is the number the user has assigned to the part.
          Buyer This is the name of the buyer.
          Ord Qty The quantity ordered.
          Balance The un-received balance, NOT the quantity per scheduled date.

          The user may sort by Req Date, Supplier, P O Number, Part Number, or Buyer by depressing the appropriate button.

          To obtain a printout of this screen, depress the Print button.

          PO By WORK ORDER/PROJECT Tab

          This screen will list Purchase Order details if the Work Order or Project allocation field contains a Work Order or Project Reference.

          Select either Work Order or Project by clicking on the radial.Type the Work Order or Project number in the red box and hit enter.

           

          P O By Work Order/Project Tab definitions

          Project Number This is the Project number referenced in the Allocation to Project in the Purchase Order
          Work Order Number This is the Work Order number referenced in the Allocation to Work Order in Purchase Order
          Part Number This is the number the user has assigned to the part
          Rev The revision number assigned to the part number
          Class

          The classification within which the part number belongs

          Type

          The type within the classification within which the part number belongs

          Description The description of the part number
          P O Number

          The purchase order number which was used to order the part

          Schd Qty

          The amount originally scheduled to purchase

          Bal Qty This is the un-received quantity

          The user may sort by purchase order by depressing that button.

          To obtain a report for this screen, depress the Reports button.

           
          1.4.1.2.2. ManEx Minutes (Open PO Status)
          1.4.1.3. Supplier Line Card Information

          Supplier Line Card Information

          Select Supplier Line Card Information from the Material Planning/Purchase Order Management menu.  
           
           
          Note:    After activation, "Supplier Information" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access. 
           

           The following screen will display.  The Supplier Status, and Purchase Type are defaulted in from the Supplier Information module.

           

          To View Supplier Information Highlight the desired supplier and then depress the Supplier Information Button.  The following information will display.

           

          To view Supplier Profile highlight the desired supplier and then depress the Supplier Profile button.  

          To Add a Class to a Supplier, highlight the desired supplier.Depress the Edit action button.

          Then enter the Part Class tab.  The following screen will appear:

          Highlight the desired Part Class.Depress the > button.  The selected Class will then populate the selection box to the right.

           

          Depress the Part Manufacturer tab.The following screen will appear:

          Highlight the desired Part Manufacturer.Depress the > button.  The selected Manufacturer will then populate the selection box to the right.

          Depress the Save record action button.

           

          Depress the Supplier Lookup tab.  The following screen will appear:

           

          Type in the Part Class and the Part manufacturer.  Depress the Search button.  The name of the associated Supplier(s) will appear in the Supplier List section.

           

          1.4.1.4. Part Manufacturer List

          Part Manufacturer List

          The part manufacturer cross references the manufacturer to the supplier who distributes that manufacturer’s goods

          Enter the Material Planning/Purchase Order ManagementPart Manufacturer List   
           
          Note:   After activation, "Part Manufactuer Setup" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access. 
           

          This is a view screen only.  It is the Supplier Line Card Information module where the user associates a particular Supplier to a Manufacturer.

          Selecting the Part Manufacturer List will bring up the following screen

          Highlight the Manufacturer on the left side of the screen.The suppliers who carry that manufacturer’s goods will display on the right hand side of the screen.

           

          1.4.1.5. Supplier Rolodex

          Supplier Rolodex

          The Supplier Rolodex is a list of all suppliers, plus their respective contacts.

          Select Material Planning/Purchase Order Management/Supplier Rolodex
           
           
          Note:   After activation, "Supplier Information" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access. 
           

          Select the Supplier Rolodex.The following screen will appear:

          Highlight the supplier of interest.The E-mail address and the Fax number will display at the bottom of the screen, as illustrated:

          The user may sort by Company or Contact by depressing the appropriate button.

           

          1.4.1.6. Upload New Purchase Orders
          1.4.1.6.1. Prerequisites for New PO Upload
           
          After activation, "PO Import" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           
          User has to complete the required fields in the PoUploadTemplate.xlt in the xlfiles directory to create PO upload XL file.  
           
          If user wants the system to automatically approve all the POs uploaded the "Auto Approve PO when importing from XL" box must be checked in the Purchase Setup module. If this is NOT checked in the Purchase Setup module then all the POs will be uploaded as "NEW" and users will be required to approve within the Purchase Order Management module.
          1.4.1.6.2. Introduction for New PO Upload

          This module gives our users the capability to take electronic files provided by the suppliers from quote and availability of items, copy and paste that information into the ManEx PO Upload template format.  Users will have the flexibility to load a large PO into the system all at once, or upload multiple purchase orders for different suppliers at once, etc.  During the upload process the system will find any problems with the template, the user will be prompted and exception XL files will be created within the POExceptionXL directory for the users to review and disposition.

          1.4.1.6.3. Fields and Definitions for New PO Upload
          1.4.1.6.3.1. PO Upload Template

          Ponum Required field If Auto PO numbering is setup: Even though user has the PO's set to auto, you can NOT upload a PO without something in this column.  Something has to be entered in this column so the system can distinguish one po line item from another PO line item on a different PO.  If there is no data in this column the program will think the rest of the spreadsheet is also blank. PO Upload will group per change in Ponum field (it will then use the Ponum field as a reference to change) when uploaded user will receive a message that the PO number entered in XL spreadsheet will be overwritten by a system generated number ... and give you the option to continue the upload or abort.  If manual PO numbering is setup:  PO Upload will group per change in Ponum field (it will then use the Ponum field as a reference to change) when uploaded system will use PO numbers entered  in XL spreadsheet.   
          Supname Required field.  Existing Supplier Name in ManEx System.  If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.  
          Terms Optional:  If left blank it will take the default from the supplier setup. User may manually enter in a supplier term that does not match the Supplier Setup information, but must exist within the System Setup.  
          Buyer Optional:  Buyer entered must Exist in System Setup. If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.
          Shipping Charge Optional:  Shipping Charges if any.     
          Shipping Tax Optional   Shipping Tax if any.
          Shipping Charge Optional:  (Example:  "PREPAY & BILL", "NO-CHARGE", etc)    
          FOB Optional:  If left blank it will take the default from the Receiving & Billing Information setup. User may manually enter in a FOB that does not match the Receiving & Billing Info Setup information, but must exist within the System Setup.   
          Ship Via Optional:  If left blank it will take the default from the Receiving & Billing Informationsetup. User may manually enter in a ship Via that does not match the Receiving & Billing Info Setup information, but must exist within the System Setup.   
          Include Freight Cost? Optional:  Can enter Y or N or leave blank
          PO Line Item Number Required field
          MRO or Invt Part  Required field  
          Part Number Required field:   If enterning Inventory Part Number, it must exist in ManEx. If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.
          Part Revision Required field
          Package Optional:  This gives the user to enter in a package type that exists in System Setup.  If this column is left blank the "Package" field in the PO will be populated with the default in System Setup.   If the user enters a package type that does NOT exists in the system setup, the use will receive a prompt and the XL file will be created for them to review.  They will also have a choice to continue and fill the missing package information from inventory or cancel and fix the XL file.
          Cost each Purchasing Unit Required field
          Tax-pct  Optional:  If left blank it will take the default from the supplier setup. User may manually enter in a Tax-pct that does not match the Supplier Setup information, but must exist within the System Setup.   
          Manufacturer Required field:   Manufacturer must exist in ManEx and match the ICM AVL for the part that is being uploaded. If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.
          Manufacturer Part Number Required field:  Manufacturer Part Number must exist in ManEx and match the ICM AVL for the part that is being uploaded.  If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.
          Firm PO? Optional 
          First Article Default from Item Master
          Inspection Exception? Optional 
          Exception Optional
          Date Required Required field:  You can have a order qty of 1000 and have 200 scheduled out of 5 different days. 
          Quantity Required (Purchase Unit of Measure) Required field:  Purchase Unit of Measure must exist in System Setup.  If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.
          Warehouse Required field:   (if Invt Part) Warehouse must exist in ManEx and match the ICM AVL for the part that is being uploaded.  If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.
          Warehouse Location

          Optional:  (if warehouse entered)

          If Auto Location Creation is not Enabled in system setup:
          • And template has a WHSE that does exist on the ICM AVL for that part the upload will complete
          • And the template has a Location that does exist on the ICM for that part the upload will complete
          If Auto Location Creation is enabled
          • And template has a Whse that does not exist on the ICM for that part, the upload will continue AS LONG AS that WHSE exist within your Whse setup.

          • And template has a Location that does not exist on the ICM. The upload will complete.

          Allocated to WO Number Optional:  The system will do a check to make sure that the WO number exists within the ManEx System. If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.  
          Allocated to Project Number Optional:  The system will do a check to make sure that the Prj number exists within the ManEx System.  If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.
          Requestor if MRO Required field:  (if MRO item)  If this field is not populated the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.
          GL Number Required field:   (if MRO item) The system will do a check on the GL number to make sure that it not only exists in the Accounting setup, but also has to exist on the MRO Purchase GL number section within the Purchase Setup module. If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server. 
          1.4.1.6.4. How To ....... for New PO Upload
          1.4.1.6.4.1. Add - Upload a New PO
          Enter Material Planning/Purchase Order Management/Upload New Purchase Orders

          NOTE: If user wants the system to automatically approve all the POs uploaded the "Auto Approve PO when importing from XL" box must be checked in the Purchase Setup module. If this is not checked in the Purchase Setup module then all the POs will be uploaded as "NEW" and users will be required to approve within the Purchase Order Management module.

           

          Locate XL File to Upload

          If the system finds any problems with template the user will be prompted the following message and exception XL file will be created in the PO Exception XL directory on the server.

          Depress OK and user will receive the message (shown below) that the "PO Upload was not complete" and system will abort.

          If any of the information is missing from the required fields in the first row of the XL file, user will receive the following message. 
           

          Depress OK and user will receive the message (shown below) that the "PO Upload was not complete" and system will abort.

          Note:  Even though user has the PO numbering set to auto, you can NOT upload a PO without something in the Ponum column and all other required fields. Something has to be entered in this column along with all other required fields so the system can distinguish one po line item from another PO line item on a different PO.  If there is no data in this column or the other required fields the program will think the rest of the spreadsheet is also blank. PO Upload will group per change in Ponum field (it will then use the Ponum field as a reference to change) when uploaded user will receive a message that the PO number entered in XL spreadsheet will be overwritten by a system generated number ... and give you the option to continue the upload or abort (as shown below).  If manual PO numbering is setup and Auto Approve:  PO Upload will group per change in Ponum field (it will then use the Ponum field as a reference to change) when uploaded system will use PO numbers entered  in XL spreadsheet.   If manual PO numbering is setup but Auto Approve is NOT selected then PO upload will assign a temporary PO number until PO is approved manually.   At that time you will be prompted for the manual PO number.  
          The user will be prompted the following message that the PO Upload was not complete and system will abort.  

          If system does not find any problems with the template the following message will appear:  This message is for user to verify the number of recorrds being loaded from the import sheet.  User may depress "YES" to continue the upload or "NO" to abort the upload.

           
          If  a package type was entered that does NOT exist in System Setup, the following prompts we be displayed, an XL file will be created for review, and you will have a choice to overwrite the Package" information with the defaults value for the part from Inventory records and continue or cancel and fix the XL file.
           
           
           
          If user selects Yes to continue the following message will appear if system is setup to Auto create PO Numbers, or Manual create PO Numbers without Auto Approve selected (if Auto Approve is selected along with Manual create PO Numbers this message will NOT be displayed. Depress Yes to Continue and No to Abort Upload.

          If you depress Yes to Continue the user will be prompted the following message that the PO Upload complete.
          If you depress No to Abort Upload the user will be prompted the following message that the PO Upload was not complete.

           

          If part being uploaded has the "Disallow this part from Purchasing" box checked within the Inventory Control Mgmt module, this message will be displayed and PO upload will not complete.

           

           

           

          1.4.1.7. Upload PO Items Deletions
          1.4.1.7.1. Prerequisites for PO Upload Deletions
           

          User must have the Express Import to BOM or Quote Module.

          After activation, "PO Import" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

          User has to complete the PoItemsDeleteTemplate.xlt in the xlfiles directory to create PO Items Deletions upload XL file.

          If user wants the system to automatically approve all the POs after the "Upload PO Items Deletions" the "Auto Approve PO when importing from XL"  box must be checked in the Purchase Setup module. If this is not checked in the Purchase Setup module then all the POs will be updated with the PO Items Deletions and the PO status will be changed to "EDITING" and users will be required to approve the PO within the Purchase Order Management module.
           
          If user wants the system to automatically assign a new change order number upon upload after approval the "Auto Assign New Change Order # Upon Approval"  box must be checked in the Purchase Setup module. If this is not checked in the Purchase Setup module then upon upload user will receive a popup window giving them the option of updating the change order # after the upload or not. 
          1.4.1.7.2. Introduction for PO Upload Deletions
          This module gives our users the capability to remove one or multiple items from one or multiple POs.  As long as the PO is not closed or cancelled and items have no receipts against them.
          1.4.1.7.3. Fields and Defintions for PO Upload Deletions
          1.4.1.7.3.1. Upload PO Items Deletions Template
           
          Ponum Enter the PO number(s) that you are deleting the line item from 
          supname Enter the Supplier Name that is on the PO you are deleting the line item from
          itemno Enter the line item number you are deleting from the PO(s)
          part_no Enter the part number you are deleting from the PO(s)
          revision Enter the revision of the part you are deleting from the PO(s)
          partmfgr Enter the part manufacturer name you are deleting from PO(s)
          mfgr_pt_no Enter the part manufacturer part number you are deleting from PO(s)
           
           
           
          1.4.1.7.4. How To ........ for PO Upload Deletions
          1.4.1.7.4.1. Add - Upload PO Items Deletions
          Enter Material Planning/Purchase Order Management/Upload PO Items Deletion

          NOTE: If user wants the system to automatically approve all the POs after the uploaded is complete the "Auto Approve PO when importing from XL" box must be checked in the Purchase Setup module. If this is not checked in the Purchase Setup module then users will be required to approve within the Purchase Order Management module.

           

          Locate XL File to Upload

          If the system finds any problems with template the user will be prompted the following message and exception XL file will be created in the PO Exception XL directory on the server.

          Depress OK.

          The user will be prompted the following message that the PO Upload was not complete and system will abort.  

          If system does not find any problems with the template and the "Auto Assign New Change Order # Upon Approval is not checked in Purchase Setup the following message will appear:
           

           

          Depress Yes or No to Continue the user will be prompted the following message that the PO Upload Complete

           

           

           

           

          1.4.1.8. Upload PO Items Additions
          1.4.1.8.1. Prerequisites for PO Upload Addtions
           
          After activation, "PO Import" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rghts” will automatically have access.

          User has to complete the PoItemsAddTemplate.xlt in the xlfiles directory to create PO Items Deletions upload XL file
          .
           
          If user wants the system to automatically approve all the POs after the "Upload PO Items Additions" the "Auto Approve PO when importing from XL"  box must be checked in the Purchase Setup module. If this is not checked in the Purchase Setup module then all the POs will be updated with the PO Items Additions and the PO status will be changed to "EDITING" and users will be required to approve the PO within the Purchase Order Management module.
           
          If user wants the system to automatically assign a new change order number upon upload after approval the "Auto Assign New Change Order # Upon Approval"  box must be checked in the Purchase Setup module. If this is not checked in the Purchase Setup module then upon upload user will receive a popup window giving them the option of updating the change order # after the upload or not. 
          1.4.1.8.2. Introduction for PO Upload Additions
          This module will allow users to upload additional items to an existing PO.
          1.4.1.8.3. Fields and Definitions for PO Upload Addtions
          1.4.1.8.3.1. Upload PO Items Additons
           
           
          Ponum Required field  Enter existing PO number, user wants to add items to.
          Supname Required field  Supplier Name on existing PO in ManEx System.  If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.  
          PO Line Item Number Required field  Assign a line item number to the item that is being added (cannot be a duplicate) 
          MRO or Invt Part  Required field  Must enter "MRO" or "Invt Part"  cannot enter just  "Invt or Inventory"  must be "Invt Part"
          Part Number Required field:   If enterning Inventory Part Number, it must exist in ManEx. If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.
          Part Revision Required field  If a revision exists
          Cost each Purchasing Unit Required field  Enter a Cost each
          Tax-pct  Optional:  If left blank it will take the default from the supplier setup. User may manually enter in a Tax-pct that does not match the Supplier Setup information, but must exist within the System Setup.   
          Manufacturer Required field:   Manufacturer must exist in ManEx and match the ICM AVL for the part that is being uploaded. If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.
          Manufacturer Part Number Required field:  Manufacturer Part Number must exist in ManEx and match the ICM AVL for the part that is being uploaded.  If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.
          First Article Default from Item Master
          Inspection Exception? Optional 
          Exception Optional
          Date Required Required field:  You can have a order qty of 1000 and have 200 scheduled out of 5 different days. 
          Quantity Required (Purchase Unit of Measure) Required field:  Purchase Unit of Measure must exist in System Setup.  If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.
          Warehouse Required field:   (if Invt Part) Warehouse must exist in ManEx and match the ICM AVL for the part that is being uploaded.  If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.
          Warehouse Location

          Optional:  (if warehouse entered)

          If Auto Location Creation is not Enabled in system setup:
          • And template has a WHSE that does exist on the ICM AVL for that part the upload will complete
          • And the template has a Location that does exist on the ICM for that part the upload will complete
          If Auto Location Creation is enabled
          • And template has a Whse that does not exist on the ICM for that part, the upload will continue AS LONG AS that WHSE exist within your Whse setup.

          • And template has a Location that does not exist on the ICM. The upload will complete.

          Allocated to WO Number Optional:  The system will do a check to make sure that the WO number exists within the ManEx System. If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.  
          Allocated to Project Number Optional:  The system will do a check to make sure that the Prj number exists within the ManEx System.  If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.
          Requestor if MRO Required field:  (if MRO item)  If this field is not populated the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server.
          GL Number Required field:   (if MRO item) The system will do a check on the GL number to make sure that it not only exists in the Accounting setup, but also has to exist on the MRO Purchase GL number section within the Purchase Setup module. If it does not exist the user will be prompted and an exception XL file will be created in the POExceptionXL directory on the server. 
          1.4.1.8.4. How To ............. for PO Upload Additions
          1.4.1.8.4.1. Add - Upload PO Items Additions
          Enter Material Planning/Purchase Order Management/Upload PO Items Additions

          NOTE: If user wants the system to automatically approve all the POs after the uploaded is complete the "Auto Approve PO when importing from XL" box must be checked in the Purchase Setup module. If this is not checked in the Purchase Setup module then users will be required to approve within the Purchase Order Management module. 

          Locate XL File to Upload

          If the system finds any problems with template the user will be prompted the following message and exception XL file will be created in the PO Exception XL directory on the server.

          Depress OK and user will receive the message (shown below) that the "PO Upload was not complete" and system will abort.

          If any of the information is missing from the required fields in the first row of the XL file, user will receive the following message. 

          Depress OK and user will receive the message (shown below) that the "PO Upload was not complete" and system will abort.

          If part being uploaded has the "Disallow this part from Purchasing" box checked within the Inventory Control Mgmt module, this message will be displayed and PO upload will not complete.
          The user will be prompted the following message that the PO Upload was not complete and system will abort.  

          If system does not find any problems with the template and system is setup to Auto create PO Numbers the following message will appear:  This message is for user to verify the number of recorrds being loaded from the import sheet.  User may depress "YES" to continue the upload or "NO" to abort the upload.

           
           

          If you depress Yes to Continue the user will be prompted the following message that the PO Upload complete.
          If you depress No to Abort Upload the user will be prompted the following message that the PO Upload was not complete.

           

           

           

           

          1.4.2. Material Requirement Planning (MRP)
          1.4.2.1. Prerequisties for MRP
          Prerequisites Required for Entering a New MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS PLANNING:
           

          After activation, "Material Requirements Planning" (MRP) access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

          Customer The Customer database must be established for Consigned part numbers.
          Part number in Item Master  The part number must exist for a product or part.
          AML The Manufacturer Names must exist when using the AML in the Bill Of Materials.
          MRP Policies The Material Requirements Planning policies should exist for each product or part in Inventory Control.

          1.4.2.2. Introduction to MRP

          The Material Requirements Planning (MRP) Module is the heart of Inventory Control.  In ManEx, the Material Requirements Planning actions drive the user towards zero inventory on hand through the scheduling and rescheduling of open orders for products and parts.

           

          When the Material Requirements Planning module runs, it accumulates all of the demands for products and parts, determines the available supply and recommends actions to be taken to meet the demand in the time required.  (The attached Print Screens below <<BOM_Setup_MRP_Actions.docx>> displays an example of a BOM setup and how MRP gives the actions).   The MRP module will also modify those recommendations by MRP policies established in the MRP Default Setup and in the Inventory Control Mgmt MRP Info for each part.  MRP runs through a large number of tables and records to compile its calculations, and provides a snapshot of suggested actions at the same time it is ran.  If users are changing things during this process it could definitely cause some strange outcome.  To prevent this situation we strongly suggest that you use the Nightly MRP trigger. (Refer to Article #416 for more detail on trigger setup).   Note:   If you find the need to re-run MRP during the production work day then we suggest that you notify all departments that MRP is going to be ran and ask them to remain out of the system until the MRP run is complete.  This will help assure that the most accurate MRP run is possible.  

          All lead times are calculated with the Production Calendar.
           
          Policies may be used to determine whether the part is ordered on a Lot for Lot basis, on a Daily basis, Weekly, Semi-Monthly, Monthly, or quarterly basis. (Refer to Article #3032  for further detail on how the AVL Pref Codes affect MRP based on the Order Policy).  The part may have minimum and multiple order quantities that influence the recommendations.   Note:  If the Order Policy happens to be left blank within the Inventory Control module, MRP will enforce the Order Policy of "Lot to Lot".   If the Stock UoM is different than the Purchase UoM MRP will instruct you to Purchase the Stock qty UoM, not the Purchase UoM.
           
          NOTE:  When creating a PO for an item with different purchasing and stocking UoMs, be sure to enter the MRP suggestion into the Stocking qty field rather than the purchasing qty field.  The system will automatically convert the stocking unit into the purchasing unit for the purchase order qty.
           
          For example if  the buyer is creating a PO for an item that is used by inches but sold by the foot, the user would enter qty of 24 into the stocking qty field and the PO would automatically convert it to 2 feet in the purchasing qty field.  So the supplier deals in feet, but ManEx deals in inches.  The conversion between the two are established in the Unit of Measure & Conversion  module. 
           
          Article #3597 explains the process MRP goes through to optimize the On-Hand Inventory to Demands. 

           

          Buffer times for placing purchase orders and for placing work orders may be defined and included. 

          The
          Dock to Stock value (setup in the ABC types )  is taken into consideration for MRP leadtime calculations in the projected requirement of the receipt of purchased parts. (For more detail refer to Article #1469).
           
          If a part has a Production Off-set time setup in the Bill of Materials , this is also taken into consideration for MRP leadtime calculations.  (For more detail refer to Article #572).

           

          The Material Requirements Planning module will run the Master Production Schedule generation automatically before running the Material Requirements Planning module.  
           
           

          ManEx Material Requirements Planning module may be run without logging users off the system.  The work station used to run Material Requirements Planning should have at least 120MB available on the hard drive, and works best with 96MB memory or more.

           

          A Material Requirements Planning  regeneration creates time-phased material requirements at the part (component) level by netting demand from the Master Production Schedule (MPS),  open Sales Orders, Internal orders, Shortages and open Work Orders (released but not picked) against supply from inventory, open purchase orders and Finished Goods. 

           

          The regeneration must also occur with demand synchronized:  Master Production Schedule forecasted demand that has been consumed by Sales Orders should be relieved and Work Orders that are released but not picked should be picked or cancelled.
           
          MRP Actions for Make/Phantom parts - If the actions originates from a higher level assembly for the Make/Phantom, then the MRP will display "Phantom" in the action section.  This indicates to the user that there are no actions required and is listed so users can investigate where component actions are originating from.  If the Make/Phantom is required directly for an Order itself, it will follow the same WO action rules as a regular Make product.

           

          Planned Purchase Orders from previous demand that have been placed must be entered and/or firmed.

          A Firm Planned Purchase Order tells MRP that the purchasing decision was intentional and MRP will NOT try to override. 

          Discrepant material should either be moved into Material Review Board or Inspection Hold for disposition.  If Material Review Board or Held material is not to be looked at as available material for Material Requirements Planning purposes, it should be in a Non-nettable warehouse or inventory location.  For example: (If parts are rejected in PO receiving the parts are dispositioned into the MRB warehouse (which is Non-nettable) so MRP is not seeing the qty in MRB but is seeing the open PO).  Transactions must be current with the location of materials.  WIP (Work In Process) shrinkages must be expressed as Work Order shortages in the system. 
           
          MRP is designed to calculate from the Kit Shortage and not from the Lead times once the parts have been pulled to the kit and the kit status is changed to "Kit in Process".   Once the parts have been pulled to the kit, the systems is assuming that the shortages are needed by the WO due date, rather than the Prooduction lead time, so MRP then calculates using the due date of the WO as the date the materials must be on hand, MRP no longer takes the production lead time into consideration.
           
          NOTE:  The Re-Order Point/Qty fields have NO AFFECT on MRP at all.  MRP will NOT consider these fields for any calculations (these fields have no connection with MRP).  These fields are intended to control stock on overhead items.   Print the "Inventory Material Reorder List" report (located in the Inventory Control module) to show items which have dropped below re-order point minimums.

           

          MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS PLANNING PROCESS 

           

          Confirm status of system data for Material Requirements Planning validity

                      Updated Forecast and Master Schedule

                      Updated Item Master file data

                      Lead Times entered and up to date

                      Shrinkage factors current

                      Order policies set

                      Orders firmed as required

                      Independent Demand items identified

                      Inventories current

                      Receivings current

                      Safety Stocks appropriate

                      Bills of Material current and complete

           

          Confirm system availability to run Material Requirements Planning

                      Timing good for snapshot of data

                      Transactions current

           

          Set the parameters for running the Material Requirements Planning

                      Netable Inventory Locations flagged

                      Discrepant material dispositioned

                      Horizon set

                      Time fences set for change control

                      Bucket size and number set

                                 

           

          When executed, the Material Requirements Planning Module takes a snap-shot of the demand for parts and assemblies (created by Sales Orders, Work Order Shortages, Forecasts) and compares it with supply (on-hand inventory, open Purchase Orders with scheduled qty, open Work Orders) in order to generate an Action List of planned new orders and changes to existing ones to meet demand. The comparison is done one day at a time using the make and/or buy parameters from the Item Master/Material Requirements Planning Information screen in Inventory Control Management.

           

          The Parameters include:

          ·         Order Policy

          ·         Minimum Order Quantity

          ·         Order Multiples

          ·         Purchase Lead Time

          ·         Kitting Lead Time

          ·         Transit Days

          ·         Pull In Days

          ·         Push Out Days

           

          If the AVL suggested to the PO actions is flagged as "DO NOT PURCHASE" MRP will give Release PO actions if there is a need for the part and the part will be displayed on the Create PO screen with the Mfgr and MPN fields blank.  This should flag the user to further investigate and see that it is flagged as "DO NOT PURCHASE" and that they will need to either remove the flag or add additional AVL's to ful-fill the demands.    Notice at the top there is a note that explains what the empty "MFGR" field means.  
           
          Sales Orders on Hold
          When the Sales Order is on HOLD it does NOT drive MRP.
          User does have the ability to turn off the function of the Sales order driving the demands for the MRP and just use the Work Order for buying components by checking the MRP on Hold box in the Sales Order module per line item or in the System Setup/Sales Order Default module.   
           
          If the MRP on Hold is checked in the SO module, MRP will instruct you to cancel all PO(s) you have open for the components needed for this SO.

          If the MRP on Hold is checked in the SO module and you create a WO Manually, the MRP will tell you to cancel the WO since there is no SO demand.  This can be solved one of two ways.

          Use the MPS module (Forecast) or Open/Create Firm planned WO’s so the MRP will NOT keep instructing you to cancel the order.

          This is a perfect solution for customer who wants to build products based on forecast or promised to maintain certain amount of FGI in inventory.  The can use the MPS module to accomplish this and use the SO to ship products from FGI inventory.

          MRP will consider any SO items for the demands unless marked as MRP on Hold. See Article #1244 for further information.

          Check on Work Orders on either Admin or Production hold.  Production Hold on a Work order will disallow movement of the parts. See Article #896 for more detail.   MRP is checking work orders to be sure that they aren’t cancelled or closed.  Everything else will be considered.  MRP checks Sales Orders for OPEN status.  Everything else is ignored.   If the objective is to stop the shipment from the Sales Order, then in the Sales Order, the user may uncheck the “Sales Ack” box and then shipping won’t be able to initiate a Packing List. 
           
          Inventory Items Allocated
           
           MRP does NOT distinguish between inventory items allocated to projects nor Purchase orders allocated to projects in the determination of the available supply (current and future).  To do so would enormously complicate the MRP process.  MRP WILL determine that the supply will meet the demand, whatever it is.

          Should we have locked the requirements by project in MRP, then we could have the situation where we have unallocated inventory on hand, but since  it's not for a specific product that requires it, MRP action could create an order action to buy more of the parts specifically for that project.  This could result in an enormous amount of excess inventory.  Since our objective in MRP is to drive to zero inventory, we do NOT want to ignore any available inventory that might satisfy demands.  Conversely, when inventory is allocated to a specific project, and the demands created for another project are analyzed, the inventory on hand will be available to meet the other project demands, but also create the order actions to supply parts for the original project, if there are still demand requirements.

          In the case of having just enough inventory on hand for a given Project (A), but there are new requirements for Project (B) that precede those for the same parts as project (A), MRP will assume that the inventory on hand will be used for Project (B) first, but get more parts to meet the later date of Project (A).  As long as there is inventory available to meet every demand, it will be up to the user to reallocate inventory for the most urgent need.

          If for some reason user has inventory that belongs to a specific customer and does not want MRP to consider it for any other customer they can change the inventory location to non-nettable.

           

          1.4.2.3. Fields & Definitions for MRP
          1.4.2.3.1. MRP Action Tab
           
           
          MRP Actions: displays the results of a find and allows further item sorting and selection

          Definition of Material Requirements Planning Action Fields:

          MRP Date  This is the date and time for the last material Requirements Planning run. 
          See Article #4765 for further detail on how to Use the X-Reference Find
           The "Last MRP Run" button located in RED at the top of the screen will be displayed in a larger font if MRP run failed due to an AVL issue and there will be brief comment explaining what issues the MRP run encountered. This will allow any user that might not have seen the xls spreadsheet to be aware of what had taken place on the last attempt to run MRP.   For further detail see Article #729.


          Sorting, Searching and Selecting in the MRP Action Screen
           

          The user may sort by the Part Number, Class or Description by depressing the appropriate button.

          To sort the contents of the Summary screen by Part Number, Part Class or Description, click the button. It will turn red and the list will automatically sort in ascending alphanumeric sequence per the selection.

          To search for an item by Part Class, click Class and enter the first few characters of the Part Class in the Search by Part Class field. The list will scroll down to the first incidence of each character in the sequence entered.If a character is not found in the position typed, the list will scroll to the bottom.

          To Search for an item by Description starting with the 1st character on the left, click Description and begin entering the first characters in the field. The list will scroll down to the first incidence of each character in the sequence entered.If a character is not found in the position typed, the list will scroll to the bottom.

          To Search for an item by a word or character string anywhere in the Description, click on Description, click on the Left button next to the Search by Description window (changes to Random).

          Enter the search word or characters in the window. Hit return and the first match in the list will be highlighted. Click on the window and hit return to highlight the next match in the summary list. After the last match or if a match is not found, the last item in the summary list will be highlighted.

          To visually search the summary list, use the scroll bar or arrows to the right of the list.The Source (Buy, Make or Phantom) and total On Hand quantity is displayed in the last two columns.

          For further Details on any item in the Actions main body list, highlight the item by a search or mouse click and select the appropriate Tab to display the desired detail information. To display changes made in other windows or by other users while this window is open, repeat the Material Requirements Find and refresh the screen data.

          FILTERS:

          Buyer The valid buyer code, or ALL buyers. 
          Actions

          The Material Requirements Planning action displayed, or ALL Actions.

          Date Filter

          The horizon date for the Material Requirement Planning actions.Parts with actions beyond this date are excluded from the report.

          Days

          A short-cut to the horizon date. Entering the number of days (from the current date), changed the Date Filter accordingly.

          Main Body

          Part Number

          The item/part number is a unique identifier for every Item Master record entered into the database. 

          Revision

          The part Number revision for the item.

          Part Class

          This is a general part, product or item classification.

          Part Type

          Type is a sub-classification of Part Class.

          Description This is the field of descriptive data about the item.
          Part Source

          This field is hard coded in the system.BUY is for purchased parts and assemblies, MAKE for an item made in-house (assemblies and sub-assemblies) and PHANTOM for a number used to define a collection of items that does not exist as a separate assembly built on a Work Order (ship kits, upgrade packages, spares kits, etc.).

          Material Requirements Planning Action List  in Stock Units Of Measure:

          The information listed in this section pertains to the highlighted part number in the main body above. To see the list for another part number, highlight the part number in the main body.  
           
          NoteDates are calculated with the Production Calendar

          Action 

          Defines the Material Requirements Planning action to be taken for the highlighted part.  There are several different actions that will appear depending on the part.  For example if the Part is a Make/Phantom part and the action originates from a higher level assembly for the Phantom, MRP will display "PHANTOM" in this section and that will indicate to the user that there are no actions required but is listed so users can investigate where component actions are originating from.  If the Make/Phantom is required directly for an order itself, it will now follow the same WO action rules as a regular Make Product would.

          Balance Quantity

          The projected balance of inventory for the part selected.  MRP will display the stock qty UOM. 

          New Quantity

          Displays the new quantity that the action requires.  MRP will instruct you to Purchase the Stock qty UOM, not the Purchase UOM.  The PO Module will display the UOM conversion (if applicable).   

          NOTE:  When creating a PO for an item with different purchasing and stocking UoMs, be sure to enter the MRP suggestion into the Stocking qty field rather than the purchasing qty field.  The system will automatically convert the stocking unit into the purchasing unit for the purchase order qty.

          For Example: if the item has inches for Stock UoM and Feet for Purchasing UoM, and the MRP demand is 24 , the buyer would enter the qty of 24 into the stocking qty field and the PO would automatically convert it to 2 feet in the purchasing qty field.  So the supplier deals in feet, but ManEx deals in inches.  The conversion between the two are established in the Unit of Measure & Conversion module.

          Original Date

          Displays the original (current) date of the existing action. 

          New Date Displays the new date that the action requires. For a buy part the New Date is arrived by subtracting the Kitting and Production Lead times setup for the Make part from the Sales Order Ship Date.  For a Make part the New Date is the Sales Order Ship date.  See Article #3064  for futher detail on how the Lead Times for a Level BOM are calculated. 
          Days Late

          If the action date is earlier than the current date, the number of days late for the action is shown.

          Date to Take Action

          This is the date by which the action listed must take place. Changing the leadtime of a Buy part will NOT change the due date, only the date to take action.  For a Buy part this date is arrived by subtracting the Purchase Lead time from the New Date.  For a Make part this date is arrived by subtracting the Kitting and Production Lead times from the New Date which is the Sales Order ship date.

          See Article #2671

          This portion of the MRP module is not fully completed yet in the current version. It is still a work in progress. While it displays the WO’s for quick reference you will still actually have to go into the WO module to create the WO’s as needed. You can also create WO’s directly in the SO module as well at the time you’re creating the Sales orders. 




          Clicking on the  button will bring up the following:

          Definition of fields in the Projected Inventory screen:

          Date

          The projected date of a Materials Requirements Planning action.

          Reference

          The Material Requirements Action.

          Quantity The quantity of parts involved in the Material Requirements Planning action.
          Project  The project number assigned to the PO.
          Balance 

          The projected balance of inventory for the part selected.

          After depressing the Projected inventory button, the reference field was highlighted in the Projected Inventory Material Requirements Planning View in Stock Unit Of Measure and double clicked.  The Material Requirements Planning Detail appears.

          Material Requirements Planning Field Definitions:

          Work Order Number  This is the Work Order Number in the system. 
          Customer Name  The name of the Customer for which the assembly will be made. 
          Part Number

          This is the assembly part number where the component part number is highlighted.

          Balance

          This is the balance for the Work Order Listed.

          Original Ship Date This is the original scheduled ship date of the assembly.

          After highlighting a part number in the main body, the Material Requirements Planning Demands and Approved Vendors List appeared, as displayed above:

          Material Requirements Planning Demands and Approved Vendor List Field Definitions:

          Order Number 

          This is the Work Order Number the system is proposing. 

          Demand Part No  This is the Assembly No the demand is for.
          Required Quantity For the Work Order proposed, this is the quantity of the component part number which will be required.
          Required Date The date when the component part number highlighted is required to be released to the assembly floor. 
          Customer The name of the Customer for which the assembly will be made, if known.  If the customer is not known, an explanation will appear.

          AVL

          Mfgr 
          This will list the Mfgr's approved on the BOM 
          Mfgr Part Number 
          This will list the Mfgr PN's approved on the BOMNOTE:  If "GENR" is approved on the BOM MRP will consider any inventory for that part even if the AVL is not approved on the BOM. 


           
           
          1.4.2.3.1.1. Create POs
           
          Un-Check All Check or Un-check all records in the grid to create POs.

          List All Suppliers

          List Suppliers assigned to the MPN in the ICM Module

          Check the radial to list all suppliers or list only the suppliers assigned to the MPN in the ICM module.   Once the radial is selected this will control the information defaulted into the Preferred Supplier column.  
          Supplier Filter

          If "No Filter" is selected and multiple records with different suppliers are selected multiple POs will be created (one for each supplier).  If "Select" is checked, user can select from the pull down which Supplier records to display.  Then when the "Create PO for Supplier" button is clicked, the system will create POs for selected supplier only.  

          Depress this button to Create the POs for the items checked. 
          PO Checking this box indicates which PO is to be created for the selected item.  If you place your mouse pointer over the column it will display the tool tip.
          X If there is no Supplier information available in the ICM module the system will allow user to select a supplier from a pick list.  Once this supplier is selected this supplier will default into the Prefered Supplier coulmn for the records that have this box checked.  
          Preferred Supplier The default supplier assigned in the ICM module will appear in this column.  
          Part No Defaults in from the MRP action list with "Release PO" action.
          Rev Defaults in from the MRP action list with "Release PO" action.
          Mfgr Defaults in from the MRP action list with "Release PO" action.
          MPN Defaults in from the MRP action list with "Release PO" action.
          Quantity Defaults in from the MRP action list with "Release PO" action.
          Cost Each Unit price for the item defaults to the value based on the "Price Source" column.  This field can be overwritten.
          Price Source Derived from the list of "Price Sources" setup in the Purchase Setup module. 
          Date Req Defaults in from the MRP action list with "Release PO" action.
          Action Dt Defaults in from the MRP action list with "Release PO" action.
          Class Defaults in from the MRP action list with "Release PO" action.
          Type Defaults in from the MRP action list with "Release PO" action.
          Description Defaults in from the MRP action list with "Release PO" action.
          Buyer Defaults in from the MRP action list with "Release PO" action.
          1.4.2.3.1.2. Create WO's

          This portion of the MRP module is not fully completed yet in the current version. It is still a work in progress. While it displays the WO’s for quick reference you will still actually have to go into the WO module to create the WO’s as needed. You can also create WO’s directly in the SO module as well at the time you’re creating the Sales orders
          .
          1.4.2.3.2. Item Master Tab

          This screen will display details for the item highlighted in the MRP Action tab, which is being defaulted in from the Inventory Control Management module.  See Article #924 for field definitions.  These fields may be edited in Inventory Control Management

          1.4.2.3.3. Quantity Info Tab

          This screen will display manufacturer, warehouse and inventory quantities for the item highlighted in the MRP Action tab, which is being defaulted in from the Inventory Control Management module.  See Article #925 for field definitions.  These fields may be edited in Inventory Control Management

          Complete inventory stock, allocation and usage information by Manufacturer is displayed or available at the click of a button. All current inventory information about any selected part can be displayed here.

          1.4.2.3.4. MRP Info Tab

          This screen will display MRP parameters for the item highlighted in the MRP Action tab, which is being defaulted in from the Inventory Control Management module.  See Article #926 for field definitions.  These fields may be edited in Inventory Control Management . 

          1.4.2.3.5. Notes Tab

          This screen will display Inventory Notes for the item highlighted in the MRP Action tab, which is being defaulted in from the Inventory Control Management module.  See Article #927 for field definitions.  These fields may be edited in Inventory Control Management


          1.4.2.3.6. Customer Tab
          This screen will display customer part number(s) assigned to the internal part number for the item highlighted in the MRP Action tab, which is being defaulted in from the Inventory Control Management module.  See Article #928 for field definitions.  These fields may be edited in Inventory Control Management

           

           

          1.4.2.3.7. Supplier Tab

          This screen will display the name of the Supplier and Supplier's Part Number for the item highlighted in the MRP Action tab, which is being defaulted in from the Inventory Control Management module.  See Article #929 for field definitions.  These fields may be edited in Inventory Control Management


           

           

          1.4.2.3.8. Manufacturer Part Spec Tab

          This screen will display any drawing, photograph, images, or .pdf files linked to the item highlighted in the MRP Action tab, which is being defaulted in from the Inventory Control Management module.  See Article #930 for field definitions.  These fields may be edited in Inventory Control Management


           

          1.4.2.4. How To ..... for MRP
          1.4.2.4.1. Find a Material Requirements Planning (MRP) Record

          Enter Material Planning/Material Requirements Planning (MRP)/Material Requirements Planning (MRP) Module 

           

          The following screen will appear:

                      

          Pressing the Find action Button displays the following sequences:

           Tips on Using the Material Requirements Planning Find Screen

          Selection of at least one parameter will reduce the time to retrieve the information.  The Find by Parent BOM is specific down to the Revision level.

          If no information is selected in a Find operation, all part numbers with MRP actions will appear. 

          Definition of Material Requirements Planning Find Fields:

          Starting Part Number and an Ending Part Number

          Be sure to enter all prefixes, dashes, spaces and alpha characters to find the exact number you are trying to locate.  To find one item, enter the part number in the 1st box, depress the return key and only that record will display.  To view a series of items, enter the  first and last part number of the series and all items numbered between will display.  If you want All part numbers, leave this area blank.
           
          If an incorrect part is entered into the range that does not exist within inventory, or there are no MRP records for the part entered user will receive the following message:
           
          Buyer

          Select Buyer from the pull down menu.  If you want ALL buyers, leave this area blank. Assigned Buyer will bring up all items assigned to that particular Inventory Buyer.  The Buyer assignment is made in Part Class and Type System Setup Defaults or in the Item Master. 

          Part Class  Select the Class from the pull down menu  Part Class and/or Part Type will bring up only those items that match all entries made. If you want all Classes, leave this field blank. 
          Part Type 

          If you selected a Class, depressing on the down arrow will bring up a list of Types within that Class. Select the Part Type within the Class selected.  If you want all of the Types within the Class, leave this field blank. 

          Find by Parent BOM The "Find by Parent BOM" is specific down to the Revision level.  This filters MRP results per Selected Bill of Material.  You MUST enter the exact part number and revision of the Parent BOM to get only the parts with actions per that BOM.  Note:  Only parts listed on the BOM with MRP action messages will be displayed.  Parts with all actions from all sources will be shown on the screen if the part has actions from the entered BOM and other demands.  A part may appear on the list even if there are not direct actions from the entered BOM if there are actions from the demands or such actions as Cancel PO/WO.  There is no way to filter out the actions just to those actions resulting from demands from entered BOM.     
          Rev

          Revision of Parent BOM.  If applicable this MUST be entered to located the exact Parent BOM.  The "Find by Parent BOM" is specific down to the Revision level.  If the exact part number and revison of the Parent BOM is not correct user will receive the following message:

          Parent Project  If you select to find by a Project this is going to filter and display only parts that are assigned or associated to a project, but will display , ALL actions for that part , not just those that are associated with the project.  If you had 3 actions for a part, each assigned to a different project, all three actions would be displayed when you Find by any of the three projects
          Actions

          Select the action from the pull down.  There are the various Material Requirements Planning actions, which the user may filter on such as:  All Actions,  All Purchase Order Actions,  All Work Order Actions,  Pull-Ins,  Push-Outs,  Release Purchase Orders,  Release Work Orders,  Cancel Purchase Orders, and  Cancel Work Orders.     

          Note:  When you filter by any of the selections,  MRP will filter through the actions and display ONLY the parts that have an action that matches the selection.   If it finds a match it will display all the the actions against that particular part.  
           
          For example:   if you select to filter by "Release PO Actions".  MRP will display ONLY the parts that have "Release PO Actions".  If it finds a match it will still display all the other PO actions against that particular part.  If it didn't users may overlook the fact that there are other PO actions for that particular part as well.  However, it does filter out all the parts that "DO NOT" have any  "Release PO Actions" against it.  
          Days

          Type in the number of days (from the current date), changes the Date Filter accordingly.  This is a short-cut to the horizon date. 

          Date Filter

          The horizon date for the Material Requirements Planning actions.  Parts with actions beyond this date are excluded from the report.

          MRC  Select the Material Risk Code from the Pull Down, which are setuup in System Setup/ Material Risk Code Setup .

          The filtered information will populate the Material Requirements Planning Actions screen, as displayed below:

           

          1.4.2.4.2. Add (Generate) A Material Requirements Planning (MRP)
          Add (Run) a Material Requirements Planning
           
          MRP runs through a large number of tables and records to compile its calculations, and provides a snapshot of suggested actions at the same time it is ran.  If users are changing things during this process it could definitely cause some strange outcome.  To prevent this situation we strongly suggest that you use the Nightly MRP trigger. (Refer to Article #416 for more detail on trigger setup).   

          If you find the need to re-run MRP during the production work day then we suggest that you notify all departments that MRP is going to be ran and ask them to remain out of the system until the MRP run is complete.  This will help assure that the most accurate MRP run is possible.  Then follow the procedure below:

          Enter Material Planning/Material Requirements Planning (MRP), Material Requirements Planning (MRP) Module   

          The following Screen will appear:

          To run a new Material Requirements Planning (MRP) manually,   depress the Add action button (Generate MRP), and enter your password.

          The following screen will appear:

          The time it takes MRP to run is dependent on a number of factors.  Here is a list of items that affect the processing time:

          the number of open Sales orders
          the number of open Work orders
          the number of open Purchase Orders
          the complexity of the BOMs  (levels) 
          the number of AVL's for parts
          the number of active parts
          Inventory safety stock, minimum orders, order multiples

          A company with high annual sales but only a few open orders of all types and only a few simple BOMs will process quickly, a company with low annual sales, but with a large number of small orders, many BOMs and AVL's will take a long time to process.

          We are not able to come up with an average time because there are too many conditions that affect the run time.

          Once the MRP run is completed and was successful,  user will receive the following message:

          Depress the OK button.  The Material Requirements Planning Date at the top right hand side of the screen will change.

           
          If the MRP run was NOT successful due to AVL issues (missing, or exists but is marked as "Do Not Purchase and/or Kit, etc) the following message wil be displayed on screen indicating that MRP will NOT be able to continue until the BOM and/or part records have been correct.  Then in addtion to the message an XLS file will be generated and placed in the ManEx Main Directory.  This XLS file will contain the records that the user will need to review and address.  If an XLS file is generated multiple times a day the system will add "_N" to the name of the XL file, where "N" is the dequence  number.  For example if MRP is run today three times without fixing a problem or a new problem is generated, the generated files will have names;  badavls_2009.03.31_1.xls, badavls_2009.03.31_2.xls, badavls_2009.03.31_3.xls, unless one or all of the files were removed.    The user will have the option of viewing the XL file now or later.  NOTE:  These XL files will need to be manually removed from the ManEx Main Directory.  
              
           
           
          If the user selects "No" the user will receive the following message and they may review the XL file placed in the ManEx Main Directory.
           
           
           
          If user selects "Yes" an XL file (similar to the one shown below) will be displayed on screen and also placed in the ManEx Main Directory for later review:
           
           
           
           
          The date displayed in the "Last Successful MRP Run" will NOT change.   The "Last MRP Run" button located in RED at the top of the screen will be displayed in a larger font if MRP run failed due to an AVL issue and there will be brief comment expaining what issues the MRP run encountered.  This will allow any user that might not have seen the xls spreadsheet to be aware of what had taken place on the last attempt to run MRP.  
           
           
           
          Double click on the "Last MRP Run" button and similar information will be displayed:
           
           
           
          NOTE:  If MRP runs from Trigger, and MRP run was NOT successful due to AVL issues an XLS file will be generated and placed in the ManEx Main Directory for review and also be attached to the e-mail sent, informing user that the MRP run was NOT COMPLETED (similar to the one shown below).   Upon opening the MRP screen the "Last MRP Run" button will be displayed in a larger font and will have information about the file as displayed above.
           
           
          If MRP runs Successfully from Trigger the e-mail sent will be similar to this:
           
           
           
           
          1.4.2.4.3. Drilling Down In MRP

          There are several drill downs within the MRP screen.

          Highlight a Buy Part number of interest on the MRP main screen:

          Double click on the highlighted buy part number 051-0001608 and the user can see the assembly of the proposed work order.

          Highlight the Proposed Work Order Number and the Approved AVL's will be listed per the BOM.

          If the User double clicks on the PWO-2-31 (Proposed Work Order) the Sales Order, the assembly, required qty, and Customer will be displayed.:

          Highlight and double click on the SO0000000029 and the Original Sales Order will display. 

           

          Another Drill down located within the MRP Actions screen  is by highlighting one of the actions located in the MRP Action List-in Stk UOM box: 

          Depress the "Projected Inventory" button.  The user will see the same proposed work order number being delivered instead of demand.  By this screen, the user can also see what’s driving the requirement for the product and the next level, etc.

          Within this screen you may highlight any of the Reference items and drill down to Sales Order, Inventory Level, Purchase Order, etc.

          Highlight and double click on the Delv. PO 00000001512 and a PO summary screen will display:

          Here you may drill down to display the original PO if you double click on the PO number:

           

          1.4.2.4.4. Create POs from MRP Action List
          Enter Material Planning/Material Requirements Planning(MRP)/Material Requirements Planning (MRP)
           
          The following screen will appear:
           
           
          Note:  To start creating POs from the MRP action list, make sure you have run MRP creating a fresh MRP action list, and user must have "ADD" rights to the PO module in Security setup.  
           
          Find   an MRP record. 
           
           
          Highlight a part number of interest and depress the Create POs button in the bottom right hand corner, enter user password (user must have "ADD" rights to the PO module), and a list of Release PO suggestions based on the MRP filter that was applied and displayed within the MRP screen will appear.  This will allow the buyers to auto created purchase order records based on what MRP is suggesting (mfgr, mfgr pn, etc...) 

          Note:
            ManEx does NOT offer a pull down next to the Mfgr and/or MPN to select from because within the AVL list there may be AVL's that exist which may satisfy one demand, but not another.   Once the user goes to review the PO they can always edit the Mfgr there if they really desire, but while within the MRP the Release PO screen is going to require that you use the AVL that it calculated as the most commonly used AVL for all demands for the aggregation.   

          Note:  If the AVL suggested to the PO action is flagged as "DO NOT PURCHASE" MRP will give Release PO actions if there is a need for the part and the part will be displayed on the Create PO screen with the Mfgr and MPN fields blank.  This should flag the user to further investigate and see that it is flagged as "DO NOT PURCHASE" and that they will need to either remove the flag or add additional AVL's to ful-fill the demands.   Notice at the top there is a note that explains what the empty "MFGR" field means.  
           
           
          If a Supplier is setup within the ICM as a default Supplier and also has contract pricing setup as shown below:
           
           
           
           
           
          The default supplier will be listed under the Preferred Supplier column and the Contract Price will default in as displayed below within the Red Box.    
           
           
           
          User may view records by selecting All Suppliers or only Suppliers assigned to the MPN in the ICM module.  User may also use the Supplier filter to view records for one supplier at a time.
           
          User may manually select the records to have POs created by placing a check in the box in the PO column.  If no supplier is defaulted in the Preferred Supplier column from the ICM module, user may check item in the "x" column, select a supplier from the pull-down and receive the following message:  
           
           
           
          Depress "Yes"  to continue and user will receive the following message: 
           
           
          Depress "Yes"  and all the records that have the check box to the left of the "Preferred Supplier" column checked will be updated with the selected supplier and all the price source's will stay the same.
           
          If user selects "No" they may select a different Price Source from the pull down.  The only Price sources that will be displayed in the pull down are the ones selected in Purchase Setup.  Once a different price source is selected if there is a price associated with that price source that will also default in.
           
           
           
          The Cost Each is defaulted in, based on the "Price Source" column (which is setup in the Purchase Setup  module).  The standard Material Price and the Target Price defaults in from the Inventory Control Mgmt module.  The Contract Price is defaulted in from the Supplier Contract Mgmt module.  The Quote Price is defaulted in from the Quotation & Estimating module.  The quote MUST be approved. If the part is on more than one quote the system will use the price from the most recent quote.   The Mfgr and Supplier listed on the Auto PO screen must match the Mfgr and Supplier that was selected on the quote.  
           
           NOTE:   The Auto PO screen will only find existing parts entered in the "Material 1" screen.  There is no way to identify parts from "Material 2" screen.  There is no connection between part entered in the quote module "Material 2" screen and the part before it becomes an Inventory part in ManEx until after the "Transfer". 
           
          All coulmns in the grid are sortable.  To sort on the specific column click  the header of the column.  By default the items are sorted by "Preferred Supplier" column (red color of the header indicates that the data sorted by the values in the column).  Part No and Rev columns are both sorted by Part No and Rev values.  If the cursor is in Part No, Mfgr,or MPN columns and the user begins to type the information, the interactive search will be performed and the record pointer will be moved to the appropriate record.
           
          Once user has selected the records, they can depress the "Create PO for Supplier" button and PO's will be created (one for each supplier).
           
          Once the POs have been created an xls report will be generated in the Manex local directory for review.  The XL file name is based on the user initials plus the date and time the file is created.  For Example if the file created has a name "ONE-20070524-9-37.xls"   "ONE" - this is the user's initials;   "20070524" - is the date when file was created (YYYYMMDD);  "9-37" is the time (Hours-Min) when file was created, so this file was created at 09:37 am.  
           
           
           
          User has the option of opening the created excel file by depressing Yes or No. 
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
          1.4.2.5. Reports - MRP

          To obtain the MRP reports, depress the Reports button.The following screen will appear:

          Select the output you desire by clicking on the radial.Choose from Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

          Highlight the report.

          Depress the option tab (if aplicable)

          Depress the OK button

           

          MRP Action Report - PO Actions - MRP Report of all recommended PO Actions for all "BUY'" parts that have at least one action within the "Last Action Date" filter on the MRP screen.

          The following report is printed:

          MRP Action Report - WO Actions - MRP Report of all recommended PO Actions for all "BUY'" parts that have at least one action within the "Last Action Date" filter on the MRP screen.

          The following report is printed:

          Inventory Part View by Manufacturer - This report displays the inventory information, supply, demands and action messages for a part that are the results of the latest MRP run.

          For Inventory Part View By Manufacturer, depress the Options tab:

          Select the Part Number Range desired. To clear the range entries, click on the radial.

          Depress the OK button. 
           
          This report is divided into three sections:  Inventory; Demands/Supply; and Actions
           

          The following report is printed:

          Order Action Report - This report displays the inventory information, purchase history, open PO's and MRP actions for 'BUY' parts that are the results of the latest MRP run.

          Depress the Options tab.

          Select the Part Number Range desired.  To clear the range entries, click on the radial.

          Depress the OK button.

          NOTE:  The MFGR and MFGR part number will only be printed in the Order Action Message Section if the order policy for the part is LOT for LOT. 

           

          The following report is printed:

          Projected Excess Inventory List - This report list the projected excess inventory that is on hand but not needed after MRP requirements.

          Depress the Options tab.

          Click on the radial for All Inventory, Internal Inventory or In-Plant Store Inventory. 

          Depress the OK button.

          Note:  The Projected Excess Inventory report runs off of the entire MRP run, not just based off of the MRP find filter that might be applied.  
           

          The following report will print:

           

          MRP Horizontal Planning Summary  - This reports displays the supply and demand for each part on the MRP action list with the quantities in weekly buckets.    
          Note:This report requires Legal size paper.

          The following message will appear:

          Depress the OK button and the following report will be printed:

          Multi Division Purchase Order Action Report   -  NOTE:  The system does NOT require that you have Multi-Divisions setup to utilize this report.

          Depress the Options tab.

          Select the Part Number Range desired, then enter the Last Action Date.   
           
          To clear the range entries, click on the "Clear Range Entries" radio button. 

          Select the Part Class from the pull down. Select the Supplier List from the pull down.

          Select the radio button for the report to list:  All Contact Suppliers, a Single Contract Supplier, Parts with no Contract Supplier, All Parts Contract & Non-Contract.

          Select Buyer from the pull down.
           
          Depress the OK button.
           

          The following report will be printed:  The report is intended to break down the PO actions from the MRP run by Buyer, then part number.

          MRP Action Report - PO Actions by Supplier - MRP Report of all recommended PO Actions for all "BUY'" parts that have at least one action within the "Last Action Date" filter on the MRP screen by Supplier

          Depress the Options tab.

          Select Apply All "Find" Filters or Apply only Date Filter by clicking on the radial.

          Select the Supplier from the pull down.

          Click on the radial if you want the report to List:   All Default Suppliers, a Single Default Supplier, Parts with no Default Supplier, All Parts Contract & Non-Contract.

          Select to Show only #1 pref or Show all Preferences by clicking on the radial.

          Depress the OK button.

           

          The following report will print:

          MRP Action Analysis by Part Number 

          Depress the Options tab.

          Depress the down arrow next to the Part Number box.

           

          Use the slider to reach the Part Number of interest.

          Highlight it and click. The Actions will be displayed.

          Depress the Ok button.

           

          The following report is available:

          Customer Projected Excess  - This report list the projected excess inventory that is on hand but not needed after MRP requirements for a selected customer.  
          Note: This report requires Legal size paper.

          Depress the Options tab.

          Select All Inventory, Internal Inventory or In-Plant Store Inventory by clicking on the radial.

          Select a Customer fron the pull down.

          Select to Sort by System Part Number or Customer Part Number by clicking on the radial.

          Depress the Ok button. 

          Note:  The BOM MUST be associated to a Customer for the report to work.   
           If you select a customer, the program will find all the assembly’s and sub assembly’s assigned to that customer find all the parts on those BOMs. Then it will exclude the parts that are used on the BOM of a different customers.
           

          The following report will be printed:

          MRP PO Action Report by Buyer - MRP Report of all recommended PO Actions for all "BUY'" parts that have at least one action within the "Last Action Date" filter on the MRP screen.
          Note:  A default Supplier MUST be linked to the inventory part before it will display on the report. 
           
          The following report will print:

           

           

           

           

           

          1.4.2.6. FAQs - MRP
          Facts & Questions for the MRP Module
          1.4.2.7. MRP Hot List
           
          After activation, "Material Requirements Planning" (MRP) access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

           

          Material Requirements Planning Hot List Field Definition:

          Days Late

          If the action date is earlier than the current date, the number of days late for the action is shown.

          Required Date The date when the component part number highlighted is(was) required to be released to the assembly floor.
          Action The Material Requirements Planning action required.
          Part Number The Part Number for the item highlighted.
          Class

          The classification of the highlighted part number.

          Type

          The Part Type assigned to the item.

          Quantity

          The quantity of parts involved in the Material Requirements Planning action.

          Buyer The valid buyer of the item highlighted

                        

           

          1.4.3. Master Production Schedule (MPS) & Forecast (OPTIONAL Module)
          1.4.3.1. Master Production Schedule
          1.4.3.1.1. Prerequisites for MPS & Forecast
          Prerequisites Required for Entering a New Master Production Schedule:

          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase.   
          The forecast module is designed to be the controlling factor for a product when it is used.   To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com\contactus.aspx 

          After activation, "Master Production Schedule" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.  

          Part number 

          The part number must exist for a product or part in the Item Master. 

          AVL The Manufacturer Names must exist when using the AVL in the Bill Of Materials.
          MRP Policies The Material Requirements Planning policies should exist for each product or part in Inventory Control.

          1.4.3.1.2. Introduction for MPS & Forecast
          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase.   The forecast module is designed to be the controlling factor for a product when it is used.   To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com\contactus.aspx 
          1.4.3.1.3. Fields & Definitions for MPS & Forecast
          1.4.3.1.3.1. Forecast

          Master Production Schedule Forecast tab Field Definitions:

          Header Portion of Screen

          Number

          The number assigned to the forecast. 

          Source Whether the forecast involves a Make or Buy Part.
          Part Class

          The classification of the Part.

          Part Type

          The Type assigned to the part number.

          Part Number

          The unique number assigned to the part. 

          Consume

          The box is checked if the user expected to ship eventually under a Sales Order.

          Depress this button to enter any special notes that pertain to the forecast.
          Description

          The description of the part.

          Total Quantity

          The total quantity of the Forecast.

          Schedule Quantity

          The portion of the total quantity scheduled and the frequency of the schedule.

          First Ship Date

          The Date the schedule quantity displayed is expected to ship. 

          Body of Screen

          Forecast Number

          The number assigned to the forecast for the part listed.

          Source

          Whether the forecast involves a Make or Buy Part.

          Part Number

          The unique number assigned to the part.

          (Rev)

          The revision character assigned to the part Number, if such exists.

          Part Class

          The classification of the Part.

          Part Type

          The Type assigned to the part number.

          First Ship Date

          The Date the schedule quantity displayed is expected to ship. 

          Balance Quantity

          The unshipped quantity amount.

           

          1.4.3.1.3.2. Bucketed MPS View

          Bucketed Master Production Schedule tab Field Definitions:

          Top of Screen:

          Product Number

          The unique number assigned to the product. 

          (Rev) The revision character assigned to the Product Number, if any.
          Class The classification of the Product.
          Type The Type to which the highlighted Product Number is assigned.
          Description

          The description of the Product Number highlighted.

          View Buckets by

          The radial selection dictates how the buckets are viewed, by Week or by Month.

          Last (MPS) Material Requirements Planning Run

          This is the date of the last Material Requirements Planning run.

          Left Side of Screen:

          Product Number     The unique number assigned to the product.
          Total The total originally forecasted.

          Week of or Month of 

          Displays the quantity of the amount scheduled, by week or by month.

          Out

          This column indicated the quantity scheduled beyond the Weeks or Months displayed.

          Right Side of Screen:

          Product Number     The unique number assigned to the product.
          Total The total originally forecasted.

          Week of or Month of 

          Displays the quantity of the amount scheduled, by week or by month.

          Out

          This column indicated the quantity scheduled beyond the Weeks or Months displayed.

          1.4.3.1.4. How To ..... for MPS & Forecast
          1.4.3.1.4.1. Adding A New Master Production Schedule

          Enter Material Planning/Master Production Schedule (MPS) & Forecast/Master Production Schedule Module   

          The following screen will appear:

          To ADD a new Master Production Schedule, depress the Add action button.  Enter your password.

          Select the Source from the Drop down menu.

          Select the Part Class from the Drop down menu.

          Select the Part Type from the Drop down menu.

          Select the Part Number from the Drop down menu.

          Either type the Part Number into the red box or scroll down until the part number is located.Then, double click to select.

          On the main screen, type in the total forecasted quantity for the part.Type in the scheduling parameters.For example, if the forecasted need is 1000 and your plant has the capacity to make 250 units per week, schedule 250 over the next 4 weeks.

          Type in the first ship date or type a ? in the First Ship Date box and a calendar will appear on the screen:

          Click on the date of interest.To advance into the next month, depress the right hand > button.To advance into the same month next year, depress the right hand >> button.

          To go back to last month, depress the left hand < button.To go back a full year, depress the << button.

          Click on the date desired.

          Check the consume box if the forecast will eventually be replaced by a Sales Order.

          If you want to add a Forecast note, depress that button.The following Forecast Item Note screen is available:


          Depress the Edit button.Type in the note.Depress the Save button.Exit.

          Once you’ve finished the data entry in this screen, depress the Save button
          1.4.3.1.4.2. Bucketed Master Production Schedule Tab
          Depress the Bucketed Master Production Schedule tab.The following screen will appear:
           

          This screen displays the results of the latest Material Requirements Planning run.

          Highlight the Product Number of Interest.

          Bucketed Master Production Schedule tab Field Definitions:

          Top of Screen:

          Product Number

          The unique number assigned to the product. 

          (Rev) The revision character assigned to the Product Number, if any.
          Class The classification of the Product.
          Type The Type to which the highlighted Product Number is assigned.
          Description

          The description of the Product Number highlighted.

          View Buckets by

          The radial selection dictates how the buckets are viewed, by Week or by Month.

          Last Material Requirements Planning Run

          This is the date of the last Material Requirements Planning run.

          Left Side of Screen:

          Product Number     The unique number assigned to the product.
          Total The total originally forecasted.

          Right Side of Screen: 

          Week of or Month of

          Displays the quantity of the amount scheduled, by week or by month.

          Out

          This column indicated the quantity scheduled beyond the Weeks or Months displayed.

          Once a new Material Requirements Planning run is made, this screen will update
           
           
           
          1.4.3.2. Forecast
          1.4.3.2.1. Prerequisites for Forecast

          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase.   The forecast module is designed to be the controlling factor for a product when it is used.   To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com"contactus.aspx

           

          After activation, "Master Production Schedule" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
          System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           
           
          1.4.3.2.2. Introduction for Forecast
           

          The forecast is designed to be the controlling factor for a product when it is used. There are rules in the Forecast Setup that the user can use to establish the maximum increase or decrease for the product by how far out (how many months) the order is. The Forecast module will reduce the requirement to MRP as a forecast is consumed by ships, but will not increase the requirements to MRP beyond the forecast guidelines. It will, however, provide a warning to users that their Sales Order Demand exceeds the forecast  (when there is one, and the item is a forecast item on the Sales Order) and refer to a report generated whenever the forecast is regenerated or run by MRP. It is the users responsibility to either adjust the forecast, or adjust the Sales Order accordingly. If the user really does want the extra product over and above the forecast, they can add a line to the sales order that is NOT a forecasted item, and then both the forecast and the sales order should drive demand.

           
          The Forecast checkbox is defaulted as True within the SO Module whether or not there actually is a forecast.  By doing this, we minimize the possibility of the MRP double ordering parts for the SO. If there is no forecast for the product, MRP will look at the SO as normal and create the demands.  As soon as a Forecast is created for that product (regardless if Forecast Detail is blank) the system will then consider the Forecast information over the SO schedule for MRP.  The users can un-check the Frcst check box within the SO/WO for that item if desired.  The user will then receive a warning message that the orders exceed the forecast and to read the report to verify that’s what the user wants.  (This is done so that the customer doesn’t try to sneak in last minute upswings that exceed the forecast).
           
          Note:  The programmers have confirmed that we do have a bit of a disconnect. The Forecast setup has 24 "Future Periods", and the Forecast Module "Detail" tab is setup for 26 weeks.  At the time it was originally designed it was not seen as a need to go out that far within the Forecast module itself.   We do recognize that this needs to be addressed by making changes to the Forecast module to add another page to extend the weeks out further. 

          The 2 principal methods ( Firm Planned WO being the only other)  of driving demand in the MRP system are:
          • Forecasts
          • Sales Orders ( only those flagged as non-consuming )

           It is important to draw the distinction between the two kinds of Sales Order items that exist in Manex.

          1. Forecast-Consuming Sales Orders ( these do not drive demand unless no active forecast exists for the item )
          2. Non-consuming Sales Orders ( drives demand in addition to the Forecast if it exists )

          The default during Sales Order Entry is that the Flag is set to consuming. If the sales order has an active forecast, the Sales Order will not drive demand – shipments against it will reduce Forecast by the same amount. If there is no active forecast, it will behave exactly the same way as a non-consuming SO. If an item is dropped from the Forecast (revision change or otherwise), what do we do with the consuming Sales Order? Should the system prompt if there are Sales Orders with consuming set to “yes”, yet there is no Sales Order.

          Forecasts

          Forecasts can be loaded for up to 24 weeks for any assembly/rev into the Manex Forecast Module. Forecasts are uploaded from an XL template. Forecast module buckets the loaded demand into weeks.

          The calculation of “net demand to MRP” is as follows:

          Forecast Qty-shipments ( consuming sales orders only)

          In other words as we ship against the Forecast the net demand decreases by that amount.

          As Consuming Sales Orders are created they may have schedule ship dates that do not align with the Forecast. For example , customer may provide Sales Orders with quantities that are due on a date before the Forecast due date. Since we are driving material to the Forecast date, this might create a condition where we cannot meet the date. The Forecast module generates a report where you can view the alignment of the Sales Orders to Forecast. This is an important report to review with the customer.
          In the event that the total consuming Sales Order qty exceeds the entire forecast ( you can see in the afore mentioned report) you should advise the customer that we will not be driving demand for the excess. They must either amend the forecast or clearly indicate. in the PO ( or through some other dependable means ) that the PO is in addition to the Forecast.
           
          Each new Forecast is compared to the previous to look for differences. The following analysis is performed by the system:
           
          Review of results Probable reason Analyst Action
          Are there any new items? New parts being driven
          Have any revisions changed? This could be the reason for item 1.
          Analyst must copy the forecast of the old rev to the new rev so that we do not lose the history and are able to apply the violation tolerances appropriately. Then the new forecast is loaded at the new revision.
          Have some items been dropped from the Forecast? Revision change or demand has completely disappeared Analyst must note that there is a setup option by customer which will inactivate any existing Forecast that is not present in the new forecast. In other words, only items in the most current forecast are driven. There is potential excess from such a change and must be reviewed carefully.
          What are the potential changes in “net demand to MRP” in demand as a result of the new forecast?

          Have any of the quantities changed where they violate the allowed flexibility?

          A typical Customer Forecast flexibility may be as shown in the next table
          Analyst should review. If it is not clear why there is a violation ( last forecast same as current) then run a waterfall report for the part in question. The violation may have happened in previous weeks and the forecast was forced..
           
          0 to 30 days No Change Allowed
          31 to 60 25% Change
          61 to 90 50% Change
          91 Plus Unlimited flexibilty
           
          The responsibility of the Forecast analyst or PM is to review the reports and seek appropriate resolution from the customer before the end of the week.
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
          1.4.3.2.3. Fields and Definitions for Forecast
          1.4.3.2.3.1. Main

          Search by Part Number  Search for Inventory Product or Part.  
          Part Number the unique number assigned to the Inventory Product or Part selected. 
          Rev The revision character assigned to the Product or Part selected, if any.
          Class The classification of the Product or Part selected.
          Type The type assigned to the Product or Part selected.
          Description The description of the Product or Part selected.
          Forecast Dt

          The date the forecast was originated.

          Status Status of  forecast "Active" or "Inactive".
          1.4.3.2.3.2. Detail

          Fields and Definitions

          Customer  

          The name of the customer providing the forecast

          Source

          Part Source - Make, Buy  

          Fcst Date

          The date the forecast was originated

          Active

          Current forecast, as opposed to history or pending forecast

          Entered By

          User initials entering forecast

          Date

          Date of original forecast 

          Approved By

          Initials of person approving the forecast

          Date

          Date of approval 

          Deleted 

          A forecast that has been made inactive - history

          Part Number The part number for the forecast listed  
          Part Class The classification of the Part.
          Part Type The Type assigned to the part number.
          Description The description of the Product or Part Number.
          Price Price was intended to be utilized for forecasting revenue - not developed any further 
          Prior Fcst Date

          The most recent forecast created prior to the current active forecast.

          Reason

          The reason the prior forecast was made history.  

          Warehouse
          This field will only be displayed if it is a "BUY" part.  Select the Warehouse from the Pull down.  

           
          Location

          This field will only be displayed if it is a "BUY" part.  This will default in upon selection of warehouse.

          Manufacturer

          This field will only be displayed if it is a "BUY" part.  This will default in upon selection of warehouse.

          Manufactuer Part Number

          This field will only be displayed if it is a "BUY" part.  This will default in upon selection of warehouse.

          Action Buttons

          The purpose of this function is to get the snap shot of the carry over data into the history table and capture the carryover clear date.  This clear date is been used in the MRP logic to get the total consumable sales orders and total shipments against the forecast.  By using this date we can get the total sales order due, and shipments from the reset date to current date.
          The reason a password is being asked for when depressing the Reset Carryover button is because it is the same as making an edit to the screen, so it is proper to request a password to clear the carryover quantities. 
          You can print the carry over history by selecting the carry over reset date from the drop down in the report form on which you can see what was the carryover was over quantity at the time of reset. 
           

          Approve the forecast currently being displayed.  The approval requirements means that the whole forecast is approved to be used in running MRP, not for any specific changes to the forecast.  Without the approval, the forecast will not replace the prior forecast and be ready to use by MRP (unless no approval is required).  If no approval is required in the system setup, then any user with edit rights can render the old forecast that has history and make the new one active for MRP. 

            Generate a forecast based on the “New Forecast”, the “Last Forecast” and the Forecast Allowed Tolerance for the customer involved
            Approve all Forecasts currently in pending status. The approval requirements means that the whole forecast is approved to be used in running MRP, not for any specific changes to the forecast.  Without the approval, the forecast will not replace the prior forecast and be ready to use by MRP (unless no approval is required).  If no approval is required in the system setup, then any user with edit rights can render the old forecast that has history and make the new one active for MRP. 
            Same as Gen FCST, except does so for all forecasts in the system
            Shows what the last MRP requirements were. Will vary as transactions and MRP occur

          Customer Forecast

          Last Forecast

          The Last Forecast will be the values entered in the most recent previous forecast plan upon which MRP acted.

          Last MRP Plan

          The Last MRP Plan will be what MRP will be providing as a basis for component and work orders.

          New Forecast

          The New Forecast is the forecast being entered in the edit mode. 

          Maximum Allowed

          The Maximum Allowed is the last forecast plan modified by the system setup tolerances. If the last FORECAST was for 100 units on the first week, and the tolerance was for 50%, then this line would have the number 150.

          Minimum Alowed

          The next is calculated similarly, showing the Minimum Allowed. So if the tolerance was 10%, then this line would be 90 units.

          Modified Plan

          The Modified Plan is the New Forecast modified by the constraints of the Maximum and Minimum allowed. In this example, no change is allowed, because of the system setup and the fact that we are in the current period. Notice in the 5th week, these numbers become active as it falls in the next period.  

          Carry over

          The Carry Over is anything that is not covered by the forecast modified by the tolerances. Thus, if the previous forecast were 200, and the current forecast is for 300, and the tolerance is zero, the forecast could not be changed from 200 to 300, but held constant at 200. But the 100 left over that couldn’t be added to that week of the forecast becomes the carryover to the next week. As long as the tolerance allows it, the next week will be inclusive of the carryover. If it still falls outside the tolerance, it carries over to the following week. It will carryover until it can be absorbed into the forecast based on the tolerances for each period.

          Cumulative Carry

          The Cumulative carryover is simply adding up any individual carryovers to keep track of the total amount of “catch-up” that is required.

          1.4.3.2.4. How To ..... Forecast
          1.4.3.2.4.1. Find a Forecast
          Enter Material Planning/Master Production Schedule (MPS) & Forecast/Forecast   

          The following screen will appear:

          Depress the Find action button.  A dialogue box will appear that will filter the amount of forecasts displayed.  For example, clicking on OK without any entry will display all active forecasts. Selecting a customer will then display only forecasts for the selected customer. Clicking on a part number (or range of part numbers) will display all forecasts for them, if they are available.  

          After depressing the OK button the following screen will appear:

           

           

           

          Highlight the PN of interest, then click on the Detail tab and the forecast detail for that PN will be displayed  

           

           

          The weekly buckets are established as of the end date of the current week.  Any data loaded from an excel sheet will aggregate the data by these week end dates.

          The Maximum Allowed and Minimum Allowed rows of data are calculated based on the tolerances provided for the customer in the Forecast Setup module.   

           

           

          1.4.3.2.4.2. Add a Forecast
          Enter Material Planning/Master Production Schedule (MPS) & Forecast/Forecast   

          The following screen will appear:

          Depress the Add a record action button.  The following screen will appear.  Select a Customer from the dropdown list. 

           

           

           

          Once a Customer is selected, the user may view a list of part CUSTOMER numbers for the chosen customer, or…

          Choose from a list of INTERNAL part numbers associated with the chosen customer, or…

          Choose from a list of ALL part numbers in the database.

           

          Using the Highlighted RED box, the user may type in a part number, and the dropdown list will move to show the information typed.

           

          When the Customer and Part number are identified, depress the OK button. 

           

          Go to the Detail Tab Screen.  The header information will deafult in;

          Enter in the new forecast;

          Once the forecast is entered, the User should save the information by depressing the Save record action button, and/or depress the GenFCST button to extend the Original forecast to the Planned Forecast, based on the system setup for the customer.

          The user may also approve the forecast, if they have the authority. If the Forecast Setup indicates that approval is NOT required, the Approval button will be inactive, and saving the forecast will automatically make it active.

           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
          1.4.3.2.4.3. Edit a Forecast
           
           
           

          Depress the Edit button. Then the NEW FORECAST line can be edited. If there was a previous forecast, it will be shown on the top line.

          In order to move forward with the forecast, the ACTIVE checkbox needs to be unchecked (in edit). After saving the changes and checkbox, then re-entering the same forecast in edit mode will activate the Approval and Gen FCST buttons. (If approvals are not required in the system setup, the Approval buttons will not be displayed.)

          The Reset Carryover button can be used but as mentioned earlier, needs to have an approval entered in the system setup. The purpose of this button is to allow the user to eliminate any items carried over from previous or unfulfilled forecasts. When activated and password entered, the prompt is for a date on which the carryover will be eliminated.
           
           
          The Last Forecast will be the values entered in the most recent previous forecast plan upon which MRP acted.

          The Last MRP Plan will be what MRP will be providing as a basis for component and work orders.

          The New Forecast is the forecast being entered in the edit mode.

          The Maximum Allowed is the last forecast plan modified by the system setup tolerances. If the last FORECAST was for 100 units on the first week, and the tolerance was for 50%, then this line would have the number 150.

          The next is calculated similarly, showing the Minimum Allowed. So if the tolerance was 10%, then this line would be 90 units.

          The Modified Plan is the New Forecast modified by the constraints of the Maximum and Minimum allowed. In this example, no change is allowed, because of the system setup and the fact that we are in the current period. Notice in the 5th week, these numbers become active as it falls in the next period.

          The Carry Over is anything that is not covered by the forecast modified by the tolerances. Thus, if the previous forecast were 200, and the current forecast is for 300, and the tolerance is zero, the forecast could not be changed from 200 to 300, but held constant at 200. But the 100 left over that couldn’t be added to that week of the forecast becomes the carryover to the next week. As long as the tolerance allows it, the next week will be inclusive of the carryover. If it still falls outside the tolerance, it carries over to the following week. It will carryover until it can be absorbed into the forecast based on the tolerances for each period.

          The Cumulative carryover is simply adding up any individual carryovers to keep track of the total amount of “catch-up” that is required.

           
           

          1.4.3.2.5. Reports - Forecast

          To obtain the Forecast reports, depress the Reports button.  The following screen will appear:

          Select the output you desire by clicking on the radial.Choose from Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

          Highlight the report.

          Depress the option tab.

           

          Forecast Confirmation with Violation Detail

          Select the From and To Dates; Check For Approval or Violations Only; select Customer from pull down.

          Depress the OK button

           

          The following report will print:

           

          Net Demand to MRP with Sales Order Coverage

          Depress the OK button   

          The following report will print:

          List Parts Added or Dropped from the New Forecast

          Select the Customer from the pull down.

          Depress the OK button.

           

          The following report will print:

          Forecast Carryover History

          Select the Reset date from the pull down:

          Depress the OK button

           

          The following report will print:

           

           

          1.4.3.3. Forecast Loader
          1.4.3.3.1. Prerequisites for Forecast Loader

          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase.   The Forecast Loader is used to add new forecasts to the system from an Excel template.  To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com"contactus.aspx

          After activation, "Master Production Schedule" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           
          Forecast Loader Template Complete

          1.4.3.3.2. Introduction for Forecast Loader
          The Forecast Loader is used to add new forecasts to the system from an Excel template.
          1.4.3.3.3. Fields and Definitions - Forecast Loader

          Customer  Customer Name 
            Upload by Customer Part number or Internal Part number
          Upload Button Depress this button to continue the upload 
          Part number  Part number being uploaded 
          Revision  Revision of part number being uploaded 
          Description Description of part being uploaded
          Due Date  Due Date of part being uploaded
          Quantity Quantity of part being uploaded

          1.4.3.3.4. How To ..... for Forecast Loader
          1.4.3.3.4.1. Load Forecast
          Enter Material Planning/Master Production Schedule (MPS) & Forecast/Forecast Loader   

          The following screen will appear:

          Select a customer from the pulldown, then click on the XL File Button to locate the file to be loaded.

          Double click on the file you choose to import and the information will be imported into the Forecast Loader screen as shown below.  You can change the Part numbers to internal part numbers or leave them as the Customer Part numbers for the Upload.

          Depress the Upload button and a forecasst will be created.  Then depress the exit or Cancel button to exit this screen.

           

          1.4.3.4. FAQ's - Forecast Loader
          FAQ - Master Production Schedule (MPS) & Forecast
          1.4.4. Purchase Setup
          1.4.4.1. Supplier Information
          1.4.4.1.1. Prerequisites - Supplier Information

          After activation, "Supplier Information" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.  
           
          Supplier Numbering 
          The System Setup/Number System must be defined for either automatic or manual supplier numbers.
          Account Status The codes for supplier account status must be setup in Supplier Status.
          Supplier Types The types of suppliers must be setup in Supplier Type.
          Terms   The Purchase terms for the Supplier must be set up in Payment Terms.
          Contacts      If used, The contacts used at the Supplier. 
          1.4.4.1.2. Introduction for Supplier Infomration

          The Supplier Module is used to enter the details about Suppliers. This information is used to prepare purchase orders and receivers, as well as establish defaults to be used when new purchase orders are created for a supplier. A supplier may have more than one remit-to address, if there are different divisions for the supplier with different accounting departments. One supplier remit-to address will be identified as the default address to be used in the creation of new purchase orders. One supplier confirm-to address will be identified as the default address in new purchase orders. Also, terms and conditions identified in these screens will be used as defaults for purchasing, receiving and accounting. The user has the opportunity to modify the default information at the time a new purchase order is created.

           

          The Receiving and Billing Information is the user’s addresses which will print on the Purchase Order.

          1.4.4.1.3. Fields & Definitions for Supplier Information
          1.4.4.1.3.1. Supplier Tab

           

          Supplier Information tab field definitions

           

          Supplier No     The number assigned to the Supplier.
          Supplier Name  The name of the Supplier.
          Prefix This is only a reference field and does not affect any other modules within the system at this time.  This field has been implemented for future use.  
          Account Status     Allows the user to select the status of the Supplier;  Preferred, Approved, Under Evaluation, Inactive or Disqualified.  This field is NOT a required field and can be left blank.  The status really doesn't have much influence throughout the system. The status is displayed on screen when creating a PO.   If a supplier has an account status of either "Inactive" or "Disqualified" this supplier will NOT be displayed on the Supplier List when creating a New PO.  
          Supplier Type     The type of Supplier, either Manufacturer, Distributor, Independent Rep. or In-Stores.
          Purchase Type The type of purchases the user makes from the Supplier, either Inventory, MRO or both.  (MRO stands for Materials, Repairs and other, usually used for almost everything else other than Inventory.) 
          Account Number The number the Supplier has assigned the user.
          Phone   The Supplier’s telephone number.
          1099      If this box is checked, the system will track all of the checks written to the Supplier during a calendar year and a report will be available in Accounting / Accounts Payable / Issue Checks.
          Terms    The terms the Supplier affords the user, such as 30 Days Net,  2% 10 days, net 30, COD, etc.
          Fax    The Supplier’s fax number.
          Credit Limit  The amount of credit the Supplier affords the user.

           

          CONTACTS

           

          Name   The name of the supplier contact. 
          Title        The contact’s title at the supplier.
          Phone How to reach the Contact.
          Fax   How to reach the Contact.

              

                                                  

                             

          1.4.4.1.3.2. Remit To Tab

          Remit To tab field definitions

          Supplier Name The name of the Supplier.
          Default If this box is checked, it’s the default address where to send the Purchase Order.
          Remitting Address The list of available remittance addresses for this supplier.  Ther are no limitations to the number of addresses that can be added to this field.
          Remit To

          The name of the check payee.

          Address

          The mailing address where the remittance will be sent.

          Phone/Fax/E-Mail

          How to contact the remittance address personnel.

          Attention

          The contact at the remittance address.

          Buttons  Used to Add, Edit or Delete a remittance address.

           

          1.4.4.1.3.3. Confirm To Tab

          Confirm To tab field definitions

          Supplier Name The name of the Supplier.
          Default    If this box is checked, it’s the default address where to send the Purchase Order.
          Confirming Address   The list of available addresses where to send the Purchase Order for this supplier.
          Confirm To    The name of the Purchase Order recipient.
          Address   The mailing address where the Purchase Order will be sent.
          Phone/Fax/E-Mail  How to contact the confirming address personnel.
          Attention  The contact at the confirming address.  This is probably the name of the Sales Representative.
          Buttons    Used to Add, Edit or Delete a confirming address.
           

           

                                       

                                                  

                           

                                          

                                                

                                 

                                                

                                             

          1.4.4.1.3.4. Profile Tab

           

          Profile tab

          This tab is available for the user to make notes/comments about the Supplier.

           

          1.4.4.1.4. How To .... for Supplier Information
          1.4.4.1.4.1. Find Supplier Information
          Enter Material Planning/Purchase Setup/Supplier Information Module   

          The following screen will appear:

          Depress the Find action button, the following screen will appear:

           

          Select Supplier Name a list of supplier names will appear along with their Id:

          The user selects the Supplier name by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected supplier. 

           

          Select Supplier Id a list of supplier Ids will appear along with their names:

          The user selects the Supplier Id by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected Id. The information will populate the screen.

           

           

           

           

           

           

          1.4.4.1.4.2. Add Supplier Information

          Enter Material Planning/Purchase Setup/Supplier Information Module   

          The following screen will appear:

          To ADD a new Supplier, the user selects the Add action button, enter password, this enables the fields on the screen for data entry. 

          Enter the following fields: 

          The Supplier Number assigned to the Supplier. If automatic numbering assignment was selected in Number System Setup, it will be completed when the data is saved. If manual, it must be entered.

          The Supplier Name.

          A Prefix if desired.

          The Account Status, such as preferred, approved, etc. Select from the pulldown:  
          The Type of Supplier, such as Distributor, Manufacturer, etc.Select from the pulldown:  
          The Type of Purchase, such as inventory, MRO, or both.Select from the pulldown:   

          Enter the user’s Account Number with the Supplier.

          Enter the Phone Number of the Supplier.

          Check the box nex to (1099)  if the Supplier is to receive a 1099. 

          The Terms the Supplier has for the user, such as Net 30, 2% 10, COD, etc.....  Select from the pull down:

           

          Enter the Fax Number of the Supplier.
           
          Enter the Credit Limit established by the Supplier for the user.
           
          When this screen is viewed for an existing Supplier, Contacts entered in the Contacts Module will show for this Supplier.  This field is NOT editable from this module. 

          After completing the Supplier information screen, the user may tab (clicks on the next) to the Remit To screen.

          In this screen, the user defines the Supplier information for payment purposes.

          The Supplier Remit-To Directive buttons will now be active:

           
          This button allows the user to define multiple remit-to locations for the Supplier.
            This button allows the user to modify existing remit-to information about a Supplier. If more than one remit to address exists for a Supplier, the address highlighted is the one that will be opened for editing.
           
          This button allows the user to delete an existing remit-to record for a Supplier. 
           

          This button allows the user to save the modified bill-to information.

           

          This button will cancel any modifications made to the screen after the edit button has been pressed.

           
          This button is selected for the default Remit-To location.  The Remit to address with the default checked is the one that will automatically be placed in New Purchase Orders. However, the user still has the opportunity to change the remit to address in the Purchase Order module by selecting another address.   Note:  There must be one Default Remit To address.

          Enter information as follows:

          The name of the Supplier, Defaulted from the first screen, but may be over-written.

          A list of Remit-To addresses created for the Supplier, from which to choose for editing data.

          The name of the organization to which payment is to be sent. (It may be a different division.)

          Enter the Supplier Remit-To Address (may use two lines).

          Enter the City, State and Zip Code for the Supplier Remit-to Address.
           
          Enter the Supplier Country.
           
          Enter the phone number at the Supplier’s Remit-to Address.
           
          Enter the Fax Number of the Supplier’ Remit-to Address.
           
          Enter the e-mail address of the Supplier Remit-to Address.

          The Contact Name at the Remit-to address (if established in the Contacts Module).

          After completing the Remit To information screen, the user may tab (clicks on the next) to the Confirm-To screen.

          In this screen, the user defines the Supplier information for ordering purposes.

          This screen and fields are identical to the Remit-to screen, except that the information will be used for the mailing address of the Supplier.

          Pressing the Add action button will automatically fill the information from the Remit-to screen, if it has been completed.  All data may be edited and saved, or new data may be added to the database.  Note: There must be a default Confirm To address.

          After completing the Confirm-To screen, the user may tab (clicks on the next) to the Profile screen. 

          In this screen, the user defines the Supplier Profile notes for internal purposes. This screen is a memo field that may be used to record Supplier company information.

          Once all of the data entry is complete.  Depress the Save action button. You will be asked if you want to create another Supplier.

          1.4.4.1.4.3. Edit Supplier Information
           
          Find the Supplier Information you need to edit.
           
           
          Depress the Edit action button. All fields on the Supplier tab will be enabled for modification.
           
           
          All fields on the Remit To tab will be enabled for modification.
           
          Note:  The system will keep the address information (on existing PO's) that was actually selected at the time the PO was created.  If you add a new Supplier Remit To address and mark the new address as the Default.  The previously created PO's will still carry the original Remit to (ManEx cannot assume that the user wants to change all Remit To's across the board for already created and approved PO's).  The user will be required to edit each PO that the change affects and update the Remit to with the new default (any new PO's created will properly take the new default). 
           
          The Invoices created through the PO Reconciliation module also carry the original Remit to Address information.   Any invoice that already was created and remains on your AP Aging will need to be edited through the Manual AP Entry screen.    IF it was already released to the GL at that time, I don’t think that the Edit feature would be available.  If you are unable to edit the Remit to information via the Manual AP Entry, then you can control the Remit to information that will print on the AP Check, by creating a Manual check through the Check Maintenance screen.
           
          If you completely delete a Remit To address any previously created PO's will no longer have a Remit to address to refer to, therefore the remit to information on existing PO's will be blank.  The AP check module prints the checks per the Remit To information that is associated with each PO, so the address printed on the check will also be blank.   So, each PO that still has invoices residing within the AP Aging, will have to be edited and the Remit To information will have to be updated with the new address, if a Remit To address is deleted.    We would suggest that the person making changes to the Remit To Address information is careful before deleting one from the system.  You have to make sure that any record that has already been associated with that record has been processed through the system, and/or updated with the new address information.
           
           
           
          All fields on the Confirm To tab will be enabled for modification.
           
           
          All fields on the Profile tab will be enabled for modification.
           
           
           
          At the conclusion of the modification process, the user must either depress the Save action button or the Abandon changes action buttons. 
           
           
          1.4.4.1.5. Reports - Supplier Information

          To access the reports, depress the Print  button at the top of the screen.  The report screen will appear.

          Select the output you desire by selecting one of the output radial selections at the top left of the screen, Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

          Highlight the report desired and click on the option tab (if available) or Depress the OK button.   

           

          Supplier Information report

           

          Supplier Contact Information report

          Select the Supplier by highlighting the one you wish and depressing the > button  .If you want all suppliers, depress the >> button.

          Depress the OK button. 

            
           

          The following report will print:

           

          Supplier Contact Anniversay Report

          Select the Supplier by highlighting the one you wish and depressing the > button.  If you want all suppliers, depress the >> button.

          Enter the desired date range.

          Depress the OK button. 

          .

           

          The following report will appear:

           

           

           

          1.4.4.2. Supplier Contacts Information

          1.4.4.2.1. Prerequisites for Supplier Contact Information
          Prerequisites for Entering a New Contact: 

          After activation, "Supplier Contact Information" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
          System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.  

          Supplier Name

          The Contact must refer to a Supplier, which has been set up in the Supplier module.

          Picture File

          A picture of the contact may optionally be included as a memory jogger, but the picture must already be available to pickup in a picture format. 

           

          1.4.4.2.2. Introduction for Supplier Contact Information

          The Contact Module is used to record the details of supplier contacts. Contacts may be of any nature, but must be associated with a supplier. Manex provides the user with the ability to maintain both professional and personal details about a contact, including provision for personal tastes and affiliations. Contacts must be entered in this module if they are to be included in the supplier remit-to and confirm-to data fields at a later time. A contact who has moved to another supplier may have a new supplier assigned to him/her without having to re-enter their personal data.  

          1.4.4.2.3. Fields & Definitions for Supplier Contact Information
          1.4.4.2.3.1. Business Tab

          Fields & Defintions

          Last Name The last name of the contact being added or edited.
          First The first name of the contact being added or edited.
          MI The middle initial of the contact
          Status The status of the Supplier Contact, either Active or inactive.
          Nickname The nickname of the contact.
          Company The name of the Supplier.
          Title The title of the contact at the Supplier.
          Department The name of the department in which the contact is at the Supplier. 
          Phone The phone number and/or extension for the contact at the Supplier (may be different than the supplier main number).
          Cellular The Cellular phone number for the contact.
          Fax The FAX number for the contact at the Supplier (may be different than the supplier main number).
          Pager The Pager number for the contact.
          Internet or E-mail Address The E-Mail address of the contact.

           

          1.4.4.2.3.2. Personal Tab

          Fields & Definitions

           

          This button allows the user to load a photo for a Supplier contact. The photo file should be in the MANEX directory, and should be BMP or TIF format.

          Birthday

          The Supplier Contact Birth Date.

          Spouse's Name The Supplier Contact’s Spouse Name.
          Spouse's Birthday The Contact’s Spouse’s Birthday.
          Anniversary The Contact’s Anniversary.
          Home Phone

          The Contact’s Home Phone.

          Address The Contact’s Home Address  (two lines available).
          City

          The Contact’s Home City.

          State, Zip

          The Contact’s Home State and Zip code.

          Country

          The Contact’s home country.

           

          This set of buttons allow the user to record specific information that they may wish to retain about the supplier contact. It is divided into several categories to narrow the search for information later. Pressing any of these buttons brings up a memo window that may be added to, edited or canceled at will. 

          1.4.4.2.3.3. Lookup Tab

          Fields & Defintions

          Last Name The last name of the contact.
          First Name The first name of the contact.
          Company The company to which the contact belongs.
          Title The title of the contact at the supplier.
          Work Phone The phone number and/or extension of the contact at the supplier (may be different than the supplier main number).

          1.4.4.2.4. How To .... for Supplier Contact Information
          1.4.4.2.4.1. Find a Supplier Contact

          Depress the Lookup tab.  This screen allows the user to locate a supplier contact alphabetically.  Double click on the supplier contact name will bring the associated data into all screens without having to use the FIND action button. This screen will list all of the supplier contacts entered beginning with the Last Name, First Name, Company, Title and Contact Phone number (not the company phone number). 

           

          1.4.4.2.4.2. Add a Supplier Contact

          Enter Material Planning/Purchase Setup/Supplier Contacts Information Module  

          The following screen will appear:

           

          Depress the Add action button. The user will be prompted for an authorized password.

          Type in the last name of the contact being added. 

          Type in the first name of the contact being added. 

          Type in the middle initial of the contact.

          Select the status of the Customer Contact, either Active or Inactive.

          Type in the nickname of the contact.

          Select the company to which the contact belongs by depressing on the down arrow located on the right hand side of this field and highlighting the selection.

          Type in the title of the contact at the supplier.

          Type in the phone number and/or extension of the contact at the supplier (may be different than the supplier main number).

          Type in the FAX number of the contact at the supplier (may be different than the supplier main number).

          Type in the E-Mail address of the contact.

          Type in the department at the supplier in which the contact works.

          Type in a Cellular phone number for the contact.

          Type in a Pager number for the contact.

          After completing the Business information, the user may click on the Personal tab.  In this screen, the user may enter personal information relating to the contact.

           

          The Supplier Contact Directive buttons will now be active.

           

          This button allows the user to load a photo for a supplier contact. The photo file should be in the MANEX directory, and should be BMP or TIF format. Select the desired image. It will appear in the window.

           

          This set of buttons allow the user to record specific information that they may wish to retain about the customer contact. It is divided into several categories to narrow the search for information later. Pressing any of these buttons brings up a memo window that may be added to, edited or canceled at will.

          Type in the Supplier Contact Birth Date.

          Type in the Supplier Contact’s Spouse Name.

          Type in the Contact’s Spouse’s Birthday.

          Type in the Contact’s Anniversary.

          Type in the Contact’s Home Phone.

          Type in the Contact’s Home Address(two lines available).

          Type in the Contact’s Home City.

          Type in the Contact’s Home State and Zip code.

          Type in the Contact’s home country.

          Depress the Save action button to save changes, or depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes.

          1.4.4.2.4.3. Edit a Supplier Contact
           Enter Material Planning/Purchase Setup/Supplier Contacts Information  

          The following screen will appear:

           

          Depress the Find action button. The following selection screen will be displayed.  To find an existing Supplier Contact select one of the following:  Last Name, First Name, or Supplier.

          The user may exit the selection screen without a selection by selecting the X button.

           

           

          When the user elects to find Supplier Contact Information by Last Name, a screen appears listing contacts in alphabetical order by last name along with their first name and the Supplier Name. The user may elect to show only Active customers, or Inactive contacts. The user selects the contact by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected contact. 

           

          When the user elects to find Supplier Contact Information by First Name, a screen appears listing contacts in alphabetical order by first name along with their last name and the Supplier Name. The user may elect to show only Active customers, or Inactive contacts. The user selects the contact by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected contact. 

           

          When the user elects to find Supplier Contact Information by Customer, a screen appears listing Supplier Names in alphabetical order.  The user selects the supplier by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected customer. 

           
          Then a list of all of the selected supplier contacts are shown in alphabetical order by last name, along with their first name and supplier. The user may elect to show only Active contacts, or Inactive contacts. The user selects the contact by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected contact.   

          Once you have made your choice, the information will be displayed as follows:

          Depress the Edit action button.  Enter password.

          All fields available for editing will be enabled for modification. 

          At the conclusion of the modifications process, the user must Save changes, or Abandon changes using the action buttons. 

           Depress the Exit action button to return to the previous screen.

          1.4.4.2.5. Reports - Supplier Contact Information

          To access the reports, depress the Print  button at the top of the screen.  The report screen will appear.

          Select the output you desire by selecting one of the output radial selections at the top left of the screen, Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

          Highlight the report desired and click on the option tab (if available) or Depress the OK button.   

           
           

          Supplier Contact Information Report

          Choose to display Active, Inactive, or All Supplier contacts by depress the radial. 

          Select the Supplier by highlighting the one you wish and depressing the > button  .If you want all suppliers, depress the >> button.

          Depress the OK button. 

           

          The following report will print:

          Supplier Contact Anniversary Report

          Choose to display Active, Inactive, or All Supplier contacts by depress the radial. 

          Select the Supplier by highlighting the one you wish and depressing the > button.  If you want all suppliers, depress the >> button.

          Enter the desired date range.

          Depress the OK button. 

           

          The following report will print:

           

          1.4.4.3. Receiving And Billing Information

          1.4.4.3.1. Prerequisites for Receiving & Billing Information
          Prerequisites for Entering Receiving & Billing Information:    

          After activation, "Receiving Information" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

          Sales Tax Authority

          The Sales Tax Authority must be setup in System Setup /Sales Tax Authority Table 

          Ship Via

          The Ship Via must be set up in System Setup /Ship Via

          FOB

          The FOB must be setup in System Setup /FOB

          Ship Charge

          The Ship Charge must be setup in System Setup /Ship Charge

           

           

           

          1.4.4.3.2. Introduction for Receiving & Billing Information
          The Receiving & Billing Information Module is used to record the details of the user’s billing and receiving addresses.  
          1.4.4.3.3. Fields & Definitions for Receiving & Billing Information
          1.4.4.3.3.1. Receiving Address Tab

          Receiving Location This is the company name of the user’s receiving location.  If you have more than one receiving location, you must select at least one as the default.  You can choose among the selection of receiving addresses when you prepare the purchase order.
          User must select at least one as the default by checking this box
          Address

          This is the street address where you want your product delivered.  Two address lines are allowed.  The second line is for a suite number, etc. 

          City This is the City where you want your product delivered 
          State This si the State where you want your product delivered 
          Postal Code/Zip This is the Zip code where you want your product delivered 
          Country This is the country of the receiving location.
          Phone

          This is the phone number at the receiving location.

          Fax

          This is the fax number at the receiving location.

          Attention

          This is the name of the contact at the receiving location.

          Receiving Addresses All the Receiving addresses available are displayed in this box.

          1.4.4.3.3.2. Tax & Shipping Mode Tab

          Receiving Location

          This is the name of the company at the receiving location.  This carries over from the previous screen and can’t be edited.

          Ship Via This is the name of the carrier
          FOB This selection is for Free-on-board information.  This is the point when title passes 
          Ship Charge This selection is for Shipcharge selection.  This will indicate the shipcharge preference of the user.
          Account Number

          This is the user’s account number in those instances where the user will be paying the freight charges directly to the carrier and not to the supplier. 

          Delivery Time This is the time when the delivery is expected to be at the receiving location.
          Tax Exempt Number

          This is the user’s sales tax identification number for those purchases which are not subject to sales tax.  Please check with your state or local sales tax authorities for more information regarding Sales Tax exemptions since the laws vary from state to state.

          Sales Tax Authority/Tax % This is the sales tax authority and the Tax % is for those purchases which are subject to tax.

           

          1.4.4.3.3.3. Billing Information Tab

          Billing Address This is the company name of the user’s billing location.  If you have more than one billing location, you must select at least one as the default.  You can choose among the selection of billing addresses when you prepare the purchase order. 
          User must select at least one as the default by checking this box
          Address

          This is the street address where you want your billing mailed.  Two address lines are allowed.  The second line is for a suite number, etc. 

          City This is the City where you want your billing mailed. 
          State This si the State where you want your billing mailed. 
          Postal Code/Zip This is the Zip code where you want your billing mailded.
          Country This is the country of the billing location.
          Phone

          This is the phone number at the billing location.

          Fax

          This is the fax number at the billing location.

          Attention

          This is the name of the contact at the billing location. Example:  Accounts Payable.

          Receiving Addresses All the billing addresses available are displayed in this box.

          1.4.4.3.4. How To ..... for Receiving & Billing Information
          1.4.4.3.4.1. Add Receiving and Billing Information

          Enter Material Planning/Purchase Setup/Receiving and Billing Information Module   

          The following screen will appear:

          Depress the Add action Button.

          Type in all of the receiving information that you want to appear in your Purchase Order.  Type in the user’ s information as follows:

          The company name of the user’s receiving location. This is a required field.  If you have more than one receiving location, you must select at least one as the default.  You can choose among the selection of receiving addresses when you prepare the purchase order.

          Type in the street address where you want your goods delivered.  Two address lines are allowed.  The second line is for a suite number, etc.

          Type in the phone number at the receiving location.

          Type in the fax number at the receiving location.

          Type in the city, state and zip code.

          Type in the country of the receiving location.

          Type in the name of the contact at the receiving location.

          A sample of the completed screen appears below:

          Depress the Tax and Shipping Mode information.

          This screen has information for carrier name, FOB, tax status, etc.

          The name of the company at the receiving location carries over from the previous screen and can’t be edited.

          Type in the name of the carrier.  Refer to System Setup procedures for Ship Via to set up this information.  Depress the down arrow and the following screen will appear:

          Select the name of the carrier.

           

          This selection is for Free-on-board information.  This is the point when title passes.  Refer to System Setup procedures for FOB section to set up this information.  Depress the down arrow and the following screen will appear:

          Select the appropriate FOB point.

           

          Sales Tax

          The sales tax authority and the Tax % is for those purchases which are subject to tax.  Refer to System Setup procedures for Sales Tax Authority Table section to set up this information.  Depress the Add Tax button and the sales tax authority selections will appear:  

           Choose the one applicable to your company’s purchases.

           

          This selection is for Shipcharge selection.  This will indicate the shipcharge preference of the user.  Refer to System Setup procedures for Ship Charge to set up this information.  Depress the down arrow and the following screen will appear:

          Select the appropriate Ship charge. 

           

          Type in the user’s account number in those instances where the user will be paying the freight charges directly to the carrier and not to the supplier.

          Type in the time when the delivery is expected to be at the receiving location.

          Type in  the user’s sales tax identification number for those purchases which are not subject to sales tax.  Please check with your state or local sales tax authorities for more information regarding Sales Tax exemptions since the laws vary from state to state.

          A sample of the completed screen appears below:

          Depress the Save record action button to save changes, or depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes.

          Depress the Billing information tab.  This would be the address of the user’s Accounts Payable department.

          Depressing the tab and depressing the Add record button, will bring up the following screen:

          Type in the name of the user. This is a required field.  If you have more than one billing location, you must select at least one as the default.  You can choose among the selection of billing addresses when you prepare the purchase order. 

          Type in the street address where you want your billing mailed.  Two address lines are allowed.  The second line is for a suite number, etc.

          Type in the phone number at the billing location.

          Type in the fax number at the billing location.

          Type in the city, state and zip code.

          Type in the country of the billing location.

          Type in th name of the contact at the billing location, normally Accounts Payable, for example.

          The completed screen would appear as follows:

          Depress the Save record action button to save changes, or depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes.

          Depress the Exit action button and return to the previous screen

          1.4.4.4. Supplier Contract Management (OPTIONAL Module)

          1.4.4.4.1. Prerequisites for Supplier Contract Mgmt

          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks. For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase.    If user purchase's the Optional module -In-Plant Store (IPS) they will also receive the Supplier Contract Management module. These two modules go together.   To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com"contactus.aspx




          Prerequisites for Entering a New Supplier In-Store Contract:

          After activation, "Contract Purchase Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
          System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           

          Supplier

          In-Store supplier must be added in Supplier Information

          Stores Warehouse

          Add a Stores Warehouse in System Setup /Warehouse Setup 

          In-stores Inventory

          Add the In-Store item into Inventory Control Managment

          Materials in warehouse

          Move the materials into the warehouse through Inventory Handling

          1.4.4.4.2. Introduction for Supplier Contract Mgmt

          Supplier Contract Management is for recording the contract with the supplier for In-Store items.

           

          IPS inventory is received via Inventory Handling.  The IPS module is to keep inventory as Supplier owned but is recognized as being available for consumption by MRP and kitting.  When it is consumed by kitting or transfer, a Purchase Order is automatically generated to reimburse the Supplier for the material.   

          There are three uses for the IPS module: supplier owned but stored on-site, customer owned and stored on-site, and internally owned but obsolete parts that the user does not want to affect the books.In any of these situations a supplier must be established (this means that the customer must also be a supplier and the user must be a supplier if they have obsolete inventory in the IPS location). 
            

            

           
                  Tracking In-Store processing through MANEX:

           

          ·         Add the Supplier in the Supplier Information Module.

          ·         Set up a Stores Warehouse and the applicable G/L number in System Setup/Warehouse Setup module.

          ·         Add the in-stores item into the Item Master in the Inventory Control Mgmt module.

          ·         Move the materials into the warehouse using the Inventory Handling module.

          ·         Add the In-Store Contract in the Supplier Contract Mgmt module.

          ·         Pull a kit (only a kit shortage gets a P.O.)  within the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt module.

          ·         Add a Purchase Order and select In-Stores  within the PO Mgmt module. 
           
           
           
           
           
          1.4.4.4.3. Fields & Definitions for Supplier Contract Mgmt
          1.4.4.4.3.1. Supplier & Contract Part List Tab

          Supplier & Contract Part List field definitions 

          Supplier

          The Name of the Supplier with which the contract exists. 

          This button will be displayed in RED if there are notes regarding the contract.

          Part Number

          The number the user has assigned to the part.

          Rev The revision number applicable to the part Number. 
          Part Class

          The classification to which the part is assigned.

          Part Type

          The type within the classification to which the part is assigned. 

          Description

          The description of the part.

          Prim

          A check in the box indicates that the supplier is considered “Primary” and will be the first supplier consider for this part.

          Note

          This column is for notes regarding the Part Number.

          Contract Number

          The number of the contract.

          Quote Number

          The number of the quotation that the supplier made.

          Start Date

          The beginning of the contract period.

          Expiration Date

          The ending of the contract period.

          Quantity Limit

          The top limit on each In-Store purchase.

          UOM

          The unit of measure for the part.

           

          1.4.4.4.3.2. Manufacturer & Price List Tab

          Manufacturer & Price List tab field definitions

          For the Part Number highlighted in the Supplier & Contract Part List tab:

          Part Number

          The number the user has assigned to the part.

          Rev

          The revision number applicable to the part Number.

          Part Class

          The classification to which the part is assigned.

          Part Type

          The type within the classification to which the part is assigned.

          Description

          The description of the part.

          Manufacturer:

          Add/Delete Manufacturer (Buttons) These buttons are used to add or delete manufacturers 
          Manufacturer

          The name of the manufacturer.

          Manufacturer’s Part Number

          The number the manufacturer has assigned to the part.

          Price:

          Add/Delete Price (Buttons) These buttons are used to add or delete quantity price breaks.  
          Quantity Break
          This is the point where the user wants to stop using the price listed and have the system use the next price listed.  For Example if you have the following price breaks setup as in the screen above:  
          100  @  $2.685;   This price will be used for qty's 1-100
          300  @  $2.50;     This price will be used for qty's 101-300
          1,000  @  $2.00;  This price will be used for qty's 301- and UP

          If you have only one price break setup for example;     1 @  $5.65  this price will be used for qty's of 1 and UP. 
          Price Each The price for one unit at the quantity indicated on the left.

          1.4.4.4.3.3. Contract Part & Supplier List Tab

          Contract Part & Supplier List tab field definitions

          Part Number List:

          Part Number

          The number the user has assigned to the part.

          Rev

          The revision number applicable to the part Number.

          Part Class

          The classification to which the part is assigned.

          Part Type

          The type within the classification to which the part is assigned.

          Description The description of the part.
          Div

          If the user has the multi-plant version, the division number will display here.

          Supplier:

          For the part highlighted on the left, the Supplier(s) of that part will display.  The primary or “First Choice” supplier will have a check mark in the Prim column, as illustrated above. 

          1.4.4.4.4. How To .... for Supplier Contract Mgmt
          1.4.4.4.4.1. Find an In-Store Supplier Contract

          Enter Material Planning/Purchase Setup/Supplier Contract Management Module   

          The following screen will appear:

          To find an existing contract, depress the Find action button.

          The following selection screen will appear: 

           

          If the user selects to find by Contract Number, the following screen will appear:

          Type the Contract Number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click. 

           
          If the user selects to find by Supplier, the following selection screen will appear:

          Type the name of the Supplier into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

           

          The list of contracts for that Supplier will appear:

          Type the Contract Number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

           

          If the user selects to find by Part Number, the following selection screen will appear:

          Type the Part Number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click. 

           

          A list of contracts for that Part Number will appear: 

          Type the Contract Number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

           

          After the Find selection is completed, the information regarding that contract will populate the screen.

           

          1.4.4.4.4.2. Add a New In-Store Supplier Contract

          Enter Material Planning/Purchase Setup/Supplier Contract Management Module  

          The following screen will appear:

          To add a new In-Store Supplier Contract, depress the Add action button while in the Supplier & Part List tab.

          Enter the password.  A selection screen will appear:   

          If you select by Supplier Name, the following screen will appear:

          Type the Supplier into the red box or highlight the selection and double click.

           

          If you select by Supplier ID, the following selection screen will appear:

          Type the Supplier ID into the red box or highlight and double click. 

           

          Once the Supplier is selected, a list of parts will appear:

          Type the applicable Part Number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

          The part number selected will populate the screen, as displayed below:

           
           

          If you want to add a note regarding the supplier contract, depress the Supplier Contract Note button. Depress the Edit button. Type in the note.  Depress the Save button.  Depress the Exit button.

          If you want to add a note regarding the Part Number, click on the Note column. Depress the Edit button. Type in the note.  Depress the Save button.  Depress the Exit button.

          Type in the Contract number. Type in the Supplier’s Quote number.  Enter the start date for the contract.  Today’s date will default, but you can override it.  Type in the expiration date.  Type in the quantity limit (the highest quantity which can be purchased).

          Depress the Manufacturer & Price list tab.  The following screen will appear:

           

          Note that the Manufacturer and Manufacturer’s Part Number per the Inventory Master have populated the left hand of the screen.  While the Manufacturer is highlighted, depress the Add Price button on the right hand side of the screen.  Type in the first quantity break and the Price Each for that quantity.  Continue depressing the Add Price button on the right hand side of the screen, typing in the first quantity break and the Price Each for that quantity until ALL of the Pricing breaks under the contract are entered.

          If you want to add more manufacturers, depress the Add Manufacturer button on the left hand side of the screen.  (Note there must be more than one manufacturer listed in Inventory Control module).  If there are more manufacturers, the following selection screen will display: 

           

          Double click on your selection.  Add the Price breaks for this manufacturer, as detailed above.

          Depress the Save record action button. 

          NOTE:  Users MUST enter Qauntity Break and Price Each for every manufacturer listed or they will receive the following message and will unable to Save the record until ALL Quantities and Pricing breaks have been entered for the part highlighted.



          Depress the Contract Part & Supplier List tab:

          Note that the Part Number you selected in the Supplier & Contract Part List tab is listed in the Part Number list.  Highlight that Part Number.  The primary supplier for that part will display, as illustrated above.

          1.4.4.4.4.3. Edit an In-Store Supplier Contract

          Find the Supplier contract you wish to Edit.

          Depress the Edit action button.  Type in the password. You’ll be able to add a Contract Note, change the Contract Number, Quote Number, Start Date, Expiration Date, Quantity Limit, Quantity Break and Price Each.

          Depress the Save action button to save your changes, or depress the Abandon changes button to abandon changes.

          1.4.5. In-Plant Store (IPS) (OPTIONAL Module)

          1.4.5.1. Prerequistes for In-Store PO
          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase.   There are three uses for this module: supplier owned but stored on-site, customer owned and stored on-site, and internally owned but obsolete parts that the user does not want to affect the books.  To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com"contactus.aspx

          After activation, "Purchase Order Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

          Prerequisites Required for Entering an In-Store PURCHASE ORDER

          Supplier The Supplier database must be established
          Part number in Item Master The part number must exist for a product or part.
          Purchasing Approvals A list of employees and their approval authorizations must exist in the Purchase Setup module. 
          Supplier Contract The contract with the supplier must be set up in the Supplier Contract Management module

          Optional Prerequisites for Entering an In-Store PURCHASE ORDER

          Contacts Contacts can be used for identifying seller.
          Tax Authority If purchasing taxable items, must be established in System Setup and in Receiving & Billing.
          Units of Measure If purchase units are different than stocking units

          1.4.5.2. Introduction for In-Plant Store
          Internal In-Plant Store Explanation
           
          The IPS module is to keep inventory as Supplier owned but is recognized as being available for consumption by MRP and kitting. When it is consumed by kitting or transfer, a Purchase Order is automatically generated to reimburse the Supplier for the material.


          This inventory type can be used to store all excess inventory caused by the minimum purchase requirement on parts for a particular turnkey job, but for which the customer does not want returned, and the User wishes not to count the inventory as assets as these parts may not be used in the future.  The leftover parts can be stored in this inventory for possible future use and does not have to be treated as regular internal inventory for the accounting purpose.  The system allows all in-store transactions to happen without any contract entered in the system until the user is ready to create an In-Store PO.

          There are three uses for this module: supplier owned but stored on-site, customer owned and stored on-site, and internally owned but obsolete parts that the user does not want to affect the books.  In any of these situations a supplier must be established (this means that the customer must also be a supplier and the user must be a supplier if they have obsolete inventory in the IPS location).

           

          In-Store purchasing overview:  In-Store is the situation where the Supplier has placed raw materials in the user’s warehouse.  The Supplier still owns the raw materials.  When the user is ready to use the Supplier’s raw materials, he/she issues the parts to a kit then creates an In-Store Purchase Order.  For In-Store POs, the user may select by Supplier or by Part Number.  Then the user may find records according to the selection.  Once found, the user may create a PO for the In-Store Consumption.  In-Store Purchasing also includes receiving. 


          This module also provides Instore designation for part numbers with a "MAKE" source.  This will allow users to utilize inventory handling to add items sourced as MAKE parts to enter inventory into the IPS module.  Then, as they are needed, be able to kit to work orders those subassemblies from IPS.  There would be no GL records created when the material is moved into IPS via Inventory Handling.  But on issue to kit, a PO will be generated, for the amount established in the IPS Contracts, and the Kit (along with WIP) will be charged for the standard cost of the assembly. 
           

          Tracking In-Store processing through MANEX:

           

          ·         Add the Supplier in the Supplier Information module.

          ·         Set up a Stores Warehouse and the applicable G/L number in System Setup/Warehouse Setup module.

          ·         Add the in-stores item into the Item Master in the Inventory Control Mgmt module.

          ·         Move the materials into the warehouse using the Inventory Handling module.

          ·         Add the In-Store Contract in the Supplier Contract Mgmt module.

          ·         Pull a kit (only a kit shortage gets a P.O.)  within the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt module.

          ·         Add a Purchase Order and select In-Stores  within the PO Mgmt module. 

           

           

           

          1.4.5.3. Fields & Definitions for In-Plant Store

           

          Sort By Depress the radial to Sort the In-Store items by Supplier or Part Number 
          On/Off Check this box to select the Part to Create In-Store PO  
          Supplier Name of Supplier (Defaulted from Supplier Contract Mgmt)
          Issue Date Date issued to the In-Store Warehouse (Defaulted from the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt )
          Used By Displays Work Order part is being used for (Defaulted from the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt
          Part Number  Part Number of In-Store item  (Defaulted from the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt )
          Rev Revision of In-Store item  (Defaulted from the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt)
          Quantity Quantity required for WO from the In-Store Warehouse  (Defaulted from the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt)
          Class In-Store item Class  (Defaulted from the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt)
          Type In-Store item Type    (Defaulted from the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt)
          Description In-Store item Description   (Defaulted from the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt)
          Part Mfgr In-Store item Part Mfgr   (Defaulted from the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt)
          MPN In-Store item Part Mfgr Part Number   (Defaulted from the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt)
          Cost each Cost each for In-Store item (Defaulted in from Supplier Contract Mgmt
          Extended Amnt Extended Amount for In-Store item 
          Contract No Supplier Contract Number assigned to In-Store item (Defaulted from Supplier Contract Mgmt) All parts with same contract number will be grouped together on one In-Store PO for the same supplier.  For further detail see Article #3438 .
          Quote No. Quote number assigned to In-Store item  (Defaulted from Supplier Contract Mgmt )
          UOM Unit of measure for In-Store item   (Defaulted from ICM
          PUOM Purchase unit of measure for In-Store item  (Defaulted from ICM
          Package Packaging for In-Store item  (Defaulted from ICM
          Buyer Buyer assigned to In-Store item  (Defaulted from ICM
          PO No PO number assigned to In-Store item 
          Div Division assigned to In-Store item 

          1.4.5.4. How To ........ for In-Plant Store
          1.4.5.4.1. Set-Up for an In-Store PO

          Set-Up for In-Store PO's

          Item must exist in the Inventory Control Management with an In-Store warehouse location. 
           
          Create an Inventory Receipt in the system for the In-Store location using the Inventory Handling module. Since the Receipt was made to a In-Store location there will be no Accounting transaction created at this time.
           
           

          Set-up the Supplier Contract Information. 
           
           
           
           Pull the parts to a Work Order Kit. 



          At this time the following Accounting Inventory Issue Transactions will be created within the system.  
           
           
           
          The next Step is to Create the In-Store PO
           
           
           

           

          1.4.5.4.2. Creating an In-Store PO
          Enter the PO Management Module.

          The following screen will appear:
           



          Depress the Add a record button.

          Select In-Store PO 

          The following screen will appear. Sort By: Supplier or Part Number by clicking on the appropriate radial.


          If you Sort By Part Number, an entry box will appear, type in the Part Number and the Revision character, if applicable.



          If you Sort By Supplier, the following screen will appear, highlight the supplier of choice.Depress the > button. If you want all of the Suppliers, depress the >> button.



          Depress the
          Find Record button to find records according to the selection. The bottom of the screen will populate. You may sort by Div/PartNo., Supply/Contr, Part Mfgr, or Used By; by depressing the appropriate button. 
           

          Depress the On/Off button to check all of the selections. Or, check them individually.

          Depress the Copy button. This will create a list of Purchase Orders for In Store Items, which will go directly to the default printer.   The temporary purchase order number will appear on the report.
          Depress the Exit button.  This will create the IPS PO.  Depress exit button again and it will pull up the IPS record created. The system will NOT allow the user to edit an IPS PO. 
          Note:  In-Store PO's group the parts by Contract number per Supplier.  For further detail see Article #3438 .

            

          The user will then need to review the IPS PO created and approve the purchase order.

          Pressing the APPROVAL button in the Purchase Order module will ask for the user’s password.

          The user must enter a password that has been authorized to approve the dollar amount of the order.  Entry of an authorized password and approval inactivates the 1st approval button and places the initials of the person approving the order next to the approval button.   If the user is requiring two approvals, the process is repeated for the second approval. Once the PO has received it's final approval a Purchase Order number will be assinged and the PO Status marked as closed.  At this point the normal Un-Reconciled Receipt account transaction will be created within the system. Then from this point on the Accounting transaction follow the normal flow through the system.

          Returning In-Plant Inventory to Supplier

          If the user has in-store items, which they want to return to Vendor without any impact on accounting or PO (like obsolete parts) they can return these parts using the Inventory Handling module.
           
          Depress the Issue tab.  Depress the Add record button.  Enter Part Source, Part Number, Issued Qty, Issue Account Description, Issued To, Mfgr, then select the In-Store warehouse.   Check the "In-Store Return 2 Vendor" box.  (Note:  This box will only be visible if the In-Store warehouse is selected).   If this box is checked no purchase order will be created and there will be no impact on accounting.   

           

           

           

          Depress the Save button to Save the changes, depress the Abandon changes button to abandon changes.

           

           

          1.4.5.5. Reports - In-Plant Store
          1. To access reports, depress the Print at the top of the screen. The  report screen will appear:
           

          2. Select the output you desire by selecting one of the output radial selections at the top left of the screen, Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

          3. Highlight the report desired and depress the OK button.

          • Consumption Report by Devision 
          • Consumption Report by Part Mfgr and Mfgr Part # 
          • Consumption Report by Supplier and Contract #  

          1.4.5.6. FAQs- In-Plant Store
          Facts and Questions for the In-Plant Store
          1.5. Production
          1.5.1. Shop Floor Tracking by Work Order
          1.5.1.1. Prerequisties for SFT by WO
          Prerequisites Required for Shop Floor Tracking:
           
          After activation, "Work Order Shop Tracking" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           

          Work Order

          The SHOP FLOOR TRACKING must refer to a Work Order, which includes the part numbers and description of the product being built.

          Note:  If the "Status" field in the Work Order is set to Manufacturing Hold, the user will NOT be able to transfer product for that Work Oder.   If the “Status” field in Sales Order or RMA is set to Administrative Hold, the user may finish transfering the product, but a Packing List can not be issued.

          Routing

          The Routing must exist for the product, which includes the work centers and activities for the product being built.

          Optional Prerequisites for Shop Floor Tracking:

          Defect Codes

          Required if Inspection data is to be entered.

          Product Data Mgmt

          Work Instructions should be established if the user wishes to utilize setup and work instructions.

          Serial Numbering

          The System Setup must define whether or not serialization is required for the part type.

          Time & Attendance

          User Work Shift information and Time & Attendance features must be installed before you will be able to use the “Time Log” button within the Shop Floor Tracking module.

          1.5.1.2. Introduction for SFT by WO

          The Shop Floor Tracking Module is used to record detailed transactions of all of the user’s Work In Process (WIP) activity.  This screen is a critical piece in the communication process.  This allows production to update the system as products move through the shop floor.  Production can add notes and indicators to identify current issues and delays.  This information is readily available for program managers and others so they have important information when it is needed and without chasing it down in production.

          From within this module, the following functions are available, depending on the user’s configuration:

          Time Log

          The Time Card module has two functions:1) to enter the worker coming in at the first of the shift and exiting for the day, and 2) to track time spent by each worker on each Work Order (Job), by date and time.This information will forward to the Time and Attendance module.

          Inspection

          A function for entering quality inspection results. Data may be used to track line quality based on customer, work center, product, location, etc. All Statistical Quality Control information and graphics are based on data entered here.

          WC Check List

          A list of items defined to be checked as completed for the work order and work center. The users visit this screen, identify the items completed, and enter their password, marking the check list with their initials and date completed.

          Transfer

          Ths is the key function of this module. This is where the users identify the number of products being transfered from one work center to another during the production of the work order.

          Setup

          When the Work Center Activity Setup and Run is entered in System Setup, clicking in this area will provide the user with both text and pictorial instructions for setting up the work center.

          Tool/Fixture

          Depressing this button will display any Tool/Fixture information which has been assigned to the Product through the Routing or Product Data Management (PDM) Module.

          Work Instructions

          When the PDM module is used, clicking in this area will provide the user with both text and pictorial instructions for processing the product in the work center.

          Special Instructions

          When the PDM module is used, clicking in this area will provide the user with both text and pictorial instructions for the product and work center.

          Standard Specifications

          Identifies standard specifications relating to this product per the Standard Process Specification module.

          Documentation

          Provides a list of documents relating to the product being assembled. Displays the document number, revision, document date, and notes about the document.

          WC BOM

          Will list all part number assigned to the specific Work Center within the BOM module.  It will also allow the user to view the entire BOM if desired.

          ECO

          This screen will list the detailed information pulled forward from the ECO Control Management module.

          Deviation

          This screen will list the detailed information pulled forward from the ECO Control Management module pertaining to any approved Deviations for the selected product.  

          Quality Info

          Will display the Quality information for the selected Work Center based on the information entered within the Inspection module.

          WIP Status

          Show all the open work orders for this product and show where the quantities are in the shop floor

          User Defined Button

          This is an outside call program that ManEx has implemented into the system. The Users can have their own program to run when they scan their serial number inside of shop floor tracking by using the “User defined” button. Within the Outside Program Call Setup module, the user will have the ability to change the button name of the “User Defined” button and select which program (EXE) they want to run after the users scans specific Serial Numbers.

          Work Order Note

          Any notes entered for the work order on the shop floor tracking screen will cause the button to turn Red. Any comments in this area will be visible to all work centers which are included in the work order routing.

          Work Order / Work Center Note

          Any notes entered specifically for the work order and the work center being viewed will cause the button to turn Red, calling the user’s attention to review notes that are applicable to the order. This button is sensitive to the work center being highlighted on the shop floor tracking screen.

          Work Center Note

          Any notes entered for the work center highlighted on the shop floor tracking screen will cause the button to turn Red. Any comments in this area will be visible to all products which include the work center in the routing.

          Xfer History

          This button lists the history of transfers.

          Serial No History

          This button will display Transfer History and Defect History by specific serial numbers.

          Feedback

          This is simply a note screen that may be used to record information about the product during the course of manufacturing.

          For further detail of these functions see Article #3107

          1.5.1.3. Fields & Definitions for SFT by WO
          1.5.1.3.1. Work Order Shop Floor Tracking
           
           
          Work Order Shop Floor Tracking Fields and Definitions
           

          This Text/characters turns RED if an ECO  (Engineering Change Order) is Added and Saved. When the ECO is approved, this button characters turns back to gray. This criteria is based on the product number and no revision number as the ECO will change the revision number.

          This feature has been added because of the importance of the users needing to know that an ECO is being initiated by the production personnel.  This will help prevent product being built according to the original instructions and cut down on any additional rework or schedule delays.
          Work Order The Selected Work Order
          Sales Order The Sales Order linked to the Selected Work Order 
          Customer    The Customer Name associated with the Selected Work Order

          Wk Ord Qty

          The number of units for the Selected Work Order
          Balance The remaining balance of the parts to be delivered for the work order   
          Due Date The due date for the first shipment remaining to be shipped in the work order (ignores due dates that have already been shipped).
          Part Number      
          The part number of the assembly being built for the work order. Next to the part number is a space for revision
          Description This field will contain the Class, Type and Description of the assembly being built for this work order.  
          Selected Work Center/Activity This area displays the work center (or activity) from which each of the action buttons below are launched.It is selected by placing the cursor (by mouse or tab) on the work center (or activity) of interest. 
          ID The ID or abbreviation established for the work center. 
          Work Center The Work Center's assigned to the MAKE part in Work Order Traveler Setup 
          Qty

          The quantity of parts pertaining to the work order that are currently in the work center.

          Panels
          This field will contain the number of panels in the work center (if the user tracks panels, based on conditions in the Shop Floor Tracking Defaults). 
           
          See Article #3107 for the Directive Buttons fields and definitons 
           
           
          1.5.1.3.1.1. Directive Buttons
          SFT by WO Directive Buttons
           
          The Time Card module has two functions:1) to enter the worker coming in at the first of the shift and exiting for the day, and 2) to track time spent by each worker on each Work Order (Job), by date and time. This information will forward to the Time and Attendance module. 
          See Article #1769 for detail on entering Quality Inspection results using this function.  Data may be used to track line quality based on customer, work center, product, location, etc. All Statistical Quality Control information and graphics are based on data entered here.
          Depressing this button will display a list of items defined to be checked as completed for a specific Work Center.  The users visit this screen, identify the items completed, and enter their password, marking the check list with their initials and date completed. For further information see Article #3552.
          The key function of this module. This is where the users identify the number of products moved from one work center to another during the production of the work order.  For further detail see Article #857 .
          When the Work Center Activity Setup and Run is entered, clicking in this area will provide the user with both text and pictorial instructions for setting up the work center.
          Depressing this button will display any Tool/Fixture information which has been assigned to the Product through the Routing or Product Data Management (PDM) Module.  NOTE:  For this button to be enabled user MUST have the "Tool/Fixture Released" box checked on the Check List Title screen. 
          When the Product Data Management module is used, clicking in this area will provide the user with both text and pictorial instructions for processing the product in the work center.  NOTE:  For this button to be enabled user MUST have the "PDM Released" box checked on the Check List Title screen. 
          When the Product Data Management module is used, clicking in this area will provide the user with both text and pictorial instructions for the product and work center.  The Special Instructions are not printed on the travelers.   NOTE:  For this button to be enabled user MUST have the "PDM Released" box checked on the Check List Title screen. 
          Identifies standard specifications relating to this product per the Standard Process Specification module.  NOTE:  For this button to be enabled user MUST have the "PDM Released" box checked on the Check List Title screen. 
          Provides a list of documents relating to the product being assembled. Displays the document number, revision, document date, and notes about the document.  NOTE:  For this button to be enabled user MUST have the "PDM Released" box checked on the Check List Title screen. 
          This screen will list all part number assigned to the specific Work Center within the BOM module.  It will also allow the user to view the entire BOM if desired.
           
          This screen will list the detailed information pulled forward from the ECO Control Management module.
           
          This screen will list the detailed information pulled forward from the ECO Control Management module pertaining to any approved Deviations for the selected product.
          Will display the Quality information for the selected Work Center based on the information entered within the Inspection module.
           
          Show all the open work orders for this product and show where the quantities are in the shop floor.
           
          This is an outside call program that ManEx has implemented into the system. The Users can have their own program to run when they scan their serial number inside of shop floor tracking by using the “User defined” button. Within the System Setup/Outside Program Calls Setup module, the user will have the ability to change the button name of the “User Defined” button and select which program (EXE) they want to run after the users scans specific Serial Numbers.
          Any notes entered for the work order in the Shop Floor Tracking screen will cause the button to turn Red. Any comments in this area will be visible to all work centers which are included in the work order routing.
          Any notes entered specifically for the work order and the work center being viewed will cause the button to turn Red, calling the user’s attention to review notes that are applicable to the order. This button is sensitive to the work center being highlighted on the shop floor tracking screen.
          Any notes entered for the work center highlighted on the shop floor tracking screen will cause the button to turn Red. Any comments in this area will be visible to all products which include the work center in the routing.
          This button allows the user to view the history of product transfer from one work center to another.  NOTEIf the product has changed revisions from the ECO module, the SFT module will see it as a different product and no longer display the Transfer History information on screen for the old revision.  (See Article #3401 for more detail).

          Note:  If product is serialized the transfer history screen will list each product individually, treating each serial numbered product as its own seperate part for tracking purposes, as displayed in the screen below: 



          If product is not serialized the xfer history will list qty's as they are transfered, as displayed in the screen below:  

          This button will display Transfer History and Defect History by specific serial numbers.
           
           
          This is simply a note screen that may be used to record information about the product during the course of manufacturing, and is specific to the work center and work order.
           
           
          1.5.1.3.2. Transfer Screen
           
          From Work Center Highlighted that product is currently in
          To Work Center that product being transferred to 
          WC/A The user may elect to transfer material within work centers (WC) or within activities (A) by pressing the appropriate radio button 
          Qty of product being transfered
          Panels Number of Panels (if applicable)
          Traveler

          Whenever a product is moved from one work center to another, the user has the option to print a move ticket (like a traveler) for each transaction. This move ticket may be printed and accompany the material to the next work center, identifying the work order, product date, work center, etc. The user may choose to turn this feature off by selecting the “Printer OFF” button in the SFT Defaults setup . If the printer is turned on (“Printer ON”), then a sheet with the details will be printed for every product movement.   

          If the user chooses to print move tickets, then they may also choose whether or not work instructions and work order notes are included in the printing within the SFT defaults setup.

          Labels

          Whenever a product is moved from one work center to the Work Center called FGI (Finished Goods Inventory), the user has the option to print a move ticket (like a traveler) for each transaction. This move ticket may be printed and accompany the material to finished goods, identifying the work order, product date, work center, etc. The user may choose to turn this feature off by selecting the “Printer OFF” button in the SFT Defaults setup. If the printer is turned on (“Printer ON”), then a sheet with the details will be printed for every product movement.

          Pop up printer selection dialog If this box is checked the system will not print directly to the default printer, it will bring up the Printer dialog box and allow the user to select which printer to send the traveler to.  The user may choose to turn this feature off by selecting the "OFF” button in the SFT Defaults setup
          Add any Foot Notes that you would like printed on the Traveler.  Note:  These notes are not retained in any tables and are only temporary.
          1.5.1.4. How To ..... for SFT by WO
          1.5.1.4.1. Finding A Work Order


          To Enter the Shop Floor Tracking by Work Order Module depress Production/Shop Floor Tracking by Work Order

          The Main Screen will appear.


          Depress the Find Button displays the following sequences:

           

          Select the desired Work Order record.

          The Shop Floor Tracking screen is then populated with the appropriate data.

           

          The Products will be listed in alpha-numerical order, along with the Revision, Class, Type and Description.

          Select the desired Product Number.

           

          1.5.1.4.2. Shop Floor Tracking - Transfer

          Find the desired Work Order record within the system.

          Highlight the current Work Center where quantity is displayed, as illustrated: 


           

          Depress the “Transfer” button. The system will prompt for a password. The following dialogue box will be displayed.

          The user may elect to transfer material within work centers (WC) or within activities (A) by pressing the appropriate radial button on the screen.

          Manex will determine the next area to transfer product based on the product routing, and enter the location in the “To:” field.

          The user may elect to change this location by pressing the down-arrow button next to the field and selecting a different location.(NOTE: The user MUST have "Skip rights" or "Supervisor rights"  setup within the Security module in order to skip work center locations, or move product backwards)
           
           
           

          Next, Manex lists the number of products at the current location. The user may move all items, or select the quantity to be moved. This may be done by simply over-writing the quantity or by using the “arrows” to raise or lower the quantity shown.

          The user may also elect to print a traveler to accompany the parts at this time. Once the Print Traveler box is checked, a Footnote button appears, as shown.   Any Footnotes that a person enters within this screen is just temporary and is only printed on the Traveler report
           
          The user may also elect to print a label to accompany the parts to material to finished goods, identifying the work order, product date, work center, etc.
           
          If the user elects to have the “Pop up printer Selection dialog” marked. The system will not print directly to the default printer. It will then bring up the Printer dialog box and allow the user to select which printer to send the traveler to.
           

          Depressing the Footnote button will bring up a note screen.

          Depress the Edit button, Type in the footnote. Depress the Save button. Depress the Exit button.

          Depress the OK button. The material will transfer and the Traveler will go directly to the default printer. (This report requires that the user have the bar code font available).

          If a balance still remains in the selected work center then the system will prompt the user if they would like to transfer to a different Work Center.

          Yes – will bring up the Transfer Material screen again.

          No – will bring you back to the regular Shop Floor Tracking module.

           

          If the product is included in an active Cycle count, or Physical Inventory count, the following message will appear after depressing the OK button on the transfer screen anud user  will not be allowed to transfer product until the count has been completed and posted.



          If user is transfering product into FGI and the Work Order has any item(s) that has short qty > 0 and the "Ignore Kit" box is NOT checked the following message will popup giving the user the option to continue moving the product or not.   





          Transferring Serialized product
           
          If the work station being used to transfered serialized material is assigned to use a default work center in Production Work Center/Activity Setup module, when the user first opens the module, the module will use the default work center assigned for this workstation, if the transfer is "FROM" a different work center other than the default and user is NOT a supervisor or has the  option "Allow Changing Default Work Center for Serial Number Transfer" box checked within the Security module, they will receive the following message:

           
          When user depresses "OK"  a supervisor approval is required to continue.  After supervisor’s password is entered, the default work center will be changed to the one that the supervisor entered password for.   For example:  the workstation is assigned to use “TU” as default work center, now if user chooses to use “AI” to transfer, the system will ask for supervisor’s password, if user cancels the password, the default work center will still be “TU”, but if the supervisor enters his/her password on this machine, the default work center will be changed to “AI”.  If now the user tried to transfer from “TU” again, the system will ask for supervisor’s password again.  If user exits the module and come back, the default work center will be “TU” again.

          If the user is tracking by serial numbers, and if the user is transferring a lesser quantity than displayed, Manex will display a screen from which to select the serial number(s) to be moved in the transaction.

          The user may select one or more serial numbers to match the quantity being transferred, and then press the OK button.

          The user must select the proper number of serial numbers or the transaction will be cancelled. 

          Since less is being transferred, the following message will appear:

          Yes – will bring up the Transfer Material screen again.

          No – will bring you back to the regular Shop Floor Tracking module.

           

           

          Discussion on the Accounting Entries

          If the user also has accounting installed, then the appropriate journal entries will forward to the Accounting “Release to General Ledger” screen. Briefly, assuming that the user has the material cost set up in the Inventory Control Item master, then when the product reaches the Work Center “Finished Goods Inventory”, the entry will be to debit Finished Goods Inventory (or the warehouse home general ledger number of the product) and to credit WIP .If the product ended up in the Work Station “Scrap”, then the debit would be to the default scrap general ledger account, as set up in the Accounting Set Up.

          Configuration Variance

          If the Material Cost per the product was not equal to the sum of the standard costs per the BOM components, then a configuration variance will be created.

          Please refer to the “Wip Value" Article #913 for further explanation.

          1.5.1.4.3. Use Work Center CheckList within SFT Module

          Create a Routing within the WO Traveler Setup module for Product.  For further detail see Article #850
           
           
          Create a Checklist for a Specific WC within the PDM module.  For further detail see Article #2824 .
           
           
          Create a Work Order for the product within the Work Order module.  For further detail see Article #1815.
           
           
          The Traveler Released box within the WO Traveler Setup MUST be checked.
           
          The  Tool/Fixture Released box and the PDM Released box within the PDM module MUST be checked. 
           
          The kit must be Released  and the  Kit Complete box within the Kitting module MUST be checked. 
           
          Transfer  product through SFT when product reachs the Work Center with the checklist the "WC Check List" butoon will be displayed in Red (as displayed below).
           
           
          Click on the "WC Check List" button and the check list will appear (as displayed below):  
           
           
          User must then review the list and check the box when task has been completed and their initials, time and date will default in (as displayed below):  Note: This check List is for reference only and WILL allow the users to transfer product to the next Work Center if not all items have been checked off.  
           
           
          Once all the boxes have been checked within the Work Center CheckList user may complete the transfers.  Note: This checklist is for users to check if they do all the necessary task, but it does NOT enforce the user to check all items before the user can transfter to next WC.
          1.5.1.4.4. Enter Defect Data Entry
          Follow the Steps in Article #1769 to move product by using the Defect Entry Module.
          1.5.1.5. Reports - SFT by WO

          To obtain reports, depress the Report button.  The following screen will appear:

          JOB TRAVELER REPORT

          Highlight the “Job Traveler” report. Make the desired selections in the Detail Report Section.

          Note:  The Work Instruction may not appear in the Traveler if the user prints it to an Excel Worksheet file. Some of the reports are quite complex, with multiple relationships and filters. In this instance, the Work Instructions are in a different data base than the routing and therefore will not be available.

          Then depress the Options tab. The following screen will appear:

          Select the desired radial selection:Customer, Product or Work Order.   Select the desired Customer and Work Order by using the Down Arrows next to the fields.

          If you do not want time in decimal format, uncheck the box.   The following reports will be displayed:

          SERIAL NUMBER LIST FOR WORK ORDER BY WC/ACTIVITY REPORT

          Highlight the “Serial Number List for Work Order by WC/Activity” report.   Depress the Options tab.   The following screen will appear:

          Select the desired radial selection:Customer, Product or Work Order.    Select the desired Customer and Work Order by using the Down Arrows next to the fields.

          Highlight the Work Center and depress the > button.  If you want all work centers, depress the >> button.   The leading zero's for SN will be removed from Report. 

          The following report is available:

          WORK ORDER LIST CONNECTED TO THE SERIAL NUMBER REPORT

          Highlight the “Work Order List Connected to the Serial Number” Report.  Note:that this report is a View screen only – no report will be generated as an output.

          Depress the Options tab.  Type in the Serial Number and the following will display.

          Hitting the OK button will bring you back to the Shop Floor Tracking module.

          TRANSFER HISTORY REPORT

          Highlight the “Transfer History” report.

          Depress the Options tab. The following screen will appear:

           

          Select the Work Center by highlighting and depressing the > button.  If all Work Centers are desired, depress the >> button. If you do not want time in decimal format, uncheck the box.

          Enter in the desired Date Range.   Leading zero's for SN will be removed from report.    The following Report will be displayed.

          WORK ORDER WORK CENTER NOTES REPORT

          Highlight the “Work Order Work Center Notes” report.

          Depress the Options tab.  The following screen will appear:

           

          All Work Centers are selected by default.   If you wish to deselect any Work Centers use the < Button.    The following report will be displayed:

          SERIAL NUMBER TRACKING HISTORY REPORT

          Highlight the “Serial Number Tracking History” report. 

          Depress the Options tab.The following screen will appear:

          Select the desired radial button:  Single Entry or Range.    Enter Serial Number.  Leading zero's for SN will be removed from report.

          The following report will be displayed:  This report will gather transfer history and defect history for those serial numbers that have been linked to more than one work order and display the transfer history and defect history for all those work orders.   

           

          1.5.1.6. FAQ's - SFT
          Facts and Questions for the Shop Floor Tracking  Modules
          1.5.1.7. Test & Repair (T & R) (OPTIONAL Module)
          1.5.1.7.1. Prerequisites for the T & R Module


          The Test & Repair is actually a separate OPTIONAL module, but has been included into the Defect Entry screen for ease of use for the operators.

          After activation, Work Order Shop Tracking, Defect Code Entry, and Test & Repai access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
          Security module.  Users with “supervisor’s rights” will automatically have access.


          To use Test & Repair Management module, Serial Numbering is REQUIRED.  This information is entered using the Work Order Management Serial Number Control module.  
          1.5.1.7.2. Introduction for the T & R Module

          Test & Repair Management (T&R) has been designed to capture testing results and failure information such as: In-circuit Testing, Sub-Assembly Functional Testing and System Final Assembly Testing.

          Once this information has been entered this will allow the users the ability to see the Serial Number History and view all of the testing and repair results as well as when it had been shipped to customers.  It will also keep track of any associated returns or warranty work that had been done against this particular Serial Number, continuing history as long as the unit is in service. 

           

          1.5.1.7.3. Fields & Definitions for the T & R Module
          1.5.1.7.3.1. Test & Repair Tab
          Test & Repair Screen Field Definitions
           
          The Test & Repair is actually a separate OPTIONAL module, but has been included into the Defect Entry screen for ease of use for the operators.


           
           

          Product Number

          The internal number assigned to the assembly.

          Rev

          The revision number associated with the Product Number.

          Product ID

          This field is no longer used and will be left blank.

          Description

          The description of the Product Number.

          If the component part is to be replaced, this button will be available to view and print the request for replacement.  This request/form should be sent to the stockroom showing them that replacements are needed for the components identified as failing inspection or test.  If the part is issued, it will be charged to the work order. 
           
           
          Work Order Number

          The number of the work order which was inspected.

          Serial Number

          The serial number of the assembly which failed inspection.

           

          These three buttons are for viewing notes on the topics of diagnosis of failure, instruction for reworking and the cause of the defect
          This button will open up a screen which will display the initials of the user who entered the failure:

          Test Tab Field Defintions

          Repair Parts List 

           

          Def Code

          The code assigned to the defect.

          Location

          The Reference Designator as set up in the assembly’s Bill of Materials.

          Mfgr

          The name of the manufacturer of the failed part.

          Part Number

          The internal number assigned to the failed component.

          Rev

          The revision number assigned to the internal part number.

          Req Qty

          The number rejected of the assembly.

          Replace ?

          If this box is checked, the user intends to replace the rejected component.

          Tech This field will display the name of the technician who fixed the defect. To get the name to display user must double click in the field. This is a read only field and can NOT be edited.            
          Fix Problem

          If the user decides to fix the problem, he/she may choose one of the following selections: 

          Depressing this button will bring up the following information:

           


           Serial Number History tab
           

          Transfer History Section

          Date & Time

          The date and time (24 hour clock) the assembly was transferred to the Work Center. 

          From/To

          The Work Centers involved in the transfer.

          Qty

          The quantity transferred.

          By

          The initials of the user who recorded the transfer.

          Defect History Section

          Date & Time

          The date and time (24 hour clock) the assembly was rejected.

          Init

          The initials of the user who recorded the rejection.

          WC

          The Work Center where the failure was noted.

          Def Code

          The code relating to the defect.

          Location

          The Reference Designator as set up in the assembly’s Bill of Materials.

          Part Manufacturer

          The name of the manufacturer of the failed component.

          Part Number

          The internal number assigned to the component.

          1.5.1.7.4. How To ...... for the T & R Module
          1.5.1.7.4.1. Add Test and Repair Information
          When the user has completed the Defect information, they may enter the Test & Repair tab to enter more information about the part, or may depress the Open/Find record button to find this information at a later time. 
           
           
           

          Depress the Open/Find record button and the following screen will appear:

          Select to find record by:  Work Order Number or Serial Number 

          If you select to Find by Serial Number the following screen will appear:
          If you select to Find by Work Order Number the following screen will appear: 
          Once a SN or WO No has been entered in the above screens the following screen will appear for user to select a transaction:
           
           Once user has selected a transaction the following screen appears displaying the record you selected:
           
           
          Depress the Edit button and enter your password, user may at this time edit the Quality Inspection Entry info, the Defects Information, or the Test & Repair info: 
           
           
          Depress the Test & Repair Tab: (System will only display information for one serial number at a time).  
           
           
           
          In the edit mode user can edit the required qty, check the Replace? box, or select to Fix Problem from the pull down:
           
          NOTE:  To have the initials of the technician who fixed the defect displayed, user must double click in the field. 
           
           
           
           
          User may enter information in the Failure Diagnosis, Rwk Instructions, and/or Root Cause (these 3 fields are text fields).   Within this screen you may also View the "Entered By"  or  "Inventory Status" of Part Number.   
           
           
           
          Depress the Save button to save changes or Depress the Abandon changes button to abandon changes. 
           
           
           
          User may at this time print the "Part Request Form"  which will need to be approved and hand delivered to the stockroom, so they may fill the shortage(s) and issue part(s) to the kit.
           
           
           
          To View the Serial Number History depress the "Serial Number History" tab
           
           
          1.5.2. Shop Floor Tracking by Bar Code (OPTIONAL Module)

          1.5.2.1. Prerequisties - SFT by Bar Code
          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase.   This module is designed primarily for transfer of products in shop floor tracking and input of inspection data by serial number and defect code.  To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com"contactus.aspx

          After activation, "Shop Floor Bar Code" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

          Bar Code Tracking Method

          Select Bar Code Tracking method in System Setup, Shop Floor Tracking Defaults

          Production Planning  Select Serialization in Work Order Traveler Setup.
          Work Order Serial Number Set up Serial Numbers in Work Order Serial Number Control
          Bar Code Scanner There is no restrictions on the scanner you use as long as it can read Code39 it will work.  It also must be a keyboard wedge since we do not offer batch processing. Most scanners require ¼” of white space surrounding the bar code. Laser and inkjet printed labels must have adequate resolution, contrast and clarity to print barcodes that are readable.  If you are having problem with your scanner, make sure your scanner isn't set to scan Code39 extended.

            

          1.5.2.2. Introduction - SFT by Bar Code

          Overview: Manex Manufacturing System Software has bar code scan and print capability which is designed primarily for transfer of products in shop floor tracking and input of inspection data by serial number and defect code.

          Installation: Bar Code Shop Floor Tracking is an extra cost option; it is not a part of the Core Manex MES modules.

          Upon purchase of the module, Manex will send a soft key to activate the module.

          • After activation, Bar Coding access for each user must be setup in the Manex Security module.  Users with “supervisor’s rights” will automatically have access.  See Article #3250 if you would like to scan the employee id rather than having the employee enter password each time. 
          • Each client workstation (individual PC) which will be printing Reports, Travelers, labels, Serial Tags, Physical Inventory Tags and Defect Lists with Bar Coding must have the font installed as an active Windows font.
          • If Bar Coding of Serial Numbers is desired, the Serial Numbers must be setup in the Work Order Serial Number Control module. 

          Specification:

          1. Manex uses the Microsoft Trutype BC C 39 Narrow Font. See Article #1225  for Bar Code installation procedure.   
          2. Use of a Y-type keyboard-emulation scanner is supported by Manex.  The scanner output goes into Manex via the keyboard-input cable. Bar code fields may be scanned or manually entered with the scanner installed.
          3. There is no restrictions on the scanner you use as long as it can read Code39 it will work.  It also must be a keyboard wedge since we do not offer batch processing. Most scanners require ¼” of white space surrounding the bar code. Laser and inkjet printed labels must have adequate resolution, contrast and clarity to print barcodes that are readable. If you are having problem with your scanner, make sure your scanner isn't set to scan Code39 extended.
          4.  Manex recognizes a bar code by an asterisk (*) at the beginning and end of the bar coded field.
          1.5.2.3. Fields & Definitions for SFT by Bar Code
          1.5.2.3.1. Transfer Tab
           
          Work Order Work Order Number
          Product #/Rev Product and Revision assigned to WO
           
          Single Serial No. Mode
           
          Serial No Enter SN to Transfer
           
          Batch Serial No.  Mode
           
          Starting No. Enter First SN to Transfer
          Ending No. Enter Last SN to Transer
           
          Manual Mode
           
          Quantity Enter Qty to Transfer
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
          1.5.2.3.2. List of Item for Transfer Tab
           
          Work Order Work Order Numbers being Transfered
          Serial No. Serial Numbers being Transfered
          Qty Qty being Transfered
          From WC product being transfered from
          To WC product being transfered to 
          1.5.2.4. How To ..... for SFT by Bar Code
          1.5.2.4.1. Install Bar Code Font
          The following procedures must be followed for each workstation from which the user expects to print barcodes.  If the following font is not installed, the barcodes will print very large and will not be usable.
           
          1.Go to Start
           
          2.Select My Computer
           

          3.Select Control Panel
           
           
           
          4.Select Fonts
           
           
          5.Select File
           
           
           
          6.Select Install New Font.  In the Add Fonts dialog box, go to the system location for fonts in your system.In most cases, it will be in C:"Windows"Fonts.
           
          7.The font BC C39 should show up in the List of fonts window.  Highlight it.  Be sure there is a check mark in the Copy fonts to Fonts folder box and click OK.   If this font is NOT listed then you can Download the attached [BarCodeFont_C39N.zip] file and extract it into your  C:"WINDOWS"fonts directory. 
           
           
          8.The new font will appear in the Fonts window.  Double clicking on the font will produce the following:
           

           

           


          .

           

           

           

           

           

          1.5.2.4.2. Transfer Product
          Enter the Shop Floor Tracking by Bar Code module.



          The following screen will be displayed:

          Depress the Xfer button. Type in your password or scan employee id .  

          The user can either enter in the Work Order number (which will then display the Product and Rev) or go to the Bar Code Tracking Method section and enter in the Serial Numbers desired. The system will then default the Work Order #, Product and Rev onto the screen.

          The Bar Code Tracking method is dependant on how it is setup within the Shop Floor Tracking Defaults .

           Note:  When in "Single Serial no. mode" if the serial number entered has more than one work order associated instead of asking user to select the WO number everytime, if the serial number is linked to previously entered WO, the system will just take the WO and save to 2nd page.  If the serial no scanned does not match the previous entered WO, then a WO selection box will be presented to the user. 

          Once the Serial Numbers have been selected, go to the List of Items for Transfer screen.

          The Work Order number, Serial No., Quantity, From Work Center and To Work Center or from Work Center to Activity will display, depending on the selection within SFT Defaults to Transfer by WC or Activity. 

          Depress the Save button.

          The items will then be properly transferred within the system. 
           
          If the product is included in an active Cycle count, or Physical Inventory count, the following message will appear after depressing the OK button on the transfer screen and user  will not be allowed to transfer product until the count has been completed and posted.
           
           
           
          If the work station being used to transfer serialized material is assigned to use a default work center in Production Work Center/Activity Setup module, when the user first opens the module, the module will use the default work center assigned for this workstation, if the transfer is "FROM" a different work center other than the default and user is NOT a supervisor or has the  option "Allow Changing Default Work Center for Serial Number Transfer" box checked within the Security module, they will receive the following message:
           
           
           

          When user depresses "OK"  a supervisor approval is required to continue.  After supervisor’s password is entered, the default work center will be changed to the one that the supervisor entered password for.   For example:  the workstation is assigned to use “TU” as default work center, now if user chooses to use “AI” to transfer, the system will ask for supervisor’s password, if user cancels the password, the default work center will still be “TU”, but if the supervisor enters his/her password on this machine, the default work center will be changed to “AI”.  If now the user tried to transfer from “TU” again, the system will ask for supervisor’s password again.  If user exits the module and come back, the default work center will be “TU” again.

           
           
           
           
           
          1.5.2.5. FAQ's - SFT
          Facts and Questions for the Shop Floor Tracking Modules
          1.5.3. Work Order Management
          1.5.3.1. Work Order Management
          1.5.3.1.1. Prerequisties for WO Mgmt
          Prerequisites for Entering a New Work Order

          After activation, "Work Order Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
          System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

          Customer

          A Customer database must be established in the Customer Information module.

          Contact (Buyer) (Optional) If the user wishes to include the buyer on the order
          Product number The part number must exist for a product or part in the Inventory Control Mgmt module.
          BOM  (Optional)

          The Bill of Material must be entered (AVL optional)

           

          1.5.3.1.2. Introduction for WO Mgmt

          The Work Order Module is used to record the details required for initiating assembly of products.

           

          The whole purpose of the WO Release is for various departments to fulfill their part of the task of releasing the WO on-line to avoid doing it manually. This is a very valuable feature and should not be by passed.  This is why we do not allow the Work Order to be released within the Sales Order module.

           

          The user initiates the internal flow of work actions by completing the Work Order. This order includes Kitting the material for the order, issuing the material to the production line, tracking the assembly of the order, and completing and evaluation of production performance.
           
          A Sales Order number will be displayed if the Work Order was created within the Sales Order Mgmt module. If you are entering a Work Order through the Work Order module, you can manually link an existing Sales Order to the Work Order. Only if the Sales Order and Work Order is for the same customer and same product number.   Keep in mind though that even if you have the SO linked to a WO does not mean that the quantities will always be the same.  The link is for reference only between the two modules and they are still individual records so when any changes are made to either the SO or the WO the change will not update or be carried forward to the other.  A message is displayed to the users that they will have to make the same changes to the WO.  
           
          NOTE:  ManEx does not allow a Work Order to be created for a Make/Buy Product,  (due to MRP calculating incorrect demand and showing incorrect message with safety stock). 

           

          1.5.3.1.3. Fields & Definitions for WO Mgmt
          1.5.3.1.3.1. Work Order Tab

          Work Order Tab field definitions

          Work Order

          The number assigned to the Work Order.

          Order Date

          The date the Work Order was created.

           

          The status of the Work Order:  Standard;   Priority-1;   Priority-2;   Firm Plann;   Admin Hold;   Mfg Hold;   Rework;   ReworkFirm;   or   Cancel. 

          The system defaults to Standard. Standard is the ordinary work order status.  Priority is set up as a make ahead of all other orders, 1 being the most important and 2, the second most important.  Firm Plann, lets MRP know that the Work Order decision is intentional and NO action is required.    Admin Hold is an order on hold due to customer credit, etc (this will NOT interfere with the kitting, production or shipping).  Mfg Hold WILL prevent the order from being put In-Process, Kitted, or Assembled. Note:  If the WO is put on Mfgr Hold before being put In-Process no demands will be displayed in MRP. Rework is to fix or redo a previous order. Rework Firm or Cancel.
           
          Firm Plann = Example: The requirement may be 100 but the Firm Plann WO is only for 60. Normally in this case if the WO status was standard MRP would instruct user to increase the WO qty from 60 to 100 to fulfill the requirement of 100.  But since the WO is Firm Plann, MRP will take no action.   See defintion for DUE DATES below for further detail.
           
          If user changes the Work Order Status to Admin Hold or Mfgr Hold, a box will appear on the Work Order Screen (as shown below) giving the user the option to put the Work Order on MRP Hold.  If the user does NOT check this box, orders that are In-Process will not be affected in MRP. Manufacturing hold on a Work Order will disallow movement of the parts through SFT.  
           

          Rework = users will use this status if they do not want to have it included as available to meet demands.

          ReworkFirm = users will use this if they want to have it included as available to meet demands.  The only thing is that they will have to be sure the due dates for a rework firm precede any demand that was created to use those parts.   

          NOTE:  Work Orders originated from an RMA Receiver will have "ReworkFirm" Job Status and users will NOT be allowed to change the Job Status. Since the material issued to the RMA is likely to be a defective assembly, or requires re-inspection, the work order must be completed by either transferring the material to FGI or to scrap to close the work order.  Therefore, an RMA work order cannot be cancelled.  Also, users will NOT be allowed to edit or change the Bld qty because when product is brought into the system with an RMA Receiver it is then automatically issued as itself to the kit at that time.  

          Serialized If this box is checked, the completed units must be assigned unique serial numbers.
          Customer Name The name of the customer for which this Work Order applies.

          If BOM is assigned to specific customer, and if there is CONSG part in the BOM -- Only that customer will be available in the WO customer list

          If BOM is assigned to specific customer, and no CONSG parts in the BOM -- Default to that customer, but all other customers are available to be selected.

          If BOM is not assigned to specific customer, all customer should be available.

          Forecast Item The Forecast checkbox is defaulted as True whether or not there actually is a forecast.  By doing this, we minimize the possibility of the MRP double ordering parts for the SO. If there is a forecast, then the SO will be subtracted from it. If there isn’t a forecast, the SO will drive as usual. Users can change to un-checked in the Sales order/Work order if desired.
          Sales Order

          A Sales Order number will be displayed if the Work Order was created within the Sales Order Mgmt module. If you are entering a Work Order through the Work Order module, you can manually link an existing Sales Order to the Work Order. Only if the Sales Order and Work Order is for the same customer and same product number.   Keep in mind though that even if you have the SO linked to a WO does not mean that the quantities will always be the same.  The link is for reference only between the two modules and they are still individual records so when any changes are made to either the SO or the WO the change will not update or be carried forward to the other.  A message is displayed to the users that they will have to make the same changes to the WO.  

          Class The classification of the product to be assembled.
          Type

          The type with the classification of the product to be assembled.

          Part Number

          The number of the make part to be assembled

          (Rev)

          The revision number pertaining to the part number.

          Description

          The description of the part to be assembled.

          Work Order Released

          If this box is unchecked, you are able to kit the work order but you will not be allowed to process the material through SFT.  Once this box has been checked, you will be able to move the material through SFT.  If user is using the WO checklist feature this box will not be checked until all checkpoints including the "Kit Complete" have been marked off.  Once the "Kit Complete" checkpoint has been checked the WO Released checkbox will be checked automatically. 

          (Date)

          The date the Work Order was released.

          Due Date
          This is the date by which the completed assembly must be completed.  Note:  The Sales Order Ship Date must be the same or later than the Work Order completion date. MRP will look at the SO Ship Date which should be the same or precede the WO Due Date by the transit time from your dock to the Customer’s dock. The SO Ship Date becomes the Work Order due date when the Work Order is created from the Sales Order, but user may change this date.  MRP will recognize the WO as being due in time for the SO ship date, and therefore include the work order as supply to meet the sales order demand, whether or not it’s kitted.  If the Work order is kitted and then the dates are moved (either in the sales order ship date to a later date or the work order due date to an earlier date), then MRP will not view the work order (supply) as meeting the sales order (demand).  If the work order has been kitted, and thus changed status to a firm planned work order (as far as the MRP module is concerned), then MRP will NOT suggest adjusting the work order delivery date to meet the demand, but WILL suggest creating a new work order (or moving a non-firm planned work order) and ordering the parts for the new work order date.  So the keys are the work order due date, and the sales order ship date.  The former must be the same or precede the latter, to keep the work order identified as supplying the product for the sales order.  User does have the ability to turn off the function of the Sales order driving the demands for the MRP and just use the Work Order for buying components by checking the MRP on Hold box in the Sales Order module per line item. 
           
          Note:  The Kitted BOM Cost calculations displayed on the "Kit to Close Report" is based off the WO Due date and compares that to the EFF/OB dates on the BOM.  So users need to be VERY careful with the WO Due Dates and make sure that they stay current along with the EFF/OB dates on the BOM.  
          Build Qty

          The number of units which must be completed.

          Completed

          The number of units already completed.

          Balance

          The number of units which still must be completed.

          Depressing this button will display the applicable Work Order Check List (shown below).

          Depressing this button will display the applicable Work Order Notes 

          WO Check List Screen field definitions:

          Chk

          A check mark in this box means that the check list item has been completed.

          Check List

          The description of the check list item.

          Init

          The initials of the person who performed the check.

          Date

          The date of the check list performance.

          Time

          The time of the check list performance.

          1.5.3.1.3.1.1. Changing Work Order Status, how it affects Kit Status and MRP?
          Once a Kit has been flagged as "In Process" the Work Order management module will not allow the users to change the WO status between Standard and Rework. 

          WO form Modifications:
           
          When a user is trying to change the status for the work order from the "REWORK" to any other status we check the KIT data and if the KIT has only line shortages present the KIT status will become empty (instead of "KIT PROCSS").  The reason is that MRP is checking for the KIT status in order to determine whether it needs to explode the BOM to get the demands for this work order or BOM is already exploded.    When changing status from anything to "REWORK" check CURVAL () because if someone else pulled the kit for that work order while the user was editing the status the kit status might already be updated to the "KIT PROCSS". 
           
          KIT form Modifications:
           
          In the save method when line shortages are added and rework work order is selected replace start date and initials only when they are empty.  When re-opening the KIT, check if work order status is rework kit status has to be "REWORK" as well.   When saving, after issuing items from the inventory, do not update Kit Status if WO status is not "REWORK".   For the regular WO if BOM is already exploded and shortages are created the kit status would be already updated, but if BOM was not exploded and only line shortage are present we do not want to change the kit status because MRP will only use line shortages and miss all the demands from the BOM.
           
           
          1.5.3.1.3.2. Work Order Schedule Tab

          Work Order Schedule Field definitions

          WO Balance

          The quantity of product that is not in finished goods 

          Schedule

          Due Date The date by which the completed assembly must be ready for shipment
          Schedule Quantity The amount of quantity scheduled for that due date
          Total The total of all of the scheduled quantities
            Depressing this button will allow the user to add a line
            Depressing this button will allow the user to Delete a line

           Automatic Scheduling

          First Due date The date of the first shipment
          Delivery Quantity

          Quantity per each shipment

          /Day/Wk/Mo

          The increments per each schedule, either Day, Week or Month

            This allows the user to have MANEX schedule each shipment

          Note:  Keep in mind that this is for your reference only - this screen does not affect any other portion of the ManEx system.  

          1.5.3.1.3.3. Indented Work Order Tree

           

          Indented Work Order Tree field definitions

          Work Order

          The number assigned to the Work order.

           

          Depressing this button allows the user to associate this work order with its parent work order.

           

          Depressing this button allows the user to delete the parent work order association.

          Parent Work Orders

          Work Order

          The Work Order number of the parent work order.

          Part Number

          The number of the part to which the parent work order pertains. (Subordinate)

          Work Orders

          Work Order

          The Work Order number of the subordinate work order.

          Part Number

          The number of the part to which the subordinate work order pertains.

           

                  

          1.5.3.1.4. How To ..... for WO Mgmt
          1.5.3.1.4.1. Find a Work Order

          Enter Production/Work Order Managment/Work Order Mangement Module   

          The following screen will apear:

          When the screen first opens, the user is limited to only four of the eight action buttons shown: Find an existing Work Order, Add a new Work Order, Print a report, or Exit.

          Pressing the Find Action Button displays the following sequences:

          User may choose to find or search for an existing order: by entering the Work Order Number, by entering a Product Number, by entering a Customer Name, or by entering a Sales Order Number.

           

          If the user elects to find an order by the Work Order Number, a screen appears listing work orders in numerical order, along with the Part Number and Customer name. User has the option to view Open orders only or All orders. The user selects the work order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.

          The Work Order screen is populated with the appropriate data.
           

          When the user elects to find an order by the Product Number, a screen appears listing part numbers in numerical order. The user selects the part number by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected part.

           
          A list of all of the Work Orders assigned to the selected part is shown in numerical order, along with the customer name, Due Date and Build Qty. The user finds a work order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected work order.
           
          The Work Order screen is populated with the appropriate data.
           
           

          If the user elects to find an order by the Customer, a screen appears listing customers in alphabetical order. The user selects the customer by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.

           

          A list of all of the selected customer’s orders are shown in numerical order, along with the customer name, Due Date and Build Qty.  The user selects the work order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.

          The Work Order screen is populated with the appropriate data.

           

           

          When the user elects to find an order by the Sales Order Number, a screen appears listing open Sales Orders in numerical order. The user selects the Sales Order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order. 

           
           
          A list of all of the Work Orders assigned to the selected sales order is shown in numerical order, along with the part number, revision, class an type.  The user finds a work order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected work order.
           
          The Work Order screen is populated with the appropriate data.
           

           

           

           

          1.5.3.1.4.2. Add a Work Order

           Enter Production/Work Order Management/Work Order Management Module  

          The following screen will appear:

           

          To ADD a new work order, depress the Add Action button.  The user is first prompted for the appropriate password:

          The following screen appears:

          You may find a Product Number directly (see all parts), or limit the field by selecting a Part Class code first. 

           

          If the user selects the by "Product Number” button, a pop-up screen listing all of the part numbers appears.  Select the part by typing the part number into the red box or highlighting and double clicking.

           

          If the user selects the by "Part Class" button the find part class screen appears.  Select the Part Class by typing the part class into the red box or highlighting and double clicking.

           

          After selecting the part class to be entered, the Find Part screen appears, but only includes those parts with the selected class code inventory type. Select the part by typing the part number into the red box or highlighting and double clicking.

           

          Note:  If the Product Number you are looking for does not appear in the Find screens listed above you may want to check the Part Source of the Product number you are looking for.  ManEx does not allow a Work Order to be created for a Make/Buy Product,  (due to MRP calculating incorrect demand and showing incorrect message with safety stock). 

           And the screen is populated with information about the part number.

          If the work order numbering is set to manual, the first prompt is for the Work Order Number. MANEX will enter the current system date as the Order Date, and the user may revise the date if desired

          The next field to enter is the Job Status. Clicking on the down-arrow on the right side of this field activates a pop-up screen providing a list of status from which to select.

          The system defaults to Standard. Standard is the ordinary work order status.  Priority is set up as a make ahead of all other orders, 1 being the most important and 2, the second most important.  Admin Hold is an order on hold due to customer credit, etc.  Mfg Hold would prevent the order from being kitted and assembled.  Rework is to fix or redo a previous order (See Article #1520), Rework Firm or Cancel. 

          The user may put orders on Admin or Manufacturing Hold without affecting MRP. Manufacturing hold on a Work Order will disallow movement of the parts through SFT.

          Rework = users will use this status if they do not want to have it included as available to meet demands.

          ReworkFirm = users will use this if they want to have it included as available to meet demands.  The only thing is that they will have to be sure the due dates for a rework firm precede any demand that was created to use those parts.

           

          Serial Number box. If this box is checked, the units must have a unique serial number assigned. (Note: Serial numbers are assigned in the Work Order Serial Number Control Module).

          Sales Order Number. A Sales Order number will be displayed if the Work Order was created within the Sales Order Mgmt module. If you are entering a Work Order through the Work Order module, you can manually link an existing Sales Order to the Work Order. Only if the Sales Order and Work Order is for the same customer and same product number.   Keep in mind though that even if you have the SO linked to a WO does not mean that the quantities will always be the same.  The link is for reference only between the two modules and they are still individual records so when any changes are made to either the SO or the WO the change will not update or be carried forward to the other.  A message is displayed to the users that they will have to make the same changes to the WO.  

           

          The next field to enter is the CUSTOMER.  When Adding a new Work Order, the user may select a Customer from the pull down or begin entering the customer name, and ManEx will immediately begin tracking the key-entry to bring up the customer with as few keystrokes as necessary to identify the customer. If there is no customer to be associated with the order, the user may select Standard price. 
           
          If the Part Number selected is setup in the Sales Price List Information module the customers from the customer list within this module will be the only customer(s) to appear in the pull down.
           

          If BOM is assigned to specific customer, and if there is CONSG part in the BOM -- Only that customer will be available in the WO customer list

          If BOM is assigned to specific customer, and no CONSG parts in the BOM -- Default to that customer, but all other customers are available to be selected.

          If BOM is not assigned to specific customer, all customer should be available.

           

          If the work order is ready to start being moved through SFT (material obtained and shortages at a minimum), then the user may check the Work Order Released box, which will allow the material to be moved through Shop Floor Tracking. If MRP is used, the demand for the material will be generated, but the work order cannot begin production. To see a list of unreleased work orders, request Back Log Report by Work Center as discussed in the Reports section. 

          After that, the user enters a Due Date for the order (the date due of finished goods), and the Build Quantity. The shipped quantity will be set to zero, and the balance due to the same as the work order build quantity. 

          Work Order Schedule Tab

          After all the information has been entered in the Work Order screen, depress the WO Schedule tab. The following screen will appear:   Note:  Keep in mind that this is for your reference only - this screen does not affect any other portion of the ManEx system.  

          There are two modes available for completing a scheduled delivery for a product: Automatic and Manual. In the Automatic mode, MANEX will take a beginning date and a quantity to be delivered each period (Days, Weeks or Months) and schedule out the delivery. 

          The following activities are available:

          Automatic Scheduling. Pressing this button enables the scheduling box and places the default lead time date in the 1st Due Date box. (The user may establish a default number of days in the System Setup.) The user can then use that date, or enter the first (beginning delivery) date the customer expects to receive the order. The WO Schedule tab allows the user to divide the shipment into multiple deliveries of equal parts. For example, if the order is for a total of 100 pieces, and the customer wishes delivery to be at the rate of 10 units each day, then the delivery quantity should be entered as 10. The next box allows the user to select the delivery intervals. The options are by day (DY), week (WK) or month (MO). 

          After selecting the delivery interval, pressing the SAVE button creates a line for each delivery date in the sequence requested. 

          In this WO Schedule tab, the user may further edit, delete or add lines. 

          Manual Scheduling. Pressing the Add Line button enables the delivery schedule box and places the cursor in the Due Date box. The user can then enter the first (beginning delivery) date the customer expects to receive the order.  Next, the Ship Date (the date the order is to leave the user’s dock) will be entered by MANEX based on the transit days entered. This date can then be modified by the user if a different date is desired. Then the scheduled quantity is entered.  The Shipped quantity will be completed by MANEX when the line has material shipped against it.  Additional lines may be added or deleted by pressing the appropriate button. The total number of units scheduled will be displayed at the bottom of the box, so the user can verify all units have been scheduled. 

          Indented Work Order Tab

          If the user has multi-level products, and there are other work orders upon which the current work order depends having material, then the Indented Work Order tab will allow the user to establish relationships between those work orders and the current one.

           Depress the Add Parent Work Ord button. A red box will appear, as illustrated below:

          Type the Parent Work Order number into the box.

          After entering a valid work order, the user is presented with a screen completed with the work order information, but with a blank work order number (if numbering is manual). After entering the work order, the schedule and quantity, the new work order may be saved.

          Once all information is entered, the user may either Save by depressing the Save Record action button, or Abandon Changes by depressing the Abandon Changes Action buttons.

          1.5.3.1.4.3. Edit a Work Order

          Find an existing Work Order                                                    

          After a Work Order has been found, it may be edited by selecting the Edit Action button.

          All fields available for editing will be enabled for modification. The fields which may be edited are:

          Order Date, Job Status, Work Order Release, Due Date, Build Qty. The user may also add a note, or add or delete a parent work order.  Note:  Once a Kit has been flagged as "In Process" the Work Order Management module will NOT allow the users to change the Work Order status between Standard and Rework.  For further detail see Article #2691 .
           
          If the user wishes to change the Build Qty on a Work Order in process on the Floor the system will provide the users with what work center location they would like to reduce the qty from to match the new Work Order Qty.   At this point the Kitting module will still show the original WO qty and what was picked.  But if they depress the Update Kit button it will refresh the kit based off of the new WO Qty and now the qty that was adjusted will become WO-WIP.  Which means it is available to fulfill any other demand that might be out there. Then upon Closing the kit the user has the option to cost that wo-wip to the kit or return it to stock.  If they return it to stock it will have no affect on their Mfgr Variance for that work order.
           
          If the user is going to reduce the Build Qty on a Work Order that will change the WO status to "CLOSED",  upon Closing the kit the system will take the original quantity pulled to the kit and automatically cost the different to the kit without giving any option to the user.  So, if the user does NOT wish to have the extra parts automatically costed to the kit upon closing they will need to change the WO status from "CLOSED" to "STANDARD",  return to the Kitting module and "UPDATE"  the kit,  then  return to the WO and edit/save the record without making any changes – the Status will automatically update to Closed.   See attached word document <<PS_961_090427.docx>>  for an example. 

          NOTE:  Work Orders originated from an RMA Receiver will have "ReworkFirm" Job Status and users will NOT be allowed to change the Job Status, due to the fact that when the Work Order is created from RMA module all kitting, serial number, .... records are created and if user changes the WO status the system may loose track of these records.  User will receive the following message if they try to change the job status on a Work Order that was originated from an RMA Receiver.  

               

          Since the material issued to the RMA is likely to be a defective assembly, or requires re-inspection, the work order must be completed by either transferring the material to FGI or to scrap to close the work order.  Therefore, an RMA work order cannot be cancelled. 
           
          The following message will be displayed to the user if a SO is linked to a WO:




          NOTE:  The link is for reference only between the two modules and they are still individual records so when any changes are made to either the SO or the WO the change will not update or be carried forward to the other. 
           
          1.5.3.1.4.4. Cancel A Work Order

          Find the Work Order you want to cancel. 

          Depress the Edit button and enter your password

          Depress the arrow next to the Job Status and change the Job Status to Cancel as displayed below.

          Depress the Save action button.

          Note:  You can’t Cancel a Work Order that has been kitted.  If you must cancel a kitted Work Order, go into the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt module and de-kit the order.
           
           
           
          NOTE: Work Orders originated from an RMA Receiver will have "ReworkFirm" Job Status and users will NOT be allowed to change the Job Status, due to the fact that when the Work Order is created from RMA module all kitting, serial number, .... records are created and if user changes the WO status the system may loose track of these records.  User will receive the following message if they try to change the job status on a Work Order that was originated from an RMA Receiver.
           
           

          Since the material issued to the RMA is likely to be a defective assembly, or requires re-inspection, the work order must be completed by either transferring the material to FGI or to scrap to close the work order. Therefore, an RMA work order cannot be cancelled or re-opened.

           
           
          1.5.3.1.4.5. Manually Re-Open or Close a Work Order

          Find a Closed Work Order  

          Depress the Edit action button and change the Job Status from Closed to Standard

          User will receive the following warning

          Depress OK then Depress the Save record action button, The following message will be displayed to the user if a SO is linked to a WO:




          NOTE:
            The link is for reference only between the two modules and they are still individual records so when any changes are made to either the SO or the WO the change will not update or be carried forward to the other. 
           
           
          Depress OK WO status is changed from closed to Open/Standard

          To Manually Close Work Order

          Find Work Order with Job Status anything other than "Closed"

          Dperss the Edit action button (do not edit anything)

          Depress the Save record Action button.  The following message will be displayed to the user if a SO is linked to a WO:


          NOTE:  The link is for reference only between the two modules and they are still individual records so when any changes are made to either the SO or the WO the change will not update or be carried forward to the other. 
           

          Depress Ok and Job Status will automatically change to Closed

            

          NOTE: Work Orders originated from an RMA Receiver will have "ReworkFirm" Job Status and users will NOT be allowed to change the Job Status, due to the fact that when the Work Order is created from RMA module all kitting, serial number, .... records are created and if user changes the WO status the system may loose track of these records.  User will receive the following message if they try to change the job status on a Work Order that was originated from an RMA Receiver.


           

          Since the material issued to the RMA is likely to be a defective assembly, or requires re-inspection, the work order must be completed by either transferring the material to FGI or to scrap to close the work order. Therefore, an RMA work order cannot be cancelled or re-opened.

           

           

           

          1.5.3.1.4.6. Add a Parent Work Order

          Indented Work Order Tab

          If the user has multi-level products, and there are other work orders upon which the current work order depends having material, then the Indented Work Order tab will allow the user to establish relationships between those work orders and the current one.

          Find an existing Child Work Order



          Go to the Indented Work Order Tree tab.  Depress the Edit button. 

           Depress the Add Parent Work Ord button. A red box will appear, as illustrated below:

          Type the Parent Work Order number into the box.  The Parent Work Order number will disappear and will not appear in the Work Order box until the Save record action button is depressed as displayed below.     Depress the Abandon  changes Action buttons to abandon changes.
           
           
           
          Find the Parent Work Order, go to the Indented Work Order Tree tab and the Child Work Order linked will be displayed:
           
           
           
           
           
           
          1.5.3.1.5. Reports for WO Mgmt

          To obtain the Work Order reports, depress the Reports button.  The following screen will appear:

          Select the output you desire by clicking on the radial.  Choose from Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

          Highlight the report.
           
           

          Note: The Work Center Information may not appear in some of the WIP reports within WO Management  if the user prints it to an Excel Worksheet file. Some of the reports are quite complex, with multiple relationships and filters.  In this instance, the Work Center Information is in a different data base and therefore will not be available.

           

           


          Work Order Schedule & WIP Report by Customer

           

          Highlight "Work Order Schedule & WIP Report by Customer" a Detail Report selection will appear at the bottom of the screen. Select the Printer to be used.
           
          Depress the Option tab
           

           
          Select:  All Customers or One Customer
           
          The following report will printThis report provides a listing of the status of each job on the production floor.  With this report, users can see where each board is in production.    
           
           
          Work Order Schedule & WIP Report by Due Date
           
          Highlight the "Work Order Schedule & WIP Report by Due Date"  a Detail Report selection will appear at the bottom of the screen. Select the printer to be used. 
           
          Depress the OK button
           
           
          The following Report will print: This report provides a listing of the status of each job on the production floor.  With this report, users can see where each board is in production by Due Date.




          Back Log Report by Work Center
           

          Select the  Work Center by highlighting the one you wish and depressing the > button.  If you want all work centers, depress the >> button.

          Depress OK

           
          The following report will print:
           
           
           
          Work Order Summary
           
          Highlight "Work Order Schedule & WIP Report by Customer" a Detail Report selection will appear at the bottom of the screen. Select the Printer.
           
          Depress the OK button
           
          The following report will print:
           
           

          Work Order Summary with WIP by Due Date
           
          Highlight "Work Order Summary with WIP by Due Date Report" a Detail Report selection will appear at the bottom of the screen. Select to print report with price or without price. 
           
          Depress the Option tab. 
           

          Enter the "From" and "To"  Dates, and select the customer by highlighting the one you wish and depressing the > button.  If you want all customers, depress the >> button.

           
          Depress the OK button.
           
           
           
          This report is to be Printed on Legal size Paper.
           
          The following Report will print:    The report can show up to 11 work center information at one time, if user has more than 11 work centers, the program will generate another set of report with same header information (due date, wono, build qty, part number...), with the rest of work center information (at right side).  If you run by Screen, Printer...., it should appear twice too.
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           

           

           

          1.5.3.2. Unreleased Work Order List

          1.5.3.2.1. Prerequisites for Unreleased WO List
          Prerequisites for Viewing the Work Order Release Check list:

          After activation, "Work Order Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access. Note:  This screen is only to view the checklist.
           

          Product Data Management (PDM) User MUST have this optional module to complete the Work Order Release Check list
          Use Work Order Checklist Box (checked) This box MUST be checked in the Shop Floor Tracking Default screen in System Setup  
          Customer Name   A Customer Name must exist and be associated with the Work Order.
          Sales Order Number   (Optional)     
          Product number The part number must exist in the item master for a product or part.
          Work Order   An open Work Order must exist.
          Work Order Release   The check list must exist in the Shop Floor Tracking Defaults  

           

                                                                                                                              

          1.5.3.2.2. Introduction for Unreleased WO List

          The Work Order Release Check List is originally developed in System Setup in the Shop Floor Tracking Defaults set up screen.    The Work Order Release Check List displays the following:  Work Order Number, Scheduled Ship Date, Part Number of the assembly, Revision Number pertaining to the assembly, Quantity in the Work Order and the Check List Items with information regarding items checked, by whom, the date and time.

           

          The Work Center Check List Module is used to record that a process detailed in a check list established for the work center has been completed.  The users must view and acknowledge that a procedure has been performed, and enter their concurrence and time of event. This information is created in the PDM (Product Data Management) module. 

          The overall purpose of the Work Order Release Check List is to provide better kitting status control and at the same time make the job a little easier for Production Control/Schedulers by automatically checking to see if various affected departments have checked off their part of the list.  Then once everything has been checked, the work order can be released so scheduling can be started and material can start moving through SFT. 

           

          1.5.3.2.3. Fields and Definitions for Unreleased WO List

          WO Number The Work Order Number assigned to the job for that particular assembly.  The user may sort on this column by depressing the WO Number button.
          Ship Date    The date the assembled product is scheduled to ship. The user may sort on this column by depressing the Ship Date button.
          Part Number  The number assigned to the completed assembly in the Inventory Master. The user may sort on this column by depressing the Part Number button.
          Rev    The number of the revision associated with the Part Number of the Assembly.
          Quantity  The number of the assemblies to be produced.
          Description  The description assigned to the product. 
          SO Number The Sales Order Number assigned to the job for that particular assembly.
          Customer  The Name of the customer for that assembly. 
          Proj Number  The Project number assigned to the assembly. 
          Status The status of the Work Order. 
          Chk A check will default in this box once the item listed has been performed.
          Check List Check List items associated with the assembly.  For more detail on the Check List items see Article #1214.
          Checked By The initials of the person will default in when they perform the item listed  
          Date The date will default in when  the item listed is performed 
          Time The time will default in when the item listed is performed

          Highlight the line you are interested in viewing.  The information at the bottom of the screen will display the check list items associated with the assembly.  If the item listed has been performed, there will be a check mark at the left of the item and the user may view the name of the person who performed the checking plus the date and time checked.

           

          1.5.3.2.3.1. Check List Items

          Checklist Items within the Unreleased Work Order List .  .

           

           
           
           
           

          KIT IN PROCESS  This item will  be checked, once the "Manual Kit or Auto Kit" button has been selected within the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt module.  This checklist item is hard coded into the system.
          KIT COMPLETED  This item will be checked, when the "Kit Complete" box is checked within the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt module.  This checklist item is hard coded into the system
          TOOL/FIXTURE RELEASED  This item will be checked, when the Tool/Fixture released check box is checked within the PDM module.  This checklist item is hard coded into the system
          PDM RELEASED This item will be checked, when the PDM released check box is checked within the PDM module.  This checklist item is hard coded into the system
          TRAVELER RELEASED This item will be checked, when the Traveler Released check box is checked within the Work Order Traveler Setup module.  This checklist item is hard coded into the system
          Audit Customer BOM This item is defaulted in from the Work Order Check List (within the Work Order Traveler Setup module).    This item will need to be approved within the Unreleased Work Order screen
          Inspect Consg. Items This item is defaulted in from the Work Order Check List (within the Work Order Traveler Setup module).   This item will need to be approved within the Unreleased Work Order screen

           

           

          1.5.3.2.4. How To ...... for Unreleased WO List
          1.5.3.2.4.1. View and Approve Work Order Checklist Items

          Enter Production/Work Order Management/Unreleased Work Order List Module 

          NOTE:  For this module to be available the "Use Work Order Checklist" box must be checked in the Shop Floor Tracking Default Screen in System Setup.

           

          The following screen will appear:

          Highlight the line you are interested in viewing.  The information at the bottom of the screen will display the check list items associated with the assembly. 


          KIT IN PROCESS This item will be checked, once the "Manual Kit or Auto Kit" button has been selected within the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt module. This checklist item is hard coded into the system. 
          KIT COMPLETED This item will be checked, when the "Kit Complete" box is checked within the Kitting & Shortage Mgmt module. This checklist item is hard coded into the system
          TOOL/FIXTURE RELEASED This item will be checked, when the Tool/Fixture released check box is checked within the PDM module. This checklist item is hard coded into the system
          PDM RELEASED This item will be checked, when the PDM released check box is checked within the PDM module. This checklist item is hard coded into the system
          TRAVELER RELEASED This item will be checked, when the Traveler Released check box is checked within the Work Order Traveler Setup module. This checklist item is hard coded into the system
          Audit Customer BOM This item is defaulted in from the Work Order Check List (within the Work Order Traveler Setup module). This item will need to be approved within the Unreleased Work Order screen.
          Inspect Consg. Items This item is defaulted in from the Work Order Check List (within the Work Order Traveler Setup module). This item will need to be approved within the Unreleased Work Order screen

           


           If the item listed has been performed, there will be a check mark at the left of the item and the user may view the name of the person who performed the checking plus the date and time checked.   User will NOT be allowed to process material through SFT until the Work Order Release box within the  Work Order  module has been checked off   (Note:  this box will NOT be checked until ALL checkpoints including the "Kit Complete" have been checked).   This is to prevent moving material in SFT until everything has been approved.  
           
           
          NOTE:  If a user has the Work Order Checklist feature active and tries to use the PO Receiving shortage and issues feature within the PO Receiving, it will not recognize the shortages until the kit has been flagged as "Kit Complete".  It is designed this way because the user will not know if the parts are short until the kit is completed. 

          You may have parts in the inventory and have not pulled them to the kit yet.  If you allow seeing the shortage (which may not be a shortage because parts are not pulled yet) from the PO receiving, the receiver may be trained to automatically issue to the shortages first, but it may not be a shortage because parts have not been pulled from inventory, so how would they know if it is a real shortage or just not pulled from inventory yet.
           
           
           
           
          1.5.3.3. Open Work Order List

          Enter Production/Work Order Management/Open Work Order List Module 
           
          After activation, "Work Order Management" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           

           

          The list of Open Work Orders displays the following:  Work Order Number, Customer Name, Sales Order Number, scheduled Due Date, Job Status (Standard, Priority, Administrative Hold, Rework, etc.), Build Quantity, Completed Quantity and Balance.

           

           

           

          Selecting Open Work Order List will bring up the following screen:

           

           

           

          Field Defintions

           

          WO Number  The number assigned to the job for that particular assembly.  The user may sort on this column by depressing the WO Number button
          Customer    The name of the customer for whom the assembly is to be built. The user may sort on this column by depressing the Customer Name button
          SO Number  The number of the Sales Order associated with the Work Order. The user may sort on this column by depressing the S O Number button
          Due Date  The date the assembled product is scheduled to ship. The user may sort on this column by depressing the Due Date button.
          Status   The job status of the Work Order, such as Standard, Priority, Admin Hold, Rework, etc. The user may sort on this column by depressing the Status button
          Build Quantity  The number of the assemblies to be produced
          Completed    The number of the assemblies which have been completed.
          Balance  The balance of the quantity yet to be completed.
                              

                            

                                   

                                         

                                             

                                 

                                     

                                           
          1.5.3.4. Work Order Serial Number Control
          1.5.3.4.1. Prerequisites for WO SN Control


          After activation, "Serial Number Setup" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

          Work Order

          There must be a Work Order.

          Product number in Item Master

          The part number must exist for a product or part.

          (optional) BOM

          The Bill of Materials must be entered (AVL optional).

          Serial Number Tracking

          The method must have been set up in Shop Floor Tracking Defaults.

          Serialize Option

          The option must have been selected in the Inventory Control Management Module

          1.5.3.4.2. Introduction for WO SN Control

          The Work Order Serial Number Control Module is used to set up serial numbering for a particular Work Order.

          1.5.3.4.3. Fields & Definitions for WO SN Control

          1.5.3.4.3.1. Serial Number Setup Tab

          Serial Number Setup Fields & Definitions

          Sequence Number  The item number of the Serial Number 
          Serial No The Serial Number Assigned
          Work Order The number assigned to the job for that particular assembly
          Build Qty The number of the assemblies to be produced
          From Starting Serial Number
          To Ending Serial Number
          Single Entry Enter One Serial Number at a Time
          Range Enter a Range of Serial Numbers

           

          1.5.3.4.3.2. Detail Tab

          Part Number  Product Number
          Rev Product Revision
          Serial No Serial Number assigned to that Part Number
          Comment Comments or Suggestions

          1.5.3.4.4. How To ..... for WO SN Control
          1.5.3.4.4.1. Find a Work Order for Serial Number Setup

          Enter Production/Work Order Managment/Work Order Mangement Module   

          The following screen will apear:

           

          Pressing the Find Action Button displays the following sequences:

          User may choose to find or search for an existing order: by entering the Work Order Number, by entering a Product Number, by entering a Customer Name, or by entering a Sales Order Number.

           

          If the user elects to find an order by the Work Order Number, a screen appears listing work orders in numerical order, along with the Part Number and Customer name. User has the option to view Open orders only or All orders. The user selects the work order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.

          The Work Order and Build Qty will default in the Serial Number Setup Screen, and the Add action button becomes available.
           

          When the user elects to find an order by the Product Number, a screen appears listing part numbers in numerical order. The user selects the part number by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected part.

           
          A list of all of the Work Orders assigned to the selected part is shown in numerical order, along with the customer name, Due Date and Build Qty. The user finds a work order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected work order.
           
          The Work Order and Build Qty will default in the Serial Number Setup Screen, and the Add action button becomes available.
           

          If the user elects to find an order by the Customer, a screen appears listing customers in alphabetical order. The user selects the customer by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.

           

          A list of all of the selected customer’s orders are shown in numerical order, along with the customer name, Due Date and Build Qty.  The user selects the work order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order.

          The Work Order and Build Qty will default in the Serial Number Setup Screen, and the Add action button becomes available.

           

           

          When the user elects to find an order by the Sales Order Number, a screen appears listing open Sales Orders in numerical order. The user selects the Sales Order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected order. 

           
           
          A list of all of the Work Orders assigned to the selected sales order is shown in numerical order, along with the part number, revision, class an type.  The user finds a work order by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected work order.
           
          The Work Order and Build Qty will default in the Serial Number Setup Screen, and the Add action button becomes available.
           

           

           

           

           

          1.5.3.4.4.2. Assigning Serial Numbers to Work Order

          After Finding the Work Order.  The following screen will appear, listing the Work Order and Build Qty.  The Add record action button also becomes available.

          Depress the Add record action button.  Type in the password.  Select Single Entry or Range method of assigning serial numbers by choosing the appropriate radial.

          If you select Single Entry, the following screen will display, only allowing you to type in one Serial number at a time.

          If you select Range, the following screen will display, allowing you to type in From and To Serial numbers. 

           
          Note:  The system will force individual entry for serial numbers with prefixes or characters.  If user enters both character and number in one field, then it is hard to know which part (character or number) needs to be increased first. So the system cannot predict how the range is intended to increment: For Example if user enters a SN range of A101 to Z110. The system does not know how the user wants the range setup A101, B101, C101 or A101, B102, C103, etc.  

          Depress the Save record action button and the range of numbers will populate on the left side of the screen.  As displayed below:  If you depress the Abandon changes action button the screen will abort and the serial numbers will not be saved.

          Whether or not the system will allow you to enter duplicate serial numbers will depend on the method for tracking serial numbers chosen in System Setup.  At the beginning of a ManEx implementation the company must decide a method for tracking serial numbers.  Once this decision has been made and set up in Shop Floor Tracking Defaults it cannot be changed. 

           

          Detail for Serial Numbers

          To enter detail for serial numbers, highlight the pertinent serial number and then depress the Detail Tab. The following screen will appear:

          Depress the Add a record action button, and the"Find by What?" screen appears:   

          If you depress the Manual button, the Detail screen appears and you may manually enter in a part number.

          If you depress the Inventory button, another selection screen will appear:

           

          If you depress the Product Number button, a list of Product Numbers will appear.  To select the Product number either type it in the red box, or highlight the Product and double click on it. 

          The Inventory part number and revision selected will default in as displayed below.

           
          If you depress the Part Class button,  a list of part classes will appear.  To select the Part Class either type it in the red box, or highlight the Part Class and double click on it.    

          A list of Parts will appear assigned only to that Part Class.  To select the Part either type it in the red box, or highlight the Part number and double click on it.

          The Inventory part number and revision selected will default in as displayed below.

           

          Enter in Serial No and Comments if applicable.

          Depress the Save record action button to save, or depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes.

           

          1.5.3.4.4.3. Editing Serial Numbers

          Find an Existing Work Order. 

          Depress the Edit action button.  Enter your password.

          Receive the following message:

          Depress OK and highlight the Serial number you would like to replace.

          Type the correction into the Replace box. The Serial NO for that Sequence # will change.  Depress the Save changes action button to save changes, or depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes.

          If you want to delete ALL of the Serial Numbers, depress the Delete action button. Then depress the Save changes action button. 

          1.5.3.4.4.4. Invoking Serialization after the Work Order is Started

          Invoking Serialization after the Work Order is Started

          If you already have a Work Order started and then decide to invoke serialization, in order to assign serialization to a product with an open work order, in the Shop Floor Tracking Module, the parts must all be in a Work Center which is PRIOR to the Work Center in which serialization is to be applied.

           

          Then the Work Center can be updated and the product moved BACK to the appropriate Work Centers after the product is serialized.   If the Work Order has been completed and the product is in the Finished Goods Work Center, the user may move the product back to a “non-serial Work Center” and then serialize and update the Work Order.  Then the user should move the parts back into the Finished Goods Work Center.  If the parts in Finished Goods were already shipped, the user can use the Inventory Handling module to temporarily increase the finished goods to the needed quantity. Then they can be backed into the Work Order.  After running these parts back down the chain, the user would use Inventory Handling to take the parts back out of inventory.

          1.5.3.4.4.5. Serial Number Turn-On Process

          There is no easy way to have some work orders without serialization and some with for the SAME product.  Turning on Serial Numbers on a product with OPEN Work Orders must be done carefully.  Here are some processes:

          1.  Using the same product and the SAME Revision – ship all of the non-serial numbered product PRIOR to turning on serialization OR don’t turn on serialization until you are ready to serialize everything not shipped.  To serialize everything not shipped, you will have to move product back to the Work Center where serialization is started, then turn on serialization in Work Order Traveler Setup (for further information see Article #1134) and click on the “Update Open Work Orders”.  Be sure to update all of the open work orders.  If you don’t, you won’t be able to ship anything that was not updated.  (The items will be in a black hole and will need a programmer to get them out.)

          2.  Using the SAME Revision, but using the special character trick:

          a.  Copy the product number to the new product in the Inventory Control item Master but put "00" in front of the Rev.  See Article #1058 for further instructions on copying a product number. 

          b.  Then copy the existing product BOM to the new 00 revision product. See Article #1104  for further instructions on copying a BOM.

          c.  Turn on serialization for the new 00 rev product and copy the routing from the old product.  Be sure to select which Work Center you want serialization to start. See  Article #1106 for further instructions on how to turn on the serialization. 

          d.  Enter all new Sales orders using the 00 revision product number.

          e.  When you have shipped all of the old non-serialized product, inactivate the product number in the Inventory Control module.  See Article #1058 for further instructions on how to inactivate a product number. 

          3.  Using a different revision number:

          a.  Copy the product number to the new product revision in the Inventory Control Item Master.  See Article #1058 for further instructions on copying a product number. 

          b.  Then copy the existing product BOM to the new revision product.  See Article #1104  for further instructions on copying a BOM.

          c.  Turn on serialization for the new revision product and copy the routing from the old product. Be sure to select which Work Center where you want serialization to start. See  Article #1106  for further instructions on how to turn on the serialization. 

          d.  Enter all new Sales Orders using the revision product number.

          4.  You may prefer to create new revisions using the ECO module.  It can change the revision of product in Work orders in WIP, but DO NOT turn on the serialization in the ECO module.  See Article #1133 for further instructions on the ECO module.

          a.  First change the revision of the product using the ECO module

          b.  Then move the product back to the Work Center where you want serialization to begin in the Shop Floor Tracking module.  See Article #1106 for further instructions on how to turn on the serialization. 

          c.  Then turn on serialization and select “Update Open Work Orders” in the Work Order Traveler Setup and click on the “Update Open Work Orders”.   Be sure to update all of the open work orders.  If you don’t, you won’t be able to ship anything that was not updated.(The items will be in a black hole and will need a programmer to get them out.)

          1.5.3.4.4.6. Re-work Work Order Serial Numbers

          If the rework Work Order is created from RMA, then the user doesn’t need to assign the serial number for the Work Order.  The system will automatically transfer all serial numbers to the new re-work Work Order when the user creates the RMA Receiver.  For a complete discussion of the RMA process, please refer to Article #1610.

          If the user MANUALLY creates a re-work Work Order, the following conditions for assigning existing serial number to a re-work Work Order will be:

          1. Work Order MUST be a re-work Work Order.
          2. There must have been sufficient quantity in FGI to issue to the re-work Work Order.
          3. The serial number must match the part number issued.
          4. The number of serial numbers to be issued must equal the number of parts issued.
          When a Re-work Work Order is established for a serialized product, the user may select existing serial numbers that are in inventory (finished goods) that are to be reworked.  Rework Work orders will not accept NEW serial numbers.  When a serial number is placed in the rework Work Order, the serial number must exist in finished goods, and the number of serial numbers transferred to the Work order must equal the quantity of assemblies for the Work order.  The part number for the serial number that is moved into the rework Work Order does not need to be the SAME part number and revision as the rework Work Order.  Thus, if a user wants to upgrade part number 123 rev A to part number 123 rev B, they can transfer the parts to the Work Order and identify the serial numbers transferred.  Parts may also be changed to a new part number:  Part Number 123 rev A can be placed into a re-work Work Order for part number 234 rev C.  The only condition is that the quantity and number of serial numbers must match.  Once the record is saved a line shortage for the rework work order will be created and serialized parts will be issued to the "Rework" work order and the old part number will be removed from FGI at the time the new part number is moved into WIP.  See example below:
           
           
          Serialized Inventory Parts (910-9000 Rev. A1) in FGI
           
           
          Create a Rework Work Order using a different Part Number (910-12000 Rev. B)
           
           
          Enter the Work Order Serial Number Control Module and enter in the SN's you want to rework, if the SN you entered is found in other locations a screen will appear displaying all the PN's that have this SN in FGI and user can select which PN they want to pull this SN from
           
           
          Once user has assigned all the SN's to this WO, they should depress the Save button 
           
            
           
          Now user can go to the Kitting Module and release the kit.  The Make Parts #910-9000 Rev. A1) have already been issued to the Kit. 
           
           
          And Removed from FGI for the Old PN (#910-9000 Rev. A1) 
           
           
           
           
           
          1.5.3.4.5. Reports - WO SN Control

          Enter Production/Work Order Management/Work Order Serial Number Control Module  

          The Serial Number Setup Screen will appear.  Depress the Report action button and the following report menu will appear:

          Decide upon the Output.Select Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.  Select the Detail Report you want by highlighting either By Part Number / Work Order or By Serial Number.  Depress the Options Tab.  The following screen will appear:

          Depress the down arrow at the left of the Part Number field.  A list of Part Numbers will appear.  Select the appropriate Part Number.  A list of all Work Orders pertaining to that Part number will display.  Highlight the Work Order of interest and depress the > button.  Depress the OK button.  If you want all of the Work orders, depress the >> button.  The leading zero's for SN's will be removed from Report.

          The following report will print:

          1.5.3.5. Serial Number Status & History

          Enter Production/Work Order Management/Serial Number Status & History Module
           
          After activation, "Serial Number Setup" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           

          The following screen will appear:

          Enter a serial number in the Serial number box (red box) and all the following information will appear;

          Serial Number Status & History Fields and Definitions

          Serial Number Serial number displaying Status and History
          Part Number Part number attached to serial number
          Rev Revision of part number attached to serial number 
          Class Class of part number atttached to serial number
          Type Type of part number attached to serial number
          Description Desription of part number attached to serial number 
          Work Order No Work Order of part number attached to serial number
          Work Center Work Center where serial number is located if not in FGI 
          Sales Order No Sales Order of part number attached to serial number
          Customer PO No Customer PO number of part number attached to serial number 
          Packing List No Packing List number that serial number was shipped on
          Shipped Date Date packing list was created for the listed serial number
          Shipped __ Days Ago How many days ago the serial number was shipped 

          Transfer History Fields & Definitions

          Date Date of Transfer 
          Time Time of Transfer 
          From Work Center Transfered from
          To Work Center transfered to
          Qty Qty Transfered
          By  Initials of who made the Transfer

          Defect History Fields & Definitions

          Date  Date defect recorded
          Time  Time defect was recorded
          Init  Initials of person that recorded the defect
          WC  Work Center where defect was found
          Defect Code  Defect Code
          Location  Location of defect
          Part Mfgr  Part mfgr of defect part
          Part Number  Mfgr. PN of defect part

          1.5.3.6. FAQs - Work Order Mgmt
          Facts & Questions for the Work Order Module
          1.5.4. Capacity & Scheduling (OPTIONAL Module)
          1.5.4.1. Dynamic Production Scheduling
          1.5.4.1.1. Prerequisites for Dynamic Production Scheduling
          Setup Required: 

          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase. This screen provides visibility of all open and scheduled orders. To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com\contactus.aspx


          After activation, "Dynamic Production Scheduling" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
          System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.


          User MUST activate the Re-Schedule trigger and setup e-mail for the notification. This trigger will re-schedule all of the jobs that were scheduled and still open. The purpose is to recalculate “In” and “Out” date/time for the Work Centers to make capacity view more accurate, otherwise in/out of the WC will not recalculate (only priorities of the job are) and capacity view will be always off.

           
          The Dynamic Production Schedule module is based on the following setup:   
           
          In System Setup for Shop Floor Tracking Defaults the system assigns the Average Hrs/Work Day as 24 hours.
            
           

          The prcoess time within the Dynamic Production Schedule module is calculated from the Setup and Run time entered in the Work Center and Activities Routing Setup.



          The Production Capacity Setup module. 




          Also check the status of the Work Order of interest – it can not be on Administrative Hold (for example), to complete the scheduling.
           
          1.5.4.1.2. Introduction for Dynamic Production Scheduling
          This screen provides visibility of all open and scheduled orders.  Users are able to see when capacity constraints may hinder production and any time in the future.  This module can provide sufficient notice to adjust the production schedule or adjust capacity to maximize production and meet promised delivery dates.  It will also indicate when a job will not be completed on time based on processing time remaining and the current due date.
           
          This module will aide in managing jobs by the work orders and/or work centers based on customer requirements (due date or complete date).  The work orders can be managed by work center with the ability to prioritize within each work center.  This module will allow you to view and schedule the workload to ensure deadlines are met.  The system will assume that you have a 24 hour capacity shop.  The idea behind the work order schedule module is not to predict when the job will move through the shop, but to accurately prioritize the job so the user knows which job has to be processed first.  To get a better understanding on how this module calculates the priority for a job see the attached word document <Production Schedule Module>.
           
          The Work Center Tab - allows user to view all the work orders scheduled for a specific work center
          The Work Order Tab -  allows the user to schedule the work order
          The Unscheduled Tab - displays all Work Orders with a status of "Open" that are not scheduled
          The Late Tab - displays a list of Work Orders that have exceded the WO due date, unless they have opt to use the Trigger then it will display a list of Work Orders that have exceded the Complete Date     
          The Hold Tab - displays a list of Work Orders that have a status of "Hold"
          The Back Log Tab - displays a list of Work Orders with a status of "Open" that have been scheduled and still have a balance remaining
          1.5.4.1.3. Fields and Definitions for Dynamic Production Scheduling
          1.5.4.1.3.1. Work Center
          The Work Center Tab - allows user to view all the work orders scheduled for a specific work center




           
           
           
          Work Center Tab Fields and Definitions
           
          Part Number 
          The part number of the assembly being built for the line item highlighted in the box below. 
          Rev 
          The revision of the part number of the assembly being built for the line item highlighted in the box below. 
          Class
          This field lists the Class of the assembly being built for the line item highlighted in the box below.
          Type
          This field lists the type of the assembly being built for the line item highlighted in the box below.    
          Description
          This field is the description of the assembly being built for the line item highlighted in the box below. 
          Customer 
          This field lists the customer that the assembly highlighted in the box below is being built for.   
          Current Work Center 
          This field lists the Work Center currently choosen. 
          Next Work Center 
          This field lists the Next Work Center for the assembly highlighted in the box below.
          Due Out 
          This field lists the date the assembly is due out of this work center. 
          Work Order # 
          This field lists the assigned Work Order number.
          Priority 
          This field displays the priority setup in the Work Order screen. 
          WC Qty 
          This field displays the quantity in the current work center. 
          WC Process Time (Hours) 
          This field displays the time available to process the current work center. 
          WC Process Time (New Hours) This field displays the actual time scheduled to process the current work center
          Complete Date 
          This field displays the completed date entered in the work order screen. 
          Order Qty 
          This field displays the total order quantity. 
          Balance 
          This field displays the balance left to move into FGI. 

          Depress this button will display the WIP(Work-in-Process) from Shop Floor Tracking  for the line item highlighted. 
          Depress this button will allow the users to create or view the Work Order notes.  This button will display in RED if any notes are available.
          Depress this button will allow the users to create or view the Work Center notes.  This button will display in RED if any notes are available.
          Depress this button to display any shortage for the work order highlighted.
          Depress this button to display Jobs in the prior Work Centers.
          1.5.4.1.3.2. Work Order Tab

          The Work Order Tab
          -  allows the user to schedule the work order
           
           
           
           
          Work Order Tab Fields and Definitions
           
          Work Order
          This field lists the assigned Work Order number.
          Part Number
          The part number of the assembly assigned to this Work Order.     
          Customer
          This field lists the customer assigned to this Work Order. 
          Wk Ord Qty
          This field displays the total Work Order quantity.  
          Balance
          This field displays the balance left to move into FGI. 
          Due Date
          This is defaulted in from the Due date entered on the Work Order. 
          Schedule Start Date
          This is the date the user would enter to begin the Work Order.  (The current date defaults in)
          Schedule Complete Date
          This is the date the user would enter when the Work Order is to be completed. (The due date from the work order defaults in)
          Work Center
          These are the Work Centers assigned to this Work Order. 
          Date Out
          This is the date the system has calculated (based on the setup and run times per each work center) that the product will need to be transfered out of this work center in order to meet the completion date. 
          Setup Time (Minutes)
          This is Setup time for the full Wk Ord Qty.  (for example if .10 seconds is entered in the Work Order Traveler module for a specific Work Center x 60) = 6.00 minutes.  
          Run Time (Minutes)
          This is the Run Time entered in the Work Order Traveler module  (for example .060 seconds) x 60 = 3.60 minutes.  
          Priority
          User can enter the priority they would like this product completed.   
          Quantity
          This field displays the quantity in the current work center. 
          Process Time Required (H) This is the Setup time (6.00 min divided by 60= .10 hours) plus the total Run time (3.60 minutes x WK Order Qty (1000) = 3600 minutes divided by 60 = 60 hours) = 60.10 hours. 
          WC Average Capacity

          Depress this button to create the schedule once the Schedule start date and Schedule complete date have been entered. 

          Depress this button will allow the users to create or view the Work Order notes.  This button will display in RED if any notes are available. 
          Depress this button to display any shortage for the work order highlighted.
          Depress this button will allow the users to create or view the Work Center notes.  This button will display in RED if any notes are available.
          Depress this button will allow the users to create or view the Work Order/Work Center notes.  THis button will display in RED if any notes are available.
          1.5.4.1.3.3. Unscheduled Tab

          The Unscheduled Tab - displays all Work Orders with a status of "Open" that are not scheduled

           
           
           
          Unscheduled Tab Field and Definitions
           
          Work Order # This field lists the assigned Work Order number.
          Part Number The part number of the assembly being built for the line item highlighted.  
          Rev The revision of the part number of the assembly being built for the line item highlighted.  
          Customer This field lists the customer that the assembly highlighted.
          Order Qty This field displays the total order quantity.
          Completed This field displays the quantity complete.
          Balance This field displays the balance left to move into FGI. 
          Due Date This is defaulted in from the Due date entered on the Work Order. 
          1.5.4.1.3.4. Late Tab
          The Late Tab - displays a list of Work Orders that have exceded the WO due date, unless they have opt to use the Trigger then it will display a list of Work Orders that have exceded the Complete Date 
           

           Late Tab fields and Definitions

          Work Order # This field lists the assigned Work Order number.
          Part Number The part number of the assembly being built for the line item highlighted.  
          Rev The revision of the part number of the assembly being built for the line item highlighted
          Customer This field lists the customer that the assembly highlighted.
          Order Qty This field displays the total order quantity.
          Completed This field displays the quantity complete
          Balance This field displays the balance left to move into FGI. 
          Complete Date This field displays the completed date entered in the work order screen. 
          Priority This field displays the priority setup in the Work Order screen. 
          Process Time (Hours) This field displays the time needed to process the current work center. 
           
           
          The user may sort by Work Order, Product Number, Build quantity, Complete, Balance or Completion Date by depressing the header buttons.
          1.5.4.1.3.5. Hold Tab

          The Hold Tab - displays a list of the Work Orders that have a status of either “Administrative Hold” or “Manufacturing Hold” on them:

           
           


          Hold Tab fields and Definitions 

           

          Work Order # This field lists the assigned Work Order number.
          Part Number The part number of the assembly being built for the line item highlighted.  
          Rev The revision of the part number of the assembly being built for the line item highlighted.  
          Customer This field lists the customer that the assembly highlighted.
          Order Qty This field displays the total order quantity.
          Completed This field displays the quantity complete.
          Balance This field displays the balance left to move into FGI. 
          Complete Date This field displays the completed date entered in the work order screen. 
          Priority This field displays the priority setup in the Work Order screen. 
          Process Time (Hours) This field displays the time needed to process the current work center. 

           
          The user may sort the display by clicking on the Work Order, Product Number, Build Quantity, Complete, Balance or Complete Date header buttons.
          1.5.4.1.3.6. Backlog Tab
          The Backlog Tab - displays a list of Work Orders with a status of "Open" that have been scheduled and still have a balance remaining
           
           
           
          Backlog Tab fields and definitions 
           
          This button gives the user the capability to manually reschedule all currently scheduled jobs to maintain WC due out dates within the Dynamic Scheduling module.
           
           
          Work Order # This field lists the assigned Work Order number.
          Part Number The part number of the assembly being built for the line item highlighted.  
          Rev The revision of the part number of the assembly being built for the line item highlighted.  
          Customer This field lists the customer that the assembly highlighted.
          Order Qty This field displays the total order quantity.
          Completed This field displays the quantity complete.
          Balance This field displays the balance left to move into FGI. 
          Complete Date This field displays the completed date entered in the work order screen. 
          Priority This field displays the priority setup in the Work Order screen. 
          Process Time (Hours) This field displays the time needed to process the current work center. 

           

          The user may sort by Work Order, product Number, Build Quantity, Complete, Back Order or Completion Date by clicking on the header buttons.

          1.5.4.1.4. How To ...... for Dynamic Production Scheduling
          1.5.4.1.4.1. Find Work Order

          Enter Production/Capacity & Scheduling/Dynamic Production Scheduling Module

          The following screen will appear:




           
           
          Depress the Work Order tab.  The following screen will appear:
           
           
          Depress the Find button.  
           

          The following selection will be displayed:


          If you select by Work Order Number, Product Number, Customer Name, or Sales Order Number one of the following lists will be displayed:

          Enter the data into the red box or highlight the item of interest and double click on it.


           
          The Work Order selected will appear on the screen:
           
           

          Depress the Exit button. Depress the Save button.
           
           
           
           
          1.5.4.1.4.2. Find Work Center
          Clicking on the Work Center tab brings up the following screen:




           
          Depress the Find button and the following Work Center selection will be displayed:
           
          Highlight and double click for the Work Center of choice.

          The following will appear for all of the Work Orders listed in the Work Order tab.  The user may sort on any of the following buttons:  Due Out, Work Order #, Priority, WC Qty, WC Process Time, Complete Date, Order Qty, or Balance.


           

          Depressing the WIP (Work in Process) button for the Work Order highlighted will bring up the following screen :

          The quantity currently in each Work Center will display

           
          Depressing the WO Note button will bring up the Notes entered in the Work Order Screen. To add a note, depress the Edit button, type in the note and depress the Save button.
           
          Depress the WC Note button will bring up the notes entered in SFT per work center, for the Work Order highlighted. To add a note, depress the Edit button, type in the note and depress the Save button.
           
          Depressing the Shortage button will bring up the following for the Work Order highlighted:
           

           
          1.5.4.1.4.3. Schedule a Work Order
          Begin by Finding a Work Order, by depressing the Find button, or open the UnScheduled screen.



          Highlight an Unscheduled Work order, then go to the Work Order screen: 
           
           
          To schedule, click on the Edit Button and type in your password. 
           
           

          Todays date will default in the Scheduled Start Date and the Work Order Due date will default in the Scheduled Complete date.  User may change these dates if necessary.

          Note:  If the system cannot schedule by the given Schedule Complete Date (based on the process time required) it will schedule by the earliest possible date. Note:  The Schedule Complete Date may not match the Completion Date or Last Date Out.  System will not allow the Schedule Complete Date to be earlier that the Scheduled Start Date. User will receive the following warning if they have have entered a Schedule Complete Date earlier that the Schedule Start Date and will be required to change the Schedule Complete Date, before proceeding. 





          Depress the Schedule button and the system will schedule the work order using the data entered in the
          Work Order Traveler Setup module.



          User can setup the Priority for each individual work centers within the Work Order screen, create or view the Work Order and/or Work Center Notes, and view any shortages for this Work order as displayed in the following screen..


          Depress the Exit button.  Depress the Save button to save the schedule. Depress the Abandon Changes button to abandon the schedule.
          User will then receive a prompt upon saving asking if user would like to schedule another job, and if yes it will open the "Find" window and continue to the "Edit" mode without asking for the password again.

           

          1.5.4.1.4.4. Re-Schedule a Work Order

          Find a Scheduled Work Order, depress the Edit Button, and enter your password.  

           



          Depress the Exit button.
           
          Once user has completed the changes they may depress the Save button, to save the changes or the Abandon changes button to abandon the changes.
           
           
          NOTE:  There is also a Capacity Planning Trigger option that my be setup to re-schedule all of the jobs that were scheduled and still open automatically.  When the trigger runs, it will recalculate the "In" and "Out" date/time for the Work Centers so the capacity view is current.  
           
           
           
           
          1.5.4.2. Capacity Critical Path
          1.5.4.2.1. Prerequisites for Capacity Critical Path
           
          After activation, "Dynamic Production Scheduling" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           
           
          A Production Schedule must be setup for the Work Order
           
          1.5.4.2.2. Introduction for Capacity Critical Path
          1.5.4.2.3. Fields and Definitions for Capacity Critical Path
          1.5.4.2.3.1. Work Center Tab
           
           

          To create a graph, select Work Center(s), by clicking on the appropriate radial.  Depress "All" to view the graph for all Work Centers.  Depress "One" to view the graph for only one Work Center.

          Depress the radial to view the period you want the graph to cover, Daily, Weekly or Monthly.  Note:  It is the capacity and load for 10 (days, weeks, months)  The tools tips for the radio buttons shows the explanation

          From Type in the From date.

          Depress this button to generate the graph.

          Current Work Center
          This field will be visible when "All" is selected and will display the current work center being viewed.
          Depress this button to view the chart in 3D/2C
          Work Center Capacity Summary The graph will be displayed in this section based on the selections. The bar graph will include all jobs that affect the load (including jobs that are on any type of Hold), so users are not misled about the available capacity.   The grid below will display the status of the job and if the user feels that a job should not be included they may re-schedule it to a future date.
          Priority This field displays the priority setup in the Work Order screen. 
          Work Order Competion Date

          This field displays the completed date entered in the work order screen.   

          Work Order

          This field lists the assigned Work Order number.

          Part Number This feild lists the assigned part number of the assembly being built.   
          Rev The revision of the part number of the assembly being built.
          Balance This field displays the balance left to move into FGI. 
          Status The status of the Work Order
          Customer This field lists the customer that the assembly is being built for.
           
          1.5.4.2.3.2. Work Order Tab
           
          Work Order This field lists all Open (not closed, or cancelled) Work Orders (in work order due date order, earliest first),  to select from once the selection has been made it will display the Work Order the graph is being displayed for. 
          Depress this button to generate the graph
          Work Order Load The graph will be displayed in this section based on the Work Order selected. 
          1.5.4.2.4. How To ...... for Capacity Critical Path
          1.5.4.2.4.1. Create a Graph
          Enter the Production/Capacity &Scheduling/Capacity Critical Path module
           
          The following screen will appear:
           
           
          To create a graph, select Work Center(s), by clicking on the appropriate radial     If One is chosen the Work Order Selection screen will appear:
           
           
          Highlight a Work Center.

          Decide what period you want the graph to cover, Daily, Weekly or Monthly.
           
          Type in the From date. Depress the      button to generate the graph.   
           
           
           
          The bar graph will include all jobs that affect the load (including jobs that are on any type of Hold), so users are not misled about the available capacity.   The grid below will display the status of the job and if the user feels that a job should not be included they may re-schedule it to a future date.
           
           
          To display the detail click on the bar within the BLUE and the detail information for that date will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.  The WOs display at the bottom of the screen are sorted by complete date (disregarding the time).  User may sort the display at the bottom of the screen, by depressing any of the Header titles.   The GREEN on the bar means NO capacity and the RED on the bar means over capacity. 
           
           
           
          A drill down to the Production Schedule module is available within this screen.  If user double clicks on a specific Work Order number in the "Work Order" column the Production Schedule module will open for that work order on the schedule screen, so user may view, edit, etc.  When user is finished viewing the Production Schedule module, they may depress the exit button, and it will bring you back to the Capacity Critical Path screen.
           
          Note:  The graph and the grid may get out of synchronization. If that happens simply click on the “3D/2D” button. The graph button will work also, but may take longer because it will go through the whole process of collecting the data again.
           
           
          WORK ORDER TAB

          Depressing on the Work Order tab will bring up the following:
           
           
           
          Select the desired Work Order from the pull down.  Depress the      button to generate the graph.
           
           
           
          The dates and times displayed in the blue boxes are the dates and times that the product is due to be moved out of the Work Center per the Production Schedule module.    
           
           
           
           
          1.5.4.3. Production Capacity Setup
          1.5.4.3.1. Prerequisites for Production Capacity Setup
          The following setup is required before the user will be able to use the Production Capacity Schedule.
           
          After activation, "Production Capacity Setup" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           
           
          Work Shifts must be setup in the Work Shift setup  module.  The more work hours you have the higher your capacity. 
           
           
           
          In System Setup for Shop Floor Tracking Defaults the system assigns the Average Hrs/Work Day as 24 hours.
           
           
           
           
          The Activity Costing Description and Activity Setup Type Description must be setup in the Activity Costing & Setup Type Setup module.
           
           
          Shifts and activities must be entered to each application Work Center in the Production Work Centers & Activities module.
           
           
          Within the Activity screen, the user checks the Cap Totaling box and enters the applicable Activity Costing information. 

           
           
          The Work Center Activity Setup and Run Times must be entered in the Work Order Traveler Setup module for any applicable product.
           
           
          Check the status of the Work Order of interest – it can not be on Administrative Hold (for example), to complete the scheduling.
           
          1.5.4.3.2. Introduction for Production Capacity Setup

          Capacity is at units/hour/operator-machine. Capacity then depends on the number of resources available, and that includes the number of shifts available. The program determines the duration of the job based on the resources, shifts, and active time during shifts (breaks and meals are excluded). The capacity planning module will stack up the requirements for multiple jobs on the same day and either require the user to add resources, or extend the completion time.

          Once the extensive setup requirements are met, the user may add a resource assignment. There are two views available in the Production Capacity Setup module.  The Capacity Summary screen and the Activity Capacity View screen.

          From there, the user can enter the Dynamic Production Scheduling module and re-schedule Work Orders.

          There is also the opportunity to graphically view the Capacity Critical Path.

          1.5.4.3.3. Fields and Definitions for Production Capacity Setup
          1.5.4.3.3.1. Capacity Summary Screen
           
           
           
          Work Center List of all the Work Centers setup in the Production Work Center and Activities module.
          Sh No The shift number setup in the Work Shift Setup module.
          Description The description of the shift setup in the Work Shift Setup module.
          From The beginning of the shift.
          To The end of the shift.
          Total Hrs Total time actually working, does NOT including breaks and lunches.
           
          Selected Work Center Daily Capacity
           
          Hours The total hours required for the work center highlighted, based on the shift hours and the resource..
          Volume The total volume for the work center highlighted based on the shift hours, resource, and standard rate.

           

           

           

           

          1.5.4.3.3.2. Resource Setup Screen
           
           
           
          Work Center A List of all the Work Centers setup in the Production Work Center and Activities module
          Activity A List of Activities for the Work Centers setup in the Production Work Center and Activities module.
          Cap

          Notice there are three activities listed, but only 2 of them (“Activity-1” and “Activity-5”) will be calculated in the capacity because the “Cap” box has been checked in the Production Work Centers & Activities module.

          Sh No Shift Number assigned to the Work Shift in Work Shift Setup
          Description The description of the shift setup in the Work Shift Setup module.
          From The beginning of the shift.
          To The end of the shift.
          Total Hrs The total hours for the shift. 
          Resource Assignment
          This could be the number of people working during one given shift on a particular day or number of machines, or both, it is up to the user to decide.  The capacity for the given work center will be calculated by multiplying working hours for all the shifts set for any given WC on any give day times resources. Example:  If WC1 has one 8 hour shift set on Monday with number 8 (8 people) as a resource during this shift, the capacity for WC1 for that day would be 8*8=64 hours. 

          NOTE: Each time a user enters the Capacity Setup module, the program checks the current date, and updates the month in the "Resource Assigment" grid to show the 12 months from current month.  For Example:  If the last time a user entered the module was March, so the 12 months are March/2008 to February/2009 (as displayed below).  If user re-enters this module in June, the program will change the 12 months to June/2008 to May/2009 and also assign "1" to the 3 new new added months (March, April, and May/2009). 
          1.5.4.3.3.3. Activity Capacity View Screen
           
           
          Work Center A List of all the Work Centers setup in the Production Work Center and Activities module.
          Activity A List of Activities for the Work Centers setup in the Production Work Center and Activities module.
          Cap Notice there are three activities listed, but only 2 of them (“Activity-1” and “Activity-5”) will be calculated in the capacity because the “Cap” box has been checked in the Production Work Centers & Activities module.
          Sh No Shift Number assigned to the Work Shift in Work Shift Setup module.
          Description The description of the shift setup in the Work Shift Setup module.
          From The beginning of the shift.
          To The end of the shift.
          Total Hrs The total hours for the shift.
           
          Selected Activity Daily Capacity
           
          Hours The total hours required for the work center highlighted, based on the shift hours and the resource.
          Volume The total volume for the work center highlighted based on the shift hours, resource, and standard rate.
           
           
          1.5.4.3.4. How To ....... for Production Capacity Setup
          1.5.4.3.4.1. Production Capacity Setup

          Enter Production/Capacity & Scheduling/Production Capacity Setup
           
          The following screen will appear.  Each Work Center can have different shifts associated with it, but it must have at least one before you can enter the Resource Assignment info.
           
            
           
           
           To setup the Resources and Capacity pertaining to a Work Center, Activity and Shift, depress the Resource Setup tab. 
           
           
           
           
           
          Each time a user enters the Capacity Setup module, the program checks the current date, and updates the month in the "Resource Assigment" grid to show the 12 months from current month.  For Example:  If the last time a user entered the module was March, so the 12 months are March/2008 to February/2009 (as displayed below).  If user re-enters this module in June, the program will change the 12 months to June/2008 to May/2009 and also assign "1" to the 3 new new added months (March, April, and May/2009).
           
          Notice there are three activities listed, but only 2 of them (“Activity-1” and “Activity-5”) will be calculated in the capacity because the “Cap” box has been checked in the Production Work Centers & Activities module.
           
           
          To add/change a Resource Assignment, depress the Edit button and type in your password.  Type in the required Resource Assignment. Depress the Save button to save changes or depress the Abandon Changes button to abandon changes.
           
           
           
          User may enter a different Resource Assignment number in each month for each activity/shift.  Example for March:  Activity-1 Day Shift is 2 and Swing Shift is 1;  Activity-5 Day Shift is 2 and Swing Shift is 2. 
           
          The Activity-1 Standard Rate is 12.00 and the Activity-5 Standard Rate is 5.00  (Setup in the Production Work Centers & Activities module)
           

          The way the system calculates the hours and volume is:

          Monday:   has only the Swing Shift but is associated with both Activity-1 and Activity-5.

           
          Hours:   (7.5*1) + (7.5*2) = 22.50  or  (Swing Shift hours x Resource Assignment for Activity-1) (Print Screen 2)  plus  (Swing Shift hours x Resource Assignment for Activity-5) (Print Screen 4)   =  22.50

          Volume:
             (7.5*1*12) + (7.5*2*5) = 165.00  or  (Swing Shift hours x Resource Assignment for Activity-1) (Print Screen 2)  x  Standard Rate for Activity-1 (12.00) =  90.00  plus  (Swing Shift hours    x   Resource Assignment for Activity-5) (Print Screen 4)   x Activity-5 Standard Rate (5.00)  =  75.00   for a total of  165.00 
           
           
           
          Tuesday:  The same as Monday

          Wednesday:  has both the Day Shift and the Swing Shift and is associated with both Activity-1 and Activity-5.

          Hours:   (4.28*2 + 7.5*1) + (4.28*2 + 7.5*2) = 39.633   or  (Day Shift hours x Resource Assignment for Activity-1) (Print Screen 1)  plus  (Swing Shift hours x Resource Assignment for Activity-1) (Print Screen 2) = 16.06   plus   (Day Shift hours x Resource Assignment for Activity-5) (Print Screen 3)  plus  (Swing Shift hours x Resource Assignment for Activity-5) (Print Screen 4)  =  23.56  for a total of  39.633 

          Volume:  (4.28*2 + 7.5*1)*12  +  (4.28*2 + 7.5*2)*5 =  310.633   or   (Day Shift hours x Resource Assignment for Activity-1) (Print Screen 1)  plus  (Swing Shift hours x Resource Assignment for Activity-1) (Print Screen 2)  x  Activity-1 Standard Rate  (12.00)  =  192.72   plus   (Day Shift hours x Resource Assignment for Activity-5) (Print Screen 3)  plus  (Swing Shift hours x Resource Assignment for Activity-5 (Print Screen 4) x Activity -5 Standard Rate  (5.00) =  117.80  for a total of   310.52
           

           
          (The screen calculates from minutes, not by hours, so there may be a little bit of a difference.)

          Thursday:  The same as Wednesday

          Friday:  The same as Wednesday

          Saturday:  The same as Monday

          Sunday: The same as Monday

           
          To refresh the view in the Capacity Summary tab, highlight the Work Center of interest.  Then highlight the shift of interest.  The view in the Selected Activity Daily Capacity windows will update.
           
          For each Work Center, the user may view the Capacity Setup.  Depress the down arrow next to the Work Center field.  Highlight the applicable Work Center.  Highlight the Activity.  Highlight the Shift.  The view in the Selected Activity Daily Capacity windows will update.
           
           
           
          1.5.4.4. FAQ - Capacity & Scheduling
          Facts and Questions for the Capacity and Scheduling Modules
          1.5.5. Time & Attendance (OPTIONAL Module)
          1.5.5.1. Time & Attendance (T&A)
          1.5.5.1.1. Prerequisites for Time & Attendance
          Prerequisites for Entering a New Time and Attendance Record:

          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase. 
          The Time & Attendance module captures information from the Time Card module regarding the worker logging in for the shift and/or logging into a job (Work Order).  To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com\contactus.aspx
           
          After activation, "Job & Time Attendance" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

          Work Centers 

          Work Centers to be used in Time & Attendance must be defined in the Production Work Centers & Activities.

          Security

          The worker must be set up in System Security and the Work Center identified.

          Work Shift 

          The Work Shift must be setup in Work Shift Setup. 
          Shift

          The worker’s shift must be assigned in the User's Work Shift Setup.

          Work Order

          A Work Order must exist.

          Holidays

          Holidays must have been set up in the Admin/Production Calendar

          Time Type

          Time Type must have been set up in Time & Attendance Types.

           

           

          1.5.5.1.2. Introduction for Time & Attendance

          The Time Card module has two functions:  1) to enter the employee coming in at the start and end of the shift, and 2) to track time spent by each employee on each Work Order (Job), by date and time.  This information will forward to the Time and Attendance module. 

          The Time & Attendance module captures information from the Time Card module regarding the worker logging in for the shift and/or logging into a job (Work Order).  The user or his/her supervisor may also add additional information into Time Log Management, regarding time off for vacation, jury duty, etc.  Several printed reports are available.  The information regarding time spent on each job (Work Order) forwards to the Job Costing Module.

          If you want to keep track of times worked against a Work order you need to use the Time Card and log in/out of a work order.  This will allow you to track hours spent on a specific Work order/job.  At the same time the Time & Attendance module will allow a user to be logged in to a different department/workcenter.

          If you are looking to use the Time & Attendance module to provide the hours for your payroll system we are going to suggest that regardless of the Work orders the user might be logged into, you will still have to have a record created for the hours worked by that employee for that day per Department and/or Workcenter, by having the employee log into the Time card at the beginning of the shift and logging out at the end of the shift, then run the "Employee Time Card Summary" report.  This should give you the information for your payroll. 

          You cannot use a combination of WO log ins and Time Card log ins.

          This explains how the system is calculating the RT and OT.  In Time & Attendance Types setup, user can select the RT and OT calculation method for "Time Card" by shift or by total hours worked.
           
          Please note: it's ONLY for "Time Card",   that means, for other types like Job, Holiday..... the RT and OT is still calculated by shift.  No matter if the user logged in the system (for Time Card) has reached the hours set up in system setup or not,  if the logged in/out time for JOB is outside of the shift time that user was assigned.  It's calculated as over time. 
           
          The time calculated in "Time Card" is more like the tool that user should use to see how much time the user worked during selected time period.  But the time worked in "Job" should only be used for the supervisor to see how the time spent on each job, but not for payroll purpose. 
           
          A checkbox "Allow to enter hours directly in Time Log Management" is in Time & Attendance Types setup, if it's checked, the user will be able to enter hours directly in Time used field for that type in the Time Log Management.  Once user adds a new record for a time log type which is allowed to enter hours directly, the time in and time out fields will be blank out and disabled, and user can enter how many hours for that record directly.  Otherwise, the system works the same way as before (the user has to enter time in/out).  
           
          The system only allows user to enter "RT" no "OT" can be entered.  Therefore, user can not check type "W" or "T" to enter hours directly.  The system will have to calculate the total log in time and determine what's the RT and OT for type "W" and "T".
           
          The time in and out will be also blank if the type is "H" -- holiday, and the system will use shift to calculate the RT, no OT will be calculated.
           
           
           

           

          1.5.5.1.3. Fields & Definitions for Time & Attendance (T&A)
          1.5.5.1.3.1. Time Card
           
          Time Clock Depressing on the Time Clock button will cause the system to prompt for the user’s password
          OK Depress OK, the system will log the employee in at the beginning of the shift
          Cancel Depress Cancel to cancel Log in or Out
          WO In or Out A worker should use the Work Order In or Out button only when completing a job or starting a job (Work Order).
          Employee Name Default in Employee's Name from Password entered
          WC ID Displays Work Center ID
          Work Center/Department Displays the Work Center or Department 
          Work Order Displays Work Order number
          Date In/Out Displays Date Logged in or Out
          Time In/Out Displays Time Logged in or Out
          Hours Calculates total time logged in 
          1.5.5.1.3.2. Time Log Management

          Field & Definitions:

          Employee ID

          The workers Identification as entered in Security Setup .

          Last Name

          The Last name of the worker. 

          From Date

          The first date to be included in the Time Log.

          To Date

          The through date to be viewed for the Time Log.

          Date In

          The Date the employee logged in for the shift or for the job.

          Time In

          The time the employee logged in for the shift or into the job.

          Date Out

          The date the employee logged out of the shift or out of the job.

          Time Out

          The time the employee logged out of the shift or out of the job.

          Hours

          The difference between Time In and Time Out.

          H A check in this box indicates that this is a Holiday
          Type

          The type of time logged as defined by the Time & Attendance Types in System Set up.

          Work Center/Dept

          The Work Center or Department the employee is assigned to in Security Setup .

          WO Number

          The Work Order number logged into in the Time Card module.

          O/T Hours This is hours worked outside of normal hours based on the user setup.  (This can be hours in a shift, hours in a day, or hours in the week).
          Total RT for Jobs

          The total Regular time for Type (W) only

          Total RT for Other

          The total Regular time of all other types than (W) or (T) 

          Total RT for Time Card  Total Regular time for (T) 
          Total Regular Hours Grand Total Regular hours for all Types 
          Total OT for Jobs

          The total Overtime for Type (W) only 

          Total OT for Others 

          The total Overtime of all other types than (W) or (T) 

          Total OT for Time Card  Total Overtime time for (T) 
          Total Over Time Grand Total Overtime hours for all Types  
            Depress the button to re-calculate hours after editing, or adding a record 
            Depress this button to update Holidays.  This will add the holiday hours to each employees records according to their shift setup.  Note:  The Holiday must be setup in the Admin/Production Calendar.
            Depress this button to Update the Date Range.  This refreshes the dates displayed in the lower grid according to the from and to date fields.

          1.5.5.1.4. How To ..... for Time & Attendance
          1.5.5.1.4.1. Add Time Card Information

          You can access the Time Card screen two ways: 

          1. Setting up the Users Home Screen as the Time Card within the System Security

            So when user enters ManEx and enters their password the Time Card Screen will appear. 

          1. Through Shop Floor Tracking by Work Order 

          Enter Production/Shop Floor Tracking by Work Order Module  

          The following screen will appear:

          Depress the "TIME LOG" button. The Time Card screen will appear:

           
          If user is assigned to work center in security, after user logs in Time Clock or Job, the default work center will defaulted in,  if the assigned work center does not exist for that work order user will receive the following message, depress OK and select a WC ID that exists for that work order.

           
           
          If user is assigned to department in security, after the user logs in Time Clock, the new work center ID field will be invisible because there is no department ID.  If the user logs in Job, the cursor will move to work center ID after user enters the WO No.  At this time user can enter either WC ID or select WC from pulldown and the other field should refresh to show same value.

          TIME CLOCK

          Depressing on the Time Clock button will cause the system to prompt for the user’s password.  Once the password is entered, depress OK, the system will log the employee in at the beginning of the shift and display as follows:

          This will forward to the Time and Attendance module as the worker having logged in for the shift.  IMPORTANT NOTE:The worker should use the Time Card button ONLY when reporting into the shift and leaving the shift. While still logged into the shift, you may log in and out to different WO's.  DO NOT log out of shift until Shift has ended.

          When a user logs in work orders, and he/she has not logged in time card, the system will log the user in time card automatically.  When a user logs out the time card, if he/she has any work order still logged in, the system will log the user out of all work orders automatically.  The time used in Time card and Work orders are calculated separately and saved in separate tables. 

          The Time Clock part basically will calculate how long the user logs in the system, no matter what work center/department the user was logged in and out. But WO In/Out does consider work centers.  So User can log in multiple work orders/work centers to do jobs.

          Work Order In or Out

          Depressing the WO In or Out will cause the system to prompt for the Work Order number.  This will log the worker onto the specific job once the password is given. Depress the Ok button. This will forward to the Time and Attendance module as the worker having logged in for the specific job.  This will also forward to the Job Costing module. IMPORTANT NOTE: The worker should use the Work Order In or Out button only when completing a job or starting a job (Work Order).

          To Log out of WO once the work on that job is complete, depress the WO In or Out, enter password, depress the OK button. You are logging out will appear ont he screen:

          When shift has ended you will then depress the Time Clock button, enter password, and depress OK, to log out of the shift:

           

           

           

          1.5.5.1.4.2. Time And Attendance

          Enter Production/Time & Attendance/Time & Attendance Module

           

          The Time Log Management screen will appear:

          Select Employee:  Once you have entered the Time Log Management module, select either radial for Employee ID or Last Name.  Enter in the Employee ID or Last Name in the Red Box and depress the Enter key.

          Select To From Dates:  The system defaults to the current date.  If you want to change this, type in the desired From Date and the To Date.  Depress the Update Date Range button.  For the selected employee, all of the activity in that date range will display.  Some of the activity would be from the Time Card module, but the user may add activity, also. 

          Add:  To add an activity, depress the Add action button. The system will prompt for the password. The cursor will go to the Date In column. (The system will default to the current date for Date In and the current time for Time In).

          Type the Date In. The system will calculate the Hours.


          Select the Type by placing the cursor on the down arrow and select the type from the Pull down

          These are defaulted in from the Time and Attendance Setup module.


          Select the Type by placing the cursor on that column. Depress on the down arrow and select the type from the Pull down: 

          Depress the Save changes action button to save changes, depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes.

          Edit:   To edit depress the Edit action button. You may edit the Times, Dates, Type, Work center and Work Order Number. 

          Depress the Save changes action button to save changes, depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes. 

          Delete: To delete a line, highlight that line and depress the Delete action button.

          Cancel:  To cancel an entry, depress the Cancel action button.

          Time Log Management Screen with data:

          1.5.5.1.5. Reports - Time & Attendance

          To obtain the Time & Attendance reports, depress the Reports button.The following screen will appear:

          Select the output you desire by clicking on the radial.Choose from Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

          Highlight the report.

          Depress the option tab.

          Note that the Time columns is expressed in hours and fractions of hours and not in hours and minutes.

           

          Employee Time Card Detail

          Enter the desired date range.  Depress the radial for either Work Center or Department.

          Depress on the Work Center down arrow and select the appropriate Work Center.

          Highlight the desired employee and then depress the > button.  If you want all employees, depress the >> button.

          Depress the OK button.

          This report is designed to calculate the total hours user is logged into system, regardless if it is linked to a Work Order or not.

           

          The following is printed:

          Employee Time Card Summary

          Enter the desired date range. 

          Depress the OK button.

          This report is designed to calculate the total hours user is logged into system, regardless if it is linked to a Work Order or not.

           
           

          The following is printed:

          Employee Work Order and Work Center Activity

           Enter the desired date range. 

          Highlight the desired employee and then depress the > button.  If you want all employees, depress the >> button.

          Depress the OK button.

          This report is designed for calculating user logging in/out of all jobs within the desired date range.

           

          The following is printed:

          Work Order Time Log Activity

          Select to View Work Order Time Log Activity for a Single Work order, then enter the Work Order in the box and depress the OK button, or Select to View the Work Order List and highlight the desired Work order number and then depress the > button.  If you want all Work orders, depress the >> button.

          Depress the OK button.

          This report is designed for calculating all activity for the desired Work Order number.
           
           
          NOTE:  If the user has reached the maximum number for the mover list, a system error may occur when the user selects recently created WO's.  They MUST then use the Single Work Order selection and enter the Work Order.
           

          The following is printed:

           

           

          1.5.5.2. User's Work Shift Setup

          1.5.5.2.1. Prerequisites for Users Work Shift Setup
          Prerequisites for Entering a User’s Shift Setup:
           
          After activation, "Job & Time Attendance" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.  

          A Work Center

          The Work Centers to be used in Time Card must be defined in the Production Work Centers & Activities setup.

          Security

          The worker must be set up in System Security and the Work Center identified.

          Work Shift Setup

          The shift to be assigned in this module must have been previously set up in Work Shift Setup

          1.5.5.2.2. Introduction for Work Shift Setup

          The worker shift must be assigned to a user within this screen for the Time Card and Attendance and Time Card modules.    

           

          1.5.5.2.3. Fields & Definitions for User Work Shift Setup

          Field Definitions of Users Work Shift Setup

          Last Name The last name of the user as set up in the Security module
          First Name

          The first name of the user as set up in the Security module.

          Work Center/Department

          The Work Center or Department assigned to the user in the Security module.

          Shift Description

          This is the shift assigned to the worker.

          Exempt

          A check in this column denotes that the worker is exempt from overtime pay.

          1.5.5.2.4. How To ..... for User Work Shift Setup
          1.5.5.2.4.1. Add a User Work Shift

          Enter Production/Time & Attendance/User Work Shift Setup Module  

          The following screen will appear listing all of the employee's:

          To enter the work shift for the particular user, highlight the user:

          Depress the Edit action button.  Type in your password.  Place cursor in the Shift Description column. The following shift options will appear:

          Select the desired Shift Description.  Depress the Save record action button, to save, changes depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes.

          1.5.5.3. ManEx Minutes - T&A
          1.5.6. Job Costing (OPTIONAL Module)
          1.5.6.1. Prerequisites for Job Costing
          Prerequisites for Running a New Job Costing:

          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase.  
          The Job Costing Module is used to record the details of the costs associated with a particular job or work order.  To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com\contactus.aspx

          After activation, "Job Costing" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
          System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           

          Customer

          A customer must exist in the Customer Information module.

          Product number  

          The part number must exist for a product or part in the Inventory Control module.

          BOM  The Bill of Materials components must be entered in the Inventory Control module.
          Work Order  The Work Order must exist in the Work Order Mgmt module. 
          Work Center and Activities

          Work Center and Activities must be setup for the product in the Work Order Traveler Setup module. 

          Standard Times

          The standard times for each Work Center in the Product’s routing must be set up in  Work Order Traveler Setup module. 

          Hourly Charge Rate

          Hourly Charge Rate for each Work Center must be set up in  Production Work Centers & Activities  module.

          Sales Order 

          A Sales Order must exist in the Sales Order module. 

          Kitting, Allocation

          The order must be kitted in the Kitting & Shortage Management module. 

          Time Card and Time & Attendance The worker must log in and out of each job (Work Order).
          Purchase Order

          The Work Order must be referenced in the Purchase Order if the user wishes to use the Purchase Order allocated to the specific Work Order method of costing for the actual. 

           

          1.5.6.2. Introduction for Job Costing

          The Job Costing Module is used to record the details of the costs associated with a particular job or work order.  The actual material(actual can be standard, Purchase Order allocated to the specific Work Order or the Weighted Purchase Cost of the last 5 Purchase Orders) and labor costs are compared with the standard or “budgeted” costs and provision is made to include miscellaneous charges.  The user may also compare the standard (budget 0 to items purchased specifically for the Work Order (please see the Purchasing Management  procedures) or to the weighted average of the last 5 purchases.  A variance is calculated and also the variance %.

          Once a Work Order is created, the user may preview the “budget” information for both material and labor.

          Time card information and kitting forward into Job Costing.  As each component of the Work Order is completed, the Job Costing Module captures the required information.  Please refer to the Time Card and Time & Attendance Management procedures.

          1.5.6.3. Fields & Definitions for Job Costing
          1.5.6.3.1. Job Cost Summary
           

          Job Cost Field Definitions

           

          Work Order     The number assigned to the selected Work Order. 
          Customer  The name of the customer for which this Work Order applies.
          Build Qty   The number of units which must be completed for selected Work Order.
          Balance Qty    The number of units which still must be completed
          % Complete The percentage  of units already completed.
          WO Kit Status The status of the Work Order kit.
          Sales Order The number of the Sales Order to which this Work Order applies. 
          Product #/Rev   The number of the make part to be assembled and the revision number pertaining to the part number.
          Class  The classification of the product to be assembled.
          Type     The type with the classification of the product to be assembled.
          Description  The description of the part to be assembled.
          WO Status The status of the Work Order “Job Status”

           
          Budgeted
           
          Material Calculation of the BOM Qty information, Std cost, Setup Scrap & Scrap % 
          Labor Calculation based on the Hourly Rate (applied to each Work Center within the System Setup), Setup & Run Times (entered within the WO Traveler Setup)
           
          Actual  - The actual is taken from the first time the parts are issued to the kit.    The cost is gathered from inventory issue table
           
          Material
          Calculation based on the actual parts issued to the Kit (Over-issues, Shortages, etc . . .) and the parts Standard Cost (Std Cost is setup within the Inventory Control)  The cost is gathered from inventory issue table.  The table saves the standard when the issue record is created.
          Labor

          Calculation based on the standard Hourly Rate and total time recorded (Reg and OT) per each user through the Time & Attendance/Time Card Modules.

          Other Other Costs added to the Work Order.
           
          Variance
           
          Material
          Calculated difference between the Budgeted and Actual Material 
          Labor Calculated difference between the Budgeted and Actual Labor
           
           
          Var%
           
          Material Variance amount divided by the Budgeted Material amount
          Labor Variance amount divided by the Budgeted Labor amount
           
          Selling Price
           
          Standard Standard pricing information pulled from the Standard Price List Information module
          SO Price Actual Sales Order Total entered in the SO Module (Order qty x Price each
          Variance Actual Sales Order Total entered in the SO Module (Order qty x Price each
          Var% Variance amount divided by the Standard  
           
          Actual Costed By:
           
          Standard Cost Is based on the standard cost of the components at the time of issue. 
          PO for the Current WO In order to get the “real” costs of the components, the user must place the Purchase Orders for the components and pre-allocate them to the specific work order.
          Weight Cost - Last 5 Is based on the weighted cost of the components at the time of issue.
           
          Graph show:
           
          $ Amount  Select this radio to display the graph by the total $$ amount
          % (Tot Budget-100%) Select this radio to display the graph by percentage
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
          1.5.6.3.2. Other Costs
           
          Other Cost Field Description
           
          Work Order

          The number assigned to the selected Work Order. 

          Cost Description

          This selection is setup within the Quote Defaults module.

          Amount Total Amount of Other Costs
          Save Date When record is saved the date will defaultin
          Save By When record is saved the initials of the user will default in
          1.5.6.4. How To ...... for Job Costing
          1.5.6.4.1. Find a Job Cost Record

          Enter Production/Job Costing Module   

          The following screen will appear:

                                

          Depress the Find button.The following screen will appear:

          Select the desired Search by method by clicking on the applicable radial.

          The graphics for that Work Order will appear:

          Select between Standard Cost, PO for the Current WO or Weighted Cost – Last 5.  The actual material cost display will change. 

          Job Cost Material Detail

          To view the Job Cost Material Detail, highlight the green graph bar display and click. The following detail will become available:  If you would like to see the formula's used to calculate the budget information see Article 2159.

           

          Job Cost Labor Detail

          To view the Job Cost Labor Detail, highlight the green graph bar display and click.The following detail will become available:

           

          Percentage Radial

          To see percentages rather than dollars display, select the Percentage radial in the Graph View section.  The following view will become available

          Other Cost

          To enter an Other Actual Cost, depress the Other Cost tab.  The following will open:

            

          To add a cost, highlight the Cost Description Field.  Select from among the following:

          This selection is setup within the Quote Defaults module.

           

          Enter in the amount.
           

          To add another Cost, depress the "down arrow" key and the program will add a new record automatically. 

          Once all changes and adds are complete, depress the Save record icon to save changes, or depress the Abandon changes icon to abandon changes.

          1.5.6.4.2. Formula's used to Calculate Information

          IF Exclude Scrap and Setup Scrap

          QtyReqTotal= WoBldQty x BomQty

          ELSE

                QtyReqTotal = WOBldQty x BomQty+(WoBldQty*BomQty*BomScrap)/100

          ENDIF

           

          Ext_cost_total=QtyReqTotal X Stdcost

           

          IF Exclude Scrap and Setup Scrap

          SetupScrap_cost = 0

          ELSE

          SetupScrap_cost = Setupscrap/StdBldQty x Stdcost

          ENDIF

           

          Total Budget cost = SUM of Ext_cost_total + (SUM of SetupScrap_cost x WoBldQty)

           
           
          How is the Actual Labor time calcualated within the Job Costing Module -  It is actually controlled from the Prod WC/Activity Setup screen.  Here you assign a hourly rate to each work centerThen within the T&A log the users can select the Work order and therefore the WC from the routing.  The Job Costing will then take the hours entered * WC hourly rate.  The T&A Setup Types do not have an option to assign any value to it – so this does not dictate any Value within the Job costing module.
          1.5.6.5. Reports - Job Costing
          To obtain Job Costing Reports, depress the Reports icon.

          The following reports are available in Job Costing Module
          .
           

          Highlight the report of interest, and depress the Option tab:

          Labor Cost Review Rpt
           
          The following screen will appearSelect the desired radial option and required selections, then enter in the Closed After Date. 

          Radial Selection DefinitionsCustomer List:  Will display a list of customers in the Customer Select box.  Highlight the customer of interest and depress the > button.  If you want to select all the customers depress the >>.  The report will display all the work orders that have "Kit Closed Date" empty or kit was closed after the date entered by the user.   Kit Rel After:  WIll display all the work orders that had "Kit Released" after the date entered by the user.  Closed WO After:  Will display all the work orders that had "Kit Closed" after the date entered by the user.   WO List:  Will display a list of Work Orders to select from.  Highlight the Work Order(s) of interest and depress the > button.  If you want to select all the Work Orders depress the >>.  The the report will display the data only for the Work Orders selected that have "KIt Closed Date" empty or kit was closed after the date entered by the user.
           
          Note:  That the system will list all Work Order numbers.  If the user selects a "Cancelled" work order from the listing the system will then display a "No Records Match Criteria Entered" message.  This is because the reports are setup not to pull cancelled work orders forward.

           



          Depress the Ok button.  The following report will be displayed. 
           
          There is also a Labor Cost Summary Review Rpt available:





          Material Cost Review Rpt

          The following screen will appearSelect the desired radial option and required selections, then enter in the Closed After Date. 

          Radial Selection DefinitionsCustomer List:  Will display a list of customers in the Customer Select box.  Highlight the customer of interest and depress the > button.  If you want to select all the customers depress the >>.  The report will display all the work orders that have "Kit Closed Date" empty or kit was closed after the date entered by the user.   Kit Rel After:  WIll display all the work orders that had "Kit Released" after the date entered by the user.  Closed WO After:  Will display all the work orders that had "Kit Closed" after the date entered by the user.   WO List:  Will display a list of Work Orders to select from.  Highlight the Work Order(s) of interest and depress the > button.  If you want to select all the Work Orders depress the >>.  The the report will display the data only for the Work Orders selected that have "KIt Closed Date" empty or kit was closed after the date entered by the user.
           
          Note:  That the system will list all Work Order numbers.  If the user selects a "Cancelled" work order from the listing the system will then display a "No Records Match Criteria Entered" message.  This is because the reports are setup not to pull cancelled work orders forward.

          Depress the Ok button.  The following report will be displayed.
           
           
          There is also a Material Cost Summary Review Rpt available:


          Miscellaneous Cost Detail Review Rpt

          The following screen will appearSelect the desired radial option and required selections, then enter in the Closed After Date. 

          Radial Selection DefinitionsCustomer List:  Will display a list of customers in the Customer Select box.  Highlight the customer of interest and depress the > button.  If you want to select all the customers depress the >>.  The report will display all the work orders that have "Kit Closed Date" empty or kit was closed after the date entered by the user.   Kit Rel After:  WIll display all the work orders that had "Kit Released" after the date entered by the user.  Closed WO After:  Will display all the work orders that had "Kit Closed" after the date entered by the user.   WO List:  Will display a list of Work Orders to select from.  Highlight the Work Order(s) of interest and depress the > button.  If you want to select all the Work Orders depress the >>.  The the report will display the data only for the Work Orders selected that have "KIt Closed Date" empty or kit was closed after the date entered by the user.
           
          Note:  That the system will list all Work Order numbers.  If the user selects a "Cancelled" work order from the listing the system will then display a "No Records Match Criteria Entered" message.  This is because the reports are setup not to pull cancelled work orders forward

          Depress the Ok button.  The following report will be displayed.




          There is also a Miscellaneous Cost Summary Review Rpt available:
           
           

          Performance Detail Review Rpt

          The following screen will appearSelect the desired radial option and required selections, then enter in the Closed After Date. 

          Radial Selection DefinitionsCustomer List:  Will display a list of customers in the Customer Select box.  Highlight the customer of interest and depress the > button.  If you want to select all the customers depress the >>.  The report will display all the work orders that have "Kit Closed Date" empty or kit was closed after the date entered by the user.   Kit Rel After:  WIll display all the work orders that had "Kit Released" after the date entered by the user.  Closed WO After:  Will display all the work orders that had "Kit Closed" after the date entered by the user.   WO List:  Will display a list of Work Orders to select from.  Highlight the Work Order(s) of interest and depress the > button.  If you want to select all the Work Orders depress the >>.  The the report will display the data only for the Work Orders selected that have "KIt Closed Date" empty or kit was closed after the date entered by the user.
           
          Note:  That the system will list all Work Order numbers.  If the user selects a "Cancelled" work order from the listing the system will then display a "No Records Match Criteria Entered" message.  This is because the reports are setup not to pull cancelled work orders forward


          Depress the Ok button. The following report will be displayed.

            

          There is also a Performance Summary Review Rpt available:

          1.5.6.6. ManEx Minutes (JC)
          1.5.7. Project Setup Module (OPTIONAL Module)
          1.5.7.1. Prerequisites for Project Setup

          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase.  The Project Setup module gives the user the capability to tie multiple Sales Orders and Work Orders together.  To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com\contactus.aspx

          After activation, "Project Setup" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
          System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           
          You have the option to have the Project # either assigned automatically or manually, within the Number System module.

          Note:
           If you choose to use the Project Management module for separating internal inventory per customer, then you can abbreviate the customer name as an on-going project number. To do this you will have to change the numbering setup to Manual
          .
           
          Customer must be setup in the Customer Information module .




          1.5.7.2. Introduction for Project Setup

          The Project Setup module gives the user the capability to tie multiple Sales Orders and Work Orders together. Projects can also have sub-projects or Parent projects associated with them.

           

          Multiple Projects can be established for a specific sales order.  A Project (only one) may be assigned to each line on the sales order.  Multiple lower level Projects (“sub-Projects”) can be established within a Project if necessary.  These Projects do not have an assembly number, and do not drive MRP requirements.  They simply define a structure into which Work Orders (WOs) are assigned and cost information is collected.

           

          Once a sales order and related Projects are established, one or more WOs are released at a level equal to or below the Project.  These WOs are identified as belonging to the Project, they have an assembly number, and they drive MRP requirements through an indented BOM.  Following release of this top level WO(s) and assignment of the WO to the Project, ManEx knows that all lower-level proposed WOs driven by that assembly also belong to the same Project.  MRP reports will define all those actions required for the full assembly build, and will clearly indicate the Project number assigned to the top-level WO that is driving MRP demand.  MRP will, for Sales Orders and Work orders with Project tags, necessarily revert to a Lot for Lot MRP policy, over-riding any MRP policy established for the individual parts required.  This is required to maintain the Project information through the lower level requirements.  Minimum and Multiple Order Quantities, if any, would still be applied to the individual order actions.

           

          MRP is done without regard to allocations.  It runs strictly off of the demand and supply requirements, and the timing for each.  Therefore, when MRP runs, if a part is on hand and allocated to another Project, MRP will consider it available for all Projects which have requirements for the part.  If there are insufficient parts available to meet the total demand, then MRP will create order actions for the part (and Project) at the point the part becomes unavailable.

           

          Parts may be purchased and “pegged” to the Project at purchase by the buyers, using the MRP order action information.  Purchases into general inventory and to specific work orders are also allowed.  Through the receiving process, parts are automatically allocated to the Project consistent with the PO.  Parts that are not on any BOM may be purchased, received, allocated, deallocated, and reallocated to an existing Project.

           

          For the purposes of allocation to or kitting of lower level WOs that belong to the same Project, ManEx considers any part allocated to the Project to be available (without deallocation/reallocation) for the lower level WO, as long as the work order refers to the project.   

           

          Project Module Overview
           
          The Project Management module is designed to operate in two modes and they are:
           

          • Track Buy and FGI Material by Customer 
          • Track Various Sales Orders and/or Work Orders by Project or Customer

           Track Material by Customer

           

          In the Electronic Contract Manufacturing environment, it is important to be able to identify materials purchased for each customer and provide visibility to the current status of the inventory balances and open purchase orders.  The Inventory Control module is able to keep track of all internal material and customer consigned material but it does not track the internal inventory by the customer for which the material was purchased.  Keeping track of internal material by customer is important because if a customer’s order for products are cancelled or becomes obsolete, you will need to know the FGI and raw material exposure (quantity in the inventory and open purchase orders) for back billing the customer. Also, some customers request the status of inventory material value purchased specifically for them, including the open purchase orders.

           

          There are several possible ways to track open purchase orders and inventory quantity by customer not using the ManEx’s Project Management module but they requires number of manual processes, and the system has to be bent in a creative way to make these work.  A couple of those methods are:

           

          1.                  Assign a warehouse for each customer, with manual provision for tracking the material requirements by customer.  Track the inventory requirements through the purchase process and during the kitting and shortage process.  Some custom reports are needed to report the material activities by Customer.  The option prevents the use of auto-kitting.

           

          2.                  Use customer’s part number, with customer prefix at the front of each part number, as the internal part number.  This will give the users the visibility for the demand, the purchase process and in the kitting and shortage process.  The disadvantage with this method is that the company will not be able to aggregate the consolidated requirements for a lower unit cost.  Users will need to open and track a lot more purchase orders and increase the volume for receiving and inspecting the parts.  This will add manual labor hours to many functions and increased chances for errors at each step.  Additionally, each time a customer is added, the users will be increasing the size of the item master file.  Users lose the visibility and efficiencies of common parts for use in the inventory if each customer has their part numbers as the internal part number.  Finally, the company also has to create some custom reports to get inventory information by customer.
           
          The Project Management module was created to take out all the manual activities and material handling errors associated with tracking inventory and cost by customer moving mass amounts of part numbers and material. 
           
          This module tracks purchased material by assigning a sales order/work order product (or even a specific components) by customer to the Project in the Project Management module.  The demand is created with traceable customer identification when the Project Management module is active.  When issuing a purchase order, the module allows the user to peg the order to one or more projects with the same part, and with multiple quantities and delivery splits for easy control.  When the parts are received, they are automatically allocated to the assigned projects and the material received can only be used by work orders associated with the same project.  This is accomplished in the various work order kitting and shortage process.  For the integrated visibility, all this can be tied to the Sales Order, Work Order, Inventory and to the customer.  Customer material can be monitored through the inventory control module or through the Project Management module reports.  Through these reports, user will be able to analyze inventory balances by customer, view open sales orders backlog by project and view sales order history by project allowing user to see the amount of business transacted with a specific customer.
           
          Track Various Sales Orders and/or Work Orders by Project
           
          Customers requiring the ability to track Project or a Manufacturing Program Management that has multiple sub-projects and/or multiple products can use this module until the end of the product life cycle.  This module allows user to track all associated project sales orders, work orders and purchased materials.  Use of the material tracking by project method is described above.
           
           
          1.5.7.3. Fields and Definitions for Project Setup
          1.5.7.3.1. Project List Tab
           
           
           
          Customer Filter Select the proper radio button to view projects for All customer or Select a specific customer from pull down list
          Status Filter Select the proper radio button to view only Open Projects or All Projects
          Depress this button to apply the filters selected
          Project Status Status of prjoect highlighted
          Project No Project Number assigned
          Customer Customer assigned to Project
          Project Description Description assigned to Project
          Project Reference Reference assigned to Project
          Due Date Due Date of Project if any
          Parent Proj. Parent Project if applicable
          1.5.7.3.2. Project Details
           
           
          Project Number Project Number
          Order Date Order Date
          Project Due Date Project Due Date if applicable
          Job Status Status of Project
          Customer Name Customer project is linked to
          Parent Project Parent Project if applicable
          Clear Parent Depress to Clear Parent Project
          Description Description of Project
          Project Reference Number Project Reference Number
          Project Notes Any special project notes assigned to project
          1.5.7.3.3. Indented Project Trees
           
          Project Number Project Number
          Customer Name Customer Name assinged to project
          Order Date Order date for project
          Project Due Date Project due date if applicable
          Description Description of project
          Project Reference Number Reference number assigned to project
          Project Number Project number assgned to project
          Status Status of project
          PARENT PROJECTS Name of parent projects
          Project Number Project number assigned to project
          Status Status of project
          CHILD PROJECTS Name of child projects
          1.5.7.4. How To ......... for Project Setup
          1.5.7.4.1. Find a Project
          Enter Production/Project Setup
           
          The first tab that appears is the Project List.  This will list summary information regarding all open projects.
           
           

          If user wants to see projects for just one customer, choose the Select radial under the Customer Filter.  A Selection field will appear. Depress the down arrow and a list of customers will display, as illustrated:

           

          Highlight the Customer of interest and Depress the Apply Filters button.

           

           
          Only the projects for the customer selected will appear. To change the selection from just Open Projects to ALL Project records, choose the “All” radial under the Status Filter.  Depress the Apply Filters button. All types of Statuses will appear, as follows: 
           
           
          Highlight the Project of Interest.  




          Depress the Project Details tab and the following screen will appear:
           
           
          Depress the Indented Project Trees tab.  The following screen is available:
           
           
           
           
          1.5.7.4.2. Add a Project
          Enter Production/Project Setup
           
          The first tab that appears is the Project List.  This will list summary information regarding all open projects.
           
           
           
          Depress the Project Details tab and the following screen will appear:
           
           
           
          Depress the Add action button and enter password.  The following screen will appear:
           
           
           
          Enter in the following information:  Project Number (if setup to manual), New Order Date (if desired), Project Due Date, Select the Customer from the pull down list.

          Assign a Parent Project (if desired) to this project (another project that is identified with the SAME customer), depress the down arrow next to the Parent Project filed.  A list of all of the project associated with the SAME customer will appear.  Choose one from the list. 

          Project Description, Project Reference Number, and any project notes (if desired). 

          Depress the Save record action button to save changes or depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes. 

           
          1.5.7.4.3. Edit a Project
          Enter Production/Project Setup
           
          The first tab that appears is the Project List.  This will list summary information regarding all open projects.
           
           
           
          Highlight the Project you want to Edit.  Depress the Project Details tab and the following screen will appear:
           
           
           
          Depress the Edit action button and enter password.  The following screen will appear:
           
           
           
           
           
          Edit the following information:  New Order Date (if desired), Project Due Date, Job Status, Parent project, Description, Project Reference Number, or Project Notes. 

          Depress the Save record action button to save changes or depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes. 

           
          1.5.7.5. Reports - Project Setup

          Depress the Reports menu icon, the following selections will appear.

           

           
           
          Project Inventory Status Report -  This report shows all of the inventory and inventory value on hand that is allocated to open projects.

          Highlight the Project Inventory Status report.   Select either detail or summary.  Depress the Options Tab.  The following screen will appear:

          Select to display just Open projects or All. 
           
          Select the Project by highlighting the one you wish and depressing the > button.  If you want all projects, depress the >> button.








          Depress the OK button. 

           


          The following report will be displayed.
           
           
          Project Back Order Status / SO Report - This report set shows all of the assemblies and their value that are open for shipment against open projects.
           
           
          Highlight the Project Back Order Status / SO report.  Select either detail or summary.  Depress the Options tab.  The following screen will appear:
          Select to display just Open projects or All. 
           
          Select the Project by highlighting the one you wish and depressing the > button.  If you want all projects, depress the >> button.








          Depress the OK button. 

           
           
          The following report will display:
           
           
           
          Project History  / SO Report - This report set shows tall of the assemblies and their value for ALL projects, regardless of project status.
           
           
          Highlight the Project History / SO report.  Select either detail or summary.  Depress the Options tab.  The following screen will appear:
          Select to display just Open projects or All
           
          Select the Project by highlighting the one you wish and depressing the > button.  If you want all projects, depress the >> button.








          Depress the OK button. 

           

          The following report will be displayed:
           
           
           
           

          1.6. Quality/Engineering
          1.6.1. Statistical Quality Control (SQC) (OPTIONAL Module)
          1.6.1.1. Prerequisites for SQC
          Required Prerequisites: 

          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase. To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com\contactus.aspx


          After activation, "Statistical Quality Control" (SQC) access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
          Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

          Customer  The Customer database must be established for Consigned part numbers.
          Part number  The part number must exist for a product or part in the item master.
          Defect Codes The Defect Codes must be established in the Quality Defect Codes setup.  The options for the viewing of serial numbers, number of times that “No Problem Found” are permitted, defects displayed for routing or all must be established in the setup.

           Optional Prerequisites:

           Pricing

          Otherwise must be entered in Sales Order.

           Bill of Material-Locations

          If locations (reference designators) are entered in the Bill of Material, the user may identify specific locations for each defect.

           BOM Appvd Mfgrs

          If the AVLs are entered in the Bill of Materials, the user may identify specific manufacturers for each defect.

          1.6.1.2. Introduction for SQC

          The STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL (SQC) Module ~ Defect Entry screen is used to record defects and inspection results during the movement of product through the production Work In Process (WIP). The user has a choice of entering data in a batch mode or in an in-line mode See Article #1769 for further detail.   Batch mode is the entry of data accumulated during an inspection period, and is data entry only (does NOT transfer product from one work center to another).  In-line mode is where inspection is done at the end of a work center or activity, and the product is to be moved to another work center based on the results of the inspection. In-line inspection would require inspection of 100% of the product, in order to move the product from one step to another. It also requires the use of a ManEx workstation at the inspection station, so the data may be entered real-time.

           

          Defect entry is based on having a standard nomenclature for the defects in the Quality Defect Codes setup, so that the users do not have the option of creative descriptions. The defects in the setup may be ascribed to specific work centers, to minimize the number of defects that an inspector (or data entry person) has to view to find the appropriate defect.

           

          Defect information may be recorded by work order and/or by serial number. Defects may be associated with a specific “location” (reference designator) on the assembly, providing the user has entered reference designators for the assembly in its Bill of Material .  

           

          If the user chooses to enter reference designator locations for the defects, and has entered reference designators on the Bill of Materials, then ManEx will prompt the user to select the manufacturer for the part used at the location, as well as automatically enter the internal part number at that location.

           

          There is also provision for tracking the diagnostics and repair of each defect and assembly. The user may view the history of the assembly’s movement through production, and all of the defects associated with each assembly.

           

          Data entered for defects will be used in the Statistical Quality Control module for charting pareto charts, control charts and more.
          1.6.1.3. Fields & Denfintions for SQC
          1.6.1.3.1. Defect Data Collection
          1.6.1.3.1.1. Quality Inspection Entry Tab

          Quality Inspection Entry Screen Field Definitions

          Work Order Number

          The number of the Work Order which was inspected.

          Serial Number

          The serial number assigned to the specific assembly unit.

          NPF

          The next field, “NPF”, no problems found, is provided for the user to record when observing the product. If the serial number had previously been rejected, and analysis of the product yield no further problem, either with cosmetics or function, then the user may change this number to 1, meaning the first time it was inspected or tested, no problem was found. If the product serial number is subsequently rejected again, and a second inspection finds a problem, the number may be incremented to a “2”. This will alert users to repeated rejections of a product serial number, one or more times with no discernable defects. If the number of times that a part has experienced an NPF (no of problems found) exceeds that established in the Quality Defect Codes setup, the user will receive a warning message and will allow you to proceed on with the Inspection. This is just a notification that the board has passed the maximum NPF cycle.

          Inspection Work Center

          This is the name of the Work Center where the inspection took place.

          Lot Size

          This is the number of assemblies available for testing.

          Insp Qty

          This is the number ofassemblies actually tested.

          Fail Qty

          The number of assemblies which failed inspection.

          Date

          The date whereby the inspection took place.

          Time

          The time (24 hour clock) when the failure was recorded.

          Rework Time The time estimated to rework the failed assembly
          Pass Qty

          The number of assemblies which passed inspection.

          Yield

          The percentage of assemblies which passed inspection.

          Pass Times This is the number of times a particular Serial Number can pass through this Inspection screen. In Quality Defect Code Setup, there is a field called :maximum number of inspections/WC”.  The user may define how many times a given serial number can pass through a given Work Center.
          Product Number

          The internal number assigned to the assembly.

          Rev

          The revision number associated with the Product Number.

          Product ID

          This field is no longer used and is left blank.

          Skip Serial Number Field

          This box is checked if the user wishes to do Without Serial Number Inspection.

          Enter Serial Number Without Validation

          Only Enabled if user skips regular serial number entry.

          This feature has been added to allow the users the ability to inspect Serial Numbers that do not actually exist within the ManEx system. (for example serial number created outside of ManEx, by customer or other software, etc. . .)If the user checks the “Enter serial number without validation” then ManEx does not validate when the users enters the Serial Number. The system just records the entry for later SQC analysis purpose.(note: if the work order is serialized, then the user can not use this feature)

          Inspection Mode

          Determines whether inspection is performed via Batch or In Line mode.

          Batch mode is used for entering data previously recorded during inspection of the product. When the user chooses to enter defect data in “In-Line” mode with the serial number, the user won’t be able to enter “lot quantity”, “inspection quantity” or “failed quantity”. These fields are all automatically when the user goes into the “Defects Information” tab.  However, if the user enters defect data in “batch” mode without the serial number, then the user will be able to enter “lot quantity”, “inspection quantity” and “failed quantity”.

          If the user wishes to 100% inspect material, and directly move the passed material to the next routing work center, then the In-Line Inspection mode may be used.

          Work Center Inspection

          The user has the option of viewing defects based on the product routing (Product Routing), or to view all defects (Maximum Routing).

          Serial Number List

          The numbers of all of the Serial Numbers which were inspected.  Depress the Edit button and then highlight the serial number of choice.

          1.6.1.3.1.2. Defect Information Tab

          Defect Information Screen Field Defintions

          View

          This displays whether the view of the defects is by Work Center only or covers All defects.

          Check to skip location field

          If this box is checked, the location field may be skipped.

          Serial Number

          The Serial Number of the failed assembly.

          Defect Code

          The code used to describe the defect.

          Defect Description

          The description of the defect.

          Def Qty

          The number of defects.

          Charge to WC

          The name of the Work Center where the defect will be charged.

          Location

          The Reference Designator as set up in the assembly’s Bill of Materials.

          Emp  Employee number assigned to the defect
          Mfgr

          The name of the manufacturer of the component.

          Part Number

          The internal number assigned to the component.

          Rev

          The revision number pertaining to the internal part number.

          Comments

          Additional comments entered by the user.

          1.6.1.3.2. View Chart Tab
           
          See Article #5082  for more detail on each individual Chart Listed at the Top.  Once you have selected the type of graph you wish to view the graph will be displayed in the window below the selection.  
           
          1.6.1.3.3. Template Selection/Setup Tab
           

          Template Selection Setup

          This is the first screen to be used in the module. In this screen, STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL graphics are created by selecting parameters to be considered in the graph.

          This screen operates differently than all other ManEx screens. When bringing up the SQC module, the user is first presented with a template screen from which to choose parameters to be included in the information displayed. 

          When the user enters the system, he/she may select how they want to start the process of selection.  Click on the Customer, Part Number or Work Order radial.


           
          1.6.1.3.4. Template Detail Tab
           
          Date Range Enter the Date Range, From and To.  Mark the Radial for the view by Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly.
          User Defined Limits for DPM Chart

          Central Line

          lnCentralLine=lnTotalDef/lnTotalComp, where lnTotalDef is sum of all defect quantities * 1000000 and lnTotalComp is sum of inspected quantities*Parts Per Unit (entered in the routing module)

          At this time system will decide if it can use average group size or not. If the size group varies more tan 15% the system will use variance Upper and Lowercontrol limit.   If average group size could be used the average group size gets calculated by taking lnAvrgSubgrSize=lnTotalComp divided by number of groups and rounded to the nearest integer.

          Calculation for the Upper Control Line

          LnUpperLine=ROUND(((3*(SQRT(lnCentrLine*(1000000-lnCentrLine))))/SQRT(lnAvrgSubgrSize)),3)

          Calculation for the Lower Control Line

          lnLowerLine = ROUND(lnCentrLine -((3*(SQRT(lnCentrLine*(1000000-lnCentrLine))))/SQRT(lnAvrgSubgrSize)),3)

          lnLowerLine = IIF(lnLowerLine<0,0,lnLowerLine) 

          User Defined Limits for pChart

          The formula for the Central line (Red) is:   p = Total Number Failed (divided by) Total Number Inspected  

          Upper Control Limit (UCL) = p + 3 (divided by) p (1-p) divided by n

          Lower Control Limit (LCL) = p - 3 (divided by) p(1-p)  divided by n (or 0, whichever is greater)

          n = number inspected (sample size)

          User Defined Goal for the Yield Chart "Yield" =  Total number of units handled correctly through the process step(s). This is usually measured in a percentage.  The results being displayed in the "Yeild Chart" is the ratio of summed inspected qty and summed passed qty, grouped by date (user can select WO number, defect code to be filtered). 


           
          1.6.1.4. How To .... for SQC
          1.6.1.4.1. Enter the Defect Data Information

          All data must be Entered in the Quality Inspection Entry and Defect Information screens, with in the Shop Floor Tracking Module.

          Entering a Defect Code Entry to a Work Order

          For closed Work Orders:  In the Security module, there is an option which must be checked per user for the “Defect Code Entry”. Once the Security right has been entered, the user may edit a “closed” Work Order.
           

          The first screen presented to the user depends on whether or not in the system setup/Quality Defect Codes, the user has selected to enter defect information in BATCH or IN-LINE mode. If the user has selected IN-LINE in the setup, then only the IN-LINE screen will be displayed. Otherwise, the user will be presented with the batch screen, and the option to enter IN-LINE data. 

          Batch mode is used for entering data previously recorded during inspection of the product. When the user chooses to enter defect data in “In-Line” mode with the serial number, the user won’t be able to enter “lot quantity”, “inspection quantity” or “failed quantity”.These fields are all defaulted in when the user goes into the “Defects Information” tab.  However, if the user enters defect data in “batch” mode without the serial number, then the user will be able to enter “lot quantity”, “inspection quantity” and “failed quantity”.

          If the user wishes to 100% inspect material, and directly move the passed material to the next routing work center, then the In-Line Inspection mode may be used.

          The user has the ability to limit some workstations (specific PCs) (which is defined in the Security Module) to be able to only transfer material “FROM” a certain Work Center.  When the user transfers material from a Work Center (A Serialized part Number Only) in the Defect Code Entry In-Line Mode, the system will check to see if the serial number is currently in the Work Center.  If not, a special supervisor’s password is required to transfer the serial number FROM a different Work Center.  After the supervisor’s password is entered, the system will use the new Work Center to be the default FROM Work Center until the user closes the screen.  The next time the user opens the screen, the default FROM Work Center will be changed back to the one defined in the Security Module. 

           Enter Production/Shop Floor Tracking by Work Order Module

          Find a Work Order in SFT Module, 

           

          The following screen will appear:

          Depress the "Inspection" button located at the top of the screen.

          The following screen will appear:

          Entering Quality Inspection Data

          There are two different ways to enter the Inspection Data:  Batch Mode or In-Line Mode

          Batch Mode

          The first information tab records information about the work order. This includes lot size, failures, inspection quality, date, etc. 

          Depress the Add action button.  Enter the password of the Employee that has inspected the product.  

          When the user first brings up the Defect Entry program, and before entering or editing data, they have the option to check or uncheck the “Skip Serial No. Field”. Once the data entry process is begun, the option is cleared until the user exits the defect entry form and re-enters it.

          Adding Work Order Defect Information Without Serial Number Tracking 

          Enter the Work Order number, choose the Inspection Work Center from the pulldown, enter Lot Size inspected, Inspected Qty, and Failed Qty.

          The Date, Time, Pass Qty, and Yeild % will default in.  The date and time may be changed if needed.

          The user may enter estimated rework time, if desired.

          Depress the Defects Information tab and the following screen will appear:

          The user may then enter a defect code by manually typing in the code, or by scanning a bar-code menu, or by double clicking on the field to review a list of defect codes.

          The list displayed will depend on which view is selected (in upper right hand corner of screen).  If Work Center Defects is chosen, only those defects associated with the work center (as established in the system setup/Quality Defect Codes) will be displayed. If All Defects is chosen, then every defect entered in the system setup/Quality Defect Codes will be displayed.

          The user may select one or more defects from the list by holding down the Control Key while clicking on the defects to be selected.

          After completing the selection of the defects involved with the current inspection, clicking on the OK button loads the selected defects into the defect information screen.

          Although ManEx will enter a Charge To Work Center code based on the work center entered or the location of the part, the user may modify the originating work center by clicking on the field and selecting another work center from the list.

          The user may (optionally) then enter in the location (reference designator) where the defect was observed.

          The user then must select an Employee from the pull down.  The employee's being displayed in the pull down are only the employee's that are assigned to work centers (in the Security module) that are the same work centers listed in the Shop Floor Tracking by Work Order module and is sorted by the Employee User ID Number.  
           
           
           
          The system will check the BOM to be sure that the location entered here matches locations entered on the Bill of Materials. 

          When a valid location is entered, then system searches the Bill of Material to find manufacturers approved for the product, and displays a list of the approved manufacturers for the user to identify which manufacturer was associated with the defect observed. The user double-clicks on the manufacturer's name for the defective part, and the manufacturers name is placed in the defect information screen.

          ManEx defaults the number of defects to one item, but the user may overwrite the quantity with an observed quantity greater than one.

          The user may also enter a brief comment about the defect, for future reference.

          The completed screen should appear as follows:

          Depress the Save record action button to save changes or the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes.

          If you depress the Save record action button, the following message will appear:

          If you want to add another defect record for the same user "ONE" then depress YES, if you want to add a defect record for a different user (Example user "TWO"), then you must depress NO.  Depress the Add record action button and enter user "TWO"s password and continue to enter the defect information.

          When the user has completed the defect information, they may click on the Test & Repair tab, to enter more information about the part.

          NOTE:  The Test & Repair is actually a separate OPTIONAL module, but has been included into the Defect Entry screen for ease of use for the operators.  For further detail about this module see Article #3291..

          Adding Work Order Defect Information With Serial Number Tracking 

           Enter the Defect Entry screen. Depress the Add Record action button.  Un-check the "Skip Serial No Field" 

          If the user is tracking serial numbers, then the first field to be entered (or bar-code scanned) is the serial number of the product being inspected. (Not the Work Order number).

          Type in the serial number. When the serial number has been entered, ManEx will complete the work order and product information. ManEx will also enter the current work center location of the serial number supplied.

          The user now has the option of continuing to scan (or type) serial numbers, and log the defect information for each one later, or enter a serial number then the defects for that serial number, enter the next serial number, then the defects for the second serial number, etc. When multiple serial numbers have been entered, the data will refer to the serial number that is highlighted in the Serial Number list.

          ManEx will enter in the lot size according to the quantity of serial numbers showing in the serial number list.

          The next field, “NPF” is provided for the user to record when observing the product and finding that there is “No Problem Found”. If the serial number had previously been rejected, and analysis of the product yield no further problem, either with cosmetics or function, then the user may change this number to 1, meaning the first time it was inspected or tested, no problem was found. If the product serial number is subsequently rejected again, and a second inspection finds no problem, the number may be incremented to a “2”. This will alert users to repeated rejections of a product serial number, one or more times with no discernable defects.

          If the number of times that a part has experienced an NPF exceeds that established in the system setup/Quality Defect Codes the user will receive the displayed warning message and will allow you to proceed on with the Inspection.  This is just a notification that the board has passed the maximum NPF cycle. 

           

          Entering Defect Information

          This screen operates as described under Entering Defect Information without serial numbers, except that the user must enter data for each serial number recorded. The serial number may be chosen by highlighting the serial number in the serial number box on the first screen, or in the defects information screen, by pressing the down arrow button next to the serial number field and selecting a serial number.

          Defect information is entered in the same fashion as described above, except that the user should remember that the data being entered is for one part at a time, by serial number of the part.

          The other difference in using serial number defect tracking is that on the Test & Repair screen, the user may view the Serial Number History tab. This view will display both the transfer history of the serial number through the work centers, and the history of defects associated with the serial number of the product.

          (Note: if you are entering Defect information and not using the Serial No, then this screen will remain blank)

          The user completes the defect entry for the first defect code (The location, quantity of defects observed, etc.). The process is repeated for each defect observed, storing the location and serial number to be analyzed at a later time.

          At the conclusion of defect entries for the lot, the Save action button is pressed to retain the data.  If the user elects to ignore all data entered in this session, the Abandon  changes action button may be clicked to void any entries. Notice that ManEx computes the total number of defects observed for the defect code and displays the number next to the defect code. 

          Entering Defect Information Without Serial Number Validation

          The “Enter Serial Number without Vailidation” option will only be enabled if the user skips the regular Serial number entry, and if the Work Order Product has not been serialized within the ManEx system.

          This feature has been added to allow the users the ability to inspect Serial Numbers that do not actually exist within the ManEx system. (for example serial number created outside of ManEx, by customer or other software, etc. . .)  If the user checks the “Enter serial number without validation” then ManEx does not validate when the users enters the Serial Number.  The system just records the entry for later SQC analysis purpose.  (note: if the work order is serialized, then the user can NOT use this feature).

          Enter the Defect Entry screen. Depress the Add Record action button.  Select “Enter Serial Number without Validation. ”

          Enter the Work Order number.

          Then enter in the desired Custom Serial Numbers. The remaining process will then be the same as listed above.

          In-Line Mode

          When the user chooses In-Line inspection, either by setting it as the default in the Quality Defect Setup, or by selecting In-Line on the initial Quality Inspection Entry screen. 

          The first information tab records information about the work order. This includes lot size, failures, inspection quantity, date, etc.

           

          Depress the Add action button.  Enter the password of the Employee that has inspected the product.  

          Check the Skip Serial No. Field (if not applicable).

          Enter the Work Order number, choose the Inspection Work Center from the pulldown.

          The Product Number, Revision and Current Qty will default in.

          Then the Passed and Failed buttons are active. The user then clicks on either of these two buttons to proceed with the inspection.

          Clicking on the Passed button transfers the serial number to the next work center (based on the product routing), and increments the lot inspection information by one and records the date time and inspector.

          Clicking on the Failed button activates the Defect Information Entry screen for the user to record his/her observations.

          Defect information is entered in the same fashion as described above, based on with or without serial numbers. 

          When the user has completed the defect information,  may click on the Test & Repair page, to enter more information about the part.

          The Test & Repair is actually a separate OPTIONAL module, but has been included into the Defect Entry screen for ease of use for the operators.  Please see the Test & Repair  article for further detail.

           

          Edit Work Order Defect Information

          After a work order has been found or entered, it may be edited by selecting the Edit record action button.

          After selecting the transaction, the user may edit fields as described above in entering data.
           
          1.6.1.4.2. Enter the Defect Data Information for the DPMO by Employee Report

          In order to have the "DPMO by Employee" report create valid data, the user must be sure to enter the opportunities for defects (PPM) in the Work Order Traveler Setup and the employee must inspect the board and be assigned to the defects.  The "DPMO by Employee" report only gathers data if BOTH "Inspected By" and "Emp" are the same user, and the PPM is setup.   See Article #3156  for further detail on DPMO.   The following steps need to be followed to collect and track defects per employee. 

          All data must be Entered in the Quality Inspection Entry and Defect Information screens, with in the Shop Floor Tracking Module.

          Entering a Defect Code Entry to a Work Order for the "DPMO by Employee" report

          Enter Production/Shop Floor Tracking by Work Order Module

          Find a Work Order in SFT Module.  

           

          The following screen will appear:

          Depress the "Inspection" button located at the top of the screen.

          The following screen will appear:

          Entering Quality Inspection Data

          The first information tab records information about the work order. This includes lot size, failures, inspection quality, date, etc. 

          Depress the Add action button.  Enter the password of the Employee that has inspected the product and will be assigned to the defects.  Example:  If user "ONE" is going to be assigned to the defect(s) then you must enter user "ONE"'s password. 

          Check the Skip Serial No. Field (if not applicable).

          Enter the Work Order number, choose the Inspection Work Center from the pulldown, enter Lot Size inspected, Inspected Qty, and Failed Qty.

          The Date, Time, Pass Qty, and Yeild % will default in.

          Depress the Defects Information tab and the following screen will appear:

          The user may then enter a defect code by manually typing in the code, or by scanning a bar-code menu, or by double clicking on the field to review a list of defect codes.

          The list displayed will depend on which view is selected. If Work Center Defects is chosen, only those defects associated with the work center (as established in the Quality Defect Codes setup) will be displayed. If All Defects is chosen, then every defect entered in the Quality Defect Codes  setup will be displayed.

          The user may select one or more defects from the list by holding down the Control Key while clicking on the defects to be selected.

          After completing the selection of the defects involved with the current inspection, clicking on the OK button loads the selected defects into the defect information screen.

          Although Manex will enter a Charge To Work Center code based on the work center entered or the location of the part, the user may modify the originating work center by clicking on the field and selecting another work center from the list.

          The user may (optionally) then enter in the location (reference designator) where the defect was observed.

          The user then must choose the Emp from the pull down, which would be "ONE", because it needs to be the same user that has been entered in the "Inspected By".  The user is allowed to enter other user's name on Defect detail page in the "Emp" column.  But when the "DPMO by Employee" report is run, it will not display the records assigned to the different users.  

          The system will check the BOM to be sure that the location entered here matches locations entered on the Bill of Materials. 

          When a valid location is entered, then system searches the Bill of Material to find manufacturers approved for the product, and displays a list of the approved manufacturers for the user to identify which manufacturer was associated with the defect observed. The user double-clicks on the manufacturer's name for the defective part, and the manufacturers name is placed in the defect information screen.

          Manex defaults the number of defects to one item, but the user may overwrite the quantity with an observed quantity greater than one.

          The user may also enter a brief comment about the defect, for future reference.

          The completed screen should appear as follows:

          Depress the Save record action button to save changes or the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes.

          If you depress the Save record action button, the following message will appear:

          If you want to add another defect record for the same user "ONE" then depress YES, if you want to add a defect record for a different user (Example user "TWO"), then you must depress NO.  Depress the Add record action button and enter user "TWO"s password and continue to enter the defect information.

          When the user has completed the defect information, he/she may review the "DPMO by Employee" report Article #815, or may click on the Test & Repair page, to enter more information about the part.

          The Test & Repair is actually a separate OPTIONAL module, but has been included into the Defect Entry screen for ease of use for the operators.  Please see the Test & Repair Management (T&R) article for more information.

           

           

          1.6.1.4.3. SQC - Setup an SQC Template

          Enter Quality/Engineering/Statistical Quality Control (SQC) Module    

          The following screen will be displayed:

          Template Selection Setup

          This is the first screen to be used in the module. In this screen, STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL graphics are created by selecting parameters to be considered in the graph.

          This screen operates differently than all other ManEx screens. When bringing up the SQC module, the user is first presented with a template screen from which to choose parameters to be included in the information displayed. 

          When the user enters the system, he/she may select how they want to start the process of selection.  Click on the Customer, Part Number or Work Order radial.

          Clicking on the Customer radial will bring up the following selection screen:

           Select either Customer List or All Customers.
           

          Selecting by Customer List will bring up the following selection screen:

          (If the user selects by All Customers, the same screen will appear except  All available Customers will be listed within the Customer section)

          Type the desired customer into the red box or highlight and double click.

           

          The following screen will appear:

          If the start is from Part Number, the following selection will appear:  

          If the user selects Product Number List, the following list will appear:

          (If the user selects All Products, the same screen will be displayed except all products will be listed in the part number section)

          Type the Part Number into the red box or highlight and double click.

           
           

          The following screen will appear:

           If the user starts with the Work Order start, the following selection will appear:

           

          If the user selects the Work Order List option, the following list of Work Orders will appear: 

          (If the user selects All Work Orders the same screen will be displayed except all work orders will be listed in the Work Order section)

          Select between Open or All. Type the Work Order Number into the red box or highlight and double click.

           

          The following screen will appear:

           

          In the Work Order section, choose from All, One or Some.  If you’ve selected one, highlight the desired work order.  If you want more than one, depress the Ctrl key and click on the ones desired.

           
           

          In the Work Center section, choose from All, One or Some.  If you’ve selected one, highlight the desired work center.  If you want more than one, depress the Ctrl key and click on the ones desired. 

           

          Make the same selection in the Defect List section.  If you want all defects displaying as per the System Setup, check the Defect List box.

           

          To make a new selection, depress the New Selection button.

          Template Detail Screen

          Pressing on the Template Detail tab brings up the following screen:

          Enter the Date Range, From and To.  Mark the Radial for the view by Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly.

          Mark the radial for the User Defined Limits for DPMO chart:  Lower Limit, Central Line, Upper Limit or Reset.  Indicate Central Line amount in box.

          Mark the radial for the User Defined Limits for pChart:   Lower Limit, Central Line, Upper Limit or Reset.  Indicate Central Line amount in box.

          Indicate the user defined goal for the Yield Chart.
           
          To Save this template for future use go back to the Template Selection/Setup tab enter in a name and depress the Save button. 
           
           
          The Template will be saved in the Viewing Template field for future use.
           


           
           

           

           
           
           
           
           

           

          1.6.1.4.4. SQC - Data Viewing And Analysis

          Enter Quality/Engineering/Statistical Quality Control (SQC) Module    

          The following screen will be displayed:

          Template Selection Setup

          This is the first screen to be used in the module. In this screen, STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL graphics are created by selecting parameters to be considered in the graph.

          This screen operates differently than all other ManEx screens. When bringing up the SQC module, the user is first presented with a template screen from which to choose parameters to be included in the information displayed. 

          When the user enters the system, he/she may select how they want to start the process of selection.  Click on the Customer, Part Number or Work Order radial.

          Clicking on the Customer radial will bring up the following selection screen:

           Select either Customer List or All Customers.
           

          Selecting by Customer List will bring up the following selection screen:

          (If the user selects by All Customers, the same screen will appear except  All available Customers will be listed within the Customer section)

          Type the desired customer into the red box or highlight and double click.

           

          The following screen will appear:

          If the start is from Part Number, the following selection will appear:  

          If the user selects Product Number List, the following list will appear:

          (If the user selects All Products, the same screen will be displayed except all products will be listed in the part number section)

          Type the Part Number into the red box or highlight and double click.

           
           

          The following screen will appear:

           If the user starts with the Work Order start, the following selection will appear:

           

          If the user selects the Work Order List option, the following list of Work Orders will appear: 

          (If the user selects All Work Orders the same screen will be displayed except all work orders will be listed in the Work Order section)

          Select between Open or All. Type the Work Order Number into the red box or highlight and double click.

           

          The following screen will appear:

           

          In the Work Order section, choose from All, One or Some.  If you’ve selected one, highlight the desired work order.  If you want more than one, depress the Ctrl key and click on the ones desired.

           
           

          In the Work Center section, choose from All, One or Some.  If you’ve selected one, highlight the desired work center.  If you want more than one, depress the Ctrl key and click on the ones desired. 

           

          Make the same selection in the Defect List section.  If you want all defects displaying as per the System Setup, check the Defect List box.

           

          To make a new selection, depress the New Selection button.

          Template Detail Screen

          Pressing on the Template Detail tab brings up the following screen:

          Enter the Date Range, From and To.  Mark the Radial for the view by Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly.

          Mark the radial for the User Defined Limits for DPMO chart:  Lower Limit, Central Line, Upper Limit or Reset.  Indicate Central Line amount in box.

          Mark the radial for the User Defined Limits for pChart:   Lower Limit, Central Line, Upper Limit or Reset.  Indicate Central Line amount in box.

          Indicate the user defined goal for the Yield Chart.

          View Chart Screen/Graphs

          Pressing on the View Chart brings up the Graphics Display Window.

          Defect Pareto Chart - The results being displayed in the Pareto Chart are from WO #242 for a build of 500.  Qty of 5 with Wrong Part (Displayed in Blue) and Qty of 3 with Leads Bent (Displayed in Green)  Total of 8 Failed   500/8 = 62.5% Failed and 37.5% Passed  
           
          Note:  The black line is a cumulative % of total defects represented by the current defect and all preceding defects.  That is why it reaches 100% by the right side of the graph.

           
           

          Defect Pie Chart -  The results being displayed in the Defect Pie Chart are from WO #242 for a build of 500.  Qty of 5 with Wrong Part (Displayed in the Blue) 62.5%  and Qty of 3 with Leads Bent (Displayed in Green)  37.5%.  Total qty failed 8.

           
           
           
          cChart (Not available in 3D)  The results being displayed in the cChart are from all Work Orders, Work Centers, and all defects from 062706 thru 072706 (1 month)  

          The formula for the Central line (Red) is:   c
          = Total Defects (divided by) Number of Subgroups

          Upper Control Limit (UCL) = c + 3 (divided by) p

          Lower Control Limit (LCL) = c - 3 (divided by) p (or 0, whichever is greater)

           

          pCHART (not available in 3D) The results being displayed in the pChart are from all Work Orders, Work Centers, and all defects from 062706 thru 072706 (1 month)  

          The formula for the Central line (Red) is:   p
          = Total Number Failed (divided by) Total Number Inspected  

          Upper Control Limit (UCL) = p + 3 (divided by) p (1-p) divided by n

          Lower Control Limit (LCL) = p - 3 (divided by) p(1-p)  divided by n (or 0, whichever is greater)

          n = number inspected (sample size)

           

           

          DPMO (Defects Per Million Opportunities) Chart   (Which means the number of things wrong observed in the inspection of a part, or board assembly).   The results being displayed in the DPMO Chart are from WO #242 for a build of 500.   DPMO Example below = 8(Total qty failed)* 1000000/100*500 (Qty Inspected) = 160

          Defects Per Million Opportunities.  There are several ways to setup the opportunities (which means the number of possible defects that can occur on a product),  but it is up to each company to make that decision.  For Example: Some may say that a resistor with two leads that are not properly soldered is counted as two defects and some may only count it as one defect, since it is one part that was assembled incorrectly.   The opportunity or the standard opportunity is entered in the Work Order Traveler Setup module.  The field is called PPM = Parts per million. 

          The DPMO chart uses the PPM as a reference to measure the actual failures against the total inspected quantity.

          See Article #3156  for further detail on DPMO. 

          The formula for calculating DPMO chart is as follows:

          Example (2+3+3) = SUM of defect quantities (8) * opportunities or PPM (1,000,000) (divided by) Qty Inspected (500) (divided by) parts per unit (100) = 160

          Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Yearly

          On the Y axes the graph shows number of defects per million

          One the X axes day or week or month or year

          This graph collects defect information for the selected work centers and work orders in the selected date range. The user also has to select if the information will be grouped by day, week, month, or year.

          The selected group will be your X coordinates on the graph.

          The Y coordinates will be calculated as sum of the defect quantities *opportunities or PPM divided by total Qty inspected (divided by) parts per unit (qty was entered in the routing module) grouped by X coordinate unit (Daily, weekly, monthly, yearly).

          This is a data line there is three more control lines displayed on the graph:

          Central control line:

          Upper control line:

          Lower control line

          All three lines could be user define lines.

          If the lines are not user define lines they calculated as following

          Central Line

          lnCentralLine=lnTotalDef/lnTotalComp, where lnTotalDef is sum of all defect quantities * 1000000 and lnTotalComp is sum of inspected quantities*Parts Per Unit (entered in the routing module)

          At this time system will decide if it can use average group size or not. If the size group varies more tan 15% the system will use variance Upper and Lowercontrol limit.   If average group size could be used the average group size gets calculated by taking lnAvrgSubgrSize=lnTotalComp divided by number of groups and rounded to the nearest integer.

          Calculation for the Upper Control Line

          LnUpperLine=ROUND(((3*(SQRT(lnCentrLine*(1000000-lnCentrLine))))/SQRT(lnAvrgSubgrSize)),3)

          Calculation for the Lower Control Line

          lnLowerLine = ROUND(lnCentrLine -((3*(SQRT(lnCentrLine*(1000000-lnCentrLine))))/SQRT(lnAvrgSubgrSize)),3)

          lnLowerLine = IIF(lnLowerLine<0,0,lnLowerLine) 
           
           

          Defects Distribution Chart - The results being displayed in the pChart are from all Work Orders, Work Centers, and all defects from 062706 thru 072706 (1 month)  


           
           

          Yield Chart -  "Yield" =  Total number of units handled correctly through the process step(s). This is usually measured in a percentage.  The results being displayed in the "Yeild Chart" is the ratio of summed inspected qty and summed passed qty, grouped by date (user can select WO number, defect code to be filtered).  The results below are from all Work Orders, Work Centers, and all defects from 062706 thru 072706 (1 month).  

           
           
           
           

          1st Pass Yield Chart  The results being displayed are from all Work Orders, Work Centers, and all defects from 062706 thru 072706 (1 month).  

          1st Pass Yield chart in the SQC module is designed only when the serial number is used for the work order.  The system uses the serial number to determine how many serial numbers passed without failure/defects within a work order.  1st Pass Yield chart will be blank if there are no product tracked by serial number within the production floor

           
           
           

          To enter a new title, depress the Graph Title button. The following will be displayed:

          Enter in the new desired Graph Title. Depress the Exit button, and the graph title will be updated.


           
           

          3D/2D - This is if you want to view the 1st Yield Chart in 3D

           

          1.6.1.5. Reports - SQC

          To display or print a Report from the Statistical Quality Control (SQC),  module.   Enter the module.

          1. To access the reports, depress the Print action button at the top of the screen.  The report screen will appear.

          2.  Select the output you desire by selecting one of the output radial selections at the top left of the screen, Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

          3.  Highlight the report desired and click on the option tab (if applicable).   

          Selected Chart report

           

          If you want to print the selected chart, the chart you want to print must be displaying in the View Chart tab. The same exact chart viewed on screen will be printed.

          Depress the OK button, and you will receive the following message.  The selected chart only goes to printer or file, please go back to main screen to view chart.

          Defect Logging History report

           If you select Defect Logging History Report, you will be asked to select the sort.

          Select one of the following:Customer, Product Number, Work Order Number or Work Center.

           

          Select the date range.  Highlight the Customer desired.  Depress the > button. If you want all customers, depress the >> button. 

          Depress the Ok button.

           

          The following report will print:

          Defect Location report

          Select the date range. Highlight the Customer desired and depress the > button.  If you want all customers, depress the >> button.  Highlight the Work Center and depress the > button.  If you want all Work Centers, depress the >> button.

           

          Depress the OK button.

           

          The following report is available:

          Yield Report by Customer by Assembly report

          Select the date range. Highlight the Work Center and depress the > button.  If you want all Work Centers, depress the >> button.

           

          Depress the OK button.

           
           

          The following report will print:

          Defect Data by Location report

          First you must enter data in Template Selection/Setup and Template Detail Screen.  Then depress the Print action button, Highlight the Defect Data by Location report and depress the Ok button. 

          The following report will print:

          Yield Detail Report by Customer by Date Range

          Select the Date Range.  Click on the desired radial to select Open Work Orders only or All Work Orders. Highlight the Work Order desired and depress the > button.  If you want all Work Orders, depress the >> button.   Highlight the Work Center and depress the > button.  If you want all Work Centers, depress the >> button.  Highlight the Customer desired and depress the > button.  If you want all customers, depress the >> button.

           

          Depress the OK button

           

          The following screen will appear:

          Yield Pass Analysis for Serialized Parts report

          Select the Date Range. Type the Yield Pass Number.   Highlight the Work Center and depress the > button.  If you want all Work Centers, depress the >> button. 

          Depress the OK

           

          The following report will print:

           

          DPMO by Employee

          Select the Date Range.  Highlight the Work Center desired and depress the > button.  If you want all Work Centers, depress the >> button.   Highlight the Employee and depress the > button.  If you want all Employee's, depress the >> button. 

          Depress the OK button.

          DPMO =  Number of defect * opportunities or PPM (1,000,000) (divided by) Qty Inspected (divided by) parts per unit    

          See Article #3156  for further detail on DPMO. 

          In order to make this report data valid, the employee must inspect the board and be assigned to the defect.  For more information see Article #1776.

           

          For Example:  the PPM for each work center is:

          Work center      PPM

          STAG                2

          SMT                  1

          FGI                    5

          SCRP                3

           

          User ONE inspect two records in Defect code entry module:

          1) Insp Qty    10, Work Center: STAG

          Defec detail:

          Defect Code    Chg WC    Defect Qty            Emp   

                Defect-1       STAG          2                 ONE

                Defect-2       SMT           1                 JM

                Defect-3       STAG          5                 ONE

           

          2) Insp Qty    20, Work Center: SMT

          Defect Detail:

          Defect Code    Chg WC    Defect Qty            Emp   

             Defect-4       SMT           1                 ONE

             Defect-3       SMT          4                 ONE

             Defect-6       WAVE        7                 MP

           

          If user selects all work centers (on report option page)

          The Defect Qty for ONE will be 2+5+1+4 = 12

          Number of Unit*Number of opportunities = 2*10+1*20=40

          DPMO for User ONE is 12*1,000,000/40=300,000

          As displayed:

           

          The user has option to select for certain work centers, for example, if user only selects for "STAG" work center, then

          The Defect Qty for ONE will be 2+5 = 7

          Number of Unit*Number of opportunities = 2*10=20

          DPMO for User ONE is 7*1,000,000/20 = 350,000

          As displayed:

           

           

           

          1.6.1.6. FAQ's for SQC
          Facts and Questions for the Statistical Quality Control Module
          1.6.1.7. ManEx Minutes (SQC)
          1.6.2. Corrective Action Request (CAR) (OPTIONAL Module)
          1.6.2.1. Prerequisites for CAR
          Prerequisites Required for Entering a New Corrective Action Request:
           
          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase.  To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com\contactus.aspx

          After activation, "Corrective Action Request" (CAR) access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
          System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

          Quality Inspection Entry A Quality Inspection entry must have been entered in Work Order Shop Floor Tracking.
          Customer      The Customer database must be established for Consigned part numbers.
          Supplier    The Supplier database must be established for purchased parts.
          Part number in Item Master  The part number must exist for a product or part.
          Quality Defect Codes The Defect Codes and Names have been entered in System Setup.  
          CAR Types  The Corrective Action Request types must have been entered in System Setup.
          CAR Number Type  The Corrective Action Request Numbers must have been entered in System Setup.
          Work Center     The Work Center must have been entered in System Setup.
          Work Order   There must be a Work Order associated with the Corrective Action Request.

          1.6.2.2. Introduction for CAR

          The Corrective Action Request (CAR) module is used to record and track to the conclusion of all corrective action requests.

           

          The user may establish his/her own type(s) of corrective actions in the system setup. Examples of types of corrective actions may be Supplier, Customer, Production, Administration, etc. In addition to classifying corrective actions by type, the user may also establish number types for the corrective action. Examples of number types might be RMA, DMR, Internal, etc.

           

          The user enters information relating to each CAR including ISO reference, Quality Manual Descriptions, Customer/Supplier information and/or Work Center/Department involved.

           

          There is provision for text entry of the Description of Condition, the Apparent Cause, and the Actual Cause, along with provision to enter a graphics image.

           

          In the Corrective Action section, there is provision to enter Corrective Action Taken, as well as information for Follow Up & Review.

           

          In the Main screen, a list of all open corrective actions is displayed, and may be sorted by Due Date, New Due Date (if revised), CAR number or CAR Type.  There is provision to enter the name of the CAR Coordinator, and include a list of team members and their percent completion of the task. There is also a place for users to enter the date and name of the team member who verified the problem; the date and name of the team member who granted the final approval of the CAR; the date and name of the team member who followed up on the CAR; and the date and name of the team member who closed the CAR.

           

           

          1.6.2.3. Fields and Definitions for CAR
          1.6.2.3.1. Open List Tab




          This is the due date for the open CAR.  (The user may sort on this field by depressing the Due Date button.) 

          This is the new or revised Due Date. (The user may sort on this field by depressing the New Due Date button.)
          This is the number assigned to the Corrective Action Request. (The user may sort on this field by depressing the CAR Number button.) 
          This is the type of Corrective Action Request as set up in system set up. (The user may sort on this field by depressing the CAR Type button.) 
          Days Late    This is the number of days between the New Due Date column and today’s calendar date.
          % Completed    The program calculates % completion of all of the users who are assigned to the project.If there are three users and one user is 100% complete and the other users 0 % complete, the % Completed field will display 33.33. 
          Coordinator The name of the user coordinating this CAR.
          This button is depressed so that the team members may enter their individual percentage of completion.
          Team Member Name    The names of the users assigned to this CAR. 
          % Compd  The percentage of completion of the individual user.
          Problem Verified  The name of the user who verified the problem.The date will also display.
          CAR Final Approval by    The name of the user who approved the CAR.The date will also display. 
          Follow Up by    The name of the user who performed the follow up. The date will also display.
          CAR Completed by 
          The name of the user who completed the CAR.The date will also display.

           

             

          1.6.2.3.2. CAR Tab




          CAR Number 

          The number assigned to the Corrective Action Report.

          CAR Date The date the Corrective Action Report was created. 
          CAR Description  The description of the Corrective Action Report.
          CAR Type  The type of Correction Action.
          Due Date 

          The due date of the Correction Action.

          New Due Date 

          If revised, the revision due date.

          Major/Minor   

          Describes whether the corrective action is major or minor.

          Number Type   

          The type of CAR number as set up in system setup.Please refer to the Implementation – Production manual. 

          Number The number associated with the Number Type.
          ISO Element  The element pertaining to ISO.
          Quality Manual Description  This is a read only field.
          Customer/Supplier Name  If the CAR type is Customer, the name of the customer will appear.  If the CAR type is Supplier, the name of the supplier will appear here.
          Work Center/Dept.   If the CAR type is Work Center/Dept., the name of the Work Center or Department will appear here.

          Status of Team Progress section

          Graphics Display Window

          If some work has been completed by the team and registered in the Open List tab, a graph displaying the percentage of completion by each team member will display. 

          Depress this button to change graph view to 3D or back to 2D. 

          This button will bring up a list of users who can be assigned to the CAR team. 
          In order for the user to be displayed on this list they must have Edit or Add rights to the CAR module within the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

          .

           

           

           

          1.6.2.3.3. Observation Tab



          Description of Condition 

          This window will display the description of the CAR.

          Actual Cause

          This window will display the actual cause.

          Apparent Cause

          This window will display the apparent cause. 

          This window will display a schematic.

          1.6.2.3.4. Corrective Action Tab



          This tab is available for notes regarding corrective action and follow up and review.
          1.6.2.4. How To ..... for CAR
          1.6.2.4.1. Finding A Corrective Action Request Record
          Enter Quality/Engineer/Corrective Action Request(CAR/Corrective Action Request (CAR)

          The following screen will appear:
           



          Depress the Find Record action button
          .
           
          The following selections will be displayed:
           
           

          Find by CAR Number

          Depressing the Find by CAR Number button, will display the following listing of all of the Open CAR Numbers available.

          Type the CAR Number into the red box or highlight and Double Click to select.



          Find by CAR Problem Type

          Selecting the Find by CAR Problem Type option, will display the following listing of Open records.

          Type the problem type into the red box or highlight and double click.

          The following selection screen will appear:

          Type the CAR Number into the red box or highlight the selection and double click.



          Find by Closed CAR Number
           

          Selecting the find by Closed CAR number, will display the following listing of Closed CAR’s.

          Type the CAR Number into the red box or highlight the selection and double click.


           
          Find by Closed CAR Problem Type
           

          Selecting the Find by Closed CAR Problem Type, will display the following listing:

          Type the CAR problem type into the red box or highlight the selection and double click.

          A list of all closed CAR's for that problem will appear:

          Type the CAR number into the red box or highlight and double click.

           
          1.6.2.4.2. Adding a Corrective Action Record
          Enter Quality/Engineering/Corrective Action Request(CAR)/Corrective Action Request (CAR)
           
          The following screen will be displayed:
           

          Depress the Add Record action button. The following screen will be displayed: 
           
           

           Enter the CAR Description. 

          Depress on the down arrow to select the CAR Type:

          If you select Work Center/Dept, a further selection screen will appear.

          Select one Work Center or Department.  Upon selection, the name of that Work Center will appear in the Work Center/Department box.
           

           
          If you selected Customer or Supplier from the above as the CAR Type, a further selection screen will appear:
           
          The Supplier List will be sorted by Supplier Number.  The Customer List will be sorted by Customer Name in Alphabetical Order.
           
          The name of the Customer or Supplier will appear in the Customer/Supplier Name box.
           
           
           
           
          Enter the Due Date and New Due Date. 

          Depress on the down arrow to select whether the problem is Major or Minor.


          Depress the down arrow next to the Number Type field.  The following list will appear:
           
          Select the type applicable to the CAR.
           
          Enter in the Number, Work Order, DMR or RMA and the ISO element.
           
           
           
          Depress the Assign button and a list of employees will appear that have Add or Edit access rights to the CAR module setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

          Make the selection for the Team Members.

          Depress the OK  button. 

           
          Depress the Observation Tab to enter - Description of Condition, Apparent Cause, and  Actual Cause information.  Within this screen user can also Load a Picture if applicable.
           
           
          Depress the Corrective Action tab  to enter the Corrective Action and Follow Up and Review information.
           
           
          Once user has completed adding all the pertain information for the CAR.  They may depress the Save button to save the changes or depress the Abandon Changes button to abandon all changes.
           
           The completed screen should appear as follows:
           
           
           
          Depress the Open List tab - The Due Date, New Due Date, CAR Number and CAR Type will be displayed for all open records.
           

           
           
           
          Depress the Edit button and the Approval lists will be enabled: 

          To enter a percentage of completion, place the cursor in the % Completion column.   Enter in the percentage completed.  Depress the Enter key.  You will be prompted for the password.  The password entered must “match” the name of the user.  

           
          The user may then depress the CAR tab to view the Team Member Project Status of completion graph.
           
           
           
          To obtain a 3D version, depress the 2D/3D  button.
           
           
           
          1.6.2.4.3. Editing a Corrective Action Request Record
          Find the CAR of interest and the following screen will appear:
           
           



          Depress the Edit record and the following fields will become activated on the Open List screen: 
           
           

           


          Depress the down arrow next to each or desired fields.  A list of employees will display.  Note:  That an entry in the CAR Completed By field will Close the record.

          Depress the CAR tab and the following fields are activated when editing a record:




          Depress the Observation tab enter any Description of Condition, Apparent Cause, or Actual Cause information.  

           
           
           
          If you wish to load a picture, depress the Load Picture  buttonThe following dialog box will be displayed.
           
           
          Select a bit map image/file you want to load by highlighting and double clicking.  The load picture will display the image loaded.
           

            

           

             

          Depress the Corrective Action tab -  and enter any Corrective action and/or Follow Up & Review information: 
           

           

          Once the desired information has been entered into the appropriate locations, depress the Save Button, and enter your password.
          1.6.2.5. Reports - CAR

          Depress the Printer  icon.  The following screen will be displayed:

          Enter the Option tab, the following will be displayed:
           
          Select whether you want an Open CAR or a Completed CAR by clicking on the radial.   Highlight the CAR you want and then click on the > button.  If you want all of the CARs, depress on the >> button.   Toggle on the arrows to select the number of copies you want.  

          Depress the OK button. 

             
          The following report is available
          :
           
           
          1.6.2.6. CAR Follow Up List
          Enter Quality/Engineering/Corrective Action Request (CAR)/CAR Follow Up List

          After activation, "Corrective Action Request" (CAR) access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
          System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           

          The following screen will be displayed:
           

          Displayed will be all of the Correction Action Requests upon which follow up action has taken place.

          The fields displayed are as follows:

          Member Name 

          This is the name of the Quality Control Team member who did the follow up inspection.The user may sort on this column by depressing the Member Name button.

          Follow Up Date 

          This is the date when the Quality Control Team member did the follow up inspection.The user may sort on this column by depressing the Follow Up Date button.

          CAR No.

          The number assigned to the Corrective Action Request.The user may sort on this column by depressing the CAR No. button.

          Description 

          The description of the problem leading to the issuance of the Corrective Action Request, such as broken, wrong part, etc.The user may sort on this column by depressing the Description button.

          Depressing the Reports icon, the system will then display the following dialog box.
           
           

          Select the desired Printer.

          Depress the OK button and the report will be sent directly to the selected printer.



          1.6.2.7. CAR Assignment List
          Enter Quality/Engineering/Corrective Action Request (CAR)/CAR Assignment List

          After activation, "Corrective Action Request" (CAR) access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
          System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           

          The following screen will be displayed:
           

          This screen will display all of the Corrective Action Request for which a team member has been assigned, and has not been completed.

          The fields displayed are as follows:

          Member Name

          This is the name of the Quality Control Team member who was assigned to the problem.The user may sort on this column by depressing the Member Name button. 

          CAR No.

          The number assigned to the Corrective Action Request.The user may sort on this column by depressing the CAR No. button. 

          Due Date

          This is the date by which the Quality Control Team member will do the correction action.The user may sort on this column by depressing the Follow Up Date button. 

          Description The description of the problem leading to the issuance of the Corrective Action Request, such as broken, wrong part, etc.The user may sort on this column by depressing the Description button.

          Depressing the Reports icon, the system will then display the following dialog box.

          Select the desired Printer.

          Depress the OK button and the report will be sent directly to the selected printer.



          1.6.3. Integrated BOM & AVL
          1.6.3.1. Prerequisties for BOM & AVL

          Bills of Material (BOM’s) may be created a part at a time or all at once. Although they may be created from the top down or from the bottom up, entering of components and subassemblies first is faster. Copying similar existing BOM’s and editing the copy can greatly shorten the process.  BOM’s can be created as Inactive while under construction to prevent premature use.

          Prerequistes

          After activation, "Bill of Material and AVL" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
          System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           
           

          Part number for Assembly, Product or Subassembly
          must exist in the Inventory Control Mgmt  module.
           
          Part numbers for Components and Subassemblies must exist in the Inventory Control Mgmt module.

          Work Centers to be Kitted to
          must be setup in the Production Work Centers & Acivities module.

          Customer Part numbers for Consigned Parts to be added to the BOM must exist in the Inventory Control Mgmt  module.
           
          Manufacturer’s Part numbers and Customer’s AVL selections must be setup in the Inventory Control Mgmt  module.
           
          Optional Data
           
          Component Costs (Standard, Budgeted or Quoted) for manual calculation of the Standard cost of the Assembly.  Note that if the Accounting Module is installed, the cost information must be filled out.
          1.6.3.2. Introduction for BOM & AVL
          The Integrated Bill of Material and AVL Module allows the user to create, modify, copy, inactivate or delete Bills of Material (BOM’s).BOM’s are the master documents that define what material goes into a product. Item numbers (Product, assembly, subassembly or component) used in BOM’s link the BOM’s to the data that is entered and maintained in the Inventory Control Management- Item Master and Quantity Info screens.  Most of the basic data fields (class, type, description, revision, unit of measure, warehouse and order policy) remain the same whenever an item is used in a BOM.  Only the data fields that are maintained in the BOM Module, such as the reference designators, kit-to Work Center and quantity per assembly may be changed from one BOM to the next.BOM’s are used to kit components and subassemblies for Work Orders and to drive demand for Material Requirements Planning.
           
          See Article #2560 to view how Inventory, BOM's and AVL's are connected within the ManEx system.
           
          NOTE:   If users choose to use effective and obsolete dates in place of proper revision control, you must be absolutely certain that they do not take effect at any point after production begins and before the WO is closed.  If this isn't properly managed, you will get the variances.  While some may be minor and positive variances may partially offset negative variances, you CANNOT rely on this and you WILL have discrepancies.

          The best approach is to always roll the revision when there is a change to an assembly that will affect the value in any way.  This becomes even more important if you have WOs open long after the due date and it has had additional changes to the configuration.  See Article #5055 for further detail.
           

          Definitions

          Indented Bill of Material: The Top-down breakdown of the structure of a product. In an indented BOM listing, every subassembly and component is indented one level from the assembly or subassembly into which it goes.

          Parent and Child Relationships in BOM’s: Each product “parent” has an indented list of “child” components and subassemblies that go into it. Each child item is indented under its parent and may in turn have child components indented under it.

          Accepted Manufacturer List (AML): The AML is the list of manufacturer part numbers entered in the Inventory Control Mgt.- Quantity Info screen. A manufacturer must first be set up in the Inventory Control Mgt./ Part Manufacturer Setup before its approved part number can be added.

          Accepted Vendor List (AVL): AVL’s show which manufacturers are approved or qualified for use for a particular customer’s product line or individual product. Only manufacturer part numbers that have been entered in the AML for a particular item can be selected or deleted from the AVL for a customer. A customer’s Approved Vendor List of manufacturers for each internal part is maintained in that customer’s Consigned Inventory record for that part.

          Consigned Inventory AVL Record: When a Customer part number is assigned in the Inventory Control Mgt.- Customer Reference screen, a Consigned Inventory Record is generated for that item and customer. The Quantity Info screen for the Consigned Customer part number is where the Customer’s AVL is maintained. Q.Do I have to go into the Inventory Control Management module and assign a customer to the part number? A.Only if the user wants the cross-reference to the customer part number to show for internal parts on the BOM. This field will show up if a BOM Assembly is attached to a specific customer.

          Anti-AVL: Normally the AVL for each customer applies to all of their product BOM’s. However, if a customer wishes to disqualify a manufacturer from use in one particular BOM, removing a check-mark from the Anti-AVL field may be used to keep the otherwise approved manufacturer from being used on specific BOM’s.

          Generic and Manufacturer Preferences: A Generic (Genr) manufacturer means that any manufacturer’s part can be used.Generic is generated by the system as the default manufacturer if no other is specified. If specific manufacturers are listed for a part, preferences for use in an Internal or in a Customer’s product may be entered. Preferences are entered in the Inventory Control Mgt.- Quantity Info screen as 1 for 1st, 2 for 2nd, etc. next to the manufacturer.

          Functions  

          Bills of Material serves many functions in the manufacturing environment. They are central to all manufacturing operations and are used for everything from product specification to quotation document. BOM’s are key to material requirements planning, kit organization, product structure, and configuration control.

          Material Requirements Planning (MRP): The BOM is the master plan for building product. An indented BOM from the product top level down to the lowest level component provides the entire material picture for a product. Its quantity and manufacturer preferences are used to kit materials for production to assemble. Its linkage to Item Master Purchase and Production Lead Times and Work Center offsets are used by the MRP to determine which parts to purchase or make and when to provide them. By listing multiple manufacturers and alternate part numbers, the BOM can be used to manage work order shortages.

          Kitting by Work Center: Selection of a Work Center for each BOM Line Item causes that item to be kitted with other parts for that Work Center. Grouping of the parts needed for the first Work Center helps determine when to start a work order and eliminates the need for sorting out needed parts at each Work Center. Also if parts are not kitted until needed for later work centers, they need not be purchased or made until closer to the time they are actually needed.

          Production Offset: This time difference between the start of the kit for the first Work Center and the kitting for the Work Center where the part is needed is called Production Offset and can be entered for each line item in the BOM. For example, mechanical parts and chassis parts may not be needed until the work order reaches the final assembly work center. By identifying those parts as Final Assembly parts and entering “x” number of days of Production Offset, the parts will not be scheduled for delivery by the MRP nor need they be kitted for “x” days later than the rest of the Work Order. An entry in this field will displace the due date required by the amount of offset established in the BOM. If the user wanted a part or assembly to be ready on the third week of an order that took 4 weeks, then the user would enter a 3 week offset, and the MRP module would suggest ordering the parts three weeks later than otherwise. Please refer to the Material Requirements Planning Management manual.

          Engineering Change Control: BOM’s are unique by their revision number and as such are used to control changes to the structure or components in a product. By creating a new Revision level of the BOM with an Effective Date the next day after the Obsolete Date for the old BOM Revision, the user can drive changes in material requirements, kitting and work orders. Or if the new BOM Revision level is to co-exist with the down-rev. Revision, the new BOM is just activated without obsoleting the old BOM. With BOM Revision control, several revisions may exist with different definitions for each. BOM Notes may be used to record Engineering Changes for tracking purposes in the absence of a formal ECO system or documentation.

          Reference Designators: Unique reference or insertion designations can be assigned in the BOM as guides for placement, assembly, repair or data recording for Statistical Quality Control (SQC).
           
           
          Note:  If the Leveling of Make items is in process then the users will not be able to Add/Edit a BOM, even if the user is already in modifucation mode of the BOM, the user will not be allowed to save the changes until the leveling process is complete.  This is due to the fact that the affected records in leveling of Make Parts is large and complex, the saving time to commit the whole changes to inventory tables does take a large amount of time, so we do not want users making modifications to the BOM when the process is still leveling, so we have added a flag that the users will see within the BOM module. 
           
           
          1.6.3.3. Fields & Definitions for BOM & AVL

          1.6.3.3.1. Bill Of Material Main Screen

          This is the screen that appears when opening the module. The product number is displayed in the Bill of Material Module screen header as a reference.  The product information will remain on screen while viewing other sections of the BOM module.  BOM Main may be used to view, edit, add or delete a Bill of Material.  BOM Header information is displayed for any item located after a FIND.  If any Line Items have been added to an assembly in the BOM Header, they will be displayed in the Detail Window below.  The lines that are inactive will be highlighted in purple. Selection of a Line Item in the Detail Window will cause the other BOM screens to be populated with default and/or added information for that Line Item. Start with this screen to add a new BOM, edit an existing BOM, add a new Line Item or change detail information for existing Line Items.                

          The Header Information fields across the upper half of the screen are populated from the item master and from keyed-in assembly data. The fields in the Body (Detail Window) show information about the components included in the assembly.

          BOM Main Field Definitions

          Class

          The Part Class assigned to the assembly in the Item Master.

          Type

          The Part Type assigned to the assembly in the Item Master.

          Description

          The Item Master description for the Assembly Part.

          Product

          The Part Number for the assembly. Can be the customers product no. or an auto-assigned internal Part Number.

          Rev

          The Part Number Revision for the assembly. An assembly may exist under multiple revisions.A separate BOM is required for each.

          Matl Type This is defaulted in from Inventory Control

          Any notes pertaining to the BOM will display upon depress the Note button.

           
          Depressing the down arrow will display the history of the BOM components. Current reflects the most recent listing; BOM History will display the history of changes. Selected Date will bring up a selection screen.
           
          Note:  If the effectivity and obsolete dates are used, then it is possible to check the specific parts list at any given data using the BOM history. 
           

          Status
          The BOM Status:  Active - BOM is Active; 
          Inactive - BOM is Inactive which will affect Cost Roll up.   NOTE:  Changing the BOM status to Inactive will NOT remove the MRP demands you MUST Inactivate the part number in ICM to remove the MRP demands.  See Article #3430 for further detail.
          Quote
          -  This status is in case a BOM is in a quote stage and the user needs a reminder that the quote for this BOM is pending.   
           
          This status is for the BOM ONLY, it will NOT change the status of the Inventory part.  The Inventory part status and BOM status can be different.  This is to allow flexibility so the BOM can be inactive and will NOT be displayed in the BOM module, but the part will still be displayed in the inventory listing.   Users will be allowed to change the status on a BOM from Active to Inactive with open SO, WO, etc. and MRP will still show demands.  Users will also still be allowed to Create NEW SO, WO, etc if ONLY the BOM status is Inactive.  Users will NOT be allowed to change the status on the Inventory part from Active to Inactive with open SO, WO, etc. 
          When the BOM is made Inactive this field will display the status along with the date and Initials of the user that Inactivated the BOM.
          This allows the user to find part by Reference Designator.  If user starts typing reference designator into the text box it will auto fill the information, when done entering user can press "Enter" or click on the search button next to it and the record pointer in the grid will advance to the part if a match is found.

          Customer Name

          The name of the customer for whom the user is making the assembly.Select from pull-down list. Add new customers in Customer Information Management. Use Standard Pricing as the customer or leave blank if the assembly is built to stock or has more than one potential customer. This field must match the Customer for any Consigned parts used in the BOM.

          Setup Stscp

          This box MUST be checked if you wish for the setup scrap qty’s to be included in the Kitting and MRP calculations,  Checking this box along with a Standard Bld qty will tell the system to use Setup Scrap when calculating the standard cost.   Note:  The "Exclude Scrap & Setup Scrap" options within the  Kitting Setup module will overwrite this option. 

          Standard Bld

          The quantity normally built. Entering a quantity in this box will be used when calculating the Standard Cost.  See Article 3040 for information on how this affects the Std Cost.  See Articles #3067 , #3053 , and #3320 for information on how this affects the Configuration Variance.
          Last Change

          The date and time of the last change to the BOM automatically enters this field.

          By Initials of user that made last change to BOM.
          Mgmt Lock
          This option is for BOM's that need to be protected, even from those users that have edit capabilities.  Only Supervisors or users with Lock/Unlock rights within the Security/User rights can modify this checkbox.   If locked, all users can access the screen,  but only supervisors or those with Lock/Unlock rights will have the capability to bypass the lock and make changes, while the BOM is still in lock mode.  The reason we do NOT force the user to unlock the BOM before making any changes, is to protect it from anyone else making changes while the  'authorized" user is making their changes.     
          Lock Date The date the Managment Lock Box was checked.
          By The initials of the user that check the Managment Lock Box.

          COMPONENT INFORMATION (Displayed in the Body (Detail Window)

          Item

          The item numbers assigned to the components in the BOM.

          Part Source

          The sources of the assembly components.Select Make, Buy, Consigned or Phantom.

          Part Number/Rev

          The components internal Manex part number. The Part Number Revision for the component. A component may exist under multiple revisions. Each Rev. is considered a unique part number and may co-exist with other Revs. or replace other Revs.

          Customer Part Number/Rev
           

          The component's customer part number. The Part Number Revision for the component. A component may exist under multiple revisions. Each Rev. is considered a unique part number and may co-exist with other Revs. or replace other Revs.

          Class

          The Part Class of the component part as assigned in the Item Master.

          Type

          The Part Type of the component part as assigned in the Item Master.

          Description

          The Item Master description of the component part.

          Quantity

          The quantity of the component part used in the assembly.Do not add to the quantity field to compensate for setup and run losses; Use the Setup % and Run Qty. fields in the Item Master screen to add components to cover production losses.

          Column Heading in Bold Font

          These columns, when selected will cause the Detail information below them to be sorted by the field selected.  Selected Column headers turn Red.

           

           

          1.6.3.3.2. Item Detail Information Tab

          When the user has displayed component parts on the BOM Main screen, and has highlighted one of the parts, pressing on the Item Detail Tab will display information about

          that component part.  The NEXT and PRIOR buttons are activated in the Detail Information Tabs. Clicking on either button will display the details of the next component in the BOM.

           

          The first row of Header information repeats the assembly Product information.

           

          The remaining fields describe Detail information about the component part.

           

           


          Item Detail Screen Fields  

           

          HEADER INFORMATION 

           

           Product The Part Number of the assembly.  Make Items are referred to as Products.
           Rev   The Revision of the assembly number, phantom or subassembly.

                      

           COMPONENT INFORMATION

           

          Item No         The item number assigned to the components in the BOM.
          Work Center        The work center identified in the routing for the assembly at which the part is needed. Kitting of the part by work center will use this information to determine which parts are to be kitted for each work center.
          Source    
          The Source Code for the component part on the BOM. May be another MAKE assembly, a PHANTOM assembly, a BUY part, or a CONSIGNED part. 

          When building a BOM in order to have the Source "CONSIGNED" displayed a Customer MUST be assigned to the BOM.  

           

          When building a BOM and you enter the source as a “Phantom”, then when entering the part number that is a “Make/Phantom”, the source changes to a Make” part.   The reason the source field shows at all is to limit the number of part numbers that are available to choose from.   But you can enter any valid part number and the source will change to the source of the part number entered.  So, yes, the source of the sub-assemblies will show as a “Make” part, even though they are actually “Make/Phantom” parts. The details of the BOM will also show they are “Make/Phantoms”.   We allow nested phantoms, of either the “PHANTOM” or the “Make/Phantom” variety.  In kitting, we have the code to blow down through the first level of make/phantoms, so that the parts included in the first sub-assembly level down are listed as kit requirements. We have extended this further so that if there are Make/Phantom parts in the first sub-assembly level, those also break down to the components in the second sub-assembly level.  This process extends as long as there are “Make/Phantoms” in the indented BOM.

          Part Class  The Part Class of the component part.
          Part Type The Part Type of the component part.
          Part Number    The component part number.
          Rev    The Revision number of the component.
          Customer Part Number The number the customer uses to identify the part.
          Rev   The Revision number of the customer’s component.
          Description  The description of the component part.
          Quantity    The quantity of the component part used in the assembly.  The maximum number of decimals in the BOM quantity is 2, allowing for 1/100th of an item.  If users need a finer resolution, they may consider using a different UoM than EACH, and buy in one unit and use a fractional unit for inventory (e.g. Purchase in Gallons, and Stock/Issue in ounces).
          UOM   The stocking/kitting unit of measure for the part.
          Production Offset  
          Production offset is a BoM item level field that allows users to control delivery dates in relation to the starting date of the work order.  By using this field, the user may move the material requirement date by the specified number of days in either direction.   Enter the number of days after the start date (based on the production lead-time for the assembly) that the part is needed at the kit-to Work Center.   NOTE: This will affect the MRP demands until the kit status has been changed to "KIT IN PROCESS".   Once the kit status has been changed to "Kit in Process" the parts now become a kit shortage, and  the system will calculate from the WO due date or production lead time and NOT from the production offset. .   A Negative Offset is one that SUBTRACTS time from the normal kit required date. So an item normally due on March 26 would, with a -3 day offset, be due in the stockroom on March 21st . Conversely, a Positive Offset is one that ADDS time to the normal kitting time.  So an item normally due on March 26 would, with a 3 day offset, be due in the stockroom on March 29th  (skipping the weekend).  Offsets are only managed by days, so there would never be a 3 week or 2 month offset, only 21 days or 60 days.
          Used in Kit  "Y", "N", or "F" - Identifies the part if requires kitting from the storeroom.  Typical Non-kitted items include chemicals and adhesives that are re-issued when they run low but are included on the BOM for costing or reference.  Note:  A non-kitted item will create MRP demands.  For more information see Article #34.
          Effectivity Date   
          This is the date that the part is added and/or removed from the BOM and the demands will be displayed in MRPMRP picks up all the records with an effective date earlier or equal to current date, and all NULL/BLANK effective dates.    If the user changes parts in the BOM, without changing the revision of the BOM, then they should be entering the effectivity date of the new part, and the obsolete date of the old part.  Usually, they are the same date for a replacement item.  It is the date that is used in the determination of what material is to be used in kitting.  If the kit is due to ship before the date(s), then the old definition will apply.  If the kit is due to ship after the date(s), then the new definition will apply when the kit is updated.  When printing BOMs, the information included will depend on the selection they want to see.  Current will display whatever is effective on today’s date.  History will display ALL items.  Selected date will display the BOM as of the date entered.  The old items will continue to show up on a where-used report.  This is a good thing, because when you are trying to figure out where all of the old obsolete inventory came from, you can trace it back to the assembly and customer. 

          Note:  The Kitted BOM Cost calculations displayed on the "Kit to Close Report" is based off the WO Due date and compares that to the EFF/OB dates on the BOM.  So users need to be VERY careful with the WO Due Dates and make sure that they stay current along with the EFF/OB dates on the BOM.   
          Obsolete Date   
          The date the part is no longer required on the BOM for new work orders and the demands will NOT be displayed in MRP.   

          Note:
            The Kitted BOM Cost calculations displayed on the "Kit to Close Report" is based off the WO Due date and compares that to the EFF/OB dates on the BOM.  So users need to be VERY careful with the WO Due Dates and make sure that they stay current along with the EFF/OB dates on the BOM.   

           

          DIRECTIVE BUTTON

           

          The following button is displayed on the BOM Item Detail screen:

           

            Pressing the BOM Item Note button will allow the user to create a notation specific to the component shown, in the current BOM.  To enter a note, depress the BOM Item Note button.  Depress the edit button.  Type in the note.  Depress the Save button.  Depress the Exit button.
           

           

          1.6.3.3.3. AVL And Reference Designator Tab

          When the user has displayed component parts on the summary screen, and has highlighted one of the parts, pressing on the AVL & REF Tab will display Part Manufacturer and Reference Designation information about the component part.  The NEXT and PRIOR buttons are activated in the AVL Information Tab. Clicking on either button will display the AVLs of the next component in the BOM.

           

          The first row of Information displays the selected detail part information.The Customer Part Number will be displayed if entered in the Item Master.

          The Left Center portion of the screen displays the Approved Vendors List (AVL). These manufacturers and their part numbers have been selected and designated as approved sources for this particular BOM assembly.  When the BOM for the assembly has a customer assigned to it, then Manex will pull the approved AVL's from the customer side NOT the Internal side. If no customer is assigned to the BOM then the AVL’s will be pulled from the internal side.   For further detail see Article #2560 .   NOTE:  If "GENR" is approved on the BOM MRP will consider any inventory for that part even if the AVL is not approved on the BOM. 
           
          The left hand column displays the preference order, as assigned in Inventory Control Management.
          The right hand column box must be checked for the Kit to issue the part to the Work Order.  (At least one AVL must be selected as approved within the BOM module before save will be allowed).

          The Right Center portion of the screen displays the reference designators assigned to the component. These fields are optional, but must be completed if reference designator information is to be used in the quality defect collection information.  (The ref designators are case sensitive).

          The bottom portion of the screen is available to list alternate parts that may be used in the absence of the primary part. However, these alternate parts are not listed on kit lists, and are only displayed on this screen. On the BOM, Manex provides a place for users to identify “Alternate Part” for each part called out in the BOM. However, this is for information and cross reference ONLY and there is no connection with the MRP, Purchasing or Kitting, etc. modules. The concept here is that if the engineers want to include alternate (not preferred, and not on AVL) parts for the possibility that in case purchasing can’t get the original parts called for by MRP, they could look up the alternate part on the BOM, and then order that part. However, to get the part into the kit, they will have to add the alternate part as a line shortage to the Work Order, and also check the “ignore shortage” for the part(s) originally required and short on the Work Order. Then MRP will work as needed, and the kit will show the alternate part as a (line) shortage until filled. Incidentally, creating the line shortage and checking the ignore shortage for the original part will result in an MRP directive (the next time it is run) to buy the alternate (line shortage) part. Please refer to the Material Requirements Planning and the Kitting, Allocating & Shortage Management modules.

          AVL & Ref Designator Field Definitions

          COMPONENT INFORMATION

          Item No The item number assigned to the components in the BOM.
          Part Class

          The Part Class of the component part.

          Part Type

          The Part Type of the component part.

          Part Number

          The component part number.

          Rev The Revision number of the component.

          Customer Part Number

          The customer part number as entered in the Item Master.

          Rev

          The Revision number of the customer’s part number.

          AVL INFORMATION

          Pref

          The order of preference number.

          Part Mfgr

          An approved manufacturer for the component on the current BOM.  NOTE:  When the BOM for the assembly has a customer assigned to it, then Manex will pull the approved AVL's from the customer side NOT the Internal side.   If no customer is assigned to the BOM then the AVL’s will be pulled from the internal side.   For further detail see Article #2560 .

          Mfgr Part No

          The commercial part number.

          Checkuse

          This box must be checked for kitting to pull the component.   NOTE:  If "GENR" is approved on the BOM MRP will consider any inventory for that part even if the AVL is not approved on the BOM.  (At least one AVL must be selected as approved within the BOM module before save will be allowed).

          REFERENCE DESIGNATOR INFORMATION

          Number

          The sequential number assigned to each occurrence of the component on the assembly.

          Ref Designator

          The assigned location for each occurrence of the part. (The ref designators are case sensitive).

          Prefix A prefix assigned to reference designators for the current component. Is usually a “C” for capacitors, “R” for resistors, etc
          Start No

          If the user wishes to fill in the reference designators automatically, then the start number will be the beginning number in the sequence of reference designators assigned.

          End No

          If the user wishes to fill in the reference designators automatically, then the end number will be the last number in the sequence of reference designators assigned.

          Pressing the Calculate button will fill in all reference designators with the prefix plus incremental numbers beginning with the start number entered.
          Quantity

          The quantity of components used in the assembly.

          ALTERNATE PART INFORMATION

          These items are the same as previously described.

          DIRECTIVE BUTTONS

           

          Pressing the Add button in the ALTERNATE area will allow the user to add additional item master part numbers as approved alternates.

           

          Pressing the Delete button in the ALTERNATE area will allow the user to remove item master part numbers as approved alternates.

          1.6.3.3.4. Indented BOM Tree Tab
          When the user has displayed component parts on the BOM Main screen, and has highlighted one of the parts, pressing on the Indented BOM Tree tab will display the components with additional information about a make part components. 
           
          The first row of data reminds the user of the assembly information.

          The bottom portion of the screen displays the components of this assembly. If there is a plus sign to the left of a listed component, click on the plus sign and the components of the listed
          components will also appear.
           
           
           
           
          1.6.3.4. How To ..... for BOM & AVL
          1.6.3.4.1. Find a BOM

          To enter the Bill of Material Module depress Quality/Engineering/Integrated BOM & AVL  

          When the screen first opens, the user is limited to only three of the eleven action buttons shown: Find an assembly, run a Report or Exit.  After finding an assembly, the user may page ahead or back through all Make items using the > right arrow or < left arrow button.  Assemblies having Bills of Material will display the components in the Body (Detail Window) below. Selection of one of the components in the window will cause detail information for that item to be displayed if any other BOM screen Tab is selected. Use the Add icon to add components to the BOM of a displayed assembly.  Use Edit to change or add Header information. Use the Delete icon to Delete the entire BOM ONLY (See Deletions section).  Note: Go to the Item Detail screen to delete only one item from the BOM.

           

          Find a Bill of Material

          To view an existing BOM or to find an existing Make Source Item (Product, Assembly, Subassembly or Phantom) under which to build a BOM.
          Click on the Find an existing record Action Button.

          Find an existing BOM screen selection will display:
          Select the desired search radials by clicking on them. Choose between Active, Inactive or All for the status, (Note:  The status of the BOM may be different than the status of the Inventory Part).  Since you are doing a find for the BOM you would search by the status of the BOM.  

          Check the "Display Customer Part #..." box to display the Customer Part number for the "Buy" parts if the BOM is linked to a customer.  Selecting this option may slow down the results.  The system will retain the last choice the user makes for this check box until the module has been exited.
           
           

           
          Find an Existing BOM by Product Number

          If you know the product number, click on the Search by product number radial and then type the part number into the red box and depress the OK button.

          If the part number entered cannot be found you will receive a message (shown in the screen) asking you if you would like to select Product from the list of Products

           
           

          Depress "YES" and a List of Products will be displayed in the bottom section of the screen

          The parts are listed in alphanumeric order, with the Revision, Product ID, Class and Type. 

          Note:  The status listed on the right of the screen is displaying the status of the Inventory Part not the status of the BOM, which may be different. 

          The user selects the Part Number by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected part.

           

          Find a BOM by Part Class

          If you know the Part Class, click on the Search by part class radial and then type the part class into the red box and depress the OK button.

           
           

          When the user is searching for an assembly through the part class option, a screen appears listing all of the products within that  class in alphanumeric order.
          Note:  The status listed on the right of the screen is displaying the status of the Inventory Part not the status of the BOM, which may be different. 

          The user selects the Part Number by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected part.

           

          Find a BOM by Customer

          If you know the Customer, click on the Search by Customer radial and then type the Customer into the red box and depress the OK button.

           
           

          When the user is searching for an assembly through the Customer option, a screen appears listing all of the product numbers assigned to that customer in alphanumeric order.
          Note:  The status listed on the right of the screen is displaying the status of the Inventory Part not the status of the BOM, which may be different

          The parts are listed in alphanumeric order, with the Revision, Class and Type. The user selects the Part Number by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and clicking on the selected part.

           

          BOM Search Results

          After finding the Part Number through either the Class Code, Customer, or directly by the Part Number, the BOM Main screen appears, populated with any parts already entered for the BOM of the assembly selected. If no parts have been added to the assembly, the Body (Detail Window) is blank.  When BOM is found and displayed the order will be by "Item #". User can re-sort  list by clicking on a header that is in Bold that header will display in red.  The lines that are inactive will be highlighted in purple.  When double clicking on an item, system will take you to the detail page.  

          User may find a part using the Reference Designator Lookup, by typing a reference designator into the text box it will auto fill the information, when done entering you can press “Enter” or click on the search button next to it and the record pointer in the grid will advance to the part if found.

           The Header Information fields across the upper half of the screen are populated from the item master and from keyed-in assembly data. The fields in the Body (Detail Window) show information about the components included in the assembly.
           
           
          1.6.3.4.2. Adding BOM Header Information

          A BOM Header is created by the system when a Make Item is added to the Inventory Control Mgt Item Master and Saved. When the user wishes to create a BOM by adding Line Items to the header, the existing Header is used. The Header identifies the assembly or product and its revision level, shows the status and after creation,  allows Viewing BOM components by Current, All, or Selected Effective Dates.

          Depress the Find button. See Article #571 for Find procedures.
           
           
           
           

          Depress the Edit button.   Enter your password. The following selection screen will appear:
          Select BOM Header Information button.
           


           
          Select status from the drop down menu.  When selecting the status, this status is for the BOM ONLY, it will NOT change the status of the Inventory part.  The Inventory part status and BOM status can be different.  This is to allow flexibility so the BOM can be inactive and will NOT be displayed in the BOM module, but the part will still be displayed in the inventory listing.   User will be allowed to change the status on a BOM from Active to Inactive with open SO, WO, etc. and MRP will still show demands.  User will also still be allowed to Create NEW SO, WO, etc if ONLY the BOM status is Inactive.  Users will NOT be allowed to change the status on the Inventory part from Active to Inactive with open SO, WO, etc. 

           

          If there is a Customer associated with this product, select the customer by depressing on the down arrow next to the customer box. A list of customers will appear. Highlight the customer name and double click.

          Assigning the customer name to the BOM is an option which you can elect to use or not as long as there is no consigned part. If you do not assign an assembly to a customer, this BOM can be used for any customer you want and not limited to a customer. Assigning to a customer is a requirement if you have any consigned part within the BOM. For the sales price, we allow you to add one or more customers in the Price List module and you can determine the quantity breaks and prices by each customer for the same assembly. When they are assigned in the Price List, SO module will show those assemblies only tied to the customer and avoids having to wade through all assemblies.

          • If BOM is assigned to specific customer, and if there is CONSG part in the BOM -- Only that customer will be available in the WO customer list
          • If BOM is assigned to specific customer, and no CONSG parts in the BOM -- Default to that customer, but all other customers are available to be selected.
          • If BOM is not assigned to specific customer, all customer should be available.

          To enter a BOM Note depress the BOM Note button.  Depress the Edit button. Enter in the note. Depress the Save button. Depress the Exit button.

          If you want set up scrap to be considered in Standard Cost calculation, check the Setup Stcrp box.

          If you want a standard build to be considered in Standard Cost calculation, enter the quantity.  See Article 2504 for information on how this affects the Std Cost.
           
          To Lock or Unlock a BOM:   Only Supervisors or users with Lock/Unlock rights within the Security/User rights can modify this checkbox.   If locked, all users can access the screen, but only supervisors or those with Lock/Unlock rights will have the capability to bypass the lock and make changes, while the BOM is still in lock mode. The reason we do NOT force the user to unlock the BOM before making any changes, is to protect it from anyone else making changes while the 'authorized" user is making their changes.

          When changes are complete depress the Save button to save the changes or Abandon changes button to delete changes
          .
           
           
           
           
          1.6.3.4.3. Adding BOM Line Items & BOM Copy

          Bills of Material may be built up using one of three methods:

          1. Using the mouse to Drag and Drop
          2. Keyboard data entry (Manual Entry)
          3. Copying an existing BOM 
          1.6.3.4.3.1. Drag & Drop Procedure

          1.  Procedure for Drag & Dropping

          The Drag and Drop Operation allows the user to select components in the Summary screen of Inventory Control Management and drag the items into the Integrated Bill of Material & AVL Main screen to add them as line items in the BOM.

          Use this procedure as an alternative to Manually Adding Line Items to a BOM.

          Open the Inventory Control Mgt. Summary screen and use Find to display the desired components.

          Size the Inventory Control display by placing the cursor on the far right hand side of the display.  Wait until it turns into an arrow.  Holding the mouse button down, move it to the left until just the following displays:

           
           


          Open the Integrated Bill of Material & AVL BOM Main screen, position it in the lower right hand corner of the Manex screen.

          Depress the Edit button and enter your password.



          The following selection screen will appear:

          Choose Drag and Drop.

           

          The following message will appear:

           

          Move the cursor to the Inventory window. Highlight the desired component. Use the left mouse button to select an item in the Inventory Control Management screen. Release the left mouse button. RIGHT click on the mouse button and CONTINUING TO HOLD THE RIGHT MOUSE BUTTON DOWN, move the mouse cursor over to the BOM screen. Release the right mouse button.

          NoteWhen you drop (release the mouse button), be sure that you have the cursor over the white area,. Drag each component into the BOM in Line Item # sequence.

          Enter the quantity of the part per assembly when prompted.  Select the Work Center.

          Type in the prefix for the Reference Designator. Type in the Reference Designator Start Number. Depress the Calculate button.

          The Number and Reference Designator Fields will fill in.


           

          Depress the "OK" button to Save or the "Cancel" button to abandon changes. User may also click on the X button to save the changes and close the screen.

          Depress the Save button in the BOM screen when finished dragging and dropping.

          Depress the Item Detail tab in the BOM module. The following screen will appear:

          Review the detail. If you want to make any changes, depress the Edit button while this screen is open. Type in your password. You may change Item Number, Work Center, Quantity, Production Offset days, Used in Kit, and may add Effectivity Date and Obsolete Date. Depress the Save button.

          All the AVL's will default in as approved and require the user to deselect as desired.  If no AVL's are approved a popup will appear forcing the user to approve at least one AVL. 

          When the BOM for the assembly has a customer assigned to it, then ManEx will pull the approved AVL's from the customer side NOT the internal side. For example: Part “XYZ” may have several AVL’s and several different customers linked to it.   Each customer may approve different AVL’s. So when the part is linked to a specific customer’s BOM only the AVL’s linked to that customer part will be displayed on the BOM as approved. The AVL screen looks at the accepted AVL’s for that customer on the “consigned” or “Customer” side of each part whether it was added to the BOM as a “BUY”, “MAKE” or “Consigned”. If no customer is assigned to the BOM then the AVL’s will be pulled from the internal side.  NOTE:  If "GENR" is approved on the BOM MRP will consider any inventory for that part even if the AVL is NOT approved on the BOM.   For further detail refer to Article #2560 .

          If you want to add alternate parts, depress the AVL and Reference Designator tab. Depress the Edit button. Enter your password. Depress the Add button next to the alternate parts section of the screen.

          The following selection option will appear:
           
          If you select Internal Part Number, then enter the Part Number into the Red Box.
           

          If you select Consigned Part Number, Select the Customer from the Pull Down list, then enter the Customer PN into the Red Box.
           

          Information regarding the alternate part will display in the bottom section, as displayed below:

          Depress the Save button.

          1.6.3.4.3.2. Manual Entry

          Procedure for Manually Adding Line Items

          Use this procedure as an alternative to Drag and Dropping from the Inventory Summary screen.

          Open the Integrated Bill of Material & AVL BOM Main screen and Find desired Header.

          To add a component, click on the Add Record button, enter password.

          The following screen will appear:

          Select "Yes" or "No" to Auto Line Item Numbering.

           

           

          The item detail screen will appear:

           

          In the Item Detail screen select Work Center to Kit to (use Material Staging if not known), from the drop down menu:  

          Then select Source (Make, Buy, Consigned or Phantom), from the drop down menu:
           
          When building a BOM in order to have the Source "CONSIGNED" displayed a Customer MUST be assigned to the BOM.
           

          When building a BOM and you enter the source as a “Phantom”, then when entering the part number that is a “Make/Phantom”, the source changes to a Make” part.   The reason the source field shows at all is to limit the number of part numbers that are available to choose from.   But you can enter any valid part number and the source will change to the source of the part number entered.  So, yes, the source of the sub-assemblies will show as a “Make” part, even though they are actually “Make/Phantom” parts. The details of the BOM will also show they are “Make/Phantoms”.   We allow nested phantoms, of either the “PHANTOM” or the “Make/Phantom” variety.  In kitting, we have the code to blow down through the first level of make/phantoms, so that the parts included in the first sub-assembly level down are listed as kit requirements. We have extended this further so that if there are Make/Phantom parts in the first sub-assembly level, those also break down to the components in the second sub-assembly level.  This process extends as long as there are “Make/Phantoms” in the indented BOM.

           

          Either enter the item number by typing it directly into the Part Number field or select Part Class and Part Type, as illustrated below:

          Select the Part Class.

           

          Select the Part Type.

           

          Depress the down arrow next to the Part Number box. A list of all of the inventory parts within the selected Class and Type will appear.

          Type the Part Number into the Red box or highlight and double click to select.

          If the item is a Consigned Item, enter either the Customer part number OR the Internal Part number, in the respective fields

           

           

          If you added an internal part and if there is a matching Customer part number in the Inventory Customer screen, it will automatically appear as soon as the internal inventory part is selected.  Conversely, if you typed in a customer part number, the internal part number information will automatically appear.

          Enter the Quantity of the item required for each assembly produced.

          (Note: Extra parts for setup or run losses should be added in the Inventory Control Mgt. Item Master Run Scrap % or Setup Scrap Qty. field, not in the Bill of Material.)

          Enter the production offset days by toggling on the up and down buttons.

          If the component is to be pulled in the kit, leave the Y in the Kit box.If not, remove it.

          Enter the effectivity and obsolete dates, if desired.

          Depress the AVL & Reference Designator tab

          All the AVL's will default in as approved and require the user to deselect as desired.  If no AVL's are approved a popup will appear forcing the user to approve at least one AVL. 

          When the BOM for the assembly has a customer assigned to it, then ManEx will pull the approved AVL's from the customer side NOT the internal side. For example: Part “XYZ” may have several AVL’s and several different customers linked to it.   Each customer may approve different AVL’s. So when the part is linked to a specific customer’s BOM only the AVL’s linked to that customer part will be displayed on the BOM as approved. The AVL screen looks at the accepted AVL’s for that customer on the “consigned” or “Customer” side of each part whether it was added to the BOM as a “BUY”, “MAKE” or “Consigned”. If no customer is assigned to the BOM then the AVL’s will be pulled from the internal side.  NOTE:  If "GENR" is approved on the BOM MRP will consider any inventory for that part even if the AVL is NOT approved on the BOM.  For further detail refer to Article #2560 .
           
           
          Enter the Ref designators manually in the table or enter the prefix letter, Start No and End No and depress the Calculate button to auto-number. 

          If you want to add alternate parts, depress the AVL and Reference Designator tab. Depress the Add button next to the alternate parts section of the screen.

          The following selection option will appear, Select Internal Part Number, enter the part number in the red box.  

          If you select Consigned Part Number, select a Customer from the pull down list, enter in the Customer Part Number in the Red Box. 

           

          Information regarding the alternate part will display in the bottom section, as displayed below.

          Once user has completed entering all information for line item number, depress the Save button.

           

           

          1.6.3.4.3.3. Copy an Existing BOM

          Procedure for Copying from an Existing BOM

          A new assembly may have a BOM applied to it by copying the bill of material from an existing assembly. To simplify changing a Bill of Material, while maintaining the original version of the assembly, users can copy the parts list into a new assembly and make changes as needed. 
           
          After finding the new (and empty) assembly.

          Depress the Copy button and enter the user’s password will prompt the user for the existing bill of materials from which to copy the components.

          The user may find the existing assembly from which to copy either by part number or by part class.
           
           
           
          If the BOM being copied from contains references to a customer, and or consigned part numbers, the following message appears:

          MANEX will populate the new assembly with all of the part information from the existing assembly, except for parts belonging to a customer. Those items will have to be added manually. The filled in BOM is displayed below:

          Depress the Edit button to add the customer name and any other needed changes, in any of the screens.

          The user can then either Save the new assembly with all of the components, or Cancel the operation.
           
          1.6.3.4.4. Bill Of Material Deletions

          The Delete button takes on dual meanings.  If the user is in the BOM Main Tab when the button is pushed, the button will delete ALL items on the BOM.   You will be prompted for your password. The following message will appear: 

          If there are open work orders for the assembly, then the user is presented with a prompt advising that the bom cannot be deleted while open orders exist, as displayed below: 

          If the user is in the Item Detail Information Tab when the button is pushed, the button will delete only the item highlighted.  You will be prompted for your password.  The following message will appear:

          1.6.3.4.5. Procedure For Editing Line Item Details

          Use this procedure to edit Line Item details after entering BOM Header information and Line Item Part Numbers and Quantities per assembly manually, using drag and drop, or copying.

          Click on the Item Detail tab.  Depress the Edit button and enter password. 

           
          NOTE:   If users choose to use effective and obsolete dates in place of proper revision control, you must be absolutely certain that they do not take effect at any point after production begins and before the WO is closed. If this isn't properly managed, you will get the variances. While some may be minor and positive variances may partially offset negative variances, you CANNOT rely on this and you WILL have discrepancies.

          The best approach is to always roll the revision when there is a change to an assembly that will affect the value in any way. This becomes even more important if you have WOs open long after the due date and it has had additional changes to the configuration.   
          See Article #5055 for further detail.

          The Item number, Work Center, Qty, Production Offset, Used in Kit, Effective Date, and Obsolete Date can be edited on this screen. 

          The Production Offset would be edited, If an item is to be kitted to a Work Center that will not be reached by the Work Order until X days later, enter X days in the Production Offset to allow kitting to that Center X  days later.  NOTE: This will affect the MRP demands until the kit status has been changed to "KIT IN PROCESS". Once the kit status has been changed to "Kit in Process" the parts now become a kit shortage, and the system will calculate from the WO due date or production lead time and NOT from the production offset.

          Enter Effectivity Date for the line item to be used in the BOM.

          (Note: Prior to Effectivity Date or after Obsolete Date, the line item will not appear on the Current BOM view nor will it appear on a Pick List to Kit the Assembly.)

          Edit the "Used in Kit" by selecting Y (Yes) for Used in Kit unless the item is not to be issued when a kit is pulled. Select P (Phantom) to cause a Make subassembly to be treated as a Phantom when kitted. Select N (No) if the item is provided to the Line by some other means than kitting.  (Note: Chemicals and adhesives are typical not-kitted items that are referenced on the BOM for costing or specification but issued to the production floor on a bulk replenishment basis.)

          If you depress the AVL & Reference Designator tab the Ref designators can be edited manually in the table OR Enter the Prefix letter, Start No and End No and click on the Calculate button to auto-number.  Here is where you will also check the approved AVL's and uncheck the AVL's that are NOT approved for this BOM.  NOTE:  If "GENR" is approved on the BOM MRP will consider any inventory for that part even if the AVL is NOT approved on the BOM.  When adding new AVL's to the item master, if you do not want the BOM's automatically updated be sure that the "Disable Automatic BOM AVL update" is Enabled.  See article #1477  for more information.

          You may also Add or Delete Alternate Parts by depressing the Add or Delete button near the Alternate Parts to select alternative part numbers for the Line Item currently being edited in the BOM. This table is in the BOM screen because alternate part usage is always dependent upon the application and hence is BOM specific. (Note: Use the Quantity Info screen and AVL window to show alternate manufacturers; the alternate part window is only for items with a different internal part number (such as faster or tighter tolerance parts) that can be used on a temporary deviation when there is no choice.)

          Once you have completed the changes, depress the Save button and BOM will be updated.
           
          Note:  If the Leveling of Make items is in process then the users will not be able to Add/Edit a BOM, even if the user is already in modifucation mode of the BOM, the user will not be allowed to save the changes until the leveling process is complete.  This is due to the fact that the affected records in leveling of Make Parts is large and complex, the saving time to commit the whole changes to inventory tables does take a large amount of time, so we do not want users making modifications to the BOM when the process is still leveling, so we have added a flag that the users will see within the BOM module. 
          1.6.3.4.6. Bill of Material (BOM) Used in Kit Option and how it affects Kitting & MRP

          Within the Bill of Material module the users have the option to mark each item loaded to the BOM as Used in Kit Y, N or F. 

          Y = Yes, this part is used in the Kit and will be considered fro MRP demands and appear within the Kitting module Qty Pick screen.  Once the parts have been issued to the kit  the system will automatically decrement it from inventory upon WO complete. 

           

          N = No, this part is NOT used in the kit, but it will be considered by MRP for demands but will NOT appear in the Kit module Qty Pick screen.  This item will still be displayed on the Kit Pick Worksheet but it will have the “N” next to the item so users will know that it is not used in the kit.  Example:  you would use this option for Documentation.  NOTE:   Keep in mind that this item will be picked by the users on the floor but it will not be relieved from inventory in any way through the Kitting module. Users have to go make and manually adjust the inventory qty’s for this type of item.

           

          MRP includes items with "N" flag in "used in kit" for Purchase Order Actions. The flag does not mean don't buy it, but instead, it means don't kit it. The part is still needed, or it wouldn't be on the BOM. Or the quantity would be zero. This feature is usually used by Users who have bulk stock on the floor, and the assemblers pull the parts out of floor stock.  But there still remains the requirement to get the parts in house so they can be put into floor stock.

          F = Floor, this would be used for an item that is not kept in the Stock room but is physically stored out on the Floor in production.  “F” items will also be considered by MRP for demands, but will NOT be displayed on Kit Module Qty Pick Screen or the Shortage report.  This item will still be displayed on the Kit Pick Worksheet but it will have the “F” next to the item to indicate to the users that it is located on the Floor.  NOTE:  Keep in mind that this item will be picked by the users on the floor but it will not be relieved from inventory in any way through the Kitting module.  Users have to go make and manually adjust the inventory qty’s for this type of item.

           

          1.6.3.4.7. Bill of Material Setup Scrap Checkbox

          Within the Bill of Material Module you will see a Setup Scrap check box and a Standard Build field.  If you wish for the setup scrap qty’s to be included in the Kitting and MRP calculations,  Standard Cost Adjustments, etc. . . you need to make sure that the BOM has the Setup Scrp box marked.  Then upon checking this box the system will default in the Standard Build qty to 1 (just because it can not be blank)  It is recommend that you change the Standard Build qty to the desired average build qty for the product (the Standard Build will affect how the system will calculate Standard Cost Adjustments, etc. . . within the system)

           

           

           

          1.6.3.4.8. Make a Obsolete Part Available on a BOM
          Find an existing BOM
           
           
          Depress the pulldown next to the History and Select BOM History, all parts will be displayed, including the parts that have been obsoleted.
           
           
          Highlight the part that has been obsoleted and enter the item detail screen, depress the edit button and remove the obsolete date or change it to a later date.
           
           
          Now the part is available to use. 
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
          1.6.3.5. Reports - BOM & AVL

          To display or print a Report for a BOM, first find the BOM. (See Article #571).

          1. To access the reports, depress the Print action button at the top of the screen.  The report screen will appear.



          2.  Select the output you desire by selecting one of the output radial selections at the top left of the screen, Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

          3.  Highlight the report desired and click on the option tab.  (The BOM reports will indicate in the Source column if the item is setup as Make/Buy or Make/Phantom, along with Consigned or Buy).

          BILL OF MATERIAL WITH REFERENCE DESIGNATORS

          For the BOM with Reference Designators report check if you would like the BOM Notes to be displayed on the report.  

          Depress the OK button.

           

          The following is printed

           

           

          BILL OF MATERIAL BY PART NUMBERS

          BILL OF MATERIAL BY ITEM NUMBERS

          Check the boxes if you want the BOM item notes list and/or the BOM notes to be displayed on the report.

          Depress Ok.

           

          The following report will print:

           


          BILL OF MATERIAL WITH STANDARD COST

          Choose By Item #, By Part #, or Descending Extended Cost from the Detail Report.

          Depress Ok.  
           

          Note: This report takes into consideration the Std Bld Qty when calculating the setup scrap.  You might find the cost calculated in SFT is different from the calculation shown on this report due to,  that if the part UOM is "EACH" and the part has scrap % the code will round it up to next inter number.
           
          a)  For the PHANTOM parts in this report the standard cost calculated is based on their components (SUM of component's qty * component standard cost).  Once the standard cost is calculated for the PHANTOM part, the report will treat the PHANTOM part as a single entity on the top assembly BOM and proceed as it was a BUY part with the std cost already entered.
          b)  If one of the component parts is a MAKE (not MAKE_BUY) and HAVE components assigned to it, the report will NOT show std cost of the parts itself, it will only show std cost of its subcomponents.
          c)  If one of the component parts is a MAKE (not MAKE_BUY) and does NOT HAVE parts assigned to it the report will show std cost of the part itself.
          d)  If one of the component part is a MAKE and MAKE_BUY the report will show price for the part itself and will show 0.00 costs for the subcomponents.
          e)  If one of the component part is a MAKE and a Phantom/Make the report will NOT display the std price for this part because the report will show the cost of this parts components.
           
          Note:  This report will only display the costs for ACTIVE parts and subassemblies as of the date of the report and will NOT include any parts that may have been identified as inactive either in the item master or in the obsolete date of the part on the BOM.
           
          The values displayed should be in sync with the Cost Roll Up values.   The following may be why the Standard Cost Roll is different from the Cost BOM Reports.

          a)    On the costed BOM Report for a Make/Buy assembly we display the value of the BOM in the costed report, but that total is NOT used in subsequent rollups to higher levels only the standard cost is.  

          b)    In Kit Default Setup , user can "Exclude Scrap and Setup Scrap"  in Kitting, MRP, and Cost Rollup, and this will override the "Setup Stcrp" box in the BOM.      Therefore, if user checks "Setup Stcrp" checkbox along with a Standard Bld qty in BOM header, but has the checkbox checked in Kit Default Setup to "Exclude Scrap and Setup Scrap" for Cost Roll, the Cost Roll will NOT calculate the Setup Scrap cost, but this report will always calculate the Setup Scrap cost and this will cause unfavorable Configuration Variances.   For further detail on how Excluding Scrap and Setup Scrap values will affect the variances see Articles #3067, #3053, and #3320
           

          The following report will print:  This report ALWAYS includes ALL the parts (including the items flagged as "N" for Used in kit) 
           

           

          BILL OF MATERIAL LEAD TIME REPORT

          Choose By Lead Time, or By Part # from the Detail Report.

          Check Ok.

          The BOM with Lead Time report will add the lead time of the parent part into the lead time field.  So if you have a child part with a Purchase lead time of 30 days, and a parent part with a lead time of 1 day for Kitting and 3 days for Production, the lead time of the child part will be 1+3+30 = 34.      

           

          The following report will print:

           

          BILL OF MATERIAL, INDENTED WITH WORK CENTER 

          BILL OF MATERIAL, OUTDENTED WHERE USED

          Select the Inventory Type by choosing the radial.  Enter the Internal Part Number and Rev. 
          Check the box if you want the  BOM items that are expired or not effective yet to be displayed on the report.
           
           

          The following report will print:

          BILL OF MATERIAL WITH ALTERNATE PART NUMBERS

          BILL OF MATERIALS WITH REFERENCE DESIGNATORS & AVL

          Check the boxes if you want the BOM item notes list and/or BOM notes to be displayed on the report. 
           
          The AVL Order Pref Code will be displayed in front of the Mfgr and Mfgr PN information.
           
          For further detail on exporting to XL format see Article #3319 .

           

           

          The following report will print:

          TOP ASSEMBLY PART USAGE

          Select the Product number and applicable revision.

          Select the quantity by toggling on the up and down arrows.

          Choose between All Current Components, Used in Kit Components Only and Not used in kit Components by clicking on the desired radial.

          Choose between Group by Component/Work Center and Show with Parent Assembly by clicking on the desired radial. 

          Depress Ok.  
           

          The following report is printed:

            

          COSTED TOP ASSEMBLY PART USAGE

           Select the Product number and applicable revision.

          Select the quantity by toggling on the up and down arrows.

          Choose between All Current Components, Used in Kit Components Only and Not used in kit Components by clicking on the desired radial.

          Choose between Group by Component/Work Center and Show with Parent Assembly by clicking on the desired radial. 

          Depress Ok.
           

          The following report will print:

          BILL OF MATERIAL, INDENTED AND COSTED - the following rules are applied to make sure that the Cost is properly calculated:

          a)  If one of the component parts are MAKE (not MAKE_BUY) and have components assigned to it, the report will NOT show cost of the parts itself, it will only show cost of its subcomponents.
          b)  If the component part is MAKE (not MAKE_BUY) and has no parts assigned to it the report will show cost of the part itself.
          c)  If the component part is MAKE and MAKE_BUY the report will show price for the part itself and will show 0.00 costs for the subcomponents and display the following message "Standard price of the subcomponents of this part is omitted, because the part is marked as a MAKE/BUY and report will consider this part's own cost.". 
          d)  If the component part is a MAKE and a Phantom/Make the report will not display the std price for this part because the report will show the cost of this parts components.
          Note:  Only Approved AVL's will be displayed on report.   Note:  This report will only display the costs for ACTIVE parts and subassemblies as of the date of the report and will NOT include any parts that may have been identified as inactive either in the item master or in the obsolete date of the part on the BOM.
           
           


          BILL OF MATERIAL, INDENTED WITH AVL
            - This report will list out the Indented BOM information, and the Approved AVL information.
           
           
           
           

           

          The BOM reports will indicate in the Source column if the item is setup as Make/Buy or Make/Phantom, along with Consigned or Buy.
           
          1.6.3.6. FAQs - BOM & AVL
          Facts and Questions for the Bill of Material (BOM) Module
          1.6.3.7. ManEx Minutes (BOM)
          1.6.4. Express Import to BOM or Quote (OPTIONAL Module)
          1.6.4.1. Prerequisites - QBI
          Prerequisites Required to Import a BOM

          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase.   To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com\contactus.aspx

           

          To import a BOM, the template qabim.xlt  must be used.  Note:  The module will only recognize and import data that is populated within the "Supplied BOM" worksheet within the template.  The other worksheets are for additional reference only. 


          After activation, "Express Import to BOM or Quote" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
          System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.

          This template has the required fields to begin the import of new Item masters and BOMs.  It contains two named ranges, COLHDR and IMPTDATA, which must be included.  In the COLHDR are contained the field names for each column, and must not be modified.  The IMPTDATA range must include all data to be imported (not the field names).  The cells that must be in the IMPTDATA range are colored, and as the sheet is supplied, contain 1500 lines.  More may be added, but the range must be expanded to include them. 
           

           

           

          The top four rows are protected to avoid accidental modification, but there is no password required to un-protect the sheet.   Once un-protected, the user may rearrange the columns to match data as received from each customer,  then saved the modified sheet as a template for each customer.
           
          The BOMASSY, BOMREV, and BOMDESC (highlighted in blue) listed MUST match either what is already in the system , or MUST be listed as a component on the spreadsheet (as shown below in the RED box).  The same assembly and revision cannot be for two different customers.  These fields are required. 

          To import a brand new Product/assembly into the system from the spreadsheet, the customer number and the columns in pink are REQUIRED to be completed, as shown below: 
           
           
           
           
           
          The columns in pink are required to be completed.

           

          To import Make or Buy parts to a BOM you must popluate the following fields:  ITEM NO, Part Src, QTY, CPARTMFGR

          To import Consigned parts to a BOM you must popluate the following fields:  ITEM NO, Part Src, QTY, CPARTMFGR, CPARTNO and/or CDESCRIP

           

          To import to Quote you must populate the following fields:   ITEM NO, Part Src, QTY, CPARTMFGR, CUSTNO, CPARTNO and/or CDESCRIP

           

          The fields listed on the XLS spreadsheet are:

           

          CUSTNO: The 10 character Customer code (optional)
          BOMASSY: The 20 character Customer part number of the ASSEMBLY  (required)
          BOMREV:  The 4 character Customer revision of the ASSEMBLY (required)
          BOMDESC: The 30 character Customer description of the ASSEMBLY (required)
          ITEM_NO:  The line item that each component is on each BOM (required)  (NOTE:  The line item must be unique for each component).
          Used in Kit Enter in "Y" if this part is to be used in kit, Enter "N" if this part is NOT to be used in kit. If this field is left blank "Y" will be defaulted into the BOM when import is complete.(optional)
          Part_Src:   If it is a BUY, MAKE, CONSIGN, or PHANTOM (required)
          QTY:     The quantity per assembly  (required)
          CPARTNO: The CUSTOMER Part number for the components (optional)  NOTE:  This field is required if Auto Numbering is Disabled.
          CREV:   The CUSTOMER Revision for the components (optional)
          CDESCRIP:  The CUSTOMER Description of the component (required)
          U_of_M:     The unit of measure of the component.  Usually EACH (required)   NOTE:  If you wish for the system to take the system defaults for UoM we recommended that you leave the UOM column blank on the XLS spreadsheet and based on the Class/type selections made within the BOM Import module the system will then populate both Stock and Purchase UOM for the new Inventory Part number that is generated.  
          CPARTMFG: The MANUFACTURER of the customer part number (required)
          MF_PT_NO:  The manufacturer of Part Number of the customer part number (optional)
          MatlType This is the AVL Material Type.(required)  The choices are hard coded in the ManEx system.  If this field is left blank "Unk" will be defaulted into the BOM and ICM when import is complete.  (Depress the red mark in the right hand corner to view the choices) 
          REFDESG: The reference designator(s) for the customer part number (optional)

           

          NOTE:  The Reference Designator field is unlimited in size, and can ONLY accept the following formats or combinations, thereof:

          C1, C2, C3, C5, C6, C10, . . . . . . .,

          C1-C3, C5-C6, C10,  . . . . . . .,

          C103, C5-6, C10, . . . . . . . . . .,
           
          It is very critical that the user follows these formats or combinations.  If the program cannot decipher the reference designators it will confuse the system and create the system to hang up and/or crash.  
           
          If there are multiple AVL's for the same component, it is necessary to repeat all the information including the item number and Reference Designators for each AVL, ONLY changing the CPARTMFGR and MFGR PN.  All other information MUST be the same.    See example below.  
           

             

          The Assemblies listed must either already be in the system , or included in the spreadsheet.  The same assembly and revision cannot be for two different customers.

          The spreadsheet can be save in any folder accessible by Manex and under any name. 
           

           

           
          1.6.4.2. Introduction for QBI

          To provide the capability to load Bills of Material (BOM), to Manex Production and Quotation modules from a simplified Excel spreadsheet.Parts lists, AVL's, and Reference Designators, are all included.

          A specific excel template has been created for the module and must be used.There is no limit to the size of the BOMs (number of components), nor to the number of BOMs (assemblies) that can be loaded at one time.The only restrictions are that when loading to a Quote, only one customer may be on the spreadsheet, and when loading to a BOM, only one customer may be associated with a given BOM.

          After a preliminary validation of the data, the Import procedure will attempt to locate existing components in the system, and offer the user the choice to use alternate existing components, or to load the spreadsheet again with a different part number.  All NEW part numbers will be loaded into inventory, and the BOMs created.  If there is already an existing BOM, the user will be prompt to decide to override the existing BOM, or ignore the BOM being loaded in the spreadsheet.  If new AVLs are involved with existing parts, the user will be prompt to add the new AVL to the existing part, or create a new part number.  However, it will not overide the material type on existing AVL's, due to the fact that there might be inventory on hand at that time that is not LF (for example) and if we changed the material type upon load it would no longer match the parts on hand.

          1.6.4.3. How To ..... for QBI
          1.6.4.3.1. Import to BOM or Quote

          Once the spreadsheet is completed, it may be loaded from within the Manex Express Import to BOM or Quote Module.

           

          Enter the Express Import to BOM or Quote module and the following screen will appear:

          1. Choose to either Import to BOM and Inventory or Import to Quote Module by Selecting the appropriate radial.

          • If you choose to Import to Quote Module.  The user will need to select Existing Quote or New Quote. If Existing Quote is selected you must enter in the Quote Number.  If New Quote is selected and system setup is on auto numbering for new quote number, program will not take the next number until the "Load" button is clicked. The last quote number is displayed on the screen in the beginning of the import process.  When the "Load" button is clicked the system will check for the next new number and display a prompt to the user.  When selecting to import to new quote you can only import new products.  To import a brand new Product/assembly into the system from the spreadsheet, the customer number and the columns in pink are REQUIRED to be completed, and MUST match the BOMASSY, BOMREV, and BOMDESC listed in the blue shaded columns.   For further detail see Article #1805 .
          • When importing to an existing Quote number through the QBi module, upon depressing the Load button, the system will first find if any products, (disregarding if the product is the same or different from the new import), exist in the Manex under the given quote #.  If the system finds any records it will ask the user whether or not to overwrite them.  If the user selects "Yes" the system will proceed the same way it was always working replacing what ever was under the quote module with new import information.  If the user selects "No" the system will then check if the new import information has any product listed that is the same as the product under the existing quote, and if it does user will be prompted again, but this time if they want to overwrite those records for the products that are the same in both quote and new import file.  If the user chooses "Yes" the system will overwrite existing product information and add any new product to the quote.  If the user chooses "No" the system will only add any new products to the quote. 
          • If you choose to Import to BOM and Inventory

          2.  Depress the XL File Button.   The following screen will appear.

          3.  The user will highlight the file to be uploaded.

           

          There are several validations run at this point, these are a few.  Note:  If the XLS file is not displayed on screen go to your Local_manex directory.  There you should be able to find {{ C:\"_ManexLocal"temp"POExceptionXL}} within that directory is where some of the XLS files that are displayed for your reference could be listed.

          If the part Source on the excel template does not exactly match what is in the Part Source Setup (for example: having CONG on the excel template and CONSG setup in Part Source Setup) the following message will be displayed and you may choose to continue or abort. 

          If there is missing data or invalid data on spreadsheet the following prompt will be displayed and you may choose to continue or abort. 

           

           If there are different components with the same item numbers for the same BOM listed on the spreadsheet the following prompt will be displayed. The upload will abort, so you may review the "DupItem.xls" file and correct the spreadsheet.
           
          If users happen to be loading more than one BOM/product into the system on the same spreadsheet and they have the same part number associated with different products with different descrptions that information will also be displayed in an XLS spreadsheet.
           

           If there are incorrect ref designator count on the spreadsheet the following prompt will be displayed.  You may choose to continue or abort to review the XLS file created and correct the spreadsheet.  

          If the material type has been entered incorrectly on the  spreadsheet the following prompt will be displayed.  You may choose to continue or abort to review the XLS file created and correct the spreadsheet.


          Once all the validations are run, The 1: Get File tab appears and the contents of the file are displayed.
           
           
          If user has entered an existing ManEx PN in the CPARNO field on the Template, they have the option to check this box "Use Information in 'Cpartno' field as Internal Part Number".    If this box is checked the system will use the PN in the CPARTNO field on the template as the internal PN not as a customer/consigned PN.   Note:  The Mfgr on the template MUST be Genr, also.  See the example below.
           

          4.  The user may click on the "Next" button to continue or the "Start Over" button to clear the contents and select another file. Again several validations are run.

          If there are multi part sources (same part number listed twice; one as MAKE and one as BUY) listed on the spreadsheet the following warning will appear.  The upload will abort so you may review the "DupSource.xls"  file and correct the spreadsheet.   

          If the BOM assembly you are uploading does not exist in ManEx as a Customer assembly nor is in the components of the import list or is different than what is listed on the import list this warning will appear.  The upload will abort so you may review the "MissingAssy".xls" file and correct the spreadsheet.

          If you are uploading an existing product to the Quote module you will receive the following message.  You can only import new products into the Quote Module. To import a brand new Product/assembly into the system from the spreadsheet, the customer number and the columns in pink are REQUIRED to be completed, and MUST match the BOMASSY, BOMREV, and BOMDESC listed in the blue shaded columns.   For further detail see Article #1805 .

          If there is more than one customer listed on the spreadsheet the following warning will appear.  the upload will abort so you may review the "QuoteCust.xls" file and correct the spreadsheet.
           

          If there are more than one customer ID listed on the spreadsheet the following warning will appear.  The upload will abort so you may review the "ConflictCust.xls" file and correct the spreadsheet


          Once all the validations are run, The 2: Check Val tab appears.  If validation of certain data fails, the following screen will be displayed, with a grid of problems, and the User asked to clarify the data.

           

          The first check is to verify that valid Customer Codes are used in the spreadsheet. If one or more invalid customers are found, then a grid will be displayed with the appropriate information, and the user must select an appropriate customer from the drop-down list of customer codes. Or, the user may exit the screen and clarify the spreadsheet.

          The next check is to validate that a valid Unit of Measure (UOM) is on each line of the spreadsheet. If an invalid UOM is found, the user is presented with a list of invalid UOMs and may select a valid one from a drop down list of valid UOMs. Or, the user may exit the screen and clarify the spreadsheet.  Clicking on the dropdown arrow will display available Units of Measure to replace the invalid one.

          The next check is to validate that correct Manufacturer Codes have been used in the spreadsheet. If not, a grid is displayed with the invalid manufacturer codes, and the use may select from a dropdown list of valid manufacturers to replace the invalid code. Or, the user may exit the screen and clarify the spreadsheet. Clicking on the dropdown arrow will display available Manufacturers to replace the invalid one.  Once the user identifies a MFGR all like MFGRS on the BOM will be updated with the same selection. 

          The next check is to validate that correct Source Codes have been used in the spreadsheet. If not, a grid is displayed with the invalid source codes, and the user may select from a dropdown list of valid source codes (BUY, MAKE, CONSG or PHANTOM). Or, the user may exit the screen and clarify the spreadsheet.  Clicking on the dropdown arrow will display available Source Codes to replace the invalid one.

          The next check is to ascertain whether or not there is an existing BOM for assemblies contained in the spreadsheet.  If there is, the user must indicate whether or not the existing BOM is to be overwritten with the new data in the spreadsheet. If the user elects to NOT overwrite the existing BOM, the data will not be loaded to the BOM, but the item master will still be updated with any new parts contained in the spreadsheet. Or, the user may exit the screen and clarify the spreadsheet.

          5. When all of the foregoing information has been validated or corrected, the user may click on the "Next" button. The program will be sure that all information is valid, and proceed to the next page. Or, it will redirect the user to the invalid information and allow correction of the data.

          The 3: AVL tab appears. 

          The program will search the database for existing Item Masters with the same Customer Part Number and Revision and for the same Customer as contained in the spreadsheet (although is a different AVL.

          The user will be presented with a list of components on the spreadsheet with NEW AVLS (same customer, Customer Part Number, Customer Revision, but AVL is different on spreadsheet). The user is then prompted to select (by check box) AVLs they wish to add to the existing customer part numbers. Items not checked will be retained for further disposition in the program.
           
          NOTE:  If a customer selects to use an existing PN, when they import a BOM the new AVL(s) will NOT be added to existing BOM's.

          For Example:  If user has a part listed on their XL file with customer part number "215002-002" and customer id '0000000004'. When the user moves on to the AVL page (page 3), the program will try to located the part listed on the  XL file in the inventory.  It will search for all the consigned parts with customer part number = "215002-002" and customer id = '0000000004'.  In the inventory data the system found two different internal parts with the same consigned part number and the same customer id. One part is '101-0001621' and another is '515-0003224'.  Then the system will proceed with comparing AVL's for those parts with AVL's entered in the XL.  It found that the part number '515-0003224' has Mfgr: 'SWITCHCR', MPN: 'RTT34B02', which is a match to the AVL entered in the XL file.  You can see "Same as in upload" in the MPN column on the screen.  For the part number '101-0001621' the system found "GENR" AVL, which is different from our XL file, so the system indicates that if this part will be selected a new AVL 'SWITCHCR' with MPN: 'RTT34B02' will be added to it.  Base on this information a user can make a decision on which part to use.  

          6. Pressing the "Next" button will add the checked AVLs to existing Customer Part Numbers. It will also find all existing parts in the item master and include all inventory item master information with those parts being loaded.

          The 4: Rev tab appears.

          The import program will search the existing database for parts having the same AVL (Mfgr and Mfrg PN) as the spreadsheet parts, under the same customer part number, but with a different customer revision. The user will be presented with a list of those parts, and may take the option to use them instead of creating a new part number. If accepted (by check box), the alternate customer part number and revision will be used in the BOM.Items not checked will be retained for further disposition in the program.

           

          7. Pressing the "Next" button will revise the checked items to existing (alternate) Customer Part Numbers.

          The 5: CPN tab appears.

          The import program will search the existing database for parts having the same AVL as the spreadsheet parts, under the ANY CUSTOMER with the same customer part number, and without regard to customer revision. (Some users may use the manufacturers part number for their own.) The user will be presented with a list of those parts, and may take the option to use them instead of creating a new part number.  If accepted (by check box), the alternate customer part number and revision will be used in the BOM. However, the Customer will be added to the customer list for the existing part. Of the checked items, there must be only one check to select an alternate part number, although the search of existing part numbers may find several.  Items not checked will be retained for further disposition in the program.

          8. Pressing the "Next" button will revise the checked items to existing (alternate) Customer Part Numbers.

          The 6: Alternate CPN tab appears.

          The import program will search the existing database for parts having the same AVL as the spreadsheet parts, under the same customer, but with ANY customer part number, and without regard to customer revision. The user will be presented with a list of those parts, and may take the option to use them instead of creating a new part number.  If accepted (by check box), the alternate customer part number and revision will be used in the BOM. However, the Customer will be added to the customer list for the existing part. Items not checked will be retained for further disposition in the program.



          9. Pressing the Next button will revise the checked items to existing (alternate) Part Numbers.

          The 7: Alternate PN tab appears.

          The import program will search the existing database for ANY parts having all the same AVL(s) (Same Mfgr and Mfgr PN) as the spreadsheet parts. 

          If the part number listed on the spreadsheet has ALL the same AVL(s) and/or some additional AVL(s), as a part in the system, the user will be presented with a list of those parts, and may take the option to use them instead of creating a new part number.  If accepted (by checkbox), the alternate part number and revision will be used in the BOM, the Customer will be added to the customer list for the existing part, along with any new AVL information from the xls spreadsheet, which is automatically added to the BOM and Inventory Control records.  If the part number listed on the spreadsheet has some AVL(s) that match a part in the system, but not all of them, the system will NOT consider this as an alternative part number.  

          Here is an example of why the system will NOT list a part as an Alternative part if only 1 AVL matches and not all AVLs match:  Lets say we have PART A (internal part) with AVL1, AVL2, AVL3.  This part is on the BOM for the customer A.  Lets say the user is loading BOM for customer B and it has PART B (which is NOT in the system yet) with AVL6, AVL7, AVL1. If the system recognized PART A as an alternative to PART B and adds AVL6, AVL7 to the PART A. Then when you go and view BOM for customer A you will see AVL1, AVL2, AVL3, AVL6, and AVL7 on the list of approved manufacturers. This list was changed seamlessly and without real understanding on the users part or without customers consent.  If this is not enough we added X-Ref that will find anything the user want and replace the part selected.

          Items not checked will be retained for further disposition in the program. A purple highlight indicates that the item is Inactive.  If the user still elects to use the Inactive part the system will display a warning message that the inactive items selected and the users will option of changing the status to Active.

          10.  Pressing the "Next" button will revise the checked items to existing (alternate) Customer Part Numbers.

          The 8:Class tab will appear.

          The import program will display all parts for which an existing nor alternate part number have been selected. These parts will be new parts added to the item master, and must have additional information included in order to be loaded. The user may select a part class and (optionally) part type for each item or leave it blank.  Blank classes will be assigned "TBD" when loaded into Inventory.   Items for which there are multiple AVLS will only require the class and type to be entered once. The user selects each from a dropdown list. Once a Class is assigned, the available Types for that class will be available for inclusion in the part Type. Because the descriptions are loaded from customer documentation, and the user may wish to clarify the description, the opportunity to do so is on this page.Items not completed will be loaded into the item master with a part class of TBD.

          11. Pressing the "Next" button will then search the database for the default information for the class and type, and populate the required fields for the new parts based on the class and type. If no parts have been checked for uploading the system will prompt the user and place them back on the Part Class/Type page.

          The 9:Part # & Rev tab appears.

          The import program will determine whether or not the user has Auto-Part Numbering enabled.   If it is enabled, the program will assign internal part numbers based on the class and type setups, and move to the next page.  If Auto-Part Numbering is disabled (or off), the user must enter valid internal part numbers and Revisions for each new part.  The internal part number entered may not already exist in the database.   If user wants to use the CustPN and CustRev (from the template) for the internal Part # and Rev check the Copy box.  Checking/Uncheckiing the "Check All" box (located above the CustPN and CustRev columns) will check/uncheck all the records.  If user wants to add the prefix setup for that customer (the prefix must be setup within the Customer Information Module) to the new part number they must check the PRFX box.  Checking/Un-checking the "Check All" box to the far right globally check/uncheck all the records.   Items not completed will NOT be loaded into the item master nor the BOM.

          12. Pressing the "Next" button will then search the database to validate the entered part numbers.

          The 10:Select to Load tab appears.

          The import program will display the entire list of part numbers being entered by assembly.   If the auto numbering is on, user will have the ability to copy the XL revision  to the new part revision by checking the box.  Check/Un-Check All box (located above the Rev column) gives the user the ability to check/uncheck all records to copy the XL Rev to new part Rev.  The user has a final opportunity to verify that the parts and BOMs are to be loaded.  A Check/Un-Check All box is available (located after the Step 10: Select items to Load title) to give the user the ability to check/uncheck all records to be loaded into the item master or the BOM. (In-Active records will have to be manually checked). Items not checked will NOT be loaded into the item master nor the BOM. 

           

           This button will take the user to a screen, where they can make a selection by what ever criteria needed by choosing (Internal Part Number, Mfgr Part Number, Customer Part Number, Supplier's Part Number, or Description,etc) to search. 

          Note:  If a customer selects to "Locate Alternatives for the Highlighted Part" within Step 10, when they import a BOM that uses an existing ManEx PN and adds new AVL(s), the new AVL(s) are NOT added to any existing BOM's.

           

           

          The user can enter partial string and search is not case sensitive.  After system will find parts in response to the search, the user can make a selection by checking on one of the check boxes.  The user can click one of the buttons on the bottom of the screen when done.  And if the user selects one of the buttons with "Select" on it the part that was highlighted in the BOM import screen will be replaced.  Please note the search screen can be up all the time, so if the user selects a part find replacement and click "Select without Exit" button then select next part on the import screen and look for the replacement without exiting search screen.

          13. Pressing the "Next" button will then remove the parts that are not to be loaded into the system.

          The 11:Select Work Center tab will appear.

          The import program will display the entire list of part numbers to be loaded into the item master or BOM. All components will be defaulted to the Staging work center. The user has the option to change the work center at this time.  Highlight the part number you would like to change.Choose a work center from the pull down list.  Click on the Replace Highlighted Records box.

           

          14. Pressing the "Load Data" button will complete the upload. The tables updated will be the INVENTOR, INVTMFGR, INVTMFHD, BOM_DET and BOM_REF.
           
          If you receive the following message after depressing the "Load Data" button there are a few scenarios that could be causing this message to appear:
           
          1.  A same part, with different description associated with different product, will cause this message to appear upon import.
          2.   If the Auto numbering is turned OFF and user has entered the same part number to items with same description but different customer part numbers will cause this message to appear. 
           
          When loading one BOM/product at a time into the ManEx System it checks to see if the users might have the same part number,  but with different descriptions or different customer part numbers  loaded on the spreadsheet.  If found then it would display that information in an XLS spreadsheet for the users to address. 
           
           
           
           
          1.6.4.4. FAQs - QBI
          Facts and Questions for the Express Import to BOM or Quote (QBI) Module
          1.6.5. ECO, BCN & Deviation Control Management (EBD) (OPTIONAL Module)
          1.6.5.1. Prerequisites - EBD


          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase.   
          To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com\contactus.aspx

           
          After activation, "Engineering Change Order" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           

          The product to be revised must be setup in the Inventory Control Mgmt.

          Any new parts to be added must exist in the Inventory Control Mgmt.

          A Bill of Materials must exist for the product being revised.
          1.6.5.2. Introduction - EBD
          This module allows users to document the source (internal or customer), the purpose, the details, and the impact of the change.  The module can apply the changes to new and existing jobs, and ensure that production is aware of the change and is using the latest information.  

          This module allows users to document the changes using one of the following three approaches:  

          "ECO" =  An ECO records Engineering changes for assemblies when there is a Revision or Part Number change.  There can be changes to the Bill of Materials components and/or quantity, to the materials cost, labor cost, whether or not there is a serial number required and to the description. The user can enter whether existing WIP or FGI items are to be scrapped or modified. Once all of the engineering changes are entered, the ECO needs to be approved by the the approvals (as specified in the ECO setup module).  Once the approvals are entered, the user may Update the following records: 
          Inventory Master, Product Routing, Product Data Management and Bill of Materials.  NOTE:  These records will ONLY be updated if the Revision or Part Number has been changed. 


          "DEVIATION"  =   A Deviation creates a record that someone approved the change in the process for individual work order(s).  Such as using a different part, leaving a part off, or perform a special additional step in the process, etc.  When a Deviation is created within this module no records are updated or changed.  It is a document for reference only.  The user may print the deviation and it will list the work orders selected to be updated.   Deviations have an expiration date so users will know that their customer or management allowed the modification for a limited period of time.

          "BCN" =   
          When "BCN" type is selected, the user can change all part information just like ECO, but user won't be able to create a new product number/rev, or click any "copy" checkboxes on "Update/Create records" page.  WO and SO lists will also not be available for selections.  When the "Update All Records" button is clicked, the BOM of the product number will be updated just as if the BOM was changed in BOM module.  This feature will track any changes to the BOM through the system.
          1.6.5.3. Fields & Definitions - EBD
          1.6.5.3.1. Header Tab

          Header Tab Field Definitions

          ECO Number

          The number assigned to the ECO, BCN, or Deviation.

          Product Number The unique internal number assigned to the product
          Rev

          The revision number or character assigned to the product.

          Description  The description of the product.
          Date Opened

          The date the ECO/BCN/Deviation was started.

          Type

          The type of change, either ECO (Engineering Change Order), BCN (BOM Change Notice), or Deviation.  ECO is for permanent changes to the Inventory Item Master and the Bill of Materials when there is a revision or part number change.  BCN is for permanent changes to the BOM.  Deviation is for a one time change to a work order(s).

          ECO Source

          This is the source of the ECO, Customer or Internal.This allows the users to know if this ECO was created internally or upon Customer request. At this time this field is for reference only, but will be used for reporting later on.

          ECO Ref

          An internally assigned reference number.

          ECO Lock If this box is checked, all users can access the screen, but will not be able to edit the record until Aprroved users remove the lock.  When locked the users initials and date will default in.    

          Note: Users MUST have special rights within the Security module to modify this field.

          Last Modified The users initials and date will default in when modified.
          Status

          The status of the Engineering Change Order, either Approved, Edit, Pending or Cancelled.

          Effective Date

          The date that this ECO become effective.  (This Date MUST be prior to the Work Order date to be applied).

          Expiration Date The date that the Deviation will expire.  (This field is only enabled for a deviation and MUST be popluated for the Deviation to be available within the SFT module ) 
          Customer

          The name of the Customer which is linked with the Bill Of Materials.

          This button will allow users the ability to load more documents pertaining to the ECO (cutomer ECO,drawings, instructions,etc).  Loaded files will not be carried fwd to the PDM module upon ECO approval.
          Purpose of Change

          The intent of the change.

          ECO Instruction

          The description of the change.

            This Button will allow the users to view any hard copy ECO drawing or Documentation loaded. When files have been loaded this button will appear with Red Text.
           

          This Button will allow the users to view any hard copy ECO drawing or Documentation loaded. When files have been loaded this button will appear with Red Text.

          ECO Cost per Unit Material is the Material Cost Change Total forwarding from the Parts tab.

          Labor is the Labor Cost Change Total forwarding from the New Build Labor Cost tab.

          Total is the sum of the changes in Materials and Labor, above.(Note that the signs can be either positive or negative depending upon the changes made.)

          Note
          : Users MUST have special rights within the Security module to view the pricing information. 
           

          ECO Coordinator The name of the engineer entering the Engineering Change Order.
          Approvals

          The name of the department, initials of the approver and the date of approval.  Note: The approving department is setup in the ECO Setup module.

            This button is used for the approval process for each department indicated

          1.6.5.3.2. Parts Tab

          Parts Tab Field Definitions - The Parts tab displays any additional changes or deletions of Bill of Material Components.  If the part added has a status of "Inactive" within the Inventory Control Management,  it will be highlighted in purple as an indicator to the user that this item is inactive at this time.  If the user chooses to leave the inactive part on the ECO, that part number record status will automatically be changed to Active upon the "Update Records" button being depressed, so user will not have inactive parts listed on the BOM.  The user will receive a warning that an XLS file has been created for reivew.

          Status The status of the component, either Add, Delete, Change.
          Line No

          The Bill of Materials line number.

          Source

          The source of the component, either Buy, Make, Phantom or Consign.

          Part Number The internal number assigned to the component
          Rev The revision character pertaining to the component part number
          Class

          The classification of the component.

          Type The type within the classification of the component
          Description The description of the component part number
          Old Qty

          The quantityof thecomponent currently called for in the Bill of Materials.

          New Qty The new quantity ofthe component which will be called for.
          Std Amt

          The standard cost per the Inventory Control Item Master multiplied by the net change in the number of components used.

          Customer Part No

          If there is a customer part number associated with the user’s part number, it will appear here.

          Rev

          The revision character associated with the Customer Part number.

          Work Center

          The work station where is component is 1st used in the assembly production process.

          U/K

          Valid entries for this field are “Y” – Yes used in Kit, “N” – Not used in Kit, “F” – Free Stock.The system will default the value to be “Y.”

          Scrap Item This field is for reference only, it will not affect any other modules.
          Net Change Amount

          The sum of the Standard Amount column.

           

          The following screen will be displayed, showing the currently available inventory information for the line item highlighted.

            The following screen will be displayed, showing current Open PO for the line item highlighted: 

          AVL Information   For the highlighted line item  

           Pref This is a number indicating the preference for use
           Part Mfgr Displays the Part mfgr. name
           Mfgr Part No Displays the Part mfgr. part number
           Checkuse This box will be checked if this Mfg. and Mfg. Part number may be used

           

          Reference Designator For the highlighted line item    

          Number

          The number assigned to the reference designator.

          Ref. Designator

          The alpha numeric characters assigned to the Reference Designator number.

          Prefix

          The character assigned to all of the reference designator numbers.

          Start No

          The first Reference Designator number.

          End No

          The last Reference Designator number.

          Calculate (button)

          The button used to calculate the Reference Designator.

          Quantity

          The new quantity for which Reference Designators have been assigned.

          1.6.5.3.3. Update/Create Records Tab

          Update/Create Records Tab Field Definitions - This tab displays the revised product number, description, changes in Standard Cost, Labor Cost, whether serial number is required and updates for Engineering Change Orders only.  Note:  This tab is not available for Deviations or BCN.

          Inventory Changes section:

          Product New No:

          If the check box is checked, a new product number may be entered here.

          New Rev:

          If the check box is checked, the new revision character may be added here.

          Note: that either a new Product No or Rev has to be entered in order for the system to allow the user to save the ECO record – this check has been added to prevent any duplicated inventory records within the system.  See Article #3062 on why the customer part number or revision is not updated at the same time.
           
          NOTE:  When product is changed through ECO module the same material type will be carried fwd for the next/new product at the part level but not at the AVL level.   
          New Description:

          If the check box is checked, a new description may be entered.

          Change section:

          Matl Cost If this box is checked, the material cost for the product will be updated based on the changes made within the Parts Section and the inventory part standard cost.
          Labor Cost If this box is checked, the new Labor cost for the product will be updated based on information entered within the ECO New Build Labor Cost section.
          Current Value The mat'l or  labor cost currently existing for the product within the Inventory Control Module.
          New Value The revised mat'l or labor cost for the product.
          Serial # Required If box is checked, user then has the option of checking the "YES" or "NO" box to the right for this part to be a serialized part or not. 
          No/Yes If the serial box is checked you have an option to check Yes or No to require the revised product to be a serialized part or not.  NOTE:  This box will remain NO until checked then it will update to YES.
          Assigned Customer This will allow the user to Assign a new Customer to the BOM.   NOTE:  This field is only editable if there are NO open Sales Orders or Work Orders linked to this product.
          New Customer Name

          If the Assigned Customer box is checked, user may select a customer from the pull down. 

          Note: Customer name can be changed on the BOM for the product only if either the Product number or revision and the product has no consigned parts for another customer nor any make/phantom parts that are assigned to another customer, and the product is not a sub-assembly for another product.

          Open Sales Order List

          Shows all SOs (with any status except for cancel) and RMAs with this assembly number, Balance and item number. The selected SOs and RMAs will be updated with the new Product number and/or Rev number and/or Description shown upper left corner.

          Note: If there have been no items shipped against the sales order selected then the system will just replace the existing product with the new within the Sales Order.

          If shipments have been made against the item the old line item will be have the Ord Qty updated to equal the total Shipped and the status changed to Closed.A new line item will have been create for the new Product/Rev for the remaining balance that was left on the original item.

          Retain Sales Order Prices Check this box only if you want the Unit Price to remain the same. 
          Retain Remaining Extra Pricing Items Check this box only of you want the extra pricing to remain the same. Note:  If you don't check "Retain Sales Order Prices"checkbox, then for either part itself or extra price item, no price will be updated.  The "Retain Remaining Extra Pricing Items" is for adding extra items only, for the "price" column, it's still controlled by "Retain Sales Order Prices" checkbox. 
           

          “Refresh SO” button has been provided so the user can refresh the Sales Order list to check for any new SO created in the system since the ECO was first created.

            This button is depressed to update all records within the system based on the selections made

          The rest of this screen comes up with all of the boxes checked for copying the revisions into the Inventory Master, Production Routing, Product Data Management and Bill of Materials. If the user does not want the assembly copied, the box will be unchecked.

          1.6.5.3.4. New Build Quote Tab

          New Build Quote Tab Field Defintions - This tab desplays Labor Costs associated with the build of the new product number and revision and calculates the New labor Cost associated with each new unit.

          Labor Cost Description Description of the labor.
          Cost/Unit Cost of the Labor
          Net ECO Labor Cost/Unit Sub of the total Labor costs.
          Current Total Labor Cost/Unit

          This is the total Labor information pulled from the Inventory Control Management module for the Product.

          New Labor Cost with ECO/Unit

          This is the sum of the new Net Labor and the Current Labor.

          1.6.5.3.5. Rework Quote Tab

          Rework Quote tab Field Definitions - The Rework Quote tab details any Rework Costs due to reworking the existing quantity in Work In Process and/or Finished Goods Inventory.

          Open Work Order List (As of ECO Open Date) window:   Note:  The value of the "as of" is that it can affect the quote pricing and allows customers to better get that information.

          Change

          A check in this column indicates that the Work Order will be revised to the newly changed product number/revision. The system will automatically update the Work Orders to the newest revision number.  If a kit is in process for the WO selected user MUST depress the "Update Kit" button within the kitting module after the ECO is approved for any part changes to be reflected.   NOTE:   When the ECO takes place and the WO record is updated SFT losses the transfer history for the old revision and starts over with only xfer history for the new revision from that point on.  See Article #3401 for further detail.

          Work Order

          Shows all WOs (with any status except for cancel) with this assembly number,.  The selected WOs will be updated with the new Product number and/or Rev number and/or Description shown upper left corner.

          Balance Qty This field indicates the quantity remaining in the specific Work Order.
          Due Date Due date from WO.
          Status Status of WO.
          Total of Selected WOs

          The sum of all of the Balance Quantity column, above.

             Refresh WO button has been provided so the user can refresh the Work Order list to check for any new WO's created in the system since the ECO was first createdThe value of the "refresh" is they can refresh after it was created if they created it several days before the quote is ready.  

          Rework Cost Description window:

          Rework Cost Description

          This is a description of the rework cost line item.

          Cost/Unit

          This is the cost per unit pertaining to the description on the left.

          Total Rework Cost/Unit

          The sum of the cost/unit column above.

          Inventory Locations (As of ECO Open Date) window:  Note:  The value of the "as of" is that it can affect the quote pricing and allows customers to better get that information.

           Warehouse

          The name of the warehouse where the completed product is stored.

           Location

          The name of the location (such as Row 13, Bin 3) within the warehouse above.

           Quantity On Hand

          The quantity within that location.

             Refresh Invt Location button has been provided so the user can refresh the Invt Location list to check for any new Locations created in the system since the ECO was first created. The value of the "refresh" is they can refresh after it was created if they created it several days before the quote is ready.
           Total

           (As of  ECO Open Date)The total of Finished Goods Inventory.  Note:  The value of the "as of" is that it can affect the quote pricing and allows customers to better get that information

          The window at the bottom right hand side of the tab will display the total costs associated with the rework. Note that these costs DO NOT forward into either the Inventory Control Item Master nor the Accounting records.They are not associated with any new products which will be manufactured after the update to the latest revision, but pertain only to the costs associated with reworking either existing WIP or Finished Goods.

          Totals (As of ECO Open Date)Note:  The value of the "as of" is that it can affect the quote pricing and allows customers to better get that information

          Qty in WIP

          This is the quantity in WIP which is available to be reworked.

          Qty in FGI

          This is the quantity in FGI which is available to be reworked.

          Units to Rework:

          Qty in WIP

          This is the quantity in WIP which is available to be reworked.

          Qty in FGI

          This is the quantity in FGI which is available to be reworked.

          Cost to Rework:

          Qty in WIP

          This is the quantity in WIP which is available to be reworked.

          Qty in FGI

          This is the quantity in FGI which is available to be reworked.

           Total Cost to Rework Selected Quantity

          This is the sum of the two above amounts.

          1.6.5.3.6. Tool & Fixture Quote

          Tool & Fixture Quote Field Definitions - Once the ECO record has been approved and updated within the system.  This Tool/Fixture information will then be carried forward into the PDM and Routing Setup modules.

          Tool/Fixture Description

          This is the description information loaded form the System setup/Tooling Setup for selection.

          WC

          Work Center

          Cost Amount

          Original Cost of the Tool/Fixture

          Charge Amount

          The amounted that is planned to be charged for the Tool/Fixture

          Effective Date

          Date that the Tool/Fixture becomes effective.

          Termination Date

          Date that the Tool/Fixture will be terminated.

          1.6.5.4. How To .... for EBD
          1.6.5.4.1. Find An Engineering Change Order(ECO), BOM Change Notice(BCN), or Deviation

          Enter Quality/Engineering/ECO, BCN & Deviation Control Management (EBD) Module  

          The following screen will appear:

           

          Depressing the Find action button will bring up a selection screen.

          Select the appropriate radial for the find.

           

          If you select ECO/Deviation No or ECO Reference No radial, then type the desired number into the box. Once you depress the enter key the system will pull up the matching record onto the screen.

          If the system does not find a match to the information entered then the following message will be displayed.

          Answer Yes, and then the system will display a listing of available ECO records to choose from.  

           

           If you select to find by Product No, type the product number into the box. If there is more than one Engineering Change Order, a list of all Engineering Change Orders for that product will appear: Highlight and double click on the ECO/Dev No desired.

          If you select to find by Status, a further selection will appear. Choose between New, Edit, Approved, Cancelled or Completed by clicking on the appropriate radial. A list of all of the Engineering Change Orders falling within that category will appear. Highlight and double click on the appropriate record.

          Information regarding the ECO, BCN, or deviation, will appear. 

           

          1.6.5.4.2. Edit an ECO, BCN or Deviation

          Find an existing ECO, BCN or Deviation.  The information will populate the screen.

          Depress the Edit record action button.  Status will change to Edit.

          Once the necessary changes have been completed depress the Save record action button to Save changes, or depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes.

          If the Save record action button is depressed, changes will be saved.  The following screen will appear.  NOTE:  The Approvals will be removed and the ECO changes will need to be re-approved.

          The changes will need to be Approved, before the ECO status will change back to Approved.

          1.6.5.4.3. Adding A New ECO, BCN, or Deviation

          To add a new ECO, BCN, or Deviation within the system, open the ECO,BCN, & Deviation Control Management (EBD) module.  

          The following screen will appear.
           

          Depress the Add Record Action button. Enter your password. The following selection screen will appear.

           

          If you decide to find an existing Part Number, depress that button.

          The following selection screen will appear:

          Type the part number into the red box or highlight it and double click.

           
           

            

          If you decide to find the Part Number by Part Class, depress that button.

          The following selection screen will appear.

          Type the Part Class into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

           

          From there a list of all product numbers within that class will appear.

          Type the Part Number into the red box or highlight your selection and double click.

           
           

          Information pertaining to that part number will appear on the screen, as follows:
           
           

          Select the type of change by depressing the down arrow next to the Type box.

          An ECO selection is for a permanent change to the Inventory Master, Bill of Materials and Product Data Management (normally a revision added).    NOTE: These records will ONLY be updated if the Revision or Part Number has been changed.  

          A Deviation selection is for a one time change to existing Finished Goods Inventory and/or Work In Process. A selection of Deviation will not update no records; such as  Inventory Master, Bill of Materials or Product Data Management.(The Update/Create Record tab will be grayed out.)  This is a document for reference only.

          A BCN selection is to change all part information just like an ECO, but user won't be able to create a new product number/rev, or click any "copy" checkboxes on "Update/Create records" page.  WO and SO lists will also not be available for selections.

           

          Select the ECO Source by depressing the down arrow next the the ECO Source box.

           

          Type in the ECO Reference.

          Enter in the Effective Date. (Note:  This date MUST be prior to the WO Due Date to be applied).
           
          Expiration Date field is only enabled when creating a deviation.

          Type in the purpose of the change and Description of change.

          Type in the name of the ECO Coordinator.

          The screen will appear as follows:



          PARTS TAB

          Enter the Parts screen

          To record an ADD to an ECO record 

          Depress the Add Button.

          The system will then default to the Status field.  Depress the down arrow next to the Status field.

          The following choices will appear.  

          Select Add from the Status listing. 

           

          Enter in the new Line No that it will be listed as on the BOM.

          Select Source by depressing on the down arrow next to that field.

          The following selection will appear:

           

          Type in the Part Number. The Revision number, Type, Class, Description, and  AVL information will update automatically.  If the part added has a status of "Inactive" within the Inventory Control Management,  it will be highlighted in purple as an indicator to the user that this item is inactive at this time.  If the user chooses to leave the inactive part on the ECO, that part number record status will automatically be changed to Active upon the "Update Records" button being depressed, so user will not have inactive parts listed on the BOM.  The user will receive a warning that an XLS file has been created for reivew.    

          Type in the new quantity to be used in the assembly.

          Type in customer part number and rev. if applicable.
           

          Scroll over to the right and choose the Work Center by clicking within the Work Center field. The following selection screen will appear.

           

          The system will default into the U/K field, for the component to be included in the kit. You have the option to change this entry to one of the following Yes, No, or Free Stock.

          If the user attempts to enter any other characters into this field they will receive the following warning message.

           

          Type in the Reference designator(s), enter the character in the prefix box.  Indicate the Start number.  Depress the Calculate button. The Reference Designator will update.

          You will then be able to view the Inventory Locations for the highlight part number, by depressing the View Inventory button.The following information will be displayed:

           

          You will also be able to view any Open PO for the highlighted part number, by depressing the View Open POs button.The following information will be displayed:

           

          The AVL info will default in from the Inventory Control module.  You may check or uncheck the approved AVLs.  If the program finds duplicate part numbers in a BOM, any Alternate part number associated with the original line item will be carried fwd to the new item using the same part.  As far as the AVLs, the program will get all unchecked AVLs from all items and to update all items.  For example, BOM item #2 have AVL A,B,C, and D, only C is unchecked.  Now in ECO, user adds item #5, it has AVL A unchecked.  And if item #2 had a alternate part associated with it, that ALT part will also be carroed fwd to Item #5.  We have added a message in the updating routine, if the system does find duplicate Part number, then a message will popup and let the users know then system will take the actions explained above.  

          To update the Reference designator, enter the character in the prefix box. Indicate the Start number. Depress the Calculate button. The Reference Designator will update. 

          To record a DELETE to an ECO  

          Depress the Add Button.

          The system will then default to the Status field.  Depress the down arrow next to the Status field.

          The following choices will appear.  

          Select Delete from the Status listing.  

           

          Type in the Bill of Material line Item, that you wish to have removed from the BOM.

          The screen will then update with the information pertaining to that item. 

           

          Leave the New Quantity as zero.

          If you do not want the part scrapped, scroll to the right and remove the check mark from the Scrap Item field.

          To record a CHANGE to an ECO  

           Depress the Add Button.

          The system will then default to the Status field.  Depress the down arrow next to the Status field.

          The following choices will appear.  

          Select Change Qty from the Status listing. 

           

          Then type in the Bill of Material line Item, that you wish to have changed on the BOM.

          The screen will then update with the information pertaining to that item.



          Type in the new quantity.

          Update the Reference Designator information.

          In the U/K field, change to if you do not want the change to be used in the kit.

          If you do not want the item scrapped, remove the check mark from the Scrap Item box.

          If you want to change the Work Center where the component is added, depress the down arrow next to the Work Center field.  The following selection screen will appear

          Make your selection.

           

          UPDATE/CREATE RECORDS TAB

          Enter the Update Records screens.(Note:that if the type was selected as Deviation within the Header screen, then the Update Records screen will be grayed out and unavailable for selection)

          Inventory Changes Section:

          Check the applicable box and then Type in a new product number, revision number, or new description, if desired.   NOTE: The BOM will NOT be updated if no new Product Number or Revision as been created.
           
          NOTE:   For the purpose of many users wanting to create several ECOs for the same product number without really updating the records (meaning creating a new part in inventory) Manex will allow you to save and approve the ECO even if they have not selected to create a new Part or Rev within the system. Upon depressing the Update Records button the system will check to see if New Product No or New Rev has been marked, if left blank then the system will just update the status of the ECO to Complete without creating a new product number in the system.
           
          NOTE:  When product is changed through ECO module the Material Type will be carried fwd to the next/new Product/Rev that is being generated at the part level, but will not carry fwd the material type at the AVL level. The system will default in "UNK" as the Material Type for the AVL Level. 

          If you want to update the Material Cost, then check mark the box next to Matl Cost. The new Value field will update based on the changes made within Parts screen.

          If you want to update the Labor Cost, then check mark the box next to Labor Cost.The New Value field will update based on the changes made within the New Build Quote screen.

          If you want to require a serial number, then check mark the box next to Serial # Required. Then go to the box under the New Value column it will remain NO until checked then it will update to YES.

          If you want to change or assign a customer, check the Assigned Customer box. Depress the down arrow to see a list of customers.  Select the customer of choice.

          Note: Customer name can be changed on the BOM for the product only if either the Product number or revision and the product has no consigned parts for another customer nor any make/phantom parts that are assigned to another customer, and the product is not a sub-assembly for another product
           
          NOTE:  This field is only editable if there are NO open Sales Orders or Work Orders linked to this product.
           
           

          If user is attempting to assign a new customer to a product with any Open Sales Orders or Work Orders linked to it they will receive one of the following messages and will NOT be able to save the ECO.


          In the ECO process of modifying or adding Parts to the ECO, there is a field which contains the Customer Part number, if available. At the present time, this field is empty and non-editable for changing or deleting a part from the BOM. But if the user wishes to add a part, they may do so by entering in either the internal part number or the customer part number in the customer part number field, and the program will locate the corresponding internal part number and enter it. The search is based on the customer part number entered AND the customer associated with the BOM from which the ECO was originated.

          Because Manex allows users the ability to use the ECO module to create New Part Numbers via the ECO process, and even assign a new customer to the new part number, we must limit the customer information to that of the original customer, as we cannot determine at what point the reference should change customers, or even if it should. Furthermore, if the user does elect to create a new part number for a new customer, items unchecked on the AVL will transfer to the new bom (if checked on the update sheet). However, there may be a conflict between the AVL of the original customer and the AVL of the new customer, so the user is urged to verify the AVL content of a new bom for a new customer created with this module.

          COPY SECTIONS:

          Look at the items all ready checked to be copied. If you do not want the items copied, uncheck them.
           
          Note:  When creating new Product within Inventory via ECO change the new Product's AVL will be auto assigned with the Material Type of "Unk".  It will not keep the MT from the original Product the ECO was originated from. 



              
           

          OPEN SALES ORDER LIST:

          The Open Sales Order List will include all open Sales Orders including the ones that are flagged as "Admin Hold" and//or "Mfgr Hold",  and any open RMAs against this product.

          In the Open Sales Order List, check mark within the Change box column if you want the Sales Order and/or RMA to be changed.

          Note: If there have been NO items shipped against the sales order selected then the system will just replace the existing product with the new product and/or revision within the Sales Order.

          If there have been shipments made against the item the old line item will have the Ord Qty updated to equal the total Shipped and the status changed to Closed. A new line item will have been created for the new Product/Rev for the remaining balance that was left on the original item.

          If you do not want the price changes to affect the sales order prices check the "Retain Sales Order Prices" box. If you would like to retain any extra charges against the line item check the "Retain Remaining Extra Pricing Items" box. 

          Refresh SO button has been provided so the user can refresh the Sales Order list to check for any new SO created in the system since the ECO was first created.

           

          The completed screen will appear as follows:



          NEW BUILD QUOTE TAB

          Enter the New Build Quote screen.

          To add a new Labor Cost associated with the new revision, depress Add the button. Type in the Labor Cost Description. Type in the new revision cost per unit. Continue to Add as required.

          The completed screen will appears as follows:



          REWORK QUOTE TAB

          Enter the Rework Quote screen. 

          In the Open WO List (As of ECO Open Date), check mark within the Change box column if you want the WO to be changed/reworked.  The WO's checked will only be changed/reworked when creating an ECO.  They will not be changed/reworked when creating a deviation.  (This field is for reference only when creating a deviation).  
           
          You will receive the following message, as you check each box:



          Depress the OK button to continue.
           

          NOTE:   When the ECO takes place and the WO record is updated SFT losses the transfer history for the old revision and starts over with only xfer history for the new revision from that point on.  See Article #3401 for further detail.

          If needed, you have the option to refresh the Work Order listing to see if any new Work Orders have been created for this product since this ECO was originally opened, by depressing the "Refresh WO" button.

          To add costs solely associated with the rework of open Work Orders and/or Finished Goods Inventory, depress the Add button under the Rework Cost Description window. Type in the Rework Cost Description and the related cost per unit.

          The Inventory Locations (As of ECO Open Date), will default in and is for reference only.

          The Totals (As of ECO Open Date) will default in displaying the quantity in WIP and the quantity in FGI.  The Units to Rework and the Cost to Rework will update automatically.  
           
          NOTE:  If you use the ECO module to add a part to a BOM, and flag the ECO to update a work order in WIP, in order to process correctly through the GL, the following criteria must be met:
            • The WO due date must be later than the ECO
            • The ECO must have updated all records
            • The Kit must be updated
            • The changes in the BOM in the Kit must be attended to by either kitting new parts, unkitting deleted parts, or modifying quantities.

          The WO in process will be updated with the new revision.

          The completed screen will appears as follows:





          TOOL & FIXTURE QUOTE TAB

          To add new Tool/Fixture Information, depress the Add button below the section.

          Then add the Tool/Fixture information from the pull down.

           

           Choose the Work Center from the pull down.  

          Fill in the cost amount, Charge Amount, Effective Date, and Termination Date.

          Once the ECO record has been approved and updated within the system, this Tool/Fixture information will be carried forward into the PDM and Routing Setup modules.

          The completed screen will appears as follows:



          Depress the Header tab.
          Note that the ECO Cost/Unit columns have updated at the bottom left hand side of the screen:



          Depress the Save record action button or the Abandon changes action button.

          Upon Saving the user may be given a message if one or more of the parts do not have the same number of reference designators as the new quantity within the ECO, or BCN. This is giving the users the option to print out a report to list these item or not.



          If Yes is selected the report, ECO Report Incorrect number of reference designators will go directly to the default printer and
          the next message will be displayed.

          The user now has the option to cancel out of the save or continue.

          The user should go back to the reference designators section for the part listed in the report and change the number of designators to equal the quantity required.

          The Approval button will be available. Depress the Approval button.You will be prompted for the appropriate department password. Continue this process until all of the departmental approvals have been entered, as displayed:

           

          Once all of the Approvals have been fulfilled then within the Update Records tab the “Update All Records" button will become available.

          Depress the Update All Records button. The records you selected will update. The ECO or BCN will now show with the following Updated time stamp.
           
           

           

          Note: For a new revision, P/N, etc., go into the Inventory Master and if desired, update for the Warehouse location in the Quantity Information tab (the system will copy the warehouse information from original Product selected).   Also, update for Mfgr Part Spec.
           
           
          Adding A New ECO Deviation Record 

          Overview:

          The difference between the ECO and the Deviation is: A Deviation is a method to document and approve a temporary change from the normal operation until an ECO is created to replace the Deviation, it is only a record that someone approved a change in some method for a work order(s).  That is the reason the Deviation has an Expiration Date field in the main page and it will not update any active modules, part number change, rev change, description change or anything else.  Whereas, ECO is a permanent change and change the part number, or rev or description, or standard cost, or anything thing else including updating any or all active files.

          The basic procedure of processing a Deviation follow basically the same rules as a Regular ECO except for the Update Records button is disabled.

          Enter the ECO module. Depress the Add Record action button Select the desired product number. Then for the Type Select Deviation

           

          Once Deviation has been selected as the Type,  continue on and enter in the remaining Deviation information as explained in the Adding ECO section above.  Note:  For a Deviation you MUST make sure you complete the expiration date so users know that it is for a limited period of time.  If this field is left blank the deviation will NOT be displayed in the SFT module.



          Note: 
           The Update Create Records tab will remain grayed out and unavailable for any Deviation records entered within the system.

          Once the Deviation has been completed the normal list of Approvals need to be entered.

          The status of the Deviation record will update to Approved.

          Changing the status of a Deviation from Approved to Completed.

          The Status of a Deviation will remain as Approved in the system until the users manually changes the status to Completed.  Once the status of a deviation has been changed from Approved to Completed it will no longer appear in the SFT (Shop Floor Tracking) module.

           

           Find the desired Deviation record.  

          Depress the Edit record action button. Click on the down arrow next to the Status field, the following selections will be available for Deviations.

          Change the status to Completed.  Depress the Save record action button to save the changes the changes, or depress the Abandon changes action button.

          The Deviation will now show in the listing of completed Records.
           
           
          1.6.5.4.4. Copying An Engineering Change Order

          Enter the ECO module. Find an existing ECO record within the system.



          Depress the Copy Record action button. The following message will be displayed.

           

          Select Yes, enter your password. Then the next message will be displayed.

           

           The following selection will appear.  Depress Part Number.  

          The following Part List will be displayed. Select the desired part number.

           

          Once you have selected the desired product number the following will be displayed.

           

          The following information will be copied fwd from the original ECO to the new ECO record.

          • ECO Type
          • ECO Source
          • Customer 
          • ECO Coordinator
          • New Build Quote Information

           

          1.6.5.5. Reports - EBD

          To print out reports, depress the Report button. The following screen will appear:

           

          PRINT OUT OF ECO REPORT

          Select the Printout of ECO report and then selecting the Option tab. The following screen will appear:

          The ECO record that is open within the ECO module will default in – but the user does have the option to enter in a different ECO # record if desired.

          The ECO Printout Report will appear as follows:

          ECO STATUS REPORT

          If you highlight the ECO Status Report and then depress the Options tab, the following screen will appear:

          Select the status by pressing on the down arrow next to the window. Highlight the desired status.

          Select the ECO Type.

          Type in the From and To Dates.

          Select the applicable customer(s) by highlighting and depressing the > arrow.If you want all of the customers, depress the >> arrow.

          Note that you have to have a Customer selected in order for this report to work. If the ECO record does not have a customer selected, then it will not appear on this report.

          If you want a part range, type in the beginning and the ending part numbers.

          Depress the Ok button. The following ECO Status Report will appear as follows:

           

          1.6.5.6. FAQs- EBD
          Facts and Questions for the ECO, BCN & Deviation Control Mgmt (EBD) Module
          1.6.5.7. ManEx Minutes for (EBD)
          1.6.6. Work Order Traveler Setup
          1.6.6.1. Prerequisties for WO Traveler Setup

          After activation, "Product Routing" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           

          A Product Number

          The Work Order Traveler Setup must refer to a product by part number. The part number must be established in the Inventory Control Mgmt module.

          A Work Center The Work Centers to be used in a Work Order Traveler Setup must be defined in the Production Work Centers & Activities .  
          An Activity Center

          The Activities for Work Centers (if they are to be used in Work Order Traveler Setups) must be defined in the Production Work Centers & Activities

          W/O Release Check List Items Must be defined in the  Shop Floor Tracking Default .

          1.6.6.2. Introduction for WO Traveler Setup
          The Work Order Traveler Setup module is used to define the details of the Production Work Order Traveler Setup for a product.   Certain work centers are “hard-coded” into the ManEx program. These are Material Staging, Finished Goods, MRB and Scrap. These work centers may not be modified by the user, or omitted from a Work Order Traveler Setup, because they are associated with special codes that are essential to our system.
           
          For example:  "STAG"  is the first step so when a Work Order is created the material can go into Staging.  

          "FGI"  when material is moved into finished goods a number of thing happen within the system, (1. Receiving into the inventory; 2. accounting transaction WIP to inventory, etc.)  

          "SCRP"  and "MRB"  - if material is moved into scrap or MRB some GL transactions are associated with the move. 

          They are the gateways to and from the Work Order Traveler Setup for WIP management.
           
          1.6.6.3. Fields and Definitions for WO Traveler Setup
          1.6.6.3.1. Header

          Work Center and Activities Routing Setup Header Field Definitions

          Class

          This is the classification for the product.

          Type This is the type within the classification.
          Part Number Rev This is the internal part number and revision for the product.
          Per Pnl/Sht

          If the user wishes to move material by the panel, sheet or roll, they may select “Default to PANEL” as the method of tracking quantities in the Shop Floor Tracking Defaults setup. This requires the user to define in the product definition the number of products contained in a panel/sheet/roll. Then, if this method is chosen, the user moves panels and ManEx keeps track of the number of units .If this is the case, the field will contain the number of panels associated with the product. 

          Serialize

          If this box is checked, the product will be subject to serialization.

          Description

          This is the description of the product. 

          Status

          The status of the product, either Active or Inactive.

          Current Work Center

          The name of the Work Center highlighted.

          Traveler Released  Check this box when ready to release Traveler/WO and  the date, time and users initials will be recorded at that time.   Note: Users MUST have special rights within the Security module to modify this field.  Users with “supervisor’s rights” will automatically have access.  

           

          1.6.6.3.2. Work Center Tab

           

          Fields and Definitions

          ID

          The ID established for the work center.

          Work Center

          The name of the work center.

          In/Out

          The indication if the work center is to be processed Inside or Outside the company.

          This button allows the user to "Add" or "Delete" a Work Center to the routing for this product.

          Work Center Decimal Format
          If this box is checked the setup time and run time is set to decimal format (1.575 hours).  If this box is unchecked the 1.575 hours is converted to 1:34:30.000.  So with the decimal field unchecked you can put in hours, minutes, and seconds. Note:  To add Times in Routing, the run and set up times must be selected in Production Scheduling Method module.
          Setup Time The set up time for the work center selected.  If there are activities present and the user adds or edits the setup time on the activity level the WC setup time will be re-calculated from the activity level. 
          Run Time The unit run time for the work center selected.  If there are activities present and the user adds or edits the run time on the activity level the WC run time will be re-calculated from the activity level. 
          PPM This is the number of defect opportunities that exist for an assembly in a Work Center. For more detail see Article #674
          Setup Time (Total) setup time for all work centers and/or activities.
          Run Time (Total) run time for all work centers and/or activities.
          Depressing this button will allow the user to reorder the routing for this product.
          Once the routing is set, the user may use this button to update any Work Orders which were created before the routing was entered or changed.
          Starting Work Center for Tracking Serial No This field will display the name of the Work Center where Serial Number Tracking will begin, if the Serialize box is checked at the top of the screen.  NOTE:   If the starting work center is removed, when user clicks “Update WO” button, all the WC qty and SN (if any) except for FGI and SCRP work centers will be moved back to STAG work center because the system will treat the STAG as the starting tracking SN work center.   

          1.6.6.3.3. Activities Tab

          The activities tab is used to add specific activities that take place within a Work Center.  For the Work Center which is highlighted within the Current Work Center field, the Activities Tab will change to RED text if activities have been assigned to that work center.  Within the window, the 1st column is the abbreviation used for the activity and the 2nd column is the full activity for the Work Center listed. The list of activities are set up in System setup – Production Work Centers & Activities.

          Fields & Definitions

          Add/Delete

          This button is used to add or delete activities for the Work Center listed.

          Reorder

          This button is used to reorder the list.

          Setup Time

          For the activity highlighted, this field is for the set up times.   If user enters setup time at activity level the system will accumulate the times for all the activities (for that specific work center) and assign it to the WC level and overwrite whatever number if any entered there.

          Run Time For the activity highlighted, this field is for the run times.  If user enters run time at activity level the system will accumulate the times for all the activities (for that specific work center) and assign it to the WC level and overwrite whatever number if any entered there.

          1.6.6.3.4. WO Release Check List Tab

          The Work Order Release Check List tab is for the user to select check list items for the Work Center listed in the Current Work Center field.  The Work Order Release Check List items are set up in the Shop Floor Tracking Default set up screen.  These items will then be displayed within the Unreleased WO List  for approval.  

           

          Fields &  Definitions 

          Add/Delete

          This button allows the user to add or delete the check list items to or from the Work Center being displayed above.

          Add all This button allows user to add all check list items (displayed on the right) to the current work center being displayed above. 
          Remove All This button allows user  to remove all check list items (displayed on the left) from the current work center being displayed above.
          Done Depress this button when you are done making changes. 

          1.6.6.3.5. Tooling Tab

          The Tooling tab is used to describe the tooling requirements for the Work Center. It also provides for a location notation and an Expire Date. An example of a Check List item as discussed above might be to perform the Work Center tooling, as detailed in this tab.

          Fields & Definitions

          Tool/Fixture Description 

          This is the description of the Tooling item.

          Work Center

          This is the name of the Work Center where the tooling will take place.

          Location

          This is the location within the Work Center where the tooling will take place.

          Expire Date

          This is the date of expiration of the tooling.

          add more

          Checking this box allows the user to add additional tooling lines.

          Add

          These buttons allow the user to add, edit or delete tooling items.

          Edit

          The Tool/Fixture description pulldown information is setup within the System Setup/Tools Setup .  The Tooling/Fixture information can also be added, edited, or deleted from the PDM  (Product Data Management) module

          Delete

          To delete a line item from the Tooling Tab.  Highlight the line item.  Depress the Delete button.  Click on the second column (which is NOT labeled), the field will change to Black. Depress the Done button.

          1.6.6.3.6. Outsource Tab

          The Outsource tab shows the services to be performed outside of the user’s shop. These services are indicated with an “O” in the work center tab.

           Within the window, the 1st column is the abbreviation used for the activity and the 2nd column is the full activity for the Work Center listed. The list of activities are set up in System setup – Production Work Centers & Activities Setup.

          Certificate Required This box is checked if the outsource supplier is required to provide a certificate of completion.
          Service Footnote This button is for notes regarding Service. 
          Outsource Note This button is for notes regarding Outsource.

          1.6.6.4. How To ..... for WO Traveler Setup
          1.6.6.4.1. Find a Work Order Traveler

          Highlight Quality Engineering/Work Order Traveler Set-up.  

          The following screen will be displayed:

          In this screen, a Work Order Traveler setup is either Created or Edited. 

          Depress the Find record icon, the following dialog box will be displayed:   

          When the user elects to find a Product by the Part Number, the following screen will be displayed:

          This screen will list available Part Number in numerical order, along with the Class, Type and Description.

          The users selects the product by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and double-clicking on the desired part.

           

          When the user elects to find a Product by the Part Class, the following screen will be displayed:

          This screen will list the available part classes in Alphabetical order.

          The user selects the Class by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and double-clicking on the desired class.

           

          From this point, the “Find by Part Number” screen is shown, but only includes those parts in the selected class.

          The user selects the desired product by either entering it into the red box, or scrolling down the list and double-clicking on the desired product. 

           

          The following screen will be displayed with the data for the selected product.  


          .

          1.6.6.4.2. Setup/Edit a Work Order Traveler Routing

          Add/Removing Work Centers 

          Find the desired Product number record.  

          The  "Add/Delete"button enables the user to add or delete work centers to the Work Order Traveler Setup. The screen then fills the right side with all of the standard work centers, and enables an Add All and a Remove All button.

          Work Centers may be moved to either side by double clicking on the side from which to move.

          If the user wishes to add all work centers to the Work Order Traveler Setup, then remove a few unwanted ones, pressing the “Add All” button will transfer all work centers to the Work Order Traveler Setup. Likewise, pressing the “Remove All” button will remove all but the fixed work centers from the Work Order Traveler Setup.

          Work Order Traveler Setups may be added more than once, to accommodate multiple visits to the same work area during production (e.g. test).  Depress the Done button when the movement is completed.

          The  "Reorder" button allows the user to reorder the Work Order Traveler Setup in any order desired. Pressing this button will bring up ordering buttons on the left side of each work center in the Product Work Order Traveler Setup.

          The user may then click on any of these buttons and drag a work center to the desired order.

          Depress the Done button when the reordering is completed. 

          Update Open Work Orders

          This button allows the user the option to update specific work orders which will then reflect the modified Work Order Traveler Setup. Otherwise, current Work Orders will NOT be updated, but future Work Orders created will carry the modified Work Order Traveler Setup. Depressing the button will bring up the following screen:

          To select multiple items in the list, hold the Ctrl key down and click on those items you want to update.

          Depress the OK button.

           

          Editing the Run/Setup Times or Part Number Info

          Find the desired Product number record.

          Depressing the Edit Record button within any of the tabs will display the following dialogue box:

           

          WC Run/Setup time

          Selecting the WC Run/Setup Time allows the user to edit the Work Center data on the mid-right side of the screen and if the product is serialized it allows you to choose the Work Center to start tracking ther serial number.

          The user should place the cursor on the work center to be edited, then on the times to be edited. The user may modify one or more Work Centers, and then, after modification, the user must either Save or Cancel the modifications.

          The area below this screen, labeled All Work Centers, will show the total times of all work centers and/or activities. This will automatically update. 
           
           
          Note:  There are two different ways to track SETUP and RUN times for Job Costing and Product Data Management in ManEx.
           

          1.    By entering Run and Setup Times in the Work Order Traveler Setup under Production Planning.

          2.    By entering the Run and Setup Times in Activities Setup under the Work Center Setup.

          Using the first choice is preferred when there is a great variability in the products produced and the setup and run rates in each work center. The second choice is preferred when the product flow is uniform, the machine rates are well established and the setup times very uniform regardless of product. The choice is made in the Production Schedule Setup module. Use of Run and Setup Times is optional unless Job Costing module is in use.

          "Starting Work Center for Tracking Serial No"  Choose from the pull down which Work Center you would like to begin tracking the Serial numbers.  The system does not allow selection of "FGI" or "SCRP" as a starting WC for Serialization, because this will cause the system to become stuck bewteen SFT and Serial number assignment.   NOTE:   If the starting work center is removed, when user clicks “Update WO” button, all the WC qty and SN (if any) except for FGI and SCRP work centers will be moved back to STAG work center because the system will treat the STAG as the starting tracking SN work center.   
           

           Activity Run/Setup Time

          Selecting the Activity Run/Setup Time will open up the Activities tab and then the system allows the user to edit the timing established for Activities associated with the work center.

          If the Work Center has no activities assigned, the screen will remind the user accordingly.   

           If there are activities associated with the work center, they may be edited on the lower middle of the Action screen. 
           
          Note:  If user enters setup/run times at activity level the system will accumulate the times for all the activities (for that specific work center) and assign it to the WC level and overwrite whatever number if any entered there. If the user tries to change the WC setup/run times they will receive a warning that there are setup/run times at the activity level and these must be removed before they will be allowed to change the WC setup/run times. If the user decreases the activity setup/run times to 0 or remove the activity, then the user can add or edit the WC setup/run time.

          After modification, the user must either Save or Cancel the modifications. 

          Part Number Information

          Selecting the Part Number Information allows the user to edit the part description, status, and/or per pnl/sht.    

          Note: Users MUST have special rights within the Security module to check the "Traveler Released" box.  Users with “supervisor’s rights” will automatically have access.    This box must be check when usiing the Unreleased Work Order List and the Work Center Checklist .





          After modification, the user must either or Save or Cancel the modifications
          .

           

          1.6.6.4.3. Copying a Work Order Traveler Setup

          Find the desired Product Number, that you wish to have updated.

          Depress the Copy Record icon.  The following dialogue box will be displayed:

           

          Clicking on the down arrow at the Product Number box displays a listing of product numbers.

          Clicking on the product number enters the number into the box. The user may elect to copy Routing Only or Routing & Instructions from the selected product by clicking on the appropriate radio button.  The Setup Times/Run Times, for Work Centers and Activities, WO Release Check List, Tooling, and Outsource information will also be copied.
           

          After verifying entries are correct, pressing the “OK” button will copy the Work Order Traveler Setups (and instructions) to the current product.

           

          1.6.6.4.4. Setup/Edit Work Center Activities

          Note that if a Work Center has activities associated with it, the “ACTIVITIES” tab will be showing in red font.

          Add/Removing Activities

          In the Activities screen, the user may add or modify activities used in a work center.

          The activities must have been set up in the Production Work Centers & Activities module and be attached to the Work Center. 
           
          Find the desired Product number. Highlight the Work Center. Then enter the Activities screen.

          The "Add/Delete" button will allow the addition or deletion of activities associated with the Work Center. The activities listed on the right side will show only activities associated with the work center in the system setup.

          Make the desired selections. Depress the Done button. 

          The "Reorder" button allows the user to reorder the Work Order Traveler Setup in any order desired. Pressing this button will bring up ordering buttons on the left side of each work center in the Product Work Order Traveler Setup.

          The user may then click on any of these buttons and drag an activity to the desired order.
           
          Depress the Done button.
           
          See Article #850  to add or edit the Setup and Run Times for the Activities.
           
           
          1.6.6.4.5. Add/Remove Work Order Release Check List Items

          In this screen, the user may add or modify Work Order Release Check List items used in a Work Center.  These items are setup within the Shop Floor Default module.
           
           
          Find a Product within the Work Order Traveler Setup module.
           


          Highlight the Work Center you want to create a WO Release Check List for, then depress the Edit button and the following dialog screen will appear: 




          Select "WC Run/Setup Time" and go to the WO Release Check List tab:



          Depress the Add/Delete button and the Check List items will be displayed in the right screen.  Select or de-select the itemsto be associated with the Work Center by double clicking on them or using the "Add all" "Remove All" buttons.   

          Check list items must have been set up in the SFT Defaults module prior to being used in this module. 

          Once the WO Release Check List is complete depress the Done button.
           
          The WO Release Check List items will then be displayed in the Unreleased Work Order List for approval.
           
           
           
           
           
          1.6.6.4.6. Add/Edit Tooling Information

          Adding Tooling Information  

          The Tooling tab is used to describe the tooling requirements for the Work Center. It also provides for a location notation and an Expire Date. An example of a Check List item as discussed above might be to perform the Work Center tooling, as detailed in this tab.

           

          Find the desired Product number, enter the Tooling screen.

          Depress the "Add"  button. Select the description from the available pull down selections (originally setup within the System Setup/tooling Setup). Select the Work Center from the pull down menu, as illustrated:

           

          Type in the Location. Type in the Expire date. Depress the Done button.  The completed screen will appear as follows:

          You may Edit any of your entries after depressing the Edit button.

          To delete a line item from the Tooling Tab. Highlight the line item.  Depress the Delete button. Click on the second column (which is NOT labeled), the field will change to Black.

          Depress the Done button.

          The item will then be removed from the record. 

          1.6.6.4.7. Add Outsource Information

          The Outsource tab shows the services to be performed outside of the user’s shop. These services are indicated with an “O” in the work center tab.
           

          Highlight the Outsource Service, then go to the Outsource Tab and the following screen will appear:



          Highlight the Outsource Service. Depress the Add button for the Supplier. Select the Supplier from the pull down.  

          Then continue across the columns and enter the quantity, cost each and markup. The Charge column will automatically update. When data entry is complete, depress the Done button.
           
           

          In a future release, outsourcing will be available to create POs, receivers, etc. 

          If the "Certificate Required" box is checked, this indicates that the supplier of the outsourced service is required to provide a certificate of completion.

          Depress the "Service Footnote" to attach a footnote regarding the services for this product.

          Depress the "Outsource Note" to attach a note regarding the outsourcing for this product.

          If you want to add a Service Footnote or an Outsource note, depress the applicable button.   Depress the Edit button. Type in the note. Depress the Save button. Depress the Exit button.

          Depress the Save  button at the top of the screen to save changes, depress the Abandon changes button to abandon changes.

          1.6.6.5. Reports - WO Traveler Setup

          Depressing the Printer icon, the following selections will be available.

          All of the Job Traveler reports require that the Bar Code font be installed.  See Procedure for Installing Bar Code Font 
           
           

          Note: The Work Instruction may not appear in the Traveler if the user prints it to an Excel Worksheet file. Some of the reports are quite complex, with multiple relationships and filters. In this instance, the Work Instructions are in a different data base than the routing and therefore will not be available.

           

          Job Traveler Report

          If you select "Job Traveler", the following report will be printed: 

          Job Traveler with Work Instructions Report

          If you select  “Job Traveler With Work Instructions” , the following will be printed: 

          Job Traveler with Activities report

          If you select “Job Traveler With Activities” , the following will be printed: 

          Job Traveler with Activities & Work Instructions report

          If you select “Job Traveler With Activities & Work Instructions” , the following will be printed: 

          Job Traveler with Activities & All Instructions report

          If you select “Job Traveler With Activities & All Instructions” , the following will be printed: 

          Routing Summary report

          If you select “Routing Summary Report”, the following message will appear.

          Depress the OK button, the following will be printed:

            

           

          1.6.6.6. FAQs - WO Traveler Setup
          Facts and Questions for the WO Traveler Setup Module
          1.6.6.7. ManEx Minutes for - WO Traveler Setup
          1.6.7. Product Data Management (PDM) (OPTIONAL Module)
          1.6.7.1. Prerequisites for PDM
          Prerequisites Required For PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT:
           
          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase.   To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com\contactus.aspx

          After activation, "Product Data Management" (PDM) access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
          System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           

          Product An existing product or assembly must be established within the  Inventory Control Mgmt module to create work instructions.
          Product Work Order The part number must have a Work Order setup
          Traveler Setup

          A Work Order Traveler Setup must be established 

          Standard Specification Number

          The Standard Specification Number must have been set up in PDM Standard Process Specification .

          Optional Prerequisites for Entering a New PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT:

          Pictures

          If images are to be included in Work Instruction and Set Up Instruction view screens.

          1.6.7.2. Introduction for PDM

          The Product Data Management (PDM) Module is the place where Engineering may establish work instructions, setup instructions and/or checklists.   References to related documentation, Engineering notes, and production feedback on the product is also available. With the PDM module, the user may create both text instruction and graphical images.

           

          Once a product has been established, similar products with some or all of the same instructions can have instructions copied from the original product, then modified to suit requirements.

           

          The work instructions are available to users in the shop floor module, and users may elect to print the work instructions in the Work Order Traveler Setup traveler module. 

           

          Information entered in this module can be accessed via the Shop Floor Mgmt module.  Work Instructions, Special Instructions, Documentation, Work Center Check List and Notes are available.

          1.6.7.3. Fields & Definitions for PDM
          1.6.7.3.1. Header Information

           

          Product No  The part number of the assembly. 
          Rev The revision of the assembly.
          Description  This field will contain the Description of the assembly.  
          Selected Work Center/Activity  This area displays the work center (or activity) from which each of the action buttons below are launched. It is selected by placing the cursor (by mouse or tab) on the work center (or activity) of interest 


           

          1.6.7.3.2. Routing Tab

          ID The ID or abbreviation established for the work centers 
          Work Center The name of the work center 
          ECO Pending  This Text/characters turn RED if an ECO is Added and Saved. When the ECO is approved, this button characters turns back To gray. This criteria is based on the product number and no revision number as the ECO will change the revision number.  This feature has been added because of the importance of the users needing to know that an ECO is being initiated by the production personnel. This will help prevent product being built according to the original instructions and cut down on any additional rework or schedule delays.

           
          If this button is displayed in Red there is Related documents attached.    Depressing this button will give the users the ability to scan any related documents directly into the ManEx system and attached the document directly to the item in the ICM Module.  For further detail see Article #2396.  Once the information is loaded, the user may re-visit the Documentation in the PDM module and may also access the information from the Shop Floor Tracking Module.
           
          If Red there is information available related to the product and the work center.  User may edit or add information in this module also. 
           
          If Red, there is information available related to the product and the work center.   This field is provided as a means of recording observations and communications about the product as it is being manufactured.  User may edit or add information in this module, as well as from the Shop Floor module.  Production Feedback note is intended as one way of communication from the production floor to the engineers of the suggestions and pointing out the errors created by the engineering department.  Engineering department reading the feedback can take necessary action to correct or incorporate the information and then erase the contents of the Feedback note.  This information may be added or edited in this module as well as from the Shop Floor module.
           
          If Red, this button displays Work Instructions in text and pictorial format for operations associated with the work center.  The Work Instructions must have been established in the Product Data Management module first.  Users may load a PDF file in the Work Instructions. This allows users access to whole textbooks from within ManEx. PDF files can be drawings, images, CAD files (as printed to a plotter) and multiple pages of mixed test and graphics. Users may also print these PDF files from ManEx. 
           
          If Red, this button displays Special Instructions in text and pictorial format for setting up the work center. The Special Instructions are not printed on the travelers. The Special Instructions must have been established in the Product Data Management Module first.  
           
          If Red, this button will display any Tool/Fixture information which has been assigned to the Product through the Routing or Product Data Management (PDM) Module.  This information is then also updated to the Routing setup module. Users will be able to edit the information from both the PDM and Routing setup screens. This information will then be available within the Shop Floor Tracking module for the users to View only.
           
          If Red, this screen will display the WIP Status of all the open work orders for this product and show where the quantities are in the shop floor. 
           
          If Red, the part numbers that are assigned to that specific Work Center within the BOM module will be listed within this screen. 
           
          If Red, there is an ECO with the status of Approved within the system.   
           
          If Red, this screen will list the detailed information pulled forward from the ECO Control Management module pertaining to any approved Deviations for the selected product.  
           
          If Red, this screen will display Quality information for the Product that is displayed for the selected work center.
           

           

          1.6.7.3.3. Check List Title Screen

          This screen allows the user to establish check lists for each PRODUCT.  Note that this is a different check list than the one for Work Order which is set up in Shop Floor Tracking Defaults .   Items may be added to the check list in the edit mode.

          Check List Title Description of the Check to be Performed
          Tool/Fixture Released Check this box to release the Tool Fixture.  This box MUST be check when usiing the Unreleased Work Order List  and/or for the Tool/Fixture button to be enabled in the Shop Floor Tracking module..  

          Note: Users MUST have special rights within the Security module to check this box. Users with “supervisor’s rights” will automatically have access.  

          This box will display the date and time of when the Tool/Fixture was Released and will also display the initials of the user that checked the box
          PDM Released Check this box to release the PDM.  This box must be check when usiing the Unreleased Work Order List  

          Note: Users MUST have special rights within the Security module to check this box. Users with “supervisor’s rights” will automatically have access.  

          This box will display the date and time of when the PDM was Released and will also display the initials of the user that checked the box. 
          Pressing the ADD button opens another field in which information may be placed in the Check List.

          Pressing the DELETE button deletes the item from the Check List that the cursor is on when the delete button is pushed.

          Standard Spec No Select the Standard Specification Number from the pull down list displaying after depressing the down arrow. These are defaulted in from the PDM Standard Process Specification module.
           

          This information will be carried forward into the Shop Floor Tracking module for the highlight Work Center.


           
          1.6.7.4. How To ..... for PDM
          1.6.7.4.1. Finding A Product Data Management Record
           

           

          Enter Quality Engineering/Product Data Management (PDM)


          The following screen will appear:




          Depress the Find  Record action button.  The following Selections will appear.
           
           

           

          If the user selected to find by Product Number the following will appear:

           

          The user may find a MAKE part directly by typing in the part number in the red prompt box, or scan down the list of part numbers until the correct part is located.

           

          When the appropriate part is found, double-clicking on the part number loads the information for that part.

          If the user wishes to narrow the search for an assembly number, they may first elect to search by Part Class.

          Choosing that option will bring up a screen with part classes displayed.
           
          After selecting a part class, the search by part number screen (as described in previous paragraphs) is displayed, but showing only those part numbers contained in the part class that was selected.
           
           
           
           

           

          When the part number is located, the screen displays Work Order Traveler Setup information about the product.
           
             

          The plus (+) mark preceding work centers indicate that additional activities are included in the work center, and may be viewed by clicking on the plus sign. 

            

          1.6.7.4.2. Add Information to the PDM Module
          Find a PDM Record.
           
           
          To attach Related Documentation See Article #2396 Once the information is loaded, the user may re-visit the Documentation in the PDM module and may also access the information from the Shop Floor Tracking Module.
           
          See Article #3272 on how ManEx can help to simplify the process of identifying, tracking, and eliminating attrition and scrap. 
           
          To add Engineering Notes or Production Feedback, depress the buttons, a blank screen will appear, type in the information, and depress the Save action button to save the changes or depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes.
           
           
          To view existing Instructions or add Work Instruction or Special Instructions, depress the buttons, a screen will appear, type in the information, and depress the Save action button to save the changes or depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes.  To load PDF files depress the clipboard next to the Work Instruction or Special Instructions.  This allows the user to load and give users access to whole textbooks from within ManEx. PDF files can be drawings, images, CAD files (as printed to a plotter) and multiple pages of mixed test and graphics. Users may also print these PDF files from ManEx.    See Article #2823 for instructions on loading pdf files to the Work Instructions or Speical Instructions.
           
           
          Depress the Tool/Fixture button and this screen will appear:
          Depress the Add action button.  Select the Tool/Fixture from the pull down. 

          Enter the Location and Expiration Date.  Depress the Save action button to save the changes or depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes


           
            
          WIP Status - displays the WIP Status of all the open work orders for this product and displays where the quantities are in the shop floor.
           
           
           WC BOM -  The part numbers that are assigned to that specific Work Center within the BOM module will be listed within this screen.
           
           
          Depressing the “View Entire BOM” button will then display all parts listed on that BOM regardless of the Work Center. If there is a customer part number linked to the highlighted number in the main grid, then the Customer Part number information will be displayed.  The Reference Designators will be listed for the highlighted part number, which is pulled forward from the BOM module.  All AVL information will be displayed in the Approved Manufacturer list, and the system will show the approved AVL’s with a check mark next to it (same as in the BOM module)   Alternate Part Number section will list any Alternate part numbers that were selected within the BOM module.  

          Depress the “Inventory Status” button, the following screen will be display Available Inventory information for the highlighted part number.  EXIT will bring you back to the previous screen.

           
           
           
          Depress the “Open PO” button. The following screen will display all open Purchase Orders and their Balance Quantities for the highlighted part number.  Exit will bring you back to the previous screen. 
           

           

           ECO - All of this information is carried forward from the ECO Control Management module.  If the highlighted part number within the Part Change Information section was added as a Consigned item, then the associated Customer Part Number information will populate the field.  EXIT will bring you back to the Product Data Management module.  

           
           
          DeviationAll of this information is carried forward from the ECO Control Management module.  If the highlighted part number within the Part Change Information section was added as a Consigned item, then the associated Customer Part Number information will populate the field.  EXIT will bring you back to the Product Data Management module.
           
          Quality Info - This screen will display Quality information for the Product that is displayed for the selected work center.
           
          If the highlighted work center has had not Inspection information entered against it, then the following message will be displayed
           
          Once you depress the OK button the following screen will be displayed. You can then change the selections to view All Work Centers if need.
           
           
           
          If there has been Inspection information entered for the highlighted work center then the following screen will be displayed.  The Quality information displayed on screen will appropriately update as the user selects the desired button selections. Exit will bring you back to the Product Data Management Module.
           
           
           
          Depressing this button will display the following screen. Which is just there for reference for the users to use, just in case they do not recall what the displayed Defect Code stands for on the previous screen.
           

           

           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
          1.6.7.4.2.1. Load Document
          Depress the Clipboard next to the Work Instructions or Special Instructions Button 
           
          The following screen will appear:
           
           

          To load images or documents, depress the "Load Document" button, up in the right hand corner of the screen.  A browser screen will appear similar to this one: 

          Find and highlight the desired Image file, as illustrated.

          Once the file name appears, depress the Ok button.

          Note: that the user can also load other document types by changing the File of Type to ALL

           
          The file will appear in the screen as displayed:
           
           
          Depress the Save action button to save the changes or depress the Abandon changes action button to abandon changes.  Exit will bring the user back to the Product Data Management module.
           

          All files and images planned to be used within the Product Data Management module should be stored in a permanent directory on the server, which users will have read access to. The user will define the directory and file for each product in this module, but the information will be available elsewhere throughout the manufacturing module.

           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
          1.6.7.4.3. Setup a Checklist
          Find a PDM Record.
           
          Depress the CheckList Title tab.  The following screen will appear:
           
           
          This screen allows the user to establish check lists for a specific Work Center for a specific PRODUCT.  This checklist is for users to check if they do all the necessary task, but it does NOT enforce the user to check all items before the user can transfter to next WC.  Note:  this is a different check list than the one setup for Work Orders which is set up in Shop Floor Tracking Defaults
           
          Select the Work Center/Activity from the Pull down:
           
          Depress the Edit button.
           
          Select the Standard Specification Number from the Pull down: 
           
          These are defaulted in from the PDM Standard Process Specification module.
           
          If the specification is not listed in the pulldown, user may depress the ADD button and enter a new specification in the CheckList Title screen:
           
           
           
          Pressing the DELETE button deletes the item that the cursor is on when the delete button is pushed.
           
          While screen is in Edit mode, user may also check the Tool/Fixture Released and/or PDM Released boxes.  Note: Users MUST have special rights within the Security module to check these boxes. Users with “supervisor’s rights” will automatically have access.  These boxes must be check when usiing the Unreleased Work Order List  and the Work Center Checklist
           
           
          Depress the Save button to save changes or depress the Abandon changes button to abandon changes. The completed screen should appear as follows:
           
           
           
          This information will be carried forward into the Shop Floor Tracking module for the highlight Work Center.   NOTE:  If  there are existing Work Orders to update user MUST go to the WO Traveler screen and depress the "Update Open Work Orders" button. 
           
           
           
          1.6.7.4.4. Copy Information from another Product
          Find a PDM Record.
           
          The following screen will appear:
           
           
          Depress the Copy button, to copy a routing  and the following selection screen will appear:
          Users can select one or more of the options by highlighting them.  To continue depress the "OK" button.  
           
           
          Note:  All notes on the existing routing will be removed and/or replaced with the new notes when copying a routing.

          The following message will appear:

          Depress the OK button

          The following selection screen will appear:

          Choose to find Product by Product Number or Part Class

          If user selects by Product Number the following list will appear:

          Double click on the Product number or  or Type the Product number in the Red box:

          The following message will appear:

          Depress the OK button

          Double click on the Work Center Selection
           
           
           
          1.6.7.5. FAQ's - PDM
          Facts and Questions for the Product Data Management (PDM) Module
          1.6.8. PDM Standard Process Specification
          1.6.8.1. Prerequisites for PDM Standard Process Specifications

          ManEx’s standard module configuration allows most users to accomplish their daily tasks.  For those users wanting to get more from ManEx by leveraging the total solutions, this is one of the optional modules available for purchase.  
          To place an order or to learn more about this specific module or any of the other optional modules please contact us at http://manex.com\contactus.aspx


          After activation, "Standard Process Specifications" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
           
           
          Work Centers  Work Centers must have been established in Production Work Centers & Activities


          1.6.8.2. Introduction for PDM Standard Process Specification

          The PDM Standard Process Specification Module is the place where Engineering may establish process specifications. Text and pictures may be included in detailing the specifications.  Standard specifications relating to the Work Center can be accessed in the PDM and  Shop Floor Tracking Mgmt module.

          1.6.8.3. Fields & Definitions for PDM Standard Process Specifications
           
          Spec Description
          Standard Process Specification Description.
          Work Center
          The Work Center the Standard Process Specification Applies to.
          Depressing this button will allow you to edit or add text to the Standard Process Specification.  This button will be Red if there is Text or Memo that applies to the Standard Process Specification Highlighted.
          Depressing this button will allow you to edit or add text to the Standard Process Specification.  This button will be Red if there is a Document attached that applies to the Standard Process Specification Highlighted.

          1.6.8.4. How To ...... for PDM Standard Process Specifications
          1.6.8.4.1. Add a PDM Standard Procress Specification
          Enter the Quality/Engineering/ PDM Standard Process Specification 

          The following screen will be displayed:
           
           

          Depress the Add  Record button.  You’ll be prompted for your password. Type in the Specification Description.

          Select the Work Center by depressing the down arrow:

          To add Text/Memo depress the "Standard Spec (Text.Memo)" button and the following screen will appear:
           
          Type in the notes, depress the Save button to save notes or the Abandon changes button to abandon the changes.
           
          Depress the Exit button to return to the Standard Process Specification module.
           
          To load images or documents, depress the "Standard Spec (Document)" button.  The following screen will appear:



          Depress the "Load Document" button, a browser screen will appear:
           
          Find and highlight the desired Image file, as illustrated.

          Once the file name appears, depress the Ok button.
           
          Note:  The user can also load other document types by changing the File of Type to ALL. 


          The file will appear: 
           
           

          Depress the Save button to save the changes or depress the Abandon changes to abaondon the changes.  Depress the Exit button will bring yor back to the Standard Process Specification. module.

          All files and images planned to be used within the ManEx system should be stored in a permanent directory on the server, which users will have read access to. The user will define the directory
          and file for each product in this module, but the information will be available elsewhere throughout the manufacturing module.
           
          The complete screen will look like this.  
           
           
           
          Note:  The Standard Spec buttons are now being displayed in Red. 
           
          User may add more standard process specifications, edit or delete existing specifications or exit.
           
          The PDM Standard Process Specifications can then be selected within the PDM module to be viewed within the Shop Floor Tracking module .
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
          1.6.8.4.2. Edit a PDM Standard Process Specification
          Enter Quality/Engineering/PDM Standard Process Specification
           
          The following screen will appear:
           
           
           
           
          Highlight the Specification user wants to edit.  Depress the Edit button. 
           
           
           
          User may change the Work Center, edit the Standard Spec (Text/Memo) or (Document).
           
          Once the changes have been completed, depress the Save button to save the changes or depress the Abandon changes button to abandon the changes.
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
          1.6.8.4.3. Delete a PDM Standard Process Specification
          Enter Quality/Engineering/PDM Standard Process Specification
           
          The following screen will appear:
           
           
           
           
          Highlight the Specification user wants to delete.  Depress the Delete button, enter password. 
           
          The following message will appear:
           
           
           
           
          It will be defaulted to No.  Depress the Yes to continue the Deleting and No to abandon without deleting the specification. 
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
          1.7. Administration
          1.7.1. Invoice Management
          1.7.1.1. Prerequisties for Invoice Mgmt

          After activation, "Invoice" access for each user must be setup in the ManEx
          System Security module.  Users with “Supervisor Rights” will automatically have access.
            

          A Packing List

          The Invoice must refer to a Packing List, which includes the part numbers and description of the material being shipped, as well as the Bill-to and Ship-to information, terms and conditions.

          Invoice Numbering

          The Number System Setup must be defined for either automatic or manual Invoice numbers.

          1.7.1.2. Introduction for Invoice Mgmt

          The Invoice Module is used to create Accounts Receivable for the details of shipments to customers. The Invoice is created when the user has completed AND PRINTED a Packing List.

          1.7.1.3. Fields & Definitions for Invoice Mgmt
          1.7.1.3.1. Invoice Tab

           

          Invoice Tab Field Definitions

          Invoice No

          The number assigned to the invoice.

          Invoice Date

          The date of the invoice.

          P/L No

          The number assigned to the packing list.

          Ship Date

          The date of shipment per the Packing List.

          Sales Order

          The number of the Sales Order.

          Order Date

          The date of the Sales Order.

          Purchase Order The number of the Customer’s Purchase Order.
          Bill To 

          The address where to Invoice will be sent.

          Ship To 

          The address where the shipment was sent.

          Invoice Terms 

          The payment terms offered to the Customer by the user. 

          FOB

          The point at which title to the goods passed.

          Ship Via

          The name of the shipment freight carrier.

          Waybill

          The number of the waybill for the shipment.

          Entered by

          The initials of the user.

          1.7.1.3.2. Detail Tab

          Detail Tab Field Definitions

           Customer

          This is the name of the customer as defined in Customer Setup.

           Invoice Number

          This is the invoice number assigned during the Packing List operation.

          Invoice Summary Section

          Ln

          This is the line number corresponding to the lines added during Sales Order addition.

          Part Number

          This is the part number ordered, then shipped.

          Rev

          This is the Revision number of the Part.

          Class

          This is the Part Classification.

          Type This is the Part Type within the classification.
          Description

          This is the description of the part number.

          UofM

          This is the unit of measure used for this part.

          Invoice Detail Section

          Description 

          This is the description of the part number.

          Quantity

          This is the quantity of the item shipped.

          Price

          This is the price of the item for the unit of measure listed.

          Extended

          This is the extension of the quantity multiplied by the price.

          Taxable

          This box is whether or not the item is subject to sales tax.

          Flat

          This box determines whether the pricing is a flat amount and not based upon a unit per arrangement.

            This action will change the pricing to agree with the current sales order.  Example:  Suppose an Invoice is created from a SO with a price of $50.00.  Then the SO pricing is changed from $50.00 to $52.00. Depressing the "Update Current SO Price" button would change the pricing on the invoice from $50.00 to $52.00 to match the current SO pricing. 

          Invoice Summary Section

          Invoice Total Discount

          This is the net total AFTER subtracting any applicable Sales Discount.

          Sub Total

          This is the extended or flat pricing.

          Tax

          This is the amount of applicable Sales Tax.

          Freight Charge

          This is the amount of the freight charge per the packing list.

          Freight Tax

          This is any applicable Sales Tax applied to the Freight Charge.

          Invoice Total

          This is the grand total of the invoice, covering extended or flat pricing, sales tax on the product shipped, freight charges and sales tax applied to freight charges.

          1.7.1.3.3. Notes Tab

           

          Sales Order Note   Enter any information you would like displayed on the Sales Order.
          Invoice Footnote  Enter any information you would like printed on the bottom of the Invoice.

          1.7.1.4. How To ..... for Invoice Mgmt
          1.7.1.4.1. Find an Invoice

          Enter Administration/Invoice Module  

          The following screen will appear:

          Pressing the Find Action Button displays the following screen:

           Invoice # will require the user to enter in the invoice number desired into the field. Depress the “GO” button and the record will be pulled forward.

          Selecting the Un-Posted radial will bring up the following selections.

          The user will then need to select Sales Order, Customer, or All.

          If user selects Sales Order, or Customer, then you must enter a Sales Order number or Customer Name in the Red Box.

          If user selects All and depresses the "GO" button the following information will be listed:

          Selected the desired Invoice, by double-clicking on the listed record and the record will be pulled forward.

          Selecting the Invoice Date Range radial will bring up the following selections and fields.

           

          Enter in the Sales Order number or Customer (depends on your selection) then select the desired date range.

          Enter All, then depress the “GO” Button and the following information will be listed.  This find will bring up both Posted and Un-posted Invoice records.

          Selected the desired Invoice, by double-clicking on the listed record and the record will be pulled forward.

          Selecting the Packing List radial will require the user to enter in the desired Packing List number. Depress the “GO” button and the record will be pulled forward.

          Selecting the Posted Radial will bring up the following screen:   

          The user will then need to select Sales Order, Customer, or All.

          If user selects Sales Order, or Customer, then you must enter a Sales Order number or Customer Name in the Red Box.

          If user selects All and depresses the "GO" button the following information will be listed:

           

          Selected the desired Invoice, by double-clicking on the listed record and the record will be pulled forward.

           

          Selecting the All will bring up the following screen:  

           

          The user will then need to select Sales Order, Customer, or All.

          If user selects Sales Order, or Customer, then you must enter a Sales Order number or Customer Name in the Red Box.

          If user selects All and depresses the "GO" button the following information will be listed:

          Selected the desired Invoice, by double-clicking on the listed record and the record will be pulled forward.

           

          1.7.1.4.2. Edit an Invoice

          After pressing the Find Action Button the Edit button is available to modify certain fields on an un-posted invoice.   Note:  As soon as the Invoice is printed either via this screen or via the Reports button, it is considered to be “Posted” and therefore can’t be changed, even if it’s just printed to the screen or file output.
             Also, once the invoice is posted the packing list is no longer editable either.

          Once the desired Un-posted Invoice Record has been found, the screen will be populated as follows:

           

          In the Invoice screen, the changeable fields are limited to the Invoice date, the Bill to Customer, and the Invoice Terms.

          Enter into the Detail screen:

           

          In the Detail screen, the changeable fields are limited to the Price, Taxable box and Freight Charge.

          Enter into the Notes screen, and here the user may add Sales Order Note, or Invoice Footnote. 

          Because the Packing List has already been Posted and is usually on its way to the customer, other items within this module can not be modified.

          Depress the Save record icon.  The following options will appear.

          If the user selects the “Save & Print Invoice,” the invoice WILL BE posted and printed to the Default Printer. The appropriate accounting entry will be created and will forward into the Accounting Module.

          If the User Selects the “Save to Batch & Do Not Print Invoice.”  The invoice WILL NOT post and will be forward to the Invoice Batch to be printed/posted at a later time.

           

          1.7.1.4.3. Create a Manual Invoice

          Note:    A manual invoice is NOT created in this module.  Instead, it’s created in the Packing List module as a Stand-Alone Packing List.

          1.7.1.4.4. E-mail Invoice(s)
          To e-mail an Invoice report(s), depress the Reports button.  

          Note:  You MUST have the e-mail setup within the Trigger.exe setup and working before the PO e-mail will work.   

          The reports screen will appear:

          Select the output XL File, TXT File, or PDF by clicking on the radial.

          Check the Email box located int he left hand corner of the Reports Tab.  

          Highlight the report you want to Email.

          Depress the option tab.

           
           

          Complete the Option tab with the information required:  Note:  User has the option to check the Email box on the Options screen also.

           

          Depress OK.  The following screen will appear.  Select or Enter File Name. 

           

          Depress Save, the following Check Email Addresses screen will appear.  Within this screen you can enter an e-mail address (this e-mail address has to be listed in the Customer Information module) or add any special notes needed:

          Depress OK and documents will be sent to e-mail addresses assigned. 

          The following is what the receiver will receive:

           

          1.7.1.5. Reports - Invoice Mgmt

          To obtain the Invoice reports, depress the Reports button.  The reports screen will appear:

          Select the output you desire by clicking on the radial. Choose from Screen, Printer, XL File, TXT File, or PDF.

          Highlight the report.

          Depress the option tab.

           
           

          Invoice Report
           
           

          Some of the radial options/info is defaulted from the Print Packing List/Invoice Setup.   The Use PrePrinted Form, Use Laser Form, and # of copies can  be edited at this time. 

          Select between Printing with the internal part number or printing using the customer reference number, or with both. Select the invoice type, either Unprinted Invoice, Single Invoice, or Reprint Last Batch. The appropriate records will populate the selection box.  Check the box if you would like the report to display Invoices with zero amount.  Select how you would like the Invoice list Sorted by:  Invoice, Packing List, Sales Order, Customer, or Inv Date.  Highlight the invoice you want to print and depress the > button.If you want all of the invoices printed, depress the >> button.

          Depress OK button.  The following report will be displayed:
           
          Invoice with Foreign Tax being displayed:
           
           
           
          Note:  (RMA) will appear next to the Sales Order No. if the Invoice is being printed from an RMA order.  



          Invoice Summary Report by Date

          Enter in the desired Date Range

          Depress the OK Button.

           


          The following report will be displayed

          Invoice Register Report

          Enter the desired Date Range.

          Depress the OK Button.

          This report displays the Posted invoice total for the selected time period.

           

          The following report will be displayed

          Un-Invoiced Shipment Summary by Date Report

          Enter the desired Date Range.

          Depress the OK Button.
           
          This report will list all Invoices that have NOT been Posted (Printed)
           
           

          The following report will be displayed

          Un-invoiced Shipment Summary All Report

          Depress the OK button.

          The following report will be displayed:

          Invoice Summary Report by Date

          Enter the desired Date Range.

          Depress the OK Button.

           

          The following report will be displayed

          Net Sales Summary in Percentage by Customer Report

          Enter the desired Date Range.

          Depress the OK Button.

          This report displays the (Posted invoice total - freight amount - tax - freight tax) - (Posted credit memo total - freight amount - tax - freight tax) for the selected time period.

           
           

          The following report will be displayed

          Gross Sales Summary in Percentage by Customer Report

          Enter the desired Date Range.

          Depress the OK Button.

          This report displays the Posted invoice total - freight amount - tax - freight tax for the selected time period.

           
           

          The following Report will be displayed

          Credit on Sales Summary In Percentage by Customer Report

          Enter the desired Date Range.

          Depress the OK Button.

          This report displays the (Posted Credit memo total - freight amount - tax - freight tax for the selected time period) and a Total Sales amount (Posted invoice total - freight amount - tax - freight tax for selected time period)

           

          The following report will be displayed

          Sales Tax Only Invoice Report

          Enter the desired Invoice Number.

          Depress the OK Button.

           

          The following report will be displayed

          1.7.1.6. FAQs - Invoice Mgmt
          Facts and Questions for the Invoicing Module
          1.8. eManEx
          1.8.1. Installation Manual
          1.8.2. ManEx Minutes
          1.9. ManEx Minutes for All Modules